· 2021. 5. 3. · 707 SW WASHINGTON STREET, SUITE 500 • PORTLAND, OREGON 97205 • P. 503.227.1885 • F. 503.227.1747 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/OR/Clean Water Services/11487A10

707 SW WASHINGTON STREET, SUITE 500 • PORTLAND, OREGON 97205 • P. 503.227.1885 • F. 503.227.1747 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/OR/Clean Water Services/11487A10/Specifications/0 - 00001_Cvr.docx

CLEAN WATER SERVICES

FOREST GROVE WATER RESOURCE AND RECOVERY FACILITY

EFFLUENT PUMP STATION AND ULTRAVIOLET DISINFECTION IMPROVEMENT

PROJECT NO. 6792

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

DIVISIONS 9 THROUGH 17

VOLUME 2 OF 4

BID DOCUMENTS

April 2021




PROJECT NO. 6792


ENGINEER CERTIFICATION

The technical material and data contained in this document were prepared under the supervision and direction of the undersigned, whose seals, as professional engineers/architects licensed to practice as such, are affixed below.

DAN E. LAFFITTE

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, CIVIL, EQUIPMENT, AND MECHANICAL

JAMES A. DOERING

STRUCTURAL

JAMSHID E. DORAFSHA

ELECTRICAL

BRETT A. LEE

INSTRUMENTATION

Digitally signed by Dan E. LaffitteContact Info: Carollo Engineers, IncDate: 2021.04.15 18:28:44-07'00'

Digitally signed by James A. DoeringContact Info: Carollo Engineers, Inc.Date: 2021.04.16 08:33:38-07'00'

Digitally signed by Jamshid E. DorafshaContact Info: Carollo Engineers, Inc.Date: 2021.04.16 08:41:05-07'00'

Digitally signed by Brett A. LeeContact Info: Carollo Engineers, Inc.Date: 2021.04.16 07:56:42-06'00'

CLEAN WATER SERVICES FOREST GROVE WATER RESOURCE AND RECOVERY FACILITY

EFFLUENT PUMP STATION AND ULTRAVIOLET DISINFECTION IMPROVEMENT PROJECT NO. 6792


ENGINEER CERTIFICATION

The technical material and data contained in this document were prepared under the supervision and direction of the undersigned, whose seals, as professional engineers/architects licensed to practice as such, are affixed below.

JOHN R. FLYNN ARCHITECTURAL

MATTHEW L. ZANDERVANDEN STRUCTURAL CANOPY

Table of Contents 00010_TOC-1 11487A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/OR/Clean Water Services/11487A10/Specifications/00010_TOC (Bidset) April 2021 - BID




PROJECT NO. 6792

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS – BID DOCUMENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION NO. TITLE

VOLUME 1 OF 4 DIVISION 0 – CLEAN WATER SERVICES DOCUMENTS

00030 ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS

00100 INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS

00300 BID FORMS

00500 AGREEMENT

00610 PERFORMANCE BOND

00615 PAYMENT BOND

00700 GENERAL CONDITIONS

00800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS

00810 OREGON PREVAILING WAGE RATES

DIVISION 1 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01012 PARTNERING

01110 SUMMARY OF WORK

01140 WORK RESTRICTIONS AND SEQUENCING

01292 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

01320 WEB-BASED CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT

01324 CRITICAL PATH METHOD (CPM) CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

01329 SAFETY PLAN

01330 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

01352 ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES


SECTION NO. TITLE 01410 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

01450 QUALITY CONTROL

01455 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS, OBSERVATIONS, AND TESTING

01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

01505 MOBILIZATION AND DEMOBILIZATION

01518 TEMPORARY BYPASS PUMPING AND PIPING PLAN

01530 PROTECTION OF EXISTING FACILITIES

01532 SITE CONDITIONS SURVEYS

01555 SITE ACCESS AND STORAGE

01560 TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS

01570 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL

01600 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

01610 PROJECT DESIGN CRITERIA

01612 SEISMIC DESIGN CRITERIA

01614 WIND DESIGN CRITERIA

01640 MANUFACTURERS’ SERVICES & TRAINING

01732 CUTTING AND PATCHING

01756 TESTING AND FACILITY STARTUP

01757 DISINFECTION

01759 WATER LEAKAGE TEST FOR CONCRETE STRUCTURES

01770 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

01782 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

DIVISION 2 - SITE CONSTRUCTION

02050 SOILS AND AGGREGATES FOR EARTHWORK

02084 PRECAST DRAINAGE STRUCTURES

02200 SITE CLEARING

02240 DEWATERING


SECTION NO. TITLE 02260 EXCAVATION SUPPORT AND PROTECTION

02300 EARTHWORK

02312 CONTROLLED LOW STRENGTH MATERIAL (CLSM)

02318 TRENCHING

02466B AUGERCAST PILES

02621 STABILIZATION FABRIC

02714 SLIPLINING WITH HDPE PIPE

02742 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING

02762 PAVEMENT MARKINGS

02772 CONCRETE CURBS, GUTTERS, AND SIDEWALKS

02823 DECORATIVE METAL FENCES AND GATES

02875 SITE FURNISHINGS

02952 PAVEMENT RESTORATION AND REHABILITATION

DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE

03055 ADHESIVE-BONDED REINFORCING BARS AND ALL THREAD RODS IN CONCRETE

03071 EPOXIES

03072 EPOXY RESIN/PORTLAND CEMENT BONDING AGENT

03102 CONCRETE FORMWORK

03150 CONCRETE ACCESSORIES

03154 HYDROPHILIC RUBBER WATERSTOP

03200 CONCRETE REINFORCING

03300 CAST-IN-PLACE-CONCRETE

03366 TOOLED CONCRETE FINISHING

03600 GROUTING

03931 EPOXY INJECTION SYSTEM

03933 HYDROPHILIC AND HYDROPHOBIC FOAM POLYURETHANE RESIN INJECTION SYSTEM


SECTION NO. TITLE DIVISION 4 - MASONRY

04055 ADHESIVE BONDING REINFORCING BARS AND ALL THREAD RODS IN MASONRY

04090 MASONRY ACCESSORIES

DIVISION 5 - METALS

05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL

05190 MECHANICAL ANCHORING AND FASTENING TO CONCRETE AND MASONRY

05500 METAL FABRICATIONS

05590 METAL SPECIALTIES

DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

07110 DAMPPROOFING

07620 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

07900 JOINT SEALANTS

DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS

08320 FLOOR ACCESS DOORS

VOLUME 2 OF 4

DIVISION 9 - FINISHES

09960 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS

09997 PIPELINE COATINGS AND LININGS

DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT

11216 PACKAGED WATER PRESSURE BOOSTER SYSTEM

11289 ULTRAVIOLET DISINFECTION SYSTEM

11312G SUBMERSIBLE LARGE CAPACITY CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS


SECTION NO. TITLE 11312H SUBMERSIBLE CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS

DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

13446 MANUAL ACTUATORS

13447 ELECTRIC ACTUATORS

DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL

15050 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT

15052 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR GENERAL PIPING - PLANT

15061 PIPE SUPPORTS

15062 PREFORMED CHANNEL PIPE SUPPORT SYSTEM

15075 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

15076 PIPE IDENTIFICATION

15110 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR VALVES

15111 BALL VALVES

15114 CHECK VALVES

15115 GATE VALVES

15116 PLUG VALVES

15117 SPECIALTY VALVES

15119 AIR AND VACUUM RELIEF VALVES

15120 PIPING SPECIALTIES

15121 PIPE COUPLINGS

15125 STRAINERS

15211 DUCTILE IRON PIPE: AWWA C151 - PLANT

15230 PLASTIC PIPING AND TUBING

15241 HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) PIPE: AWWA C906

15244 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE: AWWA C900 AND AWWA C905

15249 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE: SCHEDULE TYPE


SECTION NO. TITLE 15278 STEEL PIPE

15400 PLUMBING SYSTEMS

15956 PIPING SYSTEMS TESTING

15958 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT TESTING

DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL

16050 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL

16060 GROUNDING AND BONDING

16070 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

16075 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION

16123 600 VOLT OR LESS WIRES AND CABLES

16130 CONDUITS

16133 DUCT BANKS

16134 BOXES

16150 LOW VOLTAGE WIRE CONNECTIONS

16222 LOW VOLTAGE MOTORS UP TO 500 HORSEPOWER

16263 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES 0.50 – 100 HORSEPOWER

16411 DISCONNECT SWITCHES

16412 LOW VOLTAGE MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

16422 MOTOR STARTERS

16510 LIGHTING: LED LUMINAIRES

16950 FIELD ELECTRICAL ACCEPTANCE TESTS

DIVISION 17 - INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS

17050 BASIC MEASUREMENT AND CONTROL INSTRUMENTATION MATERIALS AND METHODS

17101 CONTROL LOOP DESCRIPTIONS

17203 LEVEL MEASUREMENT: SUBMERSIBLE

17302 FLOW MEASUREMENT: MAGNETIC FLOWMETERS


SECTION NO. TITLE 17401 PRESSURE/VACUUM MEASUREMENT: DIAPHRAGM AND ANNULAR

SEALS

17402 PRESSURE/VACUUM MEASUREMENT: INSTRUMENT VALVES

17404 PRESSURE/VACUUM MEASUREMENT: GAUGES

17509 ANALYZERS: TURBIDITY

17710 CONTROL SYSTEMS: PANELS, ENCLOSURES, AND PANEL COMPONENTS

17903 SCHEDULES: I/O LIST

VOLUME 4 OF 4

EXHIBITS

EXHIBIT A UV DISINFECTION EQUIPMENT PREPROCUREMENT AGREEMENT

EXHIBIT B UV DISINFECTION EQUIPMENT PREPROCUREMENT SUBMITTAL

EXHIBIT C GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REPORT

High-Performance Coatings 09960-1 11487A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/OR/Clean Water Services/11487A10/Specifications/09960 (Bidset) April 2021 - BID

SECTION 09960

HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: Coatings, including coating systems, surface preparation, application requirements, and quality control requirements.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. D16 - Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and

Applications. 2. D2200 – Standard Practice for Use of Pictorial Surface Preparation Standards

and Guides for Painting Steel Surfaces. 3. D3359 - Standard Test Methods for Rating Adhesion by Tape Test. 4. D3960 - Standard Practice for Determining Volatile Organic Compound (VOC)

Content of Paints and Related Coatings. 5. D4262 - Standard Test Method for pH of Chemically Cleaned or Etched

Concrete Surfaces. 6. D4263 - Standard Test Method for Indicating Moisture in Concrete by the

Plastic Sheet Method. 7. D4285 - Standard Test Method for Indicating Oil or Water in Compressed Air. 8. D4414 - Standard Practice for Measurement of Wet Film Thickness by Notch

Gages. 9. D4417 - Standard Test Methods for Field Measurement of Surface Profile of

Blast-Cleaned Steel. 10. D4541 - Standard Test Methods for Pull-Off Strength of Coatings Using

Portable Adhesion Testers. 11. D4787 - Standard Practice for Continuity Verification of Liquid or Sheet Linings

Applied to Concrete Substrates. 12. D5162 - Standard Practice for Discontinuity (Holiday) Testing of

Nonconductive Protective Coating on Metallic Substrates. 13. D7234 - Standard Test Method for Pull-Off Adhesion Strength of Coatings on

Concrete Using Portable Pull-Off Adhesion Testers. 14. E337 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Humidity with a Psychrometer

(the Measurement of Wet- and Dry-Bulb Temperatures). 15. F1869 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate

of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride. 16. F2170 - Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete

Floor Slabs Using In-situ Probes.

B. International Concrete Repair Institute (ICRI): 1. 310.2 - Guideline for Selecting and Specifying Concrete Surface Preparation

for Sealers, Coatings, Polymer Overlays, and Concrete Repair.


C. NACE International (NACE): 1. SP0178 - Design, Fabrication, and Surface Finish Practices for Tanks and

Vessels to Be Lined for Immersion Service. 2. SP0188 - Discontinuity (Holiday) Testing of New Protective Coatings on

Conductive Substrates.

D. National Association of Pipe Fabricators (NAPF): 1. 500-03 - Surface Preparation Standard for Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings in

Exposed Locations Receiving Special External Coatings and/or Special Internal Linings.

E. NSF International (NSF): 1. 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects.

F. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA).

G. Society of Protective Coatings (SSPC): 1. Glossary - SSPC Protective Coatings Glossary. 2. Guide 6 - Guide for Containing Surface Preparation Debris Generated during

Paint Removal Operations. 3. Guide 15 - Field Methods for Retrieval and Analysis of Soluble Salts on Steel

and Other Nonporous Substrates. 4. PA 1 - Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel. 5. PA 2 - Procedure for Determining Conformance to Dry Coating Thickness

Requirements. 6. PA 9 - Measurement of Dry Coating Thickness Using Ultrasonic Gages. 7. QP 1 - Standard Procedure for Evaluating the Qualifications of

Industrial/Marine Painting Contractors. 8. SP 1 - Solvent Cleaning. 9. SP 3 - Power Tool Cleaning. 10. SP 5 - White Metal Blast Cleaning. 11. SP 10 - Near-White Metal Blast Cleaning. 12. SP 11 – Power Tools Cleaning to Bare Metal. 13. SP 13 - Surface Preparation of Concrete. 14. SP 16 - Brush-Off Blast Cleaning of Coated and Uncoated Galvanized Steel,

Stainless Steels, and Non-Ferrous Metals. 15. SP COM - Surface Preparation Commentary. 16. SP VIS 1 - Guide and Reference Photographs for Steel Surfaces Prepared by

Dry Abrasive Blast Cleaning. 17. SP WJ-1 - Waterjet Cleaning of Metals -- Clean to Bare Substrate. 18. SP WJ-2 - Waterjet Cleaning of Metals -- Very Thorough Cleaning. 19. SP WJ-3 - Waterjet Cleaning of Metals -- Thorough Cleaning. 20. SP WJ-4 - Waterjet Cleaning of Metals -- Light Cleaning.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Definitions used in this Section are in accordance with definitions referenced in ASTM D16, ASTM D3960, and SSPC Glossary of Definitions.

B. Specific definitions: 1. Abrasive: Material used for blast cleaning, such as sand, grit, or shot. 2. Abrasive Blast Cleaning: Cleaning/surface preparation by abrasive propelled

at high speed.


3. Anchor Pattern: Profile or texture of prepared surface(s). 4. Biogenic Sulfide Corrosion: Corrosion caused by sulfuric acid formed when

Thiobacillus bacteria metabolizes hydrogen sulfide. 5. Bug Holes: Small cavities resulting when air bubbles are entrapped in the

surface of formed concrete during placement and consolidation. 6. System: Protective film with 1 or more coats applied in a predetermined order,

including surface preparation and quality control requirements. 7. Coating/Paint/Lining Thickness: Total thickness of primer, intermediate, and/or

finish coats after drying or curing. 8. Dew point: Temperature a given air/water vapor mixture starts to condense. 9. Drying Time: Time interval between application and material curing. 10. Dry to Recoat: Time interval between material application and its ability to

receive the next coat. 11. Dry to Touch: Time interval between material application and its ability to

tolerate a light ouch without coating damage. 12. Exposed Surface: Any indoor or outdoor surface not buried or encased. 13. Feather Edging: Reducing coating thickness at its edge to blend with existing

surrounding coating. 14. Feathering: Tapering off a wet edge with a comparatively dry brush. 15. Ferrous: Cast iron, ductile iron, wrought iron, and all steel alloys except

stainless steel. 16. Field Coat: Application of a surface coating system at the work site. 17. Finish Coat: Final coat in a paint system, including texture, color, smoothness

of surface, and other properties affecting appearance. 18. Hold Point: A defined point, specified in this Section, at which work shall be

halted for inspection. 19. Holiday: A discontinuity, skip, void, or pinhole in coating or coating system film

that exposes the substrate. 20. Honeycomb: Segregated and porous surface of hardened concrete due to

insufficient consolidation. 21. Hydroblast: High or ultra-high pressure water jet surface preparation. 22. Incompatibility: One coating's inability to overlay another coating or surface as

evidenced by bleeding, poor bonding, or lifting of old coating; inability of a coating to bond to a substrate.

23. Immersed/Immersion: A service condition in which substrate is submerged, is immediately above liquids, or is subject to frequent wetting, splashing, or washdown.

24. Laitance: A thin, weak, brittle layer of cement and aggregate fines on a concrete surface.

25. Mil: 0.001 inch. 26. Overspray: Dry spray, particularly paint bonded to an unintended surface. 27. Pinhole: A small diameter discontinuity in a coating or coating system film,

created by offgassing from a void in a concrete or masonry substrate causing a void between coats or exposing the substrate. Usually caused by coating application while temperature is rising.

28. Pot Life: Time interval after components are mixed and coating can be satisfactorily applied.

29. Prime Coat: First full paint coat applied to a surface when using a multicoat system. Primers adhere to a new substrate, protect the substrate, and promote adhesion of subsequent coats of paint. The prime coat on metal surfaces is the first full coat and does not include solvent wash, grease emulsifiers, or other pretreatment applications.


30. Resurfacer/Resurfacing Material: A layer of cementitious and/or resin-based material used to fill or otherwise restore surface continuity to worn or damaged concrete surfaces.

31. Shelf Life: Maximum storage time a material may be stored without losing its usefulness.

32. Shop Coat: 1 or more coats applied in an off-site shop or plant before shipment to work site where field or finishing coat(s) are applied.

33. Spreading Rate: Area covered by a unit volume of paint at a specific thickness. 34. Stripe Coat: A separate brush coat of paint applied to all weld seams, pits,

nuts/bolts/washers, and edges. This coat shall not be applied until previous coats have cured. Once applied, the coat shall be allowed to cure before subsequent coats are applied.

35. Tie Coat: An intermediate coat that bonds different types of paint material, improving succeeding coat adhesion.

36. Thick Film Coating System: A coating system applied with a minimum dry film thickness of 25 mils.

37. Touch-Up Painting: Application of paint on previously painted surfaces to repair marks, scratches, and deteriorated or damaged areas to restore the appearance and performance of the coating.

38. Water Blast: An alternative to air abrasive blast cleaning that can be used with or without abrasive injection. Water cleaning at pressures up to 5,000 pounds per square inch is called low-pressure water cleaning or power washing. High-pressure water cleaning uses water pressures between 5,000 and 10,000 pounds per square inch. Water jetting is water blasting with added abrasive at pressures between 10,000 and 25,000 pounds per square inch. Ultra-high-pressure water jetting is water blasting at pressures above 25,000 pounds per square inch.

39. Weld Splatter: Beads of non-structural weld metal that adhere to the surrounding surface, removed as part of surface preparation.

1.04 ABBREVIATIONS

A. CSM - Coating System Manufacturer.

B. CMU - Concrete Masonry Units.

C. CSA - Coating System Applicator. Specialty subcontractor retained by the Contractor to install the coating systems specified in this Section.

D. CTR - Coating System Manufacturer's Technical Representative.

E. DFT - Dry-Film Thickness. Thickness of cured film, usually expressed in mils (0.001 inch).

F. SSD - Surface Saturated Dry. Refers to concrete surface condition where the surface is saturated (damp) without the presence of standing water.

G. TPC - Technical Practice Committee.

H. VOC - Volatile Organic Compound. Portion of the coating that is a compound of carbon, is photochemically reactive, and evaporates during drying or curing; expressed in grams per liter (g/l) or pounds per gallon (lb/gal). VOC is determined by EPA Method 24.


I. WFT - Wet Film Thickness. Coating thickness as measured immediately after application. Usually expressed in mils (0.001 inch).

1.05 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coating materials shall be formulated for environments encountered in water and wastewater treatment processes.

B. Coating materials that come in contact with water distributed as potable water shall be certified in accordance with NSF 61.

1.06 SUBMITTALS

A. As specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures, submit the following: 1. Schedule of proposed coating materials. 2. Schedule of surfaces to be coated with each coating material. 3. Dehumidification and heating plan. 4. Product data:

a. Physical properties of coatings, including the following: 1) Solids content. 2) Ingredient analysis. 3) VOC content. 4) Temperature resistance. 5) Typical exposures and limitations. 6) Manufacturer's standard color chips.

b. Compliance with regulatory requirements: 1) VOC limitations. 2) Lead compounds and polychlorinated biphenyls. 3) Abrasives and abrasive blast cleaning techniques and disposal. 4) Methods for tenting blasting areas and methods to protect existing

equipment from dust and debris. 5) NSF certification of coatings for potable water supply systems.

c. CSM's current printed recommendations and product data sheets for coating systems, including: 1) Surface preparation recommendations. 2) Primer type. 3) Maximum dry and wet-mil thickness per coat and number of coats.

a) Coating Coverage Worksheets. 4) Minimum and maximum curing time between coats, including

atmospheric conditions for each. 5) Curing time before submergence in liquid. 6) Thinner to be used for each coating. 7) Ventilation requirements. 8) Minimum and maximum atmospheric conditions during which the

paint shall be applied. 9) Allowable application methods. 10) Maximum allowable substrate moisture content. 11) Maximum shelf life. 12) Requirements for transportation and storage. 13) Mixing instructions. 14) Shelf life. 15) Material Pot life.


16) Precautions for applications free of defects. 17) Method of application. 18) Drying time of each coat, including prime coat. 19) Compatible prime coats. 20) Limits of ambient conditions during and after application. 21) Required protection from sun, wind, and other conditions. 22) Touch-up requirements and limitations. 23) Minimum adhesion of each system submitted in accordance with

ASTM D4541 and ASTM D7234. d. Samples: Include 8-inch square drawdowns or brushouts of topcoat finish

when requested. Identify each sample as to finish, formula, color name and number, sheen name, and gloss units.

e. Affidavits signed by an officer of the CSM’s corporation attesting to full compliance of each coating system component with current federal, state, and local air pollution control regulations and requirements.

f. List of cleaning and thinner solutions allowed by the CSMs. g. Storage requirements, including temperature, humidity, and ventilation for

Coating System Materials as recommended by the CSMs. h. Thick film coating systems (greater than 25 mils):

1) CSM's detailed written instructions for coating system treatment and graphic details for coating system terminations in coated structures, including pipe penetrations, metal embedments, gate frames, and other terminations encountered.

2) Include detail treatment for coating system at concrete joints. 3) Manufacturer's Representative’s (CTR) Field Reports.

5. Quality assurance submittals: a. Quality assurance plan. b. Qualifications of CSA, including:

1) List of Similar Projects. a) Name and address of project. b) Year of installation. c) Year placed in operation. d) Point of contact: Name and phone number.

2) Provide a minimum of 5 project references, each including contact name, address, and telephone number where similar coating work has been performed by their company in the past 5 years.

c. CSA Reports: 1) Written daily quality control inspection reports.

d. CTR Reports: 1) Reports on visits to project site to view and approve surface

preparation of structures to be coated. 2) Reports on visits to project site to observe and approve coating

application procedures. 3) Reports on visits to coating plants to observe and approve surface

preparation and coating application on shop-coated items.

1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. CSA qualifications: 1. Minimum of 5 years of experience applying specified type or types of coatings

under conditions similar to those of the Work:


a. Provide qualifications of applicator and references listing 5 similar projects completed in the past 5 years.

2. SSPC QP 1 certified. 3. Manufacturer-approved applicator when manufacturer has approved applicator

program or when required in these specifications.

B. CTR qualifications: 1. Certification, one of the following:

a. NACE Level 2 or 3 Certified Coating Inspector. b. SSPC Level 3 Protective Coatings Inspector.

2. Minimum of 5 years of experience evaluating application of manufacturer's coatings under conditions similar to those of the Work: a. Provide CTR qualifications and references listing 5 similar projects

completed in the past 5 years.

C. Regulatory requirements: Comply with governing agencies' regulations by using coatings conforming to their VOC limits. 1. Lead-based coatings are not permitted. 2. Do not use coal-tar epoxy in contact with drinking water or exposed to

ultraviolet radiation.

D. Certification: 1. Certify that applicable pigments resist deterioration when exposed to hydrogen

sulfide and other sewage gases. 2. Product data shall designate coating as being suitable for wastewater service.

E. Pre-installation conference: 1. Coordinate Hold Point schedule

F. Field samples: 1. Prepare and coat a minimum 100-square-foot area of each system between

corners or limits such as control or construction joints. 2. Approved field sample may be part of the Work.

G. Obtain approval before coating other surfaces. Use products by same manufacturer for prime coats, intermediate coats, and finish coats on same surface, unless specified otherwise.

H. CSM services: 1. CSA shall arrange for CTR to attend pre-installation conferences. 2. Visit the project site periodically to consult on and inspect specified surface

preparation and application Hold Points. 3. Visit coating plants to observe and approve surface preparation procedures

and coating application of items to be shop primed and coated. 4. CTR shall provide written inspection reports.

I. Quality control requirements: 1. Contractor shall be responsible for the workmanship and quality of the coating

system installation. a. Inspections by Owner, Engineer, CSA, or CTR will not relieve or limit

Contractor’s responsibilities.


2. Conform to this specification's requirements and the standards referenced in this Section. Changes in the coating system application requirements will be allowed only with the Engineer's written acceptance.

3. Specially trained crews with experience applying the specified coating system coating are required for: a. Coating application using plural component spray equipment or other

specialty equipment. b. Coating with specialty linings for severe service conditions, including floor

coatings, and with linings for corrosive headspaces or secondary containment areas.

4. CTR shall specially train personnel for coating systems as specified in Appendix B Coating Detail Sheets. a. CSM shall approve personnel in writing applying the coating system.

5. Do not use contaminated, outdated, diluted materials, and/or materials from previously opened containers.

6. Identify inspection access points used by Owners or Engineers. 7. Provide ventilation, ingress, egress, or other means as necessary for Owner's

or Engineer’s personnel to safely access the work areas. 8. Conduct and continually inspect work so the coating system is installed as

specified. The CSM shall provide written directions to correct coating work not conforming to the specifications or is otherwise unacceptable.

9. Provide written daily reports summarizing test data, work progress, surfaces covered, ambient conditions, quality control inspection test findings, and other information pertinent to the coating system application. a. Determine relative humidity in accordance with ASTM E337. Confirm

other conditions, such as proper protective measures for surfaces not to be coated and safety requirements for personnel. 1) Measure daily at shift's beginning and end and at intervals not to

exceed 4 hours during the shift. 2) Determine the acceptability of weather and/or environmental

conditions within the structure in accordance with the CSM's requirements.

b. Monitoring surface preparation: Spot check cleanliness, surface profile, and surface pH testing at least 3 times daily. Check each surface at least once. In accordance with: 1) ASTM D4262. 2) ASTM D4263. 3) ASTM D4417. 4) ICRI 310.2 requirements. 5) SSPC Surface Preparation Standards.

c. Confirm that compressed air used for surface preparation or blow-down cleaning is free of oil and moisture.

d. Monitor surface preparation daily at shift's beginning and end and at intervals not to exceed 4 hours during the shift.

e. Do not apply coatings when environmental conditions are outside of the CSM's published limits.

f. Monitoring coatings application: Continuously inspect, measure, and record the wet film thickness and general film quality (visual inspection) for runs, sags, pinholes, holidays, etc. during coating. 1) Perform WFT measurements in accordance with ASTM D4414.

g. Post cure evaluation: Measure and inspect the overall dry film thickness on all surfaces. Conduct a DFT survey and perform adhesion testing,


holiday detection, or cure testing as required in this Section and/or the CSM’s written instructions. Perform all applicable tests in accordance with ASTM D4541, ASTM D4787, ASTM D5162, ASTM D7234, SSPC-PA 1, SSPC-PA 2, SSPC-PA 9, and other pertinent standards and recommended practices.

J. Inspection at Hold Points: 1. Conduct inspections at Hold Points during the coating system application and

record the results. 2. Coordinate Hold Points with the Engineer so the Engineer can observe

Contractor’s inspections on a scheduled basis. 3. Provide the Engineer a minimum of 24 hours of notice before conducting Hold

Point Inspections. 4. Hold Points shall be as follows:

a. Conditions before surface preparation: Before starting surface preparation, observe, record, and confirm that oil, grease, and/or soluble salts are gone from the surface.

b. Post surface preparation: After completing surface preparation, measure and inspect for cleanliness and proper surface profile as specified in this Section and in the CSM’s written instructions.

c. Coatings application: At the beginning of any coating system application, measure, record, and confirm acceptability of surface and ambient air temperature and humidity. Inspect applicator's equipment for serviceability and suitability for coatings application.

d. Post application inspection: Identify defects in application work on all surfaces, including pinholes, holidays, excessive runs or sags, inadequate or excessive film thickness, and other problems.

e. Follow-up corrective actions and final inspection: Measure and re-inspect corrective coating work performed to repair defects at prior Hold Points, and repeat until the surface condition is acceptable. Conduct final visual inspection with follow-up tests, such as holiday detection, adhesion tests, and DFT surveys.

f. Coatings application: At the beginning of coating system application, measure, record, and confirm acceptability of surface and ambient air temperature and humidity. Inspect applicator's equipment for serviceability and suitability for coatings application. 1) Observe conditions during the Pre-application Meeting.

1.08 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, and handle products as specified in Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Immediately remove unspecified and unapproved coatings from Project site.

C. Deliver new labeled, unopened containers: 1. Do not deliver materials after manufacturer's expiration date or over 12 months

from manufacturing date, whichever is more stringent. Store materials in well-ventilated enclosed structures and protect from weather and excessive heat or cold in accordance with the CSM’s recommendations. a. Store flammable materials in accordance with federal, state, and local

requirements.


b. Store rags and cleanup materials appropriately to prevent fire and spontaneous combustion.

2. Store and dispose of hazardous waste in accordance with federal, state, and local requirements. This requirement specifically applies to waste solvents and coatings.

3. Container labels shall show the following: a. Brand name or product title. b. CSM's batch number. c. CSM's manufacture date. d. CSM's name. e. Generic material type. f. Application and mixing instructions. g. Hazardous material identification label. h. Shelf life expiration date. i. Color. j. Mixing and reducing instructions.

4. Clearly mark containers to indicate safety hazards associated with the use of or exposure to materials.

1.09 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Apply coatings to dry surfaces. 1. Surface moisture: Comply with manufacturer's requirements or as specified in

this Section. a. Plaster and gypsum wallboard: 12 percent. b. Masonry and concrete block: 12 percent. c. Interior located wood: 15 percent. d. Concrete floors: Moisture vapor transmission rate of no more than 3.0

pounds per 1,000 square feet per 24 hours in accordance with ASTM F1869 or relative humidity no greater than 80 percent if tested in accordance with ASTM F2170 unless the CSM's recommendations are more restrictive.

e. Concrete structures: Negative results from Plastic Sheet Test in accordance with ASTM D4263, and maximum of 80 percent relative humidity in accordance with ASTM F2170.

B. Do not apply coatings when the following conditions exist. If such conditions exist, provide containment, covers, environmental controls, and other necessary measures. 1. During rainy, misty, or damp weather, or to surfaces with frost or

condensation. 2. When the surface temperature is below 10 degrees Fahrenheit above the dew

point. 3. When ambient or surface temperature:

a. Is less than 55 degrees Fahrenheit unless manufacturer allows a lower temperature.

b. Is less than 65 degrees Fahrenheit for clear finishes, unless manufacturer allows a lower temperature.

c. Exceeds 90 degrees Fahrenheit, unless manufacturer allows a higher temperature.

d. Exceeds manufacturer's recommendation. 4. When relative humidity is higher than 85 percent.


5. Under dusty or adverse environmental conditions. 6. When light on surfaces measures less than 15 foot-candles. 7. When wind speed exceeds 15 miles per hour.

C. Apply coating only under evaporation conditions rather than condensation. 1. Use dehumidification equipment, fans, and/or heaters inside enclosed areas to

maintain required atmospheric and surface temperature requirements for proper coating application and cure.

2. Measure and record relative humidity and air and surface temperatures at the start and end of each shift to confirm proper humidity and temperature levels inside the work area. a. Submit test results.

D. Continuously ventilate, dehumidify, and heat enclosed spaces with high humidity during surface preparation, coating application, and curing. 1. Maintain minimum air temperature of 55 degrees Fahrenheit and 10 degrees

Fahrenheit above the dew point. 2. Maintain dew point of at least 10 degrees Fahrenheit less than the

temperature of the coldest part of the structure where work is performed. 3. Reduce dew point temperature in conditioned space by at least 10 degrees

Fahrenheit within 20 minutes. 4. Seal work areas and maintain positive pressure per dehumidification

equipment supplier's recommendations. 5. Maintain these conditions before, during, and after application to ensure

proper adhesion and cure of coatings for no less than: a. Entire curing period. b. 8 hours after coating.

E. Systems: 1. Site electrical power availability as specified in Section 01500 - Temporary

Facilities and Controls. 2. Internal combustion engine generators may be used.

a. Obtain required permits and provide air pollution and noise control devices on equipment as required by permitting agencies require.

b. Comply with state, federal, and local fire and explosion protection measures when locating and operating generator.

c. Locate engine generator outside hazardous classified areas per NFPA 820.

d. Provide daily fuel service for generator for duration of use. 3. Dehumidification:

a. Provide desiccant or refrigeration drying. b. Use only desiccant types with a rotary desiccant wheel capable of

continuous operation. c. Liquid, granular, or loose lithium chloride drying systems are not

acceptable. 4. Heating:

a. Use electric, indirect combustion, or steam coil. b. Direct-fired combustion heaters are not acceptable heat sources during

abrasive blasting, coating application, or coating cure.


5. Filters: a. Use a filtration system for dust removal designed to not interfere with

dehumidification equipment’s ability to control dew point and relative humidity inside the reservoir.

b. Do not allow air from the working area or dust filtration equipment to recirculate through thein dehumidifier during coating application or when solvent vapors are present.

6. Design and submittals: a. Prepare and submit dehumidification and heating plan, including all

equipment and operating procedures. b. Suppliers of services and equipment shall have at least 3 years of

experience in similar applications.

F. Provide containment and ventilation system components in accordance with SSPC-Guide 6, Level 3 and as required for hazardous materials.

1.10 MAINTENANCE

A. Provide table of products applied organized by surface type. List coating manufacturer, color, color formulation, distributor name, telephone number, and address.

1.11 CTR RESPONSIBILITIES

A. General: 1. Attend pre-installation conference. 2. Perform onsite application training. 3. Periodically inspect coating system application.

B. Coating system installation training: 1. Provide a minimum of 8 hours of classroom and off-site training for application

personnel and supervisory personnel in one of the following ways: a. Train a minimum of 2 supervisory personnel and 2 application personnel. b. Submit a letter from the CSM stating that CSM approves the supervisory

and application personnel, listed by name and responsibility, and no additional training is required.

2. CTR can train up to 14 application personnel and 3 supervisory personnel at a time.

3. Minimum training requirements: a. Explain in detail the mixing, application, curing, and termination

requirements. b. Provide hands-on demonstration of coating system mixing. c. Explain in detail the ambient condition requirements for temperature and

humidity. d. Explain in detail the surface preparation requirements. e. Explain in detail the re-coat times, cure times, and related ambient

condition requirements. f. Write a letter stating that training was satisfactorily completed by the

personnel, listed by name and responsibility. 4. Provide special training as specified in the Coating Detail Sheets.


C. Coating system inspection: 1. CTR inspection is in addition to the CSA's inspection as specified in this

Section. 2. Be on-site to oversee:

a. Coating application at least once a week. b. End of surface preparation. c. During coating application. d. Post-cure inspection.

3. Routinely inspect and verify in writing that application personnel have successfully performed surface preparation, filler/surfacer application, coating system application, and Quality Control Inspection in accordance with this Section and to warrantable quality.

4. Perform the following activities to confirm conformance with the specifications: a. Inspect ambient conditions during coating system installation at Hold

Points for conformance with the specified requirements. b. Inspect each coated surface type and coating system applied to verify the

following: 1) Cleanliness. 2) Surface pH for concrete substrates. 3) Confirm surface preparation of substrates where coating system will

terminate or will be applied for conformance to the specified application criteria.

c. Verify surface profile of substrates by completing the following: 1) Inspect preparation and application of coating detail treatment at

terminations, transitions, metal embedments in concrete, and joints and cracks in substrates.

2) Inspect application of filler/surfacer materials for concrete and masonry substrates.

3) Verify proper mixing of coating materials. 4) Inspect application of primers and finish coats, including wet and dry

film thickness. 5) Inspect coating systems for proper cure times and conditions.

d. Review adhesion testing of cured coating systems. e. Review coating system continuity testing. f. Inspect and record representative-localized repairs. g. Conduct final review of completed coating system installation. h. Prepare and submit site visit reports after each site visit to document that

the coating work is in accordance with the CSM’s Recommendations.

D. Final report: 1. Prepare a final report, after coating work ends, summarizing each day's test

data, observations, drawings, and photographs. Include substrate conditions, ambient conditions, and application procedures observed during the CTR's site visits. Include a statement that completed work was performed in accordance with the requirements of the CSM’s recommendations.


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. General: 1. Product requirements as specified in Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

2.02 COATING SYSTEMS IDENTIFICATION

A. Naming Conventions: Coating Systems Identifications contain the elements defined in Table 1.

Table 1 Coating System Identification Elements

First Element - Second Element

- Third Element - Fourth Element (optional)

3 or 4 alpha characters

1-3 alpha characters

1 number 3 or 4 alpha characters

Coating Type Substrate System Number Additional Substrate or Special Condition

Example: EPX - C - 6 - BSC

1) First element identifies the coating type using the following abbreviations: a) ACR: acrylic. b) CTE: coal tar epoxy. c) ELA: elastomeric acrylic. d) EPU: epoxy-polyurethane. e) EPX: epoxy. f) POL: polyurethane. g) SIL: silicone. h) SILX: siloxane or silane. i) VE: vinyl ester.

2) Second element identifies the substrate using the following abbreviations: a) C: concrete or masonry. b) F: concrete flooring. c) FRP: fiber-reinforced plastic. d) GM: galvanized metal. e) M: metal. f) PVC: polyvinyl chloride, chlorinated polyvinyl chloride.

3) Third element identifies the sequential system number. a) For example, EPX-C-2 is the second standard epoxy coating system for

concrete substrates. 4) Fourth element is optional and identifies the additional substrate or special

condition with the following abbreviations: a) PWS: Potable water service applications (NSF-61 approved). b) BSC: Biogenic sulfide corrosion-resistant applications in wastewater. c) BG: Below grade or buried. d) OZ: Organic zinc primer, epoxy polyurethane system. e) SC: Secondary containment.


2.03 PRODUCTS FOR COATING SYSTEMS

A. Products: As specified in Appendix B Coating Detail Sheets.

B. Cleaning solvents: 1. Requirements for solvent wash, solvent wipe, or cleaner used, including, but

not limited to, those used for surface preparation in accordance with SSPC-SP 1: a. Emulsifying type. b. Containing no phosphates. c. Biodegradable. d. Does not damage zinc. e. Compatible with the specified primer. f. Complying with applicable air-quality control board requirements.

2. Use clean white cloths and clean fluids in solvent cleaning.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS

A. Protect adjacent coated surfaces from coatings and damage associated with coating work. Repair damage resulting from inadequate or unsuitable protection.

B. Use drop cloths and other coverings to protect adjacent surfaces not to be coated against spatter and droppings.

C. Mask off surfaces of items not to be coated or remove items from area.

D. Furnish and deploy sufficient drop cloths, shields, and protective equipment to prevent spray or droppings from fouling surfaces not being coated and, in particular, surfaces within storage and preparation areas.

E. Place coating waste, cloths, and material that may pose a fire hazard in closed metal containers and remove daily from site.

F. Remove electrical plates, surface hardware, fittings, and fasteners before coating application. Carefully store, clean, and replace items after completing coating in each area. Do not use solvent or degreasers to clean hardware that may remove permanent lacquer finishes.

G. Erect and maintain protective enclosures in accordance with SSPC- Guide 6.

H. Protect the following surfaces from abrasive blasting by masking or by other means: 1. Threaded portions of valve and gate stems, grease fittings, and identification

plates. 2. Machined surfaces for sliding contact. 3. Surfaces to be assembled against gaskets. 4. Surfaces of shafting where sprockets will be fit. 5. Surfaces of shafting where bearings will be fit. 6. Machined bronze surfaces, including slide gates. 7. Cadmium-plated items, except cadmium-plated, zinc-plated, or sherardized

fasteners used to assemble equipment requiring abrasive blasting.


8. Galvanized items, unless scheduled to be coated.

I. Protect installed equipment, mechanical drives, and adjacent coated equipment from abrasive blasting to prevent damage caused by spent abrasive blast media, dust, or dirt entering such equipment.

J. Schedule cleaning and coating to keep dust and spray from the cleaning process from falling on wet, newly coated surfaces. 1. Whenever possible, coordinate with other trades and complete surface

preparation and coating work before installing hardware, hardware accessories, nameplates, data tags, electrical fixtures, and similar uncoated items that will be in contact with coated surfaces. Mask machined surfaces, sprinkler heads, and other small items that will not be coated.

2. After completing coating, reinstall removed items. 3. Disconnect and move equipment adjacent to walls to clean and coat

equipment and walls. Replace and reconnect equipment after coating.

3.02 GENERAL SURFACE PREPARATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Prepare surfaces in accordance with CSM's instructions unless more stringent requirements are specified in this Section.

B. Coating detail sheets in Appendix B include additional surface preparation requirements.

C. Follow more stringent requirement if information conflicts.

D. Where required by the Owner’s representative, a NACE International certified coatings inspector, provided by the Owner will inspect and approve surfaces to be coated before applying a coating. 1. CSA shall coordinate coating inspections.

a. Identify coating inspection Hold Points during the pre-installation conference.

b. Provide at least 2 days notice before inspection. 2. Contractor shall correct surface defects identified by the inspector at no

additional cost to Owner.

3.03 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT PREPARATION

A. Identify equipment, ducting, piping, and conduit as specified in Section 15075 - Equipment Identification, Section 15076 - Pipe Identification, and Section 16075 - Identification for Electrical Systems.

B. Remove grilles, covers, and access panels for mechanical and electrical system and coat separately.

C. Prepare and finish coat equipment primed by the manufacturer using specified intermediate and top coats, as applicable, and color selected by the Owner. 1. For exposed piping, top coat color shall be black.

D. Prepare, prime, and coat both insulated and bare pipes, conduits, boxes, insulated and bare ducts, hangers, brackets, collars, and supports, except where items are covered with material not requiring coating, or with a prefinished coating.


E. Replace identification markings on mechanical or electrical equipment when coated over or spattered.

F. Prepare and coat interior surfaces of air ducts and convector and baseboard heating cabinets visible through grilles and louvers with 1 coat of flat black paint to limit of sight line.

G. Prepare and coat dampers exposed immediately behind louvers, grilles, and convector and baseboard heating cabinets to match face panels.

H. Prepare and coat exposed conduit and appurtenances occurring in finished areas with color and texture to match adjacent surfaces.

I. Prepare and coat sides' front, back, and edges of plywood backboards for electrical equipment before installing backboards and mounting equipment on them.

J. Color code equipment, piping, conduit, and exposed ductwork and apply color banding and identification, such as flow arrows, naming, and numbering, in accordance with the Contract Documents.

3.04 CLEANING OF NEW AND PREVIOUSLY COATED OR NEW SURFACES

A. Utilize cleaning agent to remove soluble salts, such as chlorides, from concrete and metal surfaces: 1. Cleaning agent: Biodegradable non-flammable and containing no VOC. 2. Manufacturers: The following or equal:

a. CHLOR*RID International, Inc. 1) Complete soluble salt removal with steam or warm water cleaning.

3. Steam clean and degrease surfaces to be coated to remove oils and grease. 4. Clean surfaces with decontamination agent in conjunction with abrasive blast

cleaning, steam cleaning, high-pressure washing, or hand washing, as approved by the CTR and the Engineer.

5. Test cleaned surfaces to ensure removal of soluble salts. Carry out additional cleaning as needed.

6. Complete final surface preparation before applying new coating system in strict accordance with CSM's printed instructions.

3.05 BLAST CLEANING

A. Surface preparation requirements: 1. Do not reuse spent blast abrasive. 2. Ensure that filter compressed air used for blast cleaning is free of condensed

water and oil. Clean moisture traps at least once every 4 hours or more frequently, as required, to prevent moisture from entering the abrasive blasting equipment air supply. Check blast air for moisture and oil after each cleaning in accordance with ASTM D4285.

3. Install oil separators just downstream of compressor discharge valves and at the discharge point of blast pot discharges. Check separators on the same frequency as the moisture traps.

4. Keep regulators, gauges, filters, and separators on compressor air lines to blasting nozzles operational at all times.


5. Install an air dryer or desiccant filter drying unit to dry the compressed air before blast pot connections. Use and maintain the dryer throughout surface preparation work.

6. Use a venturi-type, or other high velocity-type, abrasive blast nozzles supplied with at least 100 pounds per square inch gauge air pressure at the nozzle and enough volume to obtain appropriate blast cleaning production rates and surface cleanliness.

7. Provide airborne particulate evacuation and filtering that meets OSHA safety standards. Maintain optimal visibility both to clean and provide the specified surface profile and to allow inspection of the substrate during surface preparation work.

8. If prepared and cleaned metallic substrates become contaminated between final surface preparation work and coating system application, or if the prepared substrate darkens or changes color, re-clean by water blasting, or abrasive blast cleaning as appropriate until the specified degree of cleanliness is restored.

B. Water jetting or water blasting: 1. Use water jetting or water blasting for recoating or relining where an adequate

surface profile exists. 2. Perform water jetting or water blasting in accordance with SP 13 and SSPC-

WJ-1, WJ-2, WJ-3, WJ-4.

3.06 PREPARATION REQUIREMENTS FOR CONCRETE SURFACES

A. Cure for at least 28 days before coating.

B. Remove degraded concrete using abrasive blast cleaning or high or ultrahigh pressure water jetting, chipping, or other abrading tools until achieving a sound, clean substrate. Remove all bruised or cracked concrete.

C. Prepare substrate cracks and areas requiring resurfacing; perform detail treatment, including, but not limited to, terminating edges per the CSM's recommendations and as indicated on the Drawings. 1. Prepare concrete surfaces in accordance with SSPC-SP 13.

D. Prepare concrete surfaces in accordance with SSPC-SP 13. 1. Inspect concrete surfaces to select appropriate surface preparation method to

provide a suitable substrate for the specified coating system. 2. Use blast cleaning or other means to expose the complete perimeter of air

voids or bug holes. Do not leave shelled over, hidden air voids beneath the exposed concrete surface.

3. Repair concrete defects and physical damage. 4. Clean concrete surfaces of dust, mortar, formwork, fins, loose concrete

particles, form release materials, oil, and grease. 5. Fill voids to provide surface as specified in Section 03366 - Tooled Concrete

Finishing.

E. Provide clean substrate visually free of calcium sulfate, loose, coarse, or fine aggregate, laitance, loose hydrated cement paste, and otherwise harmful substances. 1. Confirm concrete surface minimum pH of 9.0 with surface pH testing.


2. If after surface preparation the surface pH remains below 9.0, perform additional water blasting, cleaning, or abrasive blast cleaning until additional pH testing indicates an acceptable pH level.

F. Prepare concrete surface for coating in accordance with SSPC-SP 13. 1. Provide ICRI 310.2 minimum No. 3 concrete surface profile (CSP) or as

specified on Coating Detail Sheets. 2. Evaluate profile of the prepared concrete using ICRI 310.2 surface profile

replicas.

G. Blast clean cementitious repair mortars or grouts to the same profile and degree of cleanliness requirements required for concrete substrates.

H. Blast clean polymer-based surfacers or waterborne modified cementitious surfaces only if they have exceeded the CSM's recommended recoat time.

I. Vacuum all concrete surfaces before coating application, leaving a dust free, sound concrete substrate. 1. Thoroughly clean concrete surfaces to be coated to remove loose dirt and

spent abrasive. 2. Remove debris produced by blast cleaning from the structures to be coated,

and legally dispose of it off-site.

J. Test moisture content of concrete to be coated: 1. Conduct ASTM D4263 plastic sheet test at least once for every 500 square

feet of surface area to be coated. a. Any moisture on plastic sheet after test period constitutes a

non-acceptable test, and the concrete must be dried further. 2. Conduct ASTM F1869 test at least once for every 1,000 square feet of

concrete floor surface area to be coated. 3. Conduct ASTM F2170 one relative humidity moisture test at least once for

each 500 square feet of non-floor concrete surface area where the opposite side is exposed to soil or water. a. Waterproof surfaces exposed to soil or water where specified in Section

07110 - Dampproofing. 4. Comply with specified minimum moisture content and CSM’s written

recommendations for moisture vapor transmission rates or relative humidity values.

K. Masonry surfaces: 1. Cure for at least 28 days before coating. 2. Prepare masonry surfaces to remove chalk, laitance, loose dirt, dried mortar

splatter, dust, peeling, or loose existing coatings, or otherwise deleterious substances to leave a clean, sound substrate.

3. Wash and scrub masonry surfaces with clear water. Do not use muriatic acid. 4. Seal or fill masonry surfaces with a sealer or block filler compatible with the

specified primer after cleaning. 5. Confirm that masonry surfaces are dry before coating application.

a. If using pressure washing or low-pressure water blast cleaning for preparation, allow the masonry to dry for at least 5 days under dry weather conditions or until the minimum ambient temperature is 70 degrees Fahrenheit before coating.


3.07 GENERAL PREPARATION REQUIREMENTS FOR METALLIC SURFACES

A. Remove rust, scale, and welding slag and spatter. 1. Remove and grind smooth all excessive weld material and weld spatter on

metal surfaces before blast cleaning in accordance with NACE SP0178, Appendix C, Level C.

2. Grind sharp edges on metal substrate to approximately 1/16-inch radius before abrasive blast cleaning.

B. Prepare metallic surfaces in accordance with applicable portions of surface preparation specifications of the SSPC specified for each coating system. 1. Remove grease and oil in accordance with SSPC-SP 1. 2. Use solvent as recommended by the CSM. 3. Measure profile depth of the surface to be coated in accordance with Method

C of ASTM D4417. Contractor shall select blast particle size and gradation to produce the specified surface profile.

4. Constantly monitor and maintain ambient environmental conditions to ensure cleanliness and that no “rust back” occurs before coating material application.

C. Prepare metallic surfaces by blast cleaning in accordance with SSPC-VIS 1 (ASTM D2200). Prepare abrasive blast representative areas for the Owner's representative to inspect on the first day of cleaning.

D. Unless otherwise specified, the requirements for blast cleaning steel, ductile iron, and stainless steel substrates are as follows: 1. Ferrous metal surfaces not to be submerged: Abrasive blast in accordance with

SSPC-SP 10 unless blasting may damage adjacent surfaces, is prohibited, or is specified otherwise. Where abrasive blasting is not possible, clean surfaces to bare metal with power tools in accordance with SSPC-SP 11.

2. Ferrous metal surfaces to be submerged: Abrasive blast in accordance with SSPC-SP 5, unless specified otherwise, to clean and provide roughened surface profile with a depth between 2 and 4 mils.

3. Remove traces of grit, dust, dirt, rust scale, friable material, loose corrosion products, or embedded abrasive from substrate before coating application.

4. When abrasive blasted surfaces rust or discolor before coating, abrasive blast clean surfaces again.

E. Field preparation of shop-primed surfaces: 1. Smooth welds and prominences with power tools before applying field-applied

coatings. 2. Clean and dry shop-primed ferrous metal surfaces and fabricated assemblies

before applying field coats. 3. Prepare shop epoxy primed surfaces with light abrasive blasting or abrading

and then vacuum before applying finish coats. a. Follow CSM instructions for surface preparation when the primer recoat

limit has been exceeded. 4. Non-immersion service: Clean in accordance with SSPC-SP 2 (Hand Tool

Cleaning) or SSPC-SP 3 (Power Tool Cleaning) and uniformly roughen. 5. Immersion, BSC, and SC service: Remove shop primer in accordance with

SSPC-SP 5 (Near-White Blast Cleaning).


F. Damaged shop primer or rust bleeding: 1. Ferrous metals: Clean in accordance with SSPC-SP 1 (Solvent Cleaning) and

spot blast in accordance with SSPC-SP 10 (Near-White Metal Blast Cleaning) to achieve a uniform surface profile between 2.0 and 2.5 mils before recoating.

2. Reject galvanized steel with rust bleeding.

G. Damaged coating: Repair by abrasive blast cleaning surfaces as specified for the coating system; feather to a smooth transition before touching up.

3.08 PREPARATION REQUIREMENTS BY SURFACE TYPE

A. Galvanized steel and non-ferrous metal surfaces: 1. Degrease or solvent clean (SSPC-SP 1) to remove oily residue. 2. Abrasive blast clean in accordance with SSPC-SP 16.

a. If abrasive blast cannot be performed, abrade in accordance with SSPC-SP 3 (Power Tool Cleaning).

3. Apply metal pretreatment within 24 hours before coating galvanized surfaces that cannot be thoroughly abraded, such as bolts, nuts, or preformed channels.

4. Test surface for contaminants using copper sulfate solution.

B. Stainless-steel surfaces: 1. Abrasive blast clean in accordance with SSPC-SP 16 to leave a clean, uniform

appearance with surface profile between 1.5 and 2.5 mils.

C. Ductile iron pipe and fittings to be lined or coated: Abrasive blast clean in accordance with NAPF 500-03.

D. Sherardized, aluminum, copper, and bronze surfaces: 1. Abrasive blast clean in accordance with SSPC-SP 16. 2. Prepare in accordance with CSM's instructions.

E. Cadmium-plated, zinc-plated, or sherardized fasteners: 1. Abrasive blast in the same manner as uncoated metal when assembling

equipment designated for abrasive blasting.

F. PVC and FRP surfaces: 1. Lightly sand surfaces to be coated.

a. Sand to remove gloss and establish uniform surface profile. 2. Vacuum to remove loose dust, dirt, and other materials. 3. Solvent clean with clean white rags and allow solvent to evaporate completely

before applying coating materials.

3.09 APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Apply coatings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Empty aboveground piping to be coated of contents when applying coatings.

C. Mechanical equipment shop primed by the manufacturer. 1. Pumps and valves: Shop coat with manufacturer's highest quality coating

system meeting the project specifications. a. Contractor shall provide CTR shop coating reports.


2. Non-immersed equipment: Touch up shop primer, and coat in the field with specified coating system after installation. a. If project requires equipment removal and reinstallation, complete touch-

up coating after final installation. 3. Immersed equipment not shop coated: Remove shop primer before surface

preparation and field apply coating.

D. Verify surface preparation immediately before applying coating in accordance with SSPC SP COM and the SSPC visual standard for the specified surface preparation method.

E. Allow surfaces to dry, except where coating manufacturer requires surface wetting before coating.

F. Wash coat and prime sherardized, aluminum, copper, and bronze surfaces, or prime with manufacturer's recommended special primer.

G. Do not apply coatings to a surface until it has been prepared as specified.

H. Use equipment designed to apply materials specified. 1. Use compressors with moisture traps and filters that remove water and oils

from the air. a. Perform a paper blotter test at the Engineer's request to verify air is

sufficiently free of oil and moisture. Do not allow the amount of oil and moisture to exceed CSM-recommended amount.

2. Equip spray equipment with properly sized mechanical agitators, pressure gauges, pressure regulators, and spray nozzles.

I. Where 2 or more coats are required, tint prime coat intermediate coats as necessary to distinguish each coating and to help indicate coverage. 1. Do not use color additives with chromium, lead or lead compounds that

hydrogen sulfide, other corrosive gases, might destroy or alter. Apply the specified number of coats.

J. Apply coating by brush, roller, trowel, or spray unless a specific application method is required by coating manufacturer's instructions or these Specifications. 1. Apply primer or first coat by brush to power tool cleaned ferrous surfaces. 2. Brush or spray-apply coats for blast-cleaned ferrous surfaces and subsequent

coats for non-blast cleaned ferrous surfaces. 3. After prime coat dries, mark, repair, and retest pinholes and holidays before

intermediate or top coats are applied.

K. Spray application: 1. With a brush, stripe coat edges, welds, corners, nuts, bolts, and difficult-to-

reach areas, as necessary, before spray application to ensure specified coating thickness along edges.

2. When using spray application, apply each coat to thickness no greater than recommended in coating manufacturer's instructions.

3. Use airless spray method unless air spray method is required by CSM's instruction or these Specifications.

4. Conduct spray coating under controlled conditions. Protect adjacent construction and property from coating mist, fumes, or overspray.


L. Lightly sand and thoroughly clean surfaces to receive high-gloss finishes unless CSM instructs otherwise.

M. Remove all dust on coatings between coats.

N. Shop and field coats: 1. Prime coat: Shop-apply or field-apply prime coats as specified. Use shop-

applied primer compatible with the specified field coating system and apply at the minimum dry film thickness recommended by the finish coat CSM. a. Provide data sheets identifying the shop primer to on-site coating

application personnel. b. Perform adhesion tests on the shop primer. c. Remove and recoat damaged, deteriorated, and poorly applied shop

coatings. d. If shop primer coat meets this Section's requirements, spot prime exposed

metal of shop-primed surfaces before spray applying primer over the entire surface.

2. Field coats: Apply field coats with 1 or more prime coats and finish coats to build up coating to dry film thickness specified for the coating system. a. Do not apply finish coats until other work in the area is complete and

previous coats are inspected. 3. Adhesion confirmation: Perform adhesion tests after proper coating cure in

accordance with ASTM D3359. Demonstrate that: a. Prime coat adheres to the substrate. b. Coatings adhere to the prime and intermediate coats.

1) Coating 5 mils or more DFT: Achieve adhesion test result of 5A on immersed surfaces and 4A or better on other surfaces.

2) Coating less than 5 mils DFT: Achieve adhesion test results of 5B on immersed surfaces and 4B or better on other surfaces.

O. Brush, roll, trowel, or spray and back roll coats for concrete and masonry.

P. Plural component coating application: 1. Premix contents of component drums if required by the CSM each day. 2. Before starting application:

a. Verify gauges are working properly. b. Complete ratio checks. c. Sample the mix on plastic sheeting to ensure set time is appropriate and

complete. d. Label and retain all spray samples. Submit to Engineer when requested.

Q. Drying and recoating: 1. Provide fans, heating devices, or other means to prevent condensate or dew

on substrate surface or between coats and during curing after applying the last coat.

2. Allow each coat to cure or dry thoroughly, in accordance with if required in CSM’s printed instructions, before recoating.

3. Use CSM's printed instructions and the requirements specified in this Section to determine minimum required drying time. a. Do not allow excessive drying time or exposure, which may impair bond

between coats. b. Recoat all coatings within time limits recommended by CSM.


c. If time limits are exceeded, abrasive blast clean and de-gloss clean before applying another coat.

4. If limitations on time between abrasive blasting and coating are not met before attaching components to surfaces that cannot be abrasive blasted, coat components before attachment.

5. Ensure primer and intermediate coats of coating are unscarred and completely integral when applying each succeeding coat.

6. Touch up suction spots between coats and apply additional coats where required to produce finished surface of solid, even color, free of defects.

7. Leave no holidays. Repair all holidays in accordance with the requirements on pertinent Coating Detail Sheets or as recommended by the CSM.

8. Sand and feather into a smooth transition and recoat scratched, contaminated, or otherwise damaged coating surfaces so repairs are invisible to the naked eye.

R. Workmanship: 1. Ensure that coated surfaces are free from runs, drips, ridges, waves, laps, and

brush marks. Coats shall be applied to produce a smooth, even film of uniform thickness completely coating corners and crevices.

2. Coat surfaces without drops, overspray, dry spray, excessive runs, ridges, waves, holidays, laps, or brush marks.

3. Remove splatter and droppings after coating work is completed. 4. Evenly apply each coat of material and sharply cut to a line created with

masking tape or other suitable materials. 5. Avoid over spraying or spattering paint on surfaces not to be coated. Protect

glass, hardware, floors, roofs, vehicles, and other adjacent areas and installations by taping, drop cloths, or other suitable measures.

6. When coating complex steel shapes, stripe coat welds, edges of structural steel shapes, metal cut-outs, pits in steel surfaces, or rough surfaces with the primer before overall coating system application. a. Brush apply stripe coat to ensure proper coverage. b. Do not stripe coat with spray or roller.

7. Ensure that finish coat, including repairs, has a uniform color and gloss.

S. Coating properties, mixing, and thinning: 1. Thin prime coat and apply as recommended by the CSM. Thinned coating

must comply with prevailing air pollution control regulations. 2. If maximum recoat time is exceeded, prepare surface with solvent washing,

light abrasive blasting, or other procedures per CSM’s instructions. 3. Allow adequate drying time between coats as instructed by the CSM, adjusted

as necessary for the site conditions. 4. Ensure that coatings, when applied, provide a satisfactory film and a smooth

even surface. Lightly sand glossy undercoats to provide a surface suitable for proper application and adhesion of subsequent coats. Thoroughly stir and strain coating materials during application and maintain uniform consistency.

5. Mix coatings with 2 or more components in accordance with CSM’s instructions.

6. Where necessary to suit conditions of the surface, temperature, weather and method of application, thin the coating per CSM's recommendations. a. Ensure that volatile organic content (VOC) of the thinned coating complies

with prevailing air pollution control regulations.


b. Thin coatings to only what is necessary to obtain proper application characteristics.

c. Use a thinner recommended by the CSM.

T. Film thickness and continuity: 1. Apply coating to the specified thicknesses.

a. Apply additional coats when necessary to achieve specified thicknesses, especially at edges and corners.

2. Verify WFT of the coating system first coat and after applying each subsequent coat.

3. Do not allow the minimum thickness at any point to deviate more than 25 percent from the required average.

4. Do not allow the surface area covered per gallon of coating for various types of surfaces to exceed those recommended by the CSM. a. Provide coating coverage worksheets listing the maximum and minimum

coverage for each unit volume of coating for concrete surfaces. 5. Apply additional coats to achieve the specified dry film thickness if brush or

roller application methods cannot achieve the specified film thicknesses per coat.

U. Protecting coated surfaces: 1. Do not handle, work on, or otherwise disturb coated items until the coating is

completely dry and hard. 2. After installation, recoat shop-coated surfaces with specified coating system as

necessary to match surrounding surfaces, and to coordinate with the specified color identification requirements.

V. Special requirements: 1. Before erection, apply all but the final finish coat to interior surfaces of roof

plates, roof rafters and supports, pipe hangers, piping in contact with hangers, and contact surfaces inaccessible after assembly. Apply final coat after erection.

2. Coat structural slip-critical connections and high strength bolts and nuts after erection.

3. Areas damaged during erection: a. Prepare surface for spot repairs as specified for the coating system. b. Recoat with prime coat before applying subsequent coats. c. Touch up surfaces after installation. d. Clean and dry surfaces to be coated at time of application.

4. Coat underside of equipment bases and supports not galvanized with at least 2 coats of primer specified before setting the equipment in place.

5. Coat aluminum in contact with concrete.

3.10 APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS FOR CONCRETE COATING SYSTEMS

A. Apply filler/surfacer as recommended by CSM to fill bug holes and air voids in concrete or block texture in CMU, leaving a uniformly filled surface that does not produce blowholes or outgassing causing the coating system to pinhole. 1. Allow filler/surfacers to cure sufficiently before applying prime coat as required

by the CSM. Use the CSM-recommended drying time between coats.


B. Apply surfacer or filler and let dry before coating application: 1. Use the drying time between filler/surfacer and coating system specified by the

CSM for the site conditions. a. Let concrete substrate dry before applying filler/surfacers or coating

system materials. 2. If the maximum recoat time is exceeded, prepare surfaces by solvent washing,

light abrasive blasting, and other procedures per CSM's instructions. 3. Apply a complete parge coat of the specified filler/surfacer material over the

entire substrate before applying the coating system. a. Scrub filler/surfacer into the substrate to completely fill open air voids and

bug holes. b. Completely cover the substrate, unless otherwise specified, above such

filled voids by 1/8 inch of thickness. c. Provide relatively flat, uniformly even surface before coating application.

4. Secondary containment: Place surfacer or filler 1/16 inch thick above concrete plane to create a monolithic surface free of pinholes. a. Floor surfaces: Broadcast with aggregate to create a non-slip surface

texture. b. Remove excess aggregates and apply base coat to encapsulate

embedded non-slip aggregate.

C. Concrete substrate temperatures: 1. Apply filler/surfacers and the coating system when temperatures are falling,

typically late afternoon or evening. a. Do not coat concrete with rising concrete substrate surface temperatures

or substrates in direct sunlight, to minimize outgassing from the substrate and formation of pinholes, and/or blistering.

2. Should bubbles, pinholes, or other discontinuities form in the applied coating system material, they shall be repaired. a. Should discontinuities develop in the filler/surfacer material or in the first

coat of the coating material, repair them before the next coat. b. When discontinuities occur, open the air void behind or beneath the

discontinuities and completely fill with specified coating material. Then, abrade the coated area around the discontinuities repair reapply coating over that area.

D. Perform application detail work in accordance with these Specifications, the CSM’s current written recommendations, and drawings, whichever is stricter.

E. Concrete coating systems application requirements: 1. Concrete coating minimum dry film thickness excludes parge coat, block filler,

and sealer.

3.11 COATING SYSTEM SCHEDULE

A. Appendix A specifies surfaces to be coated in the field with the coating systems required.

3.12 SURFACES NOT REQUIRING COATING

A. Stainless steel piping, valves, pipe supports, instrument sunshades.


B. Sliding surfaces on expansion joints, motor and pump shafts, machined surfaces at bearings and seals, grease fittings, etc.

C. Galvanized structural steel framing, galvanized roof decking, galvanized pipe supports.

D. Copper and brass pipe, fittings, valves, etc.

E. Bronze valves, bearings, bushings, and fasteners.

F. Corrosion resistant special alloys: Inconel, Alloy 20, Hastelloy, etc.

G. Exterior Concrete.

H. Plastic surfaces except coat PVC, CPVC, and other plastic piping system exposed to sunlight.

I. Buried Piping that is encased in concrete or cement mortar.

3.13 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Owner-provided inspection or inspection by others does not limit the Contractor’s or CSA’s responsibilities for quality workmanship or quality control as specified or as required by the CSM’s instructions. Owner inspection is in addition to any inspection required of the Contractor.

B. Owner may perform, or contract with an inspection agency to perform, quality control inspection and testing of the coating work covered by this Section. These inspections may include the following: 1. Inspect materials upon receipt to ensure that the CSM supplied them. 2. Verify that specified storage conditions for the coating system materials,

solvents, and abrasives are provided. 3. Inspect and record findings for substrate cleanliness. 4. Inspect and record pH of concrete and metal substrates. 5. Inspect and record substrate profile (anchor pattern). 6. Measure and record ambient air and substrate temperature. 7. Measure and record relative humidity. 8. Check for substrate moisture in concrete. 9. Verify that mixing of coating system materials is in accordance with CSM’s

instructions. 10. Inspect, confirm, and record that coating system materials' "pot life" is not

exceeded during installation. Inspect to verify that recoat limitations for coating materials are not exceeded.

11. Perform adhesion testing. 12. Measure and record the coating system's thickness. 13. Verify proper curing of the coating system in accordance with the CSM's

instructions. 14. Holiday or continuity testing in accordance with NACE SP0188 for coatings

that will be immersed or exposed to aggressively corrosive conditions.


C. Contractor shall perform holiday testing in accordance with NACE SP0188 to identify holidays or pinholes needing repair for coating over 100 percent of surfaces: 1. Coated steel that will be immersed or exposed to aggressively corrosive

conditions. 2. Coated concrete. 3. Perform holiday tests after proper application and coating system cure.

3.14 CORRECTIVE MEASURES

A. Repair pinholes or holidays identified by Holiday Testing as follows: 1. Remove the coating system with a grinder or other suitable power tool. 2. Remove coating system at all pinholes and holidays at least 2 inches diameter

around the defect back to expose substrate. 3. Concrete voids: chip back to expose entire cavity in all directions.

a. Completely fill void with approved filler/surfacer material using a putty knife or other suitable tool, and strike off. Cure per CSM’s recommendations.

4. Aggressively abrade or sand the intact coating system surface at least 3 inches beyond the removal area in all directions to produce a uniform 6- to 8-mil profile in the intact coating system.

5. Vacuum the prepared area to remove all dust, dirt, etc., leaving clean, sound surfaces.

6. Tape to mask the periphery of the prepared intact coating area to prevent coating repair application onto the prepared area.

7. Apply the coating system with enough coats to achieve the specified finish coat thickness over the defect and coating removal area. Feather the coating onto the abraded coated surfaces around the removal area to avoid a lip and to achieve a neat repair outline.

8. Follow curing time between coats as specified by CSM for the site conditions. Solvent wash and abrasive blast per CSM's instructions, if the maximum recoat time is exceeded.

9. Apply coating at specified dry film thickness.

3.15 CLEANUP

A. Remove surplus materials, protective coverings, and accumulated rubbish after completing coating. Thoroughly clean surfaces and repair overspray or other coating-related damage.

3.16 FINAL INSPECTION

A. Conduct final inspection of coating system work to determine whether it meets specifications requirements.

B. Conduct subsequent final inspection with Engineer to ensure work conforms to contract documents requirements.

C. Mark any rework required. 1. Re-clean and repair, as specified, at no additional cost to the Owner.

END OF SECTION

A.

EPU-M-1 Metals, UV canopy structural steel, exterior and interior, non-immersedEPX-M-3 Metals, immersed

EPX-M-5Aluminum surfaces in contact with concrete or masonry.Locations where Alkali-resistant bitumastic is specified.

ACR-PVC-1 PVC and FRP, exterior and interior

1: Non-immersed ferrous metal surfaces include:a. Doors, doorframes, ventilators, louvers, grilles, exposed sheet metal, and flashing.b. Pipe, valves, pipe hangers, supports and saddles, conduit, cable tray hangers, and supports.c. Motors and motor accessory equipment.d. Drive gear, drive housing, coupling housings, and miscellaneous gear drive equipment.e. Valve and gate operators and stands.f. Structural steel.g. Crane and hoist rails.h. Exterior of tanks and other containment vessels.i. Mechanical equipment supports, drive units, and accessories.j. Bare electrical equipment: boxes, exposed conduit, and accessories.k. Pumps not submerged.l. Other miscellaneous metals.

2: Immersed ferrous metal surfaces include:a. Interior surfaces of ferrous metal tanks.b. Field priming of ferrous metal surfaces with defective shop-prime coat; including non-submerged service.c. Bell rings, underside of manhole covers and frames.d. Sump pumps, including underside of base plates and submerged suction and discharge piping.e. Exterior of submerged piping and valves other than stainless steel or PVC piping.f. Submerged pipe supports and hangers.g. Stem guides. h. Other submerged iron and steel metal unless specified otherwise.

APPENDIX A

The following schedule is incomplete. Coat unlisted surfaces with same coating system as similar listed surfaces. Contact Engineer for clarification.

Schedule of Surfaces to be Coated

Notes:

09960-1

Coating SystemCoating MaterialSubstrateProducts: One of the following or equal: Primer Intermediate Coat Finish Coat

Carboline Carboguard 890 Carboguard 890 Carbothane 134 VOCInternational Paint Devran 224V Devran 224V Devthane 379PPG Amercoat 385 Amercoat 385 Amercoat 450HSherwin Williams Macropoxy 646 Macropoxy 646 Hi Solids PolyurethaneTnemec Series 66HS Series 66HS Series 1095

Service Condition

Surface PreparationGeneral

Ferrous Metal

Nonferrous MetalGalvanized Metal

Surface profileFerrous MetalNonferrous MetalGalvanized Metal

System Thickness (Dry Film)TotalPrimerIntermediate CoatFinish Coat

ApplicationSpecial CTR Training Not required.

4 to 5 mils4 to 5 mils2 to 3 mils

1.5 to 2.0 mils1.5 to 2.0 mils

10 to 13 mils

SSPC-SP16, Brush Blast Cleaning.SSPC-SP16, Brush Blast Cleaning. Test for surface contaminants.

2.5 to 3.0 mils

Metal

Interior or Exterior, subject to direct sunlight. Non-immersion.

Prepare surfaces as specified in this Section and as follows.Bare surfaces: SSPC-SP10, Near-White Blast Cleaning.Shop primed surfaces: SSPC-SP2, Hand Tool Cleaning or SSPC-SP3, Power Tool Cleaning. Damaged primer or rust: SSPC-SP10, Near White Blast Cleaning and spot prime.

Appendix BCoating Detail Sheet

EPU-M-1Two coats epoxy with polyurethane finish coat

09960-2


Carboline Carboguard 891 Carboguard 891 Carboguard 891International Paint Bar-Rust 236 Bar-Rust 236 Bar-Rust 236PPG Amercoat 240 Amercoat 240 Amercoat 240Sherwin Williams Tank Clad HS Tank Clad HS Tank Clad HSTnemec Series 104 Series 104 Series 104

Service Condition


Ferrous Metal

Nonferrous MetalGalvanized Metal

Surface profileFerrous MetalNonferrous MetalGalvanized Metal

System Thickness (Dry Film)TotalPrimerIntermediate CoatFinish Coat

ApplicationSpecial CTR Training Not required.

4 to 8 mils

1.5 to 2.0 mils

4 to 8 mils

16 to 20 mils4 to 8 mils

Metal

Immersed; non-immersed, corrosive environment. Not for Biogenic Sulfide Corrosion areas in wastewater.

Prepare surfaces as specified in this Section and as follows.Bare surfaces: SSPC-SP5, White Metal Blast Cleaning.Shop primed surfaces: SSPC-SP7, Brush-Off Blast Cleaning.Damaged primer or rust: SSPC-SP5, White Metal Blast Cleaning and spot prime.

2.5 to 3.0 mils1.5 to 2.0 mils

SSPC-SP16, Brush-Off Blast Cleaning.SSPC-SP16, Brush-Off Blast Cleaning.


EPX-M-3Epoxy

09960-3


Carboline CSM recommended None applied Carbomastic 15International Paint CSM recommended Bar-Rust 231 Bar-Rust 231PPG CSM recommended None applied Amerlock 2 ALSherwin Williams CSM recommended None applied Epoxy Mastic Aluminum IITnemec CSM recommended Series 135 Series 135

Service Condition


Ferrous Metal

Nonferrous MetalSurface profile

Ferrous MetalNonferrous Metal

System Thickness (Dry Film)TotalPrimerFinish Coat

ApplicationSpecial CTR Training

2.0 to 2.5 mils

15 to 19 mils2 to 4 mils15 mils

Not Required.

1.0 to 1.5 mils

Prepare surfaces as specified in this Section and as follows.Bare surfaces: SSPC-SP11, Power to Cleaning to Bare Metal.Shop primed surfaces: SSPC-SP3, Power Tool Cleaning.Damaged primer or rust: SSPC-SP11, Power to Cleaning to Bare Metal.

SSPC-SP16, Brush-Off Blast Cleaning.


EPX-M-5Epoxy masticMetal

Interior, corrosive environment, confined enclosures, where minimal surface preparation is possible.

09960-4


Carboline Carbocrylic 120 None Applied Carbocrylic 3359International Paint Devcryl 1440 None Applied Devcryl 1448PPG Pitt Tech Primer None Applied Pitt TechSherwin Williams Sher Cryl HPA None Applied Sher Cryl HPATnemec Series 1028 or 1029 None Applied Series 1028 or 1029

Service Condition

Surface Preparation

General

Surface profile

System Thickness (Dry Film)TotalPrimerFinish Coat

ApplicationSpecial CTR Training Not Required.

4 to 8 mils2 to 4 mils2 to 4 mils

Prepare surfaces as specified in this Section and as follows.Clean to remove loose dirt, dust, or other contaminants.Sand surfaces to achieve a uniform, roughened surface profile.Solvent clean and vacuum to remove loose debris.

1.5 to 2.0 mils


ACR-PVC-1AcrylicPVC and CPVC pipe

Exterior, exposed to direct sunlight, non-immersed.

09960-5

Pipeline Coatings and Linings 09997-1 11487A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/OR/Clean Water Services/11487A10/Specifications/09997 (Bidset) April 2021 - BID

SECTION 09997

PIPELINE COATINGS AND LININGS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: Pipeline coatings and linings.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. B1000 - Standard Practices for Casting Preparation and Test Procedure of

Porcelain Enamel-lined Pipe, Fittings, and Valves for Use in the Municipal Wastewater, Sewage, and Water Treatment Industry.

2. C33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. 3. C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement. 4. C283 - Standard Test Methods for Resistance of Porcelain Enameled Utensils

to Boiling Acid. 5. D792 - Standard Test Methods for Density and Specific Gravity (Relative

Density) of Plastics by Displacement. 6. D4541 - Standard Test Method for Pull-Off Strength of Coatings Using

Portable Adhesion Testers.

B. American Water Works Association (AWWA): 1. C104 - Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings. 2. C105 - Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Pipe Systems. 3. C203 - Coal-Tar Protective Coatings and Linings for Steel Water Pipes. 4. C205 - Cement-Mortar Protective Lining and Coating for Steel Water Pipe 4 In,

and Larger-Shop Applied. 5. C210 - Liquid Epoxy Coatings and Linings for Steel Water Pipe and Fittings. 6. C214 - Tape Coatings for Steel Water Pipelines. 7. C216 - Heat-Shrinkable Cross-Linked Polyolefin Coatings for Steel Water Pipe

and Fittings. 8. C217 - Microcrystalline Wax and Petrolatum Tape Coating Systems for Steel

Water Pipe and Fittings (PDF). 9. C222 - Bolted, Split-Sleeve Restrained and Nonrestrained Couplings for Plain-

End Pipe. 10. C225 - Fused Polyolefin Coatings for Steel Water Pipelines 11. C301 - Prestressed Concrete Pressure Pipe, Steel-Cylinder Type. 12. C303 - Concrete Pressure Pipe, Bar-Wrapped, Steel-Cylinder Type.

C. National Association of Pipe Fabricators (NAPF): 1. 500-03 - Surface Preparation Standard for Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings in



D. International Organization for Standardization (ISO): 1. 8179-1 - Ductile iron pipe, fittings, accessories and their joints - External zinc-

based coating –Part 1: Metallic zinc with finishing layer

E. NSF International (NSF): 1. 61 – Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects.

F. Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC): 1. PA 2 - Procedure for Determining Conformance to Dry Coating Thickness

Requirements. 2. QP 1 - Standard Procedure for Evaluating the Qualifications of

Industrial/Marine Painting Contractors (Field application to Complex industrial and Marine Steel Structures).

3. SP 1 - Solvent Cleaning. 4. SP 3 - Power Tool Cleaning. 5. SP 5 - White Metal Blast Cleaning. 6. SP 6 - Commercial Blast Cleaning. 7. SP 10 - Near-White Metal Blast Cleaning. 8. SP 11 - Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal. 9. SP 13 - Surface Prep of Concrete.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Manufacturer's qualifications. 1. Manufacturer qualifications and list of projects using the specified material:

5 years minimum.

B. Manufacturer's Quality Assurance Manual. 1. Submit manufacturer's coating and lining application quality assurance manual

to Engineer prior to beginning coating application. a. Strict conformance to the requirements of the manual will be required. b. Deviation from the requirements of the manual will be grounds for the

Engineer to reject the applied coating.

C. Product information.

D. Manufacturer's Certificate of Source Testing for ceramic epoxy and glass lined pipe: 1. Certify successful performance of holiday detection tests on 100 percent of

lining in accordance with ASTM B1000. 2. Identify each test piece by mark designation and show the actual test results

during the final inspection by manufacturer prior to shipment.

1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Block piping and associated fittings for shipment to prevent damage to coatings and linings.

B. Carefully handle piping and associated fittings during loading, unloading, and installation: 1. Do not drop piping material from cars or trucks. 2. Lower piping by mechanical means. 3. Do not drop or pound pipe to fit grade.


C. Handle ceramic epoxy and glass lined pipe and fittings only from the outside: 1. Do not place chains, straps, hooks, or other lifting device inside the pipe or

fittings for lifting, positioning, or laying.

D. Store piping, fittings, and other accessories such that they do not accumulate and hold rainwater, dirt, and debris.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 COATING AND LINING MATERIALS

A. As specified in Section 01600 - Product Requirement.

B. Prepare, install, and repair in accordance with manufacturer's requirements.

C. Contractor is responsible for: 1. That coating selected is suitable for the application conditions anticipated,

such as temperature, humidity, etc. 2. Managing the project schedule to allow adequate cure time before backfill or

immersion based on surface temperatures at the time of application.

2.02 CEMENT MORTAR

A. Cement mortar mixture in accordance with AWWA C205 and as specified in this Section). 1. Cement: Type II.

B. Water for cement mortar in accordance with AWWA C205 and as specified in this Section.

C. Provide silica sand or other aggregate that is not subject to leaching in accordance with ASTM C33.

D. Shop apply cement mortar in uniform thickness over the full length of the pipe.

2.03 POLYETHYLENE ENCASEMENT

A. General: 1. Polyethylene encasement: Supplied by pipe manufacturer.

B. Materials: Supply one of the following polyethylene encasements in accordance with AWWA C105 and as specified in this Section. 1. Linear low-density polyethylene (LLDPE) film:

a. Minimum thickness: 8 mils. b. Minimum layers: 2.

2. High-density, cross-laminated polyethylene (HDCLPE) film: a. Minimum thickness: 4 mils. b. Minimum layers: 1.


2.04 TAPE WRAP

A. In accordance with AWWA C214 and as specified in this Section.

B. Manufacturers: The following or equal: 1. Liquid adhesive: Polyken 1019, 1027, 1029, or in accordance with coating

manufacturer’s requirements. 2. Weld stripe tape: Polyken 931 (no backing), 4-inches wide minimum. 3. Corrosion layer (Inner wrap): Polyken, 989. 4. Mechanical layer of tape wrap: Polyken, 955. 5. Mechanical layer (Outer wrap): Polyken 956.

C. Ultraviolet resistance: 1. Able to resist above grade exposure for a minimum of 12 months or the

proposed storage and construction time, whichever is greater.

D. Tape width maximum: 12-inches. 1. Engineer can approve conditional use of wider tape will be if the coating

applicator can demonstrate that proper tensioning can be maintained and mechanical wrinkling prevented throughout the coating application. a. If at any time during the pipe fabrication, tape quality becomes

inconsistent, the Engineer can require the remainder of the pipe to be coated using the maximum specified tape width.

E. Manufacturing requirements: 1. Monitoring system:

a. Provided by applicator. b. Approved by the tape manufacturer that constantly records pipe and tape

conditions during coating application. c. Recorded monitoring parameters include, but not be limited to the

following: Pipe temperature; line speed, primer and tape roll body temperature, and tape tension.

2. Pipe surface temperature: Between 45 and 120 degrees Fahrenheit and 5 degrees Fahrenheit above dew point, whichever is greater.

3. Apply a uniform liquid adhesive layer in accordance with manufacturer’s requirements. a. Rug type application is not acceptable. b. Finish with skips, runs, or sags is not acceptable.

4. Weld seams stripping tape: a. In accordance with AWWA C214 and as specified in this Section. b. Corrosion layer adherence to pipe surface.

1) 100 percent adhering to the metal surface. 2) No visible damage, wrinkles, voids, contamination, or holidays. 3) Perform tape coating adhesion test.

F. Tape-coating system thickness: 1. Pipe less than 24 inch diameter: 50 mil (nominal).

a. Adhesive layer. b. Corrosion layer:

1) Layer 1 of 20 mil (nominal), black colored tape.


c. Mechanical layer: 1) Layer 1 (Outer Layer) of 30 mil (nominal), white color tape.

G. Adhesion testing: 1. Apply continuous pulling tension without stopping.

a. Monitor throughout at least 12-inches length of the pull. 2. Sample preparation:

a. Conduct on pipe in either of the following conditions: 1) Prior to application of the cement mortar overcoat, where applicable. 2) Pipe that has been mortar coated prior to adhesion testing.

a) Contractor remove mortar coating of sufficient dimensional area to permit the adhesion test to be conducted as directed by the Engineer.

3. Adhesion pull evaluation: a. Adhesive failure, defined as separation of the adhesive from the metal

substrate, will be rejected. b. Failure: Cohesive failure of the adhesive only. c. Delamination failure, defined as separation of the adhesive from the

backing material, requires the following additional testing: 1) Pipe that fails the test by delamination will be retested on 2 other

pipes within the same lot of coated pipe. 2) Failure of any 2 pipes within the tape lot will result in rejection of each

pipe coated with the rejected tape lot.

2.05 DUCTILE IRON PIPE

A. Coating: 1. Polyethylene encasement.

B. Lining: 1. Cement mortar:

a. In accordance with AWWA C104 and as specified in this Section. b. Extend to faces of flanges and ends of spigots. c. Provide cement mortar lining of uniform thickness. d. Finish to a smooth dense surface. e. Cement: In accordance with ASTM C150, Type II.

2. Cement mortar with seal coat: a. In accordance with AWWA C104 and as specified in this Section. b. Apply seal coat. c. Provide cement mortar lining of uniform thickness. d. Finish to a smooth dense surface.

2.06 STEEL PIPE

A. Coating: 1. Cement mortar:

a. Apply cement mortar coating: 1) In accordance with AWWA C205 and as specified in this Section. 2) As indicated on the Drawings.

b. Thickness minimum: 1 inch. c. Cement: In accordance with ASTM C150, Type IIReinforcement:


1) Steel plate specials: Reinforced with 2-inch by 4-inch, No. 13 gage welded wire mesh in lieu of steel wire reinforcing wire. a) 1 layer of mesh positioned approximately in center of mortar

coating. b) Lap ends of reinforcement strips 4 inches and tie or loop free

ends to assure continuity of reinforcement. 2) Pipe and specials smaller than 48 inches in diameter: Reinforce

coating with spirally-wound steel wire positioned approximately in center of mortar coating: a) No. 12 gage spaced at maximum 1 inch centers. b) No. 14 gage steel wire at maximum 1/2 inch centers.

3) Pipe and specials 48 inches in diameter and larger: Reinforce coating with 2 layers spirally-wound steel wire positioned approximately in center of mortar coating positioned approximately at the third points of mortar coating: a) No. 12 gage spaced at maximum 1 inch centers. b) No. 14 gage steel wire at maximum 1/2 inch centers.


a. In accordance with AWWA C205 and as specified in this Section. b. Cement: In accordance with ASTM C150, Type II. c. Provide cement mortar lining of uniform thickness. d. Finish to a smooth dense surface. e. Line special pieces or fittings by mechanical, pneumatic, or hand

placement. 1) Extend to faces of flanges and ends of spigots. 2) Less than 12 inches in width: Coat with epoxy bonding agent prior to

applying cement mortar. 3) Larger than 12 inches in width: Reinforced with 2-inch by 4-inch No.

13 gauge welded steel wire mesh prior to applying cement mortar. f. Provide plastic end caps of sufficient thickness and strength to resist

shipping, handling, and storage stresses. g. Repair damage to the cement mortar lining, including disbondment, or

cracking caused by improper curing, shipping, handling, or installation in accordance with AWWA C205 and approved by the Engineer.

2. Plural component epoxy: a. In accordance with AWWA C210 and as specified in this Section.

3. Plural component polyurethane: a. In accordance with AWWA C222 and as specified in this Section.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Apply coating or lining and repair in accordance with manufacturer's requirements and as specified in this Section.

B. Inspect coating prior to backfilling of pipe and associated items.


3.02 DUCTILE IRON PIPE

A. Coating: 1. Polyethylene encasement:

a. Wrap buried ductile iron pipe and fittings in accordance with AWWA C105 and as specified in this Section.

b. Wrap polyethylene encasement to be continuous and terminated neatly at connections to below grade equipment or structures.

c. At wall penetrations, extend encasement to the wall and neatly terminate. d. At slab penetrations, extend encasement to 2 inches below the top of slab

and neatly terminate. e. When rising vertically in unimproved areas, extend encasement on pipe

6 inches above existing grade and neatly terminate.


a. Cement mortar with seal coat.

3.03 STEEL PIPE

A. Coating: 1. Cement mortar:

a. Engineer will identify defective cement mortar coating to be field repaired in accordance with AWWA C205. 1) Reject pipe with mortar coating defects on greater than 25 percent of

the pipe surface.


a. Field applied interior joint lining: 1) After the backfill has been completed to final grade, fill interior joint

recess with tightly packed cement mortar. a) Trowel flush with the interior surface with no indentation or

projection of the mortar exceeding 1/16-inch. b) Remove excess cement mortar.

END OF SECTION

Packaged Water Pressure Booster System: Seal Water 11216-1 11487A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/OR/Clean Water Services/11487A10/Specifications/11216 (Bidset) April 2021 - BID

SECTION 11216

PACKAGED WATER PRESSURE BOOSTER SYSTEM

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: Pre-fabricated and pre-wired variable speed packaged pumping system for plant water consisting of the following components: 1. Pumps. 2. Motors. 3. VFDs. 4. Controls. 5. Valves and piping. 6. Conduits and conductors.

B. All supplied components of the packaged pumping system shall be furnished and fully integrated by the system supplier in one skid including all piping, wiring, and controls.

C. Contractor shall be responsible for: 1. Installation and start-up of packaged pumping system skid. 2. Piping connecting to the suction and discharge headers. 3. Conduits and wiring from plant power source to packaged pumping system

packaged control panel.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 1. 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 V Maximum).

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. NEMA Type 4X enclosure in accordance with NEMA 250.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit as specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.

B. Shop drawings: 1. Installation drawings. 2. Detailed layout of skid, equipment, piping, valves, conduits, and instruments. 3. Piping system identifying field connections. 4. Control panel, wiring schematic and field connections. 5. Catalog information describing pumps, valves, tanks, electrical components,

and other products incorporated into the system. 6. Parts list, dimension, materials, and details of construction and installation. 7. Descriptive brochures of each item of auxiliary equipment. 8. Schematic electrical wiring diagrams and other electrical power and control

data.


9. Pump performance data. 10. Motor data in accordance with Section 16222 - Low Voltage Motors up to

500 Horsepower 11. VFD data in accordance with Section 16263 – Variable Frequency Drives 0.5-

100 Horsepower. 12. Conduits and wirings in accordance with Section 16123 – 600 Volt or Less

Wires and Cables and Section 16130 – Conduits. 13. Coatings in accordance with Section 09960 – High-Performance Coatings.

C. Anchorage Calculations: As specified in Section 15050 - Common Work Results for Mechanical Equipment.

D. Provide vendor operation and maintenance manual as specified in Section 01782 - Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

E. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Source Testing as specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning.

F. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation and Functionality Compliance as specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 SYSTEM SUPPLIER

A. One of the following system suppliers or equal: 1. ProPak Solution. 2. Cornell Pump.

2.02 PUMPS

A. Type: 1. Variable speed, in-line vertical multi-stage type. 2. Close coupled to motor.

B. Construction: 1. Casing and cover: Ductile iron, ASTM 64-45-12. 2. Impeller, impeller sleeve, and impeller wear rings: Type 304 stainless steel. 3. Shaft: Type 431 stainless steel.

C. Mechanical seal: Type 316 stainless steel metal parts, EPDM elastomers, Ni-Resist seat.

D. Performance: Duplex pump system (one duty and one standby) with each pump sized to deliver 350 gallons per minute at 277 feet total dynamic head and operating speed of 3,500 revolutions per minute.


2.03 MOTORS

A. Motors: 1. 40-horsepower, 460 volt, 3 phase, 60 hertz, 3,500 revolutions per minute. High

efficiency type. 2. Totally enclosed, fan cooled enclosure (TEFC). 3. As specified in Section 16222 - Low Voltage Motors up to 500 Horsepower. 4. VFD as specified in Section 16263 – Variable Frequency Drives 0.5-100

Horsepower.

2.04 VALVES AND PIPING

A. Plug valves: Provide valves as specified in Section 15116 - Plug Valves in following locations: 1. On suction and discharge headers. 2. On each pump’s suction and discharge pipes.

B. Check valves: Provide slant disc check valves as specified in Section 15114 - Check Valves in following locations: 1. Between each pump and the pump discharge isolation valve.

C. Piping: Type 316 SST, schedule 40.

2.05 CONTROLS

A. General: 1. Provide a packaged control panel (PCP) at each installation for monitoring,

control, and data collection. 2. PCP shall include all motor starters, VFDs, control relays, fuses and overload

protection, control transformer, operating lights, and all other necessary appurtenances required for operation.

3. Packaged control panels and all components shall be UL listed and labeled.

B. Packaged control panel: 1. Enclosures and control panel features:

a. Power supply: 480 VAC, 3-phase, 60 hertz. b. Electrical components:

1) Surge protection device on incoming power. 2) Main circuit breaker:

a) As specified in Section 16412 - Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers.

b) Flange-mounted operator: (1) Pad-lockable in the off position.

c) Disconnects all power to the panel. d) Interlock with the panel door.

(1) Defeat mechanism. 3) Control power transformer:

a) Primary voltage: match the power supply voltage to the PCP. b) Sized for all panel components plus 10 percent spare capacity. c) Primary and secondary fuses.

c. Control of all components of the packaged pumping system shall be perfomed by a PLC mounted in a skid-mounted control panel. The PLC shall provide all control and monitoring functions as required, including,


but not limited to, timing, interlocks, startup sequencing, pressure PID controls, normal and emergency shutdowns, and permissive functions required for proper operation of each unit.

d. NEMA Type 4X Type 316 stainless steel. e. Panel shall be integrally mounted to pump skid. f. Panels shall be as specified in Section 17710 - Control Systems: Panels,

Enclosures, and Panel Components unless otherwise specified in this Section. g. Panel shall be UL listed and shall be assembled in a UL listed facility. h. The control panel shall not be less than 16 inches wide by 18 inches high

by 8 inches deep to ensure adequate room for components and cooling. i. Provide a circuit breaker for main control circuit protection.

1) Fuses shall not be used. j. All wires shall be numbered with heat shrink labels consistent with

electrical schematics, adhesive labels shall not be used. Refer to Sections 16075, 16123, and 17710 for wire color and labeling requirements.

k. Provide component tag numbers consistent with electrical schematics. l. Interconnecting wires within the skid shall be neatly run in conduits

between equipment and PCP. m. Terminal blocks:

1) Manufacturers: The following or equal: a) Allen-Bradley J4 series.

n. Interconnecting conduit and fittings shall be rated NEMA Type 4X in accordance with Section 16050 – Common Work Results for Electrical.

o. Provide a terminal block legend. p. Provide electrical schematics inside control panel. q. Local Operator Interface (LOI) mounted on the exterior door.

1) Enclosure rating: NEMA 4X 2) Provide sunshield to protect display from sun exposure.

2. Provide the following minimum functionality from the LOI: a. For each pump:

1) Running indication. 2) Pump speed indication. 3) Pump fail alarm. 4) Check valve fail alarm. 5) VFD fail alarm.

b. For the pumping system: 1) Discharge pressure setpoint. 2) Discharge pressure indication. 3) Low suction pressure setpoint. 4) Suction pressure indication. 5) Low suction pressure alarm. 6) High discharge pressure alarm. 7) Local/Remote mode selection. 8) Manual/Auto mode selection.

3. At a minimum provide the following control and status signals, communicated with the PLC and SCADA system via EtherNet/IP. Refer to the Digital I/O tables for additional information. a. From SCADA:

1) Discharge pressure setpoint. b. To SCADA:

1) Discharge pressure indication. 2) Suction pressure indication.


3) Discharge pressure alarm. 4) Suction pressure alarm. 5) Common alarm. 6) Pump 1 running 7) Pump 1 fault. 8) Pump 2 running 9) Pump 2 fault. 10) System in Hand mode. 11) System in Off mode. 12) System in Auto mode.

4. Ethernet communication: a. Provide dedicated Ethernet connection to plant PLC and SCADA control

system via an unmanaged industrial Ethernet switch. 1) Power: 24VDC. 2) Ports: 100BASE-TX RJ-45.

a) Provide 25% spare ports. 3) Manufacturers:

a) Allen-Bradley 1783-US series. b) Phoenix Contact SFN series.

b. Communicate via ODVA EtherNet/IP using address arrays to allow CIP messaging reads and writes initiated by the plant PLC and SCADA.

c. Configure IP addresses for integration into plant SCADA network. Assignment by Owner.

5. PLC requirements: a. PLC shall be Allen-Bradley CompactLogix 1769-L33ER, no equal, to

match plant standard. b. Programming standards:

1) PLC programming shall not be proprietary in nature. 2) All logic and calculations shall be performed by the PLC. Loss of

communication between the PLC and LOI shall not impact operation. 3) Firmware version V30 or higher. Confirm with Owner during

construction prior to application development. c. Discrete I/O cards shall use 120VAC. Provide interposing relays where

required for circuit isolation. d. Analog inputs and outputs shall be 4-20 mA DC. Analog output cards shall

have isolated channels. e. Provide single purpose I/O cards. For example, combination AI/AO cards

are not acceptable. 6. LOI requirements:

a. LOI shall be Allen-Bradley PanelView Plus model 2711P-T12W22A9P-B, no equal, to match plant standard.

b. Environmental rating: NEMA 4X. c. Programming requirements:

1) LOI programming shall not be proprietary in nature. 2) All logic and calculations shall be performed by the PLC. Loss of

communication between the PLC and LOI shall not impact operation. 3) Firmware version V10 or higher. Confirm with Owner during

construction prior to application development. 7. Provide files for all digital, programmable components of the pumping system

including, but not limited to: PLC code, LOI applications, and configuration files.


8. Control requirements: a. LOCAL/OFF-RESET/REMOTE and START/STOP:

1) LOCAL Mode: System shall run based on operator input from LOI start/stop buttons.

2) OFF-RESET Mode: System shall not be permitted to run. When the LORR is set to OFF-RESET, all alarms shall be reset.

3) REMOTE Mode: System shall run when RUN command is received via Ethernet signal.

b. LOCAL Operating Modes: 1) MANUAL Mode:

a) Provide a manual mode for each pump that allows start/stop and speed adjustment from the LOI.

2) AUTO Mode: a) Provide an automatic mode for each pump. The system will

automatically control the speed of pumps set to Auto mode to maintain a pressure setpoint entered at the LOI.

b) The system will operate in a lead/lag configuration to bring additional pumps online to maintain setpoint.

c) Operators may assign the lead and lag pump designations from the LOI. Provide a selector to enable/disable alternation of lead and lag pumps to balance equipment run times.

c. Remote Operating Mode: 1) The system will operate as described above in LOCAL-AUTO mode,

except that the discharge pressure setpoint shall be remotely set by the Plant SCADA system via EtherNet/IP: a) Provide an automatic mode for each pump. The system will

automatically control the speed of pumps set to Auto mode to maintain a pressure setpoint set through SCADA.

b) The system will operate in a lead/lag configuration to bring additional pumps online to maintain setpoint.

c) Operators may assign the lead and lag pump designations from the LOI. Provide a selector to enable/disable alternation of lead and lag pumps to balance equipment run times.

9. Instrumentation: a. Pressure gauges on suction and discharge piping:

1) Manufacturers: a) Ashcroft 1279. b) Wika. c) Ametek U.S. Gauge

2) Pressure range: 0-160 psig. 3) NEMA 4X. 4) Stainless steel wetted materials. 5) Accuracy: Within 1.0 percent of range.

b. Pressure transmitter on suction and discharge piping: 1) Manufacturers:

a) Rosemount 3051 Series. b) Yokogawa EJA Series. c) Endress & Hauser Cerabar S Series.

2) Power: 24VDC 2-wire, loop-powered. 3) Pressure range: 0-160 psig. 4) NEMA 4X. 5) Stainless steel wetted materials.


6) Performance requirements: a) Maximum ratio of total instrument range to calibrated span:

10 to 1. b) Accuracy:

(1) Reference accuracy: Plus or minus 0.075 percent of calibrated span, including effects of hysteresis, nonlinearity, and repeatability.

(2) Total performance accuracy: Plus or minus 0.30 percent of calibrated span, including reference accuracy effects, static pressure and ambient temperature effects.

(3) Stability: Plus or minus 0.15 percent of upper range limit over 5 years.

c. Provide isolation and block-and-bleed valves for pressure instruments.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 FABRICATION

A. Shop fabricate complete pre-packged pumping system. All piping and wiring shall be shop tested and installed prior to shipment.

3.02 COMMISSIONING

A. As specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning, 15958 - Mechanical Equipment Testing, and this Section.

B. Manufacturer services: 1. Provide certificates:

a. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Source Testing. b. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation and Functionality Compliance.

2. Manufacturer’s Representative onsite requirements: a. Installation: 1 trip, 2-day minimum. b. Functional Testing: 1 trips, 2-day minimum each.

3. Training: a. Maintenance: 4 hours per session, 1 session. b. Operation: 2 hours per session, 1 session. c. Electrical and Instrumentation: 4 hours per session, 1 session.

END OF SECTION

Ultraviolet Disinfection System 11289-1 11487A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/OR/Clean Water Services/11487A10/Specifications/11289 (Bidset) April 2021 - BID

SECTION 11289

ULTRAVIOLET DISINFECTION SYSTEM

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. The Work of this Section includes the offloading, storage and protection, coordination, installation, testing, and startup of five UV reactors and all appurtenant work as shown on the Contract Drawings and associated reference information included as Volume IV of the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall coordinate all Work shown in the Contract Documents with Evoqua Water Technologies, LLC (Supplier) via the Owner during installation, testing, and startup.

B. Owner has executed Purchase Agreement with the Supplier for procurement of goods and services for the UV system included in Exhibit A of Volume IV of the Contract Documents. The latest equipment submittal is included in Exhibit B of Volume IV of the Contract Documents for Contractor’s reference. The materials, services, and equipment provided for in the UV system are to be furnished and delivered by the Supplier to the Site of the Forest Grove Water Resource Recovery Facility (WRRF) in Forest Grove, Oregon, for installation by the Contractor. The Contractor shall receive the goods covered by the Purchase Agreement and assume responsibility for onsite storage and protection, installation, and startup. Contractor shall coordinate with Supplier via the Owner for Supplier services covered by the Purchase Agreement.

C. Supplier’s Services: Any time or materials required, in excess of what is specifically stipulated herein and in the Forest Grove UV Disinfection System Procurement Package shall be considered included in the Contractor’s lump sum contract price.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Supplier: The party named under the Forest Grove UV Disinfection System Procurement Package with the Owner for furnishing the material and equipment procured by the Owner. Supplier furnishing Owner procured product is Evoqua Water Technologies, LLC.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Administrative, Shop Drawings, samples, quality control, and contract closeout submittals shall conform to the requirements of Section 01330 – Submittal Procedures. All submittals shall be provided by the Contractor, including those produced by the Supplier.

B. Submittal information not included in the Supplier’s Scope of Work (e.g., connecting piping, valves, and appurtenances) shall be coordinated with the Supplier and provided by the Contractor.

C. Informational and Quality Control Submittals: 3. Special shipping, offloading, storage and protection, and handling instructions.


4. Submit listing of the materials and/or equipment received from the Supplier, and a written statement to Engineer and Supplier documenting the condition in which the materials and/or equipment was received.

5. Supplier and/or Manufacturer’s printed installation instructions. 6. Provide a written statement indicating that the Work provided under this

Contract will conform to Supplier’s requirements for equipment handling and installation.

7. Provide 30 days’ advance written notice of the proposed date for the Preinstallation Meeting and include the proposed date for the start of installation of the UV reactors.

8. Provide advance written notice of the proposed date for the Performance Test. 9. Routine maintenance requirements prior to System Startup. 10. Supplier’s Certificate of Proper Installation: Provide for the System Supplier to

complete. Refer to Section 01640 – Manufacturers’ Services & Training, for additional information.

11. Detailed test protocol. Refer to Article Field Testing and Startup in Part 3 of this section for additional information on testing requirements. a. Testing Protocol Submittal:

1) This protocol shall include procedures to be followed for the following testing and shall, at a minimum, conform to the requirements outlined herein: a) Functional Testing. b) System Startup. c) Performance Testing.

12. Training Manual and Training Plan. 13. Complete O&M Manual for the UV system, for review and approval, at least 12

weeks prior to the start of the testing of the UV system as specified in this section under Article Field Testing and Startup. The O&M Manual shall be identified as DRAFT and shall be in accordance with Article Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

14. List special tools, materials, and supplies furnished with equipment for use prior to and during startup and for future maintenance.

15. Executed warranties. 16. Final Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

1.04 SPECIAL COORDINATION

A. Reference information included in Exhibit B of Volume IV of the Contract Documents is preliminary and does not constitute approved shop drawings. While this reference information is representative of the final equipment configuration, some details will change due to the Supplier’s final design of the system.

B. Note that final equipment layout, configuration, anchorage, and utility interfaces shall be confirmed via Supplier’s shop drawing information.

C. Contractor assumes complete responsibility for coordination and execution of offloading, storage, coordination, installation, testing, startup, and training of the Supplier’s equipment.

D. Provide and coordinate the construction of interconnecting equipment, piping, instrumentation work, and appurtenances to achieve installation and operation of the Supplier’s equipment to provide a complete and functional system.


E. Contractor assumes complete responsibility for coordination and execution of adjusting, maintaining, lubricating, testing, and startup of Supplier’s equipment.


A. Preinstallation Meeting: Arrange and attend an onsite preinstallation meeting to review general procedures, installation instructions, and installation sequence. Contractor shall coordinate with the Supplier to obtain and understand the information to be discussed as part of this meeting. The Supplier shall participate in this meeting, either in person or via teleconference, at their discretion. 1. Conduct the meeting at least 30 days ahead of the proposed date for starting

UV equipment installation. 2. Additional meetings prior to installation may be required, as determined by the

Engineer, to transmit Supplier’s installation instructions to the Contractor. 3. Engineer and Owner’s representative may attend the meetings.

1.06 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Supplier’s equipment will be delivered according to the Procurement Package. Contractor shall coordinate and take responsibility for equipment delivery directly from the Supplier and provide timely notification to Owner and Engineer of deliveries.

B. Contractor shall be responsible for overall coordination of equipment delivery to the Project site. Verify delivery schedule of Supplier’s equipment by contacting the Supplier, the Owner, and the Engineer before making final arrangements for or committing resources to receiving, offloading, handling, storing, and protecting or installing equipment.

1.07 EQUIPMENT HANDLING

A. The Contractor is responsible for taking all reasonable precautions to prevent damage during offloading, storage, and installation. Contractor shall obtain guidance from Supplier prior to requesting delivery of equipment. Any concerns regarding equipment handling and potential damage should be addressed with Supplier and Engineer before any activities are undertaken at site that may cause an increased potential for damage to occur.

1.08 INSPECTION PRIOR TO OFFLOADING

A. Prior to offloading the Supplier’s equipment, the Contractor and Owner’s representative shall jointly inspect the equipment for damages and shortages of equipment.

B. Record in writing the products delivered and the condition of each item.

C. Report damage to or loss of materials and/or equipment immediately to Engineer and Supplier. Include dated photographs with the report.

D. Do not offload products to be returned to Supplier for repair or replacement, unless necessary to expedite return shipping.


1.09 OFFLOADING OF EQUIPMENT

A. Offload the Supplier’s equipment, after any damage or loss is reported, as specified in Supplier’s instructions.

1.10 STORAGE AND PROTECTION

A. Following delivery and offloading of Supplier’s equipment, and until final acceptance of the completed work, store, protect, and maintain products to prevent damage or loss in accordance with Supplier’s instructions and as specified in Section 01600 – Product Requirements. Contractor shall replace all materials and/or equipment that are lost or damaged while in the custody of the Contractor. Replacement materials and/or equipment must be submitted for review and approval by the Owner and Supplier.

B. Maintain current, complete inventory and record of all Supplier’s equipment products following delivery and offloading.

1.11 WORK BY CONTRACTOR

A. The following items, in addition to Contractor’s responsibilities specified herein, shall be provided by the Contractor but shall be coordinated by the Supplier. These items will include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Structural:

a. Foundation/housekeeping pads and additional housing for Supplier’s equipment.

b. Anchor bolts will be provided and installed by Contractor; anchor bolt design by Supplier.

2. Mechanical: a. Installation materials for instrumentation including but not limited to

air/sample line tubing, fittings, and mountings. b. Installation of all Supplier’s equipment components.

3. Electrical: a. Electrical wiring connections (including wiring, raceway, and other

appurtenances required to provide power and control connections as needed) from the electrical power source, field devices, and control devices to the Supplier’s equipment.

b. The lamp cables between the Supplier furnished UV reactors and Packaged Control Panels (PCP) shall be supplied by the Supplier and will be run/pulled and terminated by the Contractor.

c. EtherNet/IP™ communication cabling from the PCPs to the Owner’s Plant Control System.

d. Installation of all packaged control panels for a complete UV disinfection system.

4. Other: a. Raw materials and utilities during equipment testing. b. Laboratory services, operating and maintenance personnel during

equipment checkout, startup and operations. c. Any onsite painting or touch-up painting of equipment supplied.


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide all products required to complete the Work under this section, beyond those specifically designated as provided under the Forest Grove UV Disinfection System Procurement Package. Such products include, but are not limited to, piping and valves, hangers and supports, conduit and wiring, piping accessories, specialties, concrete, grout, finish painting, and expendable materials, all as necessary to provide a complete and properly functioning system.

B. Provide incidental products, such as gaskets, di-electric fittings, supports, bolts, and nuts, as shown and as required for proper operation of equipment installed under this section. Products shall conform to applicable sections of these Specifications for the intended service.

C. Piping Design: The Contractor shall coordinate with the Supplier to properly connect and install all of the system equipment and associated piping system connections. Coordinate all connection types for the UV reactors.

D. Pipe Supports: Provide pipe supports for all piping, meeting the requirements specified in Section 15061 – Pipe Supports.

E. Anchorage: Coordinate provision of anchor bolts, fasteners, washers, etc., and drawings needed for installation of Supplier’s Equipment. 1. Verify the number and size of anchor bolts required to install the Supplier’s

equipment. 2. Anchor bolt design shall be provided by the Supplier. 3. Locate and install anchor bolts in accordance with Supplier’s shop drawings

and installation instructions.

F. Contractor shall install all equipment and appurtenances shown on Supplier’s drawings including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Five UV reactors and its associated PCPs, instruments, and appurtenances. 2. One UV transmittance analyzer. 3. One mobile acid cleaning tote.

G. Contractor shall coordinate pad sizes of all equipment with Supplier’s drawings. Contractor shall provide all equipment pads, with height, location, and details of the pads as shown on Drawings.

2.02 EQUIPMENT TAGGING

A. Contractor shall provide equipment tags for all tagged items in the Contract Documents that has the Owner-assigned tag number. Provide tags in accordance with Sections 15075 – Equipment Identification and 16075 – Electrical Identification.

2.03 INSTRUMENTATION

A. General: Instruments furnished by Supplier is indicated in the Contract Drawings. The Supplier will provide installation requirements and details for all instruments supplied. Contractor shall provide all additional mounting hardware (e.g., clamps, stanchions, backplanes, supports, tubing, fittings, etc.).


2.04 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS AND ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide all necessary electrical components, conduit, and wiring as shown in the Contract Documents. This work includes all electrical systems required for complete, functional UV system. Electrical components shall be provided in accordance with the requirements of Division 16, Electrical.

B. Wiring: The wiring requirements for the UV system are shown on the Contract Documents are based on reference information provided by the Supplier. Refer to Volume IV of the Contract Documents for this reference information. If additional wiring is required (in addition to that shown), or if required wiring does not match what is indicated, Contractor shall make the necessary modifications to the electrical wiring and electrical documentation as part of the Bid price.

C. Electrical Raceways: All electrical wiring shall be installed in conduit and raceway meeting the requirements of Division 16, unless shown otherwise. The Contractor shall be responsible for terminating, landing, and connecting all cables and conductors supplied by the Supplier.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. The equipment furnished by the Supplier shall be installed by the Contractor.

B. The Supplier shall submit erection and installation drawings as specified herein.

C. Before field testing and start-up, Supplier’s representative shall certify that equipment has been installed, aligned and checked in accordance with the Supplier’s instructions and specifications.

3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Field testing: 1. Equipment checks:

a. Prior to the final acceptance field-testing, the Supplier shall check that all equipment is installed properly and functions as specified herein. The equipment checks shall include, but not be limited to: 1) Proper installation and alignment of UV support structure. 2) Water tightness of all submerged equipment. 3) Proper placement of UV lamp to assure complete immersion of the

lamps. 4) Electrical wiring and connections. 5) Proper operation of instrumentation, alarms, interlocks and operating

indicators associated with the UV equipment. 6) Proper placement and operation of transformers, cooling fans, and

other equipment in the control cabinets. 7) Adequate ventilation in the control cabinets. 8) Proper operation of lamp shutoff switches and ground fault circuit

interrupters. 9) Proper operation of the cleaning system. UV supplier shall initiate a

complete cleaning cycle for each reactor prior to startup.


10) Proper operation of the monitoring and control system, including LOI. 2. Upon completion of equipment checks, the Supplier shall submit to the Owner

written certification that all UV equipment and accessory equipment associated with the UV disinfection system have been properly installed, are in good condition, are functioning properly, and are in accordance with the Contract Documents.

3.03 FACTORY ACCEPTANCE TESTING

A. The Owner or Owner's representatives shall participate in witness testing activities. This participation shall serve as a learning experience for operations and maintenance personnel. One factory visit by Owner’s Personnel/Representatives for a total of 5 days shall be arranged to witness the testing activities. Supplier will not be required to reimburse the Owner for travel and lodging costs.

B. Source Testing: 1. Also referred to as factory testing or factory acceptance testing (FAT). 2. Test components, devices, and equipment/system for proper performance at

point of manufacture or assembly. 3. Notify the Engineer in writing when the equipment/system is ready for source

inspection and testing. 4. Source Test Plan:

a. Source Testing requirements as specified: 1) Witnessed: Owner’s representative and Engineer’s representative

present during testing, unless otherwise specified, and provide Supplier’s Certificate of Source Testing.

b. Prepared by Supplier and shall include details specified herein. c. Provide the following items for each Source Test:

1) Purpose and goals of the test. 2) Identification of each item of equipment/system, including system

designation, location, tag number, control-loop identifier, etc. 3) Description of the pass/fail criteria that will be used. 4) Listing of pertinent reference documents (Contract Documents and

industry standards or Sections applicable to the testing). 5) Complete description, including drawings or photographs, of test

stands and/or test apparatus. 6) Credentials of test personnel. 7) Descriptions of test equipment to be used, product information, and

all appropriate calibration records for the test equipment. 8) Test set-up procedures. 9) Detailed step-by-step test procedures:

a) The level of detail shall be sufficient for any witness with a rudimentary technical aptitude to be able to follow the steps and develop confidence that the tests were being performed as planned.

b) All steps are significant, and all steps shall be included in the procedures.

10) Sample data logs and data recording forms. 11) Sample computations or analyses with the results in the same format

as the final report to demonstrate how data collected will be used to generate final results: a) Complete disclosure of the calculation methodologies.


b) Include a sample for each type of computation required for the test and analysis of the results.

12) Detailed outline of the Source Test report. 13) Sample test reports.

d. Submit Source Test Plan and forms: 1) Submit a copy of the Source Test Plan at least 21 days before any

scheduled test date. 2) Engineer approval of Source Test Plan required prior to beginning

source testing. 3) Schedule the testing after approval of the test procedures submittal.

e. Indicate the desired dates for source inspection and testing: 1) Notify the Engineer of the scheduled tests a minimum of 15 days

before the date of the test. 5. Test results:

a. Prepare and submit test results with collected data attached.

3.04 OPERATIONAL READINESS TESTING

A. After the Owner accepts the Supplier's written certification of proper installation of the UV disinfection system as specified herein, the Supplier shall perform component, system, and operational tests on the UV disinfection system. It is the responsibility of the Supplier and Contractor to jointly coordinate and arrange the times for testing and startup activities; however, the Contractor must confirm that these times are acceptable to the Owner.

B. Contractor shall submit the facility startup plan and schedule minimum 60 days prior to the start of Operational Readiness Testing 1 (ORT-1).

C. Operational Readiness Testing 1: 1. The Supplier and Owner/Contractor shall perform I/O testing for the PCPs and

MCP. 2. The Supplier shall calibrate all instrumentation associated with the

performance testing. 3. If retesting is required, the Supplier shall recalibrate instruments associated

with the retest if they have not been calibrated within the previous 60 days and submit that information to the Engineer prior to retesting.

D. Operational Readiness Testing 2: 1. After ORT-1 has been completed, test applications software developed by the

Owner and integrate individual components into a functioning system. The Contractor shall allow a minimum period of 2 weeks in the schedule for testing of the applications software. If portions of the Contractor’s or Supplier’s Work are found to be incomplete during applications software testing, then the Contractor or Supplier shall complete the Work and the 2-week applications software testing period shall be restarted. Owner will be responsible for required changes to the SCADA software. However, the Contractor and Supplier shall be available for assistance related to their supplied equipment.

3.05 FUNCTIONAL TESTING

A. After the Owner accepts the Supplier's written certification of proper installation of the UV disinfection system and the Contractor has completed Operational


Readiness Testing 1 (ORT-1) and Operational Readiness Testing 2 (ORT-2), the functional testing shall be performed to determine whether or not the equipment meets the hydraulic and alarm conditions specified herein. Functional Testing protocol shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval a minimum of 30 days prior to the scheduled Functional Testing. 1. Functional testing will occur over a period of several days and shall be

performed by the Supplier with the assistance of the Owner. 2. Hydraulic Capacity: Each reactor will be tested to ensure that it can handle a

flow equivalent to 150 percent of the design flow rate per UV reactor. Under abnormal conditions, need to ensure higher the design flow rates can be pushed through each UV reactor.

3. Flow Split: With different combinations of two and three duty reactors, measure the flow through each UV reactor to determine the maximum flow imbalance between the UV trains. Also measure the flow imbalance with all duty UV reactors online. This information will be used to determine safety factors and possible hydraulic limits.

4. Alarm testing shall include simulation of flow and water quality change, lamp and bank failures, sensor performance alarms and the proper maintenance of the minimum UV dose over a range of flow and water quality conditions, in accordance with this specification.

3.06 PERFORMANCE ACCEPTANCE TEST

A. Following completion of the Functional Testing, the Supplier and the Contractor shall startup the UV disinfection system and begin Performance Acceptance Test (PAT). The PAT shall be conducted to determine whether or not the equipment meets the performance test requirements specified herein. The startup and performance testing program shall be designed to not interfere with the plant’s ability to continuously comply with NPDES Permit requirements.

B. The Supplier and the Contractor shall provide the PAT Report within 10 working days of completion of the test period.

C. To perform the test, the Supplier and the Contractor shall operate the system continuously over a 10-day test period, and collect and summarize data to demonstrate that the system meets the following Performance Test Requirements: 1. Net Production Capacity: System meets average daily flow and peak flow rate

requirements as defined in this specification for Plant Discharge. 2. Minimum Design Dose: System can deliver the minimum design UV dose as

defined in this specification for Plant Discharge. 3. UV Disinfected Effluent Water Quality: UV disinfection system produces an

effluent in complete compliance with requirements as specified in this specification.

4. Cleaning: The on-line, automatic cleaning system cleans the lamps as thoroughly and frequently as is required for the system to deliver the minimum design dose at all times. Measure the UV intensity of each UV reactor at the start and end of the test period to determine the effectiveness of the cleaning system.

5. No major changes in equipment or apparatus will be permitted during this test period. However, minor adjustments of equipment that would normally be expected during regular operation of the equipment in plant use may be made.

6. PAT Data Collection:


a. Direct readings from the instruments shall be used in the calculations to determine conformance with the guaranteed performance requirements.

b. Readings shall be obtained from digital trends from SCADA and by manually recording the values directly from the instrument.

c. Record (and round if necessary) to the level of accuracy of the instrument before any calculations.

d. There shall be no adjustment to readings or calculations due to random or systematic instrumentation error or accuracy limitations.

e. The Supplier shall document all modifications, changes, or additions and amend the operations and maintenance manuals and record drawings to reflect the modifications.

f. All modifications required as a result of PAT failure must be completed within 90 days of the start of the original testing period.

7. PAT Retesting: The Supplier shall be responsible for all retesting. Supplier shall recalibrate all instrumentation associated with the retest in accordance with this Section, if the instrumentation has not been calibrated within the 60 days immediately prior to the retest. a. Reimburse the Owner for all Owner’s costs associated with the retesting,

including engineering fees and administration costs.

D. Supplier shall submit a detailed protocol to be followed for the PAT at least 21 days in advance. This protocol requires written approval by the Owner before initiating the tests. The protocol shall specifically detail the operational mode of the system, sampling program, method and schedule, equipment and system monitoring data to be collected with each sampling, the daily (manual) log format, and all sampling and analytical procedures. Upon acceptance of the protocol by the Owner, the Supplier shall commence the performance test. The Supplier shall collect and process influent and effluent samples 2 times per day and test for suspended solids, turbidity, UV transmittance, influent, and effluent E. coli (Plant Discharge) counts for the test period.

E. Successful completion of the PAT shall be defined as continuous operation over the PAT test period without a major failure in the system and demonstration that system meets all performance requirements established herein. Downtime resulting from Owner's operation will not be counted against the criteria of "continuous days of operation.” If an individual train has a production capacity below 50 percent of its design production capacity for more than 24 hours, the PAT will be considered a failure.

F. If during the PAT, the system fails or shuts down, the PAT shall then be rerun, as described above, and additional testing, labor, materials, equipment, etc., associated with correcting deficiencies in the UV system, including the repeated performance test, shall be borne by the Supplier. Each repetition of the PAT shall be for a continuous period unless failure to meet performance requirements as defined in this specification has been documented and modifications have been accomplished. 1. PAT shall not start or restart on a Friday, Saturday, Sunday, or the day before

an Owner observed holiday.

G. During the PAT, the Owner shall have the option of collecting samples for independent analyses to confirm measurements and analyses conducted by the Supplier and the Contractor. The Engineer and the Owner shall have the option of


witnessing all testing performed by the Supplier and the Contractor. The Supplier shall notify the Engineer a minimum of 2 weeks in advance of testing.

H. If the UV disinfection system fails to successfully complete the PAT, the Supplier shall have the option of repeating the test two more times, with all costs borne by the Supplier.

I. Consequences to the Supplier for failure to successfully complete the PAT are specified are listed the UV Disinfection System Purchase Agreement in Volume IV of the Contract Documents.

3.07 ELECTRICAL ACCEPTANCE TESTS

A. Electrical Acceptance Tests: Verification of warranted power consumption shall be documented by electrical acceptance testing performed by the Supplier with the oversight of the Engineer. This acceptance testing is separate and independent from the operational acceptance test described above, but may be conducted concurrently: 1. Electrical acceptance test shall consist of consecutive 2-hour measurement of

kW usage and power factor on the PCP powering one UV reactor by the Supplier.

2. Test Protocol: UV reactors of the system shall be operated with all lamps in operation at 100 percent power. During this acceptance test, the power consumption, power factor and harmonic values at maximum power shall be measured at the PCC and continuously recorded using a power meter/analyzer (provided by the Supplier for the duration of electrical testing). The meters each shall provide accuracy of ±0.25 percent, shall operate at frequencies between 47 to 63 Hz, and shall be furnished with a statement from the meter Supplier attesting to its accuracy. The meters shall be connected to the PCC at a location acceptable to the District. In the event that Supplier disputes results of the electrical acceptance testing Supplier shall bear the entire cost of retesting by a third party mutually acceptable to District and Supplier.

3. If maximum power consumption exceeds the values provided in the UV Disinfection System Purchase Agreement, the Supplier shall make any and all modifications necessary to cause the system to meet the requirements, all without any additional cost to the District and meet the requirements of the Power Consumption Guarantee specified in the UV Disinfection System Purchase Agreement.

4. If the power factor is less than that as specified herein, the Supplier shall provide any modifications necessary to adjust the power factor to meet the required power factor.

5. Measure the voltage and current harmonics at the PCP for a period of 2 hours under full load conditions. The harmonic testing report shall include the following data recorded every 30 minutes: a. Total harmonic distortion. b. The largest individual harmonic distortion component. c. The calculated short-circuit to demand current ratio using measured

demand current. d. Total demand distortion. e. The harmonic distortion contribution of the odd harmonic orders as shown

in Table 2 of IEEE 519-2014.


3.08 TRAINING OF DISTRICT'S PERSONNEL AND SUPPORT SERVICES

A. General requirements: 1. Provide operations and maintenance training for items of mechanical,

electrical and instrumentation equipment. Utilize Supplier's representatives to conduct training sessions.

2. Coordinate training sessions to prevent overlapping sessions. 3. Provide Draft Operation and Maintenance Manual for specific pieces of

equipment or systems prior to training session for that piece of equipment or system.

4. Satisfactorily complete Alarm and Hydraulic Testing before beginning operator training.

5. Following Owner’s acceptance of Certificate of Proper Installation, the Supplier shall perform a comprehensive training of Owner’s personnel at the site or a classroom designated by the Engineer.

6. The training provided by the Supplier’s representative shall consist of both classroom and field training.

7. The Supplier shall give the Owner a minimum of 30 days' notice prior to initiation of training. The Supplier shall provide the Owner a copy of the printed training material for review when notice is given.

8. The Supplier shall designate and provide one or more persons to be responsible for coordinating and expediting training duties. The person or persons so designated shall be present at all training coordination meetings with the Owner.

9. The Supplier’s coordinator shall coordinate the training periods with Owner personnel and shall submit a training schedule for each component of the UV Disinfection Equipment System for which training is to be provided. Such training schedule shall be submitted not less than 30 calendar days prior to the time that the associated training is to be provided and shall be based on the current plan of operation.

B. Supplier’s field services: 1. In addition to the time necessary to complete the requirements established

elsewhere within these Specifications, the Supplier's representative shall also provide onsite services at times designated by the Owner, for the minimum person-days listed below, travel time excluded.

2. Installation Supervision and Inspection: Minimum 6 person-days to handle various requests by the Owner, including during the unloading of UV disinfection equipment system (assume one trip) and for providing installation assistance for the UV Disinfection Equipment System (assume one trip).

3. Start-Up and Field-Testing: Minimum 12 person-days to handle various requests by the Owner, for assistance during startup activities (assume three trips).

4. Operator Training: Training shall consist of a minimum of total of 16 hours (two separate trips) of hands-on lectures on the UV Disinfection Equipment System operation and the maintenance requirements, including lamp chemical cleaning and replacement and repair processes for lamps, ballasts, wipers, sleeves and ancillary equipment. Training shall take place before the Performance Acceptance Test and six (6) months after Substantial Completion. The field training shall cover all shifts.

5. Maintenance service - service scheduling:


a. By Owner request any time during warranty period as specified on the Warranty Form.

6. Supplier shall return for 1 additional day, 2 years after final acceptance to review UV system performance, operations, and maintenance. Travel time is not included.

7. Provide additional services at no cost to the Owner to correct any operational problems due to the design and/or fabrication of the UV disinfection equipment.

C. The Supplier shall include in proposal a price for the time and expenses listed above.

D. The Supplier’s representative shall be a qualified individual who has previously provided onsite services for the installation, testing, and startup of the Supplier’s identical system at a minimum of five wastewater treatment plants of similar size.

E. Telephone: Include the following in lump sum price: 1. Provide telephone support by means of a toll-free phone number for a

minimum period of 3 years following installation and startup. 2. Provide a list of three or more names of individuals qualified to support

operation, and provide cell phone numbers for these individuals. At least one of the listed individuals shall be available at all times including nights, weekends, and holidays in the event of an emergency.

F. Service Scheduling: 1. By Owner, on request any time during warranty period as specified. 2. Factory representatives of the Supplier who have complete knowledge of the

proper operation and maintenance of the equipment, shall be provided to instruct Owner on the proper start-up, operation, and maintenance:

END OF SECTION

Submersible Large Capacity Centrifugal Pumps 11312G-1 11487A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/OR/Clean Water Services/11487A10/Specifications/11312G (Bidset) April 2021 - BID

SECTION 11312G

SUBMERSIBLE LARGE CAPACITY CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: Requirements for provision of pump systems including submersible non-clog motor-driven pumps for service as scheduled.

B. Tag numbers: As specified in Pump Schedule.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American Bearing Manufacturers’ Association (ABMA): 1. 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings. 2. 11 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings.

B. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. A48 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings. 2. A108 - Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon and Alloy, Cold-Finished. 3. A276 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes. 4. A582 - Standard Specification for Free-Machining Stainless Steel Bars. 5. A743 - Standard Specification for Castings, Iron-Chromium, Iron-Chromium-

Nickel, Corrosion-Resistant, for General Application. 6. B148 - Standard Specification for Aluminum-Bronze Sand Castings. 7. B505 - Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Continuous Castings. 8. B584 - Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General

Applications. 9. E10 - Standard Test Method for Brinell Hardness of Metallic Materials. 10. F593 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and

Studs. 11. F594 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Nuts.

C. CSA International (CSA).

D. Food and Drug Administration (FDA).

E. FM Global (FM).

F. Hydraulic Institute (HI): 1. 1-1.2 - Rotodynamic (Centrifugal) Pumps for Nomenclature and Definitions. 2. 1.3 - Rotodynamic (Centrifugal) Pumps for Design and Application. 3. 9.1-9.5 - Pumps - General Pump Standards for Types, Definitions, Application,

and Sound Measurements and Decontamination. 4. 11.6 - Rotodynamic Submersible Pumps for Hydraulic Performance,

Hydrostatic Pressure, Mechanical, and Electrical Acceptance Tests.

G. Insulated Cable Engineer’s Association (ICEA).


H. National Electrical Code (NEC).

I. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).

J. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL).

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Pump head (total dynamic head, TDH), flow capacity, pump efficiency, net positive suction head available (NPSHa), and net positive suction head required (NPSHr): As defined in HI 1.1-1.2, 1.3, 9.1-9.5 and 11.6 and as modified in the Specifications.

B. Suction head: Gauge pressure available at pump intake flange or bell in feet of fluid above atmospheric; average when using multiple suction pressure taps, regardless of variation in individual taps.

C. Allowable Operating Region (AOR): The region over which the service life of the pump is not seriously compromised by hydraulic loads, vibration, or flow separation where the pump’s vibration, noise, and cavitation are within acceptable limits.

D. Preferred Operating Region (POR): The region over which the service life of the pump will not be significantly affected by hydraulic loads, vibration, or flow separation where the pump’s vibration, noise, and cavitation are within acceptable limits.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product data: As specified in Section 15050 - Common Work Results for Mechanical Equipment.

C. Shop drawings: As specified in Section 15050 - Common Work Results for Mechanical Equipment.

D. Calculations: As specified in Section 15050 - Common Work Results for Mechanical Equipment. 1. Torsional analysis: Submit when scheduled and as specified in Section 15050

- Common Work Results for Mechanical Equipment.

E. Vendor operation and maintenance manuals: As specified in Section 01782 - Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

F. Commissioning submittals: 1. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Source Testing as specified in Section

01756 - Commissioning. 2. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation and Functionality Compliance

as specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning.

1.05 WARRANTY

A. As specified in Section 15050 – Common Work Results for Mechanical Equipment.


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Pump: 1. ‘A’-listed manufacturer in accordance with Section 00300 – Bid Forms:

a. ITT Flygt, model as scheduled. 2. Or equal manufacturer:

a. ABS Pumps, XFP series similar to scheduled model.

B. Variable frequency drives: 1. As specified in Section 16263 - Variable Frequency Drives 0.50 - 100

Horsepower.

2.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Submersible pumps and components: Submersible pumps, drivers, motors, variable frequency drives, electrical cable, lifting eyes, lifting cable or chain and guide rails, guide rail supports, self-aligning discharge connection, and other items specified in the Pump Schedule as required for complete operational units.

B. Design requirements: 1. Pump performance characteristics:

a. As specified in the Pump Schedule. b. All required conditions (flow/head) shall be within the pump

manufacturer’s Allowable Operating Range (AOR). c. Performance tolerances shall be the same as the test tolerances specified

in Section 15958 - Mechanical Equipment Testing. 2. Motor characteristics: As specified in Pump Schedule. 3. All required conditions (flow/head) shall be within the pump manufacturer’s

Allowable Operating Range (AOR).

C. Product requirements as specified in Section 01600 - Product Requirements and Section 15050 - Common Work Results for Mechanical Equipment.

2.03 MATERIALS

A. General: When materials are referenced in this Section or on the pump schedule, the compositions shall be the UNS Alloys, Types, or Grades unless specified or scheduled otherwise.

B. Cast iron: ASTM A48, Class 35 B minimum.

C. Nickel cast iron: ASTM A48, Class 35 minimum with 3 percent nickel added.

D. Hardened cast iron: ASTM A532 (Alloy III A), 25% chrome cast iron.

E. Steel: ASTM A108, Grade or UNS Alloy as specified or scheduled.

F. Stainless steel: ASTM A276 or ASTM A582, Type or UNS Alloy as specified or scheduled.

G. Bronze: ASTM B505 or ASTM B584, UNS Alloy C83600.


H. Zincless bronze: ASTM B505 or ASTM B584, Leaded Tin Bronze, UNS Alloy C92700.

I. Aluminum bronze: ASTM B148, ASTM B505 or ASTM B584, UNS Alloy C95200.

J. Fasteners: Stainless steel, ASTM F593 or ASTM F594, type or grade as specified.

2.04 PUMP CASINGS

A. Type: 2 piece; pump and motor casing bolted together; machined seal faces with Nitrile or Buna N rubber o-ring seal; Type 304 stainless steel bolting.

B. Material: As scheduled.

C. Construction: Of sufficient strength, weight, and thickness to provide accurate alignment and watertightness.

D. Design working pressure: Minimum 1.10 times maximum shutoff total dynamic head with maximum installable impeller diameter at maximum operating speed plus maximum suction static head; suitable for submergence in up to 65 feet of water.

E. Hydrostatic test: 5-minute hydrostatic test minimum 1.5 times Design Working Pressure.

F. Discharge interface: 1. Sealing of the pumping unit to the discharge connection shall be accomplished

by a machined metal-to-metal watertight contact. 2. Self-aligning without bolting or having to enter the wet well.

2.05 IMPELLERS

A. Type: As scheduled.


C. Maximum number of vanes: As scheduled.

D. Water passages: Smooth, able to prevent clogging by stringy or fibrous and to pass spherical solids of size scheduled.

E. Method of securing to shafts: Keyed and secured by bronze nut or Allen head bolt locked in place, but readily removable without use of special tools.

F. Rotation: Clockwise looking from driver, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.

G. Balance: As specified in Section 15050 - Common Work Results for Mechanical Equipment to meet the vibration criteria as specified in Section 15958 - Mechanical Equipment Testing.


2.06 WEAR RINGS AND WEAR PLATES

A. Provide the following system: 1. Wear plate system:

a. Material: Hardened cast iron, ASTM A532 (Alloy III A), 25% chrome cast iron.

b. Attached to the pump volute to prevent rotation. c. Replaceable. d. Adjustable to maintain proper clearances between the wear plate and the

impeller.

2.07 PUMP SHAFTS

A. Material: ASTM A479 431 stainless steel, turned, ground, and polished.

B. Strength: Able to withstand minimum 1.5 times maximum operating torque and other loads.

C. Resonant frequency: As specified in Sections 15050 - Common Work Results for Mechanical Equipment and 15958 - Mechanical Equipment Testing.

D. Deflection: Maximum 0.002 inches under operating conditions.

2.08 MECHANICAL SEALS

A. Provide dual tandem mechanical seal system with oil for seal lubrication and cooling: 1. Shaft sealing system shall be capable of withstanding volute pressure up to

1.5 times pump shutoff head. 2. No seal damages shall result from operating the pumping unit in its liquid

environment, from running pump dry, or from reverse pump operation.

B. Oil chamber: 1. Provide oil chamber for shaft sealing system. Design oil chamber to ensure

that air is left in the oil chamber to absorb the expansion of the oil due to temperature variations.

2. Provide drain and inspection plug, with positive anti-leak seal, easily accessible from the outside.

3. Oil-in-oil chamber shall be FDA-approved, paraffin-type, colorless, odorless, and non-toxic.

C. Upper seal: 1. Tungsten carbide or silicon carbide rotating seal and tungsten carbide

stationary seal as specified in Section 15050 - Common Work Results for Mechanical Equipment.

2. Submerged in oil chamber located below the stator housing.

D. Lower seal: 1. Tungsten Carbide or silicon carbide rotating and stationary seals as specified

in Section 15050 - Common Work Results for Mechanical Equipment.

E. Springs and other hardware: Stainless steel, 300 or 400 series.


2.09 BEARINGS

A. Pump shaft shall rotate on a minimum of 2 permanently sealed, grease lubricated bearings: 1. Upper bearing for radial forces. 2. Lower bearing for combined axial and radial forces.

B. Bearing type: Anti-friction in accordance with ABMA standards.

C. Provide lower bearing with independent thermal sensor to monitor the bearing temperature. If a high temperature occurs, the sensor shall activate an alarm and shut down the motor.

D. Bearing lubrication system shall be sized sufficiently to safely absorb heat energy normally generated in bearing under maximum ambient temperature of 60 degrees Celsius when pump scheduled for dry running. Bearing life: Minimum L10 life of 100,000 hours at rated design point or 24,000 hours in accordance with ABMA 9 or 11 at bearing design load imposed by pump shutoff with maximum sized impeller at rated speed, whichever provides longest bearing life in intended service.

2.10 MOTORS AND POWER CABLES

A. Motors: Features as specified and as scheduled: 1. Provide motors that are rated suitable for continuous operation in 40 degrees

Celsius ambient temperature at project site altitude. 2. Horsepower:

a. As scheduled in the Pump Schedule. 1) Listed motor horsepower is the minimum to be supplied. Increase

motor horsepower if required to prevent motor overload while operating at any point on the supplied pump operating head-flow curve, including runout. However, variable frequency drives, generator, and other electrical equipment are sized for scheduled motor horsepower.

2) Make all structural, mechanical, and electrical changes required to accommodate increased horsepower.

3. Revolutions per minute: As scheduled in the Pump Schedule. 4. Enclosure: As scheduled in the Pump Schedule. 5. Electrical characteristics: As scheduled in the Pump Schedule.

B. Motor construction: 1. Squirrel cage induction motor, shell design. 2. If explosion proof motor is scheduled, provide motor that is UL or FM listed for

NEC Class I, Division 1, Groups C and D service, whether submerged or unsubmerged.

3. NEMA design type: B. 4. Motor insulation, either one:

a. Class F, moisture resistant, rated for 155 degrees Celsius. b. Class H, moisture resistant, rated for 185 degrees Celsius.

5. The motor shall be designed for continuous duty handling pumped media of 40 degrees Celsius and capable of a minimum of 15 evenly spaced starts per hour.

6. The motor shall be capable of continuous operation under load with the motor submerged, partially submerged, or exposed, without derating the motor


7. Motor cooling system: a. Design to provide adequate cooling:

1) At the minimum operating speed with a variable frequency drive. 2) With motor submerged. 3) With motor dry.

b. Motor shall be cooled by internal closed-loop, non-toxic glycol and water mixture: 1) With non-clogging ports and channels. 2) With inspection ports or other means of access for cleaning/flushing.

c. Provide capability to relieve entrapped air from the system. d. Spray systems, air moving equipment or other secondary cooling systems

are not acceptable. 8. Motor sealing: Design motor case and seals to withstand 65 feet of

submergence. 9. When variable frequency drive is scheduled, motor shall be capable of

continuous inverter duty over the speed range specified.

C. Power cables: 1. Submersible to same water depth as motor casing. 2. Type SPC with Hypalon/Buna N jacket. 3. Insulation rated for 90 degrees Celsius. 4. Non-wicking fillers. 5. Length: Sufficient to connect to surface junction box (without the need of

splices) as indicated on the Drawings or 50 feet, whichever is greater. 6. Sized to conform to NEC, ICEA, and CSA specifications. 7. Provide stainless steel cable and stainless steel wire braid sleeve to support

power cable from underside of wet well roof slab or access frame. 8. Provide Kevlar cable grips

D. Monitoring or control cables: 1. When variable frequency drives (VFD) are scheduled, provide separate

shielded cabling (not in common sheath with power cables) for low voltage or DC cables for monitoring devices.

E. Cable entry seal and junction chamber: 1. Cable entry seal design shall not require specific torque requirements to

ensure a watertight and submersible seal. 2. Cable entry seal shall consist of dual cylindrical elastomer grommets, flanked

by stainless steel washers. 3. The cable entry seal shall provide strain relief for the cable. 4. The cable entry junction chamber shall be separate from the motor chamber to

prevent foreign material from gaining access to the top of the pump. 5. Provide a moisture detection sensor in the cable junction chamber. If leakage

is detected, the sensor shall activate an alarm and shut down the pump/motor.

F. Control/protection module: 1. Each pump shall be supplied with a self-contained control/protection module to

provide for the direct connection to all internal pump monitoring devices, including: a. Thermal protection: Provide automatic reset motor stator temperature

detectors, 1 switch in each phase winding. If any detector is activated, the sensor shall activate an alarm and shut down the motor. The thermal


detectors shall activate when the stator temperature exceeds 140 degrees Celsius.

b. Moisture detection: Provide a level sensor to detect the presence of water in the stator chamber or water in the oil chamber.

2. Sensor: Temperature and moisture sensors shall be monitored via a single pair of shielded wires. Contractor shall modify installation as required based on selected pump vendor.

3. Power: 120VAC, or as shown on Contract Drawings. 4. Relay contact rating: 120VAC, 5 amperes. 5. Resettable through remote contact closure. 6. Independent outputs:

a. High temperature alarm. b. Moisture detected alarm.

2.11 SUPPORT BASE AND DISCHARGE ELBOW

A. Provide cast-iron support base and discharge elbow for installation in wet pit.

B. Discharge elbow to mate to pump discharge and transition to discharge piping.

C. The entire weight of the pump/motor shall be borne by the pump discharge elbow.

2.12 GUIDE RAILS AND LIFTING DEVICES

A. General: Provide guide rails and lifting devices suitable for wet pit installation as scheduled in Execution and as indicated on the Drawings.

B. Materials: 1. Guide rails, lifting cable or chain and wall supports: Type 304 stainless steel. 2. Anchor bolts: As specified in Section 05190 - Mechanical Anchoring and

Fastening to Concrete and Masonry.

C. Wet pit guide rails: 1. Type: Dual pipe or dual rail able to accurately guide the pump to mate with the

discharge elbow. 2. Strength: Withstand the greater of a minimum of 1.5 times the maximum

imposed operating loads or seismic loads in accordance with building code. 3. Intermediate supports: Provide at 20-foot maximum intervals; less as required

to provide specified support.

D. Lifting device: 1. Type: Chain or cable attached to lifting eye on the pump casing. 2. Length: Able to lower pump from top of wet well to operating position as

indicated on the Drawings plus 5 additional feet of length. 3. Retainer: Provide Type 316 stainless steel locking hook or clasp at top of wet

well to securely retain the upper end of the lifting chain or cable during pump operation.

4. Lifting device shall be sized for combined weight of pump and motor.


2.13 SPARE PARTS AND SPECIAL TOOLS

A. Special tools: Deliver 1 set for every furnished pump type and size needed to assemble and disassemble pump system. Spare parts: Provide 1 of the following for each size or type of pump; deliver as specified in Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Spare parts: None.

2.14 FINISHES

A. Pump manufacturer shall factory finish coat pump/motor with high solids epoxy coating system as specified in Section 09960. Pump manufacturer shall factory prime coat discharge elbow with high solids epoxy coating system as specified in Section 09960.

B. Contractor shall provide field applied coatings as specified in Section 09960.

2.15 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Witnessing: Source or factory testing shall be witnessed by the Engineer or Owner when scheduled; provide advanced notice of source testing as specified in Sections 01756 and 15958.

B. Equipment performance test: Test level as scheduled; test as specified in Section 15958.

C. Driver test: Test driver as part of pump test.

D. Temperature, noise, and vibration testing specified within the general equipment performance and pump performance test sections is not required for wet pit installations.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as specified in Section 15050.

3.02 COMMISSIONING

A. As specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning and this Section.





3. Training: a. Maintenance: 4 hours per session, 2 sessions. b. Operation: 2 hours per session, 2 sessions.

4. Process operational period: a. As required by Owner or Contractor.

C. Source testing: As specified in Pump Schedule.

D. Functional testing: As specified in Pump Schedule.

3.03 PUMP SCHEDULE

Tag Numbers

640P3401

640P3402

640P3406

640P3407

640P3403

640P3404

640P3405

General Characteristics:

Service Secondary Effluent

Secondary Effluent

Quantity 4 3

Max. Noise, dBA at 3 Feet Not Required Not Required

Torsional Analysis Not Required Not Required

Minimum Pumped Fluid Degrees Fahrenheit 60 60

Normal Pumped Fluid Degrees Fahrenheit 70 70

Max. Pumped Fluid Degrees Fahrenheit 80 80

Installation Configuration Wet Pit Wet Pit

First Named Manufacturer’s Model NP 3301 LT 3 NP 3202 MT 3

Pump Characteristics:

Impeller Type Non-clog Non-clog

Impeller, Maximum Number Vanes 2 2

Pass Minimum Sphere Size, Inch 2 2

Speed Control Variable Frequency Drive

Variable Frequency Drive

Maximum Pump Speed, rpm 1,180 1,170

Minimum Pump Speed, rpm 600 700

Rated Design Point: (at Maximum Revolutions per Minute):

Flow, gpm 4,200 2,100

Head, Feet 44 44

Minimum Hydraulic Efficiency, Percent 75 77

Maximum Active Input Horsepower 70 35


Tag Numbers

640P3401

640P3402

640P3406

640P3407

640P3403

640P3404

640P3405

Required Condition 2: (at Maximum Revolutions per Minute):

Flow range, gpm 5,500-6,000 2,450 – 3,000

Head, Feet 33 33



Flow, gpm 2,800 1,050

Head Range, Feet 50-55 57-63


Required Condition 4: (at Reduced Revolutions per Minute):

Flow, gpm 2,100 1,050

Head, Feet 23 25


Other Conditions:

Maximum Shut Off Head, Feet 85 85

Maximum NPSHr at Every Specified Flow, Feet

26 20

Minimum NPSHa at Every Specified Flow, Feet

38 38

Minimum Suction Static Head, Feet 5 5

Maximum Suction Static Head, Feet 7 7

Minimum Discharge Size, Inches 12 8

Pump Materials:

Pump and Motor Casing Cast Iron Cast Iron

Impeller Hardened Cast Iron

Hardened Cast Iron

Shaft 431 Stainless Steel

431 Stainless Steel

Shaft Key 316 Stainless Steel

316 Stainless Steel

Motor Cooling Jacket Cast Iron Cast Iron


Tag Numbers

640P3401

640P3402

640P3406

640P3407

640P3403

640P3404

640P3405

Motor Characteristics:

Variable Frequency Drive As specified in Section 16263 -

Variable Frequency Drives

0.50-100 Horsepower

As specified in Section 16263 -

Variable Frequency Drives

0.50-100 Horsepower

Minimum Submergence Exposed Exposed

Maximum Driver Speed, rpm 1,200 1,200

Motor Horsepower, Minimum 85 50

Voltage/Phases/hertz 460/3/60 460/3/60

Service Factor 1.15 1.15

Full Load Current, Amperes 207 97

Locked Rotor Current, Amperes 620 291

Motor Efficiency (At 100 Percent Load) Minimum

93% 92%

Enclosure Type Submersible Submersible

Source Testing:

Test Witnessing Not Witnessed Not Witnessed

Performance Test Level 2 2

Vibration Test Level None None

Noise Test Level None None

Functional Testing:

Performance Test Level 2 2

Vibration Test Level None None

Noise Test Level None None

END OF SECTION

Submersible Centrifugal Pumps 11312H-1 11487A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/OR/Clean Water Services/11487A10/Specifications/11312H (Bidset) April 2021 - BID

SECTION 11312H

SUBMERSIBLE CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: Requirements for provision of submersible non-clog motor-driven pumps for service as scheduled. Pumps shall be installed in an existing wet well with existing pump base, cables, and controls.

B. Tag numbers: As specified in Pump Schedule.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American Bearing Manufacturers’ Association (ABMA): 1. 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings. 2. 11 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings.

B. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. A48 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings. 2. A108 - Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon and Alloy, Cold-Finished. 3. A276 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes. 4. A582 - Standard Specification for Free-Machining Stainless Steel Bars. 5. A743 - Standard Specification for Castings, Iron-Chromium, Iron-Chromium-

Nickel, Corrosion-Resistant, for General Application. 6. B148 - Standard Specification for Aluminum-Bronze Sand Castings. 7. B505 - Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Continuous Castings. 8. B584 - Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General

Applications. 9. E10 - Standard Test Method for Brinell Hardness of Metallic Materials. 10. F593 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and


C. CSA International (CSA).

D. Food and Drug Administration (FDA).

E. FM Global (FM).

F. Hydraulic Institute (HI): 1. 1-1.2 - Rotodynamic (Centrifugal) Pumps for Nomenclature and Definitions. 2. 1.3 - Rotodynamic (Centrifugal) Pumps for Design and Application. 3. 9.1-9.5 - Pumps - General Pump Standards for Types, Definitions, Application,

and Sound Measurements and Decontamination. 4. 11.6 - Rotodynamic Submersible Pumps for Hydraulic Performance,

Hydrostatic Pressure, Mechanical, and Electrical Acceptance Tests.

G. Insulated Cable Engineer’s Association (ICEA).


H. National Electrical Code (NEC).

I. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).

J. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL).

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Pump head (total dynamic head, TDH), flow capacity, pump efficiency, net positive suction head available (NPSHa), and net positive suction head required (NPSHr): As defined in HI 1.1-1.2, 1.3, 9.1-9.5 and 11.6 and as modified in the Specifications.

B. Suction head: Gauge pressure available at pump intake flange or bell in feet of fluid above atmospheric; average when using multiple suction pressure taps, regardless of variation in individual taps.

C. Allowable Operating Region (AOR): The region over which the service life of the pump is not seriously compromised by hydraulic loads, vibration, or flow separation where the pump’s vibration, noise, and cavitation are within acceptable limits.

D. Preferred Operating Region (POR): The region over which the service life of the pump will not be significantly affected by hydraulic loads, vibration, or flow separation where the pump’s vibration, noise, and cavitation are within acceptable limits.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product data: As specified in Section 15050 - Common Work Results for Mechanical Equipment.

C. Shop drawings: As specified in Section 15050 - Common Work Results for Mechanical Equipment.

D. Calculations: As specified in Section 15050 - Common Work Results for Mechanical Equipment. 1. Torsional analysis: Submit when scheduled and as specified in Section 15050

- Common Work Results for Mechanical Equipment.

E. Vendor operation and maintenance manuals: As specified in Section 01782 - Operation and Maintenance Manuals.


01756 - Commissioning. 2. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation and Functionality Compliance


1.05 WARRANTY

A. As specified in Section 15050 – Common Work Results for Mechanical Equipment.


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Pump: The following, no equal: 1. ITT Flygt, model as scheduled


A. Submersible pumps and components: Submersible pumps, drivers, motors and other items specified in the Pump Schedule as required for complete operational units.

B. Design requirements: 1. Pump performance characteristics:

a. As specified in the Pump Schedule. b. All required conditions (flow/head) shall be within the pump

manufacturer’s Allowable Operating Range (AOR). c. Performance tolerances shall be the same as the test tolerances specified

in Section 15958 - Mechanical Equipment Testing. 2. Motor characteristics: As specified in Pump Schedule. 3. All required conditions (flow/head) shall be within the pump manufacturer’s

Allowable Operating Range (AOR).

C. Product requirements as specified in Section 01600 - Product Requirements and Section 15050 - Common Work Results for Mechanical Equipment.

2.03 MATERIALS

A. General: When materials are referenced in this Section or on the pump schedule, the compositions shall be the UNS Alloys, Types, or Grades unless specified or scheduled otherwise.

B. Cast iron: ASTM A48, Class 35 B minimum.

C. Nickel cast iron: ASTM A48, Class 35 minimum with 3 percent nickel added.

D. Hardened cast iron: ASTM A532 (Alloy III A), 25% chrome cast iron.

E. Steel: ASTM A108, Grade or UNS Alloy as specified or scheduled.

F. Stainless steel: ASTM A276 or ASTM A582, Type or UNS Alloy as specified or scheduled.

G. Bronze: ASTM B505 or ASTM B584, UNS Alloy C83600.

H. Zincless bronze: ASTM B505 or ASTM B584, Leaded Tin Bronze, UNS Alloy C92700.

I. Aluminum bronze: ASTM B148, ASTM B505 or ASTM B584, UNS Alloy C95200.

J. Fasteners: Stainless steel, ASTM F593 or ASTM F594, type or grade as specified.


2.04 PUMP CASINGS

A. Type: 2 piece; pump and motor casing bolted together; machined seal faces with Nitrile or Buna N rubber o-ring seal; Type 304 stainless steel bolting.


C. Construction: Of sufficient strength, weight, and thickness to provide accurate alignment and watertightness.

D. Design working pressure: Minimum 1.10 times maximum shutoff total dynamic head with maximum installable impeller diameter at maximum operating speed plus maximum suction static head; suitable for submergence in up to 65 feet of water.

E. Hydrostatic test: 5-minute hydrostatic test minimum 1.5 times Design Working Pressure.

F. Discharge interface: 1. Sealing of the pumping unit to the discharge connection shall be accomplished

by a machined metal-to-metal watertight contact. 2. Self-aligning without bolting or having to enter the wet well.

2.05 IMPELLERS

A. Type: As scheduled.


C. Maximum number of vanes: As scheduled.

D. Water passages: Smooth, able to prevent clogging by stringy or fibrous and to pass spherical solids of size scheduled.

E. Method of securing to shafts: Keyed and secured by bronze nut or Allen head bolt locked in place, but readily removable without use of special tools.

F. Rotation: Clockwise looking from driver, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.

G. Balance: As specified in Section 15050 - Common Work Results for Mechanical Equipment to meet the vibration criteria as specified in Section 15958 - Mechanical Equipment Testing.

2.06 WEAR RINGS AND WEAR PLATES

A. Provide the following system: 1. Wear plate system:

a. Material: Hardened cast iron, ASTM A532 (Alloy III A), 25% chrome cast iron.

b. Attached to the pump volute to prevent rotation. c. Replaceable. d. Adjustable to maintain proper clearances between the wear plate and the

impeller.


2.07 PUMP SHAFTS

A. Material: ASTM A479 431 stainless steel, turned, ground, and polished.

B. Strength: Able to withstand minimum 1.5 times maximum operating torque and other loads.

C. Resonant frequency: As specified in Sections 15050 - Common Work Results for Mechanical Equipment and 15958 - Mechanical Equipment Testing.

D. Deflection: Maximum 0.002 inches under operating conditions.

2.08 MECHANICAL SEALS

A. Provide dual tandem mechanical seal system with oil for seal lubrication and cooling: 1. Shaft sealing system shall be capable of withstanding volute pressure up to

1.5 times pump shutoff head. 2. No seal damages shall result from operating the pumping unit in its liquid

environment, from running pump dry, or from reverse pump operation.

B. Oil chamber: 1. Provide oil chamber for shaft sealing system. Design oil chamber to ensure

that air is left in the oil chamber to absorb the expansion of the oil due to temperature variations.

2. Provide drain and inspection plug, with positive anti-leak seal, easily accessible from the outside.

3. Oil-in-oil chamber shall be FDA-approved, paraffin-type, colorless, odorless, and non-toxic.

C. Upper seal: 1. Tungsten carbide or silicon carbide rotating seal and tungsten carbide

stationary seal as specified in Section 15050 - Common Work Results for Mechanical Equipment.

2. Submerged in oil chamber located below the stator housing.

D. Lower seal: 1. Tungsten Carbide or silicon carbide rotating and stationary seals as specified

in Section 15050 - Common Work Results for Mechanical Equipment.

E. Springs and other hardware: Stainless steel, 300 or 400 series.

2.09 BEARINGS

A. Pump shaft shall rotate on a minimum of 2 permanently sealed, grease lubricated bearings: 1. Upper bearing for radial forces. 2. Lower bearing for combined axial and radial forces.

B. Bearing type: Anti-friction in accordance with ABMA standards.


C. Provide lower bearing with independent thermal sensor to monitor the bearing temperature. If a high temperature occurs, the sensor shall activate an alarm and shut down the motor.

D. Bearing lubrication system shall be sized sufficiently to safely absorb heat energy normally generated in bearing under maximum ambient temperature of 60 degrees Celsius when pump scheduled for dry running. Bearing life: Minimum L10 life of 100,000 hours at rated design point or 24,000 hours in accordance with ABMA 9 or 11 at bearing design load imposed by pump shutoff with maximum sized impeller at rated speed, whichever provides longest bearing life in intended service.

2.10 MOTORS

A. Motors: Features as specified and as scheduled: 1. Provide motors that are rated suitable for continuous operation in 40 degrees

Celsius ambient temperature at project site altitude. 2. Horsepower:

a. As scheduled in the Pump Schedule. 1) Listed motor horsepower is the minimum to be supplied. Increase

motor horsepower if required to prevent motor overload while operating at any point on the supplied pump operating head-flow curve, including runout. However, variable frequency drives, generator, and other electrical equipment are sized for scheduled motor horsepower.

2) Make all structural, mechanical, and electrical changes required to accommodate increased horsepower.

3. Revolutions per minute: As scheduled in the Pump Schedule. 4. Enclosure: As scheduled in the Pump Schedule. 5. Electrical characteristics: As scheduled in the Pump Schedule.

B. Motor construction: 1. Squirrel cage induction motor, shell design. 2. If explosion proof motor is scheduled, provide motor that is UL or FM listed for

NEC Class I, Division 1, Groups C and D service, whether submerged or unsubmerged.

3. NEMA design type: B. 4. Motor insulation, either one:

a. Class F, moisture resistant, rated for 155 degrees Celsius. b. Class H, moisture resistant, rated for 185 degrees Celsius.

5. The motor shall be designed for continuous duty handling pumped media of 40 degrees Celsius and capable of a minimum of 15 evenly spaced starts per hour.

6. The motor shall be capable of continuous operation under load with the motor submerged, partially submerged, or exposed, without derating the motor

7. Motor cooling system: a. Design to provide adequate cooling:

1) At the minimum operating speed with a variable frequency drive. 2) With motor submerged. 3) With motor dry.

b. Motor shall be cooled by internal closed-loop, non-toxic glycol and water mixture: 1) With non-clogging ports and channels.


2) With inspection ports or other means of access for cleaning/flushing. c. Provide capability to relieve entrapped air from the system. d. Spray systems, air moving equipment or other secondary cooling systems

are not acceptable. 8. Motor sealing: Design motor case and seals to withstand 65 feet of

submergence. 9. When variable frequency drive is scheduled, motor shall be capable of

continuous inverter duty over the speed range specified.

C. Cable entry seal and junction chamber: 1. Cable entry seal design shall not require specific torque requirements to

ensure a watertight and submersible seal. 2. Cable entry seal shall consist of dual cylindrical elastomer grommets, flanked

by stainless steel washers. 3. The cable entry seal shall provide strain relief for the cable. 4. The cable entry junction chamber shall be separate from the motor chamber to

prevent foreign material from gaining access to the top of the pump. 5. Provide a moisture detection sensor in the cable junction chamber. If leakage

is detected, the sensor shall activate an alarm and shut down the pump/motor.

D. Control/protection module: 1. Each pump shall be connected to the existing control/protection module to

provide for the direct connection to all internal pump monitoring devices, including: a. Thermal protection: Provide automatic reset motor stator temperature

detectors, 1 switch in each phase winding. If any detector is activated, the sensor shall activate an alarm and shut down the motor. The thermal detectors shall activate when the stator temperature exceeds 140 degrees Celsius.

b. Moisture detection: Provide a level sensor to detect the presence of water in the stator chamber or water in the oil chamber.

2. Sensor: Temperature and moisture sensors shall be monitored via a single pair of shielded wires. Contractor shall modify installation as required based on selected pump vendor.

3. Power: 120VAC, or as shown on Contract Drawings. 4. Relay contact rating: 120VAC, 5 amperes. 5. Resettable through remote contact closure. 6. Independent outputs:

a. High temperature alarm. b. Moisture detected alarm.

2.11 SUPPORT BASE AND DISCHARGE ELBOW

A. Pump shall be compatible with existing support base and discharge elbow for installation in wet pit.

B. Discharge elbow to mate to pump discharge and transition to discharge piping.

C. The entire weight of the pump/motor shall be borne by the pump discharge elbow.


2.12 GUIDE RAILS AND LIFTING DEVICES

A. General: Reuse existing guide rails and lifting devices as indicated on the Drawings.


A. Special tools: Deliver 1 set for every furnished pump type and size needed to assemble and disassemble pump system. Spare parts: Provide 1 of the following for each size or type of pump; deliver as specified in Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Spare parts: None.

2.14 FINISHES

A. Pump manufacturer shall factory finish coat pump/motor with high solids epoxy coating system as specified in Section 09960. Pump manufacturer shall factory prime coat discharge elbow with high solids epoxy coating system as specified in Section 09960.

B. Contractor shall provide field applied coatings as specified in Section 09960.


A. Witnessing: Source or factory testing shall be witnessed by the Engineer or Owner when scheduled; provide advanced notice of source testing as specified in Sections 01756 and 15958.

B. Equipment performance test: Test level as scheduled; test as specified in Section 15958.

C. Driver test: Test driver as part of pump test.

D. Temperature, noise, and vibration testing specified within the general equipment performance and pump performance test sections is not required for wet pit installations.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as specified in Section 15050.

3.02 COMMISSIONING






3. Training: a. Maintenance: 4 hours per session, 2 sessions. b. Operation: 2 hours per session, 2 sessions.


C. Source testing: As specified in Pump Schedule.

D. Functional testing: As specified in Pump Schedule.

3.03 PUMP SCHEDULE

Tag Numbers

305-FOG-DP1

305-FOG-DP2

General Characteristics:

Service Storm Drain

Quantity 2

Max. Noise, dBA at 3 Feet Not Required

Torsional Analysis Not Required

Minimum Pumped Fluid Degrees Fahrenheit 60

Normal Pumped Fluid Degrees Fahrenheit 70

Max. Pumped Fluid Degrees Fahrenheit 80

Installation Configuration Wet Pit

First Named Manufacturer’s Model NP 3153 MT 3

Pump Characteristics:

Impeller Type Non-clog

Impeller, Maximum Number Vanes 2

Pass Minimum Sphere Size, Inch 2

Speed Control Variable Frequency Drive

Maximum Pump Speed, rpm 1,755

Minimum Pump Speed, rpm 700

Rated Design Point: (at Maximum Revolutions per Minute):

Flow, gpm 1,150

Head, Feet 37

Minimum Hydraulic Efficiency, Percent 67

Maximum Active Input Horsepower 14.2


Tag Numbers

305-FOG-DP1

305-FOG-DP2


Flow range, gpm 1,350-1,450

Head, Feet 28



Flow, gpm 700

Head Range, Feet 48-52


Required Condition 4: (at Reduced Revolutions per Minute):

Flow, gpm 700

Head, Feet 19


Other Conditions:

Maximum Shut Off Head, Feet 75

Maximum NPSHr at Every Specified Flow, Feet 24

Minimum NPSHa at Every Specified Flow, Feet 38

Minimum Suction Static Head, Feet 5

Maximum Suction Static Head, Feet 18

Minimum Discharge Size, Inches 6

Pump Materials:

Pump and Motor Casing Cast Iron

Impeller Hardened Cast Iron

Shaft 431 Stainless Steel

Shaft Key 316 Stainless Steel

Motor Cooling Jacket Cast Iron

Motor Characteristics:

Variable Frequency Drive Existing

Minimum Submergence Exposed

Maximum Driver Speed, rpm 1,800

Motor Horsepower, Maximum 15

Voltage/Phases/hertz 460/3/60

Service Factor 1.15


Tag Numbers

305-FOG-DP1

305-FOG-DP2

Full Load Current, Amperes 19

Locked Rotor Current, Amperes 114

Motor Efficiency (At 100 Percent Load) Minimum 93%

Enclosure Type Submersible

Source Testing:

Test Witnessing Not Witnessed

Performance Test Level 2

Vibration Test Level None

Noise Test Level None

Functional Testing:

Performance Test Level 2

Vibration Test Level None

Noise Test Level None

END OF SECTION

Manual Actuators 13446-1 11487A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/OR/Clean Water Services/11487A10/Specifications/13446 (Bidset) April 2021 - BID

SECTION 13446

MANUAL ACTUATORS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: 1. Valve actuators. 2. Handwheel actuators. 3. Floor Boxes. 4. Key operated valves. 5. Accessory equipment and floor boxes.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. Aluminum Association (AA): 1. DAF-45 - Designation System for Aluminum Finishes.

B. American Water Works Association (AWWA).

C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 1. 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 V Maximum).

D. National Electrical Code (NEC).

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. NEMA: 1. Type 4X enclosure in accordance with NEMA 250. 2. Type 7 enclosure in accordance with NEMA 250.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop drawings: Include shop drawings and product data with associated gate or valve as an integrated unit.


A. Provide valve actuators integral with valve or gate, except for valve actuators utilizing T-wrenches or keys, and portable gate actuators intended to operate more than 1 valve.

B. Provide similar actuators by 1 manufacturer.

C. Provide gates and hand operating lifts by 1 manufacturer.

D. Provide hydraulic gate lifts by 1 manufacturer.

E. Provide hydraulic valve actuators and motorized actuators by 1 manufacturer.


1.06 MAINTENANCE

A. Extra materials: 1. Key operated valve keys or wrenches: Furnish a minimum 4 keys with 4-foot

shafts and 3-foot pipe handles or wrenches with 4-foot shafts and 3-foot handles for operating key operated valves.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 VALVE ACTUATORS

A. Valve actuators: 1. Cylinder actuators, motorized actuators, and portable gate actuators are

specified in Section 13447 - Electric Motorized Actuators. 2. Manual actuators:

a. Material: Type 316 stainless steel. b. Design: Hand lever. c. Spring release handle: 12-inch. d. Notch plate: 10 position. e. Secure with mounting bolts. f. Locking device so that valve can be locked in any position with a wing nut.

3. Stem and cover: a. For submerged valves, provide extension stem as indicated on the

Drawings. 4. Limit switches: Provide limit switches on manually actuated valves where

indicated on the Drawings: a. Limit switches: Heavy-duty, industrial grade, oiltight, with not less than

2 auxiliary contacts. b. Rating: Rated for 10 amps, 120 volts alternating current. c. Enclosure: NEMA Type 4X enclosure and with stainless steel levers and

arms. Provide switch with NEMA Type 7 enclosure when switch is located within areas with NEC Class 1, Division 1 or Class 1, Division 2 designations as indicated on the Drawings.

d. the Engineer.

B. Position indicators: 1. For all aboveground worm gear or traveling nut manual actuators, provide

position indication on the actuator enclosure. 2. Tail rods on hydraulic cylinders, or dial indicators with clear full-open and

closed position indicators, calibrated in number of turns or percentage of opening.

C. Manual or power actuator size: 1. Sized to deliver maximum force required under most severe specified

operating condition, including static and dynamic forces, seat and wedge friction, and seating and unseating forces with safety factor of 5, unless otherwise specified.

D. Actuator size: Capable of supporting weight of suspended shafting unless carried by bottom thrust bearings; shaft guides with wall mounting brackets.


E. Operation: Counterclockwise to open with suitable and adequate stops, capable of resisting at least twice normal operating force to prevent overrun of valve or gate in open or closed position.

F. Open direction indicator: Cast arrow and legend indicating direction to rotate actuator on handwheel, chain wheel rim, crank, or other prominent place.

G. Buried actuator housing: Oil and watertight, specifically designed for buried service, factory packed with suitable grease, completely enclosed space between actuator housing and valve body so that no moving parts are exposed to soil; provide actuators with 2-inch square AWWA operating nut.

H. Worm gear actuators: Provide gearing on worm gear actuators that is self-locking with gear ratio such that torque in excess of 160 foot-pounds will not need to be applied to operate valve at most adverse conditions for which valve is designed.

I. Traveling nut actuators: Capable of requiring maximum 100 foot-pounds of torque when operating valve under most adverse condition; limit stops on input shaft of manual actuators for fully open and closed positions; non-moving vertical axis of operating nut when opening or closing valve.

2.02 HANDWHEEL ACTUATORS

A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1. Rodney Hunt Co. 2. Waterman Industries, Inc.

B. Coating: Handwheel as specified in Section 09960 - High-Performance Coatings.

C. Mounting: Floor stand or bench stand. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings position actuator 36 inches (nominal) above top of walkway surface.

D. Bearings above and below finished threaded bronze operating nut: Ball or roller.

E. Wheel diameter: Minimum 24 inches.

F. Indicator: Counterclockwise opening with arrow, and word OPEN cast on top of handwheel indicating direction for opening.

G. Pull to operate: Maximum 40 pounds pull at most adverse design condition.

H. Stem travel limiting device: Setscrew locked stop nuts above and below lift nut.

I. Grease fittings: Suitable for lubrication of bearings.

2.03 FLOOR BOXES

A. Manufacturers: The following or equal: 1. Waterman Industries, Inc.

B. Floor boxes: Cast-iron; with: 1. Counter type indicator. 2. Hinged, lockable lid with directional arrow.


3. 2-inch square AWWA operating nut. 4. Packing gland providing drip-tight seal around valve shaft.

2.04 ACCESSORY EQUIPMENT

A. Wall brackets or haunches: As indicated on the Drawings.

B. Stems: Stainless steel; sized to match output of actuator; minimum gate or valve operating stem diameter; maximum 200 slenderness ratio.

C. Stem couplings: Stainless steel; internally threaded to match stem; lockable to stem by set screw.

D. Stem guides: Cast-iron with silicon bronze bushing; maximum 200 slenderness ratio; capable of being mounted with wall bracket; adjustable in 2 directions.

E. Wall brackets: Cast-iron, capable of withstanding output of actuator, adjustable in 2 directions.

F. Stem stuffing boxes: Cast-iron, with adjustable gland and packing.

G. Fasteners: Type 316 stainless steel.

H. Anchor bolts: As specified in Section 05190 - Mechanical Anchoring and Fastening to Concrete and Masonry except that the material shall be Type 316 stainless steel.

I. Geared valve actuators: Provided with cut gears, either spur or worm; sized to operate valves at most adverse design condition; with maximum 40-pound pull at handwheel or chain wheel rim.

J. Geared valve traveling nut actuators: Acceptable only where specified or indicated on the Drawings.

K. Accessory equipment for valves and gates requiring remote actuators: Operating stems, stem couplings, stem guides, wall brackets, and stem stuffing boxes.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install floor boxes in concrete floor with lid flush with floor.

B. After installation of gate and stem covers, mark stem covers at point where top of stems are at full-open position and at closed position.

C. Attach floor stand to structure with anchor bolts.

D. Install stem stuffing boxes where operating stems pass through intermediate concrete floor slabs.


3.02 SCHEDULES

A. Geared actuators: Provide geared actuators for following valves: 1. Butterfly valves larger than 6 inches, nominal size, on liquid service. 2. Butterfly valves larger than 10 inches, nominal size, on gas and air service. 3. Plug valves 6 inches, nominal size, and larger.

B. Handwheel actuators: Provide handwheel actuators for valves mounted 6 feet or less above floors.

C. Chain wheel actuators: Provide chain wheel actuators for valves mounted more than 6 feet to centerline above floors.

END OF SECTION

Electric Actuators 13447-1 11487A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/OR/Clean Water Services/11487A10/Specifications/13447 (Bidset) April 2021 - BID

SECTION 13447

ELECTRIC ACTUATORS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: Electric motor-driven actuators for valves and gates as identified in the valves and gates schedule.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American Water Works Association (AWWA): 1. C504 - Standard for Rubber-Seated Butterfly Valves. 2. C542 - Standard for Electric Motor Actuators for Valves and Slide Gates.

B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 1. 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 V Maximum).

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. NEMA: 1. Type 4X enclosure in accordance with NEMA 250.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit as specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures and Section 15050 - Common Work Results for Mechanical Equipment.

B. Provide a complete list/schedule of all actuators being provided with their associated tag names as indicated on the design drawings and/or specifications, service process area and the size of the valve they are actuating.

C. Product data: 1. Electrical ratings:

a. Voltage and number of phases. b. Starting and running current. c. Voltage levels and source for control and status.

2. Description of integral control interface. 3. Local control station components. 4. Environmental ratings, including NEMA enclosure rating and submergence

capabilities. 5. Gear ratios for both manual and motorized actuation. 6. Opening and closing directions. 7. Allowable starts per hour. 8. List of all included options and accessories. 9. Full travel times. 10. Gearbox data including gear ratio, and gearbox efficiency.


D. Shop drawings: 1. Wiring diagrams:

a. Include all options and expansion cards furnished with each actuator. 2. Dimensioned drawings of each valve and actuator combination. 3. Dimensioned drawings of each valve gearbox. 4. Electric motor data.

E. Calculations: 1. Operating torque. 2. Maximum torque calculations for seating and unseating. 3. Maximum operating torque at starting and normal operation. 4. Signed by Professional Engineer.

F. Provide draft vendor operation and maintenance manual as specified in Section 01782 - Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 1. Include a list of all configurable parameters, and the final values for each. 2. Include a troubleshooting chart covering the complete valve and

controls/electrical power systems, showing description of trouble, probable cause, and suggested remedy.

G. Commissioning submittals: 1. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Source Testing as specified in

Section 01756 - Commissioning. a. Affidavit in accordance with AWWA C542.

2. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation and Functionality Compliance as specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning.

3. Provide a report documenting changes made during commissioning that includes the parameter, initial value, and new value.

H. Project closeout documents: 1. Provide final vendor operation and maintenance manual as specified in

Section 01782 - Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

1.05 WARRANTY

A. Provide warranty as specified in Section 15050 – Common Work Results for Mechanical Equipment.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable manufacturers for lines 3 inch and smaller, with actuator selection based on appropriate torque requirements: 1. Quarter-turn:

a. Bettis SCE300 Series with OM3 Local Interface. b. Rotork ROMPAK. c. Limitorque LTQ with LCS package. d. No exceptions.

2. Multi-turn: a. Asahi America, Series 92 with DHC-100 Positioner. b. Approved equal.


B. Acceptable Manufacturers for lines 4 inch and larger: 1. Quarter-turn:

a. Beck Group 11 Series. b. No exceptions.

2. Multi-turn Actuators: a. Beck Group 88 Series. b. Bettis XTE3000 Series. c. Limitorque MX Series. d. No Exception

2.02 CHARACTERISTICS FOR ACTUATORS ON LINES 3 INCHES AND SMALLER

A. Actuators for valves 3 inches and smaller: 1. Provide actuators complete and operable with all components and accessories

required for operation. 2. Power supply:

a. Valve motion independent of power supply phase rotation. b. 220/380/440 VAC 3-phase.

3. Size actuator to move valves from full open to closed position within the time indicated in the Motorized Actuator Schedule: a. If an operating time is not indicated on the Motorized Actuator Schedule,

size the actuator to move valves at minimum 12 inches per minute under maximum load. Measure rate of closure for valves at maximum diameter of disc, plug, or ball.

4. For all outdoor or vault installations, provide an integral anti-condensation heater when available as an option.

5. Control inputs: a. Capable of using discrete 120 VAC. b. Controls the valve when local-stop-remote is in REMOTE. c. Material: Type 316 stainless steel. d. Provide the following inputs at the actuator:

1) OPEN. 2) CLOSE.

6. Status outputs: a. Dry contact outputs configured for the functions indicated on the

Drawings. Provide the following outputs for all actuators: 1) FULLY CLOSED. 2) FULLY OPEN. 3) REMOTE.

b. All output contacts rated for 5 amps, 120 VAC. 7. Analog input:

a. Provide a 4-20 milliamp analog input for analog modulating valves when indicated on the Drawings.

b. Modulate valve to maintain position based on analog input value. c. Maximum input impedance 250 ohms.

8. Analog output: a. Provide an isolated 4-20 milliamp analog output when indicated on the

Drawings. 9. Materials:

a. Construct motorized actuators of materials suitable for the environment in which the valve or gate is to be installed.


10. Components: a. Motors:

1) Torque ratings equal to or greater than that required for valve seating and dynamic torques with a 25 percent factor of safety.

2) Rated for operating under the following conditions without exceeding temperature limits with ambient temperature of 40 degrees Celsius. a) Continuous operation for 15 minutes or twice the open-to-close

operating time (whichever is greater) at normal operating torque or 33 percent of maximum torque (whichever is greater).

b) 60 starts per hour minimum for open/close service. b. Enclosures:

1) Actuator housing ratings as indicated in the Motorized Actuator Schedule.

2) Stainless steel external fasteners. c. Manual actuation:

1) Hand wheel for manual operation. d. Gearing: Self-locking, high-alloy steel gears.

2.03 CHARACTERISTICS FOR ACTUATORS ON LINES 4 INCHES AND LARGER

A. Provide actuators complete and operable with all components and accessories required for operation.

B. Power supply: 1. Voltage and phases as indicated in the Motorized Actuator Schedule. 2. Valve or gate motion independent of power supply phase rotation. 3. Provide an internal backup power source or mechanical indicator to maintain

settings and track valve position when main power is off. 4. The actuators shall incorporate all major components such as the motor,

starter, local controls, terminals, etc. housed within a self-contained, sealed enclosure.

C. Size actuator to move gates or valves from full open to closed position within the time indicated in the Motorized Actuator Schedule: 1. If an operating time is not indicated on the Motorized Actuator Schedule, size

the actuator to move gates or valves at minimum 12 inches per minute under maximum load. Measure rate of closure for valves at maximum diameter of disc, plug, or ball.

2. Size actuators so that gear boxes are not required where possible.

D. Control interface: 1. Configuration:

a. For actuators other than those manufactured by Beck, provide a non-intrusive, non-contacting interface for configuring all input and output settings, control values, ranges, torque switch settings, valve positions switch settings, and options. 1) Configurable from a handheld configuring tool or input devices on the

actuator. 2. Local interface, integral to actuator:

a. Non-intrusive, non-contacting selector switches: 1) LOCAL-STOP-REMOTE:

a) Motor actuator operation is prevented with the switch in STOP.


2) OPEN-CLOSE: a) Controls the valve when LOCAL-STOP-REMOTE is in LOCAL. b) Spring return to center. c) Configurable between maintained (actuator runs until end of

travel, high torque, or a LOCAL-STOP-REMOTE is switched to STOP) and momentary (actuator stops when lever is released).

b. Local display: 1) Valve fully open and fully closed indicators. 2) Numerical display showing actual valve or gate position in percent of

travel. 3. Local control station – (LCS):

a. Provide local control stations for all actuators located more than 5 feet above finished floor/grade or where indicated on the Drawings or Actuator Schedule. 1) NEMA rating as listed in the Actuator Schedule.

a) Where the rating is not listed, use NEMA Type 4X enclosures for non-hazardous areas, and explosion-proof (XP) Class I Division 1 for hazardous areas.

b) All pilot devices shall 30 millimeters, and pilot lights shall be illuminated by LEDs.

2) LOCAL-STOP-REMOTE selector switch. 3) LOCAL mode control devices:

a) Operate valve when LOCAL-STOP-REMOTE integral to actuator is in REMOTE and LOCAL-STOP-REMOTE on remote control station is in LOCAL.

b) OPEN-STOP-CLOSE maintained switch or OPEN, STOP, and CLOSE pushbuttons where Maintained operation is indicated in the Actuator Schedule.

c) OPEN-CLOSE spring-return switch or OPEN and CLOSE pushbuttons where momentary operation is indicated in the Actuator Schedule.

4) Pilots lights to indicate valve position: a) Fully open. b) Fully closed.

4. Control inputs: a. Capable of using 120 VAC inputs. b. Controls the valve when LOCAL-STOP-REMOTE is in REMOTE. c. Isolated inputs capable of operating from external control voltage source

or internal power supply: 1) Furnish 120 VAC or 24 VDC control power supplies within the

actuator. d. Provide the following inputs:

1) OPEN. 2) CLOSE. 3) STOP.

e. OPEN and CLOSE inputs configurable between maintained (actuator runs until end of travel, high torque, or a STOP input) and momentary (actuator stops when command is removed).

5. Status outputs: a. Monitor relay output: Dry contact, normally closed, opens when actuator is

not in REMOTE or in the event of any internal fault or alarm condition.


b. Dry contact outputs configured for the functions indicated on the Drawings. Provide the following outputs for all actuators: 1) Fully closed. 2) Fully open. 3) LOCAL-STOP-REMOTE in REMOTE position.

c. All output contacts rated for 5 amps, 120 VAC, and 24 VDC. 6. Analog input:

a. Provide a 4-20 milliampere analog input for analog modulating valves when indicated on the Drawings.

b. Modulate valve to maintain position based on analog input value. c. Maximum input impedance 250 ohms.

7. Analog outputs: a. Provide an isolated 4-20 milliampere analog output when indicated on the

Drawings. 1) Loop power sourced from the actuator power supply. 2) Capable of driving into a load up to 500 ohms. 3) Output proportional to process value(s) indicated on the Drawings. 4) Valve or gate position. 5) Operating torque.

E. Features: 1. Time delay on reversal: Incorporate time delay between stopping actuator and

starting in opposite direction to limit excessive current, torque, and heating from instantaneous reversal.

2. Data logging: a. Store diagnostic data and reference data. b. Time-stamped historical operating data, including number of operations.

3. Provide display of logged data on the actuator, or provisions to download to a personal computer.

F. Materials: 1. Construct motorized actuators of materials suitable for the environment in

which the valve or gate is to be installed.

G. Components: 1. Motors: 2. Specifically designed for valve actuator service with high starting torque, totally

enclosed non-ventilated construction. 3. Torque ratings equal to or greater than that required for valve seating and

dynamic torques with a 25 percent factor of safety. a. Design requirements for rubber-seated AWWA butterfly valves:

1) Design actuators for maximum gate or valve operating torque, in accordance with and using safety factors required in AWWA C504 and AWWA C542. a) Valve actuator torque requirement for open-close service: Not

less than the required valve-seating and dynamic torques under design operating conditions in accordance with AWWA C504.

b) Valve actuator torque requirement for modulating service: Not less than twice the required valve dynamic torque under design operating conditions in accordance with AWWA C504.

b. Design requirements for slide gates, gate valves, knife gate valves, globe valves, and diaphragm valves:


1) Design valves and actuators for maximum operating torque, in accordance with and using safety factors required in AWWA C542.

2) Design for the maximum torque and thrust running load over the full cycle.

3) Maximum torque or thrust rating: The actuator stall torque or maximum thrust output shall not exceed the torque or thrust capability of the valve or gate, as determined by the valve or gate manufacturer.

4. Capable of being removed and replaced without draining the actuator gear case.

5. Motor bearings shall be amply proportioned of the anti-friction type and permanently lubricated.

6. Rated for operating under the following conditions without exceeding temperature limits with ambient temperature of 40 degrees Celsius. a. Continuous operation for 15 minutes or twice the open-to-close operating

time (whichever is greater) at normal operating torque or 33 percent of maximum torque (whichever is greater).

b. 60 starts per hour for open/close service or 1,200 starts per hour for modulating service.

7. Provide the following motor protection features: a. Jammed valve (no valve motion detected through a time delay). b. High motor temperature (sensed by an embedded thermostats). c. High torque. d. Single phasing protection.

H. Enclosures: 1. Actuator housing ratings as indicated in the Actuator Schedule. 2. Stainless steel external fasteners. 3. Provide o-ring seals for each of the following areas:

a. Between the terminal compartment and the internal electrical elements. b. Between the mechanical and electrical portions to protect from the ingress

of oil, and to protect the mechanical components of oil from dust and moisture when the electrical terminal is open.

4. Provide the following minimum enclosure ratings: a. NEMA Type 4X enclosure for general applications.

I. Position sensing: 1. Electronic and adjustable using a solid-state encoder wheel.

a. Mechanical limit switches and potentiometers are not acceptable. 2. Capable of retaining position and monitoring valve or gate motion when valve

is manually actuated and when main power is not present. 3. Valve range and position switch outputs field adjustable.

J. Torque sensing: 1. Torque shutdown setting: 40 percent to 100 percent rated torque:

a. Adjustable in 1 percent increments. 2. Capable of interrupting control circuit during both opening and closing and

when valve torque overload occurs. 3. Electrical or electronic torque sensing. 4. Independent of variations in frequency, voltage, or temperature. 5. Provide a temporary inhibit of the torque sensing system during unseating or

during starting in mid-travel against high inertia loads.


6. Provide visible verification of torque switch status without any housing disassembly.

K. Manual actuators: 1. Hand wheel for manual operation.

a. Maximum 80-pound pull on rim when operating gate or valve under maximum load.

b. Provide pull chain when motorized actuator is located more than 6 feet above floor surface. 1) Chain shall be of sufficient length to reach approximately 4 feet

above the operating level. 2) Where the chain obstructs an aisle or walkway, provide holdback or

other means to ensure chain does not create a nuisance or hazard to operating personnel.

2. Declutch lever: Padlockable, capable of mechanically disengaging motor and related gearing and freeing hand wheel for manual operation.

L. Gearing: Hardened alloy steel spur or helical gears and self-locking, alloy bronze worm gear set. 1. Accurately cut to ensure minimum backlash.

M. Bearings: 1. Anti-friction bearing with caged balls or rollers throughout. 2. Sealed-for-life type thrust bearings housed in a separate thrust base.

N. Drive bushing: 1. Easily detachable for machining to suit the valve stem or gearbox input shaft. 2. Positioned in a detachable base of the actuator.

O. Lubrication: 1. Provide totally enclosed actuator gearing with oil or grease filled gear case

suitable for operation at any angle. 2. Actuators requiring special or exotic lubricants are not acceptable.

2.04 ACCESSORIES

A. Software: 1. Furnish PC-based diagnostic and configuration software to display diagnostic

data and configure actuators. 2. Provide software communications to the valve actuator and handheld setting

tool using Bluetooth wireless communications. a. Provide all accessories and drivers required for operation and

communications with a standard personal computer running Microsoft Windows.

B. Termination module cover: 1. For actuators on a valve network, provide a means to keep the valve network

in service, in the event where the actuator must be removed. 2. Provide sunshades for all outdoor installations of remote control stations that

use an LCD or similar screen. Regular pushbutton, sector switches, and pilot light control stations will not require a sunshade.



A. As specified in Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Spare parts: 1. Provide the following (minimum 10 percent of total number of actuators of

each model type furnished, but not less than 1 for each model of actuator furnished): a. Stem nut. b. Worm shaft subassembly. c. Drive sleeve subassembly. d. Complete actuator seal kit. e. Actuator gearbox oil (sufficient quantity to fill 4 gearboxes). f. Encoder. g. Control module.

2. Provide 1 spare motor for each size motor furnished.

C. Setting tool: 1. If required for setting or configuring the actuator, provide a handheld setting

tool. a. Furnish 1 setting tool for every 10 actuators. b. Capable of communicating with PC-based configuration software, and

transferring the following in either direction between the computer and programmer and setting tool, and between the setting tool and actuator.

c. Actuator configurations: 1) Capable of storing up to 10 different configurations.

d. Diagnostic data: 1) Capable of storing 4 complete sets of diagnostic data.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. As specified in Section 15050 - Common Work Results for Mechanical Equipment.

B. Position visual indicators so that they are most easily visible.

3.02 COMMISSIONING

A. As specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning, Section 15958 - Mechanical Equipment Testing, and this Section.


a. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Source Testing: 1) Proof-of-Design and Performance Test Reports in accordance with

AWWA C542. b. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation and Functionality Compliance.

2. Manufacturer’s Representative on-site requirements: a. Installation: 2 trips, 1-day minimum each. b. Functional testing: 2 trips, 1-day minimum each.


3. Training: a. Maintenance: 2 hours per session, 1 session. b. Operation: 4 hours per session, 1 session. c. Electrical and Instrumentation: 2 hours, 1 session.

C. Source testing: 1. Design and Performance Test Reports in accordance with AWWA C542. 2. Test each actuator with a simulated load.

a. Simulate a typical valve load. 3. Electrical Instrumentation and Controls:

a. Test witnessing: not witnessed. b. Conduct testing as specified in Section 17050 - Basic Measurement and

Control Instrumentation Material and Methods.

D. Functional testing: 1. Installed actuator:

a. Test witnessing: Witnessed. b. Conduct Level 2 General Equipment Performance Test. c. Conduct Level 2 Vibration Test. d. Conduct Level 2 Noise Test.

2. Electrical Instrumentation and Controls: a. Test witnessing: Witnessed. b. Conduct testing as specified in Section 17050 - Basic Measurement and

Control Instrumentation Material and Methods.

3.03 MOTORIZED ACTUATOR SCHEDULE

A. Provide all actuators indicated on the Drawings: 1. Major process actuators are listed in the Actuator Schedule in this Section. 2. The Motorized Actuator Schedule does not include all number and types of

actuators required for the Project.

B. Abbreviations relating to type: 1. PV = Plug Valve. 2. KGV = Knife Gate Valve.

C. Abbreviations relating to actuator type: 1. O/C = Open and Close Service. 2. MOD = Modulating Service.

D. Abbreviations relating to controls: 1. A = Analog (4-20 mA) control, modulating duty. 2. D-O/C = Discrete Open/Close. 3. ENET = Ethernet/IP

END OF SECTION

Ele

ctric

Act

uato

rs

134

47-1

1

114

87A

10

pw://

Car

ollo

/Doc

umen

ts/C

lient

/OR

/Cle

an W

ater

Ser

vice

s/11

487A

10/S

peci

ficat

ions

/134

47 (B

idse

t) A

pril

202

1 -

BID

AC

TU

AT

OR

SC

HE

DU

LE

Item

R

efer

ence

D

WG

T

ype

Siz

e A

ctu

ato

r T

ype

NE

MA

R

atin

g

Vo

ltag

e/

Ph

ase/

Hz

No

tes

Op

en

Tim

e C

on

tro

ls

UV

Rea

ctor

No.

1 In

let V

alve

(6

50F

V28

01A

) 65

0-M

-001

P

V

16”

O/C

N

EM

A 4

X

480/

3/60

-

30 s

ec

D-O

/C

UV

Rea

ctor

No.

2 In

let V

alve

(6

50F

V28

02A

) 65

0-M

-001

P

V

16”

O/C

N

EM

A 4

X

480/

3/60

-

30 s

ec

D-O

/C

UV

Rea

ctor

No.

3 In

let V

alve

(6

50F

V28

03A

) 65

0-M

-001

P

V

16”

O/C

N

EM

A 4

X

480/

3/60

-

30 s

ec

D-O

/C

UV

Rea

ctor

No.

4 In

let V

alve

(6

50F

V28

04A

) 65

0-M

-001

P

V

16”

O/C

N

EM

A 4

X

480/

3/60

-

30 s

ec

D-O

/C

UV

Rea

ctor

No.

5 In

let V

alve

(6

50F

V28

05A

) 65

0-M

-001

P

V

16”

O/C

N

EM

A 4

X

480/

3/60

-

30 s

ec

D-O

/C

UV

Rea

ctor

No.

1 O

utle

t Val

ve

(650

FV

2801

B)

650-

M-0

01

KG

V

20”

O/C

N

EM

A 4

X

480/

3/60

-

30 s

ec

D-O

/C

UV

Rea

ctor

No.

2 O

utle

t Val

ve

(650

FV

2802

B)

650-

M-0

01

KG

V

20”

O/C

N

EM

A 4

X

480/

3/60

-

30 s

ec

D-O

/C

UV

Rea

ctor

No.

3 O

utle

t Val

ve

(650

FV

2803

B)

650-

M-0

01

KG

V

20”

O/C

N

EM

A 4

X

480/

3/60

-

30 s

ec

D-O

/C

UV

Rea

ctor

No.

4 O

utle

t Val

ve

(650

FV

2804

B)

650-

M-0

01

KG

V

20”

O/C

N

EM

A 4

X

480/

3/60

-

30 s

ec

D-O

/C

UV

Rea

ctor

No.

5 O

utle

t Val

ve

(650

FV

2805

B)

650-

M-0

01

KG

V

20”

O/C

N

EM

A 4

X

480/

3/60

-

30 s

ec

D-O

/C

Pla

nt D

isch

arge

Out

fall

Val

ve

(650

FV

2812

) 65

0-M

-001

P

V

30”

O/C

N

EM

A 4

X

480/

3/60

-

30 s

ec

D-O

/C

Pla

nt D

isch

arge

VF

W V

alve

(6

50F

V28

13)

650-

M-0

01

PV

24

” O

/C

NE

MA

4X

48

0/3/

60

- 30

sec

D

-O/C

Not

es:

(1)

Pro

vide

act

uato

rs w

ith r

emot

e co

ntro

l sta

tion.

Ele

ctric

Act

uato

rs

134

47-1

2

114

87A

10

pw://

Car

ollo

/Doc

umen

ts/C

lient

/OR

/Cle

an W

ater

Ser

vice

s/11

487A

10/S

peci

ficat

ions

/134

47 (B

idse

t) A

pril

202

1 -

BID

Common Work Results For Mechanical Equipment 15050-1 11487A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/OR/Clean Water Services/11487A10/Specifications/15050 (Bidset) April 2021 - BID

SECTION 15050

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: Basic design and performance requirements for building mechanical equipment and process mechanical equipment.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American Gear Manufacturer's Association (AGMA) Standards: 1. 6001-E08 - Design and Selection of Components for Enclosed Gear Drives.

B. American Bearing Manufactures Association (ABMA) Standards: 1. 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings. 2. 11 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings.

C. American Petroleum Institute (API): 1. 682 - Shaft Sealing Systems for Centrifugal and Rotary Pumps.

D. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. A36 - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. 2. A48 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings. 3. A125 - Standard Specification for Steel Springs, Helical, Heat-Treated. 4. A193 - Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting for

High Temperature or High Pressure Service and Other Special Purpose Applications.

5. A194 - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High Pressure or High Temperature Service, or Both.

6. A320 - Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting for Low-Temperature Service.

7. A536 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings. 8. A653 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or

Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. 9. B61 - Standard Specification for Steam or Valve Bronze Castings. 10. B62 - Standard specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings. 11. B505 - Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Continuous Castings. 12. B584 - Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General

Applications. 13. F593 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and


E. Hydraulic Institute (HI).

F. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA).

G. Unified Numbering System (UNS).


1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Resonant frequency: That frequency at which a small driving force produces an ever-larger vibration if no dampening exists.

B. Rotational frequency: The revolutions per unit of time usually expressed as revolutions per minute.

C. Critical frequency: Same as resonant frequency for the rotating elements or the installed machine and base.

D. Peak vibration velocity: The root mean square average of the peak velocity of the vibrational movement times the square root of 2 in inches per second.

E. Rotational speed: Same as rotational frequency.

F. Maximum excitation frequency: The excitation frequency with the highest vibration velocity of several excitation frequencies that are a function of the design of a particular machine.

G. Critical speed: Same as critical frequency.

H. Free field noise level: Noise measured without any reflective surfaces (an idealized situation); sound pressure levels at 3 feet from the source unless specified otherwise.

I. Operating weight: The weight of unit plus weight of fluids or solids normally contained in unit during operation.

1.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. General: 1. Product requirements as specified in Section 01600 - Product Requirements. 2. Project conditions as specified in Section 01610 - Project Design Criteria. 3. Provisions specified under each technical equipment specification prevail over

and supersede conflicting provisions specified in this Section. 4. Equipment manufacturer's responsibility extends to selection and mounting of

gear drive units, motors or other prime movers, accessories, and auxiliaries required for proper operation.

5. Vibration considerations: a. Resonant frequency:

1) For single-speed equipment, ensure there are no natural resonant frequencies within 25 percent above or below the operating rotational frequencies or multiples of the operating rotational frequencies that may be excited by the equipment design.

2) For variable-speed equipment, ensure there are no natural resonant frequencies within 25 percent above or below the range of operating frequencies.

b. Design, balance, and align equipment to meet the vibration criteria specified in Section 15958 - Mechanical Equipment Testing.

6. Equipment units weighing 50 pounds or more: Provide with lifting lugs or eyes to allow removal with hoist or other lifting device.


B. Power transmission systems: 1. V-belts, sheaves, shaft couplings, chains, sprockets, mechanical

variable-speed drives, variable frequency drives, gear reducers, open and enclosed gearing, clutches, brakes, intermediate shafting, intermediate bearings, and U-joints are to be rated for 24 hour-a-day continuous service or frequent stops-and-starts intermittent service, whichever is most severe, and sized with a service factor of 1.5 or greater in accordance with manufacturer recommendations: a. Apply service factor to nameplate horsepower and torque of prime source

of power and not to actual equipment loading. b. Apply service factors in accordance with AGMA 6001-E08, other

applicable AGMA standards, or other applicable referenced standards.

C. Equipment mounting and anchoring: 1. Mount equipment on cast-iron or welded-steel bases with structural steel

support frames. a. Utilize continuous welds to seal seams and contact edges between steel

members. b. Grind welds smooth.

2. Provide bases and supports with machined support pads, dowels for alignment of mating of adjacent items, adequate openings to facilitate grouting, and openings for electrical conduits.

3. Provide jacking screws in bases and supports for equipment weighing over 1,000 pounds.

4. Design equipment anchorage, supports, and connections for dead load, running loads, loads during start-up, seismic load specified in Section 01612 - Seismic Design Criteria, and other loads as required for proper operation of equipment. a. For equipment with an operating weight of 400 pounds or greater and all

equipment that is supported higher than 4 feet above the floor, provide calculations for: 1) The operating weight and location of the centroid of mass for the

equipment. 2) Forces and overturning moments. 3) Shear and tension forces in equipment anchorages, supports, and

connections. 4) The design of equipment anchorage, supports, and connections

based on calculated shear and tension forces. 5. Anchorage of equipment to concrete or masonry:

a. Perform calculations and determine number, size, type, strength, and location of anchor bolts or other connections.

b. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, select and provide anchors from the types specified in Section 05190 - Mechanical Anchoring and Fastening to Concrete and Masonry.

c. Provide bolt sleeves around cast-in anchor bolts for 400 pounds or greater equipment. 1) Adjust bolts to final location and secure the sleeve.

6. Anchorage of equipment to metal supports: a. Perform calculations and determine number, size, type, strength, and

location of bolts used to connect equipment to metal supports. 7. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, install equipment supported on

concrete over non-shrink grout pads as specified in this Section.


1.05 SUBMITTALS


B. Product data: 1. For each item of equipment:

a. Design features. b. Load capacities. c. Efficiency ratings. d. Material designations by UNS alloy number or ASTM Specification and

Grade. e. Data needed to verify compliance with the Specifications. f. Catalog data. g. Nameplate data. h. Clearly mark submittal information to show specific items, materials, and

accessories or options being furnished. 2. Gear reduction units:

a. Engineering information in accordance with applicable AGMA standards. b. Gear mesh frequencies.

C. Shop drawings: 1. Drawings for equipment:

a. Drawings that include cut-away drawings, parts lists, material specification lists, and other information required to substantiate that proposed equipment complies with specified requirements.

2. Outline drawings showing equipment, driver, driven equipment, pumps, seal, motor(s) or other specified drivers, variable frequency drive, shafting, U-joints, couplings, drive arrangement, gears, base plate or support dimensions, anchor bolt sizes and locations, bearings, and other furnished components.

3. Installation instructions including leveling and alignment tolerances, grouting, lubrication requirements, and initial Installation Testing procedures.

4. Wiring, control schematics, control logic diagrams and ladder logic or similar for computer-based controls.

5. Recommended or normal operating parameters such as temperatures and pressures.

6. Alarm and shutdown setpoints for all controls furnished.

D. Calculations: 1. Structural:

a. Substantiate equipment base plates, supports, bolts, anchor bolts, and other connections meet minimum design requirements specified and seismic design criteria as specified in Section 01612 - Seismic Design Criteria.

2. Mechanical: a. ABMA 9 or ABMA 11 L10 life for bearings calculation methods for drivers,

pumps, gears, shafts, motors, and other driveline components with bearings.

b. Substantiate that operating rotational frequencies meet the requirements of this Section.


c. Torsional analysis of power transmission systems: When torsional analysis specified in the equipment sections, provide: 1) Sketch of system components identifying physical characteristics

including mass, diameter, thickness, and stiffness. 2) Results of analysis including first and second critical frequencies of

system components and complete system. d. Calculations shall be signed and stamped by a licensed engineer.

3. Drinking water: a. If applicable, conform to the requirements of Section 01600 - Product

Requirements for materials in contact with drinking water.

E. Operation and maintenance manuals: 1. As specified in Section 01782 - Operating and Maintenance Manuals. 2. Equipment with bearings:

a. Include manufacturer and model number of every bearing. b. Include calculated ball pass frequencies of the installed equipment for

both the inner and outer raceways.

F. Commissioning submittals: As specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning.

G. Project closeout documents: As specified in Section 01770 - Closeout Procedures.

1.06 WARRANTIES

A. Written warranty issued by item's manufacturer.

B. Project-specific information, properly executed by product manufacturer, and expressly states that its provisions are for the benefit of the Owner.

C. Covers all costs associated with the correction of the defect, including but not limited to removal of defective parts, new parts, labor, and shipping. 1. When correcting warranted Work that has failed, remove and replace other

Work that had been damaged as a result of such failure or that must be removed and replaced to provide access for correction of warranted Work.

D. Provides a timely response to correct the defect. 1. Manufacturer shall provide, in a timely fashion, temporary equipment as

necessary to replace warranted items requiring repair or replacement, when warranted items are in use and are critical to the treatment process, as defined by Owner.

2. In the case that Owner has to provide temporary equipment to replace function of warranted item requiring repair or replacement, manufacturer shall reimburse Owner for such costs associated with the temporary equipment.

E. Warranty commence running on the date of substantial completion. 1. For items of Work for which acceptance is delayed beyond Date of Substantial

Completion, submit warranty within 10 calendar days after acceptance, listing date of acceptance as beginning of warranty period.

F. Duration of Warranty: 1 year unless otherwise specified in the individual equipment section.


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Materials as specified in Section 01600 - Product Requirements including special requirements for materials in contact with drinking water.

B. Ferrous materials: 1. Steel for members used in fabrication of assemblies: ASTM A36. 2. Iron castings: ASTM A48, tough, close-grained gray iron, free from blowholes,

flaws, and other imperfections. 3. Ductile iron castings: ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12, free from flaws and

imperfections. 4. Galvanized steel sheet: ASTM A653, minimum 0.0635-inch (16-gauge). 5. Expanded metal: ASTM A36, 13-gauge, 1/2-inch flat pattern expanded metal. 6. Stainless steel:

a. As specified in Section 05120 - Structural Steel. b. In contact or within 36 inches of water: Type 316 or 316L. c. In sea air environment: Type 316 or 316L. d. Other locations: Type 304 or 304L. e. Source cleaning and passivation as specified in Section 05120 - Structural

Steel.

C. Non-ferrous materials: 1. Bronze in contact with drinking water: Composition of not more than 2 percent

aluminum nor more than 6 percent zinc; UNS Alloy C89833, C89520, or C92200 in accordance with ASTM B61, B62, B505, or B584, when not specified otherwise.

2. Bronze in contact with wastewater: Composition of not more than 2 percent aluminum nor more than 6 percent zinc; UNS Alloy C83600, C89833, C89520, C92200, or C93700 in accordance with ASTM B61, B62, B505, or B584, when not specified otherwise.

3. Aluminum: As specified in Section 05140 - Structural Aluminum.

D. Dielectric materials for separation of dissimilar metals: 1. Neoprene, bituminous impregnated felt, heavy bituminous coatings,

nonmetallic separators or washers, or other materials as specified.

E. Non-shrink grout and epoxy non-shrink grout: As specified in Section 03600 - Grouting.

2.02 ANCHORS AND FASTENERS

A. Mechanical anchoring to concrete and masonry: 1. As specified in Section 05190 - Mechanical Anchoring and Fastening to

Concrete and Masonry: a. Type 316 stainless steel.

2. Design as specified in Section 01612 - Seismic Design Criteria.

B. High-strength fasteners: 1. As specified in Section 05120 - Structural Steel.


C. Flange bolts: 1. As specified in Section 15052 - Common Work Results for General Piping.

D. Mechanical assembly fasteners: 1. Stainless steel:

a. High-temperature service or high-pressure service: 1) Bolts: ASTM A193, Grade B8 (Type 304) or Grade B8M (Type 316),

Class 1, heavy hex. 2) Nuts: ASTM A194, Grade 8, heavy hex. 3) Washers: Alloy group matching bolts and nuts.

b. Low-temperature service: 1) Bolts: ASTM A320, Grade B8 (Type 304) or Grade B8M (Type 316),

Class 1, heavy hex. 2) Nuts: ASTM A194, Grade 8 (Type 304) or Grade B8M (Type 316),

heavy hex. 3) Washers: Alloy group matching bolts and nuts.

c. General service: 1) Bolts: ASTM F593, Alloy Group 1 (Type 304) or Alloy Group 2

(Type 316). 2) Nuts: ASTM F594, Alloy Group 1 (Type 304) or Alloy Group 2

(Type 316). 3) Washers: Alloy group matching bolts and nuts.

2.03 SHAFT COUPLINGS

A. General: 1. Type and ratings: Provide non-lubricated type, designed for not less than

50,000 hours of operating life. 2. Sizes: Provide as recommended by manufacturer for specific application,

considering horsepower, speed of rotation, and type of service.

B. Shaft couplings for close-coupled electric-motor-driven equipment: 1. Use for:

a. Equipment 1/2 horsepower or larger. b. Reversing equipment. c. Equipment subject to sudden torque reversals or shock loading: d. Examples:

1) Reciprocating pumps, blowers, and compressors. 2) Conveyor belts.

2. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Lovejoy. b. T.B. Woods.

3. Provide flexible couplings designed to accommodate angular misalignment, parallel misalignment, and end float.

4. Manufacture flexible component of coupling from synthetic rubber or urethane. 5. Provide service factor of 2.5 for electric motor drives and 3.5 for engine drives. 6. Do not allow metal-to-metal contact between driver and driven equipment.

C. Shaft couplings for direct-connected electric-motor-driven equipment: 1. Use for 1/2 horsepower or larger and subject to normal torque, non-reversing

applications.


2. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Rexnord. b. T.B. Woods.

3. Provide flexible couplings designed to accommodate shock loading, vibration, and shaft misalignment or offset.

4. Provide flexible connecting element of rubber and reinforcement fibers. 5. Provide service factor of 2.0. 6. Connect stub shafts through collars or round flanges, firmly keyed to their

shafts with neoprene cylinders held to individual flanges by through pins.

D. Spacer couplings: Where cartridge-type mechanical seals or non-split seals are specified, provide a spacer-type coupling of sufficient length to remove the seal without disturbing the driver or driven equipment unless noted otherwise in the individual equipment specifications.

E. Specialized couplings: Where requirements of equipment dictate specialized features, supply coupling recommended for service by manufacturer: 1. Includes any engine-driven equipment.

2.04 STUFFING BOX, SEAL CHAMBER, AND SHAFT SEALS

A. General: 1. Unless otherwise noted in the equipment section, provide cartridge-type,

double mechanical shaft seals for pumps. 2. Provide a stuffing box large enough for a double mechanical seal. 3. Where packing is specified, provide stuffing box large enough to receive a

double mechanical seal. 4. Provide seal or packing flush connections, (3/4-inch size unless another size is

indicated on the Drawings). 5. Provide and route leakage drain line to nearest equipment floor drain indicated

on the Drawings. 6. For pumps with packing, design packing gland to allow adjustment and

repacking without dismantling pump except to open up packing box. 7. Seal or packing flush requirements shall be in accordance with API

Standard 682 requirements. Unless otherwise indicated, specified or required by the equipment and seal manufacturers, the following API flushing Plan arrangements shall be utilized as appropriate for the application: a. Single seal, clean water applications: Plan 11 (Discharge bypass to seal). b. Single seal, vertical pump applications: Plan 13 (Seal bypass to suction). c. Single seal, clean hot water (greater than 180 degrees Fahrenheit)

applications: Plan 23 (Seal cooler and pumping ring). d. Single seal, solids, or contaminants containing water applications: Plan 32

(External seal water). e. Double seal applications: Plan 54 (External seal water).

B. Packing: When specified in the equipment section of the specifications, provide the following type of packing: 1. Wastewater, water, and sludge applications:

a. Asbestos free. b. PTFE (Teflon™) free. c. Braided graphite.


d. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1) Chesterton, 1400. 2) John Crane, equivalent product.

2. Drinking water service: a. Asbestos free. b. Material: Braided PTFE (Teflon™). c. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

1) Chesterton, 1725. 2) John Crane, equivalent product.

C. Mechanical seals: Provide seal types specified in the equipment sections and as specified. 1. Provide seal types meeting the following requirements:

a. Balanced hydraulically. b. Spring: Stationary, out of pumping fluid, Hastelloy C; Type Elgiloy or

17-7 PH stainless steel for split seals. c. O-ring: Viton™ 747. d. Gland: Type 316L stainless steel. e. Set screws: Type 316L stainless steel. f. Faces: Reaction bonded, silicon carbide. g. Seal designed to withstand 300 pounds per square inch gauge minimum

differential pressures in either direction; no requirement for seal buffer pressure to be maintained when pump is not operational even though process suction head may be present in pump.

2. Cartridge-type single mechanical: a. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

1) Chesterton, S10. 2) John Crane, 5610 Series.

3. Cartridge-type double mechanical: Manufacturers: a. One of the following or equal:

1) Chesterton, S20. 2) John Crane, 5620 Series.

4. Split-face single mechanical: Manufacturers: a. One of the following or equal:

1) Chesterton, 442. 2) John Crane, 3740.

5. Cartridge-type flushless mechanical: a. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

1) Chesterton, 156. 2) John Crane, 5870.

2.05 GEAR REDUCTION UNITS

A. Type: Helical or herringbone, unless otherwise specified.

B. Design: 1. Made of alloys treated for hardness and for severe service. 2. AGMA Class II service:

a. Use more severe service condition when such is recommended by unit's manufacturer.

3. Cast-iron housing with gears running in oil. 4. Anti-friction bearings.


5. Thermal horsepower rating based on maximum horsepower rating of prime mover, not actual load.

6. Manufactured in accordance with applicable AGMA standards.

C. Planetary gear units are not to be used.

2.06 BELT DRIVES

A. Sheaves: 1. Separately mounted on bushings by means of at least 3 pull-up bolts or cap

tightening screws. 2. When 2 sheave sizes are specified, provide separate belts sized for each set

of sheaves. 3. Statically balanced for all; dynamically balanced for sheaves that operate at a

peripheral speed of more than 5,500 feet per minute. 4. Key bushings to drive shaft.

B. Belts: Anti-static type when explosion-proof equipment or environment is specified. 1. When spare belts are specified, furnish 1 spare belt for every different type

and size of belt-driven unit: a. Where 2 or more belts are involved, furnish matched sets. b. Identify as to equipment, design, horsepower, speed, length, sheave size,

and use. c. Package in boxes labeled with identification of contents.

C. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1. Dodge, Dyna-V belts with matching Dyna-V sheaves and Taper-Lock

bushings. 2. T.B. Woods, Ultra-V belts with matching Sure-Grip sheaves and Sure-Grip

bushings.

2.07 BEARINGS

A. Type: Oil or grease lubricated, ball or roller antifriction type, of standard manufacture.

B. Oil-lubricated bearings: Provide either pressure lubricating system or separate oil reservoir splash-type system: 1. Size oil-lubrication systems to safely absorb heat energy generated in

bearings when equipment is operating under normal conditions and with the temperature 15 degrees Fahrenheit above the maximum design temperature as specified in Section 01610 - Project Design Criteria.

2. Provide an external oil cooler when required to satisfy the specified operating conditions: a. Provide air-cooled system if a water-cooling source is not indicated on the

Drawings. b. Equip oil cooler with a filler pipe and external level gauge.

C. Grease lubricated bearings, except those specified to be factory sealed: Fit with easily accessible grease supply, flush, drain, and relief fittings. 1. Lubrication lines and fittings:

a. Lines: Minimum 1/4-inch diameter stainless steel tubing.


b. Multiple fitting assemblies: Mount fittings together in easily accessible location.

c. Use standard hydraulic-type grease supply fittings: 1) Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

a) Alemite. b) Zerk.

D. Ratings: Rated in accordance with ABMA 9 or ABMA 11 L10 life for bearings rating life of not less than 50,000 hours.

2.08 MOTORS

A. As specified in Section 16222 - Low Voltage Motors Up to 500 Horsepower.

2.09 GEAR MOTORS

A. Motors as specified in Section 16222 - Low Voltage Motors Up to 500 Horsepower.

B. Helical gearing for parallel shaft drives and worm gearing for right-angle drives.

C. Manufactures: One of the following or equal: 1. Baldor Electric Company. 2. Bodine Electric Company.

2.10 VENDOR CONTROL PANELS

A. As specified in Division 17.

2.11 EQUIPMENT SUPPORT FRAMES

A. Bolt holes shall not exceed bolt diameter by more than 25 percent, up to a limiting maximum diameter oversize of 1/4-inch.

2.12 PIPING AND VALVES

A. Piping as specified in Section 15052 - Common Work Results for General Piping.

B. Valves as specified in Section 15110 - Common Work Results for Valves.

2.13 SAFETY EQUIPMENT

A. Safety guards: 1. Provide guards that protect personnel from rotating shafts or components

within 7.5 feet of floors or operating platforms. 2. Requirements:

a. Allow visual inspection of moving parts without removal. b. Allow access to lubrication fittings. c. Prevent entrance of rain or dripping water for outdoor locations. d. Size belt and sheave guards to allow for installation of sheaves 15 percent

larger and addition of 1 belt.


3. Materials: a. Sheet metal: Carbon steel, 12-gauge minimum thickness, hot-dip

galvanized after fabrication. b. Fasteners: Type 304 stainless steel.

B. Insulation: 1. Insulate all surfaces with normal operating temperatures above 120 degrees

Fahrenheit when surface is within 7.5 feet height from any operating floor or level.

2. Insulation thickness such that temperature is below 120 degrees Fahrenheit.

C. Warning signs: 1. Provide warning signs in accordance with OSHA requirements for equipment

that starts automatically or remotely. 2. Mount warning signs with stainless steel fasteners at equipment.

2.14 SPRING VIBRATION ISOLATORS

A. Design requirements: 1. Telescopic top and bottom housing with vertical stabilizers to resist lateral and

vertical forces. 2. Use steel coil springs. 3. Design vibration isolators in accordance with seismic design criteria as

specified in Section 01612 - Seismic Design Criteria.

B. Performance requirements: Minimum spring deflection of 1-inch under static load and capable of limiting transmissibility to 10 percent maximum at design operating load.

C. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1. California Dynamics Corporation, Type RJSD. 2. Mason Industries, equivalent product.

D. Materials: 1. Fabricate isolators using welded-steel or shatterproof ductile iron in

accordance with ASTM A536 Grade CS-45-12. 2. Spring steel: ASTM A125.

2.15 NAMEPLATES

A. Fastened to equipment at factory in an accessible and visible location.

B. Stainless steel sheet engraved or stamped with text, holes drilled or punched for fasteners.

C. Fasteners: Number 4 or larger oval head stainless steel screws or drive pins.

D. Text: 1. Manufacturer’s name, equipment model number and serial number, motor

horsepower when appropriate, and identification tag number. 2. Indicate the following additional information as applicable:

a. Maximum and normal rotating speed. b. Service class per applicable standards.


3. Include for pumps: a. Rated total dynamic head in feet of fluid. b. Rated flow in gallons per minute. c. Impeller, gear, screw, diaphragm, or piston size.

4. Include for gear reduction units: a. AGMA class of service. b. Service factor. c. Input and output speeds.

2.16 SHOP FINISHES

A. Provide appropriate factory coatings as specified in Section 09960 - High-Performance Coatings. 1. Motors and gear reducers: Shop finish paint with manufacturer's standard

coating, unless otherwise specified in the individual equipment specification.

2.17 SPECIAL TOOLS

A. Supply 1 set of special tools as specified in Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

2.18 SOURCE TESTING

A. Testing requirements unless specified otherwise in the individual equipment specifications: 1. Mechanical equipment: Level 1 General Equipment Performance Test as

specified in Section 15958 - Mechanical Equipment Testing. 2. Motors: As specified in Section 16222 - Low Voltage Motors Up to 500

Horsepower. 3. Vendor control panels: As specified in Section 17050 – Basic Measurement

and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods.

2.19 SHIPPING


B. Prior to shipment of equipment: 1. Bearings (and similar items):

a. Pack separately or provide other protection during transport. b. Greased and lubricated.

2. Gear boxes: a. Oil filled or sprayed with rust preventive protective coating.

3. Fasteners: a. Inspect for proper torques and tightness.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 DELIVERY, HANDLING, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION


B. Inspect fasteners for proper torques and tightness.


C. Storage: 1. Bearings:

a. Rotate units at least once per month or more often as recommended by the manufacturer to protect rotating elements and bearings.

2. Gear boxes: a. Inspect to verify integrity of protection from rust.

D. Protection: 1. Equipment Log shall include description of rotation performed as part of

maintenance activities.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Field measurements: 1. Prior to shop drawings preparation, take measurements and verify dimensions

indicated on the Drawings. 2. Ensure equipment and ancillary appurtenances fit within available space.

B. Sequencing and scheduling: 1. Equipment anchoring: Obtain anchoring material and templates or setting

drawings from equipment manufacturers in adequate time for anchors to be cast-in-place.

2. Coordinate details of equipment with other related parts of the Work, including verification that structures, piping, wiring, and equipment components are compatible.

C. Metal work embedded in concrete: 1. Accurately place and hold in correct position while concrete is being placed. 2. Clean surface of metal in contact with concrete immediately before concrete is

placed.

D. Concrete surfaces designated to receive non-shrink grout: 1. Heavy sandblast concrete surface in contact with non-shrink grout. 2. Clean concrete surfaces of sandblasting sand, grease, oil, dirt, and other

foreign material that may reduce bond to non-shrink grout. 3. Saturate concrete with water. Concrete shall be saturated surface damp at

time non-shrink grout is placed.

E. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations.

F. Lubrication lines and fittings: 1. Support and protect lines from source to point of use. 2. Fittings:

a. Bring fittings to outside of equipment in manner such that they are readily accessible from outside without necessity of removing covers, plates, housings, or guards.

b. Mount fittings together wherever possible using factory-mounted multiple fitting assemblies securely mounted, parallel with equipment lines, and protected from damage.

c. Fittings for underwater bearings: Bring fittings above water surface and mount on edge of structure above.


G. Alignment of drivers and equipment: 1. Where drive motors or other drivers are connected to driven equipment by

flexible coupling, disconnect coupling halves and align driver and equipment after complete unit has been leveled on its foundation.

2. Comply with procedures of appropriate HI, AGMA Standards, alignment tolerances of equipment manufacturers and the following requirements to bring components into angular and parallel alignment: a. Maximum total coupling offset (not the per-plane offset): Not to exceed

0.5 mils per inch of coupling length for spacer couplings based on coupling length (not dial separation).

b. Utilize jacking screws, wedges, or shims as recommended by the equipment manufacturer and as specified in the equipment sections.

3. Use reverse-indicator arrangement dial-type or laser-type alignment indicators: Mount indicators on the driver/coupling flange and equipment/coupling flange. Alignment instrumentation accuracy shall be sufficient to read angular and radial misalignment at 10 percent or less of the manufacturer's recommended acceptable misalignment.

4. Alignment and calculations shall include measurement and allowance for thermal growth, spacer coupling length, indicator separation, and axial spacing tolerances of the coupling.

5. When alignment satisfies most stringent tolerance of system components, grout between base and foundation. a. Allow minimum 48 hours for grout to harden. b. After grout hardens, remove jacking screws, tighten anchor bolts and

other connections, and recheck alignment. c. Correct alignment as required.

6. After functional testing is complete, dowel motor or drivers and driven equipment: a. Comply with manufacturer's instructions.

H. Grouting under equipment bases, baseplates, soleplates, and skids: 1. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, grout with non-shrink grout as

specified in Section 03600 - Grouting. a. Non-shrink epoxy grout required only when indicated on the Drawings.

2. Comply with equipment manufacturer's installation instructions for grouting spaces, and tolerances for level and vertical and horizontal alignment.

3. Install grout only after: a. Equipment is leveled and in proper alignment. b. Piping connections are complete and in alignment with no strain

transmitted to equipment. 4. Do not use leveling nuts on equipment anchors for supporting and leveling

equipment bases, baseplates, soleplates, and skids for grouting. 5. Use jack screws for supporting and leveling equipment bases, baseplates,

soleplates, and skids for grouting following the procedure defined below: a. Drill and tap equipment base plates, sole plates, and skids for jack

screws. b. Use suitable number and size of jack screws. c. End of jack screws shall bear on circular steel plates epoxy bonded to

equipment foundation. d. Jack screw threads that will be in contact with grout: Wrap with multiple

layers of tape or other material, acceptable to Engineer, to prevent grout from bonding to threads.


e. Place and cure grout as specified in Section 03600 - Grouting. f. After grout is cured, remove jack screws and material used to prevent

bonding to grout. 1) Provide jack screws to Owner for future use.

g. Tighten equipment anchors in accordance with equipment manufacturer requirements.

h. Fill holes where jack screws have been removed with grout. i. Cure as specified in Section 03600 - Grouting.

6. For equipment bases, baseplates, soleplates, and skids where it is not practical to use jack screws, use steel wedges and shims. a. Wrap wedges and shims that contact grout with multiple layers of tape or

other material, acceptable to Engineer, to prevent grout from bonding. b. Place and cure grout as specified in Section 03600 - Grouting. c. Remove wedges or shims. d. Tighten equipment anchors to in accordance with equipment

manufacturer requirements. e. Fill voids where wedges and shims have been removed with grout. f. Cure as specified in Section 03600 - Grouting.

7. Preparation of equipment bases, baseplates, soleplates, and skids for grouting: g. Metal in contact with grout: Grit blast to white metal finish. h. Clean surfaces of equipment bases, baseplates, soleplates, and skids in

contact with grout of dirt, dust, oil, grease, paint, and other material that will reduce bond.

7. Preparation of concrete equipment foundation for grouting: a. Rough concrete surfaces in contact with grout. b. Concrete contact surface shall be free of dirt, dust, laitance, particles,

loose concrete, or other material or coatings that will reduce bond. c. Saturate concrete contact surface area with water for minimum of

24 hours prior to grouting. d. Remove standing water just prior to grout placement, using clean rags or

oil-free compressed air.

8. Forms and header boxes: a. Build forms for grouting of material with adequate strength to withstand

placement of grouts. b. Use forms that are rigid and liquid tight. Caulk cracks and joints with an

elastomeric sealant. c. Line forms with polyethylene film for easy grout release. Forms carefully

waxed with 2 coats of heavy-duty paste wax will also be acceptable. 9. Grout placement requirements:

a. Minimum ambient and substrate temperature: 45 degrees Fahrenheit and rising: 1) Conform to grout manufacturer’s temperature requirements.

b. Pour grout using header box. c. Keep level of grout in header box above bottom of equipment bases,

baseplates, soleplates, and skids at all times to prevent air entrapment. d. Grout shall flow continuously from header box to other side of forms

without trapping air or forming voids. e. Vibrate, rod, or chain grout to facilitate grout flow, consolidate grout, and

remove entrapped air.


f. After grout sets, remove forms and trim grout at 45-degree angle from bottom edge of equipment bases, baseplates, soleplates, and skids.

g. Cure as specified in Section 03600 - Grouting.

I. Field welding: 1. Use welding procedures, welders, and welding operators qualified and certified

in accordance with AWS D1.1. 2. Shielded arc welding.

J. Field finishes: 1. Protect motors. 2. Clean equipment. 3. Apply primer and coating systems as specified in Section 09960 - High-

Performance Coatings requirements.

K. Special techniques: 1. Use applicable special tools and equipment, including precision machinist

levels, dial indicators, and gauges as required in equipment installations.

L. Tolerances: 1. Completed equipment installations: Comply with requirements for intended use

and specified vibration and noise tolerances.

M. Warning signs: 1. Mount securely with stainless fasteners at equipment that can be started

automatically or from remote locations.

3.03 COMMISSIONING

A. As specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning.

B. Functional testing requirements unless specified otherwise in the individual equipment specifications: 1. Mechanical equipment: Level 1 tests as specified in Section 15958 -

Mechanical Equipment Testing. 2. Motors: As specified in Sections 16222 - Low Voltage Motors Up to 500

Horsepower and 16950 - Field Electrical Acceptance Tests. 3. Vendor control panels: As specified in Section 17050 – Basic Measurement

and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods.

END OF SECTION

Common Work Results For General Piping - Plant 15052-1 11487A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/OR/Clean Water Services/11487A10/Specifications/15052 (Bidset) April 2021 - BID

SECTION 15052

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR GENERAL PIPING - PLANT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: Basic materials and methods for metallic and plastic piping systems.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): 1. B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: NPS 1/2 Through 24. 2. B16.47 - Large Diameter Steel Flanges: NPS 26 Through NPS 60 Metric/Inch

Standard.

B. American Water Work Association (AWWA): 1. C11 - Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe. 2. C105 - Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Pipe Systems. 3. C111 - Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittlings. 4. C151 - Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast. 5. C207 - Standard for Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Services-Size 4 In.

Through 144 In.

C. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. A74 - Standard Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. 2. A193 - Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting for


3. A194 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel, Alloy Steel, and Stainless Steel Nuts for Bolts for High Pressure or High Temperature Service, or Both.

4. A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts, Studs, and Threaded Rod 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength.

5. A563 - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts. 6. B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube. 7. D2000 - Standard Classification System for Rubber Products in Automotive

Applications. 8. D2513 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Gas Pressure Pipe,

Tubing and Fittings. 9. F37 - Standard Test Methods for Sealability of Gasket Materials. 10. F593 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and

Studs. 11. F594 – Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Nuts. 12. F2329 - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating, Hot-Dip, Requirements of

Application to Carbon and Alloy Steel Bolts, Screws, Washers, Nuts, and Special Threaded Fasteners.

D. California Health and Safety Code.


E. NSF International (NSF): 1. 61 – Drinking Water System Components – Health.Effects.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Buried pipes: Pipes that are buried in the soil with or without a concrete pipe encasement.

B. Exposed pipe: Pipes that are located above ground, or located inside a structure, supported by a structure, or cast into a concrete structure.

C. Underground pipes: Buried pipes - see A. above.

D. Underwater pipes: Pipes below the top of walls in basins or tanks containing water.

E. Wet wall: A wall with water on at least 1 side.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Materials as specified in Section 01600 - Product Requirements including special requirements for materials in contact with drinking water.

2.02 ESCUTCHEONS

A. Material: Chrome-plated steel plate.

B. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1. Dearborn Brass Co., Model Number 5358. 2. Keeney Manufacturing Co., Model Number 102 or Number 105.

2.03 LINK TYPE SEALS

A. Characteristics: 1. Modular mechanical type, consisting of interlocking neoprene or synthetic

rubber links shaped to continuously fill the annular space between the pipe and wall opening.

2. Links to form a continuous rubber belt around the pipe. 3. Provide a nylon polymer pressure plate with Type 316 stainless steel

hardware. Isolate pressure plate from contact with wall sleeve. 4. Hardware to be Type 316 stainless steel.

a. Provide anti-galling lubricant for threads.

B. One of the following or equal: 1. Link-Seal. 2. Pipe Linx.

2.04 FLANGE BOLTS AND NUTS

A. General: 1. Washer:


a. Provide a washer for each nut. b. Washer shall be of the same material as the nut.

2. Nuts: Heavy hex-head. 3. Cut and finish flange bolts to project:

a. Face of the bolt shall exceed face of nut by 1/8th-inch minimum. b. A maximum of 1/4-inch beyond outside face of nut after assembly.

4. Tap holes for cap screws or stud bolts when used. 5. Lubricant for stainless steel bolts and nuts:

a. Chloride-free. b. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

1) Huskey FG-1800 Anti-Seize. 2) Weicon Anti-Seize High-Tech.

B. For ductile iron pipe: 1. On exposed pipes with pressures equal to or less than 150 pounds per square

inch gauge (psig): a. Bolts: ASTM A307, Grade B. b. Nuts: ASTM A563, Grade A. c. Bolts and Nuts: Hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM F2329.

2. On exposed pipes with pressures greater than 150 psig: a. Bolts: ASTM A193, Grade B. b. Nuts: ASTM A194, Grade 2H. c. Bolts and nuts: Hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM F2329.

3. On buried, underwater pipes, and pipes adjacent to wet walls: a. Bolts: ASTM A193, Grade B8M. b. Nuts: ASTM A194, Grade 8M.

C. Plastic pipe: 1. On exposed pipes:

a. Bolts: ASTM A307, Grade B. b. Nuts: ASTM A563, Grade A. c. Bolts and Nuts: Hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM F2329.

2. On underwater pipes and pipes adjacent to wet walls: a. Bolts: ASTM A193, Grade B8M. b. Nuts: ASTM A194, Grade 8M.

D. Steel pipe: 1. On exposed pipes:

a. For ASME B16.5 Class 150 flanges and AWWA C207 Class D flanges: 1) Bolts: ASTM A307, Grade B. 2) Nuts: ASTM A563, Grade A. 3) Bolts and Nuts: Hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM F2329.

b. For ASME B16.5 and B16.47 Class 300 flanges and AWWA C207 Class E and F flanges: 1) Bolts: ASTM A193, Grade B7. 2) Nuts: ASTM A194, Grade 2H.

2. On underwater pipes and pipes adjacent to wet walls: a. Bolts: ASTM A193, Grade B8M. b. Nuts: ASTM A194, Grade 8M.


2.05 MECHANICAL JOINTS BOLTS AND NUTS

A. Bolts including T-Bolts: 1. Type 316 stainless steel in accordance with ASTM F593.

B. Heavy Hex Nuts: 1. Type 316 stainless steel in accordance with ASTM F594.

2.06 GASKETS

A. General. 1. Gaskets shall be suitable for the specific fluids, pressure, and temperature

conditions. 2. Capable of being applied on surface of piping with cavities to provide for an

improved seal with the internal piping pressure.

B. Gaskets for flanged joints in ductile iron and steel piping for sewage service: 1. Suitable for pressures equal and less than 150 pounds per square inch gauge,

temperatures equal and less than 250 degrees Fahrenheit, and raw sewage service.

2. Gasket material: a. SBR or neoprene elastomer with minimum Shore A hardness value of 70. a. Reinforcement: Cloth or synthetic fiber. b. Thickness: Minimum 3/32-inch thick for less than 10-inch pipe; minimum

1/8 inch thick for 10-inch and larger pipe. 3. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

a. Pipe less than 48 inches in diameter: 1) Garlock, Style 7797. 2) John Crane, similar product.

b. Pipe 48 inches in diameter and larger: 1) Garlock, Style 3760. 2) John Crane, similar product.

c. John Crane, similar product.

C. Gaskets for flanged joints in polyvinyl chloride and polyethylene piping: 1. Suitable for pressures equal to and less than 150 pounds per square inch

gauge, with low flange bolt loadings, temperatures equal to and less than 120 degrees Fahrenheit, and polymer, chlorine, caustic solutions, and other chemicals, except chemicals which liberate free fluorine including fluorochemicals and gaseous fluorine.

2. Material: a. Chemical systems: 0.125-inch thick Viton™ rubber. b. Sewer and water: 0.125-inch thick SBR.

3. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Garlock. b. John Crane, similar product.

D. Gaskets for flanged joints in low pressure air piping: 1. Suitable for pressures equal to and less than 150 pounds per square inch

gauge, temperatures equal to and less than 300 degrees Fahrenheit, and compressed air service.

2. Material: EPDM elastomer, 1/8-inch thick, 60 Shore hardness, smooth surface.


3. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Garlock, Style 8314. b. John Crane, similar product.

E. Gaskets for flanged joints in ductile iron or steel water piping: 1. Suitable for hot or cold water, pressures equal to and less than 150 pounds

per square inch gauge, and temperatures equal to and less than 160 degrees Fahrenheit.

2. Material: a. SBR or neoprene elastomer, compressed, with non-asbestos fiber

reinforcement. b. Teflon™ ring; or Teflon™ envelope with non-asbestos filler.

3. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Garlock, Bluegard 3300. b. John Crane, similar product.

F. Gaskets for flanged joints in ductile iron or steel drinking water piping meeting NSF requirements: 1. Suitable for hot or cold water, pressures equal to or less than 150 pounds per

square inch gauge, and temperatures equal to or less than 160 degrees Fahrenheit.

2. Material: a. EPDM material with 80 Shore A durometer rating.

3. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Garlock, 98206. b. John Crane, similar product.

G. Gaskets for grooved joints in ductile iron: 1. Material to be used for following services unless otherwise specified:

a. FlushSeal® type or equal 1) For liquid service: Nitrile: Grade S; for temperatures to 180 degrees

Fahrenheit. 2) For hot water service: Fluoroelastomer. 3) For air service: Fluoroelastomer.

H. Gaskets for grooved joints in steel piping: 1. Composition water sealing designed so that the internal piping pressure

serves to increase the seal's watertightness. a. Gaskets for water service and oil-free air systems at temperatures less

than 230 degrees Fahrenheit shall be made of ethylene propylene diene monomers (EPDM) in accordance with ASTM D2000 Line Call Out 2CA615A25B24.

b. Gaskets for use with cement-mortar lined steel piping for temperatures less than 180 degrees Fahrenheit shall be captured between the ends of the pipe to protect exposed metal from corrosion, and shall be made of nitrile in accordance with ASTM D2000, Line Call Out 2CA615A25B24.

I. Gaskets for mechanical joints in ductile iron: 1. Certified to NSF-61 when used for potable water service. 2. SBR or NBR.


J. Gaskets for push-on rubber gasket joints in ductile iron: 1. Certified to NSF-61 when used for potable water service.

a. SBR or NBR.

2.07 REPAIR BANDS

A. Design requirements: 1. In accordance with AWWA C230.

B. Materials: 1. Shells: Type 304 stainless steel. 2. Lugs: Removable epoxy coated ductile iron in accordance with ASTM A536. 3. Bolts and nuts: 304 Stainless Steel with fluorpolymer coated nuts. 4. Gaskets: Compounded for water and sewer service.

C. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1. Romac Industries, Inc. 2. Smith-Blair Inc.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. General: 1. Piping drawings:

a. Except in details, piping is indicated diagrammatically. Not every offset and fitting, or structural difficulty that may be encountered has been indicated on the Drawings. Sizes and locations are indicated on the Drawings.

b. Perform minor modifications to piping alignment where necessary to avoid structural, mechanical, or other type of obstructions that cannot be removed or changed. 1) Modifications are intended to be of minor scope, not involving a

change to the design concept or a change to the Contract Price or Contract Times.

2. Piping alternatives: a. Provide piping as specified in this Section, unless indicated on the

Drawings or specified otherwise. b. Alternative pipe ratings:

1) Piping with greater pressure rating than specified may be substituted in lieu of specified piping without changes to the Contract Price.

2) Piping of different material may not be substituted in lieu of specified piping.

c. Valves in piping sections: Capable of withstanding specified test pressures for piping sections and fabricated with ends to fit piping.

d. Grooved joints: Use couplings, flange adapters, and fittings of the same manufacturer. 1) Manufacturer’s factory trained representative:

a) Provide on-site training for Contractor’s field personnel. b) Periodically visit the jobsite to verify Contractor is following best

recommended practices.


2) Distributor’s representative is not considered qualified to conduct the training or jobsite visits.

e. Flanged joints: where 1 of the joining flanges is raised face type, provide a matching raised face type flange for the other joining flange.

3. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, piping at pipe joints, fittings, couplings, and equipment shall be installed without rotation, angular deflection, vertical offset, or horizontal offset.

B. Wall and slab penetrations: 1. Provide sleeves for piping penetrations through aboveground masonry and

concrete walls, floors, ceilings, roofs, unless specified or otherwise indicated on the Drawings.

2. For piping 1 inch in nominal diameter and larger, provide sleeves with minimum inside diameters of 1 inch plus outside diameter of piping. For piping smaller than 1 inch in nominal diameter, provide sleeve of minimum twice the outside diameter of piping. a. Arrange sleeves and adjacent joints so piping can be pulled out of sleeves

and replaced without disturbing the structure. b. Cut ends of sleeves flush with surfaces of concrete, masonry, or plaster. c. Conceal ends of sleeves with escutcheons where piping runs through

floors, walls, or ceilings of finished spaces within buildings. d. Seal spaces between pipes and sleeves with link-type seals when not

otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings. 3. Provide flexibility in piping connecting to structures to accommodate

movement due to soil settlement and earthquakes. Provide flexibility using details indicated on the Drawings.

4. Core drilled openings: a. Do not damage or cut existing reinforcing bars, electrical conduits, or

other items embedded in the existing concrete without acceptance by Engineer.

b. Determine location of reinforcing bars or other obstructions with a non-destructive indicator device.

c. Remove dust and debris from hole using compressed air.

C. Exposed piping: 1. Install exposed piping in straight runs parallel to the axes of structures, unless

otherwise indicated on the Drawings: a. Install piping runs plumb and level, unless otherwise indicated on the

Drawings. 1) Slope plumbing drain piping with a minimum of 1/4-inch per foot

downward in the direction of flow. 2. Install exposed piping after installing equipment and after piping and fitting

locations have been determined. 3. Support piping: As specified in Sections 15061 - Pipe Supports and 15062 -

Preformed Channel Pipe Support System. a. Do not transfer pipe loads and strain to equipment.

4. In addition to the joints indicated on the Drawings, provide unions, flexible couplings, flanged joints, flanged coupling adapters, and other types of joints or means which are compatible with and suitable for the piping system, and necessary to allow ready assembly and disassembly of the piping.

5. Assemble piping without distortion or stresses caused by misalignment:


a. Match and properly orient flanges, unions, flexible couplings, and other connections.

b. Do not subject piping to bending or other undue stresses when fitting piping.

c. Do not correct defective orientation or alignment by distorting flanged joints or subjecting flange bolts to bending or other undue stresses.

d. Flange bolts, union halves, flexible connectors, and other connection elements shall slip freely into place.

e. Alter piping assembly to fit, when proper fit is not obtained. f. Install eccentric reducers or increasers with the top horizontal for pump

suction piping.

D. Buried piping: 1. Bury piping with minimum 3-foot cover without air traps, unless otherwise

indicated on the Drawings. 2. Where 2 similar services run parallel to each other, piping for such services

may be laid in the same trench. a. Lay piping with sufficient room for assembly and disassembly of joints, for

thrust blocks, for other structures, and to meet separation requirements of public health authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Laying piping: a. Lay piping in finished trenches free from water or debris. Begin at the

lowest point with bell ends up slope. b. Place piping with top or bottom markings with markings in proper position. c. Lay piping on an unyielding foundation with uniform bearing under the full

length of barrels. d. Where joints require external grouting, banding, or pointing, provide space

under and immediately in front of the bell end of each section laid with sufficient shape and size for grouting, banding, or pointing of joints.

e. At the end of each day's construction, plug open ends of piping temporarily to prevent entrance of debris or animals.

4. Concrete encase buried pipe installed under concrete slabs or structures.

E. Venting piping under pressure: 1. Lay piping under pressure flat or at a continuous slope without air traps, unless

otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 2. Install plug valves as air bleeder cocks at high points in piping.

a. Provide 1-inch plug valves for water lines, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.

3. Provide additional pipe taps with plug cocks and riser pipes along piping as required for venting during initial filling, disinfecting, and sampling.

4. Before piping is placed into service, close plug valves and install plugs. Protect plugs and plug valves from corrosion in as specified in Section 09960 - High-Performance Coatings.

A. Restraining buried piping: 1. Restrain piping at valves and at fittings where piping changes direction,

changes sizes, and at ends: a. When piping is underground, use concrete thrust blocks, mechanical

restraints, or push-on restraints. b. Determine thrust forces by multiplying the nominal cross-sectional area of

the piping by design test pressure of the piping.


2. Provide restraints with ample size to withstand thrust forces resulting from test pressures: a. During testing, provide suitable temporary restraints where piping does

not require permanent restraints. 3. Place concrete thrust blocks against undisturbed soil. 4. Place concrete so piping joints, fittings, and other appurtenances are

accessible for assembly and disassembly. 5. Provide underground mechanical restraints where specified in the Piping

Schedule.

B. Restraining above ground piping: 1. Restrain piping at valves and at fittings where piping changes direction,

changes sizes, and at ends: a. When piping is aboveground or underwater, use mechanical or structural

restraints. b. Determine thrust forces by multiplying the nominal cross-sectional area of

the piping by design test pressure of the piping. 2. Provide restraints with ample size to withstand thrust forces resulting from test

pressures: a. During testing, provide suitable temporary restraints where piping does

not require permanent restraints.

F. Connections to existing piping: 1. Expose existing piping to which connections are to be made with sufficient

time to permit, where necessary, field adjustments in line, grade, or fittings: a. Protect domestic water/potable water supplies from contamination:

1) Make connections between domestic water supply and other water systems in accordance with requirements of public health authorities.

2) Provide devices approved by Owner of domestic water supply system to prevent flow from other sources into the domestic supply system.

2. Make connections to existing piping and valves after sections of new piping to be connected have been tested and found satisfactory.

3. Provide sleeves, flanges, nipples, couplings, adapters, and other fittings needed to install or attach new fittings to existing piping and to make connections to existing piping.

4. For flanged connections, provide stainless steel bolts with isolation bushings and washers, and full-face flange gaskets.

G. Connections to in-service piping: 1. As specified in Section 01140 - Work Restrictions.

H. Connections between ferrous and nonferrous metals: 1. Connect ferrous and nonferrous metal piping, tubing, and fittings with dielectric

couplings especially designed for the prevention of chemical reactions between dissimilar metals.

2. Nonferrous metals include aluminum, copper, and copper alloys.

I. Flanged connections between dissimilar metals such as ductile iron pipe and steel pipe: 1. Provide stainless steel bolts with isolation bushings and washers, and full-face

flange gaskets.


3.02 CLEANING

A. Piping cleaning: 1. Upon completion of installation, clean piping interior of foreign matter and

debris. 2. Perform special cleaning when required by the Contract Documents.

B. Cleaning potable water piping: 1. Flush and disinfect potable water piping as specified in Section 01757 -

Disinfection.

C. Cleaning and drying of dry chlorine gas or liquid chlorine piping: 1. Coordinate with Owner and attend a pre-cleaning meeting with Owner before

cleaning chlorine piping. 2. Work with Owner during cleaning and conform to plant operational and shut

down constraints. 3. Clean chlorine pressure piping in accordance with the requirements of the

Chlorine Institute-Pamphlet 6 and meet the following requirements. 4. Do not put water into any of the chlorine gas or liquid piping. 5. Blow chlorine piping clean of loose debris with compressed air at 4,000 fpm. 6. Clean chlorine piping by pulling clean cloths saturated with an approved

solvent through piping: a. Do not use hydrocarbons or alcohols that may react with chlorine. b. Use solvents in accordance with manufacturer's safety recommendations

to avoid serious physiological effects. c. Remove all dirt and debris of any nature from the chlorine lines.

7. Disassemble and clean valves and equipment that have oil residues before installation.

8. Dry piping immediately before effecting final connections for service. a. Keep piping sealed to prevent moisture from entering chlorine piping. b. Supply compressors, air dryers, and dew point testing equipment

necessary to dry and test for dryness the new chlorination system piping. c. Drying procedure:

1) Pass dry commercial grade nitrogen gas that has a dew point of minus 40 degrees Fahrenheit or less through the piping until exhausted air at three Engineer-approved locations has a dew point of minus 40 degrees Fahrenheit.

2) Confirm dew point with a hygrometer. 3) Allow several hours for drying piping. 4) Re-dry the chlorine piping system in the event subsequent work

opens any part of the system to the atmosphere.

D. Cleaning and drying chlorine gas vacuum piping: 1. Blow pipe clean of loose debris with instrument-grade clean and dry

compressed air. 2. Ensure that pipe is open and not valved off at the end of the section to be

cleaned so that pipe does not become pressurized. DO NOT PRESSURIZE PVC WITH COMPRESSED AIR.

3. Do not flush chlorine gas vacuum piping with water. 4. After cleaning, purge air out with commercial grade dry nitrogen that has a

dew point of minus 40 degrees Fahrenheit or less.


E. Cleaning chlorine piping: 1. Clean chlorine piping by pulling clean cloths saturated an approved solvent

through piping: a. Do not use hydrocarbons or alcohols that may react with chlorine. b. Use solvents in accordance with manufacturer's safety recommendations

to avoid serious physiological effects. 2. Disassemble and clean valves and equipment that have oil residues before

installation. 3. Dry piping immediately before effecting final connections for service.

a. Keep piping kept sealed to prevent moisture from entering chlorine piping. b. Drying procedure shall be as follows:

1) Pass steam through piping from the high end until piping is thoroughly heated. While steaming, allow condensate and foreign matter to drain out.

2) Stop steaming and drain pockets and low points. 3) While piping is hot, blow dry air through piping until piping is dry.

a) Use dry air with a dew point of minus 40 degrees Fahrenheit or below.

4) Continue blowing dry air through piping until exhausted air has a dew point of minus 30 degrees Fahrenheit or below.

5) Allow several hours for drying piping.

F. Cleaning air piping: 1. Perform special cleaning of filtered air piping from the intake clean air plenums

to the discharge points and high-pressure air piping. a. Protect surfaces from contamination.

2. Special cleaning shall include wire brushing, power tool cleaning, wiping down with lint-free cloths, brooming, and vacuuming to remove rust, scale, weld spatter, dust, dirt, oil, and other matter deleterious to operation of the air system: a. Do not sandblast installed piping.

3. To the greatest extent possible, clean piping immediately prior to final closure of piping systems: a. Enter piping, clean and wipe down surfaces, and vacuum out residue. b. Clean surfaces not accessible to this cleaning operation after installation

within 6 hours preceding installation. 4. Subsequent to cleaning, protect surfaces from contamination by dust, dirt,

construction debris, and moisture, including atmospheric moisture: a. Whether or not pipe upstream has been cleaned, temporarily seal

openings in partially completed work except when installation is actively in progress.

b. When installation is actively in progress, seal openings at the end of each day's construction or when construction is temporarily stopped.

5. Suspend cleaning and seal openings when inclement weather, including dust storms, is imminent.

6. Use clean, dry air for testing the piping and other elements of the system. 7. Prior to introduction of air to the system, blow piping clean.

a. Blow with maximum discharge rate possible for minimum 4 hours, using new blowers or compressors and filters.

8. Clean surfaces that become contaminated prior to acceptance.


G. Cleaning steam piping: 1. Thoroughly clean steam piping, boiler feed water piping, and condensate

return piping by flushing with water. a. Conduct cleaning operation after piping connections are completed and

after piping has successfully passed pressure test. 2. Utilize potable quality water, softened to remove hardness, for flushing water.

a. Provide temporary facilities and chemicals to add corrosion control additives to flushing water.

b. Utilize recommendations of boiler manufacturer for type and quantity of corrosion control additives.

c. When corrosion control additives are to be disposed of within treatment plant, use additives that are non-toxic to the treatment process.

3. When the boiler system includes a feed water softening system, this system may be utilized as source of flushing water. a. Provide adequately sized temporary storage tank when capacity of feed

water softening system is less than required flow rate for flushing. 4. Flush piping with water in sufficient quantities to produce a flow velocity of

6 feet per second in the main pipe and branch lines. 5. Continue flushing until at least twice the volume of pipe has been flushed. 6. Disconnect steam traps and piping less than 1/2-inch in nominal diameter prior

to flushing operation. a. After flushing operation is completed, drain entire system, and reconnect

piping and steam traps. 7. When cleaning operation is complete, remove temporary piping, pumps, tanks,

and chemicals used to accomplish pipe cleaning. 8. Prior to beginning cleaning operation, submit plan for the cleaning operation.

Include details of equipment, procedures, and MSDS sheets for chemicals to be utilized.

H. Conduct pressure and leak test, as specified.

3.03 PIPING SCHEDULE

Com

mon

Wor

k R

esul

ts F

or G

ener

al P

ipin

g -

Pla

nt

150

52-1

3

114

87A

10

pw://

Car

ollo

/Doc

umen

ts/C

lient

/OR

/Cle

an W

ater

Ser

vice

s/11

487A

10/S

peci

ficat

ions

/150

52 (B

idse

t) A

pril

202

1 -

BID

PIP

ING

SC

HE

DU

LE

Pro

cess

A

bb

rev.

S

ervi

ce

No

min

al

Dia

met

er

(in

ches

) M

ater

ial

Pre

ssu

re C

lass

S

pec

ial T

hic

knes

s C

lass

Sch

edu

le

Wal

l Th

ickn

ess

Pip

e S

pec

. S

ecti

on

Jo

ints

/ F

itti

ng

s

Tes

t P

ress

ure

/ M

eth

od

L

inin

g

Co

ati

ng

C

om

me

nts

CA

C

aust

ic

U

nder

grou

nd

0.5-

1

PF

A

Tub

ing

See

Pip

e S

pec.

15

230

PV

DF

Fla

red

50 p

sig/

HH

N

one

N

one

U

nder

grou

nd

(Sec

onda

ry

Con

tain

men

t)

3 P

VC

S

ch 8

0

1524

9 S

W

10 p

sig/

AM

N

one

N

one

A

bove

grou

nd

0.5-

1

PV

C

Sch

80

15

249

SW

or

FL

50

psi

g/H

H

Non

e

WA

E

CW

C

ity

Wat

er (

Po

tab

le)

A

ll 1”

P

VC

S

ch 8

0

1524

9 S

W

125

psig

/HH

N

one

N

one

P

otab

le w

ater

in

acco

rdan

ce w

ith N

SF

61.

FE

F

inis

h E

fflu

ent

U

nder

grou

nd

2 G

SP

S

ch 4

0

1527

8 S

CR

D o

r F

L 75

psi

g/H

H

Non

e

PT

W

U

nder

grou

nd

24-3

0

Ste

el

C20

0

1527

8 W

LD

75 p

sig/

HH

C

M

CM

U

nder

grou

nd

24-3

0 H

DP

E

SD

R 2

1 or

low

er

1524

1 F

L or

Fus

ion

75 p

sig/

HH

N

one

N

one

F

or s

lip-li

ning

, act

ual

SD

R p

er r

equi

red

calc

ulat

ions

A

bove

grou

nd

2 G

SP

S

ch 4

0

1527

8 S

CR

D o

r F

L 75

psi

g/H

H

Non

e

EP

P

A

bove

grou

nd

24-3

0 S

teel

C

200

15

278

WLD

or

FL

75 p

sig/

HH

C

M

EP

P

PW

P

lan

t W

ater

U

nder

grou

nd

8 D

IP

350

1521

1 R

PO

15

0 ps

ig/H

H

CM

2

Laye

rs P

EE

A

bove

grou

nd

4-8

DIP

35

0 15

211

FL

150

psig

/HH

C

M

EP

P

RW

R

Rec

laim

ed W

ater

U

nder

grou

nd

12

DIP

35

0 15

211

RP

O

150

psig

/HH

C

M

2 La

yers

PE

E

SD

S

anit

ary

Dra

in

U

nder

grou

nd

All

C90

0

Cla

ss 1

50

1524

4 C

900

DR

18

10

feet

/GR

N

one

N

one

SE

S

eco

nd

ary

Eff

luen

t

U

nder

grou

nd

2 G

SP

S

ch 4

0

1527

8 S

CR

D o

r F

L 75

psi

g/H

H

Non

e

PT

W

Com

mon

Wor

k R

esul

ts F

or G

ener

al P

ipin

g -

Pla

nt

150

52-1

4

114

87A

10

pw://

Car

ollo

/Doc

umen

ts/C

lient

/OR

/Cle

an W

ater

Ser

vice

s/11

487A

10/S

peci

ficat

ions

/150

52 (B

idse

t) A

pril

202

1 -

BID

PIP

ING

SC

HE

DU

LE

Pro

cess

A

bb

rev.

S

ervi

ce

No

min

al

Dia

met

er

(in

ches

) M

ater

ial

Pre

ssu

re C

lass

S

pec

ial T

hic

knes

s C

lass

Sch

edu

le

Wal

l Th

ickn

ess

Pip

e S

pec

. S

ecti

on

Jo

ints

/ F

itti

ng

s

Tes

t P

ress

ure

/ M

eth

od

L

inin

g

Co

ati

ng

C

om

me

nts

U

nder

grou

nd

16-3

0 S

teel

C

200

15

278

WLD

75

psi

g/H

H

CM

C

M

SE

PS

dis

char

ge h

eade

r an

d U

V s

uctio

n he

ader

U

nder

grou

nd

48

Ste

el

C20

0

1527

8 W

LD

30 ft

/GR

C

M

CM

S

EP

S in

let p

ipin

g

A

bove

grou

nd

12-1

6 D

IP

350

1521

1 F

L 75

psi

g/H

H

CM

E

PP

S

EP

S p

ump

disc

harg

e pi

ping

and

UV

inle

t pip

ing

ST

D

Sto

rm D

rain

U

nder

grou

nd

All

C90

0

Cla

ss 1

50

1524

4 C

900

DR

18

10

feet

/GR

N

one

N

one

A

bove

grou

nd

All

PV

C

Sch

40

15

249

SW

10

feet

/GR

N

one

W

AE

V

Ven

t

A

bove

grou

nd

All

GS

P

Sch

40

15

278

SC

RD

10

psi

g/A

M

Non

e

EP

P

Abb

revi

atio

ns:

1.

The

follo

win

g a

bbre

viat

ions

use

d in

the

col

umn

of te

st m

etho

d re

fer

to th

e re

spec

tive

met

hods

as

spec

ified

in S

ectio

n 1

595

6 -

Pip

ing

Sys

tem

s T

estin

g.

A

M

Air

met

hod

G

R

Gra

vity

met

hod

H

H

Hig

h he

ad

met

hod

LH

Low

hea

d m

etho

d

S

C

Spe

cial

cas

e 2.

A

bbre

viat

ions

to d

esig

nat

e pi

pin

g in

clu

de th

e fo

llow

ing:

BS

P

Bla

ck s

teel

pip

e

B&

SP

B

ell a

nd s

pigo

t

CI

Cas

t iro

n

C

ISP

C

ast i

ron

soil

pip

e

C

L

Cla

ss, f

ollo

we

d b

y th

e de

sign

atio

n

C

M

Cem

ent m

orta

r

CT

P

Coa

l tar

pitc

h

DIP

D

uctil

e ir

on p

ipin

g

E

PP

H

igh

solid

s ep

oxy

and

pol

yure

than

e co

atin

g

F

L F

lang

e

G

A

Gau

ge, p

rece

ded

by

the

des

igna

tion

G

E

Gro

oved

end

join

t

GL

Gla

ss li

ned

G

SP

G

alva

niz

ed s

teel

pip

e

M

J M

echa

nica

l joi

nt

N

PS

N

omin

al p

ipe

size

, fol

low

ed b

y th

e nu

mbe

r in

inch

es

ps

i po

und

s p

er s

qua

re in

ch

ps

ig

pou

nds

per

sq

uare

inch

gau

ge

P

E

Pol

yeth

ylen

e

PE

E

Pol

yeth

ylen

e en

case

men

t

PT

W

Pol

yeth

ylen

e ta

pe w

rap

PV

C

Pol

yvin

yl C

hlo

ride

RP

O

Res

trai

ned

pus

h-on

SC

H

Sch

edul

e, fo

llow

ed b

y th

e de

sign

atio

n

S

CR

D

Scr

ewe

d-O

n

S

ST

S

tain

less

ste

el

S

W

Sol

vent

wel

ded

VC

P

Vitr

ified

cla

y pi

pin

g

W

AE

W

ater

born

e ac

rylic

em

ulsi

on

WLD

W

eld

E

ND

OF

SE

CT

ION

Pipe Supports 15061-1 11487A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/OR/Clean Water Services/11487A10/Specifications/15061 (Bidset) April 2021 - BID

SECTION 15061

PIPE SUPPORTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: Supports for pipe, fittings, valves, and appurtenances.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. A123 - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron

and Steel Products. 2. A380 - Standard Practice for Cleaning, Descaling, and Passivation of Stainless

Steel Parts, Equipment, and Systems. 3. A967 - Standard Specification for Chemical Passivation Treatments for

Stainless Steel Parts.

B. Manufacturer's Standardization Society (MSS): 1. SP-58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design, and Manufacture.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit as specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures

B. Product data. 1. Design features. 2. Load capacities. 3. Material designations by UNS alloy number or ASTM Specification and Grade. 4. Data needed to verify compliance with the Specifications. 5. Catalog data. 6. Clearly mark submittal information to show specific items, materials, and

accessories or options being furnished.

1.04 WARRANTY


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL


2.02 MATERIALS

A. General:


1. Hot dip galvanized: a. Fabricate as specified in Section 05120 - Structural Steel. b. Hot dip after fabrication of support in accordance with ASTM A123. c. Repair galvanized surface as specified in Section 05120 - Structural Steel.

2. Stainless steel. a. Fabricate as specified in Section 05120 - Structural Steel. b. Finish requirements: Remove free iron, heat tint oxides, weld scale, and

other impurities, and obtain a passive finished surface. c. At the shop, perform pickling and passivation on all surfaces inside and

out in accordance with ASTM A380 or A967. 1) Passivation treatments using citric acid are not allowed.

d. Field welding is prohibited unless specifically allowed by the Owner. All field welds shall be passivated.

B. Outdoor areas: Areas exposed to the natural outdoor environment: 1. Type 304 Stainless Steel.

C. Indoor areas: Areas exposed to an indoor environment including galleries and tunnels: 1. Hot Dip Galvanized.

D. Submerged, 3 feet or less above water level in a structure, or inside a water bearing structure: 1. Type 304 Stainless Steel.

E. Stainless steel piping system: 1. Type 304 Stainless Steel.

F. Chemical containment areas and chemical piping: 1. Type 304 Stainless Steel.

G. Fasteners: 1. As specified in Section 05120 - Structural Steel.

2.03 PIPE SUPPORTS

A. Hanger rods: Sized to match suspended pipe hanger, or as indicated on the Drawings: 1. Manufacturers: One of following or equal:

a. For stainless steel piping: 1) Bergen-Power, Figure 133. 2) Nibco-Tolco, Figure 103.

b. For all other piping, unless indicated on the Drawings: 1) Anvil International, Figure 140. 2) Bergen-Power, Figure 133. 3) Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc., Figure B3205.

B. Hanger rods, continuously threaded: Sized to match suspended pipe hanger, or as indicated on the Drawings: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

a. For stainless steel piping: 1) Bergen-Power, Figure 94. 2) FM Stainless Fasteners.


b. For steel and ductile iron piping: 1) Anvil International, Figure 146. 2) Bergen-Power, Figure 94.

C. Eye bolts: 1. For stainless steel piping:

a. Type 316 stainless steel, welded and rated equal to full load capacity of rod.

2. For all other piping, unless indicated on the Drawings: a. Welded and rated equal to full load capacity of rod.

D. Welded eyebolt rod: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

a. For stainless steel piping: 1) Nibco-Tolco, Figure 101. 2) FM Stainless Fasteners.


E. Adjustable ring hangers: MSS SP-58, Type 7 or Type 9 (system dependent): 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

a. For stainless steel piping: 1) Nibco-Tolco, Figure 1C.I. 2) Bergen-Power, Figure 100SS.

b. For all other piping, unless indicated on the Drawings: 1) Anvil International, Figure 97. 2) Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc., Figure B3172.

F. Adjustable clevis hangers: MSS SP-58, Type 1: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

a. For stainless steel piping: 1) Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc., Figure B3100 or B3102. 2) FM Stainless Fasteners, Figure 60.

b. For all other piping, unless indicated on the Drawings: 1) Anvil International, Figure 260 or Figure 590. 2) Bergen-Power, Figure 100. 3) Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc., Figure B3100 or B3102.

G. Adjustable clevis hangers for insulated pipe: Oversize: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

a. For stainless steel piping: 1) Nibco-Tolco, Figure 1A.

b. For all other piping, unless indicated on the Drawings: 1) Anvil International, Figure 300. 2) Bergen-Power, Figure 100EL. 3) Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc. Figure B3108.

H. Single rod hangers for steam pipe: MSS SP-58, Type 43; malleable iron or steel yoke and roller hangers; swivel to allow rotation of yoke on rod: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:


a. For stainless steel piping: 1) Nibco-Tolco, Figure 324. 2) Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc., Figure B3110. 3) FM Fasteners, Figure 81.


I. Double rod hangers for steam pipe: MSS SP-58, Type 41: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

a. For stainless steel piping: 1) FM Stainless Fasteners, Figure 71.


J. Brackets: MSS SP-58, Type 32 with back plate; rated for 1,500 pounds: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

a. For stainless steel piping: 1) Nibco-Tolco, Figure 30M. 2) Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc., Figure B3066. 3) FM Stainless Fasteners, Figure 98.


K. Standard U-bolt: MSS SP-58, Type 24: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

a. For stainless steel piping: 1) Nibco-Tolco, Figure 110. 2) Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc., Figure B3188. 3) FM Stainless Fasteners, Figure 37.


L. Riser clamps: MSS SP-58, Type 8: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

a. For stainless steel piping: 1) Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc., Figure B3373. 2) FM Stainless Fasteners, Figure 61.


M. Pipe clamps: MSS SP-58, Type 4: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

a. For stainless steel piping: 1) Nibco-Tolco, Figure 4. 2) Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc., Figure 3140.



N. Adjustable offset pipe clamp: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

a. For stainless steel piping: 1) Nibco-Tolco, Figure 4. 2) Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc., Figure B3149. 3) FM Stainless Fasteners, Figure 63.


O. Offset pipe clamp: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:



P. Floor stand or stanchion saddles: MSS SP-58, Type 37. Provided with U-bolt hold down yokes: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

a. For stainless steel piping: 1) Nibco-Tolco, Figure 318. 2) FM Stainless Fasteners, Figure 59.


c. Threaded pipe stand support stanchion. Match pipe support material. 1) Anvil International, Figure 63T. 2) Bergen-Power, Figure 138. 3) Cooper B-Line Systems Inc., Figure B3088ST.

Q. Spring hangers: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

a. For stainless steel piping: 1) Bergen-Power, Figure 920.

b. For all other piping, unless indicated on the Drawings: 1) Anvil International, Figure B-268, Type G. 2) Bergen-Power, Figure 920.

R. One hole pipe clamps: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

a. For stainless steel piping: Engineer knows of no product. b. For all other piping:

1) Anvil International, Figure 126.


2) Carpenter & Paterson, Figure 237S.

S. Welded beam attachment: MSS SP-58, Type 22: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:


b. For all other piping, unless indicated on the Drawings: 1) Anvil International, Figure 66. 2) Bergen-Power, Figure 113A or 113B. 3) Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc., Figure B3083.

T. Heavy pipe clamp: MSS SP-58, Type 4: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

a. For stainless steel piping: 1) Nibco-Tolco, Figure 4H.

b. For all other piping, unless called out otherwise on the drawings: 1) Anvil International, Figure 216. 2) Bergen-Power, Figure 298.

U. PTFE pipe slide assembly: MSS SP-58, Type 35 with lateral and vertical restraint: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

a. For stainless steel piping: 1) Nibco-Tolco, Figure 426.

b. For all other piping, unless indicated on the Drawings: 1) Anvil International, Figure 257, Type 3. 2) Cooper B-Line Systems, Inc., Figure B3893.

V. Anchor bolts, concrete anchors, concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, and sleeve anchors: As specified in Section 05120 - Structural Steel.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Support, suspend, or anchor exposed pipe, fittings, valves, and appurtenances to prevent sagging, overstressing, or movement of piping; and to prevent thrusts or loads on or against connected pumps, blowers, and other equipment.

B. Field verify support location, orientation, and configuration to eliminate interferences prior to fabrication of supports.

C. Carefully determine locations of inserts. Anchor to formwork prior to placing concrete.

D. Use flush shells only where indicated on the Drawings.

E. Do not use anchors relying on deformation of lead alloy.

F. Do not use powder-actuated fasteners for securing metallic conduit or steel pipe larger than 1-inch to concrete, masonry, or wood.


G. Suspend pipe hangers from hanger rods and secure with double nuts.

H. Install continuously threaded hanger rods only where indicated on the Drawings.

I. Use adjustable ring hangers or adjustable clevis hangers for 4-inch and smaller diameter pipe.

J. Use adjustable clevis hangers for pipe larger than 4 inches in diameter.

K. Secure pipes with double nutted U-bolts or suspend pipes from hanger rods and hangers. 1. For stainless steel piping, use stainless steel U-bolts. 2. For all other piping, use galvanized U-bolts.

L. Support spacing: 1. Support 2-inch and smaller piping on horizontal and vertical runs at maximum

5 feet on center, unless otherwise specified. 2. Support larger than 2-inch piping on horizontal and vertical runs at maximum

10 feet on center, unless otherwise specified. 3. Support exposed polyvinyl chloride and other plastic pipes at maximum 5 feet

on center, regardless of size. 4. Support tubing, PVC pipe 1-inch and smaller, copper pipe and tubing, fiber-

reinforced plastic pipe or duct, and rubber hose and tubing at intervals close enough to prevent sagging greater than 1/4-inch between supports.

5. Do not suspend or support valves, pipe and fittings from another pipe or conduit.

M. Install supports at: 1. Any change in direction. 2. Both sides of flexible pipe connections. 3. Base of risers. 4. Floor penetrations. 5. Connections to pumps, blowers, and other equipment. 6. Valves and appurtenances.

N. Securely anchor plastic pipe, valves, and headers to prevent movement during operation of valves.

O. Anchor plastic pipe between expansion loops and direction changes to prevent axial movement through anchors.

P. Provide elbows or tees supported from floors with base fittings where indicated on the Drawings.

Q. Support base fittings with metal supports or when indicated on the Drawings support on concrete piers.

R. Do not use chains, plumbers' straps, wire, or similar devices for permanently suspending, supporting, or restraining pipes.

S. Support plumbing drainage and vents in accordance with plumbing code as specified in Section 01410 - Regulatory Requirements.


T. Supports, clamps, brackets, and portions of support system bearing against copper pipe: Copper plated, copper throughout, or isolated with neoprene or polyvinyl chloride tape.

U. Where pipe is insulated, install over-sized supports and hangers.

V. Install insulation shield in accordance with MSS SP-58, Type 40. Shield shall be galvanized steel unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings.

W. Install riser clamps at floor penetrations and where indicated on the Drawings.

X. Coat support system components as specified in Section 09960 - High-Performance Coatings.

END OF SECTION

Preformed Channel Pipe Support System 15062-1 11487A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/OR/Clean Water Services/11487A10/Specifications/15062 (Bidset) April 2021 - BID

SECTION 15062

PREFORMED CHANNEL PIPE SUPPORT SYSTEM

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: Preformed channel pipe support system consisting of preformed channels, fittings, straps, and fasteners engineered to support piping.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC).

B. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI).

C. Manufacturer's Standardization Society (MSS): 1. SP-58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design, and Manufacture.


A. Design responsibility: 1. The manufacturer of the preformed channel pipe support system is

responsible for the design of the support system. 2. Prepare design calculations utilizing the design criteria included in these

Specifications. 3. Prepare detailed shop drawings illustrating the layout of the support system

and identifying the components of the support system.

B. Design criteria: 1. Include live, dead, and seismic loads associated with piping, valves, and

appurtenances. Consider the content of the pipes in load calculations. 2. Minimum gauge thickness: 12-gauge. 3. Allowable stress of channels:

a. Steel channels: The lesser of 25,000 pounds per square inch, or 0.66 times yield stress of steel.

b. Stainless steel channels: 0.66 times the yield stress of the stainless steel alloy.

4. Maximum deflection: 1/240 of span. 5. Allowable column loads: As recommended by manufacturer in published

instruction for column's unsupported height and "K" value for calculating effective column length of not less than 1.0.

6. Future loads: a. Support systems indicated on the Drawings may include spaces intended

to accommodate future pipes. b. Assume such spaces are occupied by 6-inch diameter ductile iron pipes.

Only the number of pipes that would physically fit into the space need be considered.

c. Include the weight of the pipe contents in determining future loads. Assume pipe contents are water.


7. Seismic design criteria: As specified in Section 01612 - Seismic Design Criteria as specified for mechanical equipment.

8. Spacing of supports: As required to comply with design requirements but not more than 5 feet.

C. Supports: Type 316 stainless steel for support system components. 1. Supports in areas exposed to an indoor environment including galleries and

tunnels: Use hot-dipped galvanized components.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product data.


A. Design preformed channel pipe support system for loads in accordance with applicable provisions of: 1. AISC Manual of Steel Construction. 2. AISI Cold-Formed Steel Design Manual.

B. Product standards: 1. Pipe support materials: In accordance with MSS SP-58.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Fabricate preformed channel pipe support system using, as a minimum, parts specified below and meeting the requirements specified under Design Criteria. 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

a. Unistrut, Series P1000 or P1001; P5500 or P5501. b. Allied Support Systems, Power Strut, Figure PS-200 or PS-200 2TS;

PS-150 or PS-150 2TS. c. Cooper Ind., B-Line, Channel Type B22 or B22A; B12 or B12A.

2.02 ACCESSORIES

A. Preformed channel concrete inserts: Minimum 12 inches long: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

a. Unistrut, Series P-3200. b. Allied Support Systems, Figure 282. c. Cooper Ind., B-Line Series B32I.

B. 90-degree angle fittings: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

a. Unistrut, P1026. b. Allied Support Systems, Power Strut, P603.


C. Pipe straps: 1. For pipes 8 inches in diameter and smaller: Use 2-piece universal strap with

slotted hex head screw and nut. a. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

1) Unistrut, Series P1109 through P1126. 2) Allied Support Systems, PS1100. 3) Cooper Ind., B-Line Series B2000.

2. For pipes greater than 8 inches in diameter: Unless different material is otherwise indicated on the Drawings use 1-piece 1-inch wide by 1/8-inch thick steel strap, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.

3. For stainless steel pipes: Use type of strap required for the pipe sizes specified above, but use Type 316 stainless steel materials.

D. Prefabricated double channel bracket: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

a. Unistrut, P2542-P2546. b. Cooper Ind., B-Line Series B297.

E. Touch-up paint for galvanized surfaces: 1. Manufacturers: The following or equal:

a. Galvinox, Galvo-Weld.

F. Touch-up paint for painted surfaces: Same formulation as factory paint.

G. Cushion strip: 1. For solvent welded plastic pipes in elevated temperatures, use a thermoplastic

elastomer, cushion wrap designed for use from -50 degrees Fahrenheit to 275 degrees Fahrenheit. Contractor to add a cushion strip at each pipe support strap that meets this criteria. a. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

1) Anvil, AS 3795. 2) Unistrut, P2600 Unicushion.

2.03 FABRICATION

A. Hot-dip galvanize support system components after fabrication to required length and shape.

B. Do not galvanize or paint stainless steel components.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install preformed channel concrete inserts for vertical support, quantity based on manufacturer's structural design calculations.

B. Fasten preformed channel pipe supports to existing walls using Z-fittings and concrete anchors as indicated on the Drawings.

C. Fasten preformed channel pipe supports to preformed channel concrete inserts embedded in ceiling using U-shaped fittings.


D. Suspend threaded rods from concrete inserts embedded in ceiling. Support preformed channel pipe supports with threaded rods.

E. Touchup cut or damaged galvanized surfaces.

F. Prevent contact between pipes and support components of dissimilar metals. Utilize rubber coated, plastic coated, or vinyl coated components, stainless steel components, or wrap pipe with PVC or polyethylene tape.

G. Install support as near as possible to concentrated loads.

H. Install support within 2 feet of horizontal and vertical changes in pipe alignment.

I. Adjust supports or install shims to obtain specified slope or elevation.

END OF SECTION

Equipment Identification 15075-1 11487A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/OR/Clean Water Services/11487A10/Specifications/15075 (Bidset) April 2021 - BID

SECTION 15075

EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: 1. Equipment nameplates. 2. Special items.

1.02 SUBMITTAL


B. Shop drawings: 1. Product data. 2. Installation instructions.

C. Samples.


A. Regulatory requirements: Comply with all applicable State of Oregon or Federal laws.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATES

A. Material and fabrication: 1. Stainless steel sheet engraved or stamped with text, holes drilled, or punch for

fasteners.

B. Fasteners: 1. Number 4 or larger oval head stainless steel screws or drive pins.

C. Text: 1. Manufacturer’s name, equipment model number and serial number,

identification tag number; and when appropriate, drive speed, motor horsepower with rated capacity, pump rated total dynamic head, and impeller size.

2.02 SPECIAL ITEMS

A. In addition, special coating of following items will be required:

Item Color

Steel guard posts In accordance with standard details

Equipment Identification 15075-2 11487A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/OR/Clean Water Services/11487A10/Specifications/15075 (Bidset) April 2021 - BID

B. Paint minimum 2 inches high numbers on or adjacent to accessible valves, pumps, flowmeters, and other items of equipment which are indicated on the Drawings or in Specifications by number.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify satisfactory conditions of substrate for applying identification.

B. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation and application of products as specified in Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Prepare and coat surfaces of special items as specified in Section 09960 - High-Performance Coatings.

B. Prepare surface in accordance with product manufacturer's instructions.

END OF SECTION

Pipe Identification 15076-1 11487A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/OR/Clean Water Services/11487A10/Specifications/15076 (Bidset) April 2021 - BID

SECTION 15076

PIPE IDENTIFICATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: Pipe identification including the following: 1. Pipe identification by color and legend. 2. Underground warning tape. 3. Tracer wire. 4. Witness markers. 5. Valve identification.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): 1. A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Submit following: 1. Product data. 2. Samples. 3. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 4. Submit following as specified in Section 01770 - Closeout Procedures:

a. Operation and Maintenance Data. b. Warranty.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 ABOVE GROUND AND IN-CHASE PIPE IDENTIFICATION

A. Manufacturers: 1. One of the following or equal:

a. Seton, Opti Code Pipe Markers. b. Lab Safety Supply. c. Marking Services, Inc.

B. Materials: 1. Pipe markers: Self-adhesive vinyl, suitable for outdoor application

from -40 degrees to 180 degrees Fahrenheit; in accordance with ASME A13.1 requirements.


a. Lettering:

Nominal Pipe Diameter Lettering Size

Less than 1.5 inches 1/2-inch

1.5 inches to 2 inches 3/4-inch

2.5 inches to 6 inches 1-1/4 inches

8 inches to 10 inches 2-1/2 inches

12 to 18 inches 4 inches

Over 18 inches 6 inches

b. Marker colors:

Service Lettering Background

Fire-quenching type fluids White Red

Toxic and corrosive type fluids Black Orange

Chlorine solution type fluids Black Yellow

Water White Blue

Non-potable type fluids Black Light Blue

Compressed air White Green

Sludge lines White Brown

Sewage lines Black Gray

Foul air / odorous air Black Light Gray

Reuse irrigation lines White Purple

Overhead clearance less than 6’-8” N/A Yellow/Black

2. Coating: As specified in Section 09960 - High-Performance Coatings. 3. Pipe identification tags: Aluminum or stainless steel with stamped-in 1/4-inch

high identifying lettering. 4. Pipe identification tag chains: Aluminum or stainless steel. 5. Snap-on markers: Markers with 3/4-inch high letters for 3/4 to 4-inch pipe or

covering, or 5-inch high letters for 5-inch or larger pipe or cover: a. Manufacturers: One of following or equal:

1) Brady BradySnap-On B-915. 2) Seton Setmark.

2.02 BURIED PIPELINE IDENTIFICATION

A. Underground warning tape: 1. Manufacturer: One of the following or equal:

a. Seton Name Plate Co. b. T. Christy Enterprises, Inc.

2. Material: a. Polyethylene tape for prolonged underground use. b. Minimum tape thickness: 4 mils. c. Overall tape width: 6 inches.


d. Message: “CAUTION” with the name of the service followed by “LINE BURIED BELOW.” in black lettering on colored background in accordance with approved APWA colors. 1) Water: Blue. 2) Sewer: Green. 3) Telephone: Orange. 4) Gas and other services: Yellow.

B. Tracer wire: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

a. Kris-Tech Wire. b. Corrpro.

2. Materials: One of the following or equal: a. Solid copper conductor b. Thickness minimum: 10 gauge. c. Insulation:

1) Match insulation color to the color of the pipe being installed. 2) UF type, direct bury. 3) 30 mil HMWPE.

3. Splicing Kit: a. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

1) Ryall Electric Co., 3M Kit#82-A1. 4. Station Box:

a. Lid and collar materials: Cast iron. b. Able to withstand heavy traffic loading. c. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

1) Farwest Corrosion Control Co, Glenn 4 Test Station.

C. Witness markers: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

a. Carsonite Composites, Utility Marker. b. Hampton Technical Associates, Inc.

2. Materials: a. Glass fiber and resin reinforced thermosetting composite material. b. UV resistant.

3. Constructed as a single piece. 4. Pointed at the bottom end. 5. Information to be included on the marker:

a. “Caution” (type of service) “Pipeline”. b. Phone number for Underground Service Alert. c. Phone number for Owner in case of emergency. d. Station number. e. Offset:

1) Only provide offset if marker is not directly over the pipe. f. Name of appurtenance or fitting (e.g. 45, BO, ARV, etc.)

2.03 VALVE AND GATE IDENTIFICATION

A. Provide valve and gate schedule for each valve and gate in the Work with the following information: 1. Identification number. 2. Location.


3. Type. 4. Function. 5. Normal operating position.

B. Identification tag requirements. 1. Diameter: 2-inches. 2. Material:

a. Buried applications: Stainless steel. b. Buried applications with concrete marker: Brass. c. Above ground and in-chase applications: 19 gauge aluminum or PVC.

3. Stamp tags in 1/4-inch high letter: 4. Provide non-corrosive metal wire suitable for attaching the tag to the operator

base. 5. Secure tags to valve or gate:

a. Attach tags in such a way as to allow free and full operation of the valve or gate.

6. Buried applications with concrete marker: Secure tags to concrete marker.

C. Submittal requirements: 1. Submit 2 samples of the type of tag proposed and the manufacturer’s standard

color chart and letter styles to the Engineer for review.

D. Manufacturer: The following or equal: 1. Seton Name Plate Co.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify satisfactory conditions of substrate for applying identification.

B. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation and application of products as specified in Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Prepare and coat surfaces as specified in Section 09960 - High-Performance Coatings.

B. Prepare surface in accordance with product manufacturer's instructions.

3.03 ABOVE GROUND AND IN-CHASE PIPING IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify exposed piping, valves, and accessories in accessible chases with lettering or tags designating service of each piping system with flow directional arrows and color code.

B. Color code: 1. Paint piping with colors as scheduled in Piping Color Code and Marker

Schedule.


C. Lettering and flow direction arrows: 1. Stencil lettering on painted bands or use snap-on markers on pipe to identify

pipe. When stenciling, stencil 3/4-inch high letters on 3/4 through 4-inch pipe or coverings, or 5-inch high letters on 5-inch and larger pipe or coverings.

2. Provide lettering and flow direction arrows near equipment served, adjacent to valves, both sides of walls and floors where pipe passes through, at each branch or tee, and at intervals of not more than 50 feet in straight runs of pipe.

D. Where scheduled, space 6-inch wide bands along stainless steel pipe at 10-foot intervals and other pipe at 5-foot intervals.

E. Label chemical tank fill pipelines at locations which are visible from chemical fill stations.

F. Metal tags: 1. Where outside diameter of pipe or pipe covering is 5/8-inch or smaller, provide

metal pipe identification tags instead of lettering. 2. Fasten pipe identification tags to pipe with chain. 3. Where tags are used, color code pipe as scheduled.

3.04 BURIED PIPING IDENTIFICATION

A. Underground warning tape: 1. Place continuous run of warning tape in pipe trench, 12 inches above the pipe.

B. Tracer wire: 1. Install on all non-metallic pipe. 2. Install an electrically continuous run of tracer wire along the entire length of the

pipe with wire terminations in valve boxes, vaults, or structures. 3. Install tracer wire on top of the pipe and secure to pipe with tape a minimum of

every 10 feet. 4. Where approved by the Engineer, splice sections of wire together using

approved direct bury wire nuts. a. Twisting the wires together is not acceptable.

C. Witness markers: 1. Install over pipe in unpaved open-space areas at intervals not greater than 200

feet. 2. Place markers at appurtenances located in unpaved areas. 3. Embed markers at least 18 inches into the soil.

3.05 APPLICATION

A. Identify piping with legend markers, directional arrow markers, and number markers; use self-adhesive arrow roll tape to secure ends of piping markers and indicate flow direction.

B. Provide legend markers, directional arrow markers, and number markers where piping passes through walls or floors, at piping intersections and at maximum 15-foot spacing on piping runs.

C. Provide piping marker letters and colors as scheduled.


D. Place markers on piping so they are visible from operator's position in walkway or working platform near piping. Locate markers along horizontal centerline of pipe, unless better visibility is achieved elsewhere.

E. Wrap horizontal pipe runs with less than 6’-8” clearance above the finished floor or top of grating elevation in yellow and black striped safety tape.

3.06 PIPING COLOR CODE AND MARKER SCHEDULE

Pipe Service Color of

Pipe Color of Bands

Color of Letters

Compressed Air Black Green White

City Water (Potable) Black Blue White

Drain Black Gray Black

Finish Effluent Black Gray Black

Mixed Liquor Black Gray Black

Sodium Hypochlorite Solution Black Yellow Black

Pumped Drainage Black Gray Black

Plant Water (Non-Potable) Black Light Blue Black

Reclaimed Water Black Purple White

Sanitary Drain Black Gray Black

Secondary Effluent Black Gray Black

Sanitary Sewer Black Gray Black

Storm Drain Black Gray Black

Tank Drain Black Gray Black

Vent Black Gray Black

END OF SECTION

Common Work Results for Valves 15110-1 11487A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/OR/Clean Water Services/11487A10/Specifications/15110 (Bidset) April 2021 - BID

SECTION 15110

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR VALVES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: Basic requirements for valves.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American Water Works Association (AWWA): 1. C111/A21.11 - Standard for Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure

Pipe Fittings.

B. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. A126 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Casting for Valves, Flanges, and

Pipe Fittings. 2. A480 - Standard Specification for General Requirements for Flat-Rolled

Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. 3. A536 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings.

C. NSF International (NSF): 1. 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects.

D. Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC): 1. SP7 - Brush-Off Blast Cleaning. 2. SP10 - Near-White Blast Cleaning.


A. Pressure rating: 1. Suitable for service under minimum working pressures of 150 pounds per

square inch gauge. 2. When a piping system is specified in the Piping Schedule to be tested at a

pressure greater than 150 pounds per square inch gauge, provide valves for that piping system with design working pressure which is sufficient to withstand the test pressure.

B. Valve to piping connections: 1. Valves 3 inches nominal size and larger: Flanged ends. 2. Valves less than 3 inches nominal size: Screwed ends. 3. Plastic valves in plastic piping:

a. Up to 2.5 inches: Provide solvent or heat welded unions. b. 3 inches and above: Provide solvent or heat-welded flanges.

1.04 SUBMITTALS



B. Product data: 1. Submit the following information for each valve:

a. Valve type, size, pressure rating, Cv factor. b. Coatings. c. Power valve actuators:

1) Information on valve actuator including size, manufacturer, model number, limit switches, mounting; and motor enclosure, seating and unseating torque coefficient, dynamic torque, and bearing friction for calculation of maximum operating torque.

2) Complete wiring diagrams and control system schematics. d. Manual valve actuators:

1) Information on valve actuator including size, manufacturer, model number.

e. Certified drawings with description of component parts, dimensions, weights, and materials of construction.

f. Certifications of reference standard compliance: 1) Submit certification that the valves and coatings are suitable in

potable water applications in accordance with NSF 61. g. Clearly mark submittal information to show specific items, materials, and

accessories or options being furnished. h. Factory test data.

C. Provide vendor operation and maintenance manual as specified in Section 01782 - Operation and Maintenance Manuals. 1. Furnish bound sets of installation, operation, and maintenance instructions for

each type of manual valve 4 inches in nominal size and larger, and all non-manual valves. Include information on valve operators.

D. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Source Testing as specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning.

E. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation and Functionality Compliance as specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning.


A. Manufacturer qualifications: 1. Valves manufactured by manufacturers whose valves have had successful

operational experience in comparable service.

1.06 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Protect valves and protective coatings from damage during handling and installation; repair coating where damaged.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Stainless steel: In accordance with ASTM A480, Type 316, or Type 304, UNS Alloy S31600 or S30400.


B. Valve and operator bolts and nuts: 1. Fabricated of stainless steel for the following installation conditions:

a. Submerged in sewage or water. b. In an enclosed space above sewage or water. c. In structures containing sewage or water, below top of walls. d. At openings in concrete or metal decks.

2. Where dissimilar metals are being bolted, use stainless steel bolts with isolation bushings and washers.

3. Underground bolts: Low-alloy steel in accordance with AWWA C111/A21.11.

C. Bronze and brass alloys: Use bronze and brass alloys with not more than 6 percent zinc and not more than 2 percent aluminum in the manufacture of valve parts; UNS Alloy C83600 or C92200 unless specified otherwise.

D. Valve bodies: Cast iron in accordance with ASTM A126, Class 30 minimum or ductile iron in accordance with ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12 minimum unless specified otherwise.

2.02 INTERIOR PROTECTIVE LINING

A. When specified in the particular valve specification, provide valves with type of protective lining specified in the particular valve Specification.

B. Apply protective lining to interior, non-working surfaces, except stainless steel surfaces.

C. Lining types: 1. Fusion bonded epoxy:

a. Manufacturers: The following or equal: 1) 3-M Company, ScotchKote 134; certified to NSF 61 for drinking water

use. b. Clean surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP 7 or SP 10, as

recommended by epoxy manufacturer. c. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. d. Lining thickness: 0.010 to 0.012-inch, except that:

1) Lining thickness in grooves for gaskets: 0.005-inch. 2) Do not coat seat grooves in valves with bonded seat.

e. Quality control: 1) Lining thickness: Measured with a non-destructive magnetic type

thickness gauge. 2) Verify lining integrity with a wet sponge-testing unit operating at

approximately 60 volts, or as recommended by the lining manufacturer.

3) Consider tests successful when lining thickness meets specified requirements and when no pinholes are found.

4) Correct defective lining disclosed by unsuccessful tests, and repeat test.

5) Repair pinholes with liquid epoxy recommended by manufacturer of the epoxy used for lining.

2. High solids epoxy: a. Product equivalent to high solids epoxy specified in Section 09960 - High-

Performance Coatings.


1) Certified in accordance with NSF 61 for drinking water use. 2) Interior: Coat valve interior with manufacturer's equivalent high

performance high solids epoxy coating system with a certifiable performance history for the service conditions and as approved by the Engineer. Manufacturer shall provide for approval, coating information sufficient to allow Engineer to assess equivalence to the specified high solids epoxy coating specified in Section 09960 - High-Performance Coatings.

b. Clean surfaces to meet SP-7 or SP-10, or as recommended by coating manufacturer.

c. Quality control: After coating is cured, check coated surface for porosity with a holiday detector set at 1,800 volts, or as recommended by coating manufacturer. 1) Repair holidays and other irregularities and retest coating. 2) Repeat procedure until holidays and other irregularities are

corrected.

2.03 UNDERGROUND VALVES

A. Provide underground valves with flanged, mechanical, or other type of joint required for the type of pipe to which the valve is to be connected.

B. Coating and wrapping: 1. After installation, encase valves in 2 layers of polyethylene wrap as specified

for ductile iron piping in Section 15211 - Ductile Iron Pipe: AWWA C151. a. Ascertain that polyethylene wrapping does not affect operation of valve.

2.04 VALVE BOXES

A. Provide cast-iron valve boxes at each buried valve to access valve and valve operators.

B. Do not support boxes on valve, valve operator, or pipe.

C. Boxes: 1. 2-piece, fabricated of cast iron; provide cover, with asphalt varnish or enamel

protective coating. 2. Adjustable to grade, install centered around the upper portions of the valve

and valve operator.

D. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1. Tyler Pipe Industries, Inc. 2. Neenah Foundry Co.

2.05 VALVE OPERATORS

A. Valve operator "Open" direction: Open counterclockwise.

B. Provide valves located below operating level or deck with extensions for key operation or floor stands and handwheels.

C. Provide manually operated valves located not more than 6 feet above the operating level with tee handles, wrenches, or handwheels.


1. Make the valve operator more conveniently accessible by rolling valves, located more than 5 feet but less than 6 feet above the operating level, toward the operating side.

2. Secure tee handles and wrenches to the valve head or stem, except where a handle or wrench so secured constitutes a hazard to personnel; in which case, stow handle or wrench immediately adjacent to the valve on or in a suitable hanger, bracket, or receptacle.

D. Fit valves located more than 6 feet above operating level with chain operated handles or valve wheels. 1. Chains: Sufficient length to reach approximately 4 feet above the operating

level. 2. Where chains constitute a nuisance or hazard to operating personnel, provide

holdbacks or other means for keeping the chains out of the way.

E. Provide an operator shaft extension from valve or valve operator to finished grade or deck level when buried valves, and other valves located below the operating deck or level, are specified or indicated on the Drawings to be key operated; provide 2 inches square AWWA operating nut, and box and cover as specified, or a cover where a box is not required.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Preparation prior to installation: 1. Install valves after the required submittal on installation has been accepted. 2. Determine after flanged valves and flanged check valves are selected, the

face-to-face dimensions of flanged valves and flanged check valves.

B. Fabricate piping to lengths taking into account the dimensions of flanged valves and flanged check valves.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Provide incidental work and materials necessary for installation of valves including flange gaskets, flange bolts and nuts, valve boxes and covers, concrete bases, blocking, and protective coating.

B. Where needed, furnish and install additional valves for proper operation and maintenance of equipment and plant facilities under the following circumstances: 1. Where such additional valves are required for operation and maintenance of

the particular equipment furnished by Contractor. 2. Where such additional valves are required as a result of a substitution or

change initiated by Contractor.

C. Valve and actuator orientation: 1. Contractor shall coordinate with valve supplier final orientation of valve and

actuator assembly based on Contractor's selection of equipment manufacturers and the valve and piping arrangement as indicated on the Drawings.


a. Contractor shall rotate valve and/or actuator mounting orientation as specified in this Section unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.

2. Install valves with their stems in vertical position above the pipe, except as follows: a. Butterfly valves, gate valves aboveground, globe valves, ball valves, and

angle valves may be installed with their stems in the horizontal position. b. Install buried plug valves with geared operators with their stems in a

horizontal position. 3. Install valves so that handles clear obstructions when the valves are operated

from fully open to fully closed.

D. Place top of valve boxes flush with finished grade or as otherwise indicated on the Drawings.

E. Valves with threaded connections: 1. Install valves by applying wrench on end of valve nearest the joint to prevent

distortion of the valve body. 2. Apply pipe joint compound or Teflon™ tape on external (male) threads to

prevent forcing compound into valve seat area.

F. Valves with flanged connections: 1. Align flanges and gasket carefully before tightening flange bolts. 2. When flanges are aligned, install bolts and hand tighten. 3. Tighten nuts opposite each other with equal tension before moving to next pair

of nuts.

G. Valves with soldered connections: 1. Do not overheat connection to prevent damage to resilient seats and metal

seat rings. 2. Position valves in full open position before starting soldering procedure. 3. Apply heat to piping rather than to valve body.

3.03 FIELD APPLIED COATING OF VALVE EXTERIOR

A. Match color and be compatible with manufacturer’s coating system and as specified in Section 09960 - High-Performance Coatings. 1. When shop applied finish coating matches field applied coating on adjacent

piping, touch up shop coating in damaged areas in accordance with instructions recommended by the paint manufacturer.

2. When shop applied coating does not match field coating on adjacent piping, or when damage has occurred to the shop applied coating that requires more than touchup, blast clean valve surfaces or utilize other surface preparation recommended by the manufacturer of the coating material and apply the coating system used for coating adjacent piping.

3.04 COMMISSIONING


B. Manufacturer services from each manufacturer for all valves supplied: 1. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Source Testing. 2. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation and Functionality

Compliance.


C. As specified elsewhere for specific valve types, sizes or actuators. 1. Source testing. 2. Manufacturers on site services for Owner Training, Installation Testing,

Functional Testing, and during the Process Operational Period.

END OF SECTION

Ball Valves 15111-1 11487A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/OR/Clean Water Services/11487A10/Specifications/15111 (Bidset) April 2021 - BID

SECTION 15111

BALL VALVES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: Ball valves.

B. As specified in Section 15110 - Common Work Results for Valves.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American Petroleum Institute (API): 1. 6D - Specification for Pipeline Valves (Steel Gate, Plug, Ball, and Check

Valves) - Gate Valves; Plug Valves; Ball Valves; Check Valves.

B. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): 1. B16.1 - Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 25, 125, and

250. 2. B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: NPS 1/2 through 24.

C. American Water Works Association (AWWA): 1. C507 - Standard for Ball Valves 6 Inch Through 48 Inch.

D. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. A48 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings. 2. A216 - Standard Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon, Suitable for Fusion

Welding, for High-Temperature Service. 3. A351 - Standard Specification for Castings, Austenitic, for Pressure-Containing

Parts.


A. General: Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings use: 1. Metal body ball valves on metallic pipelines. 2. Plastic body ball valves on plastic pipelines.

B. Do not use metal body ball valves in sodium hypochlorite or sodium bisulfite systems.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product data: As specified in Section 15110 - Common Work Results for Valves: 1. Metal body ball valves: 6 inches and larger only: Submit affidavit of compliance

in accordance with AWWA C507. 2. Operation and maintenance manual.


C. Commissioning submittals: 1. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation and Functionality Compliance


1.05 WARRANTY


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 METAL BODY BALL VALVES, LESS THAN 6-INCH SIZE

A. Manufacturers: One of the following, or equal: 1. Conbraco Industries, Inc., Apollo Valves. 2. Flow-Tek, Inc. 3. Metso Automation/Jamesbury. 4. NIBCO, Inc.

B. General: 1. Type: Non-lubricated, full port and capable of sealing in either direction. 2. End connections:

a. Threaded or solder ends for sizes 3-inch and smaller. b. Class 150 flanged for sizes larger than 3 inches.

1) Flanges: In accordance with ASME B16.1 standards. 3. Stem packing: Manually adjustable while valve is under pressure. 4. Shafts:

a. Rigidly connected to the ball by a positive means. 1) Design connection to transmit torque equivalent to at least

75 percent of the torsional strength of the shaft. 5. Handles: Stainless steel latch lock handle with vinyl grip and stainless steel nut

designed to open and close the valve under operating conditions. 6. Temperature limits: Suitable for operation between minus 20 and 350 degrees

Fahrenheit.

C. Materials: 1. Valves in copper lines: Bronze body. 2. Valves in steel and ductile iron piping: Ductile iron or cast steel body. 3. Valves in stainless steel piping: Stainless steel body, material type to match

piping material as specified in Section 15052 - Common Work Results for General Piping.

4. Ball: Type 304 or 316 stainless steel, Type 316 in digester gas applications. 5. Seats: PTFE. 6. Stem seals: PTFE or Viton™. 7. Bearings: Self-lubricated, corrosion resistant material that will not contaminate

potable water. 8. Valves for combustible fluid applications (digester gas, natural gas, fuel oil,

etc.) must be of fire safe design.

2.02 PLASTIC BODY BALL VALVES

A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:


1. Asahi America. 2. Chemtrol Division, NIBCO, Inc. 3. Georg Fischer Piping Systems. 4. Hayward Flow Control. 5. Plast-O-Matic Valves, Inc.

B. General: 1. Type: Non-lubricated and capable of sealing in either flow direction. 2. End connections: True union; solvent or heat welded to piping. 3. Operator handle: Lever.

C. Materials: 1. Body: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC). 2. Ball: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC). 3. Seats: PTFE (Teflon™). 4. O-rings: FKM (Viton™).

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install each type of valve in accordance with manufacturers' printed instructions.

B. Special techniques: 1. PVC ball valves for hypochlorite service:

a. Provide valve with factory drilled 0.125-inch hole in the upstream side of the ball.





3.03 COMMISSIONING



a. Manufacturer's Certificate of Installation and Functionality Compliance.

C. Functional testing: 1. Valves:


a. Test witnessing: Witnessed. b. Conduct pressure and leak test, as specified in Section 15956 - Piping

Systems Testing.

END OF SECTION

Check Valves 15114-1 11487A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/OR/Clean Water Services/11487A10/Specifications/15114 (Bidset) April 2021 - BID

SECTION 15114

CHECK VALVES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: Check valves.


1.02 REFERENCES

A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): 1. B16.1 - Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 25, 125, and

250. 2. B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: NPS 1/2 through NPS 24 Inch

Standard.

B. American Water Works Association (AWWA): 1. C508 - Standard for Swing-Check Valves for Waterworks Service 2 Inch

Through 24 Inch NPS.

C. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. A126 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and

Pipe Fittings. 2. A313 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Spring Wire. 3. A536 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings. 4. B582 - Standard Specification for Nickel-Chromium-Iron-Molybdenum-Copper

Alloy Plate, Sheet, and Strip. 5. B584 - Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General

Applications.


A. Design requirements: 1. Check valves: When not otherwise specified as indicated on the Drawings,

provide check valves suitable for service as follows: a. In either horizontal or vertical position. b. Suitable for service working pressures up to 150 pounds per square inch

gauge.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product data: As specified in Section 15110 - Common Work Results for Valves.




1.05 WARRANTY


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 SWING CHECK VALVES

A. Valves 1/4-inch through 3 inches: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

a. Crane Valve Co., Number 36. b. Lunkenheimer Co., Figure 554Y.

2. Valve design: a. Threaded joints. b. Y-pattern body with integral seat. c. Hinged disc. d. Access to valve seat for regrinding without disassembly of piping.

3. Materials: a. Body, cap, hinge, and disc: Bronze.

B. Valves 4 inches through 24 inches: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

a. Kennedy, Figure 106LW or M&H, Model 159. b. Mueller Co., Model A-2600. c. APCO Model 250. d. Crispin SWL Series.

2. Valve design: a. In accordance with AWWA C508. b. Constructed to permit top entry and removal of internal components

without removing the valve. c. Equipped with outside lever and weight.

3. Materials: a. Body: Cast iron, ASTM A126 Class B or ASTM A536 Grade 65-45-12

Ductile Iron. b. Disc:

1) Valve disc shall be ASTM A126 cast iron, ASTM A536 ductile iron, or ASTM B584 bronze.

2) 4-inch valves: Bronze or stainless steel rings and seats. 3) 6 inches and larger valves: Bronze-faced or stainless steel rings and

seats. 4) Rubber seat Buna-N or EPDM.

c. Hinge pins: Stainless steel.

2.02 SLANT DISC CHECK VALVES

A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1. APCO, Series 100.


2. ValMatic, Surgebuster Series 7200.

B. Valve design: 1-piece construction with rubber flap at an angle of 45 angular degrees: 1. Top access port shall be full size, allowing removal of the flapper without

removing the valve from the line. 2. Access cover shall be domed. 3. Threaded port with pipe plug shall be provided at the bottom of the valve. 4. Disc shall be one-piece construction, precision molded with an integral O-ring

type sealing surface and reinforced with alloy steel. The flex portion of the disc contains nylon or EPDM reinforcement and shall be warranted for 25 years.

5. Ends: Flanged, ASME B16.1.

C. Materials: 1. Body: Ductile iron, ASTM A536, Grade 64-45-12. 2. Flapper: Precision molded EPDM and reinforced with alloy steel. 3. Bolts and nuts: Type 316 Stainless Steel.

D. Accessories: 1. Mechanical position indicator. 2. Screw-type backflow actuator.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Flapper-type check valves: 1. Install with proper orientation of flow direction arrow on valve body. 2. When installed in horizontal pipelines, mount with shaft on vertical locations. 3. When mounted in a vertical pipeline, directly downstream of an elbow, mount

with the shaft perpendicular to the outermost portion of the elbow.





3.03 COMMISSIONING






a. Test witnessing: Witnessed. b. Conduct pressure and leak test, as specified in Section 15956 - Piping

Systems Testing.

END OF SECTION

Gate, Globe, and Angle Valves 15115-1 11487A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/OR/Clean Water Services/11487A10/Specifications/15115 (Bidset) April 2021 - BID

SECTION 15115

GATE VALVES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: Gate valves.


1.02 REFERENCES

A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): 1. B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: NPS 1/2 through NPS 24 inch

Standard. 2. B16.47 - Large Diameter Steel Flanges: NPS 26 through NPS 60 inch

Standard. 3. B36 - Stainless Steel Pipe.

B. American Water Works Association (AWWA): 1. C515 - Standard for Reduced-Wall, Resilient-Seated Gate Valves for Water

Supply Services. 2. C 550 - Protective Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants.

C. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. B98 - Standard Specification for Copper-Silicon Alloy Rod, Bar, and Shapes.

1.03 SUBMITTALS



C. Commissioning submittals: For valves larger than 16 inches: 1. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation and Functionality Compliance


1.04 WARRANTY


B. Interior epoxy coatings: Affidavit of compliance attesting that epoxy coatings applied to interior surfaces of valves comply in accordance with all provisions of AWWA C550.


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GATE VALVES

A. Knife gate valves: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

a. DeZurik KGC series. b. ITT Fabri-Valve, Standard C37. c. Pentair, Figure PCS17.

2. Design: a. Size and configuration: Indicated on the Drawings. b. Suitable for service under pressures equal to and less than 150 pounds

per square inch gauge c. Full round port, metal or resilient seated, raised face design. d. Flanged wafer design drilled and tapped to ASME Class 125/150

standard. Face-to-face dimension shall meet MSS SP-81 for knife gate valves ASME B16.5 class 150, 2 to 24 inches or ASME 16.47 Series A class 150, 26 to 48 inches

e. Rounded gate with beveled edge, finish-ground to 32 RMS, maximum, on both sides. The bottom edge shall have a beveled knife edge.

f. Body to incorporate guides and jams to assist in seating. g. Packing shall consist of multiple layers of packing. h. Materials:

1) Body: Cast or ductile iron or cast steel, with Type 316 stainless steel lining or cast Type 316 stainless steel or 2205 Duplex.

2) Wetted components (including gate): Type 316 stainless steel or 2205 Duplex.

3) Seat: NBR or EPDM. 4) Yoke sleeve: Acid resisting bronze or aluminum bronze. 5) Packing: PTFE. 6) Packing gland: Match valve body material. 7) Yoke: Type 304 stainless steel. 8) Fasteners: Shall be stainless steel.

i. Outside screw and yoke (OS&Y) with handwheel operator.

B. Gate valves underground: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

a. M&H/Kennedy Valve Co. b. Mueller Co. c. American Flow Control.

2. Design: a. Size, material, configuration: Indicated on the Drawings. b. Resilient wedge type in accordance with AWWA C515. c. Stem:

1) Iron body, resilient seat, non-rising stem, double o-ring stem seal. 2) Rising stem configuration with handwheel diameter sized to allow

opening of valve with no more than a 40-pound pull. d. Ductile or cast iron wedge encapsulated in nitrile rubber and capable of

sealing in either flow direction. e. Bronze stem with double or triple o-ring or braided packing stem seals. f. Coat interior and exterior surfaces of valve body and bonnet with fusion-

bonded epoxy in accordance with AWWA C550.


g. Valve operator: Provide standard AWWA 2-inch operating nut, matching valve key, and valve box for operating stem.

PART 3 EXECUTION





3.02 COMMISSIONING


B. Manufacturer services: For valves larger than 16-inches. 1. Provide certificates:

a. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation and Functionality Compliance.


a. Test witnessing: Witnessed. b. Conduct pressure and leak test as specified in Section 15110 - Common

Work Results for Valves.

END OF SECTION

Plug Valves 15116-1 11487A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/OR/Clean Water Services/11487A10/Specifications/15116 (Bidset) April 2021 - BID

SECTION 15116

PLUG VALVES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: 1. Non-lubricated plug valves.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American Water Works Association (AWWA): 1. C517 - Resilient-Seated Cast Iron Eccentric Plug Valves. 2. C606 - Grooved and Shouldered Joints.

B. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. A126 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and

Pipe Fittings. 2. A536 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit as specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures and 15110 - Common Work Results for Valves.

B. Product data.

C. Shop drawings.

D. Calculations.

E. Vendor operation and maintenance manual as specified in Section 01782 - Operation and Maintenance Manuals.


01756 - Commissioning: a. Interior coating.

2. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation and Functionality Compliance as specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning.

1.04 WARRANTY



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. As specified in Section 15110 - Common Work Results for Valves.

2.02 NON-LUBRICATED PLUG VALVES

A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1. DeZurik, "PEC". 2. Clow Valve. 3. Milliken Valve, Model 600/601.

B. Design: 1. Type: Non-lubricated eccentric type, in accordance with AWWA C517. 2. Plug face: Resilient material that operates satisfactorily at a temperature of

180 degrees Fahrenheit continuous and 215 degrees Fahrenheit intermittent, except for valves in compressed air or digester gas service. a. Valves in compressed air service: Resilient material suitable for

continuous duty at 250 degrees Fahrenheit. b. Valves in digester gas service: Resilient material suitable for petroleum or

digester gas at continuous duty at 180 degrees Fahrenheit. 3. Compression washer: Provide flat compression washer made of Teflon™, or

of a material having equal physical characteristics on valve stem between plug and bonnet.

4. Stem seals: Provide stem seals serviceable without unbolting the valve bonnet assembly.

5. Grit excluders: Provide PTFE grit excluders at upper plug journals to prevent entry of foreign solids in bearing area.

6. Clearly mark valves to indicate their open and closed positions. 7. Provide valves with ends as required by piping details indicated on the Drawings.

a. Grooved end body valves: 1) Usage: Plug valves with grooved ends may be used in piping

systems specified in the Piping Schedule to have grooved end joints and as indicated on the Drawings.

2) Grooved end joint design: In accordance with AWWA C606.

C. Materials: 1. Body and plug: ASTM A126, Class B, cast-iron or ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-

12, ductile iron, with plug face of EPDM material suitable for the intended service as specified under paragraph "Design" above.

2. Body seats in valves 3 inch size and larger: Provide with overlay of not less than 90-percent nickel and minimum thickness of 1/8-inch on surfaces contacting the plug face.

3. Stem bearing and bottom bearing: Type 316 stainless steel backed TFE bearings. 4. Internal parts, except the body and plug: Type 316 stainless steel. 5. Exposed nuts, bolts, and washers: Zinc plated. Exception: Exposed nuts,

bolts, and washers for buried service: Stainless steel.

2.03 VALVE OPERATORS

A. Furnish valves with an operating wrench or worm gear operator: 1. Equip valves 4 inch nominal size and smaller with a lever operator.


2. Equip valves 6 inch nominal size and larger with a worm gear operator.

2.04 COATING

A. Coat and test interior metal surfaces as specified in Section 15110 - Common Work Results for Valves.

B. Field applied coating of valve exterior: 1. Match color and be compatible with manufacturer’s coating system and as

specified in Section 09960 - High-Performance Coatings. a. When shop applied finish coating matches field applied coating on

adjacent piping, touch up shop coating in damaged areas in accordance with instructions recommended by the paint manufacturer.

b. When shop applied coating does not match field coating on adjacent piping, or when damage has occurred to the shop applied coating that requires more than touchup, blast clean valve surfaces or utilize other surface preparation recommended by the manufacturer of the coating material and apply the coating system used for coating adjacent piping.

2.05 SHIPMENT, SPARE PARTS, MAINTENANCE PRODUCTS, AND SPECIAL TOOLS


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install valves as specified in Section 15110 - Common Work Results for Valves and the manufacturer’s instructions. 1. Unless differently indicated on the Drawings install valves so that in the closed

position the pressure in the pipeline applies a seating head on the valves. 2. Install valves so that in the open position the plug is located in the top half of

the valve body.

3.02 COMMISSIONING







END OF SECTION

Specialty Valves 15117-1 11487A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/OR/Clean Water Services/11487A10/Specifications/15117 (Bidset) April 2021 - BID

SECTION 15117

SPECIALTY VALVES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: Specialty valves.


1.02 REFERENCES

A. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE): 1. 25 - Earthquake-Actuated Automatic Gas Shutoff Devices.

B. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): 1. B16.42 - Ductile Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 150 and 300.

C. American Water Works Association (AWWA): 1. C511 - Standard for Reduced Pressure-Principle Backflow-Prevention

Assembly. 2. C800 - Underground Service Line Valves & Fittings (Also Included: Collected

Standards For Service Line Materials).

D. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. A48 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings. 2. A126 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Casting for Valves, Flanges, and

Pipe Fittings. 3. A276 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes. 4. A536 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings. 5. B584 - Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General

Application. 6. D2000 - Standard Classification System for Rubber Products in Automotive

Applications.

E. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 1. 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 V Maximum).

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. NEMA Type 4 enclosure in accordance with NEMA 250.

1.04 SUBMITTALS




C. Commissioning submittals: 1. Backflow preventer certification. 2. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation and Functionality Compliance


1.05 WARRANTY


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 SOLENOID VALVES

A. 2-way solenoid valves: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

a. Automatic Switch Co., Series 8210. b. Skinner Electric Valve Division, Series C.

B. 3-way solenoid valves: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

a. Automatic Switch Co., Series 8320. b. Skinner Electric Valve Division, Type A4.

C. 4-way solenoid valves: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

a. Automatic Switch Co., Bulletin 8344. b. Skinner Electric Valve Division, Series V9.

D. Design: 1. Valves: Suitable for service under the following conditions:

a. Fluid: As indicated in the drawings. b. Piping test pressure: As scheduled in Section 15052 – Common Work

Results for General Piping – Plant. 2. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, provide valves that meet the

following requirements: a. Minimum NEMA Type 4 enclosure. b. 120 VAC operation. c. Suitable for use as indicated on the Drawings. d. Minimum Class F coil insulation.

3. 2-way valves: Furnish with openings of size equal to or larger than the nominal size designation of the valve.

4. Furnish with manual/bypass operators.

E. Materials: 1. Body: Brass or bronze. 2. Seats: Resilient material.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install as specified in Section 15110 - Common Work Results for Valves in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions.

3.02 COMMISSIONING




END OF SECTION

Air and Vacuum Relief Valves 15119-1 11487A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/OR/Clean Water Services/11487A10/Specifications/15119 (Bidset) April 2021 - BID

SECTION 15119

AIR AND VACUUM RELIEF VALVES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: Air and vacuum valves.


1.02 REFERENCES


250. 2. B16.5 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: NPS 1/2 through 24.

B. American Water Works Association (AWWA).

C. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. A126 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and

Pipe Fittings. 2. A240 - Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless

Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications.

3. A270 - Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Sanitary Tubing.

4. B584 - Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Applications.

1.03 SUBMITTALS





1.04 WARRANTY



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 COMBINATION AIR VALVES, WATER SERVICE

A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1. A.R.I. USA Inc., Model D-025. 2. Valve and Primer Corp., DeZURIK/APCO, Series 140C. 3. Multiplex Manufacturing Co., Crispin UL Series.

B. Design: 1. Operation: Automatic exhaust of large quantities of air from pipelines during

filling and draining and release of accumulated air while pipeline is under pressure.

2. Utilize compound lever system in conjunction with large and small orifices. 3. Internal parts removable through top cover without removing valve from

pipeline. 4. Pressure rating: 125 pounds per square inch. 5. Inlet: Flanged 2-inch size. 6. Type 316 stainless steel internal components.

C. Materials: 1. Body: Cast iron, ductile iron, or reinforced nylon. 2. Float: Type 316 stainless steel or foamed polypropylene. 3. Needle: EPDM. 4. Lever frame: Type 316 stainless steel or Delrin.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install as specified in Section 15110 - Common Work Results for Valves and manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Install combination air valves with suitable discharge lines to nearest drainage system.


A. Match color and be compatible with manufacturer’s coating system and as specified in Section 09960 - High-Performance Coating. 1. When shop applied finish coating matches field applied coating on adjacent

piping, touch up shop coating in damaged areas in accordance with instructions recommended by the manufacturer.

2. When shop applied coating does not match field coating on adjacent piping, or when damage has occurred to the shop applied coating that requires more than touchup, remove existing coating by abrasive blast cleaning and apply the coating system used for coating adjacent piping in accordance with Section 09960 - High-Performance Coating. a. Submerged valves: SP-5 White Metal Blast cleaning. b. Other valves: SP-10 Near-white blast cleaning.


3.03 COMMISSIONING







END OF SECTION

Piping Specialties 15120-1 11487A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/OR/Clean Water Services/11487A10/Specifications/15120 (Bidset) April 2021 - BID

SECTION 15120

PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: Piping specialties including: 1. Flexible rubber connections. 2. Bellows type expansion joints. 3. Slip type expansion joints. 4. Rubber expansion joints. 5. Transition fittings. 6. Pipe saddles. 7. Tapping sleeves.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): 1. B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: NPS 1/2 through NPS 24.

B. American Water Works Association (AWWA): 1. C110 - Standard for Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings. 2. C151 - Standard for Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast.

C. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. A148 - Standard Specification for Steel Castings, High-Strength, for Structural

Purposes. 2. A193 - Standard Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting for


3. A194 – Standard Specification for Carbon Steel, Alloy Steel, and Stainless Steel Nuts for Bolts for High Pressure or High Temperature Service, or Both.

4. A536 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings.

D. NSF International (NSF): 1. 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects, Includes Errata. 2. 372 - Drinking Water System Components - Lead Content.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Product data: 1. For each piping product in this Section as applicable:

a. Design features. b. Load capacities. c. Material designations by UNS alloy number or ASTM Specification and

Grade. d. Data needed to verify compliance with the Specifications.


e. Catalog data. f. Clearly mark submittal information to show specific items, materials, and


C. Calculations: 1. Provide calculations in accordance with NSF 372 for materials in contact with

drinking water.

D. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation and Functionality Compliance as specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning: 1. Provide as specified in this Section.

1.04 WARRANTY


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL


B. Materials in contact with drinking waters: In accordance with NSF 61 and NSF 372.

2.02 FLEXIBLE RUBBER CONNECTIONS

A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1. Mercer Rubber Co., Type 150 Vibraflex. 2. Red Valve Co., Inc., Part Number P-5.

B. Provide flexible rubber connections with 3/8 inch thick EPDM rubber tube with full-faced flanged ends suitable to withstand a pressure of 150 pounds per square inch gauge.

C. Provide complete flexible rubber connections, including galvanized retaining rings and control rods.

2.03 BELLOWS TYPE EXPANSION JOINTS

A. Expansion joints for general service: 1. Expansion joints: Flexible bellows type, or as otherwise specified or indicated

on the Drawings. 2. Manufacturers:

a. Expansion joints: One of the following or equal: 1) Senior Flexonics Pathway, Inc., Controlled Flexing Expansion Joint. 2) Flex-Weld, Inc., Keflex, Series 308. 3) Victaulic, Depend-o-Lok, Omniflex stainless bellows expansion joint.

b. Pipe alignment guides: One of the following or equal: 1) Senior Flexonics Pathway, Inc. 2) Flex-Weld, Inc.


c. Intermediate supports: Provide with protective saddles. One of the following or equal: 1) Unistrut Corporation, Roller-type. 2) Bergen-Paterson Pipe Support Corp.

3. Design: a. Expansion joint rating: 150 pounds per square inch gauge, at 300 degrees

Fahrenheit. b. Bellows: Multi-ply (3 ply minimum) stainless steel, equipped with a self-

draining liner guide. c. Axial travel of expansion joints: Not less than 1.50 inches. d. Ends: 150 pound ASME flanges, Victaulic, Depend-o-Lok

Airmaster/Fluidmaster coupled ends, or plain suitable for welding connections, as required for piping in which installed.

B. Expansion joints for steam and hot water: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

a. Flex-Weld, Inc., Keflex, Series 308-1215. b. Senior Flexonics Pathway, Inc., Controlled Flexing Expansion Joint. c. Victaulic, Depend-o-Lok Omniflex Expansion Join.

2. Design: a. Single reinforced bellows type or Victaulic mechanical couplings. b. Pressure and temperature ratings: 150 pounds per square inch gauge,

and 500 degrees Fahrenheit service. c. Bellows: Multi-ply (3 ply minimum) Type 321 stainless steel, equipped with

a Type 321 stainless steel liner. d. Axial travel of expansion joints: 3 inches minimum. e. Ends: 150 pound ASME flanges.

C. Copper piping expansion joints: 1. Expansion joints for copper pipe: As specified before, except externally

guided, and provide for 3-1/4 inch expansion per 100 feet of piping.

D. Roof drain expansion joints: 1. Neoprene bellows between roof drain fitting and drain piping. 2. Up to 12-inch static head. 3. Complete with Type 316 stainless steel clamps. 4. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

a. Watts, Model RD-900. b. Flexicraft Industries, DWV.

2.04 SLIP TYPE EXPANSION JOINTS

A. Expansion joints for steam cleaned piping: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

a. Smith-Blair, Inc., Number 612 with slip pipe and without limit rods. b. Dresser Industries, Inc., Style 63, Type 2.

2. Line and coat slip pipe and interior of body with fusion-bonded epoxy with minimum thickness of 0.012-inch.

3. Packing: Suitable for temperatures greater than 212 degrees Fahrenheit.

B. PVC expansion joints: 1. Flexible bellows type.


2. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. NDS Flow Management, Quik-Fix. b. Chemtrol.

3. Materials: PVC with EPDM o-ring. 4. Design:

a. 150 pound per square inch pressure rating. b. Double o-ring seal. c. Axial travel: Not less than 1.5 inches. d. Ends: 150 pound ASME flanges, or plain end suitable for solvent welding

connections.

2.05 RUBBER EXPANSION JOINTS

A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1. Mercer Rubber Co., Style 500 or 700. 2. Red Valve Co., Inc., Type J-1. 3. Proco Products, Inc., Series 230 or 240.

B. Provide rubber expansion joints complete with control units and split retaining rings.

C. Design: 1. Material: Neoprene rubber, reinforced with embedded steel rings, and a strong

synthetic fabric. 2. Expansion rings, suitable for pressures of at least 125 pounds per square inch

gauge, except as follows: a. Expansion joints in pump suction piping and where indicated on the

Drawings suitable for minimum 90 pounds per square inch gauge pressure, and minimum 30 inches mercury vacuum.

b. Ends of expansion joints, 150 pound ASME flanges with drilling to match that of the piping.

3. Bolts, nuts, control rods/plates, and retaining rings shall be galvanized steel unless otherwise specified.

4. Bolts, nuts, control rods/plates, and retaining rings for low pressure air systems provide materials matching the piping system.

5. Bolts, nuts, control rods/plates, and retaining rings submerged in water or wastewater, buried, in wet vaults or structures, adjacent to wet walls, or above open water-containing structures shall be Type 316 stainless steel in accordance with ASTM A193, Grade B8M for bolts and in accordance with ASTM A194, Grade 8M for nuts.

D. Rubber expansion joints for blowers: Butyl type rubber formulated for service application and for maximum temperature of 250 degrees Fahrenheit, suitable for minimum 40 pounds per square inch gauge pressure, and minimum 15 inches mercury vacuum.

2.06 TRANSITION FITTINGS

A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1. Spears.

B. Materials: 1. Slip socket: Schedule 80 PVC. 2. Collar: Type 316 stainless steel.


3. Threaded insert: Type 316 stainless steel.

2.07 PIPE SADDLES

A. For ductile iron pipe: 1. Double strap brass type. 2. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

a. A.Y. McDonald, Style 3825 b. The Ford Meter Box Company, Style 202B c. Mueller Company, Style BR2B.

3. Materials: a. Pipe saddle body, straps, and nuts: Brass or silicon bronze. b. Gaskets: EPDM.

B. For PVC C900 or C905 pipe: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

a. Smith-Blair, Inc., Style 317. b. Romac Industries, Inc., Style 202S.

2. Materials: a. Pipe saddles: Ductile iron with fusion bonded epoxy finish. b. Straps, bolts, and nuts: Type 304 stainless steel with Teflon™ coating on

nuts. c. Gaskets: EPDM.

2.08 TAPPING SLEEVES

A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1. Smith-Blair, Inc., Style 622. 2. Romac Industries, Inc., Style FTS 420.

B. Materials: 1. Tapping sleeves: Steel construction. 2. Bolts and nuts: Type 304 stainless steel. 3. Nuts: Teflon™ coated. 4. Gaskets: EPDM. 5. Size of tapped boss: As indicated on the Drawings.

2.09 SHIPPING


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL


B. Drawings supersede conflicts with this Section.

C. Bellows type expansion joints and vibration control joints: 1. Protect joints against damage during pressure test.


3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Expansion control joints: 1. Install bellows type expansion control joints at piping connections to

mechanical equipment to prevent damaging stresses due to normal expansion and contraction with temperature changes in piping and connected equipment.

2. Install bellows type expansion joints so as to allow 2-1/4 inch expansion per 100 linear feet of piping.

3. Install expansion joints adjacent to an anchor, and provide 1 concentric guide on piping within 12 pipe diameters, but not more than 5 feet, from the end of the joint opposite the anchor. a. Locate a similar guide approximately 30 diameters but not more than

10 feet from the first. 4. For expansion joints not installed adjacent to an anchor provide 2 concentric

guides similarly located at each end of the joint. 5. Provide control rods and additional guides where indicated on the Drawings,

but at no greater intervals than recommended by the joint manufacturer in published instructions.

6. Space intermediate supports a minimum of 10 feet, and tack weld the protective saddles to the pipe.

B. Transition couplings: 1. Application:

a. Use transition couplings with function and design similar to flexible couplings and flanged coupling adapters for connecting piping having different outside diameters.

2. Install transition-coupling products specifically designed and manufactured for that application.

C. Pipe saddles: 1. Coat threads on bolts with anti-gall coating prior to installation.

D. Tapping sleeves: 1. Verify existing pipe material and outer diameter prior to ordering materials. 2. Large diameter pipe:

a. Verify the existence of lining material. b. Verify lining material type. c. Repair lining after hot tap operations are complete with similar lining or

equal. d. Demonstrate ability to accomplish hot tap by staging a dry run simulation

of the procedure prior to the initiation of the hot tap procedure. 1) Walk through each step of the hot tap installation, and show the

Engineer every component needed to install the hot tap, including but not limited to, tools and materials, to ensure that all the required components are on-site and in place prior to beginning the procedure.

3. Coat threads on bolts with anti-gall coating prior to installation.

3.03 COMMISSIONING



B. Manufacturer services: 1. Required only for:

a. Transition couplings. b. Tapping sleeves for large diameter pipe.

2. Provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation and Functionality Compliance.

3. Provide Manufacturer’s Representative Onsite: a. Installation: 1 trip, 1 day each:

1) Installation consultation and advice. 2) Installation inspection.

C. Field testing: 1. As specified in Section 15052 - Common Work Results for General Piping. 2. Protect bellows type expansion joints and vibration control joints.

END OF SECTION

Pipe Couplings 15121-1 11487A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/OR/Clean Water Services/11487A10/Specifications/15121 (Bidset) April 2021 - BID

SECTION 15121

PIPE COUPLINGS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: 1. Pipe couplings for ductile iron piping. 2. Pipe couplings for carbon steel piping. 3. Pipe couplings for stainless steel piping.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).

B. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): 1. B31.1 - Power Piping. 2. B31.9 - Building Services Piping.

C. American Water Works Association (AWWA): 1. C111 - Standard for Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and

Fittings. 2. C207 - Standard for Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service - Sizes 4 In.

Through 144 In. 3. C606 - Standard for Grooved and Shouldered Joints.

D. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. A36 - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. 2. A53 - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-

Coated, Welded and Seamless. 3. A193 - Standard Specification for Alloy Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting

Materials for High Temperature or High Pressure Service and Other Special Purpose Applications.

4. A240 - Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications.

5. A351 - Standard Specification for Castings, Austenitic, for Pressure-Containing Parts.

6. A449 - Standard Specification for Hex Cap Screws, Bolts and Studs, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105/9 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength, General Use.

7. A536 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings. 8. A563 - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts. 9. A576 - Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Hot-Wrought, Special

Quality. 10. D2000 - Standard Classification System for Rubber Products in Automotive

Applications. 11. F593 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and



13. F3125 - Standard Specification for High Strength Structural Bolts, Steel and Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, 120 ksi and 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength.

E. NSF International (NSF): 1. 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects. 2. 372 - Drinking Water System Components - Lead Content.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Product data: 1. For each product in this Section as applicable:

a. Design features. b. Load capacities. c. Material designations by UNS alloy number or ASTM Specification and

Grade. d. Data needed to verify compliance with the Specifications. e. Catalog data. f. Clearly mark submittal information to show specific items, materials, and


C. Calculations: 1. Provide calculations in accordance with NSF 372 for materials in contact with

drinking water.

1.04 WARRANTY


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. As specified in Section 01600 - Product Requirements: 1. Materials in contact with drinking waters: In accordance with NSF 61 and

NSF 372.

B. Known acceptable manufacturers are listed by specific products.

C. Provide references as specified in this Section by specific product.

D. Manufacturer’s representatives requirements as specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning and this Section by specific product.

E. Gaskets for flexible couplings and flanged coupling adapters: 1. Provide gasket materials for piping applications as follows:

a. Low-pressure and high-pressure air, steam, hot water: EPDM. b. All other piping applications: EPDM.

F. Exterior coatings for underground and submerged applications:


1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a. Tapecoat Co., Inc., T.C. Mastic. b. Kop-Coat Co., Inc., Bitumastic Number 50.

2. Thickness: Minimum 0.040 inch.

2.02 PIPE COUPLINGS FOR DUCTILE IRON PIPING

A. Dismantling joints: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

a. Romac Ind., Inc., Style DJ400. b. Smith-Blair, Inc., Series 975.

2. Materials: a. Flanged spool: AWWA C207 steel pipe:

1) ASTM A53 for sizes 3 inches to 12 inches. 2) ASTM A36 for sizes 14 inches to 72 inches.

b. End ring and body: 1) For sizes 3 inches to 12 inches, ductile iron in accordance with

ASTM A536. 2) For sizes 14 inches to 72 inches, steel in accordance with ASTM A36

or A53. c. Follower ring: Ductile iron in accordance with ASTM A536. d. Bolts and hex nuts:

1) Aboveground: High strength, low alloy steel in accordance with AWWA C111.

2) Buried and underwater: Type 316 stainless steel bolts in accordance with ASTM F593.

e. Tie rods: High tensile steel in accordance with ASTM A193 Grade B7. 3. Flange design: Class D steel ring flange in accordance with AWWA C207,

compatible with ANSI Class 125 and 150 bolt circles. 4. Coating and lining: Manufacturer’s standard fusion bonded epoxy, NSF 61

certified.

B. Flanged coupling adapters: 12-inch size and smaller: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

a. Dresser, Inc., Style 227. b. Romac Ind., Inc., Style FCA501. c. Smith-Blair, Inc., Series 912.

2. Materials: a. Flanged body: Ductile iron in accordance with ASTM A536. b. Follower ring: Ductile iron in accordance with ASTM A536. c. Bolts and hex nuts:



3. Flange design: Class D steel ring flange in accordance with AWWA C207 compatible with ANSI Class 125 and 150 bolt circles.

4. Coating and lining: Manufacturer’s standard fusion bonded epoxy, NSF 61 certified.

C. Flanged coupling adapters: Greater than 12-inch size: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:


a. Dresser, Inc., Style 128-W. b. Romac Ind., Inc., Style FC400. c. Smith-Blair, Inc., Series 913.

2. Materials: a. Flange and flanged body: Ductile iron or low carbon steel having a

minimum yield strength of 30,000 pounds per square inch. b. Follower ring: Low carbon steel having a minimum yield strength of

30,000 pounds per square inch. c. Bolts and hex nuts:





D. Flexible couplings: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

a. Dresser, Inc., Style 253. b. Romac Ind., Inc., Style 501. c. Smith-Blair, Inc., Series 441.

2. Materials: a. Center rings: Ductile iron in accordance with ASTM A536. b. Follower rings: Ductile iron in accordance with ASTM A536. c. Bolts and hex nuts:


2) Buried and underwater: Type 316 stainless steel in accordance with ASTM F593.


4. Center sleeve dimensions: Provide center sleeves with lengths in accordance with following table:

Nominal Pipe Size Sleeve Length

3 inch and smaller Manufacturer’s standard

4 inch through 8 inch 7 inches

10 inch through 14 inch 12 inches

Greater than 16 inch Use steel flexible coupling per Pipe Couplings for Steel Piping

E. Restrained flange coupling adapter: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

a. Romac Ind., Inc., Style RFCA. b. Star Pipe Products, 3200 StarFlange™.

2. Materials: a. Flange and flanged body: Ductile iron in accordance with ASTM A536.


b. Follower ring: Lug type restraint system. 1) Follower ring: Ductile iron in accordance with ASTM A536. 2) Restraining lugs: Ductile iron in accordance with ASTM A536.

a) Designed to contact the pipe and apply forces evenly. 3) Restraining bolts:

a) Ductile iron in accordance with ASTM A536. b) Bolt heads shall be designed to twist off when the proper torque

has been applied. c. Bolts and hex nuts:





5. Angular deflection: Restrained flange coupling adapter must allow angular deflection after assembly.

F. Grooved joint couplings: 1. Manufacturers: The following or equal:

a. Victaulic Co., Series 31 or equal. 2. Materials:

a. Housings: Ductile iron in accordance with ASTM A536. b. Gasket:

1) FlushSeal® type, or equal. Elastomer in accordance with ASTM D2000.

2) Neoprene or BUNA-N. c. Bolts and nuts: Electroplated steel in accordance with ASTM A449. d. Coating: As specified in Section 09960 - High-Performance Coatings.

3. For use with rigid or flexible radius grooved components in accordance with AWWA C606.

4. For connection to IPS steel pipe sizes, Victaulic Style 307.

2.03 PIPE COUPLINGS FOR CARBON STEEL PIPING

A. Dismantling joints: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

a. Romac Ind., Inc., Style DJ400. b. Smith-Blair, Inc., Series 975.

2. Materials: a. Flanged spool:

1) C207 Schedule 40 pipe in accordance with ASTM A53 for sizes 3 inches to 12 inches.

2) Steel for pipe in accordance with ASTM A36 or A53 for sizes 14 inches to 72 inches.

b. End ring and body: 1) For sizes 3 inches to 12 inches, ductile iron in accordance with

ASTM A536. 2) For sizes 14 inches to 72 inches, steel in accordance with

ASTM A36.


c. Follower ring: Ductile iron in accordance with ASTM A536 or steel in accordance with ASTM A36 or A576.

d. Bolts and hex nuts: 1) Aboveground: High strength, low alloy steel in accordance with

AWWA C111. 2) Buried and underwater: Type 316 stainless steel bolts in accordance

with ASTM F593. e. Tie rods: High tensile steel in accordance with ASTM A193 grade B7.


4. Coating and lining: Fusion bonded epoxy certified in accordance with NSF 61.

B. Flanged coupling adapters: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

a. Dresser, Inc., Style 128-W. b. Romac Ind., Inc., Style FCA501 (10 inch and smaller) or Style FC400

(12 inch and larger). c. Smith-Blair, Inc., Series 913.

2. Materials: a. Flange and flanged body: Ductile iron or low carbon steel having a

minimum yield strength of 30,000 pounds per square inch. b. Follower ring: Low carbon steel having a minimum yield strength of

30,000 pounds per square inch. c. Bolts and hex nuts:

1) Aboveground: High-strength, low-alloy steel in accordance with AWWA C111.




C. Flexible couplings: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

a. Dresser, Inc., Style 38. b. Smith-Blair, Inc., Series 411. c. Romac Ind., Inc., Style 511 or Style 400.

2. Materials: a. Center sleeve and follower flanges: Ductile iron or low carbon steel having

a minimum yield strength of 30,000 pounds per square inch. b. Bolts and hex nuts:





4. Center sleeve dimensions: Provide center sleeves with lengths in accordance with following table:

Nominal Pipe Diameter Sleeve Length

2-1/2 inch and smaller Manufacturer’s standard

3 inch through 6 inch 7 inch

8 inch through 14 inch 7 inch

Greater than 14 inches 10 inch

D. Restrained flange coupling adapters: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

a. Romac Ind., Inc., Style RFCA. b. Star Pipe Products, 3200 StarFlange™.

2. Materials: a. Flange and flanged body: Ductile iron in accordance with ASTM A536. b. Follower ring: Lug type restraint system.

1) Follower ring: Ductile iron in accordance with ASTM A536. 2) Restraining lugs: Ductile iron in accordance with ASTM A536.

a) Designed to contact the pipe an apply forces evenly. 3) Restraining bolts: Ductile iron in accordance with ASTM A536. Bolt

heads shall be designed to twist off when the proper torque has been applied.

c. Bolts and hex nuts: 1) Aboveground: High-strength, low-alloy steel in accordance with

AWWA C111. 2) Buried and underwater: Type 316 stainless steel bolts in accordance

with ASTM F593. 3. Flange design: Class D steel ring flange in accordance with AWWA C207

compatible with ANSI Class 125 and 150 bolt circles. 4. Coating and lining: Manufacturer’s standard fusion bonded epoxy certified in

accordance with NSF 61.

E. Grooved joint couplings: 1. Model numbers from one manufacturer are shown to indicate type only.

Equivalent products of other manufacturers may be submitted for approval. 2. Coating: As specified in Section 09960 - High-Performance Coatings. 3. Sizes through 12 inch:

a. Rigid type: 1) Housings shall be cast with offsetting angle-pattern bolt pads to

provide rigidity and system support and hanging in accordance with ASME B31.1 and B31.9.

2) 2 inch through 6 inch: Installation-ready, for direct stab installation without field disassembly, with grade EHP gasket rated to plus 250 degrees Fahrenheit.

3) Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: a) Victaulic Style 107. b) Victaulic Zero-Flex Style 07.

b. Flexible type:


1) For use in locations where vibration attenuation and stress relief are required.

2) Three flexible couplings may be used in lieu of a flexible connector. 3) The couplings shall be placed in close proximity to the source of the

vibration. 4) Manufacturers: The following or equal:

a) Victaulic Style 77. c. Flange adapter:

1) Flat face, ductile iron housings with elastomer pressure responsive gasket, for direct connection to ANSI Class 125 or 150 flanged components.

2) Manufacturers: The following or equal: a) Victaulic Style 741.

4. Sizes 14 inch through 24 inch: a. Victaulic AGS series with lead-in chamfer on housing key and wide width

FlushSeal® gasket. b. Rigid type:

1) Housing key shall fill the wedge shaped AGS groove and provide rigidity and system support and hanging in accordance with ASME B31.1 and B31.9.

2) Manufacturers: The following or equal: a) Victaulic Style W07.

c. Flexible type: 1) Housing key shall fit into the wedge shaped AGS groove and allow

for linear and angular pipe movement. 2) Manufacturers: The following or equal:

a) Victaulic Style W77. d. Flange adapter:

1) Flat face, ductile iron housings with elastomer pressure responsive gasket, for direct connection to ANSI Class 125 or 150 flanged components.

2) Manufacturers: The following or equal: a) Victaulic Style W741.

5. For sizes 30 inch and larger: a. Manufacturers: The following or equal:

1) Victaulic Style AGS multiple-segment housing may be used.

2.04 PIPE COUPLINGS FOR STAINLESS STEEL PIPING

A. Flexible couplings: 1. Manufacturers: The following or equal:

a. Dresser, Inc., Style 38.

B. Grooved joint couplings: 1. Manufacturers: The following or equal:

a. Victaulic Co. 2. Materials:

a. Housings: 1) Ductile iron in accordance with ASTM A536. 2) Stainless steel in accordance with ASTM A351.

b. Gasket: Elastomer in accordance with ASTM D2000. c. Bolts and nuts:


1) Electroplated steel in accordance with ASTM A449. 2) Stainless steel in accordance with ASTM F593.

3. Rigid type: a. Victaulic Style 89 and W89 (ductile iron housings). b. Victaulic Style 489 (stainless steel housings).

4. Flexible type: Victaulic Style 77S.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. In underground and underwater installations, coat the exterior of coupling with a protective coating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Joints and flexible connections shall be installed centered with no angular deflection unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.

C. Flexible couplings and flange coupling adapters: Install with gap between pipe ends in accordance with the following table unless a greater gap is indicated on the Drawings. Maximum gap tolerance shall be within 1/8 inch. 1. Install flexible coupling with pipe gap located in middle of center sleeve. 2. Install flanged coupling adapter with end of plain end pipe in middle of flanged

coupling body.

Center Ring Length Gap Dimension and Tolerance

4 inch through 6 inch 3/8 inch

7 inch 5/8 inch

10 inch and greater 7/8 inch

D. Provide harnesses (tie-downs) for flexible couplings unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings with a written note. 1. Design harnesses (tie-downs) for the test pressures as specified in the Piping

Schedule in Section 15052 - Common Work Results for General Piping.

E. Grooved joint couplings: 1. Grooved ends: Clean and free from indentations, projections, and roll marks in

the area from pipe end to groove. 2. Gaskets: Elastomer grade suitable for the intended service, and molded and

produced by the coupling manufacturer.

F. Bolted, split-sleeve couplings: 1. Inspect each coupling to insure that there are no damaged portions of the

coupling. a. Pay particular attention to the sealing pad/sealing plate area. b. Before installation, thoroughly clean each coupling of any foreign

substance which may have collected thereon and shall be kept clean at all time.

2. Wrenches: a. Conform to manufacturer instructions.


b. Bolts and studs shall be tightened so as to secure a uniform gasket compression between the coupling and the body of the pipe with all bolts or studs tightened approximately the same amount.

c. Final tightening shall be done by hand (no air impact wrenches) and is complete when the coupling is in uniform contact with the outside surface of the pipe all around the circumference of the pipe.

3. No joint shall be misfit in any plane. 4. On the fixed ends of bolted, split-sleeve couplings, the shoulders shall bear on

the restraint rings all around with no visible gap. 5. Ends of piping where coupler are installed shall be smooth and free of defects.

a. Remove weld splatter and grind smooth. b. Grind pipe seam welds flush with pipe wall and smooth.

END OF SECTION

Strainers 15125-1 11487A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/OR/Clean Water Services/11487A10/Specifications/15125 (Bidset) April 2021 - BID

SECTION 15125

STRAINERS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: Strainers.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. A126 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and

Pipe Fittings. 2. A420 - Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and

Alloy Steel for Low-Temperature Service.

B. Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE).

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Product data: As specified in Section 15052 - Common Work Results for General Piping.

1.04 WARRANTY


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MECHANICALLY CLEANED AUTOMATIC STRAINERS

A. Mechanically cleaned automatic strainers: Revolving screen type finished with 1 cylindrical screen.

B. Design: 1. Provide automatic strainer system designed for continuous removal of

entrained solids from the liquid. An automated control system shall monitor the strainer operation and clean the screens by an integral backwash system. Backwash system shall include differential pressure switch, suction and discharge pressure gauges, pressure instrument valves, electric backwash valve, and piping for differential pressure switch and gauges.

2. Materials: a. Body: ASTM A126, Class B cast iron. b. Cylindrical Screens: ASTM A420 Type 316 stainless steel. c. Bearing: SAE 660 bronze.


d. Scraper Bar: SAE 43 manganese bronze. e. Shafts: Type 316 stainless steel. f. Clamp bar and packing gland: SAE 40 bronze.

3. Screens: a. Perforations: 234 micron. b. Capacity: Strainer suitable for operation at 350 gallons per minute with

clean water pressure drop of not more than 2 pounds per square inch. 4. Inlet and outlet connections: ANSI B16.5, 150 lbs, 8-inch flange. 5. Backwash valve: stainless steel ball valve with electric actuator rated for

120-volt, 1 phase service. 6. Pressure gauges, differential pressure switch, and instrument valves. 7. Instrument piping: Galvanized steel pipe in accordance with Section 15278 –

Steel Pipe – Plant. 8. Motor:

a. 460-volt, 3 phase, 60 Hz, 1.15 SF, class “F” insulation, TEFC with gear drive.

C. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1. S.P. Kinney, Model A. 2. Eaton, Model 2596.

D. Control Panel: 1. Packaged control panel shall be provided to control the strainer backwash

cycle. Panel shall include all motor starters, control relays, fuses and overload protection, control transformer, operating lights, and all other necessary appurtenances required for operation.

2. NEMA Type 4X Type 316 stainless steel. 3. Power supply: 480 VAC, 3-phase, 60 hertz. 4. Electrical components:

a. Surge protection device on incoming power. b. Main circuit breaker:

1) As specified in Section 16412 - Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers.

2) Flange-mounted operator: a) Pad-lockable in the off position.

3) Disconnects all power to the panel. 4) Interlock with the panel door.

a) Defeat mechanism. c. Control power transformer:

1) Primary voltage: match the power supply voltage to the PCP. 2) Sized for all panel components plus 10 percent spare capacity. 3) Primary and secondary fuses.

5. Control panel shall be equipped with a programmable solid state timer to initiate cleaning cycles at adjustable time intervals, a HOA selector switch, and a manual start push-button.

6. Provide transformer and associated overcurrent protection as required for all control circuits.

7. Cleaning cycle duration shall be adjusted by a cycle duration timer. 8. An adjustable pressure differential switch shall be mounted on the strainer and

shall be used to initiate cleaning cycle. 9. Provide high differential pressure alarm to Plant SCADA via dry contacts rated

for 120VAC and 24VDC.


10. Instrumentation: a. Differential pressure switch across strainer to trigger backwash and

provide alarm: 1) Manufacturers:

a) Ashcroft D Series Type 400. b) United Electric Controls 400 Series.

2) Adjustable differential pressure setpoint, initially set 2.0 PSIG or as recommended by vendor.

3) NEMA 4X. 4) Stainless steel wetted materials. 5) Accuracy: Within 1.0 percent of range.

b. Pressure gauges on suction and discharge piping: 1) Manufacturers:

a) Ashcroft 1279. b) Wika. c) Ametek U.S. Gauge

2) Pressure range: 0-160 psig. 3) NEMA 4X. 4) Stainless steel wetted materials. 5) Accuracy: Within 1.0 percent of range.

c. Provide isolation and block-and-bleed valves for pressure instruments. d. Provide and install all instrumentation, instrument piping, valving, and

associated hardware.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

3.02 COMMISSIONING



a. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Installation and Functionality Compliance. 2. Manufacturer’s Representative onsite requirements:

a. Installation and Functional Testing: 1 trips, 2 day minimum each. 3. Training:

a. Maintenance: 4 hours per session, 1 session. b. Operation: 1 hours per session, 1 session.


C. Functional testing: 1. Mechanically cleaned strainers only:

a. Test witnessing: Witnessed. b. Conduct Level 1 General Equipment Performance Test.

END OF SECTION

Ductile Iron Pipe: AWWA C151 15211-1 11487A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/OR/Clean Water Services/11487A10/Specifications/15211 (Bidset) April 2021 - BID

SECTION 15211

DUCTILE IRON PIPE: AWWA C151 – PLANT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: Ductile iron pipe, joints, connections, fittings, and pipe linings and coatings.

B. As specified in Section 15052 - Common Work Results for General Piping - Plant.

1.02 REFERENCES


250.

B. American Water Works Association (AWWA): 1. C104 – Standard for Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings. 2. C105 - Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Pipe Systems. 3. C110 - Standard for Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings. 4. C111 - Standard for Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and

Fittings. 5. C150 - Standard for Thickness Design of Ductile-Iron Pipe. 6. C151 - Standard for Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast. 7. C600 - Installation of Ductile Iron Water Mains and Their Appurtenances. 8. C606 - Standard for Grooved and Shouldered Joints.

C. American Welding Society (AWS): 1. D11.2 - Guide for Welding Iron Castings.

D. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. A536 - Standard Specifications for Ductile Iron Castings. 2. B1000 - Standard Practices for Casting Preparation and Test Procedure of

Porcelain Enamel-Lined Pipe, Fittings, and Valves for Use in the Municipal Wastewater, Sewage, and Water Treatment Industry.

3. C283 - Standard Test Methods for Resistance of Porcelain Enameled Utensils to Boiling Acid.

4. D792 - Standard Test Methods for Density and Specific Gravity (Relative Density) of Plastics by Displacement.

E. Ductile Iron Pipe Research Association (DIPRA): 1. Thrust Restraint Design Manual.

F. International Organization for Standardization (ISO): 1. 8179 - Ductile iron pipe, fittings, accessories and their joints - External zinc-

based coating –Part 1: Metallic zinc with finishing layer.


G. National Association of Pipe Fabricators, Inc. (NAPF): 1. 500-03 - Surface Preparation Standard for Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings in


H. Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC): 1. PA-2 - Measurement of Dry Coating Thickness With Magnetic Gages.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Product data.

C. Shop drawings: 1. Detailed layout drawings showing alignment of pipes, location of valves,

fittings, and appurtenances, types of joints, and connections to pipelines or structures.

2. Thrust restraint systems. 3. Photographs, drawings, and descriptions of fittings, gaskets, couplings,

grooving of pipe and fittings.

D. Calculations: 1. Calculations for thrust restraint system design.

E. Manufacturer’s source testing.


A. Ductile iron pipe shall be supplied by a single manufacturer.

B. Hydrostatically test each joint of ductile iron pipe in accordance with AWWA C151.

C. Pre-installation meeting: 1. Arrange for Coating Manufacturer’s Technical Representative to attend

preconstruction conferences, and to make periodic visits to factory or shop to inspect surface preparation of pipe, fittings, and accessories; and to inspect application of linings to interior and coatings to exterior of pipe, fittings, and accessories.


A. Block piping and associated fittings for shipment to prevent damage to coatings and linings.

B. Carefully handle piping and associated fittings during loading, unloading, and installation: 1. Do not drop piping material from cars or trucks. 2. Lower piping by mechanical means. 3. Do not drop or pound pipe to fit grade.

C. Protect gaskets and polyethylene encasement from long-term exposure to sunlight.


D. Store piping, fittings, and other accessories such that they do not accumulate and hold rainwater, dirt, and debris.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A. Ductile iron piping: 1. Manufacturers

a. American Cast Iron Pipe Co. b. Pacific States Cast Iron Pipe Co. c. SIP Industries. d. U.S. Pipe.

2.02 THRUST RESTRAINT SYSTEM DESIGN

A. The length of pipe that must be restrained on each side of the focus of a thrust load as indicated on the Drawings.

B. Design pressure: Test pressure.

C. Laying condition: Type 5 in accordance with AWWA C150.

D. Soil type: Silt 1.

E. Unit friction resistance for polyethylene encasement of pipe: DIPRA factor multiplied by a safety factor of 1.5.

2.03 CONCRETE THRUST BLOCK RESTRAINT

A. Joint thrust restraint system designed by Contractor. 1. Concrete thrust blocks will only be permitted in certain locations where

indicated on the Drawings.

2.04 DUCTILE IRON JOINTS AND CONNECTIONS

A. General: 1. Pressure class or special thickness class as indicated in the Piping Schedule

provided in Section 15052 - Common Work Results for General Piping. 2. In accordance with AWWA C150 and AWWA C151. 3. Joints:

a. Flanged. b. Grooved. c. Mechanical. d. Push-on Rubber Gasket. e. Integrally Restrained Mechanical. f. Mechanical Wedge Action. g. Integrally Restrained Push-On. h. Push-On Joint Restraint Harness.

4. Connections: a. Tapping saddle. b. Tapping sleeve.


c. Welded outlet. 5. Fittings.

B. Joints: 1. Flanged joints:

a. Screw-on flanges: Comply with the diameter, thickness, drilling, and other characteristics in accordance with ASME B16.1. In addition, comply with the following requirements: 1) Ductile iron. 2) Long hub, threaded, and specially designed for ductile iron pipe. 3) After attaching to pipe, machine flange face to make pipe end and

flange even and perpendicular to the axis of the pipe. b. Bolt holes on flanges: 2-holed and aligned at both ends of pipe. c. Cap screw or stud bolt holes: Tapped. d. Bolts and nuts: As specified in Section 15052 - Common Work Results for

General Piping. e. Gaskets: Standard styrene butadiene copolymer (SBR) unless specified

otherwise in Section 15052 - Common Work Results for General Piping. 2. Grooved joints: In accordance with AWWA C606, as complemented and

modified below, radius-cut type, with following components: a. Couplings: Rigid type, cast from ductile iron in accordance with

ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12. b. Bolts and nuts: As specified in Section 15052 - Common Work Results for

General Piping. c. Gaskets: As specified in Section 15052 - Common Work Results for

General Piping. d. Fittings: In accordance with AWWA C606, rigid radius-cut groove:

1) Center-to-center dimensions: In accordance with AWWA C110. 2) Wall thickness and other characteristics: In accordance with

AWWA C606. e. Flanged unit connections: Flanged to grooved joint adapters or a long

enough spool with one end flanged and the other end grooved to prevent interference with the operation of adjacent valves, pumps, or other items.

3. Mechanical joints: In accordance with AWWA C111. a. Gaskets: As specified in Section 15052 - Common Work Results for

General Piping. b. Bolts and nuts, including T-bolts: As specified in Section 15052 - Common

Work Results for General Piping. 4. Push-on rubber gasket joints: In accordance with AWWA C111.

a. Gaskets: As specified in Section 15052 - Common Work Results for General Piping.

5. Integrally restrained push-on joints: a. Application:

1) Where designation restrained push-on is specified in the Piping Schedule provided in Section 15052 - Common Work Results for General Piping, supply a restrained push-on joint piping system, which includes restrained push-on joints where necessary based upon thrust calculations.

2) Standard push-on rubber gasket joints as specified above can be used where thrust calculations demonstrate restraint is not required.


b. Design: 1) Restrained push-on joints of the configuration which utilizes a

gripping or friction force for restraint will not be acceptable. 2) Suitable for the following working pressures:

a) For 4- through 24-inch pipe: 350 pounds per square inch gauge. b) For 30- through 54-inch pipe: 250 pounds per square inch

gauge. c. Gaskets: As specified in Section 15052 - Common Work Results for

General Piping. d. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

1) U.S. Pipe, TR Flex. 2) McWane Ductile, TR Flex. 3) American Cast Iron Pipe Co., Flex Ring or Lok-Ring.

e. Limit buried joints to half the manufacturer’s published allowable angular joint deflection for purposes of pipeline alignment and elimination of fittings.Connections:

6. Tapping saddle as specified in Owner standard specification. a. If Owner does not have a standard specification, provide tapping saddles

as specified in Section 15120 - Piping Specialties. 7. Tapping sleeve as specified in Owner standard specification.

a. If Owner does not have a standard specification, provide tapping sleeves as specified in Section 15120 - Piping Specialties.

8. Welded outlet. a. Not allowed without Engineer approval.

C. Fittings: 1. Ductile iron in accordance with AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. 2. Joint type: Same as that of the associated piping as specified in Section 15052

- Common Work Results for General Piping. 3. Plain end-to-flanged joint connectors using setscrews are not acceptable.

D. Pipe and fitting linings: 1. Cement-mortar lining:

a. In accordance with AWWA C104, apply cement-mortar on clean bare metal surfaces. Extend to faces of flanges, ends of spigots, and shoulders of hubs.

b. Minimum lining thickness: Standard in accordance with AWWA C104. c. Type of cement: Type II.

2. Asphaltic seal coat: a. Apply over cement mortar linings and to outside surface of pipes that will

not receive another coating. Apply in accordance with AWWA C151.

E. Coatings: 1. Asphalt varnish: Factory applied. 2. Primer:

a. Factory applied for field coating. b. Compatible with materials as specified in Section 09960 - High-

Performance Coatings and Section 09997 - Pipeline Coatings and Linings.


2.05 POLYETHYLENE ENCASEMENT

A. General: 1. Polyethylene encasement shall be supplied by the pipe manufacturer.

B. Materials: Supply one of the following polyethylene encasements: 1. 2 layers of linear low-density polyethylene (LLDPE) film, minimum thickness of

8 mils in accordance with AWWA C105; or, 2. Single layer of high-density, cross-laminated polyethylene (HDCLPE) film,

minimum thickness of 4 mils in accordance with AWWA C105.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. General: 1. Install ductile iron piping in accordance with AWWA C600, or as modified in

Section 15052 - Common Work Results for General Piping. 2. For underground piping, the trenching, backfill, and compaction: As specified

in Section 02318 - Trenching.

B. Polyethylene encasement: 1. Wrap all buried ductile iron pipe and fittings in 2 layers of loose low-density

polyethylene wrap or a single layer of high-density polyethylene wrap in accordance with AWWA C105.

2. Polyethylene encasement shall be continuous and terminated neatly at connections to below grade equipment or structures.

3. At wall penetrations, extend encasement to the wall and neatly terminate. 4. At slab penetrations, extend encasement to 2 inches below the top of slab and

neatly terminate. 5. When rising vertically in unimproved areas, extend encasement 6 inches

above existing grade and neatly terminate. 6. Repair tears and make joints with 2 layers of plastic tape. 7. All work shall be inspected prior to backfilling of pipe and associated items.

C. Joints: 1. Install types of joints as specified in the piping schedule provided in

Section 15052 - Common Work Results for General Piping. 2. Mechanical joints are not acceptable in above ground applications. 3. Field closure for restrained push-on pipe:

a. Locate field closures in areas where thrust calculations demonstrate restraint is not required.

4. Grooved joints: a. Install piping with grooved joints where specified in the piping schedule as

specified in Section 15052 - Common Work Results for General Piping. b. Assemble grooved joints in accordance with manufacturer's published

instructions. c. Support grooved-end pipe in accordance with manufacturer's published

instructions. 1) Install at least 1 support between consecutive couplings.


D. Connection: 1. Tapping ductile iron pipe:

a. Direct tapping of ductile iron pipe may be performed but is limited to the following conditions: 1) Maximum allowable tap diameter by pipe diameter and pressure

class:

Pipe Size (inches)

Pressure Class

150 200 250 300 350

Maximum Allowable Direct Tap Size (inches)

3 - - - - 3/4

4 - - - - 3/4

6 - - - - 1

8 - - - - 1

10 - - - - 1

12 - - - - 1-1/4

14 - - 1-1/4 1-1/2 1-1/2

16 - - 1-1/2 2 2

18 - - 2 2 2

20 - - 2 2 2

24 - 2 2 2 2 b. The maximum allowable tap diameter for pipelines greater than 24 inches

is 2 inches. c. 2 layers of 3-mil thread sealant are required to minimize the torque

required to effect a watertight connection. 2. When direct tapping of ductile iron pipe is not possible due to limited wall

thickness, a saddle tap shall be used.


A. Testing ductile iron piping: 1. Test as specified in Section 15052 - Common Work Results for General Piping

and Section 15956 - Piping Systems Testing.

B. Repair damaged cement mortar lining to match quality, thickness, and bonding of original lining in accordance with AWWA C104. 1. When lining cannot be repaired or repairs are defective, replace defective

piping with undamaged piping.

END OF SECTION

Plastic Piping and Tubing 15230-1 11487A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/OR/Clean Water Services/11487A10/Specifications/15230 (Bidset) April 2021 - BID

SECTION 15230

PLASTIC PIPING AND TUBING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: Plastic tubing and fittings.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): 1. B16.12 - Cast Iron Threaded Drainage Fittings.

B. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. D1248 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Extrusion Materials

For Wire and Cable. 2. D1784 - Standard Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)

Compounds and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds. 3. D1785 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe,

Schedules 40, 80 and 120. 4. D1869 - Standard Specification for Rubber Rings for Asbestos-Cement Pipe. 5. D2412 - Standard Test Method for Determination of External Loading

Characteristics of Plastic Pipe by Parallel-Plate Loading. 6. D2466 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe

Fittings, Schedule 40. 7. D2467 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe

Fittings, Schedule 80. 8. D2513 - Standard Specification for Thermoplastic Gas Pressure Pipe, Tubing

and Fittings. 9. D2564 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride)

(PVC) Plastic Piping Systems. 10. D2665 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain,

Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings. 11. D2855 - Standard Practice for the Two-Step (Primer and Solvent Cement)

Method of Joining Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) or Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Pipe and Piping Components with Tapered Sockets.

12. D3034 - Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings.

13. D3212 - Standard Specification for Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals.

14. D3261 - Standard Specification for Butt Heat Fusion Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Fittings for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe and Tubing.

15. D3350 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastic Pipes and Fittings Materials.

16. D4101 - Standard Specification for Polypropylene Injection and Extrusion Materials.

17. F438 - Standard Specification for Socket-Type Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40.


18. F439 - Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80.

19. F441 - Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80.

20. F477 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe.

21. F493 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings.

22. F645 - Standard Guide for Selection, Design and Installation of Thermoplastic Water-Pressure Piping Systems.

23. F679 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Large-Diameter Plastic Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings.

24. F714 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR) Based on Outside Diameter.

C. American Water Works Association (AWWA): 1. C900 - Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe and Fabricated

Fittings, 4 Inches to 12 Inches, for Water Transmission Distribution.

D. NSF International (NSF).

E. Plastics Pipe Institute (PPI): 1. TR 31 - Underground Installation of Polyolefin Piping.

1.03 ABBREVIATIONS

A. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene.

B. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride.

C. DR: Dimension ratio.

D. DWV: Drain, waste, and vent.

E. ID: Inside diameter of piping or tubing.

F. NPS: Nominal pipe size followed by the size designation.

G. NS: Nominal size of piping or tubing.

H. PE: Polyethylene.

I. PP: Polypropylene.

J. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride.

K. SDR: Standard dimension ratio; the outside diameter divided by the pipe wall thickness.

1.04 SUBMITTALS




C. Shop Drawings: 1. Describe materials, pipe, fittings, gaskets, and solvent cement. 2. Installation instructions.


A. Fusion machine technician qualifications: 1-year experience in the installation of similar PE piping systems from the same manufacturer.

B. Plastic pipe in potable water applications: Provide pipe and tubing bearing NSF seal.

C. Mark plastic pipe with nominal size, type, class, schedule, or pressure rating, manufacturer and all markings required in accordance with ASTM and AWWA standards.


A. Protect piping materials from sunlight, scoring, and distortion.

B. Do not allow surface temperatures on pipe and fittings to exceed 120 degrees Fahrenheit.

C. Store and handle PE pipe and fittings as recommended by manufacturer in published instructions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Extruding and molding material: Virgin material containing no scrap, regrind, or rework material except where permitted in the referenced standards.

B. Fittings: Same material as the pipe and of equal or greater pressure rating, except that fittings used in drain, waste, and vent piping systems need not be pressure rated.

2.02 PFA TUBING AND FITTINGS

A. Materials: 1. Small Bore PFA Tubing: Flexible virgin PFA tubing suitable for flaring and

available in continuous lengths of 500-ft. a. PFA tubing wall thicknesses as follows:

1) For NS 1/4 inch, 0.047". 2) For NS 3/8 inch, 0.062". 3) For NS 1/2 inch, 0.062". 4) For NS 3/4 inch, 0.062". 5) For NS 1 inch, 0.062".


B. Pressure Rating: Minimum 100 psig at 25 degrees Celsius.

C. Fittings: PVDF Flare-type (no threads exposed to fluid).

D. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1. Tubing:

a. Harrington Plastics. 2. Fittings:

a. FlareLINK by Fit-LINE Inc.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. General: 1. Provide serrated nipples for transition from plastic pipe to tubing.

B. Installation of PFA tubing and fittings: 1. Install small bore PFA tubing in accordance with manufacturer's printed

instructions, in neat straight lines, supported at close enough intervals to avoid sagging, and in a continuous run.

2. Bundle tubing in groups of parallel tubes within protective sheath. 3. Tubes within protective sheath may be color coded, but protect tubing other

than black outside the sheath by wrapping with black plastic electrician's tape. 4. Grade tubing connected to meters in one direction. 5. For buried tubing in chemical service, install tubing in Schedule 80 PVC carrier

pipe to serve as double containment. Requirements of the double containment piping systems are as follows: a. Carrier pipe shall utilize long radius elbows to facilitate pulling of tubing. b. Low point of carrier pipe system shall run through an inspection hatch as

indicated on the Drawings. c. Carrier pipe shall have a cross installed in the vault for each chemical to

allow for leak detection. Cross branches shall be installed vertically to allow for leak inspection.


A. Test piping and carrier piping in accordance with Section 15956 - Piping Systems Testing.

END OF SECTION

High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Pipe: AWWA C906 15241-1 11487A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/OR/Clean Water Services/11487A10/Specifications/15241 (Bidset) April 2021 - BID

SECTION 15241

HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) PIPE: AWWA C906

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: High Density Polyethylene Pipe (HDPE), and fittings.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American Water Works Association (AWWA): 1. C906 – Standard for Polyethylene (PE) Pressure Pipe and Fittings, 4 in.

Through 63 in., for Water Distribution.

B. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. D1238 - Standard Test Method for Melt Flow Rates of Thermoplastics by

Extrusion Plastometer. 2. D1505 - Standard Test Method for Density of Plastics by the Density-Gradient

Technique. 3. D1599 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Short-Time Hydraulic

Pressure of Plastic Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings. 4. D1603 - Standard Test Method for Carbon Black Content in Olefin Plastics. 5. D2122 - Standard Test Method for Determining Dimensions of Thermoplastic

Pipe and Fittings. 6. D2290 - Standard Test Method for Apparent Hoop Tensile Strength of Plastic

or Reinforced Plastic Pipe by Split Disk Method. 7. D3261 - Standard Specification for Butt Heat Fusion Polyethylene (PE) Plastic

Fittings for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe and Tubing. 8. D3350 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastic Pipe and Fittings

Material. 9. F645 - Standard Guide for Selection, Design, and Installation of Thermoplastic

Water-Pressure Piping Systems. 10. F714 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR)

Based on Outside Diameter.

C. International Organization of Standardization (ISO): 1. 10863 - Non-destructive testing of welds - Ultrasonic testing - Use of time-of-

flight diffraction technique (TOFD).

D. Plastic Pipe Institute (PPI): 1. PE 4710.

1.03 ABBREVIATIONS

A. HDPE: High-density polyethylene pipe.

B. ID: Inside diameter of piping or tubing.

C. OD: Outside diameter.


D. SDR: Standard dimension ratio.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop drawings: 1. Detailed layout drawings showing alignment of pipes, location of valves,

fittings, and appurtenances, types of joints, and connections to pipelines or structures.

C. Product data: As specified in Section 15052 - Common Work Results for General Piping: 1. Describe materials and installation equipment including fusion machine.

Include optimum range of fusion conditions such as fusion temperature, interface pressure, and cooling time Pipe loads and structural calculations.

2. Installation instructions.

D. Qualifications of installation crew for high-density polyethylene pipe including qualifications of the fusion machine technician. Furnish proof of training in the use of fusion equipment.


A. Markings on the pipe shall be in accordance with AWWA C906.


A. Protect piping materials from sunlight, scoring, and distortion.

B. Do not allow surface temperatures on pipe and fittings to exceed 120 degrees Fahrenheit.

C. Store and handle PE pipe and fittings as recommended by manufacturer in published instructions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. In accordance with AWWA C906.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Fittings: Same material as the pipe and of equal or greater pressure rating.

2.03 HDPE PIPING

A. General: 1. Pipe and fittings: High-density polyethylene. 2. Dimensions of pipe and fittings: Based on controlled outside diameter in

accordance with ASTM F714:


a. SDR: As given in Piping Schedule, Section 15052 - Common Work Results for General Piping; or, if not given, minimum SDR equals 9.

b. Pipe Diameter: IPS dimensions as specified in Section 15052 - Common Work Results for General Piping Pipe Schedule.

3. Pipe, fittings, and adapters: Furnished by the same manufacturer, or compatible with components in the same system and with components of other systems to which connected.

B. Materials: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

a. Performance Pipe. b. Isco Ind.

2. Polyethylene: As listed by the PPI under the designation PE 4710; and have a minimum cell classification, in accordance with ASTM D3350, of 445574C: a. Pipe and fittings: Manufactured from material with the same cell

classification. b. Manufacturer shall certify that pipe and fittings meet the above

classifications. 3. Polyethylene fittings and custom fabrications:

a. Molded or fabricated. b. Butt fusion outlets shall be made to the same outside diameter, wall

thickness, and tolerances as the mating pipe. c. All fittings and custom fabrications shall be fully rated for the same internal

pressure as the mating pipe. d. Pressure de-rated fabricated fittings are prohibited.

4. Molded fittings: a. Manufactured in accordance with ASTM D3261, Butt Heat Fusion

Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Fittings for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe and Tubing, and shall be so marked.

b. Each production lot of molded fittings shall be subjected to the tests required under ASTM D3261.

5. X-ray inspection: The Manufacturer shall submit samples from each molded fittings production lot to x-ray inspection for voids, and shall certify that voids were not found.

6. Fabricated fittings: a. Made by heat fusion joining specially machined shapes cut from pipe,

polyethylene sheet stock, or molded fittings. b. Rated for internal pressure service at least equal to the full service

pressure rating of the mating pipe. 7. Polyethylene flange adapters:

a. Flange adapters shall be made with sufficient through-bore length to be clamped in a butt fusion joining machine without the use of a stub-end holder.

b. The sealing surface of the flange adapter shall be machined with a series of small v-shaped grooves to provide gasketless sealing, or to restrain the gasket against blowout.

8. Back-up rings and flange bolts: a. Flange adapters shall be fitted with Type 304 or 316 stainless steel

back-up rings pressure rated equal to or greater than the mating pipe. b. The back-up ring bore shall be chamfered or radiused to provide

clearance to the flange adapter radius.


c. Flange bolts and nuts shall be the same material as backing flange and as specified in Section 15052 - Common Work Results for General Piping.


A. HDPE piping: 1. Manufacturer's quality control: The pipe and fitting manufacturer shall have an

established quality control program responsible for inspecting incoming and outgoing materials.

2. Incoming polyethylene materials: a. Inspected for density, melt flow rate, and contamination. b. The cell classification properties of the material shall be certified by the

supplier, and verified by manufacturer's quality control. c. Approved by quality control before processing into finished goods.

3. Outgoing materials shall be checked for: a. Outside diameter, wall thickness, and eccentricity in accordance with

ASTM D2122 at a frequency of at least once per hour. b. Out of roundness at a frequency of at least once per hour. c. Straightness, inside and outside surface finish, markings and end cuts

shall be visually inspected in accordance with ASTM F714 on every length of pipe: 1) Quality control shall verify production checks and test for:

a) Density in accordance with ASTM D1505 at a frequency of at least once per extrusion lot.

b) Melt Index in accordance with ASTM D1238 at a frequency of at least once per extrusion lot.

c) Carbon content in accordance with ASTM D1603 at a frequency of at least once per day in accordance with extrusion line.

d) Quick burst pressure in accordance with ASTM D1599 at a frequency of at least once per day per line.

e) Ring Tensile Strength in accordance with ASTM D2290 at a frequency of at least once per day per line.

d. X-ray inspection shall be used to inspect molded fittings for voids, and knit line strength shall be tested. All fabricated fittings shall be inspected for joint quality and alignment.

4. Permanent records: The manufacturer shall maintain permanent QC and QA records.

5. Compliance tests: a. Manufacturer's inspection and testing of the materials.

1) In case of conflict with manufacturer's certifications, the Contractor, Engineer, or Owner may request retesting by the manufacturer or have retests performed by an outside testing service.

2) All retesting shall be at the requestor's expense, and shall be performed in accordance with this Section.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. General:


1. Where not otherwise specified, install piping in accordance with ASTM F645, or manufacturer's published instructions for installation of piping, as applicable to the particular type of piping.

2. Provide molded transition fittings for transitions from HDPE to metal or IPS pipe. Do not thread or solvent weld HDPE pipe.

B. Installation of HDPE piping: 1. Joining:

a. Heat fusion joining: 1) Joints between plain end pipes and fittings shall be made by butt

fusion, and joints between the main and saddle branch fittings shall be made utilizing saddle fusion employing only procedures that are recommended by the pipe and fitting manufacturer.

2) The Contractor shall certify, in writing, that persons making heat fusion joints have received training in the manufacturer's recommended procedure and have had at least 3 years current experience in the heat fusion butt welding process.

3) The Contractor shall maintain records of trained personnel, and shall certify that training was received not more than 12 months before commencing construction.

4) External and internal beads shall not be removed. b. Heat fusion training services: The manufacturer shall provide training in

the manufacturer's recommended butt fusion and saddle fusion procedures to the Contractor's installation personnel, and to the inspector(s) representing the Owner, prior to the start of construction.

c. Mechanical joining: 1) Polyethylene pipe and fittings may be joined together or to other

materials by means of flanged connections (flange adapters and back-up rings) or, where specifically indicated on the Drawings, flexible couplings designed for joining polyethylene pipe or for joining polyethylene pipe to another material.

2) Flexible couplings shall be fully pressure rated and fully thrust restrained such that when installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, a longitudinal load applied to the mechanical coupling will cause the pipe to yield before the mechanical coupling disjoins.

2. Installation: a. General:

1) The Manufacturer shall package products for shipment in a manner suitable for safe transport by commercial carrier.

2) When delivered, a receiving inspection shall be performed, and any shipping damage shall be reported to the Manufacturer within 7 days.

3) Damaged pipe shall be promptly removed from the job site. 4) Installation shall be in accordance with Manufacturer's

recommendations, and this specification. 5) Prior to making a terminal connection of each individual run of HDPE

pipe, the temperature of the pipe should be allowed to approach the service temperature at which the pipe is intended to operate.

6) All necessary precautions shall be taken to ensure a safe working environment in accordance with applicable codes and standards.

b. Large diameter fabricated fittings: Fabricated fittings shall be butt fused to the end of a pipe.


c. Mechanical joint and flange installation: 1) Mechanical joints and flange connections shall be installed in

accordance with the manufacturer's recommended procedure. 2) Flange faces shall be centered and aligned to each other before

assembling and tightening bolts. 3) Every effort shall be made to ensure that the opposing faces of the

flange assemblies mate up securely at a temperature approximately the same as the service temperature.

4) In no case shall the flange bolts be used to draw the flanges into alignment.

5) Bolt threads shall be lubricated, and flat washers shall be fitted under the flange nuts.

6) Bolts shall be evenly tightened according to the tightening pattern and torque step recommendations of the manufacturer.

7) At least 1 hour after initial assembly, flange connections shall be re-tightened following the tightening pattern and torque step recommendations of the manufacturer.

8) The final tightening torque shall be 100 feet-pounds or less as recommended by the manufacturer.

d. Pipe handling: 1) Lift, move, or lower pipe and fittings only with wide fabric choker

slings. 2) Wire rope or chain shall not be used. 3) Slings shall be of sufficient capacity for the load, and shall be

inspected before use. 4) Worn or defective equipment shall not be used.

e. Excavation, backfill material and backfilling and compacting: 1) Comply with Section 603 of the MAG Uniform Standard

Specifications for Public Works Construction.


A. Butt fusion testing on pipe size 14 inches and larger: 1. The first fusion of each day shall be a trial fusion.

a. The trial fusion shall be allowed to cool completely. b. Fusion test straps shall be cut out.

1) The test strap shall be 12 inches (minimum) or 30 times the wall thickness in length with the fusion in the center, and 1 inch (minimum) or 1.5 times the wall thickness in width.

c. Bend the test strap until the ends of the strap touch. 2. If the fusion fails at the joint, a new trial fusion shall be made, cooled

completely and tested. 3. Butt fusion of pipe to be installed shall not commence until a trial fusion has

passed the bent strap test.

B. Data logging and test data: 1. A data logger shall be installed on the fusion heated joining machine. Data on

each joint shall be recorded by the data logger. Data to be recorded shall be minimum temperature of joint fusion and interface pressure of the fused joint.

2. Recorded data from the fusion data logger and the TOFD shall be transmitted to the Owner daily.


C. Pressure testing: 1. Test pressures as specified in Section 15052 - Common Work Results for

General Piping. 2. Temperature of test water shall be no more than 73 degrees Fahrenheit.

END OF SECTION

Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe: AWWA C900 AND AWWA C905 15244-1 11487A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/OR/Clean Water Services/11487A10/Specifications/15244 (Bidset) April 2021 - BID

SECTION 15244

POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE: AWWA C900 AND AWWA C905

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: 1. AWWA C900 and AWWA C905 PVC pipe and fittings.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American Water Works Association (AWWA): 1. C605 - Standard for Underground Installation of PVC and PVCO Pressure

Pipe and Fittings for Water. 2. C900 - Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe and Fabricated

Fittings, 4 Inches to 12 Inches, for Water Transmission Distribution. 3. C905 - Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe and Fabricated

Fittings, 14 In. Through 48 In. 4. C907 - Standard for Injection-Molded Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure

Fittings, 4 In. Through 12 In. 5. M23 - PVC Pipe - Design and Installation Manual.

B. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. A536 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings. 2. D1784 - Standard Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)

Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds. 3. D3139 - Standard Specification for Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes Using

Flexible Elastomeric Seals. 4. F477 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining

Plastic Pipe. 5. F645 - Standard Guide for Selection, Design and Installation of Thermoplastic

Water-Pressure Piping Systems.

C. NSF International (NSF): 1. 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects.

1.03 ABBREVIATIONS

A. DR: Dimension ratio.

B. NPS: Nominal pipe size followed by the size designation.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit as specified in Section 01330 – Submittal Procedures.



C. Shop drawings: As specified in Section 15052 - Common Work Results for General Piping: 1. Describe materials, pipe, fittings, and gaskets. 2. Manufacturer’s product handling and installation instructions.


A. Pipe in potable water applications: Provide pipe bearing NSF 61 seal.

B. Mark plastic pipe with date of extrusion, nominal size, class, manufacturer and all markings required in accordance with ASTM and AWWA standards.


A. Protect from sunlight, scoring, and distortion.

B. Do not allow surface temperatures to exceed 120 degrees Fahrenheit.

C. Deliver, offload, handle, and store pipe in accordance with manufacturer’s or pipe supplier’s recommendations and best practices provided by AWWA M23 and AWWA C605, including compliance with minimum recommended bending radius and maximum safe pulling forces for each specific pipe.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PIPE

A. General: 1. Extruding and molding material: Virgin material containing no scrap, regrind, or

rework material except where permitted in the referenced standards. 2. In accordance with AWWA C900 and AWWA C905. 3. Made from a PVC compound conforming to cell classification 12454 in

accordance with ASTM D1784. 4. Marked verifying suitability for potable water service in accordance with NSF 61.

B. Pipe: 1. Bell and spigot:

a. Pipe with integral bell. b. Pressure Class as scheduled in Section 15052 - Common Work Results

for General Piping with a minimum DR of 11. c. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

1) Diamond Plastics Corp. 2) CertainTeed. 3) North American Pipe Corp.


2.02 FITTINGS

A. Material: 1. PVC fittings shall be sized for the dimensions of the pipe being used and in

accordance with AWWA C907 and molded in one piece. 2. Minimum DR as scheduled in Section 15052 – Common Work Results for

General Piping.

B. Equal to or greater pressure rating than the pipe.

2.03 JOINTS

A. Bell and spigot joints: 1. Push-on or mechanical joint type as identified in the Piping Schedule in

Section 15052 - Common Work Results for General Piping. 2. Gasketed joint assembly: Meet or exceed the requirements in accordance with

ASTM D3139. 3. Factory installed gaskets: Neoprene in accordance with ASTM F477. 4. Joint restraint at fittings:

a. Concrete thrust blocks: 1) Install thrust blocks at all changes in pipe diameter and at all fittings. 2) Design thrust blocks for both test and peak operating pressures.

b. Push-on joint restraint harnesses: 1) Manufacturers: One of the following or approved equal:

a) EBAA Iron, Inc.: (1) For pipes 4 to 12-inch: Series 1500. (2) For pipes 14 to 48-inch: Series 2800.

b) Star Pipe Products, Series 4100P. c) Sigma Corp., PV-Lok Model PWP.

2) Materials: a) Restraint and backup rings: Ductile iron in accordance with

ASTM A536. b) Wedge and wedge actuating components: Ductile iron in

accordance with ASTM A536. c) Tie rods: Low alloy steel in accordance with AWWA C111.

3) Coatings: a) Provide manufacturer applied coating system. b) Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

(1) EBAA Iron Inc., Mega-Bond. (2) Star Pipe Products, Star-Bond. (3) Sigma Corp., CorrsafeTM Electro-deposition coating.

4) Consist of a backup ring behind the PVC bell and a restraint ring consisting of multiple gripping wedges connected with number and type of tie rods as recommended by the manufacturer.

5) Allow post assembly angular deflection that is a minimum of 50 percent of the angular deflection allowed by the push-on joint.

6) Pressure rating equal to or greater than that of the pipe on which it is being used and a minimum safety factor of 2:1 for all sizes.



A. Bell and spigot piping: 1. Hydrostatic proof testing in accordance with AWWA C900: Test pipe and

integral bell to withstand, without failure, 2 times the pressure class of the pipe for a minimum of 5 seconds.

2. Hydrostatic proof testing in accordance with AWWA C905: Test pipe and integral bell to withstand, without failure, 2 times the pressure class of the pipe for a minimum of 5 seconds.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. General: 1. Install piping in accordance with ASTM F645, AWWA C605, the Appendix of

AWWA C900 and AWWA C905 and manufacturer's or pipe supplier’s published installation instructions.

2. For open cut installations, install underground warning tape as specified in Section 15076 - Pipe Identification.

3. Install pipe with tracer wire as specified in Section 15076 - Pipe Identification.


A. Leakage test for piping:

1. Subject to visible leak test and pressure test with maximum leakage allowance, as specified in Section 15956 - Piping Systems Testing.

2. Pressure test with maximum leakage allowance: a. Perform test after placing sufficient backfill. b. In areas requiring immediate backfill, test prior to placement of permanent

surfacing. c. Test pressure: As specified in the Piping Schedule in Section 15052 -

Common Work Results for General Piping. d. Maximum leakage allowance for bell and spigot pipe is as follows, where

the value for leakage is in gallons per 50 joints per hour.

Acceptable Leakage Limits for AWWA C900 and C905 Bell and Spigot Pipe (gallons per 50 joints per hour)

Test Pressure

(psi)

Nominal Pipe Size (inches)

4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 24

50 0.19 0.29 0.38 0.48 0.57 0.67 0.76 0.86 0.96 1.15

75 0.23 0.35 0.47 0.59 0.70 0.82 0.94 1.05 1.17 1.40

100 0.27 0.41 0.54 0.68 0.81 0.95 1.08 1.22 1.35 1.62

125 0.3 0.45 0.6 0.76 0.91 1.06 1.21 1.36 1.51 1.81

150 0.33 0.50 0.66 0.83 0.99 1.16 1.32 1.49 1.66 1.99

175 0.36 0.54 0.72 0.89 1.07 1.25 1.43 1.61 1.79 2.15


Acceptable Leakage Limits for AWWA C900 and C905 Bell and Spigot Pipe (gallons per 50 joints per hour)

Test Pressure

(psi)

Nominal Pipe Size (inches)

4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 24

200 0.38 0.57 0.76 0.96 1.15 1.34 1.53 1.72 1.91 2.29

225 0.41 0.61 0.81 1.01 1.22 1.42 1.62 1.82 2.03 2.43

250 0.43 0.64 0.85 1.07 1.28 1.50 1.71 1.92 2.14 2.56

275 0.45 0.67 0.90 1.12 1.34 1.57 1.79 2.02 2.24 2.69

300 0.47 0.70 0.94 1.17 1.40 1.64 1.87 2.11 2.34 2.81

END OF SECTION

Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe: Schedule Type 15249-1 11487A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/OR/Clean Water Services/11487A10/Specifications/15249 (Bidset) April 2021 - BID

SECTION 15249

POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE: SCHEDULE TYPE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: Schedule type PVC pipe and fittings.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. D1784 - Standard Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)

Compounds and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds. 2. D1785 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe,

Schedules 40, 80 and 120. 3. D2466 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe

Fittings, Schedule 40. 4. D2467 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe

Fittings, Schedule 80. 5. D2564 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride)

(PVC) Plastic Piping Systems. 6. D2855 - Standard Practice for the Two-Step (Primer and Solvent Cement)

Method of Joining Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) or Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Pipe and Piping Components with Tapered Sockets.

7. F645 - Standard Guide for Selection, Design and Installation of Thermoplastic Water-Pressure Piping Systems.

B. NSF International (NSF): 1. 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects.

1.03 SUBMITTALS




A. Protect from sunlight, scoring, and distortion.

B. Do not allow surface temperatures to exceed 120 degrees Fahrenheit.

C. Store and handle as recommended by manufacturer in published instructions.


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Extruding and molding material: Virgin material containing no scrap, regrind, or rework material except where permitted in the referenced standards. 1. Pipe: Designation PVC 1120 in accordance with ASTM D1785 and

appendices: a. Extruded from Type I, Grade 1, Class 12454 material in accordance with

ASTM D1784. b. Schedule 80 unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or specified in

the Piping Schedule in Section 15052 - Common Work Results for General Piping.

2. Fittings: In accordance with ASTM D2467. a. Same material as the pipe and of equal or greater pressure rating. b. Supplied by pipe manufacturer. c. Unions 2-1/2 inches and smaller:

1) Use socket end screwed unions. d. Unions 3 inches and larger:

1) Use socket flanges with 1/8-inch full-face soft EPDM gasket. 3. Solvent cement:

a. In accordance with ASTM D2564. b. Manufacturers: The following or equal:

1) IPS Corp. c. Certified by the manufacturer for the service of the pipe. d. In potable water applications: Provide solvent cement listed by NSF for

potable water applications. e. Primer: As recommended by the solvent cement manufacturer.


A. Meets or exceeds all quality assurance test requirements stated in ASTM D1785.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install piping in accordance with ASTM F645, or manufacturer's published instructions for installation of piping, as applicable.

B. Provide molded transition fittings for transitions from plastic to metal pipe. 1. Do not thread pipe.

C. Locate unions where indicated on the Drawings, and elsewhere where required for adequate access and assembly of the piping system.

D. Provide serrated nipples for transition from pipe to rubber hose.

E. Solvent weld joints in accordance with ASTM D2855.



A. Test pipe as specified in Section 15052 - Common Work Results for General Piping and Section 15956 - Piping Systems Testing.

END OF SECTION

Steel Pipe: Exposed - Plant 15278-1 11487A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/OR/Clean Water Services/11487A10/Specifications/15278 (Bidset) April 2021 - BID

SECTION 15278

STEEL PIPE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: Steel piping, joints, fittings, and fabricated steel piping fittings and specials.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO): 1. Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges.

B. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): 1. B16.1 - Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 25, 125, and

250. 2. B16.3 - Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: Classes 150 and 300. 3. B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings. 4. B16.9 - Factory-Made Wrought Buttwelding Fittings. 5. B16.12 - Cast Iron Threaded Drainage Fittings.

C. American Water Works Association (AWWA): 1. C200 - Steel Water Pipe 6 Inches and Larger. 2. C205 - Cement-Mortar Protective Lining and Coating for Steel Water Pipe: 4

inches and Larger-Shop Applied. 3. C206 - Field Welding of Steel Water Pipe. 4. C207 - Standard for Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service-Sizes 4 inches

Through 144 inches. 5. C208 - Standard for Dimensions for Fabricated Steel Water Pipe Fittings. 6. C606 - Standard for Grooved and Shouldered Joints. 7. M11 - Steel Pipe: A Guide for Design and Installation.

D. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. A47 - Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Casting. 2. A53 - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-

Coated, Welded and Seamless. 3. A105 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings for Piping

Applications. 4. A106 - Standard Specification for Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High-

Temperature Service. 5. A153 - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel

Hardware. 6. A183 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Track Bolts and Nuts. 7. A536 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings. 8. D297 - Standard Test Methods for Rubber Products-Chemical Analysis. 9. D395 - Standard Test Methods for Rubber Property-Compression Set. 10. D412 - Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic

Elastomers-Tension.


11. D471 - Standard Test Methods for Rubber Property-Effect of Liquids. 12. D573 - Standard Test Methods for Rubber -Deterioration in an Air Oven. 13. D2000 - Standard Classification System for Rubber Products in Automotive

Applications. 14. D2240 - Standard Test Method for Rubber Property-Durometer Hardness. 15. E165 - Standard Practice for Liquid Penetrant Testing for General Industry.


A. Design requirements: 1. Design criteria for pipe and pipe fittings: In accordance with AWWA M11 with

the following modifications: a. Wall thickness: Thicker of the thickness specified in Section 15052 -

Common Work Results for General Piping Pipe Schedule, and the following thickness: 1) For pipes smaller than 12 inches in diameter: Minimum 1/4 inch. 2) For pipes 12 inches and larger in diameter: Minimum 3/8 inch.

b. Inside diameter of unlined pipe: Nominal. c. Inside diameter of lined pipe: As measured from face to face of liner, but

not less than nominal. d. Deflection of underground pipe inside diameter: Maximum 2 percent

under trench load of H-20 live load in accordance with AASHTO specifications.

e. Working stress of steel: Maximum 50 percent of yield stress. f. Contractor shall develop and submit calculations to determine the steel

pipe and fitting wall thickness and design requirements according to the requirements of this specification.

1.04 SUBMITTALS



C. Shop drawings: 1. Details of fittings and specials showing thickness and dimensions of plates. 2. Details of welds and materials. 3. Listing of proposed services and locations for use of grooved joint type piping. 4. Tabulated layout schedules for cement-mortar lined and coated steel pipe. 5. Grooved joint piping fittings, gaskets, and couplings. 6. Grooving of pipe and fittings.

D. Calculations: 1. Submit calculations prepared and stamped by a professional engineer

licensed in the State of Oregon. The calculations shall be based on the requirements defined in this Section.

2. Design calculations: Wall thicknesses for external loading, special loading, internal pressure, and other necessary design cases.

E. Certificates of Compliance: Cement-mortar lined and coated steel pipe.

F. Mill certificates.


G. Test reports: Rubber gaskets.


A. Applicable standards: 1. Steel pipe larger than 12 inches diameter shall conform to the following

standards, as complemented and modified in this Section: a. Steel pipe: AWWA C200. b. Fittings and specials: AWWA C208. c. Reinforcement of fittings and specials: AWWA M11.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Steel pipe: 1. Type, pipe 6 inches and smaller: ASTM A53, black or galvanized, seamless or

straight seam electric resistance welded. Minimum Schedule 40. 2. Type, from 6 to 12 inches: ASTM A53, black or galvanized pipe, seamless or

straight seam electric resistance welded. Minimum Schedule 20. 3. Type, larger than 12 inches: AWWA C200, without butt strap, riveted, or

swaged joints; wall thickness as specified.

B. Steel pipe fittings: 1. Screwed fittings:

a. Malleable iron: ASME B16.3, 150 pounds; galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153 where used with galvanized pipe.

b. Cast iron drainage: ASME B16.12, galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153 where used with galvanized pipe.

2. Flanged fittings: a. Type for 12-inch and smaller pipe: ASME B16.1, cast iron or ductile iron,

125 pounds; or ASME B16.5, steel, 150 pounds, galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153 where used with galvanized pipe.

b. Type for larger than 12-inch pipe: ASME B16.5, steel, 150 pounds; galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153 where used with galvanized pipe; or AWWA C207 and AWWA C208, fabricated from flanges and steel pipe, respectively.

c. Companion flanges for 4 inches and smaller pipe: ASME B16.1, cast iron or ductile iron, 125 pounds; ASME B16.5, steel, 150 pounds, slip-on or welding neck; or ammonia type for use on chlorine liquid or gas piping.

d. Companion flanges for larger than 4 inch to and including 12-inch pipe: ASME B16.5, slip-on or welding neck type.

e. Companion flanges for larger than 12-inch pipe: ASME B16.5, steel, 150 pounds; galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153 where used with galvanized pipe; or AWWA C207, steel plate or raised hub type.

f. Weld flanges to pipe or fittings before applying lining. g. Machine flanges or provide tapered filler for changes in grade or to slope

lines for drainage. h. Flange bolts: As specified in Section 15052 - Common Work Results for

General Piping. i. Gaskets: As specified in Section 15052 - Common Work Results for

General Piping.


3. Welding fittings: a. Welding fittings for piping 8 inches and less in nominal diameter: Butt-

welding fittings in accordance with ASME B16.9, standard wall, or standard weight.

b. Welding fittings for piping larger than 8 inches in nominal diameter: Butt-welding fittings in accordance with ASME B16.9, or, at the option of the Contractor, made up out of sections of pipe welded together, except where smooth bends are indicated for air lines.

c. Fittings made up of sections of pipe welded together shall be made of pipe of at least the same wall thickness as the pipe with which used, and bends shall be miter bends, fabricated in accordance with AWWA C208 and as supplemented by AWWA M11. Welding of these made-up fittings shall be in accordance with AWWA C206. 1) Design and fabricate outlets and 4 branch fittings in accordance with

AWWA M11. 2) Bends may be welded to adjacent pipe sections.

a) Bends shall be manufactured of the following number of pieces: (1) Bends from 0 to 30 degrees angle, 2 pieces. (2) Bends from 30 to 45 degrees angle, 3 pieces. (3) Bends from 45 to 67-1/2 degrees angle, 4 pieces. (4) Bends from 67-1/2 to 90 degrees angle, 5 pieces.

C. Steel pipe lining and coating. 1. General:

a. Except where otherwise specified in the Specifications or indicated on the Drawings, lining and coating for steel pipe shall be as specified in 15052 - Common Work Results for General Piping.

b. Refer to specification 09997 - Pipeline Coatings and Linings for lining and coating requirements.

D. Fabricated steel piping fittings and specials: 1. General: Specified herein are the design and fabrication of fabricated steel

piping fittings and specials, which include elbows, branches, nozzles, manifolds, headers, heads, collars, stiffeners, reinforcements, and other steel fabrications relating to steel piping, but shall not include steel pipe.

2. Design: a. Contractor shall design and detail fittings and specials.

1) Design: In accordance with the recommended procedures in AWWA Manual M11, as complemented and modified in this Section.

2) Nozzles: Reinforced in accordance with recommended practice in AWWA M11, Steel Pipe Manual.

3) Design reinforcing for fittings and specials for the specified test pressure.

4) Fittings shall conform in dimension to AWWA C208, complemented with the provisions specified in this Section.

5) The working stress for steel used for fabrication of pipe shall not exceed 50 percent of the yield stress.

b. The thickness of pipe, large elbows, and headers, except header nozzles, shall be the thicker of: 1) The thickness designed in accordance with the design methods

specified in this Section.


2) The thickness as specified or as required by the Contractor’s calculations.

c. Elbows shall be of the number of pieces as specified in this Section, and thickness of material shall conform to thickness of pipe or manifold shells specified.

d. Ends of fittings to be welded to pipe shall be beveled for welding. 3. Fabrication:

a. Shop fabricate steel piping fittings and specials in units as long as practicable for safe hauling and installation. Minimize number of field welds.

b. Fabricate fittings and specials to uniform lengths with proper end clearance for the specified types of joint or attachment.

c. Fabricate fittings and specials to allow field assembly without cutting or special work.

d. Where specified in the Piping Schedule in Section 15052 - Common Work Results for General Piping or indicated on the Drawings, the inside of fabricated steel manifolds and other fittings and specials shall receive a cement-mortar lining in accordance with AWWA C205. 1) Reinforce lining for piping 24 inches in diameter and larger with wire

fabric. e. Do not weld flanges to nozzles until the nozzles and reinforcements are

completely welded to the header. 1) Accurately space and align flanges so that when connections have

been made there will be no stress on the header, piping, or equipment. Properly locate and align equipment.

4. Dished heads: a. Dished heads on 84 inch diameter and smaller manifolds: 1 piece

(seamless) spherically dished (torispherical) heads. 1) Larger heads may be seamed.

b. Dish radius: Same dimension as the outside diameter of the head measured at skirt.

c. Skirt face length: Not less than 3 inches. d. Design heads in accordance with recommended practice in AWWA M11,

Steel Pipe Manual. 5. Testing: No shop testing will be required for manifolds or piping connected

thereto.

E. AWWA C200 steel pipe and fittings design and fabrication: 1. General:

a. Applicable standards: AWWA C200 steel pipe shall conform to the standards specified in General of this Section.

b. Identification marks: Provide identification marks in accordance with AWWA C200. These marks shall be stenciled or otherwise shown at the top of the piping items exterior, including the following information: 1) Name or trademark of the manufacturer. 2) Date of manufacture of the item. 3) Internal diameter in inches. 4) Number of the item, sequential from initial to end station.

c. Diameter designation: The pipe diameter specified in the Specifications and indicated on the Drawings shall be the clear inside diameter after application of the cement-mortar lining with a tolerance of plus 0 inch and minus 1/4 inch.


2. Design: a. Pipe and fittings shall be designed by Contractor. b. Design: In accordance with the recommended procedures in AWWA

Manual M11, as complemented and modified in this Section. c. Thicknesses of pipe, fittings and specials shall be the thicker of:

1) The thickness designed in accordance with the design methods specified in this Section

2) The thickness as specified here or in Section 15052 - Common Work Results for General Piping Pipe Schedule.

d. The working stress for steel used for fabrication of pipe shall not exceed 50 percent of the yield stress.

e. Break longitudinal and girth seams for straight seam pipe shall be no greater in number than would be required for the fabrication of pipe with 96-inch by 120-inch steel plates. 1) Break longitudinal seams at the girth seams.

f. Calculate earth loads using the following formula:

W = 192 x H x B

wherein the various terms shall have the following meaning:

W: Earth load, pounds per linear foot of pipe. H: Height of fill over the pipe, feet. B: Outside diameter of the pipe, feet. x: Mathematical symbol for multiplication.

g. Add AASHTO's H-20 loading to earth loads. h. Design pipe, fittings and specials for a deflection, under external loads,

not to exceed 2 percent of the diameter. 1) Stiffness computations shall not consider the effect of the cement-

mortar lining and coating. 2) Calculate deflection using the Spangler formula and the following

values: a) Bedding constant K = 0.100. b) Modulus of soil reaction E' = 700 pounds per square inch. c) Deflection lag constant D1 = 1.00.

i. Where piping is designated to be flanged or welded in order to restrain thrust, the design of the cylinder and flange or welded joint shall take into account the effect of stresses caused by thrust loads.

j. Steel cylinder shall be subject to no more than the lesser of 15,000 pounds per square inch or 50 percent of the steel yield stress.

3. Materials: a. Coatings and linings: As required in Section 15052 - Common Work

Results for General Piping and Section 09997 - Pipeline Coatings and Linings.

b. Gaskets shall be as specified in Section 15052 - Common Work Results for General Piping and meet the following requirements: 1) Minimum tensile strength, tested in accordance with ASTM D 412,

between 2,000 and 2,700 pounds per square inch. 2) Minimum elongation, tested in accordance with ASTM D 412,

between 350 and 400 percent.


3) Shore A durometer hardness, tested in accordance with ASTM D 2240, between 50 and 65.

4) Specific gravity, tested in accordance with ASTM D 297, between 0.90 and 1.50.

5) Maximum compression set, tested in accordance with Method B of ASTM D 395, 20 percent.

6) Maximum tension strength loss, tested in accordance with ASTM D 573 at 96 hours, 70 degrees Centigrade, in air, 20 percent.

7) Maximum elongation loss, tested in accordance with ASTM D 573 at 96 hours, 70 degrees Centigrade, in air, 20 percent.

8) Maximum absorption, tested in accordance with ASTM D 471 at 48 hours, 70 degrees Centigrade, in air, 5 percent.

4. Joints and connections: a. Joints:

1) Except as otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings, provide lap welded or bell and spigot type joints with rubber gaskets for pipelines 54 inches and smaller.

2) Butt-strap joints shall be used only where required for closures or where indicated on the Drawings.

3) The joints furnished shall have the same or higher-pressure rating as the abutting pipe.

b. Connections: 1) Connections to existing systems shall be made using a flange

isolation joint. 2) If an existing pipeline or facility does not include a flange at or near

the connection point: a) An isolation flange shall be placed in the first length of pipe. b) A butt-strap joint shall be used to connect the first length of pipe

to the existing pipeline. c. Bell and spigot joint rings: Rolled Carnegie shape M-3516. d. Lap welded joints:

1) Double fillet weld lap welded joints shall be welded on the inside and outside of the joint.

2) Lap joints prepared for electric field welding shall be in accordance with AWWA C 206.

3) Joint forming: a) Joint geometry and joint field weld will be such that no part of

any field weld will be closer than 1 inch to the nearest point of tangency to the bell radius.

b) Bell ends shall be formed by and expanding press or by being moved axially over a die in such a manner as to stretch the steel plate beyond its elastic limit to form a truly round bell of suitable diameter and shape.

4) Faying surfaces of the bell and spigot shall be essentially parallel, but in no case shall the bell slope vary more than 2 degrees from the longitudinal axis of the pipe.

e. Butt-strap joints: Butt-strap joints where used or required, shall be: 1) A minimum of 10 inches wide. 2) The same thickness as the pipe wall. 3) Provide for a minimum of 2-inch lap at each pipe joint. 4) Double fillet weld each side of joint on the inside and outside of the

joint.


f. Flanges: AWWA C207, Class D, steel ring, and as follows: 1) Match pipe flanges to the valve flanges:

a) At flanged joints connecting to valves, provide a steel pipe section without rod reinforcing and not less than 24 inches in length.

b) Apply cement-mortar lining and coating to the steel pipe section. 2) Flange bolts: As specified in Section 15052 - Common Work Results

for General Piping. 3) Gaskets: As specified in Section 15052 - Common Work Results for

General Piping. 5. Fabrication:

a. Shop coat of primer: Flanges and portions of pipe not covered with cement-mortar shall be given a shop coating of primer.

b. Bend radii of fittings: Not less than 1.5 times the nominal diameter in accordance with AWWA C208 unless otherwise noted on the Drawings.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Joints: 1. Steel pipe joints shall be screwed, welded, flanged, grooved, or made with

flexible joints. The type of joint for piping is specified in the Piping Schedule in Section 15052 - Common Work Results for General Piping.

2. In addition to the joints indicated on the Drawings, provide unions, flexible couplings, flanged joints, and other types of joints or means necessary to allow ready assembly and disassembly of the piping.

3. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or specified in the Piping Schedule in Section 15052 - Common Work Results for General Piping, pipe joints shall be as follows: a. Pipe smaller than 2 inches in nominal diameter shall have screwed joints

or flexible couplings. b. Pipe 2 inches to 4 inches in nominal diameter shall have screwed joints,

flanged joints, welded joints, or joints made with flexible couplings. c. Pipe larger than 4 inches in nominal diameter shall have flanged joints,

welded joints, or joints made with flexible couplings.

B. Screwed joints: 1. Perform threading with clean, sharp dies.

a. Wavy, rough, or otherwise defective pipe threads are not acceptable. 2. Make screwed joints tight and clean with an application of Teflon™ tape or

approved paste compound applied to the male threads only, except as follows: a. Make up liquid and dry chlorine lines, and liquefied petroleum gas lines,

with litharge and glycerin. 3. Provide railroad type unions with bronze-to-iron seat, galvanized where used

with galvanized pipe. a. Flanged joints may be used instead of unions.

C. Flanged joints: 1. In flanged joints, flanges shall come together at the proper orientation with no

air gaps between the flanges after the gaskets are in place.


2. Attach slip-on flanges to pipe by 2 fillet welds, in accordance with AWWA C207.

3. Secure welding neck flanges with full penetration butt welds without backing rings. a. After welding in place, the faces of flanges shall be perpendicular to the

axis of the pipe, or, in the case of fittings, at the proper angle to each other, and bolt holes shall be in proper alignment.

D. Welded joints: 1. Welded joints shall be electric welded in accordance with AWWA C206. 2. Welders shall be qualified pursuant to the provisions of AWWA C206.

a. Welders' testing shall be at the Contractor's expense, including cost of test nipples, welding rods, and equipment.

3. Do not weld galvanized pipe.


A. Testing: Fabricated steel manifolds shall be field tested with the pipe to which they connect.

B. Weld testing: Liquid penetrant testing: As soon as possible after welding of pipeline joints, all fillet welds shall be tested by the liquid penetrant inspection procedure in accordance with ASTM E165 under Method “B” and “Leak Testing”. All defects shall be chipped out, rebelled and retested. Upon retest, the repaired area shall show no leaks or other defects.

END OF SECTION

Plumbing Systems 15400-1 11487A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/OR/Clean Water Services/11487A10/Specifications/15400 (Bidset) April 2021 - BID

SECTION 15400

PLUMBING SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: Requirements for materials and installation of plumbing systems.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American Concrete Institute (ACI).

B. American Gas Association (AGA).

C. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. Z21.15 - Manually operated gas valves for appliances, appliance connector

valves and hose end valves.

D. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME). 1. B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings: Classes 150 and 300. 2. B16.12 - Cast Iron Threaded Drainage Fittings.

E. American Society of Sanitary Engineering (ASSE): 1. 1070 - Performance Requirements for Water Temperature Limiting Devices

F. American Water Works Association (AWWA): 1. C700 - Standard for Cold-Water Meters -- Displacement Type, Bronze Main

Case. 2. C702 - Standard for Cold-Water Meters -- Compound Type.

G. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).

H. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. A48 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings. 2. A53 - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-

Coated, Welded and Seamless. 3. A74 - Standard Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. 4. A518 - Standard Specification for Corrosion-Resistant High-Silicon Iron

Castings. 5. A615 - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for

Concrete Reinforcement. 6. A861 - Standard Specification for High-Silicon Iron Pipe and Fittings. 7. A888 - Standard Specification for Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for

Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications. 8. B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal. 9. B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube. 10. B813 - Standard Specification for Liquid and Paste Fluxes for Soldering of

Copper and Copper Alloy Tube.


11. B823 - Standard Specification for Materials for Copper Base Powder Metallurgy (PM) Structural Parts.

12. C552 - Standard Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation. 13. C564 - Standard Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and

Fittings. 14. D635 - Standard Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of

Burning of Plastics in a Horizontal Position. 15. D1784 - Standard Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)

Compounds and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride (CPVC) Compounds. 16. D1785 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe,

Schedules 40, 80, and 120. 17. D2466 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe

Fittings, Schedule 40. 18. D2467 - Standard Specification for Poly9VINYL Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe

Fittings, Schedule 80. 19. D2564 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly9Vinyl Chloride)

(PVC) Plastic Piping Systems. 20. D2665 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain,

Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings. 21. D2843 - Standard Test Method for Density of Smoke from the Burning or

Decomposition of Plastics. 22. D2863 - Standard Test Method for Measuring the Minimum Oxygen

Concentration to Support Candle-Like Combustion of Plastics (Oxygen Index). 23. D4101 - Standard Classification System and Basis for Specification for

Polypropylene Injection and Extrusion Materials. 24. F1412 - Standard Specification for Polyolefin Pipe and Fittings for Corrosive

Waste Drainage Systems.

I. International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (IAPMO): 1. IS 03 - Copper plumbing Tube Pipe and Fittings.

J. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 1. 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 V Maximum).

K. Outside diameter (O.D.)

L. Plumbing and Drainage Institute (PDI): 1. WH 201 - Water Hammer Arresters Standard.

M. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 1. 94 - Standard for Tests for Flammability of Plastic Materials for Parts in

Devices and Appliances.

N. United States Environment Protection Agency (EPA): Water Sense.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. NEMA: Type 4X enclosure in accordance with NEMA 250.

1.04 REQUIREMENTS

A. Include in plumbing system: 1. Fixtures.


2. Drain, vent, and water piping. 3. Connections and cleanouts. 4. Fittings and accessories. 5. Parts and pieces necessary to provide a complete system. 6. Testing for complete and functional system.

B. Except in typical details, piping is indicated on the Drawings in diagrammatic form. Sizes and locations are indicated on the Drawings; however, not every offset and fitting, nor every structural difficulty that will be encountered in the Work has been indicated.

C. Modify piping alignment indicated on the Drawings as necessary to avoid structural or mechanical obstructions and to clear the work of other trades.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit as specified in Section 01330- Submittal Procedures.

B. Shop drawings, as applicable: 1. Materials. 2. Coatings and linings. 3. Rough-in drawings. 4. Proposed cutting and patching.

C. Warranties.


A. Work to be in accordance with the plumbing code specified in Section 01410 - Regulatory Requirements, and in accordance with applicable laws and regulations, including requirements for accessibility, energy, water conservation, and health related requirements for water fountains and coolers. 1. Where provisions specified in these Specifications or indicated on the

Drawings are in conflict with the plumbing code specified in Section 01410 - Regulatory Requirements or laws or regulations, the Code and the laws or regulations take precedence over the specified provisions and design.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL


2.02 PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE PRODUCTS

A. Cleanouts: 1. Floor cleanouts:

a. Cast-iron ferrule, countersunk plug, gastight and watertight seal. b. Adjustable cleanout head extension. c. Scoriated nickel-bronze top, and securing screw.

1) Heavy-duty top suitable for heavy traffic conditions in unfinished floor areas.


d. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1) Josam Co., 56670 for finished floors, 55000 for unfinished floors. 2) Zurn Ind., Inc., ZN-1400 for finished floors, ZN-1400-HD for

unfinished floors. 2. Yard cleanouts in asphalt or ground areas:

a. As specified for floor cleanouts in unfinished floor areas.

B. Floor drains: 1. Adjustable strainer head, floor level grate. 2. PVC solvent welded body. 3. Bottom outlet and stainless steel top. 4. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

a. Floor drain: 1) Josam Co., Series FD-300-J. 2) Zurn Ind., Inc., Model EZ.

C. Heavy-duty floor drains with sedimentation bucket: 1. 12 inches square with coated cast-iron body, grate, and slotted sediment

bucket. 2. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

a. Josam Co., 37810. b. Zurn Ind., Inc., Z-610.

D. Hose bib stations: 1. A 1.5-inch hose bib shall be a 1.5-inch single supply wall mounted hose bib

station complete as described below and as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Refer to detail for requirements for hose rack. 3. The hose shall be 50 feet of 1.5-inch commercial/industrial grade rubber hose. 4. The hose nozzle shall be a 7-pattern select-a-spray with vinyl grip. Unit shall

include a hold-open clip for continuous spraying, a rust resistant stainless steel spring, and a lifetime leak proof seal.

5. Manufacturers: The follow or equal: a. Flexon Pro Series. b. Gilmore Group.

2.03 INSTALLATION

A. Plumbing and drainage products: 1. Provide cleanouts of the same size as the size of the waste and drain piping

on which cleanouts are installed, up to 4 inches in diameter. Provide cleanouts 4 inches in diameter on waste and drain piping larger than 4 inches diameter.

2. Provide traps at all fixture and equipment connections to the sanitary drainage system. Install traps as near to the fixtures as possible.

3. Sizes of equipment drains and of floor drains shall be as indicated on the Drawings.

4. When indicated on the Drawings, cut holes in heavy-duty floor drain grate for a drainpipe from equipment or other source.

END OF SECTION

Piping Systems Testing 15956-1 11487A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/OR/Clean Water Services/11487A10/Specifications/15956 (Bidset) April 2021 - BID

SECTION 15956

PIPING SYSTEMS TESTING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: Test requirements for piping systems.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. National Fuel Gas Code (NFGC).

B. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): 1. B31.1 - Power Piping. 2. B31.3 - Process Piping. 3. B31.8 - Gas Transmission and Distribution Piping Systems.

C. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL).

1.03 TESTING REQUIREMENTS

A. General requirements: 1. Testing requirements are stipulated in Laws and Regulations; are included in

the Piping Schedule in Section 15052 - Common Work Results for General Piping; are specified in the specifications covering the various types of piping; and are specified in this Section.

2. Requirements in Laws and Regulations supersede other requirements of Contract Documents, except where requirements of Contract Documents are more stringent, including higher test pressures, longer test times, and lower leakage allowances.

3. Test plumbing piping in accordance with Laws and Regulations, the plumbing code, as specified in Section 01410 - Regulatory Requirements, and UL requirements.

4. Test natural gas or digester gas piping: a. For less than 125 pounds per square inch gauge working pressure, test in

accordance with mechanical code, as specified in Section 01410 - Regulatory Requirements, or the National Fuel Gas Code, whichever is more stringent.

b. For 125 pounds per square inch gauge or greater working pressure, test per ASME B31.3 or ASME B31.8, whichever is more stringent.

5. When testing with water, the specified test pressure is considered to be the pressure at the lowest point of the piping section under test. a. Lower test pressure as necessary (based on elevation) if testing is

performed at higher point of the pipe section.

B. Furnish necessary personnel, materials, and equipment, including bulkheads, restraints, anchors, temporary connections, pumps, water, pressure gauges, and other means and facilities required to perform tests.


C. Water for testing, cleaning, and disinfecting: 1. Water for testing, cleaning, and disinfecting will be provided as specified in

Section 01500 - Temporary Facilities and Controls.

D. Pipes to be tested: Test only those portions of pipes that have been installed as part of this Contract. Test new pipe sections prior to making final connections to existing piping. Furnish and install test plugs, bulkheads, and restraints required to isolate new pipe sections. Do not use existing valves as test plug or bulkhead.

E. Unsuccessful tests: 1. Where tests are not successful, correct defects or remove defective piping and

appurtenances and install piping and appurtenances that comply with the specified requirements.

2. Repeat testing until tests are successful.

F. Test completion: Drain and leave piping clean after successful testing.

G. Test water disposal: Coordinate disposal location of testing water with the Owner and in accordance with requirements of federal, state, county, and city regulations governing disposal of wastes in the location of the Project and disposal site.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Schedule and notification of tests: 1. Submit a list of scheduled piping tests by noon of the working day preceding

the date of the scheduled tests. 2. Notification of readiness to test: Immediately before testing, notify Engineer in

writing of readiness, not just intention, to test piping. 3. Have personnel, materials, and equipment specified in place before submitting

notification of readiness.

1.05 SEQUENCE

A. Clean piping before pressure or leak tests.

B. Test gravity piping underground, including sanitary sewers, for visible leaks before backfilling and compacting.

C. Underground pressure piping may be tested before or after backfilling when not indicated or specified otherwise.

D. Backfill and compact trench, or provide blocking that prevents pipe movement before testing underground piping with a maximum leakage allowance.

E. Test underground piping before encasing piping in concrete or covering piping with slab, structure, or permanent improvement.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 TESTING ALIGNMENT, GRADE, AND DEFLECTION

A. Alignment and grade: 1. Visually inspect the interior of gravity piping with artificial light, reflected light,

or laser beam. 2. Consider inspection complete when no broken or collapsed piping, no open or

poorly made joints, no grade changes that affect the piping capacity, or no other defects are observed.

B. Deflection test: 1. Pull a mandrel through the clean piping section under test. 2. Perform the test not sooner than 30 days after installation and not later than

60 days after installation. 3. Use a 9-rod mandrel with a contact length of not less than the nominal

diameter of the pipe within 1 percent plus or minus. 4. Consider test complete when the mandrel can be pulled through the piping

with reasonable effort by 1 person, without the aid of mechanical equipment.

3.02 AIR TESTING METHOD FOR PRESSURE PIPING

A. Air test piping, indicated with "AM" in the Piping Schedule, with air or another nonflammable or inert gas.

B. Test gas, air, liquefied petroleum gas, liquid chlorine, and chlorine gas piping by the air test method: 1. Test chlorine piping with dry air or nitrogen having a dew point of minus

40 degrees Fahrenheit or less. Supply temporary air dryers as necessary.

C. Test at pressure as specified in Piping Schedule in Section 15052 - Common Work Results for General Piping: 1. Provide temporary pressure relief valve for piping under test:

a. Set at the lesser of 110 percent of the test pressure or 50 pounds per square inch gauge over the test pressure.

2. Air method test pressures shall not exceed 110 percent of the piping maximum allowable working pressure calculated in accordance with the most stringent of ASME B31.1, ASME B31.3, ASE B31.8, or the pipe manufacturer's stated maximum working pressure.

3. Gradually increase test pressure to an initial test pressure equal to the lesser of 1/2 the test pressure or 25 pounds per square inch gauge.

4. Perform initial check of joints and fittings for leakage. 5. Gradually increase test pressure in steps no larger than the initial pressure.

Check for leakage; at each step increase until test pressure reached. 6. At each step in the pressure, examine and test piping being air tested for leaks

with soap solution. 7. Consider examination complete when piping section under test holds the test

pressure for 15 minutes without losses.

3.03 TESTING GRAVITY FLOW PIPING

A. Test gravity flow piping indicated with "GR" in the Piping Schedule, as follows: 1. Unless specified otherwise, subject gravity flow piping to the following tests:


a. Alignment and grade. b. For plastic piping test for deflection. c. Visible leaks and pressure with maximum leakage allowance, except for

storm drains and culverts. 2. Inspect piping for visible leaks before backfilling. 3. Provide temporary restraints when needed to prevent movement of piping. 4. Pressure test piping with maximum leakage allowance after backfilling. 5. With the lower end plugged, fill piping slowly with water while allowing air to

escape from high points. Keep piping full under a slight head for the water at least 24 hours: a. Examine piping for visible leaks. Consider examination complete when no

visible leaks are observed. b. Maintain piping with water, or allow a new water absorption period of

24 hours for the performance of the pressure test with maximum leakage allowance.

c. After successful completion of the test for visible leaks and after the piping has been restrained and backfilled, subject piping to the test pressure for minimum of 4 hours while accurately measuring the volume of water added to maintain the test pressure: 1) Consider the test complete when leakage is equal to or less than the

following maximum leakage allowances: a) For concrete piping with rubber gasket joints: 80 gallons per day

per inch of diameter per mile of piping under test: (1) Advise manufacturer of concrete piping with rubber gasket

joints of more stringent than normal maximum leakage allowance.

b) For vitrified clay piping: 500 gallons per day per inch of diameter per mile of piping under test.

c) For other piping: 80 gallons per day per inch diameter per mile of piping under test.

3.04 TESTING HIGH-HEAD PRESSURE PIPING

A. Test piping for which the specified test pressure in the Piping Schedule is 20 pounds per square inch gauge or greater, by the high head pressure test method, indicated "HH" in the Piping Schedule.

B. General: 1. Test connections, hydrants, valves, blowoffs, and closure pieces with the

piping. 2. Do not use installed valves for shutoff when the specified test pressure

exceeds the valve's maximum allowable seat differential pressure. Provide blinds or other means to isolate test sections.

3. Do not include valves, equipment, or piping specialties in test sections if test pressure exceeds the valve, equipment, or piping specialty safe test pressure allowed by the item's manufacturer.

4. During the performance of the tests, test pressure shall not vary more than plus or minus 5 pounds per square inch gauge with respect to the specified test pressure.

5. Select the limits of testing to sections of piping. Select sections that have the same piping material and test pressure.

6. When test results indicate failure of selected sections, limit tests to piping:


a. Between valves. b. Between a valve and the end of the piping. c. Less than 500 feet long.

7. Test piping for minimum 2 hours for visible leaks test and minimum 2 hours for the pressure test with maximum leakage allowance.

C. Testing procedures: 1. Fill piping section under test slowly with water while venting air:

a. Use potable water for all potable waterlines and where noted on the Piping Schedule.

2. Before pressurizing for the tests, retain water in piping under slight pressure for a water absorption period of minimum 24 hours.

3. Raise pressure to the specified test pressure and inspect piping visually for leaks: a. Consider visible leakage testing complete when no visible leaks are

observed.

D. Pressure test with maximum leakage allowance: 1. Leakage allowance is zero for piping systems using flanged, National Pipe

Thread threaded and welded joints. 2. Pressure test piping after completion of visible leaks test. 3. For piping systems using joint designs other than flanged, threaded, or welded

joints, accurately measure the makeup water necessary to maintain the pressure in the piping section under test during the pressure test period: a. Consider the pressure test to be complete when makeup water added is

less than the allowable leakage and no damage to piping and appurtenances has occurred.

b. Successful completion of the pressure test with maximum leakage allowance shall be achieved when the observed leakage during the test period is equal or less than the allowable leakage and no damage to piping and appurtenances has occurred.

c. When leakage is allowed, calculate the allowable leakage by the following formula: L = S x D x P1/2 x 133,200-1 wherein the terms shall mean: L = Allowable leakage in gallons per hour. S = Length of the test section in feet. D = Nominal diameter of the piping in inches. P = Average observed test pressure in pounds per square inches gauge, at the lowest point of the test section, corrected for elevation of the pressure gauge. x = The multiplication symbol.


3.05 TESTING LOW-HEAD PRESSURE PIPING

A. Test piping for which the specified test pressure is less than 20 pounds per square inch gauge, by the low head pressure test method, indicated "LH" in the Piping Schedule.

B. General: 1. Test pressures shall be as scheduled in Section 15052 - Common Work

Results for General Piping. 2. During the performance of the tests, test pressure shall not vary more than

plus or minus 2 pounds per square inch gauge with respect to the specified test pressure.

3. Test connections, blowoffs, vents, closure pieces, and joints into structures, including existing bell rings and other appurtenances, with the piping.

4. Test piping for minimum 2 hours for visible leaks test and minimum 2 hours for the pressure test with maximum leakage allowance.

C. Visible leaks test: 1. Subject piping under test to specified pressure measured at the lowest end. 2. Fill piping section under test slowly with water while venting air:

a. Use potable water for all potable waterlines and where noted on the Piping Schedule.

3. Before pressurizing for the tests, retain water in piping under slight pressure for the water absorption period of minimum 24 hours.

4. Raise pressure to the specified test pressure and inspect piping visually for leaks. Consider testing complete when no visible leaks are observed.

D. Pressure test with maximum leakage allowance: 1. Pressure test piping after completion of visible leaks test. 2. Accurately measure the makeup water necessary to maintain the pressure in

the piping section under test during the pressure test period: a. Consider the pressure test to be complete when makeup water added is

less than the allowable leakage of 80 gallons per inch of nominal diameter, per mile of piping section under test after 24 hours, and no damage to piping and appurtenances has occurred.

b. Successful completion of the leakage test shall have been achieved when the observed leakage is equal or less than the allowable leakage and no damage to piping and appurtenances has occurred.

E. Optional joint test: 1. When joint testing is allowed by note in the Piping Schedule, the procedure

shall be as follows: a. Joint testing will be allowed only for low head pressure piping. b. Joint testing does not replace and is not in lieu of any testing of the piping

system or trust restraints. 2. Joint testing may be performed with water or air. 3. Joint test piping after completion of backfill and compaction to the top of the

trench. 4. Joint testing with water:

a. Measure test pressure at the invert of the pipe. Apply pressure of 4 feet plus the inside diameter of the pipe in water column within 0.20 feet in water column.


b. Maintain test pressure for 1 minute. c. Base the allowable leakage per joint on 80 gallons per inch nominal

diameter, per mile of piping, per 24 hours equally distributed to the actual number of joints per mile for the type of piping.

d. Consider the pressure test to be complete when makeup water added is less than the allowable leakage.

e. Successful completion of the joint test with water shall have been achieved when the observed leakage is equal or less than the allowable leakage.

5. Joint testing with air: a. Apply test pressure of 3 pounds per square inch gauge with a maximum

variation of plus 0.20 and minus 0.00 pounds per square inch. b. Maintain test pressure for 2 minutes. c. Consider the pressure test to be complete when the test pressure does

not drop below 2.7 pounds per square inch for the duration of the test.

END OF SECTION

Mechanical Equipment Testing 15958-1 11487A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/OR/Clean Water Services/11487A10/Specifications/15958 (Bidset) April 2021 - BID

SECTION 15958

MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT TESTING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: Testing of mechanical equipment and systems.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. S1.4 Specification for Sound Level Meters.

B. Hydraulic Institute (HI).

C. National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST).

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Provide Source Test Plans as specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning.

B. Provide Installation and Functional Testing Plans as specified in Section 01756 - Commissioning.

C. Provide vendor operation and maintenance manual as specified in Section 01782 - Operation and Maintenance Manuals. 1. Include motor rotor bar pass frequencies for motors larger than

500 horsepower.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. Commissioning of equipment as specified in: 1. This Section. 2. Section 01756 - Commissioning. 3. Equipment sections:

a. If testing requirements are not specified, provide Level 1 Tests.

B. Test and prepare piping as specified in Section 15956 - Piping Systems Testing.

C. Operation of related existing equipment: 1. Owner will operate related existing equipment or facilities necessary to

accomplish the testing.


2. Schedule and coordinate testing as required by Section 01756 - Commissioning.

D. Provide necessary test instrumentation that has been calibrated within 1 year from date of test to recognized test standards traceable to the NIST or approved source. 1. Properly calibrated field instrumentation permanently installed as a part of the

Work may be utilized for tests. 2. Prior to testing, provide signed and dated certificates of calibration for test

instrumentation and equipment.

E. Test measurement and result accuracy: 1. Use test instruments with accuracies as recommended in the appropriate

referenced standards. When no accuracy is recommended in the referenced standard, use 1 percent or better accuracy test instruments. a. Improved (lower error tolerance) accuracies specified elsewhere prevail

over this general requirement. 2. Do not adjust results of tests for instrumentation accuracy.

a. Measured values and values directly calculated from measured values shall be the basis for comparing actual equipment performance to specified requirements.

3.02 VARIABLE SPEED EQUIPMENT TESTS

A. Establish performance over the entire speed range and at the average operating condition.

B. Establish performance curves for the following speeds: 1. The speed corresponding to the rated maximum capacity. 2. The speed corresponding to the minimum capacity. 3. The speed corresponding to the average operating conditions.

3.03 PUMP TESTS, ALL LEVELS OF TESTING

A. Test in accordance with the following: 1. Applicable HI Standards. 2. This Section. 3. Equipment sections.

B. Test tolerances: In accordance with appropriate HI Standards, except the following modified tolerances apply: 1. From 0 to plus 5 percent of head at the specified flows rated design point flow. 2. From 0 to plus 5 percent of flow at the rated design point head. 3. No negative tolerance for the efficiency at the specified flows rated design

point. 4. No positive tolerance for vibration limits. Vibration limits and test methods in HI

Standards do not apply, use limits and methods specified in this or other Sections of the Specifications.


3.04 DRIVERS TESTS

A. Test motors as specified in Section 16222 - Low Voltage Motors up to 500 Horsepower.

B. Test other drivers as specified in the equipment section.

3.05 NOISE REQUIREMENTS AND CONTROL

A. Perform noise tests in conjunction with vibration test analysis.

B. Make measurements in relation to reference pressure of 0.0002 microbar.

C. Make measurements of emitted noise levels on sound level meter meeting or exceeding ANSI S1.4, Type II.

D. Set sound level meter to slow response.

E. Unless otherwise specified, maximum free field noise level not to exceed 85 dBA measured as sound pressure level at 3 feet from the equipment.

3.06 PRESSURE TESTING

A. Hydrostatically pressure test pressure containing parts at the appropriate standard or code required level above the equipment component specified design pressure or operating pressure, whichever is higher.

3.07 INSPECTION AND BALANCING

A. Statically and dynamically balance each of the individual rotating parts as required to achieve the required field vibration limits.

B. Statically and dynamically balance the completed equipment rotating assembly and drive shaft components.

C. Furnish copies of material and component inspection reports including balancing reports for equipment system components and for the completed rotating assembly.

D. Critical speed of rotating equipment: 1. Satisfy the following:

a. The first lateral and torsional critical speed of all constant, variable, and 2-speed driven equipment that is considered rigid such as horizontal pumps, all non-clog pumps, blowers, air compressors, and engines shall be at least 25 percent above the equipment’s maximum operating speed.

b. The first lateral and torsional critical speed of all constant, variable, and 2-speed driven equipment that is considered flexible or flexibly mounted such as vertical pumps (vertical in-line and vertical non-clog pumps excluded) and fans shall at least 25 percent below the equipment’s lowest operating speed.

c. The second lateral and torsional critical speed of all constant, variable, and 2-speed equipment that is considered flexible or flexibly mounted shall be at least 25 percent above the maximum operating speed.


E. Vibration tests: 1. Definitions:

a. Root mean square: for pumps operating at speeds greater than 600 rpm, the vibration measurement shall be measured as the overall velocity in inches per second root mean square (RMS).

b. Peak-to-peak displacement: The root means squared average of the peak-to-peak displacement multiplied by the square root of 2.

c. Peak velocity: The root mean squared average of the peak velocity multiplied by the square root of 2.

d. Peak acceleration: The root mean squared average of the peak acceleration multiplied by the square root of 2.

e. High frequency enveloping: A process to extract very low amplitude time domain signals associated with impact or impulse events such as bearing or gear tooth defects and display them in a frequency spectrum of acceleration versus frequency. 1) Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

a) Rockwell Automation, Entek Group, "Spike Energy" analysis. b) CSI, "PeakVue."

f. Rotor bar pass frequency (RBF), for detecting loose rotor bars. g. Low speed equipment: Equipment or components of equipment rotating at

less than 600 revolutions per minute. h. High speed equipment: Equipment and equipment components operating

at or above 600 revolutions per minute. i. Preferred operating range: Manufacturer’s defined preferred operating

range (POR) for the equipment. j. Allowable operating range: Manufacturer’s defined allowable operating

range (AOR) for the equipment. 2. Vibration instrumentation requirements:

a. Analyzers: Use digital type analyzers or data collectors with anti-aliasing filter, 12-bit A/D converter, fast fourier transform circuitry, phase measurement capability, time wave form data storage, high-frequency enveloping capabilities, 35 frequency ranges from 21 to 1,500,000 cycles per minute, adjustable fast fourier transform resolution from 400 to 6,400 lines, storage for up to one hundred 3,200 line frequency spectra, data output port, circuitry for integration of acceleration data to velocity or double integration to displacement. 1) Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

a) Computational Systems Inc., (CSI) Division of Emerson Process Management, Model 2120A, Data Collector/analyzer with applicable analysis software.

b) Pruftechnik, VIBXPERT II. b. Analyzer settings:

1) Units: English, inches/second, mils, and gravitational forces. 2) Fast fourier transform lines: Most equipment 1,600 minimum; for

motors, enough lines as required to distinguish motor current frequencies from rotational frequencies, use 3,200 lines for motors with a nominal speed of 3,600 revolutions per minute; 3,200 lines minimum for High Frequency Enveloping; 1,600 lines minimum for low speed equipment.

3) Sample averages: 4 minimum. 4) Maximum frequency (Fmax): 40 times rotational frequency for rolling

element bearings, 10 times rotational frequency for sleeve bearings.


5) Amplitude range: Auto select but full scale not more than twice the acceptance criteria or the highest peak, whichever is lower.

6) Fast fourier transform windowing: Hanning Window. 7) High pass filter: Minus 3 dB at 120 cycles per minute for high speed

equipment. Minus 3 dB at 21 cycles per minute for low speed equipment.

c. Accelerometers: 1) For low speed equipment: Low frequency, shear mode

accelerometer, 500 millivolts per gravitational force sensitivity, 10 gravitational force range, plus/minus 5 percent frequency response from 0.5 hertz to 850 hertz, magnetic mount. a) Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

(1) Wilcoxon Research, Model 797L. (2) PCB, Model 393C.

2) For high speed equipment: General purpose accelerometer, 100 millivolts per gravitational force sensitivity, 50 gravitational force range, plus/minus 3dB frequency response range from 2 hertz to 12,000 hertz when stud mounted, with magnetic mount holder. a) Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

(1) Wilcoxon Research, Model 793. (2) Entek-IRD Model 943.

3. Accelerometer mounting: a. Use magnetic mounting or stud mounting. b. Mount on bearing housing in location with best available direct path to

bearing and shaft vibration. c. Remove paint and mount transducer on flat metal surface or epoxy mount

for High Frequency Enveloping measurements. 4. Vibration acceptance criteria:

a. Testing of rotating mechanical equipment: Tests are to be performed by an experienced, factory trained, and independent authorized vibration analysis expert.

b. Vibration displacement limits: Unless otherwise specified, equipment operating at speeds 600 revolutions per minute or less is not to exhibit unfiltered readings in excess of following:

Operating Conditions and Application Data

Overall Peak-to-Peak Displacement

Field, mils Factory, mils

Operation within the POR 3.0 4.0

Operation within the AOR 4.0 5.0

Additive value when measurement location is greater than 5 feet above foundation. 2.0 2.0

Additive value for solids-handling pumps 2.0 N/A

Additive value for slurry pumps 2.0 N/A

c. Vibration velocity limits: Unless otherwise specified, equipment operating at speeds greater than 600 revolutions per minute is not to exceed the following peak velocity limits:


HI Pump Type Horsepower

Field Test Factory Test

Overall RMS Overall RMS

Horizontal Solids Handling Centrifugal Pumps

Below 33 hp 0.25 0.28

Horizontal and Vertical In-Line Centrifugal Pumps (other than Non-Clog type)

Vertical Solids Handling Centrifugal Pumps

Between 33 and 100 hp

0.28 0.31

100 hp and above 0.31 0.34

Below 33 hp 0.30 0.33

Vertical Turbine, Mixed Flow, and Propeller Pumps (solids-handling type pumps)

Between 33 and 100 hp

0.32 0.35

100 hp and above 0.34 0.35

Non-Solids Handling Centrifugal Pumps

HI Types BB1, BB2, BB3, BB4, BB5, OH1, OH2, OH3, OH4, OH5, and OH7

Below 268 hp 0.15 0.19

268 hp and above 0.19 0.22

Vertical Turbine, Mixed Flow, and Propeller Pumps HI Types VS1, VS2, VS3, VS4, VS5, VS6, VS7, and VS8

Below 268 hp 0.13

268 hp and above 0.17

Slurry Pumps 0.25 0.30

Motors See Applicable Motor Specification

See Applicable Motor

Specification

Gear Reducers, Radial Not to exceed AGMA 6000-B96 limits

Not to exceed AGMA 6000-

B96 limits

Other Reducers, Axial 0.1 N/A

d. Equipment operation: Measurements are to be obtained with equipment installed and operating within capacity ranges specified and without duplicate equipment running.

e. Additional criteria: 1) No narrow band spectral vibration amplitude components, whether

sub-rotational, higher harmonic, or synchronous multiple of running speed, are to exceed 40 percent of synchronous vibration amplitude component without manufacturer's detailed verification of origin and ultimate effect of such excitation.

2) The presence of discernable vibration amplitude peaks in Test Level 2 or 3 vibration spectra at bearing inner or outer race frequencies shall be cause for rejection of the equipment.


3) For motors, the following shall be cause for rejection: a) Stator eccentricity evidenced by a spectral peak at 2 times

electrical line frequency that is more than 40 percent of the peak at rotational frequency.

b) Rotor eccentricity evidenced by a spectral peak at 2 times electrical line frequency with spectra side bands at the pole pass frequency around the 2 times line frequency peak.

c) Other rotor problems evidenced by pole pass frequency side bands around operating speed harmonic peaks or 2 times line frequency side bands around rotor bar pass frequency or around 2 times the rotor bar pass frequency.

d) Phasing problems evidenced by 1/3 line frequency side band spectral peaks around the 2 times electrical line frequency peak.

4) The presence of peaks in a High Frequency Enveloping spectra plot corresponding to bearing, gear or motor rotor bar frequencies or harmonics of these frequencies shall be cause for rejection of the equipment; since inadequate lubrication of some equipment may be a cause of these peaks, lubrication shall be checked, corrected as necessary and the high frequency envelope analysis repeated.

5. Vibration testing results presentation: a. Provide equipment drawing with location and orientation of measurement

points indicated. b. For each vibration measurement take and include appropriate data on

equipment operating conditions at the time vibration data is taken; for pumps, compressors, and blowers record suction pressure, discharge pressure, and flow.

c. When Vibration Spectra Data required: 1) Plot peak vibration velocity versus frequency in cycles per minute. 2) Label plots showing actual shaft or part rotation frequency, bearing

inner and outer race ball pass frequencies, gear mesh frequencies and relevant equipment excitation frequencies on the plot; label probable cause of vibration peaks whether in excess of specification limits or not.

3) Label plots with equipment identification and operating conditions such as tag number, capacity, pressure, driver horsepower, and point of vibration measurement.

4) Plot motor spectra on a log amplitude scale versus frequency. d. For low speed equipment, plot peak vibration displacement versus

frequency as well as velocity versus frequency. e. Provide name of manufacturer and model number of the vibration

instrumentation used, including analyzer and accelerometer used together with mounting type.

3.08 TESTING LEVELS

A. Level 1 Tests: 1. Level 1 General Equipment Performance Test:

a. For equipment, operate, rotate, or otherwise functionally test for 15 minutes minimum after components reach normal operating temperatures.

b. Operate at rated design load conditions.


c. Confirm that equipment is properly assembled, equipment moves or rotates in the proper direction, shafting, drive elements, and bearings are installed and lubricated in accordance with proper tolerances, and that no unusual power consumption, lubrication temperatures, bearing temperatures, or other conditions are observed.

2. Level 1 Pump Performance Test: a. Measure flow and head while operating at or near the rated condition; for

factory testing, testing may be at reduced speeds with flow and head corresponding to the rated condition when adjusted for speed using the appropriate affinity laws.

b. Use of a test driver is permitted for factory tests when actual driver is given a separate test at its point of manufacture as specified in Section 16222 - Low Voltage Motors up to 500 Horsepower or the applicable equipment section. Use actual driver for field tests.

c. Record measured flow, suction pressure, discharge pressure, and make observations on bearing temperatures and noise levels.

3. Level 1 Vibration Test: a. Test requirement:

1) Measure filtered vibration spectra versus frequency in 3 perpendicular planes at each normally accessible bearing housing on the driven equipment, any gears and on the driver; 1 plane of measurement to be parallel to the axis of rotation of the component.

2) Vibration spectra versus frequency shall be in accordance with Vibration Acceptance Criteria.

b. Equipment operating condition: Test at specified maximum speed. 4. Level 1 Noise Test:

a. Measure unfiltered overall A-weighted sound pressure level in dBA at 3 feet horizontally from the surface of the equipment and at a mid-point of the equipment height.

B. Level 2 Tests: 1. Level 2 General Performance Test:

a. For equipment, operate, rotate, or otherwise functionally test for at least 2 hours after components reach normal operating temperatures.

b. Operate at rated design load conditions. c. Confirm that equipment is properly assembled, equipment moves or

rotates in the proper direction, shafting, drive elements, and bearings are installed and lubricated in accordance with proper tolerances, and that no unusual power consumption, lubrication temperatures, bearing temperatures, or other conditions are observed.

2. Level 2 Pump Performance Test: a. Test 2 hours minimum for flow and head at the rated condition; for factory

testing, testing may be at a reduced speeds with flow and head corresponding to the rated condition when adjusted for speed using the appropriate affinity laws.

b. Use of a test driver is permitted for factory tests when actual driver is given a separate test at its point of manufacture as specified in Section 16222 - Low Voltage Motors up to 500 Horsepower. Use actual driver for field tests.

c. Test for flow and head at 2 additional conditions; 1 at 25 percent below the rated flow and 1 at 10 percent above the rated flow.


d. Record measured flow, suction pressure, discharge pressure, and observations on bearing temperatures and noise levels at each condition.

3. Level 2 Vibration Test: a. Test requirement:

1) Measure filtered vibration spectra versus frequency and measure vibration phase in 3 perpendicular planes at each normally accessible bearing housing on the driven equipment, any gears and on the driver; 1 plane of measurement to be parallel to the axis of rotation of the component; measure actual rotational speeds for each vibration spectra measured using photometric or other tachometer input connected directly to the vibration data collector.

2) Vibration spectra versus frequency shall be in accordance with Vibration Acceptance Criteria.

b. Equipment operating condition: Repeat test requirements at design specified maximum speed and at minimum speed for variable speed equipment.

c. Natural frequency test of field installed equipment: 1) Excite the installed equipment and support system in 3 perpendicular

planes, use same planes as operating vibration measurement planes, and determine the as-installed natural resonant frequency of the driven equipment, the driver, gears, and supports.

2) Perform test at each bearing housing, at each support pedestal, and for pumps on the suction and discharge piping.

3) Perform with equipment and attached piping full of intended service or process fluid.

4. Level 2 Noise Test: a. Measure filtered A-weighted overall sound pressure level in dBA for each

of 8 octave band mid-points beginning at 63 hertz measured at 3 feet horizontally from the surface of the equipment at mid-point height of the noise source.

C. Level 3 Tests: 1. Level 3 General Equipment Performance Tests:


b. Operate at rated design load conditions for 1/2 the specified time; operate at each of any other specified conditions for a proportionate share of the remaining test time.

c. Confirm that equipment is properly assembled, equipment rotates in the proper direction, shafting and bearings are installed and lubricated in accordance with proper tolerances, and that no unusual noise, vibration, or temperatures are observed.

d. Take appropriate capacity, power or fuel consumption, torque, revolutions per minute, pressure, and temperature readings using appropriate test instrumentation to confirm equipment meets specified performance requirements at the design rated condition.

e. Bearing temperatures: During maximum speed or capacity performance testing, measure and record the exterior surface temperature of each bearing versus time.

2. Level 3 Pump Performance Test: a. Test 4 hours minimum for flow and head at or near the rated condition; for

factory testing, testing may be at reduced speeds with flow and head


corresponding to the rated condition when adjusted for speed using the appropriate affinity laws.

b. Use of a test driver is permitted for factory tests when actual driver is given a separate test at its point of manufacture as specified in Section 16222 - Low Voltage Motors up to 500 Horsepower. Use actual driver for field tests.

c. Test each specified flow and head condition at the rated speed and test at minimum as well as maximum specified speeds; operate at each test condition for a minimum of 15 minutes; for factory testing, test at other speeds may be omitted if test driver at reduced speeds is used for rated condition testing.

d. Record measured shaft revolutions per minute, flow, suction pressure, discharge pressure; record measured bearing temperatures (bearing housing exterior surface temperatures may be recorded when bearing temperature devices are not required by the equipment section) and record observations on noise levels.

3. Level 3 Vibration Test: a. Requirements: Same as Level 2 vibration test except data taken at each

operating condition tested and with additional requirements below. b. Perform High Frequency Enveloping Analysis for gears and bearings.

1) Measure bearing element vibration directly on each bearing cap in a location close as possible to the bearing load zone that provides a smooth surface and direct path to the bearing to detect bearing defects.

2) Report results in units of acceleration versus frequency in cycles per minute.

c. Perform Time Wave Form analysis for gears, low speed equipment and reciprocating equipment; plot true peak amplitude velocity and displacement versus time and label the period between peaks with the likely cause of the periodic peaks (relate the period to a cause).

d. Plot vibration spectra on 3 different plots; peak displacement versus frequency, peak acceleration versus frequency and peak velocity versus frequency.

4. Level 3 Noise Test: Measure filtered, un-weighted overall sound pressure level in dB at 3 feet horizontally from the surface of the equipment at mid-point height and at 4 locations approximately 90 degrees apart in plain view; report results for each of 8 octave band mid-points beginning at 63 hertz.

D. Level 4 Tests: 1. Level 4 General Equipment Performance Test:


b. Operate at rated design load conditions for 1/2 the specified time; operate at each of any other specified conditions for a proportionate share of the remaining test time.

c. Confirm that equipment is properly assembled, equipment rotates in the proper direction, shafting and bearings are installed and lubricated in accordance with proper tolerances, and that no unusual noise, vibration, or temperatures are observed.

d. Take appropriate capacity, power or fuel consumption, torque, revolutions per minute, pressure and temperature readings, using appropriate test


instrumentation to confirm equipment meets specified performance requirements at the design rated condition.

e. Bearing temperatures: During maximum speed or capacity testing, measure and record the exterior surface temperature of each bearing versus time.

2. Level 4 Pump Performance Test: a. Test 8 hours minimum for flow and head; begin tests at or near the rated

condition; for factory and field-testing, test with furnished motor at full speed.

b. Test each specified flow and head condition at the rated speed and test at minimum as well as maximum specified speeds; operate at each test condition for a minimum of 20 minutes or longer as necessary to measure required performance, vibration, and noise data at each test condition.

c. Record measured shaft revolutions per minute, flow, suction pressure, discharge pressure; record measured bearing temperatures (bearing housing exterior surface temperatures may be recorded when bearing temperature devices not required by the equipment section) and record observations on noise levels.

d. Bearing temperatures: During maximum speed or capacity testing, measure and record the exterior surface temperature of each bearing versus time.

e. Perform efficiency and/or Net Positive Suction Head Required (NPSHr) and/or priming time tests when specified in the equipment section in accordance with the appropriate HI standard and as follows: 1) Perform NPSHr testing at maximum rated design speed, head and

flow with test fluids at ambient conditions; at maximum rated speed, test at 15 percent above rated design flow, and 25 percent below rated design flow.

2) Perform efficiency testing with test fluids at maximum rated speed. 3) Perform priming time testing with test fluids at maximum rated speed.

3. Level 4 Vibration Test: Same as Level 3 vibration test. 4. Level 4 Noise Test: Same as Level 3 Noise Test except with data taken at

each operating condition tested.

END OF SECTION

Common Work Results For Electrical 16050-1 11487A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/OR/Clean Water Services/11487A10/Specifications/16050 (Bidset) April 2021 - BID

SECTION 16050

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: 1. General requirements applicable to all Electrical Work. 2. General requirements for electrical submittals.

B. Related sections: 1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as

binding as if called for by all. 2. This section shall be applicable to all Division 16 Specifications. 3. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to schedule and coordinate the Work of

subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of Contractor’s Work.

C. Interfaces to equipment, instruments, and other components: 1. The Drawings, Specifications, and overall design are based on preliminary

information furnished by various equipment manufacturers which identify a minimum scope of supply from the manufacturers. This information pertains to, but is not limited to, instruments, control devices, electrical equipment, packaged mechanical systems, and control equipment provided with mechanical systems.

2. Provide all material and labor needed to install the actual equipment furnished, and include all costs to add any additional conduit, wiring, terminals, or other electrical hardware to the Work, which may be necessary to make a complete, functional installation based on the actual equipment furnished: a. Make all changes necessary to meet the manufacturer’s wiring

requirements. 3. Submit all such changes and additions to the Engineer for acceptance as

specified in Document 00700. 4. Review the complete set of Drawings and Specifications in order to ensure

that all items related to the electrical power and control systems are completely accounted for. Include any such items that appear on the Drawings or in the Specifications from another discipline in the scope of Work: a. If a conflict between Drawings and Specifications is discovered, refer

conflict to the Engineer as soon as possible for resolution. 5. Loop drawings:

a. Provide all electrical information required in the preparation of loop drawings including, but not limited to: 1) Conduit numbers and associated signal(s) contained within each

conduit. 2) Wire numbers. 3) Equipment terminal numbers. 4) Junction boxes and signal(s) contained within each junction box. 5) Equipment power sources, and associated circuit numbers. 6) As-built drawings detailing wiring.


D. All electrical equipment and systems for the entire Project must comply with the requirements of the Electrical Specifications, whether referenced in the individual Equipment Specifications or not: 1. The requirements of the Electrical Specifications apply to all Electrical Work

specified in other sections, including HVAC controls, packaged mechanical systems, LCPs, VCPs, etc.

2. Inform all vendors supplying electrical equipment or systems of the requirements of the Electrical Specifications.

3. The Owner is not responsible for any additional costs due to the failure of the Contractor to notify all subcontractors and suppliers of the Electrical Specifications requirements.

E. Special subcontractor requirements: 1. As specified elsewhere in this Section, provide the Work specified in the

Electrical Specifications by a qualified electrical subcontractor.

F. Contract Documents:

1. General: a. The Drawings and Specifications are complementary and are to be used

together in order to fully describe the Work. 2. Specifications:

a. The General and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract Documents govern the Work.

b. These requirements are in addition to all General Requirements. 3. Contract Drawings:

a. The Electrical Drawings show desired locations, arrangements, and components of the Electrical Work in a diagrammatic manner.

b. Locations of equipment, control devices, instruments, boxes, panels, etc. are approximate only; exercise professional judgment in executing the Work to ensure the best possible installation: 1) The equipment locations and dimensions indicated on the Drawings

are approximate. Use the shop drawings to determine the proper layout, foundation, and pad requirements, etc. for final installation. Coordinate with all subcontractors to ensure that all electrical equipment is compatible with other equipment and space requirements. Make changes required to accommodate differences in equipment dimensions.

2) The Contractor has the freedom to select any of the named manufacturers as identified in the individual specification sections; however, the Engineer has designed the spatial equipment layout based upon a single manufacturer and has not confirmed that every named manufacturer’s equipment fits in the allotted space. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to ensure that the equipment being furnished fits within the defined space.

c. Installation details: 1) The Contract Drawings include typical installation details the

Contractor is to use to complete the Electrical Work. For cases where a typical detail does not apply, develop installation details that may be necessary for completing the Work, and submit these details for review by the Engineer.

2) Not all typical installation details are referenced within the Drawing set. Apply and use typical details where appropriate.


d. Schematic diagrams: 1) All controls are shown de-energized. 2) Schematic diagrams show control function only. Incorporate other

necessary functions for proper operation and protection of the system.

3) Add slave relays, where required, to provide all necessary contacts for the control system or where needed to function as interposing relays for control voltage coordination, equipment coordination, or control system voltage drop considerations.

4) Mount all devices shown on motor controller schematic diagrams in the controller compartment enclosure, unless otherwise noted or indicated.

5) Schematic diagrams are to be used in conjunction with the descriptive operating sequences in the Contract Documents. Combine all information and furnish a coordinated and fully functional control system.

G. Alternates/Alternatives: 1. Coordinate with Document 00700 for substitute item provisions.

H. Changes and change orders: 1. As specified in Document 00700.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. Code compliance: 1. As specified in Section 01410. 2. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. The

latest edition accepted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction of referenced publications in effect at the time of the bid governs.

3. The standards listed are hereby incorporated into this Section. a. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). b. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE):

1) ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures. c. ASTM International (ASTM). d. Illuminating Engineering Society (IES). Institute of Electrical and

Electronics Engineers (IEEE). e. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA). f. International Code Council (ICC).

1) International Code Council Evaluation Service (ICC-ES). a) AC 156 – Acceptance Criteria for Seismic Certification by Shake

Table Testing of Non-Structural Components (ICC-ES AC 156). g. International Society of Automation (ISA). h. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

1) 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 V Maximum). i. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):

1) 70 - National Electric Code (NEC). j. National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST). k. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL).

B. Compliance with laws and regulations: 1. As specified in Document 00700.


1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Definitions of terms and other electrical and instrumentation considerations as set forth by: 1. IEEE. 2. NETA. 3. IES. 4. ISA. 5. NEC. 6. NEMA. 7. NFPA. 8. NIST.

B. Specific definitions: 1. FAT: Factory acceptance test. 2. ICSC: Instrumentation and controls subcontractor. 3. LCP: Local control panel: Operator interface panel that may contain an HMI,

pilot type control devices, operator interface devices, control relays, etc. and does not contain a PLC or RIO.

4. LCS: Local control station: Operator interface panel that may contain pilot type control devices, operator interface devices, etc.

5. PCIS: Process control and instrumentation system. 6. RTU: Remote telemetry unit: A controller typically consisting of a PLC, and a

means for remote communications. The remote communications devices typically are radios, modems, etc.

7. Space: That portion of the switchgear, motor control center, panel-board, switchboard or control panel that does not physically contain a device but is capable of accepting a device with no modifications to the equipment, i.e., provide all standoffs, bus, and hardware, as part of the space.

8. Spare: That portion of the switchgear, motor control center, panelboard, switchboard or control panel that physically contains a device with no load connections to be made.

9. System supplier: Refer to Quality Assurance in this Section. 10. VCP: Vendor control panel: Control panels that are furnished with equipment

by a vendor other than the ICSC. These panels may contain PLCs, RIO, OIT, HMI, etc.

11. Unequipped space: That portion of the switchgear, motor control center, panelboard, switchboard or control panel that does not physically contain a device, standoff, bus, hardware, or other equipment.


A. General requirements: 1. The Work includes everything necessary for and incidental to executing and

completing the Electrical Work indicated on the Drawings and specified in the Specifications and reasonably inferable there from: a. The Electrical Drawings are schematic in nature; use the Structural,

Architectural, Mechanical, and Civil Drawings for all dimensions and scaling purposes.

2. It is the intent of these Specifications that the entire electrical power, instrumentation, and control system be complete and operable. Provide all necessary material and labor for the complete system from source of power to


final utilization equipment, including all connections, testing, calibration of equipment furnished by others as well as equipment furnished by the Contractor, whether or not specifically mentioned but which are necessary for successful operation.

3. Provide all Electrical Work, including conduit, field wiring, and connections by the electrical subcontractor under the provisions of the Electrical Specifications for all aspects of the Work, including heating, ventilating, and air conditioning.

4. Coordinate all aspects of the Work with the electrical subcontractor and other subcontractors before bidding in order to ensure that all costs associated with a complete installation are included. The Owner is not responsible for any change orders due to lack of coordination of the Work between the Contractor, the electrical subcontractor, the other subcontractors or suppliers.

5. Demolition: a. Where demolition is specified or indicated on the Drawings, disconnect all

associated electrical equipment and render the equipment safe. b. Remove and dispose of all conduit, wire, electrical equipment, controls,

etc. associated with the items and/or areas to be demolished as indicated on the Drawings unless otherwise indicated.

c. Salvage electrical equipment as indicated on the Drawings. d. For each piece of equipment to be removed, remove all ancillary

components (e.g. instruments, solenoid valves, disconnect switches, etc.). e. Conduit:

1) Where conduit removal, other than associated with equipment to be removed, is indicated on the Drawings: a) Remove exposed conduit completely to source. For conduits

that are partially concealed in concrete or below grade, remove exposed conduit to the point of encasement or burial.

b) Cut conduit flush and plug or cap encased or buried conduit. 2) Where conduits are to remain in place and removal is not indicated

on the Drawings: a) Cap conduit open ends. b) Re-label empty conduits as spare.

f. Remove all wire back to the source for all conduits to be removed or abandoned in place.

g. Provide new nameplates for modified electrical distribution equipment, motor control centers etc. to identify equipment and circuits that are no longer used as spares.

h. Provide new typewritten schedules for all modified panelboards.

i. Provide KO seals in all penetrations in enclosures and equipment that are made available by the removal of conduits or raceways.

j. Seal all penetrations in walls and floors that are made available by the removal of conduits or raceways. Grout fill all penetrations in concrete.

6. Portions of this Project involve installation in existing facilities and interfaces to existing circuits, power systems, controls, and equipment: a. Perform and document comprehensive and detailed field investigations of

existing conditions (circuits, power systems, controls, equipment, etc.) before starting any Work. Determine all information necessary to document, interface with, modify, upgrade, or replace existing circuits, power systems, controls, and equipment.


b. Provide and document interface with, modifications to, upgrades, or replacement of existing circuits, power systems, controls, and equipment.

7. Do not penetrate existing enclosures, control panels, or equipment without the Owner present to observe the installation. The Owner shall observe the Contractor while these penetrations are created.

8. Provide all trenching, forming, rebar, concrete, back filling, hard surface removal and replacement, for all items associated with the Electrical Work and installation: a. As specified in the Contract Documents.

9. Defective work: a. As specified in Document 00700.

B. Operating facility: 1. As specified in Section 01140. 2. The facility is an operating facility. Portions of this facility must remain fully

functional throughout the entire construction period. In consideration of this requirement, comply with the following guidelines: a. All outages must be of minimal duration and fully coordinated and agreed

to by the Owner. Adjust the construction schedule to meet the requirements of the Owner. All changes in schedule and any needs to reschedule are included in the Work.

b. As weather and water demand conditions dictate, re-adjust the construction schedule to meet the demands placed upon Owner by its users.

c. Coordinate the construction and power renovation, bear all costs, so that all existing facilities can continue operation throughout construction.

3. According to individual circumstances and in compliance with the Drawings, extend or replace conduit and cable connections from existing locations.

4. The standards of documentation, instrument tagging, cable and conductor ferruling, terminal identification and labeling that apply to the new installation apply equally to the existing installation which forms part of the modified system.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish submittals as specified in Section 01330 and this Section.

B. General: 1. Instruct all equipment suppliers of submittals and operation and maintenance

manuals of the requirements in this Section. 2. Furnish the submittals required by each section in the Electrical Specifications. 3. Adhere to the wiring numbering scheme specified in Section 16075 throughout

the Project: a. Uniquely number each wire. b. Wire numbers must appear on all Equipment Drawings.

4. Use equipment and instrument tags, as indicated on the Drawings, for all submittals.

5. List of manufacturer’s recommended spare parts.

C. Seismic requirements: 1. Provide electrical equipment with construction and anchorage to supporting

structures designed to resist site seismic loads as specified in Section 01614.


2. For equipment installed in structures designated as seismic design category C, D, E or F, prepare and submit the following: a. Statement of seismic qualification, and special seismic certification:

1) “Statement of seismic qualification:” Provide manufacturer’s statement that the equipment satisfies the seismic design requirements of the building code indicated in Section 01410, including the requirements of ASCE 7, Chapter 13.

2) “Special seismic certification:” Provide manufacturer’s certification that the equipment, when subjected to shake table testing in accordance with ICC-ES AC 156, meets the “Post-Test Functional Compliance Verification” requirements of ICC-ES AC 156 for “Components with Ip = 1.5.” Compliance shall include both operability and containment of hazardous materials as appropriate to the unit being tested.

b. Substantiating test data: With seismic qualification and special seismic certification statements, submit results of testing in accordance with ICC-ES AC 156.

c. Anchoring design calculations and details: 1) Submit project-specific drawings and supporting calculations,

prepared and sealed by a professional engineer licensed in the state where the Project is being constructed, and showing details for anchoring electrical equipment to its supports and for anchoring supports provided with the equipment to the structure. Prepare calculations in accordance with the requirements of Section 01612.

3. Exemptions: A “statement of seismic qualification” and a “special seismic certification” are not required for the following equipment: a. Temporary or moveable equipment. b. Equipment anchored to the structure and having a total weight of

20 pounds or less. c. Distribution equipment anchored to the structure and having a total unit

weight of 5 pounds per linear foot, or less.

D. Submittal organization: 1. First page:

a. Specification section reference. b. Name and telephone number of individuals who reviewed submittal before

delivery to Engineer. c. Name and telephone number of person who is primarily responsible for

the development of the submittal. d. Place for Contractor’s review stamp and comments.

2. Next pages: a. Provide confirmation of specification compliance in a tabular form that

individually lists each specification section, paragraph, and sub-paragraphs and unequivocally states compliance with said requirement or takes exception to the requirement and lists the reason for said exception and offers alternative means for compliance.

b. Include a response in writing to each of the Engineer’s comments or questions for submittal packages which are re-submitted: 1) In the order that the comments or questions were presented

throughout the submittal. 2) Referenced by index section and page number on which the

comment appeared.


3) Acceptable responses to Engineer’s comments are either: a) Engineer’s comment or change is accepted, and appropriate

changes are made. b) Explain why comment is not accepted or requested change is

not made. c) Explain how requirement will be satisfied in lieu of comment or

change requested by Engineer. 4) Any re-submittal, which does not contain responses to the Engineer’s

previous comments shall be returned for Revision and Re-submittal. 5) No further review by the Engineer will be performed until a response

for previous comments has been received. 3. Remaining pages:

a. Actual submittal data: 1) Organize submittals in the same order as the items are referenced,

listed, and/or organized in the specification section. 2) For submittals that cover multiple devices used in different areas

under the same specification section, the submittal for the individual devices must list the area where the device is intended to be used.

E. Submittal requirements: 1. Furnish submittals that are fully indexed with a tabbed divider for every

component. 2. Sequentially number pages within the tabbed sections. Submittals and

operation and maintenance manuals that are not fully indexed and tabbed with sequentially numbered pages, or are otherwise unacceptable, will be returned without review.

3. Edit all submittals and operation and maintenance manuals so that the submittal specifically applies to only the equipment furnished. a. Neatly cross out all extraneous text, options, models, etc. that do not

apply to the equipment being furnished, so that the information remaining is only applicable to the equipment being furnished.

4. Submit copies of shop drawings, and product data: a. Show dimensions, construction details, wiring diagrams, controls,

manufacturers, catalog numbers, and all other pertinent details. 5. Where submittals are required, provide a separate submittal for each

specification section. In order to expedite construction, the Contractor may make more than 1 submittal per specification section, but a single submittal may not cover more than 1 specification section: a. The only exception to this requirement is when 1 specification section

covers the requirements for a component of equipment specified in another section. (For example, circuit breakers are a component of switchgear. The switchgear submittal must also contain data for the associated circuit breakers, even though they are covered in a different specification section.)

6. Exceptions to Specifications and Drawings: a. Include a list of proposed exceptions to the Specifications and Drawings

along with a detailed explanation of each. b. If there is insufficient explanation for the exception or deviation, the

submittal will be returned requiring revision and re-submittal. c. Acceptance of any exception is at the sole discretion of the Engineer.


1) Provide all items (materials, features, functions, performance, etc.) required by the Contract Documents that are not accepted as exceptions.

d. Replace all items that do not meet the requirements of the Contract Documents, which were not previously accepted as exceptions, even if the submittals contained information indicating the failure to meet the requirements.

7. Specific submittal requirements: a. Shop drawings:

1) Required for materials and equipment listed in this and other sections.

2) Furnish enough information to evaluate the suitability of the proposed material or equipment for the intended use, and for compliance with these Specifications.

3) Shop drawings requirements: a) Front, side, and, rear elevations, and top and bottom views,

showing all dimensions. b) Locations of conduit entrances and access plates. c) Component layout and identification. d) Schematic and wiring diagrams with wire numbers and terminal

identification. e) Connection diagrams, terminal diagrams, internal wiring

diagrams, conductor size, etc. f) Anchoring method and leveling criteria, including manufacturer’s

recommendations for the Project site seismic criteria. g) Weight. h) Finish. i) Nameplates:

(1) As specified in Section 16075 – Electrical Identification. j) Temperature limitations, as applicable.

b. Product data: 1) Submitted for non-custom manufactured material listed in this and

other sections and shown on shop drawings. 2) Include:

a) Catalog cuts. b) Bulletins. c) Brochures. d) Quality photocopies of applicable pages from these documents. e) Identify on the data sheets the Project name, applicable

specification section, and paragraph. f) Identify model number and options for the actual equipment

being furnished. g) Neatly cross out options that do not apply or equipment not

intended to be supplied. c. Detailed sequence of operation for all equipment or systems.

F. Operation and maintenance manuals: 1. As specified in Section 01782.

G. Material and equipment schedules: 1. Furnish a complete schedule and/or matrix of all materials, equipment,

apparatus, and luminaries that are proposed for use:


a. Include sizes, names of manufacturers, catalog numbers, and such other information required to identify the items.

H. Schedule of values: 1. In addition to completing all items referred to in the schedule of values,

Section 01292, submit per unit material and labor costs used in developing the final bid for the electrical system, for the express purpose of pricing and cost justification for any proposed change orders. In addition to the items shown on the schedule of values, provide per unit material and labor costs for conduit and wire installation for specific types, sizes, and locations as indicated on the Drawings and Conduit Schedule. It is the responsibility of the electrical subcontractor to prove to the Engineer’s satisfaction that said per unit costs were used in the development of the final Bid amount.

I. Roof penetrations: 1. Submit details of all portions of the electrical installation that penetrate the

roof. Include details showing support of the penetrating component, and the sealing means to be utilized.

J. Record Documents: 1. Furnish as specified in Section 01770. 2. Provide Record Documents of all Electrical Drawings. 3. Record Drawing requirements:

a. Update Record Drawings weekly. b. Record Drawings must be fully updated as a condition of the monthly

progress payments. c. Submit Record Drawings upon completion of the Work for final review. d. Clearly and neatly show all changes including the following:

1) All existing pipe, conduit, wire, instruments or other structures encountered or uncovered during construction.

4. Shop drawings: a. Upon completion of the Work, update all shop drawings to indicate the

final as-built configuration of the systems: 1) Provide as-built shop drawings for all electrical equipment on 11-inch

by 17-inch using Bond paper. 2) Provide electronic copies of these documents on USB flash drive in

Auto-Cad by Autodesk and PDF. Verify the current version of Auto-CAD with the District. Size all drawings to be readable and legible on 11-inch by 17-inch media.

b. Furnish written information prepared specifically for this Project using Microsoft Word 2016 and PDF and printed on 8.5-inch by 11-inch plain bond paper printed in color: 1) Provide electronic copies of these documents on USB flash drive.

5. Review and corrections: a. Correct any record documents or other documents found to be

incomplete, not accurate, of poor quality, or containing errors. b. Promptly correct and re-submit record documents returned for correction.

K. Test reports: 1. As specified in Section 01330. 2. Include the following:

a. A description of the test.


b. List of equipment used. c. Name of the person conducting the test. d. Date and time the test was conducted. e. All raw data collected. f. Calculated results. g. Each report signed by the person responsible for the test.

3. Additional requirements for acceptance test reports are specified in Section 16950.

L. Calculations: 1. Where required by specific Electrical Specifications:

a. Because these calculations are being provided by a registered professional engineer, they will be reviewed for form, format, and content but will not be reviewed for accuracy and calculation means.

M. Factory acceptance test: 1. As specified in Section 01330. 2. Include complete test procedure and all forms to be used during test.


A. Furnish all equipment listed by and bearing the label of UL, FM, CSA TUV, or of an independent testing laboratory acceptable to the Engineer and the Authority Having Jurisdiction.

B. System supplier responsibilities: 1. Requirements as specified in the Instrumentation and Control Specifications. 2. System supplier:

a. Due to the critical and complex technical requirements of this Project, all Work (materials, equipment, products, submittals, labor, services, etc.) specified in the Electrical, and Instrumentation and Control Specifications, and shown on the Electrical and Instrumentation Drawings is to be furnished by a single system supplier who has single source responsibility for both the process control and instrumentation systems and the electrical power system.

3. Contractual Relationship: a. Form a contractual relationship between the electrical subcontractor and

the ICSC. b. Requirements for the first-tier subcontractor:

1) Contract directly with the Contractor. 2) Be either the electrical subcontractor or the ICSC.

c. Requirements for the second-tier subcontractor: 1) A division of the first-tier subcontractor, or 2) A joint venture with the first-tier subcontractor, or 3) A subcontractor to the first-tier subcontractor.

d. The system supplier manages, directs, and supervises all the Work of its second-tier subcontractor. The system supplier is solely responsible for the entire electrical and instrumentation system, including, but not limited to, all Electrical, Instrumentation, and Process Contract Drawings, Electrical Specifications, and Instrumentation and Control Specifications: 1) Provide any additional conduit, wire, etc.


2) Any additional I/O, programming, screens, interface devices needed by the system supplier are to be provided by the electrical subcontractor or the ICSC, under the above outlined working agreement.

3) Ensure compatibility between the PCIS system and the electrical system being installed.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION

A. Shipping Precautions: 1. After completion of shop assembly and successful factory testing, pack all

equipment in protective crates, and enclose in heavy duty polyethylene envelopes or secured sheeting to provide complete protection from damage, dust, and moisture.

2. Place dehumidifiers, when required, inside the polyethylene coverings. 3. Skid-mount the equipment for final transport. 4. Provide lifting rings for moving without removing protective covering. 5. Display boxed weight on shipping tags together with instructions for unloading,

transporting, storing, and handling at the job site.

B. Delivery and Inspection: 1. Deliver products in undamaged condition, in manufacturer’s original container

or packaging with identifying labels intact and legible. Include date of manufacture on label.

C. Special Instructions: 1. Securely attach special instructions for proper field handling, storage, and

installation to each piece of equipment before packaging and shipment.

1.08 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS

A. Site conditions:

1. Provide an electrical, instrumentation and control system, including all equipment, raceways and any other components required for a complete installation that meets the environmental conditions for the Site as specified in the General Requirements and below.

2. Seismic load resistance: a. Provide electrical equipment with construction and anchorage to

supporting structures designed to resist site seismic loads as specified in Section 01612.

3. Wind load resistance: a. Provide electrical equipment with construction and anchorage to

supporting structures designed to resist site wind loads as specified in Section 01614.

4. Altitude, temperature and humidity: a. As specified in Section 01610. b. Provide all electrical components and equipment fully rated for continuous

operation at this altitude, with no additional de-rating factors applied. c. Provide additional temperature conditioning equipment to maintain all

equipment in non-conditioned spaces subject to these ambient temperatures, with a band of 10 degrees Fahrenheit above the minimum operating temperature and 10 degrees Fahrenheit below maximum


operating temperature, as determined by the equipment manufacturer’s guidelines: 1) Provide all power conduits wiring for these devices (e.g. heaters,

fans, etc.) whether indicated on the Drawings or not. 5. Site security:

a. Abide by all security and safety rules concerning the Work on the Site, as specified in Section 01329.

6. Outdoor installations: a. Provide electrical, instrumentation and control equipment suitable for

operation in the ambient conditions where the equipment is located. b. Provide heating, cooling, and dehumidifying devices incorporated into and

included with electrical equipment, instrumentation and control panels to maintain the enclosures within the rated environmental operating ranges as specified in this Section for the equipment: 1) Provide all wiring necessary to power these devices.

B. Provide enclosures for electrical, instrumentation and control equipment, regardless of supplier or subcontractor furnishing the equipment, that meet the requirements outlined in NEMA Standard 250 for the following types of enclosures: 1. NEMA Type 1: Intended for indoor use, primarily to provide a degree of

protection from accidental contact with energized parts or equipment. 2. NEMA Type 4: Intended for indoor or outdoor use, primarily to protect

equipment from exposure to windblown dust and rain, splashing or hose directed water, ice formation and freezing.

3. NEMA Type 4X: Made from corrosion resistant materials (316 stainless steel) and are intended for indoor or outdoor use, primarily to protect equipment from exposure to windblown dust and rain, splashing or hose directed water, ice formation and freezing, and corrosion.

4. NEMA Type 12: Intended for indoor use, primarily to provide a degree of protection from dust, falling dirt and dripping non-corrosive liquids.

5. NEMA Type 6: Rated for submergence. 6. NEMA Type 6P: Rated for prolonged submergence. 7. NEMA Type 7: Intended for installation in indoor locations where explosive or

combustible gas or vapors may be present (Class I Division 1 or Class I Division 2).

8. NEMA Type 8: Intended for installation in either indoor or outdoor locations where explosive or combustible gas or vapors may be present (Class I Division 1 or Class I Division 2) and the equipment is oil-immersed.

C. Plant area Electrical Work requirements: 1. Provide all Electrical Work in accordance with the following table, unless

otherwise specifically indicated on the Drawings: 2. Provide stainless steel NEMA 4X enclosures and supports, and PCS conduit

type for all Electrical work not included in the following table unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. Conduit type definitions are listed under 16130 Conduit, 1.03B.

3. Modify conduit runs as specified in Section 16130.


PLANT AREA

NEMA ENCLOSURE

TYPE

EXPOSED CONDUIT

TYPE

ENVIRONMENT W = WET D = DAMP

C = CLEAN/DRY X = CORROSIVE H = HAZARDOUS

SUPPORT MATERIALS & HARDWARE

ANCHOR MATERIALS

REC Building 12 GRC C SST SST

Shed 4X PCS W, X SST SST

Outdoor 4X PCS W, X SST SST

1.09 WIRING WITHIN CONDUIT

A. All wiring shall be installed within a conduit, raceway, or tray as identified within Contract Documents, no exceptions. 1. All wiring associated with low voltage systems, including, but not limited to low

voltage communications, electronic access control, building automation / HVAC control, security systems, and fire alarm systems shall be in conduit, no exceptions.

2. All Class II wiring shall be within conduit, no exceptions.

1.10 SCHEDULING

A. General: 1. As specified in Section 01756 Testing, Training, and Facility Startup. 2. Testing requirements are specified in Section 01756 Testing and Facility

Startup, Section 16950 Field Electrical Acceptance Tests, and other sections. 3. General scheduling requirements are specified in Section 01324 Construction

Schedule. 4. Work restrictions and other scheduling requirements are specified in

Section 01140 Work Restrictions. 5. The Contractor shall complete and submit a Deactivation Request Form prior

to de-energizing any electrical equipment. The Form shall be furnished to the Contractor by the District.

6. Testing and process Start-up requirements as specified in Section 01756 Testing and Facility Startup.

B. Pre-submittal conference: 1. Before producing any submittals, schedule a pre-submittal conference for the

purposes of reviewing the entire Project, equipment, control philosophy, schedules, and submittal requirements.

2. The Contractor, instrumentation and control subcontractor, electrical subcontractor, all suppliers, and individual equipment manufacturers furnishing major pieces of equipment must attend, including but not limited to: a. Vendor control panels b. Electrical equipment shelter c. Local control stations d. Disconnect switches e. Variable frequency drives f. Lighting


3. The Contractor shall produce a copy of the electrical permit at the pre-submittal conference.

C. Factory acceptance testing: 1. Where factory acceptance testing is required for equipment covered by these

Specifications, notify the Engineer in writing when the equipment is completed and ready for factory inspection and testing: a. Indicate the desired dates for inspection and testing. b. Schedule the FAT after approval of the FAT procedure’s submittal:

1) Submit a copy of the test procedures including all forms at least 21 days before any scheduled test date.

2) Notify the Engineer of the scheduled tests a minimum of 15 days before the date of the test.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Warrant the Electrical Work as specified in Document 00700: 1. Provide additional warranty as specified in the individual Electrical

Specifications.

1.12 EQUIPMENT WARRANTIES

A. Written warranty issued by item's manufacturer.

B. Project-specific information, properly executed by product manufacturer, and expressly states that its provisions are for the benefit of the Owner.

C. Covers all costs associated with the correction of the defect, including but not limited to removal of defective parts, new parts, labor, and shipping. 1. When correcting warranted Work that has failed, remove and replace other

Work that had been damaged as a result of such failure or that must be removed and replaced to provide access for correction of warranted Work.

D. Provides a timely response to correct the defect. 1. Manufacturer shall provide, in a timely fashion, temporary equipment as

necessary to replace warranted items requiring repair or replacement, when warranted items are in use and are critical to the treatment process, as defined by Owner.

2. In the case that Owner has to provide temporary equipment to replace function of warranted item requiring repair or replacement, manufacturer shall reimburse Owner for such costs associated with the temporary equipment.

E. Warranty commence running on the date of substantial completion. 1. For items of Work for which acceptance is delayed beyond Date of Substantial

Completion, submit warranty within 10 calendar days after acceptance, listing date of acceptance as beginning of warranty period.

F. Duration of Warranty: 1 year unless otherwise specified in the individual equipment section.


1.13 SYSTEM START-UP

A. Replace or modify equipment, software, and materials that do not achieve design requirements after installation in order to attain compliance with the design requirements: 1. Following replacement or modification, retest the system and perform

additional testing to place the complete system in satisfactory operation and obtain compliance acceptance from the Engineer.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Provide similar items of same manufacturer throughout the electrical and instrumentation portion of the Project.

B. Allowable manufacturers are specified in individual Electrical Specifications.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Furnish all materials under this Contract that are new, free from defects, and standard products produced by manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of these products and that bear all approvals and labels as required by the Specifications.

B. Provide materials complying with the applicable industrial standard as specified in Document 00700.

C. Stainless steel: 1. Where stainless steel is indicated or used for any portion of the Electrical

Work, provide a non-magnetic, corrosion-resistant alloy, ANSI Type 316, satin finish.

2. Provide exposed screws of the same alloys. 3. Provide finished material free of any burrs or sharp edges. 4. Use only stainless steel hardware, when chemically compatible, in all areas

that are or could be in contact with corrosive chemicals. 5. Use stainless steel hardware, when chemically compatible, in all chemical

areas or areas requiring NEMA Type 4X construction. 6. Do not use stainless steel in any area containing chlorine, gas or solution,

chlorine products or ferric chloride.


A. Provide all equipment that is new, free from defects, and standard products produced by manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of these products.

B. Arrange with all manufacturers of the electrical equipment, to allow the Owner and Engineer to inspect and witness the testing of the equipment at the site of fabrication: 1. Testing includes the cabinets, special control systems, power equipment, and

other pertinent systems and devices.


C. Factory testing is specified in the individual sections of the Electrical Specifications.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. The electrical subcontractor is encouraged to examine the premises completely before bidding.

B. The electrical subcontractor shall examine the bid documents completely before bidding.

C. It is the electrical subcontractor's responsibility to be fully familiar with the existing conditions and local requirements and regulations.

D. Review the site conditions and examine all shop drawings for the various items of equipment in order to determine exact routing and final terminations for all wiring and cables.

E. Provide a complete electrical system: 1. Install all extra conduits, cables, and interfaces as may be necessary to

provide a complete and operating electrical, PCIS, and HVAC system.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Equipment locations shown on Electrical Drawings may change due to variations in equipment size or minor changes made by others during construction: 1. Verify all dimensions indicated on the Drawings:

a. Actual field conditions govern all final installed locations, distances, and levels.

2. Review all Contract Documents and approved equipment shop drawings and coordinate Work as necessary to adjust to all conditions that arise due to such changes.

3. Make minor changes in location of equipment before rough in, as directed by the Owner or Engineer.

4. Provide a complete electrical system: a. Install all extra conduits, cables, and interfaces as may be necessary to

provide a complete and operational electrical, PCIS, and HVAC system.

B. Submit a Request for Information for any conflict between the Drawings and Specifications prior to installation.

C. Install the equipment in accordance with the accepted installation instructions and anchorage details to meet the seismic and wind load requirements at the Project site.

D. Cutting and patching: 1. Perform all cutting, patching, channeling, core drilling, and fitting required for

the Electrical Work, except as otherwise directed: a. Secure the permission of the Engineer before performing any operation

likely to affect the strength of a structural member such as drilling, cutting or piercing:


1) Before cutting, channeling, or core drilling any surface, ensure that no penetration of any other systems will be made: a) Verify that area is clear and free of conduits, cables, piping,

ductwork, post-tensioning cables, etc. b) Use tone-locate system or X-ray to ensure that area is clear of

obstructions. b. Review the complete Drawing set to ensure that there are no conflicts or

coordination problems before cutting, channeling, or core drilling any surface.

2. Perform all patching to the same quality and appearance as the original work. Employ the proper tradesmen to secure the desired results. Seal around all conduits, wires, and cables penetrating walls, ceilings, and floors in all locations with a fire stop material, typically: a. 3MCP 25WB+Caulk. b. 3MFire BarrierPutty.

3. Seal around conduit penetrations of below grade walls with a waterproof, non-shrink, non-metallic grout, unless otherwise indicated on the typical installation details: a. Use the installation details indicated on the Drawings as a guide for

acceptable sealing methods.

E. Install all conduits and equipment in such a manner as to avoid all obstructions and to preserve headroom and keep openings and passageways clear: 1. Install all conduits and equipment in accordance with working space

requirements as outlined in the NEC.

a. This includes any panel, disconnect switch or other equipment that can be energized while open exposing live parts regardless of whether it is likely to require examination or has serviceable parts.

2. Where the Drawings do not show dimensions for locating equipment, install equipment in the approximate locations indicated on the Drawings. a. Adjust equipment locations as necessary to avoid any obstruction or

interferences. 3. Where an obstruction interferes with equipment operation or safe access,

relocate the equipment. 4. Where the Drawings do not indicate the exact mounting and/or supporting

method to be used, use materials and methods like the mounting details indicated on the Drawings.

F. Earthwork and concrete: 1. Install all trenching, shoring, concrete, backfilling, grading and resurfacing

associated with the Electrical Work: a. Requirements as specified in the Contract Documents.

G. Roof penetrations: 1. Seal conduit penetrations in accordance with roofing manufacturer’s

instructions.

H. Terminations: 1. Provide and terminate all conductors required to interconnect power, controls,

instruments, panels, and all other equipment.


I. Miscellaneous installation requirements: 1. In case of interference between electrical equipment indicated on the

Drawings and the other equipment, notify the Engineer as specified in Document 00700.

2. Location of manholes and pull-boxes indicated on the Drawings are approximate. Coordinate exact location of manholes, handholes and pull-boxes with Mechanical and Civil Work.

3. Provide additional manholes, handholes, and conduit bodies to those shown where they are required to make a workable installation.

J. Labeling: 1. Provide all nameplates and labels as specified in Sections 16075.

K. Equipment tie-downs: 1. Anchor all instruments, control panels, and equipment by methods that comply

with seismic and wind bracing criteria, which apply to the Site. 2. All control panels, VCPs, LCPs, RTUs, PCMs, etc., must be permanently

mounted and tied down to structures in accordance with the Project seismic criteria.

3.03 TESTING AND FACILITY STARTUP

A. As specified in Section 01756 - Testing and Facility Startup.

B. For Owner and Engineer witnessed FAT: 1. The Contractor is responsible for the Owner’s and Engineer’s costs associated

with FAT as specified in individual equipment Sections.


A. Inspection: 1. Allow for inspection of electrical system installation as specified in Section

01450. 2. Provide any assistance necessary to support inspection activities. 3. Engineer inspections may include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Inspect equipment and materials for physical damage. b. Inspect installation for compliance with the Drawings and Specifications. c. Inspect installation for obstructions and adequate clearances around

equipment. d. Inspect equipment installation for proper leveling, alignment, anchorage,

and assembly. e. Inspect equipment nameplate data to verify compliance with design

requirements. f. Inspect raceway installation for quality workmanship and adequate

support. g. Inspect cable terminations. h. Schedule inspection of all mounting of electrical devices and all

penetration and connections to structures. 4. Inspection activities conducted during construction do not satisfy inspection or

testing requirements specified in Section 16950.

B. Field testing: 1. Notify the Engineer when the Electrical Work is ready for field acceptance

testing.


2. Perform the acceptance tests as specified in Section 16950. 3. Record results of the required tests along with the date of test:

a. Use conduit identification numbers to indicate portion of circuit tested.

C. Workmanship: 1. Leave wiring in panels, manholes, boxes, and other locations neat, clean, and

organized: a. Neatly coil and label spare wiring lengths. b. Shorten, re-terminate, and re-label excessive used as well as spare wire

and cable lengths, as determined by the Engineer. c. All spare conductors shall be labeled individually.

1) The source of the spare conductor(s) shall be labeled at the destination.

2) The destination of the spare conductors(s) shall be labeled at the source.

3.05 CLEANING

A. As specified in Section 01770.

B. Remove all foreign material and restore all damaged finishes to the satisfaction of the Engineer and Owner.

C. Clean and vacuum all enclosures to remove all metal filings, surplus insulation and any visible dirt, dust or other matter before energization of the equipment or system start-up: 1. Use of compressors or air blowers for cleaning is not acceptable.

D. Clean the electrical rooms associated with the project and areas of work prior to completion. Clean the floors, tops of enclosures, and cable trays of all debris, dirt, and dust created during

E. As specified in other sections of the Contract Documents.

3.06 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

A. Furnish all personnel and equipment necessary to conduct the demonstration and training requirements as specified in the individual sections.

3.07 PROTECTION

A. Protect all Work from damage or degradation until Substantial Completion.

B. Maintain all surfaces to be painted in a clean and smooth condition.

END OF SECTION

Grounding and Bonding 16060-1 11487A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/OR/Clean Water Services/11487A10/Specifications/16060 (Bidset) April 2021 - BID

SECTION 16060

GROUNDING AND BONDING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: 1. Grounding electrodes. 2. Grounding electrode conductors. 3. Equipment grounding conductors. 4. Main bonding jumper. 5. Ground connections. 6. General requirements for grounding.

B. Related Sections: 1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as

binding as if called for by all. 2. It is the Contractor’s responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the Work of


1.02 REFERENCES

A. As specified in Section 16050 - Common Work Results for Electrical.

B. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. B 3 - Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire. 2. B 8 - Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors,

Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft.

C. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): 1. 81 - IEEE Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and

Earth Surface Potentials of a Grounding System.

D. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 1. 467 - Ground and Bonding Equipment.

1.03 DEFINITIONS



A. Ground equipment and raceway systems so that the completed installation conforms to all applicable code requirements.

B. Provide a complete electrical grounding system as indicated on the Drawings and as specified including but not limited to: 1. Grounding electrodes. 2. Bonding jumpers.


3. Ground connections.

C. Provide bonding jumpers and wire, grounding bushings, clamps and appurtenances required for complete grounding system to bond equipment and raceways to equipment grounding conductors.

D. The ground system resistance (electrode to ground) of the completed installation, as determined by tests specified in Section 16950 – Field Electrical Acceptance Tests, shall be: 1. 5 ohms or less for industrial systems. 2. 1 ohm or less for electrical buildings.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish submittals as specified in Sections 01330 and 16050 - Common Work Results for Electrical.

B. Product data: 1. Catalog cut sheets.



B. All grounding components and materials shall be UL listed and labeled.



1.08 WARRANTY




PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Compression connectors: One of the following or equal: 1. FCI Burndy. 2. Thomas & Betts.

B. Ground rods: One of the following or equal: 1. Erico. 2. Harger. 3. Conex.

C. Ground cable: One of the following or equal:


1. Nehring. 2. Harger. 3. Southwire.

D. Precast ground well boxes: One of the following or equal: 1. Brooks Products, 3-RT Valve Box. 2. Christy Concrete Products, G12 Valve Box.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Ground rod: 1. Minimum: 3/4-inch diameter, 10 feet long. 2. Uniform 10 mil covering of electrolytic copper metallically bonded to a rigid

steel core: a. The copper-to-steel bond shall be corrosion resistant.

3. In accordance with UL 467. 4. Sectional type joined by threaded copper alloy couplings. 5. Fit the top of the rod with a threaded coupling and steel-driving stud.

B. Ground cable: 1. Requirements:

a. Soft drawn (annealed). b. Concentric lay, coarse stranded in accordance with ASTM B 8. c. Bare copper in accordance with ASTM B 3.

2. Size is as indicated on the Drawings, but not less than required by the NEC.

C. Compression connectors: 1. Manufactured of high copper alloy specifically for the grounding application. 2. Suitable for direct burial in earth and concrete. 3. Identifying compression die number inscription to be impressed on

compression fitting.

D. Equipment grounding conductors: 1. Conductors shall be the same type and insulation as the load circuit

conductors: a. Use 600-volt insulation for the equipment grounding conductors for

medium voltage systems. 2. Minimum size in accordance with the NEC.

E. Grounding electrode conductors: 1. Minimum size in accordance with the NEC.

F. Main bonding jumpers and bonding jumpers: 1. Minimum size in accordance with the NEC.

2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Precast ground well boxes: 1. Minimum 10-inch interior diameter. 2. Traffic-rated cast iron cover. 3. Permanent “GROUND” marking on cover.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION


B. Provide a separate, green insulated, grounding conductor in each raceway independent of raceway material: 1. Multi-conductor power and control cables shall include an integral green

insulated grounding conductor. 2. Provide a separate grounding conductor in each individual raceway for parallel

feeders.

C. Provide a separate grounding conductor for each motor and connect at motor terminal box. Do not use bolts securing motor box to frame or cover for grounding connectors: 1. When grounding motors driven by variable frequency drives (VFD) comply with

the requirements of the VFD manufacturer.

D. Provide a grounding type bushing with lug for connection of grounding conductor for conduits that originate from each motor control center section, switchboard, or panelboard: 1. Individually bond these raceways to the ground bus in the equipment.

E. Provide grounding type bushings with lug for a connection to a grounding conductor for all conduits which terminate at a cable tray.

F. Provide grounding type bushings with lugs for connection of grounding conductor at both ends of metallic conduit runs. Bond ground bushings to the grounding system.

G. Provide a green insulated wire-grounding jumper from the ground screw to a box grounding screw and, for grounding type devices, to equipment grounding conductor.

H. Interconnect the secondary switchgear, switchboard, or panelboard neutral bus to the ground bus in the secondary switchgear, switchboard, or panelboard compartment, only at service entrance point or after a transformer.

I. Duct bank ground system: 1. Provide a bare copper grounding conductor the entire length of each duct

bank, embedded in the concrete of the duct bank as indicated on the Drawings and specified in the Specifications.

2. Bond duct bank ground conductors together where duct banks join, merge, intersect, or split.

J. Grounding at service (600 V or Less): 1. Connect the neutral to ground only at one point within the enclosure of the first

disconnecting means on the load side of the service transformer.

K. Ground connections: 1. All connections to the ground grid system, the duct bank grounding system,

equipment, ground rods, etc., shall be made using compression type


grounding connectors as indicated on the Drawings, UL, CSA, or TUV listed, and labeled for the application.

2. Make ground connections in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. 3. Do not conceal or cover any ground connections until the Engineer or

authorized representative has established and provided written confirmation that every grounding connection is as indicated on the Drawings and specified in the Specifications.

L. Grounding electrode system: 1. Ground ring:

a. Provide all trenching and materials necessary to install the ground ring as indicated on the Drawings.

b. Ground ring conductor shall be in direct contact with the earth, or where embedded, concrete, of the size as indicated on the Drawings.

c. Minimum burial depth 36 inches or as indicated on the Drawings. d. Re-compact disturbed soils to original density in 6-inch lifts. e. Size shall be minimum required by NEC or as shown on the Drawings,

whichever is larger. 2. Ground rods:

a. Locations as indicated on the Drawings. b. Length of rods forming an individual ground array shall be equal in length. c. Drive ground rods and install grounding conductors before construction of

concrete slabs and duct banks. d. Pre-crimp all ground rods, as recommended by the manufacturer, before

crimping connector to ground rod. 3. Metal frame of building or structure:

a. Bond metal frame of building or structure to grounding electrode system. 4. Extend grounding conductors through concrete to accessible points for

grounding equipment and electrical enclosures. 5. Install grounding system at each structure where switchgear, motor control

centers, switchboards, panelboards, panels, or other electrical equipment are installed.

6. Bond all metallic equipment likely to become energized.

M. Shield grounding: 1. Shielded instrumentation cable shall have its shield grounded at one end only

unless shop drawings indicate otherwise: a. The grounding point shall be at the control panel or at the power source

end of the signal carried by the cable. 2. Terminate the shield drain wire on a dedicated grounding terminal block. 3. Insulate the non-grounding end of the shielded cable. 4. Use manufacturer’s terminal block jumpers to interconnect ground terminals. 5. Connection to the panel main ground bus shall be via a green No. 12

conductor to the main ground bus for the panel.

N. Where indicated on the Drawings, install ground rods in precast ground wells.

O. All grounding conductors inside control panels and control cabinets shall be insulated.




B. Measure grounding electrode system resistance to ground in accordance with IEEE 81.

3.03 ADJUSTING

A. Under the direction of the Engineer, add additional parallel connected ground rods and/or deeper driven rods until the ground resistance measurement meets the specified resistance requirements: 1. Use of salts, water, or compounds to attain the specified ground resistance is

not acceptable.

3.04 PROTECTION


END OF SECTION

Hangers and Supports 16070-1 11487A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/OR/Clean Water Services/11487A10/Specifications/16070 (Bidset) April 2021 - BID

SECTION 16070

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: 1. Mounting and supporting electrical equipment and components.

B. Related sections:

1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as binding as if called for by all.

2. It is the Contractor’s responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the Work of subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of Contractor’s Work.

1.02 REFERENCES


B. ASTM International (ASTM):

1. A 123 - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.

2. A 153 - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware.

3. A 240 – Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications.

1.03 DEFINITIONS



A. Design requirements: 1. Conform to the requirements of the Building Code as specified in

Section 01410. 2. Demonstrate the following using generally accepted engineering methods:


a. That the anchors to the structure are adequate to resist the loads generated in accordance with the Building Code and equipment requirements.

b. That the required load capacity of the anchors can be fully developed in the structural materials to which they are attached.

3. Design loading and anchoring requirements: a. As indicated in the Building Code unless otherwise specified. b. Seismic loading requirements:

1) Freestanding or wall-hung equipment shall be anchored in place by methods that will satisfy the requirements for the seismic design specified in Section 16050 - Common Work Results for Electrical.

c. Wind loading requirements: 1) All exterior freestanding equipment shall be anchored in place by

methods that will satisfy the requirements for wind design specified in Section 16050 - Common Work Results for Electrical.

d. Minimum safety factor against overturning: 1.5. e. The foundation and structures to which hangers and supports are

attached shall be capable of withstanding all anchor loads. f. Size the supports for conduit racks and trapezes with 40% spare capacity

of the largest raceway on the rack or trapeze.

B. Performance requirements: 1. Hangers and supports individually and as a system shall resist all weights and

code-required forces without deflections and deformations that would damage the supporting elements, the equipment supported, or the surrounding construction.

1.05 SUBMITTALS


B. Product data: 1. Supports:

a. Materials. b. Geometry. c. Manufacturer.

2. Hardware: a. Materials. b. Manufacturer.

C. Shop drawings: 1. Complete dimensioned and scalable shop drawings of all supporting

structures, trapezes, wall supports, etc. 2. Complete anchoring details for equipment, lighting and raceway, supporting

structures, trapezes, wall supports for all equipment in excess of 200 pounds, and all freestanding supports: a. Stamped by a professional engineer licensed in the state where the

Project is being constructed. b. Said submittals, by virtue of the fact that they bear the stamp of a

registered engineer, will be reviewed for general consistency with the


requirements specified in the Contract Documents, but not for context, accuracy, or method of calculation.

3. Include data on attachment hardware and construction methods that will satisfy the design loading and anchoring criteria.

D. Installation instructions: 1. Furnish anchorage instructions and requirements based on the seismic and

wind conditions of the Site: a. Stamped by a professional engineer licensed in the state where the

Project is being constructed.







1.09 WARRANTY


1.10 SYSTEM STARTUP

A. As specified in Section 01756.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. One of the following or equal: 1. Thomas & Betts. 2. Power-Strut. 3. Unistrut. 4. Cooper B-Line. 5. Robroy. 6. Aickinstrut.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Use materials appropriate for the area as specified in Section 16050 - Common Work Results for Electrical. Refer to the Plant Area Work Requirements table which specifies the permitted uses for these conduit types.


B. Stainless steel: 1. Supports:

a. In accordance with ASTM A 240. b. ANSI Type 316 material. c. Minimum size 1-5/8” x 1-5/8”.

2. Hardware: a. ANSI Type 316 material.

C. PVC coated galvanized steel: 1. Supports:

a. Hot dip galvanized steel in accordance with ASTM A123 or A153. b. Minimum zinc coating thickness of 2.5 mils. c. PVC coating thickness of 10 to 20 mils. d. Minimum size 1-5/8” x 1-5/8”.

2. Hardware: a. ANSI Type 316 material.

2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Anchor bolts: 1. ANSI Type 316 material.

2.04 FINISHES

A. Coat and finish all supporting structures as specified in Section 09960.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION


B. Mount all raceways, cabinets, boxes, fixtures, instruments, and devices on Contractor-fabricated racks unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 1. Provide the necessary sway bracing to keep trapeze type structures from

swaying.

C. Brace and anchor freestanding equipment supports using methods that provide structural support based on the seismic loads and wind loads: 1. Lateral deflection at top of supports not to exceed support height divided by

240 unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.

D. Provide fabricated steel support pedestals for wall mounted panels that weigh more than 200 pounds: 1. Fabricate pedestals out of welded angle, tube sections, or preformed channel. 2. If the supported equipment is a panel or cabinet, match the supported

equipment in physical appearance and dimensions. 3. Provide auxiliary floor supports for transformers hung from stud walls and

weighing more than 200 pounds. 4. Mount all equipment, cabinets, boxes, instruments, and devices in damp or

wet locations on minimum of 7/8-inch preformed mounting channel.


a. Mount channel vertically along the length of the device so that water or moisture may run freely behind the device.

E. Corrosion protection: 1. Isolate dissimilar metals, except where required for electrical continuity.

a. Use neoprene washers, 9-mil polyethylene tape, or gaskets for isolation.

F. Raceway: 1. Furnish all conduit racks and trapeze structures needed to support the

raceway from the structure. a. Group conduits and position on racks to minimize crossovers. b. Provide the necessary bracing to keep trapeze type structures from

swaying under loads from cable installation, seismic forces, or wind forces.

2. Conduit racks and trapeze structures shall be sized with 40% spare capacity of the largest conduit installed on the rack or trapeze units.

G. Anchoring methods: 1. Solid concrete: Anchor bolts, anchor rods or post-installed anchors as

specified in Section 05190. 2. Metal surfaces: Machine screws or bolts. 3. Hollow masonry units: Post-installed anchors as specified in Section 05190.

H. When supporting devices on metal or wood stud construction, provide a Listed steel bracket for supporting boxes. All boxes at the same elevation within a stud bay shall be supported by the same bracket.

I. Re-coat all scratches, cuts, and drilled holes in galvanized surfaces with CRC "Zinc-It" or similar product.

J. Re-coat all drilled holes and cut surfaces on PVC-coated materials.

K. Seal all drilled holes and cut surfaces on fiberglass materials.

L. Use manufacturer supplied strut splice clevises where two or more pieces of strut are joined.

M. Provide white strut plastic end caps on the ends of all struts.

N. Threaded rods shall not protrude more than ½” beyond the last nut.



3.03 PROTECTION


END OF SECTION

Electrical Identification 16075-1 11487A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/OR/Clean Water Services/11487A10/Specifications/16075 (Bidset) April 2021 - BID

SECTION 16075

ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes Requirements for: 1. Identifying electrical, instrumentation, and process equipment and components. 2. Material, manufacturing and installation requirements for identification devices.

B. Related Specifications: 1. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures. 2. Division 11. 3. Division 13. 4. Division 15. 5. Division 16. 6. Division 17.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. Refer to Section 16050 - Common Work Results for Electrical.

1.03 DEFINITIONS



A. Nameplates: 1. Provide a nameplate for each piece of mechanical equipment, process

equipment, valve, pump, mixer, feeder, fan, air-handling unit, motor, switch, receptacle, controller, instrument transducer, instrument power supply, solenoid, motor control center, starter, panelboard, switchboard, individually mounted or plug-in type circuit protector or motor controller, disconnect switch, bus duct tap switch, time switch, relay and for any other control device or major item of electrical equipment, either located in the field or within panels.

2. Provide all nameplates of identical style, color, and material throughout the facility.

3. Provide new nameplates for all existing equipment worked on in this project.

B. Wire Numbers: 1. Coordinate the wire numbering system with all vendors of equipment so that

every field wire has a unique number associated with it for the entire system: a. Control and Instrumentation wires and cables shall be assigned a unique

identification number following OWNER standards. b. Wire numbers shall correspond to the terminal block number to which they

are attached in the control panel. c. Internal panel wires on a common terminal shall have the same wire

number.


d. Multiconductor cables shall be assigned a cable number that shall be attached to the cable at intermediate pull boxes and stub-up locations beneath freestanding equipment. All multi-conductor and instrumentation cables shall be identified at pull points as described above: 1) Label armored multiconductor cable using the conduit number following

the requirements for conduit markers as described within this Specification, except conduit markers shall only be required at the source and the destination.

2) All spare conductors shall be individually labeled. Label the destination at the source and label the source at the destination.

e. Spare wiring and terminals shall be tagged as spares. 2. Power cables and wires shall be assigned a unique identification number as

specified by OWNER.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Sections 01330 – Submittal Procedures, and Section 16050 - Common Work Results for Electrical.

B. Product Data: 1. Nameplates:

a. Color. b. Size:

1) Outside dimensions. 2) Lettering.

c. Material. d. Mounting means.

2. Equipment Nameplate Schedule: a. Show exact wording for each nameplate. b. Include nameplate and letter sizes. c. Schedule format shall match equipment nameplate schedule attached at the

end of this section. d. Submit equipment nameplate schedule for approval before engraving

nameplates. 3. Wire Numbers:

a. Manufacturer’s catalog data for wire labels and label printer. 4. The CONTRACTOR shall submit samples for each type of Electrical

Identification device intended to be provided for this project for review and approval. Samples of the materials and colors proposed for the WORK and application instructions shall be included. Devices shall indicate proposed text sizes, lettering and background coloring and related information.

C. Record Documents: 1. Update the circuit/raceway block diagrams to reflect the exact quantity of wire

numbers including spares and destination points for all wires.


A. Schedule a pre-installation conference in accordance with Section 16050 – Common Work Results for Electrical in order to clearly define the requirements specified for equipment identification:


1. Representatives of the CONTRACTOR, OWNER, and ENGINEER shall convene before any major purchases of cable or conductors and before the installation or termination of any cables or conductors.



1.08 WARRANTY


1.09 SYSTEM START UP


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Nameplates and Signs: 1. One of the following or equal:

a. Brady. b. Seton.

B. Conductor and Cable Markers: 1. Heat-Shrinkable Tubing:

a. One of the following or equal: 1) Raychem. 2) Brady. 3) Thomas & Betts. 4) Kroy.

2. Marker Printer: a. One of the following or equal:

1) Brady XC Plus.

C. Conduit and Raceway Markers: 1. One of the following or equal:

a. Panduit. b. Almetek.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Nameplates: 1. General:

a. Identification tags shall utilize the OWNER standard numbering system for equipment supplied and installed as part of this project. Identification tags installed for outdoor equipment shall be rated for weatherproof type.

b. When identifying a power source for equipment, the tag shall include the source name and circuit or compartment number (i.e., “100MCC0101-4F” or “100IP0101, CKT. #1”).


c. For all equipment, identification shall include the descriptive name on the first line, the CWS standard tag number on the second line and the power source on the third line (e.g.,

Secondary Clarifier 7 RAS Pump #1

46P1801

Power Source 100MCC0101-4F).

d. Text shall be centered on all nameplates and identification devices. 2. Electrical Equipment:

a. Disconnect Switches: Each local power disconnect switch and circuit breaker for motors, instrument transmitters, controllers, and other equipment shall be identified with a phenolic nameplate. The nameplate shall identify the load served by equipment name and tag number, and the power source. Nameplates shall be not less than 1 inch high with lettering not smaller than 1/4 inch. Nameplates shall be attached using self-tapping S.S. screws.

b. Switchgear and MCC: Each switchgear/MCC shall be identified with a phenolic nameplate (e.g. “100SWGR0101” or “100MCC0101”). Each switchgear/MCC compartment/bucket shall be identified with a phenolic nameplate (e.g., “1A” or “4F”). The nameplate shall identify the load served by name and tag number. Stand-alone starters, drives, and similar equipment shall also identify the power source for the starter, drive, etc. Nameplates shall be attached using S.S. self-tapping screws. Nameplates shall be not less than 2.25 inches high, with 1-inch high lettering and 1/2-inch-high tag number lettering.

c. Switchgear/MCC compartments/buckets, VFDs, enclosed starter panels, and similar electrical equipment: Each compartment/bucket shall be identified with a phenolic nameplate for the load it serves (e.g., “Secondary Clarifier 7 RAS Pump #1, 46P1801”). Stand-alone starters, drives, and similar equipment shall also identify the power source for the starter, drive, etc. Nameplates shall be attached using S.S. self-tapping screws. Nameplates shall be not less than 2 inches high, with 1/2-inch-high lettering and 1/2-inch- high tag number lettering.

d. Local Control Panels (LCP), Local Control Stations (LCS): Each LCP and LCS shall include a nameplate on the enclosure face identifying the panel name and tag number. Include the power source for each panel. Each panel-mounted device (internal and external) shall be identified. Pilot devices shall utilize collar-type, oversize nameplates provided with the pilot devices. Non-pilot devices shall have phenolic nameplates, attached using permanent adhesive. Internal panel devices shall have phenolic identification plates (hand markings not permitted) and shall be attached using permanent adhesive. Wiring and terminal blocks. 1) LCP and LCS master nameplate shall be not less than 1 inch high with

not less than 1/2-inch lettering. 2) External and internal panel devices shall have nameplates not less than

1/2-inch-high with not less than 3/16-inch lettering. e. Field Instrument, Motor, and Pump Identification:

1) Attach instrument tags to all field instrument devices that includes process switches, instrument elements, sensors, transducers, control valves, motors, and pumps. See Owner’s “EQUIPMENT TAG


NUMBERING STANDARDS” that includes an example figure and the following list of tagging material: • Tag Material: SAFETYCAL FLAP TAG FT-1 Black 5”X3” • Label Material: Brady 2” wide white (M71C-2000-595-WT or

equiv.) 3 3/4”X 2” • Font Size is 14 point standard except Instrument Number which is

24 point Bold. Label text color shall be black unless instrument is used for DEQ purposes, then text shall be red.

• Label text will be capitalized and centered. First line of tag will be Instrument Number. Second and if necessary third lines will be Instrument Description. Fourth line will be Instrument Type (pH transmitter, flow transmitter, etc.) Fifth line will be I/O address. Last line will be Power Source Location if 4-wire device or say “Loop Powered” if 2-wire device.

• Label will be neatly centered under laminated cover of tag with no air bubbles.

• Install 1/4” grommet for stainless steel fastener. • Stainless Steel wire fastener

2) Attach the nametag to the flexible conduit connection to the respective instrument, motor, or pump.

f. Instrument Panel Instrumentation: 1) All back of panel instruments shall be provided with black-white-black

plastic laminate nameplates engraved with the instrument's full tag number. Nameplates shall be secured to the panel with stainless steel screws.

2) All front of panel instruments shall include the instrument's full tag number, service description, and (if relevant) power source in the nameplate legend. Unless it is part of the instrument, the nameplate shall be engraved black-white-black plastic laminate, secured with stainless steel screws.

3. Signs: a. Automatic Equipment and High Voltage Signs:

1) Suitable for exterior use. 2) In accordance with OSHA regulations.

4. Conductor and Cable Markers: a. Machine printed black characters on white tubing. b. 10-point type or larger.

5. Conduit and Raceway Markers: a. 16 GA stainless steel, 3/4-inch by 2-inch minimum. b. Stamped or engraved lettering. c. Minimum 1/4-inch high letters.

6. Equipment and Device Labels: a. Provide identifying nameplate and nametag on new and reused panels and

equipment as shown in Supplement Signage for Existing Panels and Equipment, or as listed elsewhere. Enclosure identification shall be located on the enclosure surface of PLC control panel, local control stations, junction boxes, and any other power, control, or signal enclosure. 1) Nameplates: Enclosure identification located on the enclosure face with

rectangular screw-on nameplates. 2) Materials: Laminated phenolic plastic nameplates with white

background and engraved black enamel filled lettering.


3) Fastening: Secure with self-tapping Type 316 stainless steel screws. 4) Size: 2 1/4 inch high plate. 5) Test:

a) Descriptive Name: 1 inch high block lettering. b) Descriptive Tag: 1/2 inch high block lettering.

6) For the same piece of equipment, descriptive nameplate shall be consistently provided at various locations for all associated equipment with that piece.


A. Nameplates: 1. Provide all nameplates for control panel operator devices (i.e., pushbuttons,

selector switches, pilot lights, etc.): a. Same material and same color and appearance as the device nameplates,

in order to achieve an aesthetically consistent and coordinated system. b. Provide a nameplate on both the front and the back of all pilot device. The

nameplate on the back of the device shall be visible when the respective enclosure door on which the pilot device is installed on is open.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION


B. Nameplates: 1. Attach nameplates to equipment with self-tapping stainless-steel screws,

approved waterproof epoxy-based cement or install in metal holders welded to the equipment as specified for each equipment.

2. Nameplates shall be aligned and level or plumb to within 1/64 inch over the entire length: a. Misaligned or crooked nameplates shall be remounted or provide new

enclosures at the discretion of the ENGINEER.

C. Conductor and Cable Markers: 1. Apply all conductor and cable markers before termination. 2. Non Heat-Shrinkable Tubing:

a. Tubing shall be sized for the wire and insulation on which it is to be placed. b. Tubing shall be tight on the wire. c. Characters shall face the open panel and shall read from left to right or top

to bottom. d. Marker shall start within 1/32 inch of the end of the stripped insulation point. e. Identification labels shall be installed at each conductor termination.

3. Conductor numbers shall be named based on the equipment tag of the field device utilizing the electrical power source. The form of the tag shall be 406P1205C2 where ‘406P1205’ represents the equipment designation; ‘C’ indicated a control cable and 2 is a sequential number developed as part of the circuit design. Cable type designations shall follow the designations listed below: a. C - Control


b. S - Signal (below 80 volts AC or DC) c. P - Power d. N - Network (Ethernet, Profibus ...)

D. Conduit Markers: 1. Furnish and install conduit markers for every conduit in the electrical system or

part of the process system. Conduits shall be identified as indicated on the circuit/raceway block diagrams: a. Conduit markings shall match the circuit/raceway block diagrams. b. For conduits not shown on circuit/raceway block diagrams, provide conduit

markings as described below: 1) Start with a prefix letter that designates its purpose (“C” for control, “P”

for power, “S” for Signal, and “PC” for combined power and control), followed by a facility code, followed by a sequence number. e.g., C- 100P0101 is a control conduit in the IPS facility for pump 1. P- 100P0101 is a power conduit in the IPS facility for pump 1. S- 100P0101 is a signal conduit in the IPS facility for pump 1. PC- 340FV1301 is a combined power and control conduit in PEPS facility for control valve (Combined circuit allowed per OWNER approval only).

2) If the conduit is a continuation or branch of another conduit, the last space is a letter, such as A,B,C, etc.

3) When a single loop network circuit is utilized among equipment, conduit number for coming and leaving the equipment shall be assigned a prefix from and to. e.g. NFR: 100P0101 is a communication network from IPS Facility Pump 1. NTO: 100P0102 is a communication network to IPS Facility Pump 2.

2. Mark Conduits at the Following Locations: a. Each end and every 100 feet for conduits greater than 10 feet in length. b. Where the conduit penetrates a wall or structure. c. Where the conduit emerges from the ground, slab, etc.

3. Mark conduits after the conduits have been fully painted. 4. Position conduit markers so that they are easily read from the floor. 5. 16-gauge stainless steel tags 3/4-inch by 2-inch minimum - conduit tags shall be

attached to the raceway with Type 316 stainless steel wires. Tags shall be laser engraved.

6. Mark conduits before construction review by ENGINEER for punch list purposes. 7. Label intrinsically safe conduits in accordance with the requirements of the

National Electrical Code (NEC).

E. Labeling: 1. Furnish and install permanent warning signs at mechanical equipment that may

be started automatically or from remote locations: a. Fasten warning signs with round head stainless steel screws or bolts. b. Locate and mount in a manner to be clearly legible to Operations Personnel.

2. Furnish and install permanent and conspicuous warning signs on equipment (front and back), doorways to equipment rooms, pull boxes, manholes, and where the voltage exceeds 600 volts.

3. Place warning signs on utilization equipment that has more than one source of power. Use warning signs to identify every panel and circuit number of the disconnecting means all external power sources:


a. Place warning signs on utilization equipment that has 120 VAC control voltage sources used for interlocking.

b. Identify panel and circuit number or conductor tag for control voltage source disconnecting means.

4. Each switch, receptacle and similar device shall include a nameplate indicating the power source and circuit number providing power to the switch or receptacle, example PNL-ABC CKT15. For circuits other than 120V, identify the voltage and phase (e.g. 277V, 1Ø or 480V, 3Ø).

5. Each panelboard shall be identified with a phenolic nameplate with the black outside cut to expose white lettering. The nameplate shall include the panel name and tag number, voltage, phase, ampere rating and power source. Nameplate shall be 2.25 inches high with 1/2-inch-high lettering and attached using self- tapping stainless-steel screws.

6. Each manhole, handhole, vault or underground pull box lid shall be clearly identified as “Electric”. The text shall be stick welded onto the lid with 4” uppercase characters. The text shall include the identification number shown on the drawings, and shall further identify the manhole, handhole or pull box as “Medium Voltage Power”, “Low Voltage Power”, “Control”, “Signal” or “Communication”, as applicable.

7. Aboveground pull boxes, junction boxes and terminal boxes shall be identified using a stainless-steel tag attached to the enclosure using S.S. self-tapping screws. Identify the box as “Power”, “Control”, “Signal” or “Fiber Optic” as applicable. Assign unique box numbers in accordance with OWNER standards.

8. Each exterior and pole-mounted luminaire shall include a nameplate that includes information for the lamp type, wattage, voltage rating and power source for the luminaire. Nameplates shall be readable standing at grade, 2-inch-high with 1/2- inch-high lettering. Nameplates shall be stainless steel with stamped or engraved lettering.

9. Provide arc flash labeling in accordance with NEC. 10. Provide labeling indicating short circuit ratings for all power distribution

equipment and control panels in accordance with the NEC and UL requirements.

F. Signs: 1. Automatic Equipment and High Voltage Signs:

a. Mount permanent warning signs at mechanical equipment that may be started automatically from remote locations. Fasten warning signs with round head stainless steel screws or bolts. Locate and mount warning signs in a suitable manner that is acceptable to the ENGINEER.

b. Mount permanent and conspicuous warning signs on the front and back of equipment, doorways to equipment rooms, pull boxes, and manholes where the voltage exceeds 600 volts.

c. Place warning signs on equipment that has more than one source of power: 1) Warning sign to identify every power source.

d. Place warning signs on equipment that has a 120 VAC control voltage source used for interlocking.

2. Provide room signage at Electrical room entrances indicating “Warning-High- Voltage”.

3. Provide additional signage in accordance with applicable NEC requirements. 4. Provide 20 placard-style signs (7 inch by 10 inch) with warnings to be selected by

the OWNER during construction. Placard signs shall be W.H. Brady B-302 style or approved equal.


G. Equipment Labels: 1. Locate and install on equipment or concrete equipment base. 2. Anchor to equipment or base for easy removal and replacement with ordinary

hand tools.


A. Replace any nameplates, signs, conductor markers, cable markers or raceway labels that in the sole opinion of the ENGINEER do not meet the ENGINEER’s aesthetic requirements.

3.03 SCHEDULES

A. Submit nameplate schedules on 11 by 17-inch sheets.

END OF SECTION

600 Volt or Less Wires and Cables 16123-1 11487A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/OR/Clean Water Services/11487A10/Specifications/16123 (Bidset) April 2021 - BID

SECTION 16123

600 VOLT OR LESS WIRES AND CABLES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes Requirements for: 1. 600-volt class wire and cable. 2. Instrumentation class wire and cable. 3. Network cable.

B. Related Sections: 1. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as


subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of Contractor’s Work

1.02 REFERENCES

A. Refer to Section 16050 – Common Work Results for Electrical.

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. B 3 - Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire. 2. B 8 - Specification for Concentric-Lay–Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard,

Medium-Hard, or Soft. 3. A167 - Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat Resisting Chromium-Nickel

Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. 4. B263 - Standard Test Method for Determination of Cross-Sectional Area of

Stranded Conductors.

C. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA): 1. IPCEA S-61-402 for thermoplastic insulated wire and cable for the transmission

and distribution of electrical energy. 2. IPCEA S-61-402 for rubber insulated wire and cable for the transmission and

distribution of electrical energy. 3. T-29-520 - Conducting Vertical Cable Tray Flame Tests and a Theoretical Heat

Input of 210,000 Btu/hour. 4. S-58-679 - Standard for Control Cable Conductor Identification.

D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. Article 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC). 2. Article 72 - National Fire Alarm Code. 3. Article 101 - Life Safety Code. 4. Article 262 - Standard Method of Test for Flame Travel and Smoke of Wires and

Cables for Use in Air-Handling Spaces.

E. Federal Specification J-C 30A.


F. Underwriter's Laboratories Inc., (UL): 1. UL 1277 Subject - Electrical Power and Control Tray Cables with Optional

Optical- fiber Members. 2. UL 1063 - Machine-Tool Wires and Cables. 3. UL 1581 - Reference Standard for Electrical Wires, Cables, and Flexible Cords. 4. UL-2196 - Tests for Fire Resistive Cables. 5. UL-1424 - Cables for Power-Limited Fire-Alarm Circuits. 6. UL-1569 - Metal-Clad Cables. 7. UL-2225 - Metal-Clad Cables and Cable-Sealing Fittings for Use in Hazardous

(Classified) Locations. 8. 13 - Standard for Safety Power-Limited Circuit Cables. 9. 44 - Standard for Safety Thermoset - Insulated Wires and Cables. 10. 62 - Standard for Safety Flexible Cord and Fixture Wire. 11. 486A - Standard for Safety; Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with

Copper Conductors. 12. 486C - Splicing Wire Connectors. 13. 510 - Standard for Safety Polyvinyl Chloride, Polyethylene, and Rubber

Insulating Tape. 14. 854 - Standard for Safety Service-Entrance Cables.

G. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (IEEE): 1. 48 - Standard Test Procedures and Requirements for Alternating-Current Cable

Terminations.

H. National Electrical Manufacturers’ Association (NEMA): 1. CC 1 - Electric Power Connectors for Substations. 2. WC 55 - Instrumentation Cables and Thermocouple Wire. 3. WC 57- Standard for Control, Thermocouple Extension, and Instrumentation

Cables. 4. WC 70 - Standard for Nonshielded Power Cables Rated 2,000 Volts or Less for

the Distribution of Electrical Energy.

1.03 DEFINITIONS


B. Definitions of terms and other electrical considerations as set forth in the: 1. Insulated Cable Engineering Association (ICEA). 2. American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM).


A. Furnish and install the complete wire and cable system.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Sections 01330 and 16050 – Common Work Results for Electrical.

B. Product Data: 1. Manufacturer of Wire and Cable. 2. Insulation:


a. Type. b. Voltage class.

3. American Wire Gauge size. 4. Conductor material. 5. Pulling compounds.

C. Shop Drawings: 1. Show splice locations.

a. For each proposed splice location, provide written justification describing why the splice is necessary. Splices are not allowed unless approved by the ENGINEER.

D. Test Reports: 1. Submit test reports for meg-ohm 1000-volt DC tests. 2. Submit test reports for continuity tests. 3. All test shall conform with NETA standards. A printed hard copy of the test

reports shall be provided to the Owner.

E. Calculations: 1. Submit cable pulling calculations for all cables larger than 2/0 AWG and pulling

lengths longer than 200 feet. 2. Submit cable pulling calculations for all conductor sizes for pulling lengths longer

than 500 feet. 3. Provide a table showing the manufacturer’s recommended maximum cable

tension and sidewall pressure for each cable type and size included in the calculations.

4. Submit the calculations to the ENGINEER a minimum of 2 weeks before the cable pull.

1.06 CABLE TESTING AND REPLACEMENT

A. All cables that fail to meet NETA standards shall be replaced at the discretion of the Engineer and Owner.

B. All wires and cables shall be tested individually.

C. All tests shall conform to NETA standards.



B. All wires and cables shall be UL listed and labeled.



1.09 WARRANTY

A. Refer to Section 16050- Common Work Results for Electrical.




PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. One of the Following or Equal: 1. 600 Volt Class Wire and Cable:

a. General Cable. b. Okonite Company. c. Southwire Company.

2. Instrumentation Class Wire and Cable: a. Alpha Wire Company. b. Belden CDT. c. General Cable BICC Brand. d. Okonite Company. e. Rockbestos Surprenant Cable Corporation.

3. Network Cables: a. Belden CDT. b. Siemens. c. Lucent.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Conductors: 1. Copper per ASTM B 3. 2. Minimum 97 percent conductivity.


A. General: 1. Conductors, include grounding conductors, shall be stranded copper. Solid

conductors shall not be permitted. Aluminum conductor wire and cable will not be permitted.

2. Provide new wires and cables manufactured within 1 year of the date of delivery to the site.

3. Permanently mark each wire and cable with the following at 24 inch intervals: a. American Wire Gauge (AWG) size. b. Voltage rating. c. Insulation type. d. UL symbol. e. Month and year of manufacture. f. Manufacturer's name.

4. Identify and mark wire and cable as specified in Section 16075 – Electrical Identification: a. Use integral color insulation for Number 2 AWG and smaller wire. Tape or

integral color insulation shall be permitted for wire #2 AWG and larger. b. Wrap colored tape around cable larger than Number 2 AWG. Tape shall be

2” minimum. Provide 2 wraps minimum.


B. 600 Volt Class Wire and Cable: 1. Provide American Wire Gauge (AWG) or kcmil sizes as indicated on the

Drawings: a. When not indicated on the Drawings, size wire as follows:

1) In accordance with the National Electrical Code: a) Use 75-degree Celsius ampacity ratings. b) Ampacity rating after all derating factors, equal to or greater than

rating of the overcurrent device. 2) Provide Number 12 AWG minimum for power conductors. 3) Provide Number 14 AWG minimum for control conductors.

b. Provide tin plated copper ground wire to be used on aluminum cable tray. 2. Provide Class B stranding per ASTM B 8:

a. Provide Class C stranding where extra flexibility is required. 3. Insulation:

a. XHHW-2 for all individual power conductors #6 AWG and larger. b. THWN for all individual power conductors small than #6 AWG. c. THWN for all individual control conductors. d. 90-degree Celsius rating in wet or dry locations.

4. Conductors for feeders shall be sized to prevent a voltage drop exceeding 3 percent at the farthest outlet of power, heating, and lighting loads, or combinations of such loads, and where the maximum total voltage drop on both feeders and branch circuits to farthest connected load does not exceed 5 percent.

5. Multi-conductor Cables: a. Type 1 – Multi-conductor Control Cable:

1) Conductors: a) No. 14 AWG, seven -strand copper, tray cable rated. b) Insulation: 30-mil PVC. c) UL 1581 listed as Type XHHW-2 rated VW-1. d) Conductor group bound with spiral wrap of barrier type. e) Tray cable rated. f) Color Code: In accordance with ICEA S-58-679, Method 1,

Table 2. 2) Cable: Passes the ICEA T-29-520 210,000 Btu per hour Vertical Tray

Flame Test. 3) Cable Sizes:

No. of Conductors Max. Outside Diameter (Inches)

Jacket Thickness (Mils)

3 0.41 45

5 0.50 45

6 0.53 45

9 0.64 60

12 0.72 60

19 0.83 60

25 1.00 60

37 1.15 80


b. Type 2, Multi-conductor Power Cable: 1) Conductors:

a) Class B stranded, coated copper. b) Insulation: Chemically cross-linked ethylene-propylene with

Hypalon jacket. c) UL 1581 listed as Type EPR, rated VW-1. d) Color Code:

(1) Conductors, size No. 8 AWG and smaller, colored conductors, ICEA S-58-679, Method 1, Table 1.

(2) Conductors, size No. 6 AWG and larger, ICEA S-58-679, Method Y.

2) Cable pass the ICEA T-29-520 210,000 Btu/hr Vertical Tray Flame Test.

3) Cable Sizes:

Conductor Size

Minimum Ground Wire

Size

No. of Conductors

(not including ground)

Max Outside Diameter (Inches)

Nominal Jacket

Thickness (Mils)

12 12 2 0.42 45 3 0.45 45 4 0.49 45

10 10 2 0.54 60 3 0.58 60 4 0.63 60

8 10 2 0.62 60 3 0.66 60 4 0.72 60

6 8 3 0.74 60 4 0.81 60

4 6 3 0.88 60 4 0.97 80

2 6 3 1.01 80 4 1.11 80

1/0 6 3 1.22 80 4 1.35 80

2/0 4 3 1.32 80 4 1.46 80

4/0 4 3 1.56 80 4 1.78 110

6. Instrumentation Cables: a. Type 3, No. 18 AWG, Twisted, Shielded Pair, Instrumentation Cable: Single

pair, designed for noise rejection for process control, computer, or data log application is meeting NEMA WC 55 requirements. 1) Outer Jacket: 45-mil nominal thickness. 2) Individual Pair Shield: 1.35-mil, double-faced aluminum/synthetic

polymer overlapped to provide 100 percent coverage. 3) Dimension: 0.28-inch nominal OD. 4) Conductors:

a) Bare soft annealed copper, Class B, seven-strand concentric, meeting requirements of ASTM B8.

b) 26 AWG, seven-strand tinned copper drain wire.


c) Insulation: 15-mil nominal PVC. d) Jacket: 4-mil nominal nylon. e) Color Code: Pair conductors black and white.

b. Type 4, No. 18 AWG, Twisted, Shielded Triad Instrumentation Cable: Single triad, design for noise rejection for process control, computer, or data log applications meeting NEMA WC 55 requirements. 1) Outer Jacket: 45-mil nominal. 2) Individual Pair Shield: 1.35-mil, double-faced aluminum/synthetic

polymer, overlapped to provide 100 percent coverage. 3) Dimension: 0.29-inch nominal OD. 4) Conductors:

a) Bare soft annealed copper, Class B, seven-strand concentric, meeting requirements of ASTM B8.

b) 26 AWG, seven-strand, tinned copper drain wire. c) Insulation: 15-mil nominal PVC. d) Jacket: 4-mil nylon. e) Color Code: Triad conductors black, red, and white.

c. Type 5, No. 18 AWG, Multi-Twisted, Shielded Pairs with a Common, Overall Shield Instrumentation Cable: Designed for use as instrumentation, process control, and computer cable, meeting NEMA WC 55 requirements. 1) Conductors:

a) Bare soft annealed copper, Class B, seven-strand concentric, in Accordance with ASTM B8.

b) Tinned copper drain wires. c) Pair drain wire size AWG 20, group drain wire size AWG 18. d) Insulation: 15-mil PVC. e) Jacket: 4-mil nylon. f) Color Code: Pair conductors black and red with red conductor

numerically printed for group identification. g) Individual Pair Shield: 1.35-mil, double-faced aluminum/synthetic

polymer. 2) Cable Shield: 2.35-mil, double-faced aluminum/synthetic polymer,

overlapped for 100 percent coverage. 3) Cable Sizes:

Number of Pairs Max. Outside Diameter (Inches)

Nominal Jacket Thickness (Mils)

4 0.50 45

8 0.68 60

12 0.82 60

16 0.95 80

24 1.16 80

36 1.33 80

50 1.56 80

7. VFD Cables: a. Type 6 – Shielded VFD cable


.

1) Conductor:

a) Provide Class B stranding in accordance with ASTM B3 and B8. b) Copper conductor.

2) Insulation: a) Cross-linked Polyethylene, XLPE. b) 90 degree Celsius rating. c) UL 44 Type RHH/RHW-2 or XHHW-2. d) 2,000 volts.

3) Ground: a) Provide Class B compressed stranded bare copper in accordance

with ASTM B3 and B8. b) 3 symmetrically placed bare copper conductors in direct contact

with shield. c) Equivalent ground size 50 percent of the phase conductor size.

4) Filler: a) Cable sizes 8 and 6 use polypropylene filler. b) Other cable sizes use paper filler.

5) Metallic shield: a) Overall 5 mil bare copper tape shield with 50 percent overlap.

6) Outer jacket: a) UL 1277 Type PVC.

7) Cable tray rated, UL Type TC-ER. 8) Cable Sizes:

Conductor Size

Minimum Ground Wire

Size

No. of Conductors (not

including ground)

Max Outside Diameter (Inches)

Nominal Jacket

Thickness (Mils)

12 12 3 0.615 60

10 10 3 0.67 60

8 8 3 0.77 80

6 6 3 0.895 80

4 4 3 0.995 80

2 2 3 1.125 80

4/0 4/0 3 1.78 80

C. Network Cables: 1. Type 11, Shielded Category 6 (CAT 6):

a. Conductors: 1) 24 AWG solid bare copper conductors. 2) Shielded cable with shielded connectors. 3) Provide strain relief on connectors.

b. Insulation:


1) Polyolefin. 2) 4 non-bonded twisted pair cables formed into a cable core.

c. Color Code: 1) Pair 1: White/Blue Stripe and Blue. 2) Pair 2: White/Orange Stripe and Orange. 3) Pair 3: White/Green Stripe and Green. 4) Pair 4: White/Brown Stripe and Brown.

d. Outer Jacket: 1) Oil and sunlight resistant PVC with ripcord. 2) Color red.

e. Electrical Characteristics: 1) Frequency Range: 0.772-100 MHz. 2) Attenuation: 32.1dB/100m. 3) Near-End Crosstalk (NEXT): 39.3 dB. 4) Power Sum NEXT: 37.3 dB. 5) Attenuation to Crosstalk Ratio: 7.2 dB. 6) Power Sum Attenuation to Crosstalk Ratio: 5.3 dB/100m. 7) Equal Level Far-End Crosstalk (ELFEXT): 22.8 dB. 8) Power-Sum ELFEXT: 19.8 dB/100m. 9) Return Loss: 17.3 dB. 10) Propagation Delay: 537 ns/100m. 11) Delay Skew: 45 ns/100m. 12) Propagation Delay (Skew), max: 2.5 ns/100m

f. RJ45 Jacks: 1) Shall be CAT6 shielded. 2) Punch down and terminate on jacks as shown on the Drawings.

g. Patch Panels: 1) Shall be CAT6 shielded patch panels. 2) Punch down and terminate on patch panels as shown on the Drawings.

h. Terminate CAT 6 cables in an 8P8C T568B fashion.

2.04 ACCESSORIES

A. Tape: 1. Flame Retardant, Cold and Weather Resistant: 8.5-mil, vinyl plastic, Scotch

Brand 88.

B. Connectors and Terminations: 1. Nylon, Self-Insulated Crimp Connectors:

a. Manufacturers and Products: 1) Thomas & Betts; Sta-Kon. 2) Burndy; Insulug. 3) ILSCO.

2. Nylon, Self-Insulated, Crimp Locking-Fork, Torque-Type Terminator: a. Manufacturers and Products:

1) Thomas & Betts; Sta-Kon. 2) Burndy; Insulug. 3) ILSCO.

C. Cable Lugs: 1. In accordance with NEMA CC 1.


2. Rated 600 volts of same material as conductor metal. 3. Insulated, Locking-Fork, Compression Lugs:

a. Suitable for use with 75 degrees C wire at full NFPA 70, 75 degrees C ampacity.

b. Seamless. c. Manufacturers and Products:

1) Thomas & Betts; Sta-Kon. 2) ILSCO; ILSCONS.

4. Uninsulated Crimp Connectors and Terminators: a. Suitable for use with 75 degrees C wire at full NFPA 70, 75 degrees C

ampacity. b. Manufacturers and Products:

1) Thomas & Betts; Color-Keyed. 2) Burndy, Hydent. 3) ILSCO.

D. Cable Ties: 1. Nylon, adjustable, self-locking, and reusable. 2. Manufacturer and Product: Thomas & Betts: TY-RAP. 3. Cable ties installed outdoors shall be UV resistant and rated for use in direct

sunlight. Finish shall be black.

E. Heat Shrinkable Insulation: 1. Thermally stabilized, cross-linked polyolefin. 2. Manufacturer and Product: Thomas & Betts; SHRINK-KON.

F. Pulling Compound: 1. Nontoxic, noncorrosive, noncombustible, nonflammable, water-based lubricant;

UL listed. 2. Suitable for rubber, neoprene, PVC, polyethylene, hypalon, CPE, and lead-

covered wire and cable. 3. Suitable for zinc-coated steel, aluminum, PVC, bituminized fiber, and fiberglass

raceways. 4. Manufacturers and Products:

a. Polywater, Inc. b. Cable Grip Co.


A. Assembly and testing of cable shall comply with the applicable requirement of ICEA Publication No. S-68-516.

B. Test in accordance with the requirements of UL 44 and 854 Standards.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION


B. Color Coding:


1. Color coding shall be consistent throughout the facility. 2. The following color code shall be followed for all 240/120 Volt and 208/120 Volt

systems: a. Phase A - black. b. Phase B - red. c. Phase C - blue. d. Single Phase System - black for one hot leg, red for the other. e. Neutral - white. f. High Phase or Wild Leg - orange. g. Equipment Ground - green.

3. The following color code shall be followed for all 480/277 Volt systems: a. Phase A - brown. b. Phase B - orange. c. Phase C - yellow. d. Neutral - gray. e. Equipment Ground - green.

4. The following color code shall be followed for all 120 VAC control wiring: a. Power - red. b. Neutral - white.

5. The following color code shall be followed for all general purpose DC control circuits: a. Negative – white/blue stripe. b. Positive - blue.

6. The following color code shall be followed for all signal (4-20mA or 1-5VDC) circuits: a. Negative - black. b. Positive - white.

7. Switch legs shall be violet. 3-way switch runners shall be pink. 8. Wires in intrinsically safe circuits shall be light blue. 9. Wire colors shall be implemented in the following methods:

a. Wires manufactured of the desired color. b. Continuously spiral wrap the first 6 inches of the wire from the termination

point with colored tape: 1) Colored tape shall be wrapped to overlap 1/2 of the width of the tape.

C. Install conductors only after the conduit installation is complete, and all enclosures have been vacuumed clean, and the affected conduits have been swabbed clean and dry: 1. Install wires only in approved raceways. 2. Do not Install wire:

a. In incomplete conduit runs. b. Until after the concrete work and plastering is completed.

D. Properly coat wires and cables with pulling compound before pulling into conduits and prevent mechanical damage to conductors during installation: 1. For all Number 4 AWG and larger, use an approved wire-pulling lubricant while

cable is being installed in conduit: a. Ideal Products. b. Polywater Products. c. 3M Products. d. Greenlee Products.


e. Or equal as recommended by cable manufacturer. f. Do not use oil, grease or similar substances.

E. Cable Pulling: 1. For cables Number 1 AWG and smaller, install cables by hand. 2. For cables larger than Number 1 AWG, power pulling winches may be used if

they have cable tension monitoring equipment. 3. Provide documentation that maximum cable pulling tension was no more than 75

percent of the maximum recommended level as published by the cable manufacturer. If exceeded, the ENGINEER and OWNER may, at his discretion, require replacement of the cable.

4. Ensure cable pulling crews have all calculations and cable pulling limitations while pulling cable.

5. Make splices or add a junction box or pullbox where required to prevent cable pulling tension or sidewall pressure from exceeding 75 percent of manufacturer’s recommendation for the specified cable size: a. Make splices in manholes or pull boxes only. b. Leave sufficient slack to make proper connections. c. Splices in manholes shall consist of crimp connections with heat shrinkable

tubing. d. Splices in pullboxes shall utilize insulated terminal blocks.

F. Use smooth-rolling sheaves and rollers when pulling cable into cable tray to keep pulling tension and bending radius within manufacturer’s recommendations.

G. Install and terminate all wire in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

H. Neatly arrange and lace conductors in all switchboards, panelboards, pull boxes, and terminal cabinets by means of wire ties: 1. Do not lace wires in gutter or panel channel. 2. Install all wire ties with a flush cutting wire tie installation tool:

a. Use a tool with an adjustable tension setting. 3. Do not leave sharp edges on wire ties.

I. Terminate solid conductors at equipment terminal screws with the conductor tightly wound around the screw so that it does not protrude beyond the screw head: 1. Wrap the conductor clockwise so that the wire loop is closed as the loop is

tightened.

J. Terminate stranded conductors on equipment box lugs such that all conductor strands are confined within the lug: 1. Use ring type lugs if box lugs are not available on the equipment.

K. Splices: 1. Provide continuous circuits from origin to termination whenever possible.

a. Obtain ENGINEER’s approval prior to making any splices. 2. Lighting and receptacle branch circuits may be spliced without approval from the

ENGINEER. 3. Where splices are necessary because of extremely long wire or cable lengths

that exceed standard manufactured lengths:


a. Refer to Section 16050 – Common Work Results for Electrical for box NEMA rating requirements.

b. Make splices in labeled junction boxes for power conductors. c. Make splices for control and instrument conductors in terminal boxes:

1) Provide terminal blocks. 2) Terminate all conductors on terminal blocks with wire ferrules.

4. Splices not permitted for power and control conductors. 5. If splices have been approved by the ENGINEER, clearly label junction and

terminal boxes containing splices with the word "SPLICE." Provide this label on approved power, control, and signal junction and terminal boxes.

6. Leave sufficient slack at junction boxes and termination boxes to make proper splices and connections. Do not pull splices into conduits.

7. Install splices with compression type butt splices and insulate using a heat-shrink sleeve: a. In NEMA 4 or NEMA 4X areas, provide heat-shrink sleeves that are listed

for submersible applications. 8. Splices in below grade pull boxes, in any box subject to flooding, and in wet

areas shall be made waterproof using: a. A heat shrink insulating system listed for submersible applications. b. An epoxy resin splicing kit. c. Other approved direct burial splice kit.

L. Apply circuit and wire markers to all wires as described below: 1. Circuit Identification Location: Identify power, instrumentation, and control

conductor circuits, using circuit name as described below, at each termination and in accessible locations such as manholes, hand-holes, panels, switchboards, motor control centers, pull boxes, and terminal boxes.

2. Circuit Name: a. Assign circuit name based on device or equipment at load end of circuit as

indicated on the Drawings and as described in Section 17050 article 3.01. b. Where this would result in same name being assigned to more than one

circuit, add number or letter to each otherwise identical circuit name to make it unique.

3. Method: a. Conductors No. 3 AWG and Smaller: Identify with sleeves or heat bond

markers. b. Taped-on markers or tags relying on adhesives not permitted. c. Cables and Conductors No. 2 and Larger:

1) Identify with marker plates; or 2) Tie-on cable marker tags. 3) Attach with nylon tie cord.

M. Instrumentation Class Cable: 1. Install instrumentation class cables in separate raceway systems from power

cables: a. Install instrument cable in metallic conduit within non-dedicated manholes or

pull boxes. b. Install cable without splices between instruments or between field devices

and instrument enclosures or panels. 2. Do not make intermediate terminations, except in designated terminal boxes as

indicated on the Drawings.


3. Refer to Section 16050 – Common Work Results for Electrical for shield grounding requirements.

N. Signal Cable: 1. Separate and isolate electrical signal cables from sources of electrical noise and

power cables by minimum 12 inches. Perpendicular crossings shall be acceptable.

O. Unsupported cables: 1. Provide Kellem’s grip or stainless steel wire mesh to support cable weight and

avoid stress on insulation.

P. Wiring Allowances: 1. Equipment locations may vary slightly from the drawings. Include an allowance

for necessary conductors and terminations for motorized equipment, electrical outlets, fixtures, communication outlets, instruments, and devices within 10 linear feet of locations indicated on the Drawings.

2. Locations for pull boxes, manholes, and duct banks may vary slightly from the drawings. Include an allowance for necessary conductors and related materials to provide conductors to all pull boxes, manholes and duct banks within 20 linear feet of locations indicated on the Drawings.

Q. Wiring within Cabinets and Enclosures: 1. All wiring within a cabinet or enclosure shall insulated.

R. Wire Ferrules: 1. All conductors #14 AWG and smaller that terminate on terminal blocks shall be

terminated using wire ferrules.

3.02 CATEGORY 6 CABLE TESTING

A. The permanent link shall be tested.

B. All test results shall be used by the CONTRACTOR to determine any polarity and noise anomalies and CONTRACTOR shall take immediate corrective action for all anomalies.

C. Test results shall be used by the CONTRACTOR to determine the viability of each sheath for transmission in accordance with the specifications of the cable manufacturer and the requirements imposed by the transmission system. This shall form part of the acceptance procedure for the cable plant. All results obtained by use of pair-scanner testing shall be collated by terminal outlet number and or riser pair number and presented to the OWNER at the conclusion of the testing. Test compilation shall be initialed and dated by the CONTRACTOR’s technician performing the test.

D. The CONTRACTOR shall utilize a level-III Fluke, PentaScanner, Wavetek or equal, twisted pair test instrument for the testing of all System Category copper cabling. All Category cable paths shall be tested at each jack for the following parameters and meet the requirements imposed by the TIA/EIA 568-B3 building wiring standard.


E. Category data cabling systems shall be performance verified using an automated test set. This test set shall be capable of testing for the continuity and length parameters defined above and provide for the following tests. 1. Wire Map. 2. Cable Length. 3. Pair-to-Pair NEXT. 4. Power Sum NEXT. 5. Attenuation. 6. Pair-to-Pair ELFEXT. 7. Power Sum ELFEXT. 8. Return Loss. 9. Propagation Delay. 10. Delay Skew.

F. A complete cable certification report shall be provided covering all locations.

G. The CONTRACTOR shall compile test results into the forms that contain all applicable test data. An external drive containing the test data and appropriate application (software) to display such in a windows-based environment shall be provided.



B. Grounding: 1. Refer to Section 16060 – Grounding and Bonding.

3.04 PROTECTION


END OF SECTION

Conduits 16130-1 11487A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/OR/Clean Water Services/11487A10/Specifications/16130 (Bidset) April 2021 - BID

SECTION 16130

CONDUITS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: 1. Metallic conduits. 2. Nonmetallic conduits. 3. Conduit bodies. 4. Conduit fittings and accessories. 5. Conduit installation.




1.02 REFERENCES

A. As specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical.

B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. C80.1 - Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit. 2. C80.3 - Steel Electrical Metallic Tubing. 3. C80.5 - Electrical Rigid Aluminum Conduit. 4. C80.6 - Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit.

C. National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA): 1. RN-1 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel

Conduit and Intermediate Steel Conduit. 2. TC2 - Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduit. 3. TC3 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and

Tubing. 4. TC7 - Smooth-Wall Coilable Electrical Polyethylene Conduit. 5. TC13 - Electrical Nonmetallic Tubing. 6. TC14 - Reinforced Thermosetting Resin Conduit (RTRC) and Fittings.

D. Underwriters Laboratories (UL): 1. 1 - Standard for Flexible Metal Conduit. 2. 6 - Standard for Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit - Steel. 3. 6A - Standard for Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit - Aluminum, Red Brass, and

Stainless Steel. 4. 360 - Standard for Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit. 5. 651 - Standard for Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit and Fittings. 6. 651B - Standard for Continuous Length HDPE Conduit. 7. 797 - Standard for Electrical Metallic Tubing - Steel.


8. 1242 - Standard for Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit - Steel. 9. 1653 - Standard for Electrical Nonmetallic Tubing. 10. 1660 - Standard for Liquid-Tight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit. 11. 1684 - Standard for Reinforced Thermosetting Resin Conduit (RTRC) and

Fittings.

1.03 DEFINITIONS


B. Specific definitions and abbreviations: 1. Conduit bodies: A separate portion of a conduit system that provides access

through a removable cover to the interior of the system at a junction of 2 or more conduit sections. Includes, but not limited to shapes C, E, LB, T, X, etc.

2. Conduit fitting: An accessory that serves primarily a mechanical purpose. Includes, but not limited to bushings, locknuts, hubs, couplings, reducers, etc.

3. GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit. 4. PCS: PVC coated rigid steel conduit. 5. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride rigid nonmetallic conduit. 6. SLT: Sealtight – liquid-tight flexible steel conduit. 7. NPT: National pipe thread.


A. Provide conduits, conduit bodies, fittings, junction boxes and all necessary components, whether or not indicated on the Drawings, as required, to install a complete electrical raceway system.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish submittals as specified in Section 01330, Submittal Procedures and Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical.

B. Product data: 1. Furnish complete manufacturer’s catalog sheets for every type and size of

conduit, fitting, conduit body, and accessories to be used on the Project. 2. Furnish complete manufacturer’s recommended special tools to be used for

installation if required. 3. Certified test results for PVC-coated metallic conduit showing the adhesive bond

is stronger than the tensile strength of the PVC. 4. List of manufacturer’s recommended spare parts.

C. Certifications: 1. Furnish PVC-coated conduit manufacturer’s certification for each installer.

D. Record Documents: 1. Incorporate all changes in conduit routing on electrical plan drawings. 2. Dimension underground and concealed conduits from building lines. 3. Furnish hard copy drawings and electronic files in AutoCAD format Version 2010.

E. Installation drawings: Installation drawings, including individual conduit numbers, routing, sizes, cable sizes, and circuit numbers for each conduit.


1.06 SPARE PARTS:

A. No spare parts are required.



B. All conduits, conduit bodies, and fittings shall be UL listed and labeled.

C. Every installer of PCA or PCS conduits shall be certified by the manufacturer for installation of the conduit, and be able to present a valid, unexpired installer certification card prior to installation beginning.

1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:


B. Do not expose type PVC, FRD, NFC and ENT to direct sunlight.

C. Do not store conduit in direct contact with the ground.

1.09 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS:


1.10 SEQUENCING:

A. Before installing any conduit or locating any device box: 1. Examine the complete set of Drawings and Specifications, and all applicable shop

drawings. 2. Verify all dimensions and space requirements and make any minor adjustments to

the conduit system as required to avoid conflicts with the building structure, other equipment, or the work of other trades.

1.11 WARRANTY:


1.12 SYSTEM START-UP:


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Galvanized rigid steel conduit: 1. One of the following or equal:

a. Western Tube and Conduit. b. Allied Tube and Conduit.


c. Wheatland Tube Co.

B. Polyvinyl chloride coated rigid steel conduit: 1. One of the following or equal:

a. Robroy Industries. b. Ocal, Inc.

C. Rigid Aluminum Conduit (RAC). 1. One of the following or equal:

a. Allied Tube and Conduit. b. Patriot Aluminium Products. c. Republic Conduit. d. Wheatland Tube Co.

D. Rigid nonmetallic PVC conduit: 1. One of the following or equal:

a. Carlon. b. Cantex. c. Triangle Conduit and Cable.

E. Sealtight liquid-tight flexible steel conduit: 1. One of the following or equal:

a. Southwire. b. AFC Cable Systems. c. Electriflex. d. Anaconda.

F. Conduit bodies: 1. One of the following or equal:

a. Crouse-Hinds. b. Appleton. c. O-Z / Gedney. d. Ocal. e. Robroy. f. Carlon.

G. Non-Metallic XD expansion/deflection fittings: Galvanized rigid steel conduit expansion fittings: 1. One of the following or equal:

a. Thomas & Betts. b. ABB. c. O-Z / Gedney.

H. PVC-coated rigid steel XD expansion/deflection fittings: 1. One of the following or equal:

a. Ocal, Inc. b. Robroy Ind. c. NEC, Inc. BlackGuard. d. Calbond.


I. Conduit sleeve: 1. One of the following or equal:

a. Crouse-Hinds. b. Appleton. c. O-Z / Gedney.

J. Conduit seals: 1. One of the following or equal:

a. Appleton. b. Crouse-Hinds. c. O-Z / Gedney.

K. Conduit hangers and supports: 1. As specified in Section 16070, Hangers and Supports.

L. Conduit through wall and floor seals: 1. The following or equal:

a. O-Z/Gedney: 1) Type "WSK". 2) Type “CSM”.

2.02 COMPONENTS

A. GRC: 1. All threads: NPT standard conduit threads with a 3/4-inch taper per foot:

a. Running conduit threads are not acceptable. 2. Hot-dip galvanized inside and out:

a. Ensures complete coverage and heats the zinc and steel to a temperature that ensures the zinc alloys with the steel over the entire surface.

b. Electro-galvanizing is not acceptable. 3. Manufactured in accordance with:

a. UL-6. b. ANSI C80.1.

B. PCS: 1. The steel conduit, before PVC coating, shall be new, unused, hot-dip galvanized

material, conforming to the requirements for type GRC. 2. Coated conduit NEMA Standard RN-1:

a. The galvanized coating may not be disturbed or reduced in thickness during the cleaning and preparatory process.

3. Factory bonded PVC jacket: a. The exterior galvanized surfaces shall be coated with primer before PVC

coating to ensure a bond between the zinc substrate and the PVC coating. b. Nominal thickness of the exterior PVC coating shall be 0.040 inch except

where part configuration or application of the piece, dictate otherwise. c. PVC coating on conduit and associated fittings shall have no sags, blisters,

lumps, or other surface defects and free of holes and holidays. d. The PVC adhesive bond on conduit and fittings shall be greater than the

tensile strength of the PVC plastic coating: 1) Confirm bond with certified test results.


4. A urethane coating shall be uniformly and consistently applied to the interior of all conduit and fittings: a. Nominal thickness of 0.002 inch. b. Conduit having areas with thin or no coating, are not acceptable. c. All threads shall be coated with urethane.

5. The PVC exterior and urethane interior coatings applied to the conduit shall afford sufficient flexibility to permit field bending without cracking or flaking at temperature above 30 degrees Fahrenheit.

6. PCS conduit bodies and fittings: a. Malleable iron. b. The conduit body, before PVC coating, shall be new, unused material and

shall conform to appropriate UL standards. c. The PVC coating on the outside of conduit bodies shall be 0.040 inch thick

and have a series of longitudinal ribs to protect the coating from tool damage during installation.

d. 0.002 inch interior urethane coating. e. Utilize the PVC coating as an integral part of the gasket design. f. Stainless steel cover screws heads shall be encapsulated with plastic to

assure corrosion protection. g. A PVC sleeve extending 1 conduit diameter or 2 inches, whichever is less,

shall be formed at each female conduit opening. 1) The inside diameter of the sleeve shall be the same as the outside

diameter of the conduit to be used. 2) The sleeve shall provide a vapor and moisture tight seal at every

connection.

C. SLT: 1. Temperature rated for use in the ambient temperature at the installed location but

not less than the following: a. General purpose:

1) Temperature range -20 degrees Celsius to +80 degrees Celsius. b. Oil resistant:

1) Temperature range -20 degrees Celsius to +60 degrees Celsius. 2. Sunlight resistant, weatherproof, and watertight. 3. Manufactured from single strip steel, hot-dip galvanized on all 4 sides before

conduit fabrication. 4. Strip steel spiral wound resulting in an interior that is smooth and clean for easy

wire pulling. 5. Overall polyvinyl chloride jacket. 6. With integral copper ground wire, built in the core, in conduit trade sizes 1/2 inch

through 1-1/4 inch.

D. PVC: 1. Extruded from virgin polyvinyl chloride compound:

a. Schedule 40 unless otherwise specified. b. Schedule 80 extra heavy wall where specified.

2. Rated for 90 degrees Celsius conductors or cable. 3. Rated for use in direct sunlight.


E. Conduit bodies: 1. Material consistent with conduit type:

a. Malleable iron bodies and covers when used with type GRC conduit. b. PVC bodies and covers when used with type PVC. c. PVC-coated malleable iron bodies and covers when used with type PCS. d. PVC-coated copper-free cast aluminum bodies and covers when used with

type PCA. 2. Conduit bodies to conform to Form 7 or Mogul design:

a. Mogul design conforming to NEC requirements for bending space for large conductors for conduit trade sizes of 1 inch and larger with conductors #4 AWG and larger, or where required for wire bending space.

3. The gasket shall be attached to the cover. The cover shall be provided with stainless steel screws and wedge-nut clips on the cover for easy installation and removal.

2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Connectors and fittings: 1. Manufactured with compatible materials to the corresponding conduit.

B. Insulated throat metallic bushings: 1. Construction:

a. Malleable iron or zinc plated steel when used with steel conduit. b. Positive metallic conduit end stop. c. Integrally molded non-combustible phenolic insulated surfaces rated

150 degrees Celsius. d. Use fully insulated bushings on nonmetallic conduit system made of high

impact 150 degrees Celsius rated non- combustible thermosetting phenolic.

C. Insulated grounding bushings: 1. Construction:

a. Malleable iron or steel, zinc plated, with a positive metallic end stop. b. Integrally molded non-combustible phenolic insulated surfaces rated 150

degrees Celsius. c. Tin plated copper grounding saddle for use with copper or aluminum

conductors.

D. Electrical unions (Erickson Couplings): 1. Construction:

a. Malleable iron for use with steel conduit. b. Concrete tight, 3-piece construction. c. Rated for Class I Division 1 Group D in hazardous areas.

E. SLT fittings: 1. Construction:

a. Malleable iron. b. Furnished with locknut and sealing ring. c. Liquid-tight, rain-tight, oil-tight. d. Insulated throat. e. Furnish as straight, 45-degree elbows and 90-degree elbows.


f. Designed to prevent sleeving: 1) Verify complete bonding of the raceway jacket to the plastic gasket seal.

g. Equipped with grounding device to provide ground continuity irrespective of raceway core construction. Grounding device, if inserted into raceway and directly in contact with conductors, shall have rolled over edges for sizes under 5 inches.

h. Where terminated into a threadless opening using a threaded hub fitting, a suitable moisture resistant/oil resistant synthetic rubber gasket shall be provided between the outside of the box or enclosure and the fitting shoulder. Gasket shall be adequately protected by and permanently bonded to a metallic retainer.

2. Corrosion resistant and outdoor SLT fittings: a. Construction:

1) PVC-coated liquid-tight fittings with a bonded 0.040-inch thick PVC coating on the metal connector to form a seal around the SLT conduit.

2) Insulated throat and an integral sealing ring. 3. ST fittings shall only be used in Class 1 Division 2 locations.

F. Hubs for threaded attachment of steel conduit to sheet metal enclosures: 1. Construction:

a. Insulated throat. b. PVC coated when used in corrosive areas. c. Bonding locknut. d. Recessed neoprene O-ring to assure watertight and dust- tight connector. e. One half (1/2)-inch through 6-inch steel zinc electroplated.

2. Usage: a. All conduits shall use threaded hubs for connections to sheet metal

enclosures.

G. PVC fittings: 1. Shall include the following:

a. Couplings. b. Terminal adapters. c. Female adapters. d. Caps. e. Reducer bushings. f. Duct couplings. g. End bells. h. Expansion couplings. i. Duct couplings 5 degree. j. C - pull fittings. k. E - pull fittings. l. LB - pull fittings. m. LL - pull fittings. n. LR - pull fittings. o. T - pull fittings. p. X - pull fittings. q. Service entrance caps.

2. Materials: a. All devices shall be made of PVC, using the same materials as used for Type

PVC conduit.


b. All metal hardware shall be stainless steel.

H. Through wall and floor seals: 1. Materials:

a. Body: casting of malleable or ductile iron with a hot-dip galvanized finish. b. Grommet: neoprene. c. Pressure rings: PVC coated steel. d. Disc material: PVC coated steel. e. Aluminum when used with conduit type RAC.

I. XD Expansion/deflection couplings: 1. Use to compensate for movement in any directions between 2 conduit ends that

they connect. 2. Shall allow movement of 3/4 inch from the normal in all directions. 3. Shall allow angular movement for a deflection of 30 degrees from normal in any

direction. 4. Constructed to maintain electrical continuity of the conduit system. 5. Materials:

a. End couplings: PVC-coated steel when used with type PCS. Non-metallic rigid PVC when used with PVC conduits.

b. Sleeve: Neoprene. c. Bands: Stainless steel. d. Bonding jumper: Tinned copper braid.

J. Conduit markers: 1. As specified in Section 16075 - Electrical Identification.



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. As specified in Section 16050 - Common Work Results for Electrical. Refer to the Plant Area Work Requirements table which specifies the permitted uses for these conduit types.

B. General: 1. Conduit routing:

a. The Electrical Drawings are diagrammatic in nature: 1) Install conduit runs as specified with schematic representation indicated

on the Drawings and as specified. 2) Modify conduit runs to suit field conditions, as accepted by the Engineer:

a) Make changes in conduit locations that are consistent with the design intent but are dimensionally different, or routing to bypass obstructions.

b) Make changes in conduit routing due to the relocation of equipment.


3) The Electrical Drawings do not indicate all required junction boxes and pull boxes: a) Provide junction boxes and pull boxes to facilitate wire pulling as

required: (1) To meet cable manufacturer’s pulling tension requirements. (2) To limit total conduit bends between pull locations.

b) Install junction boxes and pull boxes at locations acceptable to the Engineer.

b. The Contractor is responsible for any deviations in general location, conduit size, routing, or changes to the circuit/raceway block diagrams without the express written approval or direction by the Engineer: 1) The Engineer is the sole source in determining whether the change is

constituted as a deviation: 2) Perform any changes resulting in additional conduits, or extra work from

such deviations. 3) Incorporate any deviations on the Record Documents.

c. Owner reserves the right to deduct the amount of applicable reimbursement, equivalent to the cost of the engineering effort required to show those unauthorized changes on Record Drawings.

2. Use only tools recommended by the conduit manufacturer for assembling conduit system.

3. Provide adequate clearances from high-temperature surfaces for all conduit runs. Provide minimum clearances as follows: a. Clearances of 6 inches from surfaces 113 degrees Fahrenheit to 149

degrees Fahrenheit. b. Clearances of 12 inches from surfaces greater than 149 degrees Fahrenheit. c. Keep conduit at least 6 inches from the coverings on hot water and steam

pipes, 18 inches from the coverings on flues and breechings and 12 inches from fuel lines and gas lines.

d. Where it is necessary to route conduit close to high- temperature surfaces, provide a high-reflectance thermal barrier between the conduit and the surface.

4. Support conduit runs on water-bearing walls a minimum of 7/8- inch away from wall on an accepted preformed channel: a. Do not run conduit within water-bearing walls unless otherwise indicated on

the Drawings. 5. Do not install 1 inch or larger conduits in or through structural members unless

approved by the Engineer. 6. Run conduit exposed to view parallel with or at right angles to structural members,

walls, or lines of the building: a. Install straight and true conduit runs with uniform and symmetrical elbows,

offsets, and bends. b. Make changes in direction with long radius bends or with conduit bodies.

7. Install conduit with total conduit bends between pull locations less than or equal to 270 degrees.

8. Route all exposed conduit to preserve headroom, access space and workspace and to prevent tripping hazards and clearance problems: a. Install conduit runs so that runs do not interfere with proper and safe

operation of equipment and do not block or interfere with ingress or egress, including equipment removal hatches.


b. Route conduit to avoid drains or other gravity lines. Where conflicts occur, relocate conduit as required.

9. Conduit may be run in concrete members or slabs with permission of the Engineer or as indicated on the Drawings: a. Refer to the typical details for conduit spacing and size requirements.

10. When installing conduit through existing slabs or walls make provisions for locating any possible conflicting items where conduit is to penetrate. Use tone signal or X-ray methods to make certain that no penetrations will be made into existing conduit, piping, cables, post-tensioning cables, etc.

11. Plug conduits brought into pull boxes, manholes, handholes, and other openings until used to prevent entrance of moisture.

12. Install conduit through wall and floor seals where indicated on the Drawings. 13. For existing and new 2-inch and larger conduit runs, snake conduits with conduit

cleaner equipped with a cylindrical mandrel of a diameter not less than 85 percent of nominal diameter of conduit: a. Remove and replace conduits through which mandrel will not pass.

14. Provide all sleeves and openings required for the passage of electrical raceways or cables even when these openings or sleeves are not specifically indicated on the Drawings.

15. Install complete conduit systems before conductors are installed. 16. Provide metallic conduits terminating in transformer, switchgear, motor control

center or other equipment conduit windows with grounding bushings and ground with a minimum No. 6 AWG ground wire.

17. Underground and embedded conduits: a. Install underground conduits, including conduit runs below slabs-on-grade in

concrete-reinforced duct bank construction: 1) As specified in Section 16133, Duct Banks.

b. Make underground conduit size transitions at handholes and manholes. c. Install spare conduits in underground duct banks towards top center of runs

to allow for ease of installation of future cables as conduits enter underground manholes and handholes.

d. Seal around conduit penetrations of below grade walls with a mechanical seal.

C. Equipment grounding conductors: 1. Provide a separate, green insulated, grounding conductor in each raceway

independent of raceway material: a. Multi-conductor power and control cables shall include an integral green

insulated grounding conductor. b. Provide a separate grounding conductor in each individual raceway for

parallel feeders. 2. Conductors shall be the same type and insulation as the circuit conductors:

a. Use 600-volt insulation for the equipment grounding conductors for medium voltage systems.

3. Minimum size in accordance with the NEC.

D. Lighting and receptacle conduits: 1. Install conduit runs for lighting and receptacle circuits, whether or not indicated on

the Drawings: a. Minimum conduit size:

1) 3/4 inch for exposed conduits.


2) 1 inch for underground or in slab conduits. 2. Provide conduit materials for the installed location as specified in Section 16050,

Common Work Results for Electrical.

E. Conduit usage: 1. Exposed conduits:

a. Rigid conduit: 1) Install the rigid conduit type for each location as specified in Section

16050, Common Work Results for Electrical. 2) Minimum size: 3/4-inch.

b. Flexible conduit: 1) Use flexible conduit for final connections between rigid conduit and

motors, vibrating equipment, instruments, control equipment or where required for equipment servicing: a) Use type SLT with rigid metallic conduit. b) Use type NFC with PVC conduit.

2) Minimum size: 3/4-inch:

a) 1/2 when required for connection to instruments. 3) Maximum length:

a) Fixed equipment: Conduit Trade Size Flexible Conduit Length

(in)

3/4 18

1 18

1-1/4 18

1-1/2 18

2 36

2-1/2 36

3 36

3-1/2 38

4 40

b) Removable instruments or hinged equipment: c) As required to allow complete removal or full movement without

disconnecting or stressing the conduit. 2. Concrete Encased and Concrete Capped Embedded Conduits:

a. Type PVC Schedule 40 and PVC coated rigid metallic conduit as specified below: 1) Use Type PCS in underground and embedded installation as follows:

a) Stub-up and risers to grade floor or equipment from nonmetallic conduits.

b) Entering and exiting underground or embedded conduit runs a minimum 12 inches above and below grade, finished floor, or entering equipment.

c) For any and all bends where the total deflection is greater than 45 degrees.

d) Bends with total deflection greater than 45 degrees.


b. Minimum size: 1) 2 inches in duct banks unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 2) 1 inch for in slab conduits unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.

3. Direct buried and sand bedded ductbank conduits: a. Type PCS. b. Minimum size: 1 inch.

4. PVC coated rigid metallic conduit: a. Use specifically manufactured or machined threading dies to manufacturer’s

specifications to accommodate the PVC jacket. 5. GRC:

a. Conduit shall be cut square and reamed before threading. 6. PVC:

a. Conduit terminations shall be via threaded adapters into threaded hubs on the junction boxes or conduit bodies.

b. Conduit terminations into boxes without threaded hubs shall utilize a threaded adapter and a flat neoprene washer on the outside of the box. 1) Use a locknut on the inside of the box to tighten the adapter to the box.

F. Conduit joints and bends: 1. General:

a. Where conduit is underground, under slabs on grade, exposed to the weather or in NEMA Type 4 or NEMA Type 4X locations, make joints liquid-tight.

b. Keep bends and offsets in conduit runs to an absolute minimum. c. All bends shall be symmetrical. d. The following conduit systems shall use large radius sweep elbows:

1) Undergound conduits. 2) All conduits trade size 1-1/4-inch and larger. 3) Conduits containing shielded cables. 4) Exception shall be lighting and receptacle branch circuit conduits.

e. Provide large radius factory-made bends for 1-1/4-inch trade size or larger. f. Make field bends with a radius of not less than the requirements found in the

NEC: 1) The minimum bending radius of the cable must be less than the radius

of the conduit bend. 2) Make all field bends with power bending equipment or manual benders

specifically intended for the purpose: a) Make bends so that the conduit is not damaged, and the internal

diameter is not effectively reduced. b) For the serving utilities, make bends to meet their requirements.

g. Replace all deformed, flattened, or kinked conduit. 2. Threaded conduit:

a. Cut threads on rigid metallic conduit with a standard conduit cutting die that provides a 3/4-inch per foot taper and to a length such that all bare metal exposed by the threading operation is completely covered by the couplings or fittings used. In addition, cut the lengths of the thread such that all joints become secure and wrench tight just preceding the point where the conduit ends would butt together in couplings or where conduit ends would butt into the ends or shoulders of other fittings.

b. Thoroughly ream conduit after threads have been cut to remove burrs. c. Use bushings or conduit fittings at conduit terminations.


d. On exposed conduits, repair scratches and other defects with galvanizing repair stick, Enterprise Galvanizing “Galvabar” or CRC “Zinc It.”

e. Coat conduit threads with an approved electrically conductive sealant and corrosion inhibitor that is not harmful to the conductor insulation: 1) Use KOPR-Shield as manufactured by T&B on threads of ferrous

conduit. 2) Apply to the male threads and tighten joints securely. 3) Clean excess sealant from exposed threads after assembly.

f. Securely tighten all threaded connections. g. Any exposed threaded surface must be cleaned and coated with a

galvanizing solution so that all exposed surfaces have a galvanized protective coating.

3. PVC: a. Use approved solvent-weld cement specifically manufactured for the

purpose. Spray type cement is not allowed. b. Apply heat for bends so that conduit does not distort or discolor. Use a spring

mandrel as required to assure full inside diameter at all bends: 1) Utilize a heater specifically for PVC conduit as recommended by the

conduit manufacturer.

G. Conduit sealing and drainage: 1. Conduit drainage and sealing other than required for hazardous and classified

areas: a. Provide sealing and drainage in vertical drops of long (in excess of 20 feet),

exterior, above grade conduit runs at the points at which the conduit enters buildings, switchgear, control panels, lighting panelboards, and other similar enclosures.

b. Provide seal fittings with drains in vertical drops directly above grade for exterior, above grade conduit runs that are extended below grade.

c. Provide conduit seals with drains in areas of high humidity and rapidly changing temperatures:

d. Where portions of an interior raceway pass through walls, ceilings or floors that separate adjacent areas having widely different temperatures.

e. Provide conduit seals similar to O/Z Gedney (Type CSM) on all conduits between corrosive and non-corrosive areas.

f. Seal one end only of all underground conduits at highest point with O/Z Gedney sealing (non-hazardous) filling, or equal.

2. Install seals with drains at any location along conduit runs where moisture may condense or accumulate. This requirement includes, but is not limited to, the following locations: control panels, junction boxes, pullboxes, or low points of conduit.

3. All conduits which enter/leave a building shall be sloped away from the building to prevent the accumulation of water within the building.

4. All conduits which enter/leave a building shall be sealed with an approved duct seal.

H. Conduit supports: 1. General:

a. Provide appropriate hangers, supports, fasteners, and seismic restraints to suit applications: 1) As specified in Section 16070 - Hangers and Supports.


2) Provide support materials consistent with the type of conduit being installed as specified in Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical.

b. Support conduit at the intervals required by the NEC. c. Perforated strap and plumbers tape are not acceptable for conduit supports.

2. Finished Areas: a. Above suspended ceilings:

1) Support conduit on or from the structure, do not support conduit from hanging wires or suspended ceiling grid.

2) Provide independent hanger wires for all conduits. 3) Identify the hanger wires using red spray paint.

I. Expansion or expansion/deflection fittings: 1. General:

a. Provide as indicated on the drawings and indicated in this section. b. Align expansion coupling with the conduit run to prevent binding. c. Follow manufacturer’s instructions to set the piston opening. d. Install expansion fittings across concrete expansion joints and at other

locations where necessary to compensate for thermal or mechanical expansion and contraction.

e. Furnish fittings of the same material as the conduit system. 2. For metallic conduit (PCS, and GRC) provide expansion or expansion/deflection

couplings, as appropriate, where: a. Install expansion fittings a minimum of every 200 feet in straight conduit runs.

J. Empty conduits: 1. Provide a “true tape” measuring tape rated 250 pounds tensile strength in each

empty conduit more than 10 feet in length. 2. Provide one empty 3/4-inch conduit for each four spare unused circuits or spaces

of each flush mounted branch circuit panelboard. Terminate empty 3/4-inch conduits in individual junction boxes that are accessible to enable extension of future branch circuits.

3. Seal ends of all conduit with approved, manufactured conduit seals, caps or plugs immediately after installation: a. Keep ends sealed until immediately before pulling conductors.

K. PCS Damaged Conduits: 1. PCS conduits that have damaged PVC coating shall be replaced, no exceptions.

Field repair shall not be acceptable.

L. Miscellaneous: 1. Seal roof penetrations for raceways and other items that penetrate the roof in

accordance with roofing manufacturer’s instructions and as indicated on the Drawings.

2. Provide electrical unions at all points of union between ends of rigid conduit systems that cannot otherwise be coupled: a. Running threads and threadless couplings are not allowed.

3. Replace any conduit installed that the Engineer determines does not meet the requirements of this Specification.

4. Provide conduit housekeeping curb around all embedded or below-grade conduits exiting or entering the slab, per the Typical Details.




3.03 PROTECTION


END OF SECTION

Duct Banks 16133-1 11487A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/OR/Clean Water Services/11487A10/Specifications/16133 (Bidset) April 2021 - BID

SECTION 16133

DUCT BANKS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: 1. Electrical underground duct banks. 2. Duct spacing and terminations. 3. Excavation and patching. 4. Coordination with other underground utilities. 5. Concrete.

1.02 REFERENCES


1.03 DEFINITIONS



A. Provide trenching, forming, spacers, conduit, concrete, backfill, and compaction necessary for the complete installation of the duct banks.

B. Provide concrete duct banks for all conduits installed below grade, on the site, below structures, or in contact with the earth, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.

C. Duct banks shall be required for medium voltage feeders only, unless noted otherwise on the Drawings.

D. Provide a concrete slurry cap over the tops of low voltage, control, and signal feeders, unless noted otherwise on the Drawings. Refer to the Drawings for cap installation details.

E. Provide #14 AWG tracer wire for all underground fiber installations.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish submittals as specified in Sections 01330 – Submittal Procedures and 16050 - Common Work Results for Electrical.

B. Product data: 1. PVC conduit spacers or equivalent. 2. Detectable underground marking tape. 3. Measuring tape or metered tape.


C. Shop drawings: 1. Submit site plan drawings of duct banks including underground profiles indicating

all underground utilities.







B. Field conditions and related requirements: 1. Underground water table may be near or above the location of new duct banks. 2. Include cost for necessary dewatering, and cleaning equipment to perform work

in underground duct banks, pull boxes and manholes, before installation.

1.09 WARRANTY




PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Conduit spacers: 1. One of the following or equal:

a. Carlon Snap-Loc. b. Cantex. c. Osburn Associates, Inc.

B. Detectable underground marking tape: 1. One of the following or equal:

a. Blackburn Manufacturing Company. b. Pro-Line Safety Products. c. Panduit.

C. Measuring tape: 1. One of the following:

a. Greenlee 435 or equal.


D. Duct seal: 1. The following or equal:

a. OZ Gedney type DUX

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Provide conduit as specified in Section 16130 – Conduits: 1. Use duct suitable for use with 90-degree Celsius rated conductors.


A. Conduit spacers: 1. Provide conduit spacers recommended by the conduit manufacturer or specified

above. 2. Saddle type. 3. Non-metallic, non-corrosive, non-conductive. 4. Interlocking type:

a. Vertical interlocking. b. Horizontal interlocking.

5. Suitable for concrete encasement. 6. Accommodates 2-inch through 6-inch conduit sizes. 7. Relieves the conduit from both horizontal and vertical stresses.

B. Measuring tape: 1. Minimum 1/4-inch wide, flat design. 2. Polyester. 3. Minimum pulling strength 1,200 pounds. 4. Sequential footage markings.

C. Detectable marking tape: 1. Provide a detectable tape, locatable by a cable or metal detector from above the

undisturbed grade. 2. Aluminum core laminated between polyethylene film. 3. Six-inch wide red tape imprinted with black lettering "CAUTION - BURIED

ELECTRIC UTILITIES."

D. Duct seal: 1. Non-hardening sealing compound. 2. Flexible, can be applied by hand. 3. UL Listed for use with installed conductors.

2.04 MIXES

A. Concrete mix requirements as specified in Section 03300 – Cast-in-Place Concrete.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION



B. Duct banks: 1. Install duct banks encased in concrete at least 24 inches below finish grade,

unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 2. Damage minimization:

a. Conduit should not be left exposed in an open trench longer than is necessary.

b. Protect all underground duct banks against damage during pouring of concrete or backfilling.

3. All plastic conduit fittings to be joined should be exposed to the same temperature conditions for a reasonable length of time before assembly.

4. Provide No. 4/0 American Wire Gauge bare copper ground wire the entire length of duct bank and bond to the grounding.

5. Install underground ducts to be self-draining: a. Slope duct banks away from buildings to manholes. b. Slope duct banks uniformly from manholes to pull boxes or both ways from

high points between manholes. c. Slope a minimum of 1/4 inch per 10 feet.

6. Where new duct banks join to existing manholes make the proper fittings and fabricate the concrete envelopes to ensure smooth durable transitions, as indicated on the Drawings.

7. Install measuring tape in spare conduits: a. Provide adequate measuring tape at both ends of conduits to facilitate

conductor pulling. b. Cap above ground spare conduit risers at each end with screw-on conduit

caps.

C. Slurry cap: 1. Pour slurry completely over the tops and sides of all conduits.

D. Trenching: 1. Perform trenching as specified in Section 02200 - Earthwork. 2. Trench must be uniformly graded with the bottom, rock free and covered with

select material. 3. Whenever possible, use the walls of the trench as forms for concrete

encasement: a. Forms are required where the soil is not self-supporting.

4. Avoid damaging existing ducts, conduits, cables, and other utilities.

E. Duct spacing: 1. Separate conduits with manufactured plastic spacers using a minimum space

between the outside surfaces of adjacent conduits of 1.5 inches: 2. Install spacers to maintain uniform spacing of duct assembly a minimum of 4

inches above the bottom of the trench during concrete pour. Install spacers on 8-foot maximum intervals: a. Due to some distortion of conduit from heat, and other means, it may be

necessary to install extra spacers within the duct bank: 1) Install the intermediate set of spacers within normal required spacing to

maintain the proper horizontal clearance: a) Clearance is required to allow the proper amount of concrete to

infiltrate vertically among the duct to ensure proper protection.


3. Spacers shall not be located at the center of a bend: a. Locate spacer in the tangent, free of the coupling on fabricated bends. b. Locate spacers midway between the tangent and the center bend on trench

formed sweeps.

F. Terminating: 1. Use bell ends in duct at entrances into cable vaults. 2. Make conduit entrances into cable vaults tangential to walls of cable vault. 3. Form trapezoidal transitions between duct bank and cable vaults as needed in

order to ensure adequate cable bending radius for the duct bank-to-vault transition.

4. Install duct seal in all conduits including spare conduits, at both ends. Form by hand to conduit and around cables to develop moisture barrier

5. New manhole or handhole applications, provide a single opening or “window” per duct bank, sized to accommodate the duct bank envelope.

G. Concrete: 1. Install concrete as specified in Section 03300 Cast-in-Place Concrete. 2. Provide nonferrous tie wires to prevent displacement of the conduits during

pouring of concrete: a. Tie wire shall not act as a substitute for spacers.

3. Install minimum 3-inch cover around conduit. 4. Consolidation of encasement concrete around duct banks shall be by hand

pudding, with no mechanical vibration. 5. Conduit is subject to temperature rise. As concrete cures, allow the free end to

expand by pouring the concrete from the center of the run or from one tie in point.

H. Marking tape: 1. Install a detectable marking tape 12 inches above the duct bank the entire length

of the duct bank.

I. For conduit installations beneath building slabs and slabs-on-grade: 1. Install concrete duct banks under all building slabs and slabs-on-grade as

indicated on the Drawings: a. Concrete for encasement under building slabs need not be colored red. b. For duct banks crossing under building footers or foundations, install the top

of the duct bank a minimum of 12 inches below the footer. c. Where duct banks enter through building walls, foundation walls, stem walls,

etc. make connections as indicated on the Drawings. d. Where duct banks terminate with conduit risers entering building walls,

install an expansion/deflection fitting or a flat-wise elbow (elbow parallel to building wall) in order to accommodate differential movement between the conduits and structure.

J. Restore all surfaces to their original condition as specified in Civil Drawings, unless otherwise specified.


K. Marking piers: 1. Provide permanent concrete cylinder marking piers, on grade, centered on duct

bank and located at every bend in duct bank or wherever duct bank enters a building, vault, or other structure: a. Provide a cylinder, 6 inches in diameter:

1) Top of cylinder 1/2 inch below the top of finished grade. b. Provide a 3-inch high "E" embossed in top of cylinder:

1) Minimum of 2 inches deep. c. Provide 2-inch arrows embossed in top of cylinder showing the direction of

the duct bank: 1) Minimum of 2 inches deep.



3.03 CLEANING

A. Clean conduits of dirt and debris by use of an appropriately sized steel mandrel no less than 1/2 inch smaller than the inside diameter of the conduit.

3.04 PROTECTION


B. Provide shoring and pumping to protect the excavation and safety of workers.

C. Protect excavations with barricades as required by applicable safety regulations.

END OF SECTION

Boxes 16134-1 11487A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/OR/Clean Water Services/11487A10/Specifications/16134 (Bidset) April 2021 - BID

SECTION 16134

BOXES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: 1. Device boxes. 2. Raceway system boxes.

1.02 REFERENCES


B. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. A 47 - Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings. 2. D 149 - Standard Test Method for Dielectric Breakdown Voltage and Dielectric

Strength of Solid Electrical Insulating Materials at Commercial Power Frequencies.

3. D 495 - Standard Test Method for High-Voltage, Low-Current, Dry Arc Resistance of Solid Electrical Insulation.

4. D 570 - Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics. 5. D 648 - Standard Test Method for Deflection Temperature of Plastics Under

Flexural Load in the Edgewise Position. 6. D 790 - Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and

Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials. 7. D 792 - Standard Test Methods for Density and Specific Gravity (Relative

Density) of Plastics by Displacement.

C. Joint Industry Conference (JIC).

D. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 1. 94 - Standard for Tests for Flammability of Plastic Materials for Parts in Devices

and Appliances.

1.03 DEFINITIONS


B. Specific definitions: 1. Arcing parts: Circuit breakers, motor controllers, switches, fuses, or any device

intended to interrupt current during its operation. 2. Raceway system boxes: Boxes that are used for wire and cable pull-boxes,

conduit junction boxes, or terminal boxes.


A. Provide outlet boxes for devices such as switches, receptacles, , junction, and pull-boxes for use in the raceway systems, etc.


B. Provide boxes and conduit bodies as indicated on the Drawings or as needed to complete the raceway installation.

1.05 SUBMITTALS


B. Product data: 1. Manufacturer. 2. Materials. 3. Dimensions:

a. Height. b. Width. c. Depth. d. Weight. e. NEMA rating.

4. Conduit entry locations. 5. Catalog cut sheets. 6. Installation instructions.

C. Shop drawings:

1. Include identification and sizes of pull boxes.



B. Regulatory requirements: 1. Outlet boxes shall comply with all applicable standards of:

a. JIC. b. NEC. c. NEMA. d. UL.





1.09 SEQUENCING


1.10 SCHEDULING (NOT USED)


1.11 WARRANTY




PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. One of the following or equal:

1. Concrete boxes: a. Appleton. b. Steel City. c. Cooper/Crouse Hinds. d. OZ Gedney.

2. Threaded-hub boxes: a. Appleton. b. Crouse - Hinds. c. OZ/Gedney.

3. Plastic coated steel boxes: a. Rob Roy. b. OCAL.

4. Cast device boxes: a. Appleton. b. Crouse - Hinds. c. OZ/Gedney.

5. Formed steel enclosures: a. Hoffman. b. Thomas and Betts. c. Saginaw.

6. Stainless steel enclosures: a. Hoffman. b. Stahlin. c. Saginaw.

7. In-Ground Junction Boxes: a. Old Castle.


A. Concrete boxes: 1. For outlets and pull boxes in concrete construction. 2. Pressed steel or cast construction, concrete tight. 3. Knockout sizes range from 1/2 inch to 1 inch. 4. Depth as needed. 5. Types:

a. Four-inch octagon. b. Four-inch octagon ceiling boxes with hanging bars.


c. Gangable masonry boxes: 1) Minimum 3-1/2-inch deep, 3-3/4-inch high, length as required:

a) 2-1/2-inch deep boxes may be used where wall thickness precludes the use of the deeper boxes.

2) With partitions as needed.

B. Threaded-hub boxes: 1. Construction:

a. With internal green ground screw. b. Furnished with a suitable gasketed cover. c. With integral cast mounting lugs when surface mounted. d. Conduit sizes range from 3/4 inch to 1 inch. e. Tapered threaded hubs with integral bushing. f. Shall be FD-type, 2.69” deep minimum with mounting lugs and integral

grounding screw. 2. Malleable iron boxes:

a. Conforming to ASTM A 47 Grade 32510.

C. Plastic coated threaded-hub boxes: 1. Construction:

a. With internal green ground screw. b. Furnished with a suitable gasketed cover. c. With integral cast mounting lugs when surface mounted. d. Conduit sizes range from 3/4 inch to 1 inch. e. Shall be FD-type, 2.69” deep minimum with mounting lugs and integral

grounding screw. f. Double coated with a nominal 0.002-inch (2 mil) urethane on both the

interior and exterior before application of PVC coating. g. With a minimum 0.040-inch (40 mil) PVC coating bonded to exterior. h. With pressure sealing sleeve to protect the connection with conduit.

D. Formed steel enclosures: 1. Steel:

a. NEMA Type 12. b. Fabricated from 14-gauge steel, minimum. c. All seams continuously welded ground smooth. d. Door:

1) Rolled lip around 3 sides. 2) Attached to enclosure by means of a continuous stainless-steel hinge

and pin. e. Neoprene door gasket to provide a watertight, dust-tight, oil-tight seal:

1) Attached with an adhesive. 2) Retained by a retaining strip.

f. Fabricate all external removable hardware for clamping the door to the enclosure body from zinc-plated heavy gauge steel: 1) With a hasp and staple for padlocking.

g. Provide large enclosures with door and body stiffeners for extra rigidity. h. No holes or knockouts. i. Finish:

1) ANSI-61 gray electrostatically applied polyester powder inside and out over cleaned and primed surfaces.


2) White electrostatically applied polyester powder mounting plate. j. Heavy gauge steel external mounting brackets when surface mounted. k. Shall be provided with manufacturer supplied backpanel. l. Provide manufacturer supplied hinged deadfront where shown on the

drawings. 2. Stainless steel:

a. NEMA Type 4X: 1) Boxes in locations subject to flooding or temporary submersion:

a) NEMA Type 6. b. Fabricated from 14-gauge Type 316 stainless steel. c. All seams continuously welded. d. Door:

1) Rolled lip around 3 sides. 2) Attached to enclosure by means of a continuous stainless-steel hinge

and pin. e. Neoprene door gasket to provide a watertight seal:

1) Attached with an adhesive. 2) Retained by a retaining strip.

f. Fabricate all external removable hardware for clamping the door to the enclosure body from heavy gauge stainless steel: 1) With a hasp and staple for padlocking.

g. Provide large enclosures with door and body stiffeners for extra rigidity. h. No holes or knockouts. i. Finish:

1) Brushed. j. Stainless steel external mounting brackets when surface mounted. k. Shall be provided with manufacturer supplied backpanel. l. Provide manufacturer supplied hinged deadfront where shown on the

drawings.

E. In-ground junction boxes: 1. Suitable for use outdoors where subject to rain, dripping, or splashing water. 2. Designed for flush mounting in grade. 3. Minimum dimensions 13” x 24” x 12” deep. 4. Construction:

a. Concrete polymer. b. Covers:

1) Concrete polymer flush covers suitable for H15 incidental traffic loads. 2) Cover shall have verbiage molded into the top identifying the type of

service served such as electric, fiber optic, communications, etc. c. Stainless steel screw covers.

2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners: 1. Electroplated or stainless steel in boxes with wiring devices. 2. Screws, nuts, bolts, and other threaded fasteners:

a. Stainless steel.

B. Provide breather and drain fittings where appropriate.


C. Internal panels: 1. Provide internal panels where required for mounting of terminal strips or other

equipment. 2. With plated steel shoulder studs.

a. Steel with white polyester powder finish.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION


B. General: 1. Provide materials and construction suitable for environmental conditions at the

location of the box as specified in Section 16050 Part 1.08 (C) Plant Area Electrical Work Requirements.

2. Provide outlet box materials to match the conduit system: a. GRC - Cast ferrous boxes. b. PCS - PVC coated cast ferrous boxes. c. PVC - PVC boxes.

3. Solid type gang boxes: a. For more than 2 devices. b. For barriered outlets.

4. Support all wall mounted NEMA Type 4 or NEMA Type 4X boxes to maintain a minimum of 7/8-inch free air space between the back of the enclosure and the wall: a. Use machined spacers to maintain air space; built-up washers are not

acceptable. b. Use stainless steel or nylon materials for spacers.

5. In finished areas: a. Provide specific pull or junction boxes only as indicated on the Drawings or

as directed. 6. In terminal boxes, furnish terminals as indicated on the Drawings, with a

minimum of 50 percent spare terminals: a. Furnish wireways for discrete and analog/DC wiring. b. Separate analog wiring from 120 V discrete or power wiring.

7. Size boxes in accordance with NEC requirements and to provide sufficient room for the future components and cables indicated on the Drawings.

8. For fire-rated construction, provide materials and installation for use in accordance with the listing requirements of the classified construction.

9. All boxes and enclosures installed outdoors shall have hinges installed on the sides of the enclosure. No hinges on the top of the box or enclosure shall be permitted.

10. Conduits shall not enter the top of boxes in wet locations or in locations where subject to water.

C. Outlet boxes: 1. Locate outlet boxes as indicated on the Drawings:

a. Adjust locations so as not to conflict with structural requirements or other trades.


2. Use deep threaded-hub, FD-type, malleable iron or aluminum boxes: a. In hazardous areas. b. Where exposed to the weather. c. In unheated areas. d. Where subject to mechanical damage:

1) Defined as exposed boxes less than 10 feet above the floor. e. To act as a pull box for conductors in a conduit system. f. Accommodate wiring devices.

3. Use deep threaded-hub, FD-type, plastic coated malleable iron boxes in corrosive and NEMA Type 4X area and when the conduit system is PVC coated steel.

D. Pull boxes and junction boxes: 1. Install pull boxes so they are Accessible as defined by the NEC.

E. For boxes not indicated: 1. Provide types and mountings as required to suit the equipment and that will be

consistent with the conduit system and environmental conditions as indicated in Section 16050 - Common Work Results for Electrical.

2. Outlet, switch, and junction boxes where surface mounted in exposed locations: a. Cast ferrous boxes with mounting lugs, zinc or cadmium plating finish.

3. Outlet, control station, and junction boxes for installation in corrosive locations: a. PVC, stainless steel, or plastic-coated steel as specified in Section 16050 -

Common Work Results for Electrical. b. Furnished with mounting lugs.



3.03 CLEANING


3.04 PROTECTION


END OF SECTION

Low Voltage Wire Connections 16150-1 11487A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/OR/Clean Water Services/11487A10/Specifications/16150 (Bidset) April 2021 - BID

SECTION 16150

LOW VOLTAGE WIRE CONNECTIONS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: 1. Wire connecting devices. 2. Terminations. 3. Splices.




1.02 REFERENCES


B. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. D 3005 – Standard Specification for Low-Temperature Resistant Vinyl Chloride

Plastic Pressure-Sensitive Electrical Insulating Tape.

C. CSA International (CSA): 1. C22.2 - No.197-M1983 (R2208) - PVC Insulating Tape.

D. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 1. 510 - Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride, Polyethylene, and Rubber Insulating Tape.

1.03 DEFINITIONS



A. Provide a complete system of wiring connectors, terminators, fittings, etc. for a complete wiring system suitable for the cables and conductors used.

1.05 SUBMITTALS


B. Product data: 1. Catalog cut sheets. 2. Installation instructions.




B. All materials shall be UL listed.





1.09 WARRANTY




PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers for each type of technology are specified with the equipment in this Section.

2.02 EQUIPMENT

A. Control connections: 1. Use insulated ring type wire terminators for connections to all screw terminals:

a. With chamfered/funneled terminal barrel entry. b. Deep internal serrations. c. Long barrel design to reduce electrical resistance and increased insulator-

barrel surface area to ensure that the insulator remains in contact with the barrel.

d. Electroplated-tin copper conductor. e. Manufacturer: One of the following or equal:

1) Thomas and Betts, Stakon. 2. For process equipment connections work from manufacturer's drawings.

B. Joints, splices, taps, and connections: 1. 600-volt conductors:

a. Use solderless connectors. b. Use only plated copper alloy connectors or lugs:

1) Aluminum connectors or lugs are not acceptable for copper conductors. c. Under those specific conditions where aluminum conductors have been

allowed or are specified then the connectors for aluminum conductors shall be specifically designed for that purpose.


d. For wire Number 10 AWG and smaller use compression splice caps, with insulating caps: 1) Manufacturer: One of the following or equal:

1) Ideal: Winged wire connectors. e. For wire Number 8 AWG and larger, use heavy duty copper compression

connectors: 1) Manufacturer: One of the following or equal:

1) Burndy. 2) Thomas and Betts.

f. Heat shrink tubing: 1) Suitable for indoors, outdoors, overhead, direct burial or submerged

applications. 2) Minimum shrink ratio: 4 to 1. 3) Continuous operating temperature: -55 degrees Celsius to 110 degrees

Celsius. 4) Internally applied adhesive sealant. 5) Cross-linked polyolefin:

1) Manufacturers, one of the following or equal: (1) 3M ITCSN. (2) Thomas & Betts Shrink-Kon.

2. Instrumentation class cable splices: a. Suitable for indoor, outdoors, weather exposed, direct buried, or submersed

applications. b. Utilizing an epoxy, polyurethane, and re-enterable compounds. c. For use with shielded or unshielded plastic- and rubber-jacketed, signal,

control, and power cables rated up to 1 kilovolt. d. Two-part mold body with tongue and groove seams and built in spacer

webbing. e. Manufacturer: One of the following or equal:

1) 3M - Scotchcast 72-N.

C. Insulating tape: 1. General purpose insulating tape:

a. Minimum 7 mil vinyl tape. b. Suitable for application in an ambient of -18 degrees Celsius (0 degrees

Fahrenheit). c. Operating range up to 105 degrees Celsius (220 degrees Fahrenheit). d. Flame retardant, hot- and cold- weather resistant, UV resistant. e. For use as a primary insulation for wire cable splices up to 600 VAC. f. Meeting and complying with:

1) ASTM D 3005 Type I. 2) UL 510. 3) CSA C22.2.

g. Manufacturer: One of the following or equal: 1) 3M - Scotch Number Super 33+.

2. General-purpose color-coding tape: a. Minimum 7 mil vinyl tape. b. Suitable for application on PVC and polyethylene jacketed cables. c. For use indoors and outdoors in weather protected enclosures. d. Available with the following colors:

1) Red.


2) Yellow. 3) Blue. 4) Brown. 5) Gray. 6) White. 7) Green. 8) Orange. 9) Violet.

e. For use as phase identification, marking, insulating, and harnessing. f. Meeting and complying with:

1) UL 510. 2) CSA C22.2.

g. Manufacturer: One of the following or equal: 1) 3M - Scotch Number 35.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION


B. Load connections: 1. Connect loads to the circuits as indicated. Color-code all branch circuits as

specified in Section 16123 – 600 Volt or Less Wires and Cables.

C. Zero to 600-volt systems: 1. Make all connections with the proper tool and die as specified by the device

manufacturer. 2. Use only tooling and dies manufactured by the device manufacturer. 3. Insulate all connections and splices with Scotch 33+ tape and Scotchfill, or pre-

molded plastic covers, or heat shrink tubing and caps. 4. Number all power and control wires before termination.

D. Motor connections (600 volts and below): 1. Terminate wires with compression type ring lugs at motors. 2. Connection at both the motor leads and the machine wires shall have ring type

compression lugs. 3. Cover bolted connectors with a heat shrinkable, cross-linked polyolefin material

formed as a single opening boot: a. In damp and wet locations, use a complete kit containing mastic that shall

seal out moisture and contamination. b. Shrink cap with low heat as recommended by manufacturer. c. Thomas & Betts MSC style.

4. Wire markers shall be readable after boot installation. 5. Manufacturer: One of the following or equal:

a. Raychem MCK.




3.03 PROTECTION


END OF SECTION


SECTION 16222

LOW VOLTAGE MOTORS UP TO 500 HORSEPOWER

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: 1. Low voltage motors up to 500 horsepower (hp):

a. Furnished separately. b. Part of driven equipment specified in other sections. c. Other electric motors required for a complete installation.

1.02 REFERENCES


B. American Bearing Manufacturers Association (ABMA): 1. 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings. 2. 11 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings.

C. American Petroleum Institute (API): 1. 670 - Vibration, Axial Position, and Bearing Temperature Monitoring Systems.

D. ASTM International (ASTM). 1. B-117 - Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus.

E. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE): 1. 43 - IEEE Recommended Practice for Testing Insulation Resistance of Rotating

Machinery. 2. 112 - IEEE Standard Test Procedure for Poly-phase Induction Motors and

Generators. 3. 114 - Standard Test Procedure for Single-Phase Induction Motors. 4. 303 - Recommended Practice for Auxiliary Devices for Rotating Electrical

Machines in Class I, Division 2 and Zone 2 Locations. 5. 841 - Standard for Petroleum and Chemical Industry-Premium-Efficiency, Severe

Duty, Totally Enclosed Fan-Cooled (TEFC) Squirrel Cage Induction Motors - Up to and Including 370 kW (500hp).

6. 1349 - Guide for Application of Electric Motors in Class I, Division 2 Hazardous (Classified) Locations.

F. National Electrical Manufacturers' Association (NEMA): 1. MG-1 - Motors and Generators. 2. MG-2 - Safety Standard for Construction and Guide for Selection, Installation,

and Use of Electric Motors and Generators.

G. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL): 1. 674 - Electric Motors and Generators for Use in Division 1 Hazardous (Classified)

Locations.


1.03 DEFINITIONS



A. Furnish and install electric motors and accessories as specified in this Section and the Sections specifying driven equipment to provide a complete and operable installation.

1.05 SUBMITTALS


B. Submit completed motor data sheets for each motor supplied: 1. Conform to data sheet in the appendix of this Section. 2. Manufacturer’s or other data sheets are not acceptable.

C. Product data: 1. Descriptive bulletins. 2. Machine tag and loop number as indicated on the Drawings and in the

specification section number of the driven machine. 3. Complete electrical data.

a. Rated size of motor, hp, and service factor b. Efficiency at full, ¾ and ½ load c. Full load current d. Locked rotor current

4. Temperature rise and insulation rating 5. Type of bearing. 6. Torque, current, and power factor vs. speed curves:

a. At 100 percent rated voltage for all full voltage started and VFD driven motors.

b. For motors on reduced voltage start at 70, 80, 90 and 100 percent rated voltage.

7. Additional data for motors installed in classified areas: a. Temperature code. b. Hazardous area approval indicating Class, Division and Group:

1) For motors driven by variable frequency drives, provide manufacturer’s certification that the motor is suitable for operation in the hazardous area when driven by a variable frequency drive.

8. Accessories data: a. Power factor correction capacitors:

1) Size in KVAR, for all motors not connected to variable frequency drives. b. Motor winding heaters:

1) Voltage. 2) Watts.

c. Winding temperature detectors: 1) Type. 2) Rating.

d. Moisture detectors.


9. Mechanical data: a. Bearing design and bearing life calculations. b. Resonant frequencies for all VFD-driven motors 50 hp or greater.

10. List of manufacturer’s recommended spare parts.

D. Shop drawings: 1. Motor weight. 2. Frame size. 3. Conduit box (es), size(s), and location(s). 4. Outline drawings with dimensions. 5. Installation details for the project seismic criteria.

E. Test reports: 1. Factory test reports with test reference standard identified.

F. Certification: 1. When motors are driven by variable speed drive systems, submit certification that

selected motor: a. Is capable of satisfactory performance under the intended load. b. Meets the requirements of the latest edition of NEMA MG-1 Part 31. c. Is matched to the type of variable frequency drive specified.

G. Calculations: 1. Where site conditions specified in Section 16050 exceed manufacturer’s ratings,

provide derating calculations for each motor.





B. Motors 200 hp and larger: 1. Rotate shaft 90 degrees once per month.



1.09 WARRANTY





PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. One of the following or equal: 1. Nidec/US Motors. 2. WEG. 3. ABB/Baldor/Reliance.

2.02 EQUIPMENT

A. 3-phase induction motors - general: 1. Voltage:

a. All motors 1/2hp and larger shall be rated 460 V, 3-phase unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.

2. Motors driving identical machines shall be identical. 3. All motors greater than 1 hp and up to 500 hp shall meet the “NEMA Premium

Efficiency” percent listed in NEMA MG-1. 4. Horsepower as indicated on the Drawings:

a. Horsepower ratings indicated on the Drawings are based on vendor’s estimates. Provide motors sized for the load of the actual equipment furnished without operating in the service factor.

5. Service factor: a. 1.15 service factor on sine wave power. b. 1.0 when driven by VFD.

6. Torque: a. Provide motors that develop sufficient torque for acceleration to full speed at

voltage 10 percent less than motor nameplate rating. b. When started using reduced voltage starters:

1) Provide motors that develop sufficient torque for acceleration to full speed.

c. NEMA Design B except where driven load characteristics require other than normal starting torque: 1) In no case shall starting torque or breakdown torque be less than the

values specified in NEMA MG-1. 7. Enclosures:

a. As specified in the individual equipment Specifications or in this Section. b. Totally enclosed fan cooled:

1) Cast iron conduit box. 2) Tapped drain holes with Type 316 stainless steel plugs for frames 286

and smaller, and automatic breather and drain devices for frames 324 and larger.

c. Lifting devices: All motors weighing 265 pounds (120 kilograms) or more shall have suitable lifting devices for installation and removal.

8. Manufactured with cast iron frames in accordance with NEMA MG-1 or manufacturer’s standard material for the specified rating.

9. Nameplates: a. Provide all motors with a permanent, stainless steel nameplate indelibly

stamped or engraved with: 1) NEMA standard motor data.


a) Indicate compliance with NEMA MG-1 Part 31 for inverter duty motors.

2) AFBMA bearing numbers and lubrication instructions. 10. Hardware:

a. Type 316 stainless steel. 11. Conduit boxes:

a. Cast iron or stamped steel. b. Split from top to bottom. c. Provide gaskets at the following interfaces:

1) Frames and conduit boxes. 2) Conduit boxes and box covers.

d. Rotatable through 360 degrees in 90-degree increments. 1) Where available based on the size of the conduit box.

e. Exceeding the dimensions defined in NEMA MG-1. The main conduit box shall be oversized at least one size larger than NEMA standard. The main conduit box shall be sized for all indicated accessory leads. Motor furnished in NEMA 320 frame series and larger shall have conduit boxes designed and constructed to permit motor removal after installation without disconnecting raceways.

f. Provide grounding lugs inside conduit boxes for motor frame grounding. 12. Motor bearings:

a. Antifriction. b. Oil-mist lubrication type for all applicable motors above 50 hp. Bearing

mounting shall be deigned to prevent entrance of lubricant into the motor enclosure.

c. Where oil-mist lubrication is not possible, provide regreasable type lubrication. Initially fill with grease. 1) Provide permanently sealed bearings for motors 50 hp and below and

under 3600 RPM. d. Bearings and lubrication suitable for ambient temperature and temperature

rise. e. Suitable for intended application and have ABMA L-10 rating life of

60,000 hours or more. f. Fit bearings with easily accessible grease supply, flush, drain, and relief

fittings using extension tubes where necessary. g. Where specified in the equipment Specifications, provide split-sleeve type

hydrodynamic radial bearings. Provide a bearing isolator to protect bearings from contaminants.

13. Insulation systems: a. Motors insulation:

1) Provide Class H insulation. 2) Design temperature rise consistent with Class H insulation. 3) Rated to operate at an ambient temperature of 40 °C at the altitude

where the motors will be installed. 14. Motor leads:

a. Insulated leads with non-wicking, non-hydroscopic material. Class F insulation.

b. All motors rated 100 horsepower and larger, and all vertical motors shall have the direction of rotation marked by an arrow mounted visibly on the stator frame near the terminal housing, or on the nameplate, and the leads marked for phase sequence T1, T2, T3, to correspond to the direction of


rotation and supply voltage sequence. Permanent instructions for making these connections shall be furnished inside the main conduit box or on the motor frame or nameplate.

c. Motor leads shall be provided with single hole compression lugs. 15. Noise:

a. Maximum operating noise level in accordance with NEMA MG-1.

B. Submersible motors: 1. Enclosures:

a. Totally enclosed non-ventilated (TENV) watertight casing. b. Inner and outer shaft seals separated by an oil chamber.

2. Cooling: a. Suitable for continuous operation in totally, partially or non-submerged

condition without overheating. b. Convection cooling by the surrounding environment or pump cooling by

circulating a portion of the pumped media through a cooling water jacket as recommended by the manufacturer based on horsepower and application.

3. Electrical cables: a. Wire unit without splices. Coordinate with Contractor to ensure cables of

adequate length. b. Epoxy encapsulated cable entry into terminal box.

4. Insulation: a. Sealed moisture resistant windings. b. Class H.

5. Motor protection: a. Provide temperature detection in motor windings. b. Provide moisture detection in motor housing. c. Other detection and protection functions specified in the in the driven

equipment Section.

C. Vertical motors: 1. Enclosures:

a. Totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) for motors 200 hp and less installed outdoors.

b. Weather protected Type II (WPII) for motors greater than 200 horsepower installed outdoors.

c. Weather protected type I (WPI) where installed indoors. 2. Thrust bearings:

a. Selected for combined rotor and driven equipment loads. b. Coordinate with driven equipment supplier for maximum vertical thrust of

driven equipment. 3. Anti-reverse ratchet.

D. Motors driven by variable frequency drives: 1. Compatible with the variable frequency drives specified. 2. Inverter duty rated and labeled. 3. Meet the requirements of NEMA MG-1 Part 31. 4. Winding insulation meets the requirements of NEMA MG-1 Part 31.4.4.2. 5. Capable of running continuously at 1/10th of full speed, with no harmful effects of

overheating.


6. Shaft grounding ring/ceramic bearings: a. Provide a shaft grounding ring for each VFD driven motor. b. Aluminum frame and internal components. c. Conductive microfiber brushes. d. Maintenance free design. e. Aegis Bearing Protection ring as manufactured by Electro Static Technology

or equal. 7. In addition to the requirements of NEMA MG 1, Part 31, motors shall be designed

to be continually pulsed at the motor terminals with a voltage of 1600 volts ac.

E. Motors installed in corrosive environments: 1. Nameplate indicating conformance to IEEE 841. 2. Stator double dipped in varnish and baked. 3. Stator and rotor coated with corrosion resistant epoxy. 4. Frame, brackets, fan guard and conduit box coated with minimum of 2 coats of

epoxy paint. 5. Withstand salt spray tests in accordance with ASTM B-117. 6. Suitable for hose down areas.

F. Single phase motors: 1. Totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) motors manufactured in accordance with

NEMA MG 1. 2. Ball bearings: Sealed. 3. 1/2 horsepower or less fan motors:

a. Split-phase or shaded pole type when standard for the equipment. b. Open type when suitably protected from moisture, dripping water, and lint

accumulation. 4. Wound rotor or commutator type single-phase motors only when their specific

characteristics are necessary for application and their use is acceptable to the Engineer.

G. Integral overload protection.

H. Motors installed in corrosive environments: 1. Nameplate indicating conformance to IEEE 841. 2. Stator double dipped in varnish and baked. 3. Stator and rotor coated with corrosion resistant epoxy. 4. Frame, brackets, fan guard and conduit box coated with minimum of 2 coats of

epoxy paint. 5. Withstand salt spray tests in accordance with ASTM B-117. 6. Suitable for hose down areas.

I. Immersible motors: NOT USED.

2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Motor winding space heaters: 1. Provide winding space heaters only where specified or shown on the Drawings. 2. Space heater rating shall be 120 volts, single-phase, unless otherwise indicated

on the Drawings. 3. Power leads for heaters wired into conduit box.


4. Installed within motor enclosure adjacent to core iron.

B. Winding temperature detectors: 1. Provide factory installed winding temperature detector with leads terminating in

the conduit box: a. Where required by the driven equipment Specification or as indicated on the

Drawings. 2. Temperature switches with normally closed contacts as indicated on the

Drawings.


A. Factory testing: 1. Motors less than 500 hp:

a. Perform manufacturer’s standard production tests including but not limited to: 1) No load current. 2) High potential test. 3) Winding resistance. 4) Core loss on motor rewinds.

b. Furnish copies of standard test reports on prototype or identical units.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION


B. Install motors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Install shaft grounding ring on VFD-driven motors in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.



B. Before start-up, perform insulation resistance test on each motor furnished or installed on this project: 1. Windings energized to 1,000 volts DC for 1 minute. 2. Resistance measured at the end of the test, recorded, and submitted to the

Engineer for review. 3. Inform the Engineer of any unusual or unacceptable test results. 4. This test is in addition to the acceptance tests in Section 16950 – Field Electrical

Acceptance Tests.

3.03 PROTECTION


END OF SECTION


[Motor form]

MOTOR DATA SHEET

MOTOR/ EQUIPMENT TAG MOTOR

NUMBER SPECIFICATION NUMBER OF DRIVEN MACHINE

MOTOR NAMEPLATE DATA

MANUFACTURER MODEL/SERIES MODEL NO.

FRAME ENCLOSURE NEMA

DESIGN HP SERVICE FACTOR

RPM INSULATION CLASS

VOLTS FULL LOAD AMPS

AMBIENT TEMP PHASE NO LOAD AMPS

DESIGN TEMP RISE HERTZ LOCK ROTOR

AMPS INRUSH

CODE LETTER

100% LOAD 75% LOAD 50% LOAD

GUARANTEED MINIMUM

EFFICIENCIES: GUARANTEED

MINIMUM POWER FACTOR:

MAXIMUM SIZE OF POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITOR: KVAR

ACCESSORIES

MOTOR WINDING HEATER VOLTS

WATTS WINDING THERMAL

PROTECTION

WINDING TEMP SWITCHES

(YES/NO) RTD:

TYPE QUANTITY PER PHASE # OF WIRES

NOMINAL RESISTANCE NOMINAL


TEMP COEFFICIENT

RECOMMENDED ALARM °C RECOMMENDED TRIP °C

SPECIAL APPLICATIONS

INVERTER DUTY* (YES/NO) PART WINDING (YES/NO) WYE - DELTA

(YES/NO) 2 SPEED, 1 WINDING (YES/NO) 2 SPEED, 2

WINDING (YES/NO)

AREA CLASSIFICATION:

CLASS DIVISION GROUP TEMP CODE

* Conforms to NEMA MG-1 Part 31.

VFD Pre-purchase 16263-1 11487A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/OR/Clean Water Services/11487A10/Specifications/16263 (Bidset) April 2021 - BID

SECTION 16263

VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES 0.50 – 100 HORSEPOWER

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: 1. Variable frequency drives (VFD) 0.5 to 100 horsepower for control of NEMA

Design B squirrel cage induction motors installed in: a. Standalone enclosures.


binding as if called for by all. 2. It is the Owners responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the Work of


1.02 REFERENCES


B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).

C. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): 1. 519 - IEEE Recommended Practices and Requirements for Harmonic Control

in Electrical Power Systems.

D. Underwriters’ Laboratories (UL): 1. 50 - Standards for Enclosures for Electrical Equipment. 2. 508A - Standard for Safety for Industrial Control Panels

1.03 DEFINITIONS


B. Specific definitions: 1. Point of common coupling: the point of common coupling for all harmonic

calculation and field measurements for both voltage and current distortions is defined as the closest directly connected panelboard or motor control center bus supplying power to the VFD.


A. Design requirements: 1. Each VFD system consists of all components required to meet the

performance, protection, safety, testing, and certification criteria of this Section.


B. The final VFD size shall be based on the full load current of the approved submittals of the driven load. 1. The VFD system:

a. Is a fully integrated package. b. Includes all material necessary to interconnect all VFD system elements,

even if shipped separately.

C. Any modifications to a standard product necessary to meet this Section shall be made only by the VFD manufacturer: 1. Each VFD shall be completely factory pre-wired, assembled, and then tested

as a complete system by the VFD manufacturer to ensure a properly coordinated, fully integrated drive system.

2. The VFD shall be capable of operating standard NEMA Design B motors. It is the responsibility of the VFD manufacturer to ensure that the drive will not damage motor insulation due to high carrier frequency, reflected wave, dv/dt or other drive electrical characteristics based upon the installed conditions: a. Provide equipment necessary to mitigate potential damage to motor

insulation. b. Coordinate bearing protection methods with the supplier of the driven

equipment. c. Motors as specified in Section 16222 - Low Voltage Motors up to 500

Horsepower

D. Performance: 1. Operating envelope:

a. Speed and torque requirements: 1) Provide a constant torque VFD regardless of the driven load. 2) The VFD shall be capable of producing a variable alternating

voltage/frequency output to provide continuous operation over the 40 to 200 percent (25 to 120 hertz) speed range.

b. Current requirements: 1) Full rated current output on a continuous basis. 2) Constant torque VFD:

a) Minimum 150 percent current overload for 1 minute. b) Minimum continuous rating of 1.16% of motor nameplate full

load current. 2. Minimum VFD system efficiency:

a. Ninety-six percent. b. VFD system efficiency shall be calculated as follows: Efficiency (%) =

[Power (Load) / Power (Supply)] x 100. c. Power (Load) is the total power measured at the output terminals of the

drive system, including VFD, output filters or transformers. Power (Supply) is the total power measured at the input terminals of the VFD including input filters, line reactors, isolation transformers, harmonic distortion attenuation equipment and auxiliary equipment (e.g., controls, fans) for complete system operation.

3. Total power factor: a. Minimum of 0.96 lagging across the entire speed range. b. At no speed shall the VFD have a leading power factor.

4. Frequency accuracy: a. Minimum of within 0.01 percent.


5. Speed regulation: a. Minimum of within 0.5 percent across the entire speed range

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish submittals as specified in Sections 01330 - Submittal Procedures and 16050 - Common Work Results for Electrical.

B. Custom prepared by the VFD manufacturer and specific for the equipment/application furnished.

C. Product data: 1. Manufacturer of the VFD. 2. Manufacturer of all components of the VFD. 3. Dimensions:

a. Height. b. Width. c. Depth. d. Weight.

4. Cabinet Nameplate: a. Materials: Laminated phenolic plastic nameplates with white background

and engraved black enamel filled lettering. b. Fastening: Secure with self-tapping Type 316 stainless steel screws. c. Size: Shall be not less than 2.25 inches high, with 1-inch high block

lettering for descriptive name and 1/2-inch-high block lettering for descriptive tag number lettering

d. Identification shall include the descriptive name on the first line, the CWS standard tag number on the second line and the power source on the third line:

Non Pot Pump #2

551VFD4602

MCC 9031 – 2C

e. Text shall be centered on all nameplates and identification devices. 5. Bill of material, including quantity, description, manufacturer, part number,

serial number, vendor name with phone, and spare part list with unit price. Bills of material shall include all items within enclosure. a. Provide the Bill of material on thumb drive in Microsoft Excel format.

6. Ratings: a. Voltage. b. Phase. c. Input current. d. Output current. e. Interrupting rating. f. Momentary current rating.

7. List of recommended spare parts. 8. Catalog cut sheets for major components. 9. Design data:

a. Efficiency and power factor values.


b. Certification that the drive is sized for the full nameplate motor horsepower and current of the driven load at the installed altitude and ambient temperature.

c. Certification that based upon VFD design, cable length to motor, and motor dielectric insulation level that the VFD will not damage motor insulation due to carrier frequency, reflected wave, dv/dt, or other VFD produced characteristics.

d. Certification that all electronic circuits and printed circuit boards are conformally coated.

10. List of diagnostic indicators. 11. List of fault and failure conditions that the drive can recognize and indicate for

simultaneous occurrence. 12. List of standard features and options. 13. For equipment installed within a motor control center, the contractor shall

submit a letter confirming each VFD unit contained within the MCC has been coordinated with its respective driven load. Letter shall list VFD location and driven equipment tag numbers as well as the FLA rating of each driven load motor. Motor data sheets for each driven load motor shall be attached to the coordination letter for verification.

14. For equipment installed in structures designated as seismic design category C, D, E, or F submit the following as specified in Section 16050 - Common Work Results for Electrical: a. Manufacturer’s statement of seismic qualification with substantiating test

data. b. Manufacturer’s special seismic certification with substantiating test data.

15. List of parameters that will be changed from default settings in PDF format.

D. Shop drawings: 1. Complete plan and elevation drawings showing:

a. All dimensions. b. Panel, sub-panel and component layout indexed to the bill of material. c. Conduit connections.

2. Block diagram showing the basic control and protection systems specifying the protection, control, trip and alarm functions, the reference signals and commands and the auxiliary devices.

3. Complete schematic, wiring and interconnection diagrams showing connections to both internal and external devices: a. Include terminal number and wire numbers.

4. Complete single-line and 3-line diagrams including, but not limited to, circuit breakers, motor circuit protectors, contactors, instrument transformers, meters, relays, timers, control devices, and other equipment comprising the complete system: a. Clearly indicate device electrical ratings on the drawings.

E. Installation instructions: 1. Detail the complete installation of the equipment including rigging, moving, and

setting into place. 2. For equipment installed in structures designated as seismic design category A

or B: 3. For equipment installed in structures designated as seismic design category C,

D, E, or F:


a. Provide project-specific installation instructions and anchoring details based on support conditions and requirements to resist seismic and wind loads.

b. Submit anchoring drawings with supporting calculations.

F. Operation and maintenance manuals: 1. Startup and commissioning instructions and data. 2. Operating manuals:

a. Submit operating instructions and a maintenance manual presenting full details for care and maintenance of each model of VFD provided under this Contract.

3. Operating instructions: a. Written descriptions detailing the operational functions of all controls on

the front panel. 4. Maintenance manual:

a. Furnish maintenance manuals with instructions covering all details pertaining to care and maintenance of all equipment as well as identifying all parts.

b. Manuals shall include, but are not limited to the following: 1) Adjustment and test instructions covering the steps involved in the

initial test, adjustment and start-up procedures. 2) Detailed control instructions which outline the purpose and operation

of every control device used in normal operation. 3) All schematic wiring and external diagrams:

a) Furnish drawings in a reduced 11-inch by 17-inch format that are fully legible at that size.

5. List of parameters that have been changed from default settings. 6. If any changes are made during on-site startup correct and re-submit as a

complete package. 7. Final O&M:

a. Submit electronic version in Adobe .PDF format. 1) Electronic documents shall not be scanned 2) Shall be in on color

b. Submit 1 final Hard copy in color and with 11-inch by 17-inch drawing.

G. Test forms and reports. 1. Submit complete factory acceptance test procedures and all forms used during

the test. a. For VFD units less than 250 horsepower, provide certified test results for

the actual VFD being furnished or prototype units. For VFD units 250 horsepower and larger, provide certified test results for the actual VFD being furnished.

b. Provide the following certified test reports: 1) Efficiency at rated power output and output frequency of 60 hertz. 2) Power factor at 0 percent, 25 percent, 50 percent, 75 percent, and

100 percent speed. c. Submit complete field acceptance test procedures and all forms used

during the test: 1) Certification that the actual measured peak voltage at the motor

terminations is less than 90 percent of the motor insulation dielectric withstand level.


H. Manufacturer’s field reports: 1. Certification letter from the VFD manufacturer that the VFD(s) has been

inspected and installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements. 2. Report listing the setting of all VFD adjustable parameters and their values

after start-up.

I. Record Documents: 1. Certified Record Documents of equipment with information listed above.

1.06 SEISMIC DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide electrical equipment with construction and anchorage to supporting structures designed to resist site seismic loads as specified by, Meteorological and Seismic Design Criteria.


A. Qualifications: 1. Any third-party certification, safety or protection requirements shall be applied

to the VFD system as a whole. Certification or protection of system elements or individual components by themselves is not acceptable.

2. VFD systems shall be UL 508C listed and labeled. 3. VFD systems (packaged VFD panels) shall be UL 508A listed and labeled. 4. Variable frequency drives shall be manufactured by the VFD manufacturer at

its own facility which shall have a quality assurance program that is certified in conformance with ISO 9001.



B. Ship the VFDs and associated equipment to the job site on a dedicated air ride vehicle that will allow the Contractor to utilize on site off-loading equipment: 1. VFDs shall be delivered to the site preassembled and wired. 2. Ship each VFD with 2 tamperproof accelerometers that record the maximum

shock and vibration experienced by the VFD during shipping and handling.

C. Furnish temporary equipment heaters within the VFD to prevent condensation from forming.

1.09 SEQUENCING

A. Submit equipment for review.

B. Following approved submittal, conduct internal factory test to ensure that all systems and equipment are functional and submit certified test results for OWNER review.

C. Ship equipment to project site after successful completion of factory acceptance test.


D. Conduct field acceptance tests and submit results for Engineer’s review.

E. Conduct Owner’s training sessions.

F. Formally energize, start-up and commission equipment on-site after complete installation. Schedule on-site time Minimum 4 hours per unit.

1.10 SCHEDULING

A. As specified in the RFQ.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Supplier shall coordinate warranties for pumps, motors, and drives such that supplier acts as a single point of contact for all warranties.

B. OWNER shall be listed as recipient of all warranties.

C. At no additional charge the Manufacturer shall replace any work or material they have provided which develops defects within 2 years from date of final acceptance of installed equipment by OWNER. 1. Manufacturer’s service and repair support during and after warranty. 2. Correction of Defective Work: During the warranty period, SUPPLIER shall

respond to telephone notification of defective work or equipment malfunction from the OWNER by dispatching a competent authorized representative to the project site within 24 hours.

3. SUPPLIER’s representative shall have access to all necessary parties (if necessary) within 24 hours following notification of defective work or equipment malfunction. Repairs and adjustments involving parts shall start within 48 hours of said notification.

D. All materials and equipment shall be warranted against defective materials, design and workmanship.

E. During the warranty period, the Manufacturer or his authorized dealer is required to make the necessary repairs or replacements on site.

F. Warranties which mention that the part must be returned to the factory are not acceptable.

G. During the warranty period, the Owner will not accept charges for: 1. Travel time. 2. Mileage. 3. Materials 4. On-site repair labor.

H. Warranty shall list any and all items excluded.

I. If necessary, as determined by the Owner, any repairs must be made on a premium time basis.



A. The VFD manufacturer shall be responsible for startup of the VFDs in the presence of the Owner.

1.13 COMMISSIONING

A. As specified in Section 01756 - Testing and Startup.

B. After startup and training has been completed, the VFDs shall be commissioned by the VFD manufacturer: 1. The VFDs shall operate the driven load without failure under normal operating

conditions for a period of 30 days. 2. Any failures shall be repaired by the VFD manufacturer. 3. Following repair, the commissioning period shall be restarted. Commissioning

shall only be complete once an uninterrupted 30-day period has been completed.

1.14 MAINTENANCE


B. Maintenance service: Manufacturer shall describe the field service system available to support the proposed VFD system. As a minimum describe: 1. Type of technical support available (e.g., system engineering and technician). 2. Location of field service personnel. 3. Field service daily rates in dollars per hour and dollars per day. 4. Guaranteed response times to service requests.

C. Spare parts: 1. The following spare parts shall be furnished:

a. 1 complete VFD of each size furnished. b. 1 set of all power and control fuses for each VFD. c. 1 complete main control key pad for each type and rated size of VFD. d. 1 spare fan for each VFD unit. e. 2 sets of ventilation filters for each VFD unit (if applicable in VFD cabinet

louvers). f. 1 set of thyristors or power electronics for each type and rated size of VFD. g. Any special dedicated tools for emergency service and troubleshooting. h. All hardware and software required for configuration, maintenance,

troubleshooting and inquiry of all drive parameters

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Following or equal: 1. Eaton – SVX. 2. Allen-Bradley. 3. Siemens. 4. ABB.


2.02 EQUIPMENT

A. General: 1. Sinusoidal pulse width modulated (PWM) type drive.

a. Six-pulse insulated gate bipolar transistor (IGBT) power section. b. Microprocessor based controls. c. 5% Line reactors and 3% dv/dt load filters.

B. Ratings: 1. Voltage:

a. Input voltage: 480 volts within 10 percent, 3-phase, 60 hertz. 2. Short-circuit rating:

a. 65 kA RMS symmetrical.

C. Operational features: 1. Protective features:

a. Provide the following minimum protective features: 1) Motor overload protection. 2) Instantaneous overcurrent. 3) Instantaneous overvoltage. 4) Under voltage. 5) Power unit over temperature. 6) Phase loss. 7) VFD output short circuit. 8) Blown fuse.

2. Control mode: a. Operation in either a constant volts/hertz or sensor less vector mode:

1) The control mode selectable using the programming keypad. 3. Frequency control:

a. Minimum of 3 selectable skip frequencies with adjustable bandwidths. b. Programmable minimum frequency. c. Programmable maximum frequency.

4. Acceleration/deceleration: a. Separately adjustable acceleration and deceleration rates:

1) Each rate adjustable from 0.01 to 3,600 seconds. 5. Spinning load:

a. The VFD shall be capable of determining the speed and direction of a spinning load, “catch” the load and accelerate or decelerate it without damage to the load.

6. Programmable loss of signal: a. Upon loss of speed reference, the VFD shall be programmable to either:

1) Stop. 2) Maintain current speed. 3) Default to pre-selected speed.

7. Power interrupt ride-through: a. The VFD shall be capable of continuous operation in the event of a power

loss of 5 cycles or less. 8. Inputs/Outputs:

a. Manufacturer’s standard number the following: 1) Analog inputs:

a) Configurable as 4 to 20 milliamperes.


2) Analog outputs: a) Programmable 4 to 20 milliamperes isolated.

3) Discrete inputs: a) Programmable.

4) Discrete outputs: a) Programmable. b) Form C relay contacts.

5) Potentiometer 3-wire input. b. Provide additional inputs/outputs as required to meet the control functions

indicated on the Drawings. 9. Communications:

a. Provide each VFD with a communications interface ability as noted below: 1) EtherNet/IP.

10. Diagnostics:

a. Store a minimum of 4 fault conditions in non-volatile memory on a first in- first out basis.

b. Operational parameters stored at the time of the fault: 1) Operating frequency. 2) Drive status. 3) Power mode.

c. Fault memory accessible via RS-232, RS-422 or RS-485. 11. Automatic restart:

a. User selectable automatic restart feature allowing the VFD to restart following a momentary power failure or other VFD fault: 1) Programmable for up to 9 restart attempts. 2) Adjustable time delay between restart attempts.

2.03 COMPONENTS

A. The VFD shall be capable of being programmed while energized. Provide an accessible port to connect a laptop from outside of the enclosure with the enclosure door closed and the VFD energized.

B. Provide cooling fans to maintain the VFD enclosure within the Manufacturer’s specified temperature limits for the project conditions. 1. Controlled by control power on. 2. Long-life low noise cooling fans, sized for 150 percent capacity cooling. 3. Provide power and fuse protection for the cooling fans.

C. Provide internal VFD cooling devices and controls required to maintain the VFD within the Manufacturer’s specified temperature limits for the project conditions. 1. Fans shall start/stop with the VFD internal thermostat.

D. Power disconnect: 1. Flange mounted thermal magnetic circuit breaker. 2. Lockable in the OFF position.

E. Line Reactors: 1. 5 percent input.


F. Load Filters: 1. Dv/dt output.

a. Common mode reduction: 30 percent minimum. b. Motor terminal peak voltage limit: 150 percent of dc bus voltage with a

motor lead length up to 1000 feet. c. Carrier frequency range: up to 12 khz. d. Efficiency: 98 percent minimum. e. Class H insulation minimum.

2.04 ENCLOSURES

A. Provide louvers on the VFD enclosure, adequate in size and quantity to cool the VFD. No filters are required, District to provided and install.

B. Enclosure: 1. NEMA 1 Gasketed.

C. Provide cooling devices required to maintain the VFD within the manufacturer’s specified temperature limits for the Project conditions. The cooling fans shall run continuously with VFD control power.

D. All wiring shall be MTW-type.

E. Control power transformer:

2. Furnish a control power transformer mounted and wired inside the VFD enclosure. a. With primary and secondary fusing.

3. Sized to power all VFD controls and options as well as any external devices indicated on the Drawings including the motor winding heater.

F. Door mounted speed potentiometer for manual speed control.

G. Keypad: 1. Provide each VFD with a keypad for programming only.

a. Control shall be through pilot devices 2. Keypad requirements:

a. Password security to protect drive parameters. b. Mounted on the door of the motor control center. c. Back-lit LCD:

1) Minimum of 2 lines with a minimum of 16 characters per line. d. Programming and display features language: English. e. Capable of displaying the following parameters:

1) Speed (percent). 2) Output current (amperes). 3) Output frequency (hertz). 4) Input voltage. 5) Output voltage. 6) Total 3-phase kilowatt. 7) Kilowatt-hour meter. 8) Elapsed run time meter. 9) Revolutions per minute.


10) Direct current bus voltage. 3. In addition to all keys required for programming, provide the following controls

on the keypad: a. Auto/manual selector. b. Start pushbutton. c. Stop pushbutton. d. Jog pushbutton. e. Speed increment. f. Speed decrement. g. Forward/reverse selector. h. Run LED indicator. i. Program LED indicator. j. Fault LED indicator.

4. Provide the VFD with the hardwired controls as indicated on the Control Wiring Diagram Drawings.

H. Provide pilot devices, including but not limited to, selector switches, pushbuttons, and indicator lights, as shown on the Drawings. 1. 22 millimeter indicator lights, IEC.

a. Eaton C22 style 2. Each door mounted device shall be labeled on the front and back.

I. All conductors shall be individually labeled using heat shrinkable tube labels on each end. Each label shall be typewritten.

J. Control conductor color coding shall be as follows: 1. Grounded conductors = White 2. Grounding conductors = Green 3. Ungrounded conductors = Red

K. Power conductor (480v) color coding shall be as follows: 1. Phase A = Brown 2. Phase B = Orange 3. Phase C = Yellow

L. Provide one (1) common grounding bus bar for all grounding connections. The use of multiple grounding bus bars shall not be permitted. The grounding bus bar shall be sized for all grounding connections entering and leaving the enclosure.

2.05 ACCESSORIES

A. Metal oxide varistors: 1. Provide protection for the VFD against:

a. Line transients: 5,000 volt peak minimum. b. Line to ground transients: 7,000 peak minimum.

B. Conformal coating: 1. Provide conformal coating material applied to electronic circuitry and printed

circuit boards to act as a protection against Moisture, dust, temperature extremes, and chemicals such as H2S and chlorine.


2.06 FINISHES

A. Enclosure finish shall be manufacturer’s standard gray.


A. VFDs, factory testing: 1. Provide a certified copy of the test results to the OWNER:

a. Include in the results any minor adjustments made during the test. b. If major changes must be made, the test must be repeated.

2. General: a. Incoming inspection of components and raw materials based on strategic

supplier base and experience. b. The testing procedures specified are the minimum acceptable

requirements. The manufacturer may perform additional tests at its discretion.

3. Failure of any component during testing requires repair of the faulted component and complete retest.

4. Component tests: a. Preliminary inspection:

1) Verify that all components are correct. 2) Verify that all connections are properly torqued.

b. Printed circuit boards: 1) Test for correct component placement and value and complete board

functional test to ensure proper performance with specified tolerances. 2) Heat cycle test for 48 hours at 60 degrees Celsius. 3) Apply control power to microprocessors, printed circuit boards,

diagnostic boards, and similar devices including software to test for proper operation, sequencing, logic, and diagnostics.

4) Test operation of all analog and discrete inputs and outputs. c. Wiring:

1) Control and power wiring continuity verified point-to- point. 2) Verify ground bond resistance.

d. Load testing: 1) No load testing in accordance with the manufacturer’s standard

factory test procedure. 2) Full load testing:

a) Test each VFD and a representative motor with the system logic and a dynamometer load to simulate field operation conditions at 25 percent, 50 percent, and 100 percent full load current.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION


B. Install the equipment in accordance with the accepted installation instructions and anchorage details to meet the seismic and wind load requirements at the Project site.


C. General: 1. Furnish all cables, lugs, bolts, sealants, terminal block lugs to land motor leads

to, wires between VFD and terminal block lugs and other accessories needed to complete the installation of the VFD (free-standing or within motor control center).

2. Assemble and install the VFD in the locations and with the layouts indicated on the Drawings.

3. Perform Work in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and shop drawings.

4. Furnish components, and equipment as required to complete the installation. 5. Replace any hardware lost or damaged during the installation or handling to

provide a complete installation. 6. Provide openings in top or bottom of the VFD enclosure for conduit only, no

additional openings will be allowed. Improperly cut holes will require that the entire panel be replaced. a. Depending on installation constraints verify if top or bottom entry is

preferred. 7. Bundle circuits together and terminate in each unit:

a. Use nylon zip ties and sticky backs. Cut flush with appropriate tool to leave smooth edges.

b. Label all wires at each end with wire numbers shown on the approved control drawings.

c. All connections to and from the VFD enclosure must be made via terminal blocks.

8. Program VFDs for control functionality identified in schematics and control loop descriptions and configure network settings in coordination with Owner.



B. Provide the services of a VFD manufacturer representative for startup assistance and training: 1. Inspection and field adjustment:

a. Supervise the following and submit written certification that the equipment and controls have been properly installed, aligned, adjusted, and readied for operation.

2. Startup field testing: a. Provide technical direction for testing, checkout, and startup of the VFD

equipment in the field. Schedule on-site time Minimum 4 hours per unit. b. Under no circumstances are any portions of the drive system to be

energized without authorization from the manufacturer's representative. c. Compliance with the following specified parameters shall be verified by

the VFD manufacturer: 1) Motor terminal voltage:

a) Make field measurements at the motor connection box. b) Make measurements of the full speed range of the VFD. c) Make measurements with a recording type oscilloscope.


3.03 ADJUSTING

A. Make all adjustments as necessary and recommended by the manufacturer, Engineer, or testing firm.

B. Provide the services of a VFD manufacturer factory technician to make all drive parameters and protective device settings: 1. Protective device settings provided by the VFD manufacturer in accordance

with the manufacturer of the driven equipment requirements. 2. Provide documentation of VFD settings included but not limited to:

a. Minimum speed. b. Maximum speed. c. Skip speeds. d. Current limit. e. Acceleration time. f. Deceleration time. g. Carrier frequency.

C. Programming: 1. Manufacturer/supplier may contract with the project Programmer for portions

of the tasks below. 2. Provide all gateway communications between the drive to the Owner's control

system as required. 3. Provide all control logic as indicated in the control descriptions. 4. Configure all network communications with applicable security settings, IP

addresses and any other addressing tables required to provide a fully functioning system.

5. Coordinate all IP addresses with the Owner. 6. Coordinate data exchange approach for efficient communications to the

Owner's control and maintenance systems. This effort will include a coordination meeting to discuss the data exchange approach including formatting and mapping.

7. Provide witnessed source testing to prove out all drive control logic as well as interaction with Owner’s control and maintenance systems at the supplier's facility. ICSC/Programmer shall attend witnessed testing.

3.04 CLEANING




B. The authorized representative shall instruct the OWNER's personnel in the operation and maintenance of the equipment, including step by step troubleshooting with test equipment for two (2) Days, with the first half day in classroom setting and the rest with actual equipment furnished. Instructions shall be specific to the VFD models provided in this project.


C. Training shall be scheduled a minimum of four (4) weeks in advance of the first session. Training dates and time shall be determined by the OWNER. Training shall include individual sessions for up to ten (10) personnel. 1. Proposed training materials shall be submitted for review a minimum of four (4)

weeks in advance, and comments shall be incorporated prior to training. Training materials shall remain with the trainees. The OWNER may videotape the training for later use with the OWNER's personnel.

3.06 PROTECTION


END OF SECTION

Disconnect Switches 16411-1 11487A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/OR/Clean Water Services/11487A10/Specifications/16411 (Bidset) April 2021 - BID

SECTION 16411

DISCONNECT SWITCHES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: 1. Fusible and non-fusible disconnect switches.




1.02 REFERENCES


B. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL): 1. 20 - General-Use Snap Switches. 2. 98 - Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches. 3. 508 - Standard for Industrial Control Equipment.

C. National Electric Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA): 1. 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment. 2. KS 1-2001- Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600

Volts Maximum).

1.03 DEFINITIONS


B. Specific definitions: 1. Safety switches and disconnect switches are to be considered synonymous.


A. Provide heavy-duty type disconnect switches as indicated on the Drawings and specified in the Contract Documents.

B. Provide disconnect switches with the number of poles, voltage, current, short circuit, and horsepower ratings as required by the load and the power system.

C. Provide a local horsepower rated disconnect switch as indicated on the Drawings.


1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish submittals as specified in Sections 01330 and 16050.

B. Product data: 1. Manufacturer. 2. Manufacturer's specifications and description. 3. Ratings:

a. Voltage. b. Current. c. Horsepower. d. Short circuit rating.

4. Fused or non-fused. 5. NEMA enclosure type. 6. Dimensions:

a. Height. b. Width. c. Depth.

7. Weight. 8. Dimensioned drawings. 9. Elementary diagrams. 10. Wiring diagrams. 11. Nameplate list. 12. Evidence that the equipment will be provided with all specified accessories,

options, features, and characteristics. 13. Certifications that the equipment is designed and manufactured in conformance

with applicable codes and standards.

C. Manual. Provide manufacturer’s installation and maintenance instruction manuals in conformance with Section 16050 - Common Work Results for Electrical.

D. Shop drawings: 1. Manufacturer's installation instructions:

a. Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency specified under Quality Assurance, Regulatory Requirements below.

b. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and operation of product.

2. Identify motor or equipment served by each switch; indicate nameplate inscription.

E. Installation instructions: 1. Provide anchorage instructions and requirement based on the seismic

requirements at the Project Site as specified in Section 16050 - Common Work Results for Electrical and calculations: a. Stamped by a professional engineer registered in the State of Oregon.




B. Regulatory requirements: 1. NEMA KS1- Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Switches (600 V

Maximum). 2. UL 98 - Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches.

C. Disconnect switches shall be UL listed and labeled.

1.07 SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide electrical equipment with construction anchorage to supporting structures designed to resist site seismic loads as specified in Section 01612 - Seismic Design Criteria.





1.10 WARRANTY




PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. One of the following or equal: 1. Schneider Electric. 2. Eaton. 3. GE by ABB. 4. Siemens. 5. Appleton. 6. Crouse-Hinds

2.02 EQUIPMENT

A. Disconnect Switch 1. Switch mechanism:

a. Quick-make, quick-break heavy-duty operating mechanisms: 1) Provisions for padlocking the switch in the Off position. 2) A minimum of 90-degree handle travel position between Off and On

positions: a) Provide handle position indicators to identify the handle position.


3) Full cover interlock to prevent opening of the switch door in the On position and to prevent closing the switch mechanism with the door open: a) With an externally operated override.

2. Switch interior: a. Switch blades visible when the switch is Off and the cover is open. b. Lugs:

1) Front accessible. 2) Removable. 3) UL listed for 60/75-degree Celsius copper conductors.

c. Current carrying parts completely plated to resist corrosion. d. Removable arc suppressors to facilitate easy access to line side lugs. e. Furnish equipment ground kits for every switch. f. Installed Auxiliary contact kit.

3. Ratings:

a. UL horsepower rated for AC or DC with the rating not less than the load served.

b. Current: 1) 30 to 1,200 amperes.

c. Voltage: 1) 250 volts AC, DC. 2) 600 volts (30 A to 200 A, 600 volts DC).

d. Poles: 1) 2, 3, 4, and 6 poles.

e. UL listed short circuit ratings: 1) 10,000 RMS symmetrical amperes when used with or protected by

Class H or K fuses (30-600 amperes). 2) 200,000 RMS symmetrical amperes when used with or protected by

Class R or J fuses (30-600 amperes employing appropriate fuse rejection).

3) 200,000 RMS symmetrical amperes when used with or protected by Class L fuses (800-1,200 amperes).

f. Where not indicated on the Drawings, provide switches with the NEMA ratings specified in Section 16050 - Common Work Results for Electrical for the installed location.

4. Size and number of poles as indicated on the Drawings or as required. a. Provide solid neutral where indicated on the Drawings.

5. Local power disconnects for 480V electrical actuators shall be 3 pole, 600V, non-fusible, NEMA 4X SS, 316, UL listed. Power disconnect shall be ABB EOT16U3S4-P or approved equal.

6. Auxiliary Contacts. Two sets of Form C contacts shall be provided for all disconnect switches.

B. Motor Rated Toggle Switches: 1. Switch mechanism:

a. Rotary style operating mechanism: 1) Black pistol style handle type 2) Provisions for padlocking the switch in the Off position.


3) A minimum of 90-degree handle travel position between Off and On positions: a) Provide handle position indicators to identify the handle position.

4) Full cover interlock to prevent opening of the switch door in the On position and to prevent closing the switch mechanism with the door open: a) With an externally operated override.

2. Switch interior: a. Lugs:

1) Front accessible. 2) UL listed for 60/75-degree Celsius copper conductors.

b. Current carrying parts completely plated to resist corrosion. c. Furnish equipment ground kits for every switch.

3. Ratings: a. UL horsepower rated for AC or DC with the rating not less than the load

served. b. Current:

1) 30 amperes. c. Voltage:

1) 250 volts, DC. 2) 600 volts, AC.

d. Poles: 1) 3 poles.

e. UL listed short circuit ratings: 1) 10,000 RMS symmetrical amperes

4. NEMA 4X stainless steel enclosure.

C. Non-automatic Transfer Switch: 1. General. The non-automatic transfer switch shall transfer from the normal

service to an alternate service. The transfer shall not take place automatically but shall be initiated manually by operating personnel. Transfer back to the normal power supply shall also be initiated manually. The switch shall be UL listed and shall bear the UL label.

2. Construction. a. The non-automatic transfer switch shall be of the mechanically held double

throw type and connected to the transfer mechanism by a simple over-center linkage. All main power contacts and auxiliary contacts shall be mechanically attached to a common shaft, shall be double- break silver alloy with wiping action, and shall be protected by arcing contacts. Arcing contacts shall close before and open after the main contacts and shall be readily replaceable. Contact design and arrangement shall permit repeated making and breaking of full-load current, in a combination of motor and other loads, without damage to the main contacts. Provide a main transfer mechanism utilizing rugged metal parts throughout. Molded circuit breaker type designs are not acceptable.

b. The enclosure shall be NEMA 12 construction with hinged doors on the front for access to the interior controls. Secure doors by a locking type latch. Provide two keys for the lock.

c. Cable connections shall be accessible from the front without removing internal components.

d. Safety Requirements.


1) Arrange the electrical supply to each control panel to be disconnected by a single switch or circuit breaker, except for necessary foreign circuits. Cover any live parts within the control panel fed from foreign control or signal circuits or arrange for them to be disconnected by one of the following methods: a) Door-operated enclosed disconnect switches; or b) Clearly identified enclosed manually operated disconnect

switches, which may be located inside the control panel door, provided the operating handles are isolated or barriered from all open live parts.

2) Arrange the controls so that manipulation of control switches, adjustments to timing relays, or replacement of fuses can be done without exposure to live parts.

e. The transfer switch shall have the following features: 1) Continuous rating of 480 volts, 3-phase, with 3-poles and full neutral

bus. Current rating shall be as shown on the Drawings. 2) Adequate line and load lugs for terminating the power conductors

shown on the Drawings. 3) A terminal strip with terminals for terminating all external control

circuits. Number all terminals using the wire number for the wire terminated.

4) Cable wiring with cable ties, secured in place and guarded where subject to mechanical injury.

5) Permanent identification of each wire at each point of connection using numbered wiring sleeves. Provide electrically common wires with the same number. Uniquely number electrically different wires.

3. UL Label. The transfer switch shall have a UL label on the unit when it arrives at the site. Absence of the UL label shall be sufficient cause for the unit to be rejected. Provide all the specified features, options, and accessories. If the manufacturer's standard UL unit does not have the specified features, options, or accessories, then provide alternative features, options, or accessories to accomplish the same purpose in a manner similar to that specified, while still providing a unit with a UL label.

4. Current Ratings. The transfer switch shall have continuous ampere rating as shown on the Drawings and a short circuit withstand rating for 3 cycles at 480 volts as follows:

Continuous Ampere Rating

Withstand RMS Amperes, Symmetrical

300 A 100,000

5. Finish. Shall be manufacturer's standard not less than 3 mils thick. Color shall be light gray ANSI 61 per Z55.1.

6. Factory Tests. Assemble, wire and test the automatic transfer switch at the factory. Conduct tests to assure that every component functions properly. Submit prototype test reports on bus bracing for the Engineer's review.

2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Disconnect switches to have provisions for a field installable “B” type electrical interlock for position indication as indicated on the Drawings.


B. Disconnect switches to have provisions for a field installed insulated neutral kit as indicated on the Drawings.

C. NEMA Type 7 and 9 enclosures furnished with drain and breather kit when used in outdoor applications.

2.04 MANUFACTURERS

A. One of the following: 1. Eaton. 2. Siemens. 3. Appleton. 4. Crouse-Hinds.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION


B. Locations of disconnect switches on the Drawings are schematic in nature only. CONTRACTOR shall install disconnects in a readily accessible location, as defined by the NEC. All NEC working clearances shall be maintained. The CONTRACTOR shall verify the location of all power connections for equipment requiring disconnects with the approved Submittals and install the disconnect to meet Code.

C. Install motor rated toggle switches at gate and valve actuators.

D. Install the equipment in accordance with the accepted installation instructions and anchorage details to meet the seismic and wind load requirements at the Project site.

E. General: 1. Use Myers hubs for all conduit penetrations. 2. Conduits shall not enter the top of boxes in wet locations or in locations where

subject to water. 3. Provide all mounting brackets, stands, supports and hardware as required:

a. Match finish and materials for all brackets, stands, and hardware with the switch installed.

b. Provide adequate supporting pillar(s) for disconnect switches in accordance with the approved seismic calculations, and locate aboveground or above decks, where there is no structural wall or surface for box.

4. When possible, mount switches rigidly to exposed building structure or equipment structural members: a. For NEMA Type 4 and Type 4X locations, maintain a minimum of 7/8 inch

air space between the enclosure and supporting surface. b. When mounting on preformed channel, position channel vertically so that

water may freely run behind the enclosure. 5. Provide a nameplate for each disconnect switch:

a. Provide per requirements specified in Section 16075 – Electrical Identification.

b. Identify voltage, circuit, fuse size, and equipment served on the nameplate.


3.02 TESTING AND FACILITY START UP

A. As specified in Section 01756 - Testing And Facility Start Up.



3.04 CLEANING


3.05 PROTECTION


END OF SECTION

Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers 16412-1 11487A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/OR/Clean Water Services/11487A10/Specifications/16412 (Bidset) April 2021 - BID

SECTION 16412

LOW VOLTAGE MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

PART 1 PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: 1. Low voltage molded case circuit breakers as indicated on the Drawings and as

specified.

1.02 REFERENCES


B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 1. AB 3. - Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Their Application.

C. Underwriter’s Laboratories (UL): 1. 489 - Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches, and Circuit-Breaker

Enclosures. 2. 943 - Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters.

1.03 DEFINITIONS


B. In accordance with UL 489.


A. Molded case thermal magnetic or motor circuit protector type circuit breakers for existing equipment as indicated on the Drawings and connected to form a completed system.

1.05 SUBMITTALS


B. Product data: 1. Catalog cut sheets. 2. Manufacturer’s time-current curves for all molded case circuit breakers furnished.



B. Low voltage molded case circuit breakers shall be UL listed and labeled.


1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING




1.09 WARRANTY




PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. One of the following or equal: 1. Eaton. 2. Siemens. 3. Schneider Electric.


A. General: 1. Conforming to UL 489. 2. Provided by the manufacturer of the existing equipment. 3. Operating mechanism:

a. Quick-make, quick-break, non-welding silver alloy contacts. b. Common Trip, Open and Close for multi-pole breakers such that all poles

open and close simultaneously. c. Mechanically trip free from the handle. d. Trip indicating handle - automatically assumes a position midway between

the manual ON and OFF positions to clearly indicate the circuit breaker has tripped.

e. Lockable in the "OFF" position. 4. Arc extinction:

a. In arc chutes. 5. Voltage and current ratings:

a. Minimum ratings as indicated on the Drawings. b. Minimum frame size 100A.

6. Interrupting ratings: a. Minimum ratings as indicated on the Drawings. b. Not less than the rating of the assembly (panel-board, switchboard, motor

control center, etc.)

B. Motor circuit protectors: 1. Instantaneous only circuit breaker as part of a listed combination motor controller.


2. Each pole continuously adjustable in a linear scale with ‘LO’ and ‘HI’ settings factory calibrated.

2.03 COMPONENTS

A. Terminals: 1. Line and load terminals suitable for the conductor type, size, and number of

conductors in accordance with UL 489.

B. Case: 1. Molded polyester glass reinforced. 2. Ratings clearly marked.

C. Trip units: 1. Provide thermal magnetic or solid-state trip units as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Thermal magnetic:

a. Instantaneous short circuit protection. b. Inverse time delay overload. c. Ambient or enclosure compensated by means of a bimetallic element.

3. Solid state: a. With the following settings as indicated on the Drawings.

1) Adjustable long-time current setting. 2) Adjustable long-time delay. 3) Adjustable short time pickup. 4) Adjustable short time delay. 5) Adjustable instantaneous pickup. 6) Adjustable ground fault pickup as indicated on the Drawings. 7) Adjustable ground fault delay as indicated on the Drawings.

D. Provide ground fault trip devices as indicated on the Drawings.

E. Molded case circuit breakers for use in panel-boards: 1. Bolt-on type.

a. Plug-in type breakers are not acceptable. 2. Ground fault trip devices as indicated on the Drawings.

2.04 ACCESSORIES

A. Lockable handle: 1. Provide assembly to lock operating handle in ‘OPEN’ position. 2. Where a molded case circuit breaker is located in a dedicated enclosure, provide

a lockable handle. Reference the Electrical Specifications for additional locking requirements associated with other mounting installations.

B. Kirk keys: 1. Provide kirk key operation when shown on the Drawings.


A. Test breakers in accordance with: 1. UL 489. 2. Manufacturer’s standard testing procedures.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install breakers to correspond to the accepted shop drawings.



3.03 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust trip settings in accordance with Protective Device Coordination Study as accepted by the Engineer and in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

B. Adjust motor circuit protectors in accordance with NEC and the manufacturer’s recommendation based on the nameplate values of the installed motor.

3.04 PROTECTION


END OF SECTION

Motor Starters 16422-1 11487A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/OR/Clean Water Services/11487A10/Specifications/16422 (Bidset) April 2021 - BID

SECTION 16422

MOTOR STARTERS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: 1. Motor starters and contactors.

1.02 REFERENCES


B. International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC): 1. 60 947-4 - Low-Voltage Switchgear and Control Gear. 2. 801-1 - Electromagnetic Compatibility for Industrial-Process Measurement and

Control Equipment - Part 1: General Information.

C. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA): 1. ICS 2 - Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers, Contactors, and Overload

Relays Rated 600 V.

D. Underwriters Laboratories (UL): 1. 508 - Standard for Industrial Control Equipment. 2. 508A - Standard for Industrial Control Panels.

1.03 DEFINITIONS


B. Specific definitions and abbreviations: 1. FVNR: Full voltage non-reversing. 2. Overload relay class: A classification of an overload relay time current

characteristic by means of a number which designates the maximum time in seconds at which it will operate when carrying a current equal to 600 percent of its current rating.


A. General requirements: 1. Starters for existing motor control centers, individual enclosed starters, or control

panels.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish submittals as specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures and Section 16050, Common Work Results for Electrical: 1. Submit motor starter data with equipment submittal.


B. Product data: 1. Manufacturer. 2. Catalog cut sheets. 3. Technical information. 4. Complete nameplate schedule. 5. Complete bill of material. 6. List of recommended spare parts. 7. Confirmation that the overload relay class for each starter meets the requirements

of the equipment and motor supplier. 8. Electrical ratings:

a. Phase. b. Wire. c. Voltage. d. Ampacity. e. Horsepower.

9. Furnish circuit breaker submittals as specified in Section 16412 - Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers.

C. Shop drawings: 1. Elementary and schematic diagrams:

a. Provide 1 diagram for every starter and contactor. b. Indicate wire numbers for all control wires on the diagrams:

1) Wire numbering as specified in Section 16075 - Electrical Identification. c. Indicate interfaces with other equipment on the drawings.

D. Installation instructions: 1. For equipment installed in structures designated as seismic design category

A or B: a. Provide manufacturer’s installation instructions and anchoring details for

connecting equipment to supports and structures. 2. For equipment installed in structures designated as seismic design category C, D,

E, or F: a. Provide project-specific installation instructions and anchoring details based

on support conditions and requirements to resist seismic and wind loads as specified in Section 16050 - Common Work Results for Electrical.

b. Submit anchoring drawings with supporting calculations. c. Drawings and calculations shall be stamped by a professional engineer

registered in the state where the Project is being constructed.

E. Operation and maintenance manuals: 1. Submit complete operating and maintenance instructions presenting full details for

care and maintenance of equipment furnished or installed under this Section. Including but not limited to: a. Electrical ratings:

1) Phase. 2) Wire. 3) Voltage. 4) Ampacity.

b. Complete bill of material.


c. Manufacturer’s operating and maintenance instructions starter and/or contactor component parts, including: 1) Protective devices (fuses, breakers, overload relays, heater elements,

etc.). 2) Pilot devices.

d. Complete renewal parts list. e. As-built drawings:

1) Furnish as-built drawings for each starter and contactor indicating final: a) Wire numbers. b) Interfaces with other equipment.

2) 11-inch by 17-inch format.

F. Certifications: 1. Provide manufacturer’s certification that all electronic circuits and printed circuit

boards are conformally coated.

1.06 SPARE PARTS

A. No spare parts are required.



B. Regulatory requirements: 1. All starters and components shall be UL listed and labeled:

a. UL 508 - Industrial Control Equipment. b. UL 508A - Industrial Control Panels.

2. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control and System Controllers; Contactors and Overload Relays Rated: 600 Volts.

3. Combination starters shall be UL listed and labeled.





1.10 WARRANTY





1.12 MAINTENANCE

A. Spare parts: 1. Provide the following spare parts, suitably packaged and labeled with the

corresponding equipment number: a. One spare fuse of each size and type per starter.

PART 2 PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. One of the following or equal: 1. NEMA starters and contactors:

a. Eaton b. Allen-Bradley. c. Siemens.


A. General: 1. Provide combination type starters with motor circuit protector or thermal-magnetic

circuit breaker and control power transformer with ratings as indicated on the Drawings.

2. NEMA size, design, and rated: a. NEMA Size 1 minimum:

3. Coordinate motor circuit protector, thermal magnetic circuit breaker, or fusible disconnect, and overload trip ratings with nameplate horsepower and current ratings of the installed motor: a. If motors provided are different in horsepower rating than those specified or

indicated on the Drawings, provide starters coordinated to the actual motors furnished.

4. Provide starters NEMA Size 2 and larger with arc quenchers on load breaking contacts.

5. Mount extended overload reset buttons to be accessible for operation without opening starter enclosure door.

B. Full voltage starters (FVNR): 1. Across-the-line full voltage magnetic starters. 2. Rated for 600 volts. 3. Electrical characteristics as indicated on the Drawings. 4. Provide positive, quick-make, quick-break mechanisms, pad lockable enclosure

doors. 5. All starters shall be furnished with solid state electronic overload relays. 6. Double-break silver alloy contacts. 7. Reversing starters provided with both mechanical and electrical interlocks to

prevent line shorts and energizing both contactors simultaneously.


2.03 COMPONENTS

A. Molded case circuit breakers: 1. Circuit breaker type and ratings as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Provide as specified in Section 16412 - Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit

Breakers.

B. Contactors: 1. NEMA size as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Electrically held:

a. For lighting loads designed to withstand the initial inrush currents of ballast and lamp loads.

3. Factory adjusted and chatter free. 4. Auxiliary contacts:

a. Contact ratings as per NEMA A 600 rating: 1) Auxiliary contacts rated 10 amps at 600 volts.

b. Provide all contacts indicated on the Drawings, and any additional contacts required for proper operation.

c. Provide at least 1 normally open and 1 normally closed spare auxiliary contact.

5. Constructed in accordance with the following standards: a. UL 508. b. IEC 947-4.

1) Type 1 coordination when protected by a circuit breaker. 2) Type 2 coordination when protected by a suitable UL listed fuse.

c. IEC 801-1 parts 2 through 6.

C. Overloads: 1. Solid state electronic:

a. Selectable Class 10, 20, 30 protection. b. Ambient insensitive:

1) Operating temperature: -20 to 70 degrees Celsius. c. Thermal memory. d. Protective functions:

1) Motor overcurrent. 2) Phase unbalance (adjustable.) 3) Phase loss. 4) Ground fault protection (where required).

e. Self-powered. f. Visible trip indicator. g. Push-to-trip test. h. Isolated normally open alarm contact. i. Normally closed trip contact. j. Manual reset.

D. Control power transformer: 1. Furnish integral control power transformer capacity to power:

a. All motor controls indicated on the Drawings. b. Motor winding heaters, through a normally closed auxiliary contact on the

starter. Approximate motor space heater rating shall be 250 W.


2. Primary and secondary fusing as indicated on the Drawings: a. Fusing sized by the manufacturer for the rating of the transformer furnished.

3. Control power transformer secondary voltage: a. 120 VAC.

E. Provide pilot devices, including but not limited to, selector switches, pushbuttons, and indicator lights, as shown on the Drawings. 1. 22 millimeter, IEC. 2. Each pilot device shall be labeled on the front and back. Refer to the CWS

Equipment Tag Numbering Standards for additional information.

F. All conductors shall be individually labeled using heat shrinkable tube labels. Each label shall be typewritten.

G. Conductor color coding shall be as follows: 1. Grounded conductors = White 2. Grounding conductors = Green 3. Ungrounded conductors = Red

2.04 ACCESSORIES

A. Lugs and terminals: 1. For all external connections of No. 6 AWG and larger. 2. UL listed for either copper conductors.

B. Surge protective devices: 1. Furnish surge protection devices across the coil of each starter, contactor, and

relay.

C. Pilot devices: 1. Provide pilot lights, switches, selector switches, pushbuttons, and other devices as

specified or as indicated on the Drawings. 2. As specified in Section 17710 - Control Systems - Panels, Enclosures and Panel

Components.

D. Nameplates and wire markers: 1. As specified in Section 16075 - Electrical Identification.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION


B. Install the equipment in accordance with the accepted installation instructions and anchorage details to meet the seismic and wind load requirements at the Project site.

C. All conduits shall use threaded hubs for connections to enclosures.


D. Field wiring shall be installed so that it doesn’t block access to internal control panel relays and devices. The relays and devices shall be accessible for testing, maintenance, inspection, troubleshooting and replacement. The Owner shall determine if the relays and devices are accessible and the Contractor shall move or relocate field wiring as directed by the Owner.

E. Maintain separation of all power, signal, and control wiring within the VFD enclosure. Verify the routing of all wiring within the VFD enclosure with the Owner prior to installation. Move or relocate the field wiring as directed by the Owner to maintain separation.

F. Starters in existing motor control centers: 1. Install in accordance with the existing Low Voltage Motor Control Centers

manufacturer’s installation instructions.

G. Starters in control panels: 1. Install as specified in Section 17710 - Control Systems - Panels, Enclosures and

Panel Components.



3.03 ADJUSTING

A. Make all adjustments as necessary and recommended by the manufacturer, Engineer, or testing firm.

B. Set all overloads and motor circuit protectors based on the nameplate values of the installed motor.

3.04 CLEANING




B. Demonstrate operation of equipment as specified in Section 01756 - Testing, Training and Facility Startup: 1. Demonstrate the operation of every motor starter to the Engineer's and Owner's

satisfaction.

C. Training: 1. Provide the services of the manufacturer’s technical representative for training

purposes.


3.06 PROTECTION


END OF SECTION

Lighting LED Luminaires 16510-1 11487A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/OR/Clean Water Services/11487A10/Specifications/16510 (Bidset) April 2021 - BID

SECTION 16510

LIGHTING: LED LUMINAIRES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: LED luminaires, drivers, poles, and accessories.

1.02 REFERENCES


B. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): 1. C62.41 - IEEE Recommended Practice for Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC

Power Circuits.

C. Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (IESNA): 1. LM-79 - IES Approved Method for the Electrical and Photometric Measurements

of Solid-State Lighting Products. 2. LM-80 - IES Approved Method: Measuring Lumen Maintenance of LED Light

Sources. 3. TM-21 - Projecting Long Term Lumen Maintenance of LED Light Sources.

D. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 1. 410 - Performance Testing for Lighting Controls and Switching Devices with

Electronic Drivers and Discharge Ballasts.

E. Underwriters Laboratories (UL): 1. 1598 - Luminaires. 2. 8750 - Light Emitting Diode (LED) Equipment for Use in Lighting Products.


A. Provide luminaires, and accessories for all lighting systems, complete and operable, in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

B. Individual luminaire types are indicated on the Drawings and on the Luminaire Schedule.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish submittals as specified in Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures and Section 16050 - Common Work Results for Electrical.

B. Product data: 1. LED Luminaires:

a. Catalog literature for each luminaire specified, cross- referenced to the luminaire type on the Luminaire Schedule in the Drawings.

b. Provide for each luminaire type:


1) Materials. 2) Type of diffuser. 3) Hardware. 4) Gasketing. 5) Reflector. 6) Chassis. 7) Finish and color. 8) Driver type and protection. 9) LED luminaire:

a) Initial lumen output at 40 degrees Celsius ambient. b) Correlated color temperature. c) Lumen maintenance factors. d) Lumen ambient temperature multipliers. e) Drive current. f) Efficacy.

10) Picture of luminaire. 11) IES optical distributions. 12) Dimensioned drawings:

a) Effective projected area rating for pole mounted luminaires. 13) Weight. 14) Photometric data:

a) Coefficient of utilization tables based on the IES zonal cavity system by an approved testing laboratory.

b) Luminaire dirt depreciation factor. c) Candlepower distribution curves. d) Average luminaire brightness. e) Lumen output charts.

15) Furnish support method for interior luminaires weighing more than 30 pounds and all wall-mounted luminaires: a) Support methods shall be based on seismic requirements at the

project site as specified in Section 16050 - Common Work Results for Electrical.

c. Luminaire substitutions: 1) Provide complete literature for each luminaire substitution. 2) Submittals for substituted luminaires shall be sufficient for competent

comparison of the proposed luminaire to the originally specified luminaire: a) Photometric data:

(1) IES file in standard IES format. (2) Coefficient of utilization tables based on the IES zonal cavity

system by an approved testing laboratory. (3) Candlepower distribution curves. (4) Average luminaire brightness. (5) Lumen output charts. (6) Power requirements in watts and volt-amperes.

b) Calculations: (1) Provide software generated calculations showing illuminance

levels in foot candles and power usage in watts per square foot for each of the areas in which substitutions are proposed:


(a) Use surface reflectance values in accordance with IES RP-7.

(b) Use manufacturer Projected Lumen Maintenance factor for minimum of 60,000 hours to perform all calculations.

c) Specification sheets: (1) If lacking sufficient detail to indicate compliance with contract

documents, standard specification sheets will not be accepted. This includes, but is not limited to, luminaire type designation, manufacturer's complete catalog number, voltage, LED type, CCT, CRI, specific driver information, system efficacy, L70 life rating, and any modifications necessary to meet the requirements of the contract documents.

3) Substitutions for specified luminaires will be evaluated upon quality of construction, light distribution, energy use, appearance, and maintenance.

4) Substitutions shall comply with all applicable building and energy codes.

2. Driver: Provide for each driver type: a. Catalog number. b. Type of driver. c. Output wattage. d. Input voltage. e. Operating voltage range. f. Maximum input power. g. Efficiency. h. Operating line current. i. Power factor. j. Operating temperature range. k. Current output range in ambient temperatures of 30 degrees Celsius to

55 degrees Celsius. l. Surge suppression data.

3. Luminaire poles: a. Submit complete data for each pole type including but not limited to:

1) Material. 2) Finish and color. 3) Handholes. 4) Anchoring. 5) Luminaire attachment methods and fittings. 6) Pole height. 7) Pole dimensions. 8) Bolt hole circle layout and hardware. 9) Accessories. 10) Provide the EPA wind load rating.

C. Calculations: 1. Provide complete design calculations and installation documents for pole

mounting piers and poles mounted from structures: a. Include in the calculations the wind and seismic requirements at the project

site.


b. Calculations and design shall be performed by and signed by a Professional Engineer registered in the state where the project is being constructed.

D. List of manufacturer’s recommended spare parts.

E. Record documents: 1. Update the Luminaire Schedule in the Drawings to reflect the acceptable

substitutions, after the substitution has been reviewed and accepted by the Engineer.







1.08 WARRANTY


B. LED luminaire: 1. 5 year warranty from the date of installation including material, workmanship,

photometrics, driver, and LED modules.



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Luminaires: One of the following or equal: 1. As noted on the Luminaire Schedule.

B. Drivers: One of the following or equal: 1. Philips Advance. 2. Thomas Research. 3. eldoLED.

C. Timer Controls: One of the following or equal: 1. Intermatic.


D. Substitutions: 1. The lighting design and luminaire selection has been based upon the

photometric data of the identified luminaire. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to ensure and prove to the Engineer at time of submittal the substitutions meet the quality and photometric requirements of the original design.

2.02 EQUIPMENT

A. LED Luminaires: 1. General:

a. Pre-wired with leads of 18-AWG, minimum, for connection to building circuits.

b. Provide the luminaires furnished per the Luminaire Schedule in the Drawings: 1) The Specifications noted herein are an addition or supplement to the

Luminaire Schedule. c. Individual LEDs connected such that a catastrophic loss or the failure of

1 LED will not result in the loss of the entire luminaire. 2. Minimum ambient temperature range of 0 degrees Celsius to 40 degrees

Celsius. 3. Minimum rated life:

a. Office Areas: minimum 70,000 hours when operated at 25 degrees Celsius. b. Process Areas: minimum 100,000 hours when operated at 40 degrees

Celsius. 4. Minimum efficacy of 70 lumens/watt. 5. Minimum Color Rendering Index of 80. 6. Kelvin Color shall be minimum 5K 7. Tested according to IESNA LM-79 and LM-80. 8. Integral driver. 9. Suitable for dry, damp, or wet locations as indicated on the Drawings or on the

Luminaire Schedule. a. Wet or damp locations: UL 1598 listed.

10. Exterior/outdoor luminaires: a. Luminaires in combination with their mounting pole and bracket shall be

capable of withstanding: 1) Wind levels at the project site without damage. 2) Seismic levels at the project site.

b. Stainless steel hardware and hinged doors or lens retainer. 11. Designed as a complete LED assembly. Retrofit LED lamps in luminaires not

designed specifically for LED light sources shall not be used.

B. Drivers: 1. Dimmable. 2. Input power source:

a. As indicated on the Drawings. 3. Drive current:

a. As indicated in the Luminaire Schedule. 4. Power factor: greater than 0.90. 5. Efficiency: greater than 80 percent. 6. Total harmonic distortion (THD) of the input current less than 20 percent.


7. Rated life of 60,000 hours in an LED luminaire operated at an ambient temperature of 40 degrees Celsius.

8. Minimum operating temperature of -40 degrees Celsius. 9. Sound rating: Class A+ or quieter. 10. UL listed Class 2 Outdoor in accordance with UL 8750. 11. In accordance with IEEE C62.41 Category A for transient protection. 12. Driver must limit inrush current:

a. Meet or exceed NEMA 410 driver inrush standard: 1) 230 Amps per 10 Amp load with a maximum of 106 Amps squared-

seconds at 120V. 2) 430 Amps per 10 Amp load with a maximum of 370 Amps squared-

seconds at 277V

C. Cord and Plug Connected Luminaires: 1. All luminaires installed indoors within process areas, tunnels, electrical, and

mechanical rooms shall be cord and plug connected.

D. Timer Controls: 1. Outdoor lights shall be controlled from one astronomical timer inside the lighting

contactor located in the Electrical Room. 2. Indoor lighting shall be controlled from 2-hour timers located at the entry to each

area. 3. Where indoor light fixtures in one area are powered by multiple 120V circuits,

the lights shall be controlled from the lighting contactor located in the Electrical Room.

4. 2-hour timers shall be Intermatic FF32 or approved equal.

2.03 COMPONENTS

A. Luminaire poles: 1. As indicated on the Luminaire Schedule. 2. Anchor bolts:

a. Use anchor bolts, bolts, or welded studs for anchors for resisting seismic and wind forces. 1) Standard hex bolt head. 2) Do not use anchor bolts fabricated from rod stock with an L or J-shape.

b. Complete with leveling shims. 3. Anchor base:

a. Fabricated from the same type of material as the pole shaft. b. Base plate to telescope the pole shaft. c. Welded top and bottom along the entire perimeter. d. With slotted bolt holes on the bolt circles as submitted. e. Base shall be hinged. The hinges shall be installed so that the pole can

be laid down in an accessible area. 4. Pole shaft:

a. As indicated on the Luminaire Schedule. b. Material shall be aluminum.

5. Handhole: a. Reinforced handhole located approximately 18 inches above the base. b. Complete with cover fabricated from the same material as the pole shaft

and stainless steel attachment screws.


c. With an integral ground connection nut, 1/2 inch by 13 inch UNC welded to the pole for connection to the grounding system.

d. Provide additional handhole for GFCI receptacles where shown on the Drawings.

6. Shroud: a. Fabricated from the same type of material as the pole shaft.

7. Omni Fastening hardware: a. All fasteners shall be stainless steel.

8. Finish: a. As indicated on the Luminaire Schedule.

2.04 ACCESSORIES

A. Pole mounted receptacle: 1. Where indicated, furnish a 20A GFCI receptacle:

a. Integrally mounted in the pole shaft at 18 inches above the base. b. Complete with corrosion resistant and weatherproof cover.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION


B. Install luminaires per the manufacturer’s guidelines and submitted installation calculations to meet seismic and wind requirements at the project site.

C. Luminaire poles: 1. Set poles on anchor bolts and secured with double nuts on each bolt. 2. Dry-pack the pole base, after the luminaire and pole has been leveled and

plumbed. 3. Bond metal poles to the plant grounding system, utilizing a ground lug

connection within the pole: a. Route ground conductor through pier and pole base sleeve using Schedule

40 PVC conduit.

3.02 TESTING AND FACILITY STARTUP

A. As specified in Section 01756 - Testing, Training and Facility Startup.



3.04 ADJUSTING

A. Aim and verify all exterior and outdoor luminaires alignment, during dark evening hours, as directed by Owner or the Engineer.


3.05 CLEANING


B. Clean all lenses, diffusers, and reflectors. Refinish all luminaires’ trim, poles and support brackets, where finish has been damaged. Clean all LED luminaires (new and old), used during construction for construction lighting, before substantial completion.

3.06 PROTECTION


3.07 SCHEDULES

A. Refer to the Luminaire Schedule in the Drawings.

END OF SECTION

Field Electrical Acceptance Tests 16950-1 11487A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/OR/Clean Water Services/11487A10/Specifications/16950 (Bidset) April 2021 - BID

SECTION 16950

FIELD ELECTRICAL ACCEPTANCE TESTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: 1. Responsibilities for testing the electrical installation. 2. Adjusting and calibration. 3. Acceptance tests.

B. Copyright information: 1. Some portions of this Section are copyrighted by the InterNational Electrical

Testing Association, Inc (NETA). See NETA publication ATS for details.

1.02 REFERENCES


B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).

C. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. D 877 - Standard Test Method for Dielectric Breakdown Voltage of Insulating

Liquids Using Disk Electrodes. 2. D 923 - Standard Practices for Sampling Electrical Insulating Liquids. 3. D 971 - Standard Test Method for Interfacial Tension of Oil Against Water by

the Ring Method. 4. D 974 - Standard Test Method for Acid and Base Number by Color-Indicator

Titration. 5. D 1298 - Standard Test Method for Density, Relative Density, or API Gravity of

Crude Petroleum and Liquid Petroleum Products by Hydrometer Method. 6. D 1500 - Standard Test Method for ASTM Color of Petroleum Products (ASTM

Color Scale). 7. D 1524 - Standard Test Method for Visual Examination of Used Electrical

Insulating Oils of Petroleum Origin in the Field. 8. D 1816 - Standard Test Method for Dielectric Breakdown Voltage of Insulating

Liquids Using VDE Electrodes. 9. D 2285 - Standard Test Method for Interfacial Tension of Electrical Insulating

Oils of Petroleum Origin Against Water by the Drop Weight Method. 10. D 3612 - Standard Test Method for Analysis of Gases Dissolved in Electrical

Insulating Oil by Gas Chromatography.

D. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): 1. 43 - IEEE Recommended Practice for Testing Insulation Resistance of

Rotating Machinery. 2. 81 - IEEE Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and

Earth Surface Potentials of a Grounding System. 3. 95 - IEEE Recommended Practice for Insulation Testing of AC Electric

Machinery (2300 V and Above) With High Direct Voltage.


4. 421.3 - IEEE Standard for High-Potential Test Requirement for Excitation Systems for Synchronous Machines.

5. 450 - IEEE Recommended Practice for Maintenance, Testing, and Replacement of Vented Lead-Acid Batteries for Stationary Applications.

6. 1106 - IEEE Recommended Prictice for Installation, Maintenance, Testing, and Replacement of Vented Nickel-Cadmium Batteries for Stationary Applications.

7. 1188 - IEEE Recommended Practice for Maintenance, Testing, and Replacement of Valve-Regulated Lead-Acid (VRLA) Batteries for Stationary Applications.

8. C57.13 - IEEE Standard Requirements for Instrument Transformers. 9. C57.13.1 – IEEE Guide for Field Testing of Relaying Current Transformers. 10. C57.13.3 - IEEE Guide for Grounding of Instrument Transformer Secondary

Circuits and Cases. 11. C57.104 - IEEE Guide for the Interpretation of Gases Generated in Oil-

Immersed Transformers.

E. Insulated Cable Engineer’s Association (ICEA).

F. InterNational Electrical Testing Association (NETA). 1. ATS-2009 Standard for Standard for Acceptance Testing Specifications for

Electrical Power Equipment and Systems.

G. International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC).

H. Manufacturer’s testing recommendations and instruction manuals.

I. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. 70 – National Electrical Code (NEC). 2. 110 - Standard for Emergency and Standby Power Systems.

J. National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST).

K. Specification sections for the electrical equipment being tested.

L. Shop drawings.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. As specified in Sections 01756 - Testing and Facility Start-Up and 16050 - Common Work Results for Electrical.

B. Specific definitions: 1. Testing laboratory: The organization performing acceptance tests.


A. Testing of all electrical equipment installed under this Contract in accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements and as specified in this Section.

B. Conduct all tests in the presence of the Engineer or an OWNER representative: 1. The Engineer will witness all visual, mechanical and electrical tests and

inspections.


C. The testing and inspections shall verify that the equipment is operational within the tolerances required and expected by the manufacturer, and these Specifications.

D. Responsibilities: 1. Contractor responsibilities:

a. Ensure that all resources are made available for testing, and that all testing requirements are met.

2. Electrical subcontractor responsibilities: a. Perform routine tests during installation. b. Demonstrate operation of electrical equipment. c. Commission the electrical installation. d. Provide the necessary services during testing, and provide these services

to the testing laboratory, Contractor, and other subcontractors, including but not limited to: 1) Providing electrical power as required. 2) Operating of electrical equipment in conjunction with testing of other

equipment. 3) Activating and shutting down electrical circuits. 4) Making and recording electrical measurements. 5) Replacing blown fuses. 6) Installing temporary jumpers.

3. Testing laboratory responsibilities: a. Perform all acceptance tests specified in this Section. b. Provide all required equipment, materials, labor, and technical support

during acceptance tests.

E. Upon completion of testing or calibration, attach a label to all serviced devices: 1. The label shall indicate the date serviced and the company that performed the

service.

1.05 SUBMITTALS


B. Manufacturers’ testing procedures: 1. Submit manufacturers’ recommended testing procedures and acceptable test

results for review by the Engineer.

C. Test report: 1. Include the following:

a. Summary of Project. b. Description of equipment tested. c. Description of tests performed. d. Test results. e. Conclusions and recommendations. f. Completed test forms. g. List of test equipment used and calibration dates.

D. Testing laboratory qualifications: 1. Submit a complete resume and statement of qualifications from the proposed

testing laboratory detailing their experiences in performing the tests specified:


a. This statement will be used to determine whether the laboratory is acceptable, and shall include: 1) Corporate history and references. 2) Resume of individual performing test. 3) Equipment list and test calibration data.

E. Division of responsibilities: 1. Submit a list identifying who is responsible for performing each portion of the

testing.



B. Testing laboratory qualifications: 1. The testing laboratory may be qualified testing personnel from the electrical

subcontractor’s staff or an independent testing company. 2. NETA certification required. 3. Selection of the testing laboratory and testing personnel is subject to approval

by the Engineer based on testing experience and certifications of the individuals and testing capabilities of the organization.



1.08 SEQUENCING

A. At least 30 days before commencement of the acceptance tests, submit the manufacturer’s complete field testing procedures to the Engineer and to the testing laboratory, complete with expected test results and tolerances for all equipment to be tested.

B. Perform testing in the following sequence: 1. Perform routine tests as the equipment is installed including:

a. Insulation-resistance tests. b. Continuity tests. c. Rotational tests.

2. Adjusting and preliminary calibration. 3. Acceptance tests. 4. Demonstration. 5. Commissioning and plant start-up.

1.09 WARRANTY


PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Test instrument calibration: 1. Utilize a testing laboratory with a calibration program which maintains all

applicable test instrumentation within rated accuracy. 2. The accuracy shall be traceable to the NIST in an unbroken chain. 3. Calibrate instruments in accordance with the following frequency schedule:

a. Field instruments: 6 months maximum. b. Laboratory instruments: 12 months maximum. c. Leased specialty equipment where the accuracy is guaranteed by the

lessor (such as Doble): 12 months maximum. 4. Dated calibration labels shall be visible on all test equipment. 5. Maintain an up-to-date instrument calibration record for each test instrument:

a. The records shall show the date and results of each calibration or test. 6. Maintain an up-to-date instrument calibration instruction and procedure for

each test instrument.

B. Do not begin testing until the following conditions have been met: 1. All instruments required are available and in proper operating condition. 2. All required dispensable materials such as solvents, rags, and brushes are

available. 3. All equipment handling devices such as cranes, vehicles, chain falls and other

lifting equipment are available or scheduled. 4. All instruction books, calibration curves, or other printed material to cover the

electrical devices are available. 5. Data sheets to record all test results are available.

3.02 TESTING AND FACILITY START-UP

A. As specified in Section 01756 - Testing and Facility Start-Up.


A. Low voltage cables, 600 volt maximum: 1. Visual and mechanical inspection:

a. Compare cable data with the Drawings and Specifications. b. Inspect exposed sections of cable for physical damage and correct

connection as indicated on the Drawings. c. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance by 1 of the

following methods: 1) Use of low-resistance ohmmeter. 2) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by the

calibrated torque wrench method: a) Refer to manufacturer’s instructions for proper foot-pound levels

or NETA ATS tables. d. Inspect compression applied connectors for correct cable match and

indentation. e. Inspect for correct identification and arrangement. f. Inspect cable jacket insulation and condition.


2. Electrical tests: a. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a low-

resistance ohmmeter. b. Perform insulation resistance test on each conductor with respect to

ground and adjacent conductors: 1) Applied potential shall be 500 volts dc for 300 volt rated cable and

1000 volts dc for 600 volt rated cable. 2) Test duration shall be 1 minute.

c. Perform continuity tests to insure correct cable connection. d. Verify uniform resistance of parallel conductors.

3. Test values: a. Compare bolted connection resistance values to values of similar connections:

1) Investigate values which deviate from those of similar bolted connections by more than 50 percent of the lowest value.

b. Insulation-resistance values shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s published data: 1) Refer to NETA ATS tables in the absence of manufacturer’s

published data. 2) Investigate values of insulation-resistance less than the allowable

minimum. c. Cable shall exhibit continuity. d. Investigate deviations in resistance between parallel conductors.

B. Low voltage molded case and insulated case circuit breakers: 1. Visual and mechanical inspection:

a. Compare equipment nameplate data with the Contract Documents. b. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. c. Inspect anchorage and alignment. d. Verify that all maintenance devices are available for servicing and

operating the breaker. e. Verify the unit is clean. f. Verify the arc chutes are intact. g. Inspect moving and stationary contacts for condition and alignment. h. Verify that primary and secondary contact wipe and other dimensions vital

to satisfactory operation of the breaker are correct. i. Perform all mechanical operator and contact alignment tests on both the

breaker and its operating mechanism in accordance with manufacturers published data.

j. Operate circuit breaker to ensure smooth operation. k. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance by one of the

following methods: 1) Use of low-resistance ohmmeter. 2) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by the


or NETA ATS tables. l. Inspect operating mechanism, contacts, and arc chutes in unsealed units. m. Verify cell fit and element alignment. n. Verify racking mechanism operation. o. Verify appropriate lubrication on moving current-carrying parts and on

moving and sliding surfaces.


p. Perform adjustments for final protective device settings in accordance with the coordination study.

q. Record as-found and as-left operation counter readings. 2. Electrical tests:

a. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a low-resistance ohmmeter.

b. Perform insulation-resistance tests for 1 minute on each pole, phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground with the circuit breaker closed and across each open pole: 1) Apply voltage in accordance with manufacturer’s published data. 2) Refer to NETA ATS tables in the absence of manufacturer’s

published data. c. Perform a contact/pole-resistance test. d. Perform insulation-resistance tests on control wiring with respect to

ground. Applied potential shall be 500 VDC for 300-volt rated cable and 1,000 VDC for 600-volt rated cable. Apply the test voltage for 1 minute: 1) For solid state devices that cannot tolerate the applied voltage, follow

the manufacturer’s recommendation. e. Determine long-time pickup and delay by primary current injection. f. Determine short-time pickup and delay by primary current injection. g. Determine ground-fault pickup and delay by primary current injection. h. Determine instantaneous pickup value by primary current injection. i. Test functions of the trip unit by means of secondary injection. j. Perform minimum pickup voltage tests on shunt trip and close coils in

accordance with manufacturer’s published data. k. Verify correct operation of any auxiliary features such as trip and pickup

indicators, zone interlocking, electrical close and trip operation, trip-free, antipump function and trip unit battery condition: 1) Reset all trip logs and indicators.

l. Verify operation of charging mechanism. 3. Test values:

a. Compare bolted connection resistance values to values of similar connections: 1) Investigate values which deviate from those of similar bolted

connections by more than 50 percent of the lowest value. b. Bolt-torque levels shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s published

data: 1) Refer to NETA ATS tables in the absence of manufacturer’s

published data. c. Insulation-resistance values shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s

published data: 1) Refer to NETA ATS tables in the absence of manufacturer’s


minimum. d. Microhm or dc millivolt drop values shall not exceed the high levels of the

normal range as indicated in the manufacturer’s published data: 1) If manufacturer’s data is not available, investigate any values which

deviate from adjacent poles or similar breakers by more than 50 percent of the lowest value.

e. Insulation-resistance values of control wiring shall not be less than 2 megohms.


f. Long-time pickup values shall be as specified, and the trip characteristic shall not exceed manufacturer’s published time-current characteristic tolerance band including adjustment factors: 1) If manufacturer’s curves are not available, trip times shall not exceed

the value shown in NETA ATS tables. g. Short-time pickup values shall be as specified, and the trip characteristic

shall not exceed manufacturer’s published time-current tolerance band. h. Ground fault pickup values shall be as specified, and the trip characteristic

shall not exceed manufacturer’s published time-current tolerance band. i. Instantaneous pickup values shall be as specified and within

manufacturer’s published tolerances: 1) Refer to NETA ATS tables in the absence of manufacturer’s

published data. j. Pickup values and trip characteristics shall be within manufacturer’s

published tolerances. k. Minimum pickup voltage of the shunt trip and close coils shall conform to

the manufacturer’s published data: 1) Refer to NETA ATS tables in the absence of manufacturer’s

published data. l. Breaker open, close, trip, trip-free, antipump, and auxiliary features shall

function as designed. m. The charging mechanism shall operate in accordance with manufacturer’s

published data.

C. Grounding systems: 1. Visual and mechanical inspection:

a. Inspect ground system for compliance with that indicated on the Drawings, specified in Specifications, and in the NEC.

b. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. c. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the

following methods: 1) Use of low-resistance ohmmeter. 2) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by


or NETA ATS tables. d. Inspect anchorage.


resistance ohmmeter. b. Perform fall of potential test or alternative test in accordance with IEEE 81

on the main grounding electrode or system. c. Perform point-to-point tests to determine the resistance between the main

grounding system and all major electrical equipment frames, the system neutral and any derived neutral points.

3. Test values: a. Grounding system electrical and mechanical connections shall be free of

corrosion. b. Compare bolted connection resistance values to values of similar

connections: 1) Investigate values which deviate from those of similar bolted

connections by more than 50 percent of the lowest value.


c. Bolt-torque levels shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s published data: 1) Refer to NETA ATS tables in the absence of manufacturer’s

published data. d. The resistance between the main grounding electrode and ground shall

be as specified in Section 16060 - Grounding and Bonding. Investigate point-to-point resistance values that exceed 0.5 ohm.

D. Rotating machinery, ac induction motors and generators: 1. Visual and mechanical inspection:

a. Compare equipment nameplate information with the Contract Documents. b. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. c. Inspect anchorage, alignment, and grounding. d. Inspect air baffles, filter media, cooling fans, slip rings, brushes, and brush

rigging e. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one or more

of the following methods: 1) Use of low-resistance ohmmeter. 2) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by


or NETA ATS tables. f. Verify correct application of appropriate lubrication and lubrication

systems. g. Verify that resistance temperature detector (RTD) circuits conform to that

indicated on the Drawings. 2. Electrical tests - AC Induction:

a. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a low-resistance ohmmeter.

b. Perform insulation-resistance test in accordance with IEEE 43: 1) On motors 200 horsepower and smaller, test duration shall be

1 minute. Calculate dielectric absorption ratio for 60/30 second periods.

2) On motors larger than 200 horsepower, test duration shall be 10 minutes. Calculate polarization index.

c. Perform insulation-resistance test on insulated bearings in accordance with manufacturer’s published data.

d. Test motor starter as specified in this Section. 3. Test values:

a. Inspection: 1) Filter media shall be clean and installed in accordance with the

manufacturer’s published data. b. Compare bolted connection resistance values to values of similar


connections by more than 50 percent of the lowest value. c. Bolt-torque levels shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s published


published data. d. The recommended minimum insulation-resistance (IR1 min) test results in

megohms shall be in accordance with NETA ATS tables.


1) The polarization index value shall not be less than 2.0. 2) The dielectric absorption ratio shall not be less than 1.4.

e. If no evidence of distress or insulation failure is observed by the end of the total time of voltage application during the dielectric withstand test, the test specimen is considered to have passed the test.

f. Investigate phase-to-phase stator resistance values that deviate by more than 5 percent.

g. Bearing insulation-resistance measurements shall be within manufacturer’s published tolerances: 1) In the absence of manufacturer’s published data, compare values of

similar machines.

E. Motor starters, low voltage: 1. Visual and mechanical inspection:

a. Compare equipment nameplate information with the Contract Documents. b. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. c. Inspect anchorage, alignment, and grounding. d. Verify the unit is clean. e. Inspect contactors:

1) Verify mechanical operation. 2) Verify contact gap, wipe, alignment, and pressure is in accordance

with manufacturer’s published data. f. Motor-running protection:

1) Verify overload element rating/motor protection settings are correct for its application.

2) If motor running protection is provided by fuses, verify correct fuse rating.

g. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the following methods: 1) Use of low-resistance ohmmeter. 2) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by


or NETA ATS tables. h. Lubrication requirements:

1) Verify appropriate lubrication on moving current-carrying parts. 2) Verify appropriate lubrication on moving and sliding surfaces.


resistance ohmmeter. b. Perform insulation-resistance tests for 1 minute on each pole, phase-to-

phase and phase to ground with the starter closed, and across each open pole for 1 minute: 1) Test voltage shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s published

data. 2) Refer to NETA ATS tables in the absence of manufacturer’s

published data. c. Perform insulation-resistance tests on control wiring with respect to

ground. Applied potential shall be 500 VDC for 300-volt rated cable and 1,000 VDC for 600-volt rated cable. Apply the test voltage for 1 minute: 1) For solid state devices that cannot tolerate the applied voltage, follow

the manufacturer’s recommendation.


d. Test motor protection devices in accordance with manufacturer’s published data.

e. Test circuit breakers as specified in this Section. f. Perform operational tests by initiating control devices.

3. Test values: a. Compare bolted connection resistance values to values of similar


connections by more than 50 percent of the lowest value. b. Bolt-torque levels shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s published


published data. c. Insulation-resistance values shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s

published data: 1) Refer to NETA ATS tables in the absence of manufacturer’s


minimum. d. [Insulation-resistance values of control wiring shall not be less than

2 megohms.] e. Motor protection parameters shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s

published data. f. Circuit breaker test results shall as specified in this Section. g. Control devices shall perform in accordance with system design

requirements.

F. Switches, air, low-voltage: 1. Visual and mechanical inspection:

a. Compare equipment nameplate data with the Contract Document. b. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. c. Inspect anchorage, alignment, grounding, and required clearances. d. Verify the unit is clean. e. Verify correct blade alignment, blade penetration, travel stops, and

mechanical operation. f. Verify that fuse sizes and types as indicated on the Drawings, short-circuit

studies, and coordination study. g. Verify that each fuse has adequate mechanical support and contact

integrity. h. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the

following methods: 1) Use of a low resistance ohmmeter. 2) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by


or NETA ATS tables. i. Verify operation and sequencing of interlocking systems. j. Verify correct phase barrier installation. k. Verify correct operation of all indicating and control devices. l. Verify appropriate lubrication on moving current-carrying parts and on

moving and sliding surfaces.



resistance ohmmeter. b. Measure contact resistance across each switchblade and fuseholder. c. Perform insulation-resistance tests for 1 minute on each pole, phase-to-

phase and phase-to ground with switch closed, and across each open pole. Apply voltage in accordance with manufacturer’s published data: 1) In the absence of manufacturer’s published data, use NETA ATS

requirements. d. Verify cubicle space heater operation. e. Perform ground fault test as specified in this Section, if applicable. f. Perform tests on other protective devices as specified in this Section, if

applicable. 3. Test values:


connection by more than 50 percent of the lowest value. b. Bolt-torque levels shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s published


published data. 4. Test values - electrical:


connections by more than 50 percent of the lowest value. b. Microhm or dc millivolt drop values shall not exceed the high levels of the

normal range as indicated in the manufacturer’s published data: 1) If manufacturer’s published data is not available, investigate values

which deviate from those of similar bus connections and sections by more than 50 percent of the lowest value.

c. Insulation-resistance values shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s published data: 1) Refer to NETA ATS tables in the absence of manufacturer’s

published data. 2) Investigate insulation values less than the allowable minimum.

d. Investigate fuse-resistance values that deviate from each other by more than 15 percent.

e. Heaters shall be operational. f. Ground fault tests shall be as specified in this Section. g. Results of protective device tests shall be as specified in this Section.

G. LAN cable testing: 1. Visual and mechanical inspections:

a. Compare cable type and connections with that indicated on the Drawings and specified in the Specifications.

b. Inspect cable and connectors for physical and mechanical damage. c. Verify that all connectors are correctly installed.

2. Pre-testing: a. Test individual cables before installation:


1) Before physical placement of the cable, test each cable while on the spool with a LAN certification test device.

2) Before the cable is installed, verify that the cable conforms to the manufacturer’s attenuation specification and that no damage has been done to the cable during shipping or handling.

3) The test shall be fully documented and the results submitted to the Engineer, including a hard copy of all traces, before placement of the cable.

4) The Engineer shall be notified if a cable fails to meet specification and the cable shall not be installed unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.

3. Electrical tests: a. Perform cable end-to-end testing on all installed cables after installation of

connectors from both ends of the cable. b. Test shall include cable system performance tests and confirm the

absence of wiring errors. 4. Test results:

a. Cables shall meet or exceed TIA standards for a Category 6 installation. 5. Test equipment:

a. LAN certification equipment used for the testing shall be capable of testing Category 6 cable installation to TIA proposed Level III accuracy. Tests performed shall include: 1) Near end cross talk. 2) Attenuation. 3) Equal level far end cross talk. 4) Return loss. 5) Ambient noise. 6) Effective cable length. 7) Propagation delay. 8) Continuity/loop resistance.

b. LAN certification test equipment shall be able to store and produce plots of the test results.

c. Manufacturers: The following or equal: 1) Agilent Technologies, WireScope 350.

H. Variable frequency drive systems: 1. Visual and mechanical inspection:

a. Compare equipment nameplate data with the Contract Documents. b. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. c. Inspect anchorage, alignment, and grounding. d. Verify the unit is clean. e. Ensure vent path openings are free from debris and that heat transfer

surfaces are clean. f. Verify correct connections of circuit boards, wiring, disconnects, and

ribbon cables. g. Motor running protection:

1) Verify drive overcurrent setpoints are correct for their application. 2) If drive is used to operate multiple motors, verify individual overload

element ratings are correct for their application. 3) Apply minimum and maximum speed setpoints. Verify setpoints are

within limitations of the load coupled to the motor.


h. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the following methods: 1) Use of low-resistance ohmmeter. 2) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by the


or NETA ATS tables. i. Verify correct fuse sizing in accordance with manufacturer’s published

data. j. Perform visual and mechanical inspection of input circuit breaker as

specified in this Section. 2. Electrical tests:

a. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with low resistance ohmmeter.

b. Test the motor overload relay elements by injecting primary current through the overload circuit and monitoring trip time of the overload element.

c. Test for the following parameters in accordance with relay calibration procedures specified in this Section or as recommended by the manufacturer: 1) Input phase loss protection. 2) Input overvoltage protection. 3) Output phase rotation. 4) Overtemperature protection. 5) Direct current overvoltage protection. 6) Overfrequency protection. 7) Drive overload protection. 8) Fault alarm outputs.

d. Perform continuity tests on bonding conductors as specified in this Section. e. Perform start-up of drive in accordance with manufacturer’s published

data. Calibrate drive to the system’s minimum and maximum speed control signals.

f. Perform operational tests by initiating control devices: 1) Slowly vary drive speed between minimum and maximum. Observe

motor and load for unusual noise or vibration. 2) Verify operation of drive from remote start/stop and speed control signals.

g. Perform electrical tests of input circuit breaker as specified in this Section. 3. Test values:


connections by more than 50 percent of the lowest value. b. Bolt-torque levels shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s published data:

1) Refer to NETA ATS tables in the absence of manufacturer’s published data.

c. Overload test trip times at 300 percent of overload element rating shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s published time-current curve.

d. Test values for input circuit breaker shall be as specified in this Section. e. Relay calibration results shall be as specified in this Section. f. Continuity of bonding conductors shall be as specified in this Section. g. Control devices shall perform in accordance with system requirements. h. Operational tests shall conform to system design requirements.


3.04 CLEANING


B. After the acceptance tests have been completed, dispose of all testing expendables, vacuum all cabinets, and sweep clean all surrounding areas.

3.05 PROTECTION


END OF SECTION

Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods 17050-1 11487A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/OR/Clean Water Services/11487A10/Specifications/17050 (Bidset) April 2021 - BID

SECTION 17050

BASIC MEASUREMENT AND CONTROL INSTRUMENTATION MATERIALS AND METHODS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. This Section includes general design, material, equipment fabrication, and

documentation requirements for instrumentation and control systems. 2. Additional or more stringent requirements, when given in other Sections, shall

prevail.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. CWS Specifications: 1. 01640 – Manufacturer’s Services and Training. 2. 01756 – Testing and Facility Startup. 3. 16050 – Common Work Results for Electrical. 4. 16950 – Field electrical Acceptance Tests.

B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. ANSI B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings.

C. American National Standards Institute/ American Petroleum Institute (ANSI/API): 1. API RP550 - Manual on Installation of Refinery Instruments and Control

Systems. 2. ANSI/API 551-1992 - Process Measurement Instrumentation.

D. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM A269 - Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for

General Service.

E. Instrumentation, Systems, and Automation Society (ISA): 1. ISA S5.1 - Instrumentation Symbols and Identification. 2. ISA S5.3 - Graphic Symbols for Distributed Control/Shared Display

Instrumentation, Logic and Computer Systems. 3. ISA S5.4 - Instrument Loop Diagrams. 4. ISA S5.5 - Graphic Symbols for Process Displays. 5. ISA RP7.1 - Pneumatic Control Circuit Pressure Test. 6. ISA S7.3 - Quality Standard for Instrument Air. 7. ISA S12.4 - Instrument Purging for Reduction of Hazardous Area

Classification. 8. ISA S18.1 - Annunciator Sequences and Specifications. 9. ISA S20 - Specification Forms for Process Measurement and Control

Instruments, Primary Elements, and Control Valves. 10. ISA S51.1 - Process Instrumentation Terminology.


11. ISA RP60.3 - Human Engineering for Control Centers. 12. ISA S71.04 - Environmental Conditions for Process Measurement and Control

Systems: Airborne Contaminants.

F. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 1. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 volts maximum).

G. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. NFPA 70 - National Electric Code (NEC). 2. NFPA 496 - Purged and Pressurized Enclosures for Electrical Equipment. 3. NFPA 820 - Standard for Fire Protection in Wastewater Treatment and

Collection Facilities.

H. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 1. UL 508 - Industrial Control Equipment.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Where a term is used in Specification Section number series 17000 through 17999 relating to instrumentation, and the meaning is not defined therein or elsewhere in the Contract Documents, the meaning of the term shall be as defined in ISA S51.1 Process Instrumentation Terminology, or if not contained in ISA 51.1, as defined in listed reference standards under "References.”

B. Control Circuit: 1. Any circuit operating at 80 volts AC or DC or more, whose principal purpose is

the conveyance of information and not the conveyance of energy for the operation of an electrically powered device.

C. ORT-1 - Operational Readiness Testing, Part 1: 1. ORT-1 testing is a verification of circuit functionality based on circuit diagrams

and loop drawings. Testing includes checkout from/to field instruments, local control stations, VFDs, Starter Buckets, MCCs, Vendor Panels, and Plant PLC. Testing activities includes the following: a. Wiring Terminations and Circuit Continuity b. Conductor and Conduit Labels c. Power and Control Circuits d. Instrument Signals e. PLC Signal Response Based on Process Value or Position at Field

Device.

D. ORT-2 – Operational Readiness Testing, Part 2: 1. Control System Software (PLC & HMI) is verified by the programmer as

detailed in the Control Loop Descriptions.

E. PAT - Performance Acceptance Testing: 1. Testing described in Section 01756 – Testing and Facility Start Up.

F. Panel: 1. An instrument support system which may be either a flat surface, a partial

enclosure, or a complete enclosure for instruments and other devices used in


process control systems. Unless otherwise specified or clearly indicated by the context, the term "panel" in these Contract Documents shall be interpreted as a general term, which includes flat panels, enclosures, cabinets and consoles.

G. Power Circuit: 1. Any circuit operating at 80 volts (AC or DC) or more, whose principal purpose

is the conveyance of energy for the operation of an electrically powered device.

H. PCIS: 1. Process Control and Instrumentation System.

I. SCADA: 1. Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition.

J. Signal Circuit: 1. Any circuit operating at less than 80 volts AC or DC.

1.04 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Overview: 1. Refer to DIV 1 specifications for project scope. 2. Refer to Section 17101 - Control Loop Descriptions.

B. Work Includes: 1. Instrumentation and control works shall include, but not be limited to, field

instrumentation and controls, programmable logic controller (PLC) components, control panel work, testing, training, documentation, and related items

2. The CONTRACTOR shall provide, through the services of a qualified Process Control and Instrumentation System (PCIS) subcontractor, a complete and functioning control system. The PCIS contractor shall be responsible for all control work except as excluded in this paragraph. PLC and SCADA programming are to be provided by the OWNER.

3. Portions of this Project involve installation in existing facilities and interfaces to existing circuits, power systems, controls, and equipment. a. Perform and document comprehensive and detailed field investigations of

existing conditions (circuits, power systems, controls, equipment, etc) before performing any Work.

b. Provide and document interface with, modifications to, upgrade, or replacement of existing circuits, power systems, controls, and equipment.

c. Documentation for modified panels shall be in the form of AutoCAD drawings. Markups of existing drawings are not acceptable. As-built drawings are available, however, CAD drawings for existing panels are not available. 1) Only modified portions of modified panels are required to be

documented.

C. Work by Others: 1. The OWNER shall provide application programming for the Plant PLCs and

SCADA workstations. The CONTRACTOR shall provide assistance with the


on-site check out of application software provided by the OWNER per Section “3.02 Field Quality Control.”

D. Subsequently, field testing of the revised control programs shall be performed per Section “3.02 Field Quality Control”.


A. Review other Sections and Divisions of the Contract Documents for full compliance with the total Contract Documents. In the event of a conflict between Sections, the CONTRACTOR shall promptly seek clarification from the ENGINEER.

B. Unless different requirements are clearly specified or shown elsewhere, instrumentation and control design, materials, equipment, installation, and testing shall comply with the requirements of the following Specifications: 1. Division 11. 2. Division 13. 3. Division 15. 4. Division 16. 5. Division 17.

C. Detailed Wiring Design: 1. Typical panel wiring diagrams, interconnecting wiring diagrams, and loop

wiring diagrams are included in contract drawings and designed to completely show control panel wiring, terminations, interfaces with other systems, hardwire functions, interlocks, and wiring of components provided.

2. The Contract Drawings contain typical wiring diagrams that apply to multiple circuit diagrams, such as loop drawings and control wiring diagrams. The contractor shall create an individual drawing from each piece of equipment or instrument listed in the typical drawings and customize for each control circuit and loop.

D. Completeness: 1. Provide a complete and fully functional instrumentation and control system

ready for use. 2. Components which are not identified on the Drawings and Specifications, but

necessary to meet the full functional operation and performance requirements, shall be provided.

3. Equipment shall be designed and installed in full conformity with the Drawings, Specifications, and instructions and recommendations of the related equipment manufacturer.

E. Connections and Appurtenances: 1. The instrumentation and control systems shall include all necessary

connections to sources of electrical power, air, water, drains, and vents, with all required valves, switches, and accessories as specified or as recommended for best operation by the manufacturer of the equipment furnished.

2. All necessary mounting panels, stands, hangers, and brackets shall be furnished and installed and shall comply with the relevant Sections of these Specifications.


F. Coordination: 1. Systems and equipment provided under this Section shall be designed and

coordinated for proper operation with related equipment and materials provided under other Sections of these Specifications, and where applicable, under other referenced contracts, and with identified existing equipment.

2. Coordinate all aspects of the Work between CONTRACTOR and all subcontractors before bidding to ensure that all costs associated with a complete installation are included. The OWNER is not responsible for any change orders due to lack of coordination of the Work between the CONTRACTOR, the System Supplier, the other subcontractors or suppliers.

G. Control Functions: 1. Control functions are provided in Section 17101 – Control Loop Descriptions.

H. Hazardous (Classified) Areas: 1. Instrumentation and control equipment specified, is subject to the

requirements for hazardous (classified) areas as specified in Division 16 and indicated on the Drawings.

2. Two-wire transmitters to be installed in a hazardous (classified) area shall be Factory Mutual approved intrinsically safe, and made safe by means of suitably rated Factory Mutual approved intrinsically safe barriers installed in a non-hazardous area.

3. Switches to be installed in a hazardous (classified) area shall be made safe by means of suitably rated Factory Mutual approved intrinsically safe barriers or intrinsically safe relays installed in a non-hazardous area.

I. Equipment Locations: 1. The monitoring and control system configurations are diagrammatic. The

locations of the equipment are approximate. The exact locations and routing of wiring and cables shall be governed by structural conditions and physical interference and by the electrical terminations on the equipment.

2. Equipment shall be located and installed so that it is readily accessible for operations and maintenance, but does not obstruct the removal of equipment.

J. Documentation to be provided: 1. All aspects of the instrumentation and control systems design shall be fully

documented, and subsequently revised to conform to the “As-Built” installation. 2. The numbering of all instruments, equipment, terminal blocks, conductors, and

cables shall be shown on all related documents.

K. Testing and Startup 1. After installation of equipment and instrumentation is complete, testing shall be

performed by the PCIS contractor in a series of steps as described below and detailed in Section 01756 – Testing and Facility Start Up. Refer to Division 16 specifications for testing and verification requirements for electrical. Sections described in Section 01756 – Testing and Facility Start Up include the following: a. Instrument calibrations. b. ORT-1. c. ORT-2. d. Performance Acceptance Testing (PAT).


1.06 SUBMITTALS

A. General: 1. Submit in accordance with Section 01330 – Submittal Procedures. 2. Submittal data shall be grouped in a logical manner to facilitate review of

subsystems and each submittal shall be substantially complete. Individual drawings and data sheets submitted at random intervals will not be accepted for review.

3. Incomplete submittals will be returned to the CONTRACTOR without the ENGINEER's review and without contract time extension.

4. Design Data submittals shall be reviewed and returned with resubmittal not required, before fabrication is started.

5. All panel drawings and loop drawings shall be produced with latest version of AutoCAD software.

6. Variations: A notice of variation shall be included in any submittal deviating from the plans or Specifications.

7. Hardware submittals shall be provided within 60 days of the Notice to Proceed.

B. Pre-submittal Conference: 1. The ENGINEER shall arrange and conduct a Pre-submittal Conference within

30 days after award of the Contract. The purpose of the Pre-submittal Conference is to review and approve the manner in which the CONTRACTOR intends to carry out its responsibilities for Shop Drawing submittal on the WORK to be provided under this Section. The CONTRACTOR and the ENGINEER shall attend. Both the CONTRACTOR and the ENGINEER may invite additional parties at their discretion.

2. The CONTRACTOR shall allot one, 4-hour half day for the Conference. 3. The CONTRACTOR shall present the following for discussion at the

Conference: a. A list of equipment and materials required for the PCIS and the

manufacturer's name and model number for each proposed item. See Division 01330.

b. A list of proposed clarifications to the Contract Documents along with a brief explanation of each. Resolution shall be subject to a separate formal submittal and review by the ENGINEER.

c. An exact one-to-one sample of each type of submittal herein, including control loop drawings as described in Project-Wide Wiring Drawing Submittal.

d. A schedule developed in MS Excel or MS Project for all system related activities from the Pre-submittal Conference through start-up and training. Dates of submittals, design, fabrication, programming (by others), factory testing, deliveries, installation, field testing, and training shall be shown. The schedule shall be subdivided to show activities relative to each major item or group of items when everything in a given group is on the same schedule.

e. An overview of the proposed training plan. The OWNER's staff and ENGINEER will review the overview and may request changes. All changes to the proposed training shall be resolved at the pre-submittal


conference. The overview shall include the following for each proposed course. 1) Course title and objectives. 2) Prerequisite training and experience of attendees. 3) Course content - a topical outline. 4) Course duration. 5) Course format - lecture, laboratory demonstration, etc.

4. The ENGINEER shall take minutes of the Conference, including all events, questions, and resolutions. Prior to adjournment, all parties must concur with the accuracy of the minutes and sign accordingly.

C. The system supplier shall submit wiring diagrams for approval by the Engineer and Owner at the following three stages: 1. Initial wiring diagrams shall be submitted 90 days after Notice to Proceed. The

templates included in the Contract Documents will be used to document each and every loop on the Project. All control panel wiring and terminal block numbering shall be shown, including any power wiring. The diagrams at the initial stage are not required to include any non-PCIS equipment terminal information or actual wiring numbers. After this submittal is approved satisfactorily the control panel fabrication can proceed.

2. Construction wiring diagrams shall be submitted 30 days after approval of initial wiring diagrams and the approval of all the equipment submittals that have connections to PCIS equipment, including valve actuators, VFD’s and vendor provided control panels. This set of wiring diagrams will be used throughout the construction phase of the Project and shall include all termination information for all equipment, including packaged equipment and all instruments provided for the Project. Each diagram will also include complete wiring numbers that comply with Article Installation, and as indicated on the instrument drawings. These diagrams do not include electrical power distribution system or HVAC systems, or the internal wiring of equipment such as valve actuators, VFD drives, or other equipment not supplied as part of the PCIS. After this set of wiring diagrams have been approved by the Engineer they shall be used as a construction tool by the electrical subcontractor, system supplier, and the Contractor for field wiring, testing and startup activities. The system supplier shall be responsible for maintaining the diagrams throughout the construction phase of the Project by incorporating any “as-built” information and changes from the electrical subcontractor and Contractor as the construction phase progresses. These construction wiring diagrams may be submitted in subsets to better align with the actual construction sequence.

3. Preliminary field markup as-built wiring diagrams shall be submitted 5 days after all equipment has successfully completed the ORT-1, ORT-2, and performance tests. The wiring diagrams shall fully document any changes that have occurred during the construction phase of the Project. Final as-built wiring diagrams shall be submitted 30 days after all equipment has successfully completed the ORT-1, ORT-2, and performance testing.

D. Product Data: 1. General:

a. Submitted for non-custom manufactured material listed in this and other sections and shown on shop drawings.


b. Furnish sufficient information to evaluate the suitability of the proposed material or equipment for the intended use, and for compliance with these Specifications.

c. Include: 1) Catalog cuts. 2) Bulletins. 3) Brochures. 4) Quality photocopies of applicable pages from these documents. 5) Identify on the data sheets the project name, applicable specification

section, and paragraph. 6) Identify model number and options for the actual equipment being

furnished. d. Legibly cross out options that do not apply or equipment not intended to

be supplied. 2. Material and Equipment Schedules:

a. Furnish a complete schedule and/or matrix of all materials, equipment, apparatus, and instruments for this project.

b. Include sizes, names of manufacturers, catalog numbers, and such other information required to identify the items.

3. Instrument Data Sheets and Cut Sheets: a. Partially completed data sheets are provided at the end of each

instrument specification. The Contractor shall use the Specifications and Drawings to complete the Instrument Data Sheets. 1) The partially completed data sheets are not intended to be used as a

takeoff list. The Contractor shall provide instruments as indicated in project specifications and on the drawings.

b. Furnish fully completed data sheets, both electronically in Microsoft Word or Excel and in hardcopy, for each instrument and component according to ISA S20 Specification Forms for Process Measurement and Control Instruments, Primary Elements and Control Valves. Include the following information on the data sheet: 1) Component functional description used herein and on the Drawings. 2) Manufacturers model number or other product designation. 3) Tag number used herein and on the Drawings. 4) System or loop of which the component is a part. 5) Location or assembly at which the component is to be installed. 6) Input and output characteristics. 7) Scale range with units and multiplier. 8) Requirements for electric supply. 9) Requirements for air supply. 10) Power consumption. 11) Response timing. 12) Materials of construction and of component parts that are in contact

with, or otherwise exposed to, process media, and or corrosive ambient air.

13) Special requirements or features, such as specifications for ambient operating conditions.

14) Features and options that are furnished.


c. Provide a technical brochure or bulletin (“cut sheet”) for each instrument on the project. Submit with the corresponding data sheets: 1) Where the same make and model of instrument is used in 2 or more

applications on the project, and the process applications are nearly identical, and the materials, features and options are identical submit one brochure or bulletin for the set of identical instruments.

2) Include a list of tag numbers for which it applies with each brochure or bulletin.

3) Furnish technical product brochures that are complete enough to verify conformance with all Contract Document requirements, and to reflect only those features supplied with the device.

4) Cross out models, features, options, or accessories that are not being provided.

5) Clearly mark and identify special options and features. d. Organization: Index the data sheets and brochures in the submittal by

systems or loops. 4. Control Panel Hardware Submittal:

a. Submit the following in one submittal package. b. Complete and detailed bills of materials:

1) A bill of material list, including quantity, description, manufacturer, part number, serial number, vendor name with phone and spare part list with unit price where required, shall be submitted for each of the PCIS system components. Bills of material shall include all items within an enclosure.

2) Provide the Bill of material on CD-ROM in Microsoft Excel format. c. Complete grounding requirements for each system component including

any requirements for PLCs, process LANs, and SCADA equipment. d. Requirements for physical separation between control system

components and 120 VAC, 480 VAC, and medium voltage power cables. e. Provide a data sheet for each control system component together with a

technical product brochure or bulletin, which include: 1) The manufacturer's model number or other identifying product

designation. 2) Tag and loop number. 3) System to which it belongs. 4) Site to which it applies. 5) Input and output characteristics. 6) Requirements for electric power. 7) Requirements for air supply (if any). 8) Device ambient operating requirements. 9) Materials of construction. 10) Component functional description used in the Contract Documents. 11) Scale, range, units, and multiplier (if any). 12) Materials of component parts to be in contact with or otherwise

exposed to process media and corrosive ambient air. 13) Special requirements or features.

E. Shop Drawings: 1. General:

a. Preparation of Shop Drawings shall not commence until adjournment of the Pre-submittal Conference.


b. Coordinate all aspects of the Work so that a complete, instrumentation, computer, and control system for the facility is supported by accurate shop and record drawings: 1) Clearly show every wire, circuit, and terminal provided under this

contract on one or more submitted wiring diagrams. c. Show all interfaces between any of the following: instruments, vendor

control panels, motor control centers, motor starters, variable speed drives, control valves, flow meters, chemical feeders and other equipment related to the PCIS.

d. Generate all drawings developed for this project utilizing AutoCAD by Auto Desk: 1) Furnish on CD-ROM disks, as well as hard copies on 11-inch by

17-inch plain bond paper. e. Organize the shop drawing submittals for inclusion in the Operation and

Maintenance Manuals: 1) Furnish the initial shop drawing submittal bound in one or more

standard size, 3-ring, D-ring, loose leaf, vinyl plastic, hard cover binders suitable for bookshelf storage.

2) Binder ring size: Not to exceed 3 inches. f. Include the letterhead and/or title block of the firm responsible for the

preparation of all shop drawings. Include the following information in the title block, as a minimum: 1) The firm's registered business name. 2) Firm's physical address, email address, and phone number. 3) OWNER’s name. 4) Project name and location. 5) Drawing name. 6) Revision level. 7) Personnel responsible for the content of the drawing. 8) Date.

2. Shop drawing requirements: a. Front, side, and, rear elevations, and top and bottom views, showing all

dimensions. b. Locations of conduit entrances and access plates. c. Component layout and identification. d. Schematic and wiring diagrams with wire numbers and terminal

identification. e. Connection diagrams, terminal diagrams, internal wiring diagrams,

conductor size, etc. f. Anchoring method and leveling criteria, including manufacturer’s

recommendations for the seismic specified in Section 01612 – Seismic Design Criteria and wind conditions specified in Section 01614 – Wind Design Criteria.

g. Weight. h. Finish. i. Nameplates:

1) Refer to Specification 16075. j. Temperature limitations, as applicable. k. Interfaces between instruments, motor starters, control valves, variable

speed drives, flow meters, chemical feeders and other equipment related to the PCIS shall be included in the Shop Drawing submittal.


3. The CONTRACTOR shall submit wiring diagrams for approval by the ENGINEER and OWNER. a. Wiring diagrams shall be submitted 90 days after notice to proceed. The

templates included in the contract documents will be used to document each and every loop on the project. All control panel wiring and terminal block numbering shall be shown, including any power wiring. After this submittal is approved satisfactorily the control panel fabrication can proceed.

b. Preliminary field mark-up as-built wiring diagrams shall be submitted 5 days after all equipment has successfully completed the ORT-1, ORT-2 and Performance Tests. The wiring diagrams shall fully document any changes that have occurred during the construction phase of the project. Final as-built wiring diagrams shall be submitted 30 days after all equipment has successfully completed the ORT-1, ORT-2 and Performance Testing.

4. Itemized instrument summary. The summary shall be prepared with Microsoft Excel software and shall be submitted on hard copy. The instrument summary shall list all of the key attributes of each instrument provided under this Contract. As a minimum, attributes shall include: a. Tag number. b. Manufacturer. c. Model number. d. Service. e. Area location. f. Calibrated range. g. Loop drawing number. h. Associated LCP and PLC.

5. Instrument Installation Drawings: a. Submit instrument installation, mounting, and anchoring details for all

components and assemblies in an electronic AutoCAD and hard copy format, including access requirements and conduit connection or entry details.

a. Furnish for each instrument a dedicated 8 1/2-inch by 11-inch installation detail that pertains to the specific instrument by tag number.

b. For each detail, provide certification and the hard copies, by the instrument manufacturer, that the proposed installation is in accordance with the instrument manufacturer's recommendations and is fully warrantable.

c. For each detail, provide, as a minimum, the following contents: 1) Necessary sections and elevation views required to define

instrument location by referencing tank, building or equipment names and numbers, and geographical qualities such as north, south, east, west, basement, first floor, etc.

2) Ambient temperature and humidity where the instrument is to be installed.

3) Corrosive qualities of the environment where the instrument is to be installed.

4) Hazardous rating of the environment where the instrument is to be installed.

5) Process line pipe or tank size, service and material. 6) Process tap elevation and location.


7) Upstream and downstream straight pipe lengths between instrument installation and pipe fittings and valves.

8) Routing of tubing and identification of supports. 9) Mounting brackets, stands, anchoring devices, and sun shades. 10) Conduit entry size, number, location, and delineation between power

and signal. 11) NEMA ratings of enclosures and all components. 12) Clearances required for instrument servicing. 13) List itemizing all manufacturer makes, model numbers, quantities,

lengths required, and materials of each item required to support the implementation of the detail.

6. Control Panel Drawings: a. Layout Drawings:

1) Submit panel, enclosure, console, furniture, and cabinet layout drawings for all items provided.

2) As a minimum, include the following information: a) To scale front, side, and plan views. b) Dimensions. c) Interior and exterior arrangements. d) Mounting information, including conduit entrance location. e) Finish data. f) Tag number and functional name of items mounted in and on

each panel, console, and cabinet. g) Nameplate legend including text, letter size, and colors.

b. Wiring and Piping Diagrams: 1) Submit panel wiring and piping diagrams for every panel that

contains wiring and/or piping. 2) Include the following information:

a) Name of panel. b) Wiring and piping sizes and types. c) Terminal strip numbers. d) Wire tags and labels. e) Functional name and manufacturer's designation for items to

which wiring and piping are connected. f) Electrical control schematics in accordance with ANSI standards.

c. Installation drawings: 1) Provide site-specific installation drawings for all control equipment

panels, including dimensions. 2) Provide scaled drawings and show the position of the equipment at

its intended installation location. 3) Show the placement of all equipment being provided under this

Contract and its spatial relationship to all other equipment located in the abutting and adjoining areas.

4) Show all required access and clearances associated with the equipment with a statement of compliance to manufacturer's recommendations, NEC, and other applicable codes.

7. Control System Diagram: a. Submit a complete set of control system diagrams including the following

information: 1) All PLCs, workstations, printers, communication devices, and

communication links:


a) Show all PLCs with their current I/O allocation, and future I/O allocation, current plus spares provided, and maximum potential I/O based on available slots.

2) All cables required for communication requirements. 3) Show each component fully annotated with conduit size and number

associated with the power source.

F. Testing and Startup Plan Submittal 1. Refer to Section 01756 - Testing and Facility Start Up for Testing and Startup

Plan Submittal requirements.

G. Technical Manuals/Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 1. Manuals shall be based upon the approved Shop Drawing submittals as

modified for the conditions encountered in the field. 2. Furnish the ENGINEER with a complete preliminary set of written Operation

and Maintenance Manuals 8 weeks before calibration, start-up and/or testing. 3. Furnish in accordance with Section 01640 – Manufacturers Services and

Training and the following additional requirements. 4. Submit preliminary sets of these manuals to the ENGINEER for review of

format and content: a. ENGINEER will return 1 set with comments. b. Revise and/or amended as required and submit the requisite number of

copies to the ENGINEER 15 days before Pre-commissioning of the systems.

5. Incorporate changes that occur during startup and submit as part of the final manuals.

6. Provide comprehensive information on all systems and components to enable operation, service, maintenance, and repair.

7. Include Record Documents and the approved shop drawing submittals, modified for conditions encountered in the field during the work.

8. Provide installation, connection, operating, calibration, setpoints (e.g., pressure, pump control, time delays, etc.), adjustment, test, troubleshooting, maintenance, and overhaul instructions in complete detail.

9. Provide exploded or other detailed views of all instruments, assemblies and accessory components together with complete parts lists and ordering instructions.

10. Spare Parts List: a. Include a priced list of recommended spare parts for all the equipment

furnished under this Contract: 1) Include recommended quantities sufficient to maintain the furnished

system for a period of 5 years. b. Annotate the list to indicate which items, if any and quantity are furnished

as part of this Contract. c. Provide the name, address, and phone number of manufacturer and

manufacturer's local service representative of these parts. 11. Include signed and completed calibration sheets, ORT-1 forms, and

Performance Acceptance Testing form.

H. Training Submittals: The Training Submittal shall be based on the preliminary submittal provided at the Pre-submittal Conference. 1. Refer to Specification 01640 for the Training Submittals.


I. Record Documents: 1. Furnish in accordance with Section 01770 - Closeout Procedures. 2. Provide record documents of all instrumentation drawings. 3. Record Drawing Requirements:

a. Submit final fully updated record drawings upon completion of the Work for final review.

b. Clearly and neatly show all changes in accordance with Section 01770 - Closeout Procedures, and the following: 1) All existing pipe, conduit, wire, instruments, or other structures

encountered or uncovered during construction. 4. Shop Drawings:

a. Upon completion of the Work, update all shop drawings to indicate the final as-built configuration of the systems: 1) Should an error be found in a shop drawing during installation or

startup of equipment, note the correction, including any field changes found necessary, on the drawing and submit the corrections in the Record Documents.

2) Update, check, and revise all wiring drawings and other submitted drawings and documents to show final installed conditions.

b. Provide “As-Built” Shop Drawings for all instrumentation equipment on 11-inch by 17-inch paper. 1) Provide actual field markups (redlines) upon substantial completion.

c. Provide electronic copies of these documents on CD-ROM disks in AutoCAD Version 2014 by Autodesk and .pdf. Size all Drawings to be readable and legible on 11-inch by 17-inch media.

5. Submittal Documents: a. Provide an interim submittal of Record Documents after the PCIS system

Pre-commissioning. b. Submit final Record Documents before Substantial Completion or earlier if

so specified in Section 01770 – Closeout Procedures or the General Requirements.

6. Review and Corrections: a. Correct any Record Documents or other documents found to be

incomplete, not accurate, of poor quality, or containing errors. b. Promptly correct and re-submit Record Documents returned for

correction.

J. Project Closeout Submittals: 1. Recommended Spare Parts List. 2. Operation and Maintenance Manuals for project, fully indexed, incorporating all

instrumentation and control system documentation submitted and produced, and revised to conform to the “As-Built” installation. Application specific operation and maintenance instruction and application program records shall be included. Submit 1 set for review and 4 sets of the final accepted manuals.

3. Submit reproducible Drawings revised to conform to “As-Built” installation for the OWNER’s records after acceptance of the project Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

4. Electronic files, 2 sets, in the form of CD-ROM disks, bearing all electronically formatted documents including “As-Built” CAD Drawings and application programs, shall be submitted for information only and the OWNER’s records, after acceptance of Operation and Maintenance Manuals for project. The


media shall contain a table of contents, ASCII formatted, identifying the contents of each file and the software program/version with which it was produced. The media shall contain a CAD plotting document providing definition of, and correlation between layers/colors and line types for all CAD files. A Portable Document Format (*.pdf) version of each CAD drawing shall also be provided as part of the disk set.

5. “As-Built” Wiring Diagrams Submittals: Final “As-Built” set of wiring diagrams with CONTRACTOR, Division 16, ELECTRICAL, and PCIS supplier coordination signature that each suppler has completed all “As-Built” markups to every detailed wiring diagram in the construction set of wiring diagrams.


A. Procurement Restriction: 1. Certain equipment manufacturers with marketing operations based on local

agents, have terms where the selling agent has responsibility for after sales service. In such cases, the CONTRACTOR's procurement of such equipment is restricted to the selling agent within whose service area the equipment will be finally installed, thus assuring the OWNER of the availability of local after sales service.

B. Quality Assurance Procedure: 1. A quality assurance procedure shall be defined and implemented by the

CONTRACTOR supervising instrumentation and control systems. The procedure shall: a. Require that the project manager schedule and budget for in-house and

inter-Contractor checking. b. Specify qualifications required for engineering and technical personnel in

the execution and checking of specific tasks. c. Identify the responsibilities of the executor and the checker. d. Provide quality assurance data sheets listing specific tasks and stages of

tasks, with space for the printed names of the executor and checker, and the checker's signature and date.

2. The quality assurance procedure shall form part of the contractual requirements for subcontractors, and manufacturers or suppliers with unit responsibility.

3. The quality assurance data sheets shall be maintained current and shall be available for inspection upon request.

C. Substitutes and "Or-Equals": 1. Substitutes and "Or-Equals" may be proposed in accordance with the General

Conditions. 2. Where manufacturers of instrumentation or control system products other than

those specified are proposed, they shall have a minimum of 5 years experience in the manufacture of comparable equipment used in similar applications. The CONTRACTOR shall provide manufacturers' references to existing installations upon request of the ENGINEER. Noncompliance shall be a basis for rejection.

D. Coordination Meetings: 1. General: In accordance with Section 01110 - Summary of Work.


a. Attendees May Include: ENGINEER, OWNER, CONTRACTOR, and PCIS Subcontractor.

b. First Meeting: Schedule per the requirements of Section 01110 - Summary of Work. Thereafter, monthly, prior to first startup activity and weekly during startup activities. Include meetings on progress schedule.


A. Storage: 1. Equipment shall not be stored outdoors. Equipment shall be stored in dry

permanent shelters, including in-line equipment, and shall be adequately protected against mechanical injury. If any apparatus has been damaged, such damage shall be repaired by the CONTRACTOR. If any apparatus has been subject to possible injury by water, it shall be thoroughly dried out and put through tests as directed by the ENGINEER. If such tests reveal defects, the equipment shall be replaced.

2. Store all equipment and materials delivered to the job site in a location that will not interfere with the construction or the OWNER’s operations.

B. Delivery Timing: 1. No instrumentation or control system equipment shall be delivered to the job

site until required for integration with other construction, and all necessary environmental preparations have been made.

C. Intermediate Storage and Handling: 1. When the CONTRACTOR is obliged to take delivery in advance of this time,

the CONTRACTOR shall do so at a bonded air-conditioned warehouse. 2. The CONTRACTOR shall provide for storage at the warehouse and transport

of the equipment to the jobsite by suitably qualified movers with moving equipment (e.g., floating bed truck) as recommended by the manufacturer.

D. Non-compliance: 1. Should the equipment be delivered to the jobsite and be stored in adverse

conditions or installed in improper environmental conditions, then at the ENGINEER's discretion, prior testing may be declared void.

2. The prior testing (e.g., factory acceptance testing) shall be repeated and/or, at the discretion of the ENGINEER, a reduced value dollar credit shall be provided by the CONTRACTOR.

3. The equipment shall still be required to satisfy site testing performance criteria.

1.09 SITE CONDITIONS

A. General: Instrumentation and control systems equipment shall be suitable, or made suitable, for site conditions at the project location.

B. Temperature: 1. Electrical and Control Room Temperature: 60 to 100 degrees Fahrenheit. 2. Field Locations Temperature: 20 to 120 degrees Fahrenheit. 3. Above temperatures do not include effects of direct sunlight or wind chill.


C. Relative Humidity (RH): 1. Electrical and Control Rooms RH: 20 to 80 percent. 2. Field Locations RH: 10 to 100 percent.

D. Atmospheric Contaminants: 1. Atmospheric contaminants include hydrogen-sulfide, chlorine, ammonia and

dust in indeterminate concentrations. 2. Corrosive atmosphere testing shall be conducted, where specified.

E. Electromagnetic Radiation: 1. Electromagnetic radiation: 27 to 500 MHz: 10 volts/m.

1.10 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING (APPLICABLE FOR INTEGRATOR DIRECT CONTRACTING WITH CWS)

A. General: 1. Coordinate system delivery and installation supervision with other portions of

the Work.

B. Special Planning: 1. Retrofit of the existing plant shall be specifically scheduled and sequenced.

Shutdown of existing plant shall be minimized. All shutdown operations shall be scheduled with the OWNER. Detailed planning and careful execution shall be conducted to limit risk of accidental shutdown of adjoining existing facilities.

2. The work shall be divided into stages that shall be individually scheduled with the OWNER. For each stage, a detailed retrofit schedule shall be submitted. The retrofit scheduled shall list each individual action in stop order, identifying individual devices, terminals, and wire numbers. Prior to commencing each stage of retrofit works, and prior to shutdown, the CONTRACTOR shall make a “dummy run” through the schedule to add identification markers to all unmarked devices, terminals, and wires.

3. Planning or work shall include allowance for testing requirements detailed in Part 3.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Refer to other instrumentation and control Sections.


A. Factory Testing: 1. Tests shall be observed by the OWNER. Tests may be observed by the

Electrical ENGINEER and the Project ENGINEER. 2. The OWNER shall bear costs associated with travel for this test including, but

not limited to: lodging, meals, travel time, time to witness tests, etc., for up to 3 representatives of the OWNER.

3. Costs associated with accommodation of the witness testing at the testing facility shall be paid for by CONTRACTOR.


4. The ENGINEER shall be reimbursed by the OWNER for all costs associated with these tests.

5. Prerequisites to Factory Testing: a. Approved test plan. b. Notice to the OWNER given 21 working days prior to the start of testing.

6. Instrumentation and control systems shall be factory tested and calibrated. 7. Factory test/calibration records shall be submitted to the ENGINEER to show

that the equipment has achieved the specified performance and accuracy. 8. Additional Factory Testing: Refer to other instrumentation and control

Sections.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. General: 1. Install instrumentation and control systems in accordance with Drawings and

Specifications, final submittals, manufacturer’s instructions, and (where applicable) American Petroleum Institute RP550/551.

B. Electrical: 1. Install cable and wiring in accordance with applicable Sections in Division 16.

C. Piping: 1. Install piping and fittings in accordance with applicable Sections of Divisions

2 and 15.

D. Wiring Identification Numbers: Each wire shall be labeled per the Clean Water Services standards as demonstrated on the example wiring diagrams provided as part of the Plans and as summarized below: 1. Cable numbers shall be named based on the equipment tag of the field device

utilizing the electrical power source. The form of the tag shall be 406P1205C2 where ‘406P1205’ represents the equipment designation; ‘C’ indicated a control cable and 2 is a sequential number developed as part of the circuit design. Cable type designations shall follow the designations listed below: a. C - Control b. S - Signal (below 80 volts AC or DC) c. P - Power d. N - Network (Ethernet, Profibus...) e. Examples for cable numbers:

1) Signal cable from Control Valve (406LCV1205) to PLC terminals: a) Input twisted shielded pair:

(1) 406FCV1205S1+ and 406FCV1205S1- b) Feedback twisted shielded pair:

(1) 406FCV1205S2+ and 406FCV1205S2- 2) Control cable to “Open” and “Closed” limit switches on control valve:

a) Power from PLC: 406ZSO1206C1. b) Return from ZSO: 406ZSO1206C2. c) Return from ZSC: 406ZSC1206C1.


2. Within PLC cabinets, PLC control and signal wiring from/to I/O cards and PLC terminal strips shall be labeled based on the rack, slot, and point number of the I/O point. Labels shall take one of the following forms: a. RXSYPZ - Discrete PLC I/O Wiring. b. RXSYPZ+/- - Analog PLC I/O Wiring. c. AC~ - Power connection.

Where X is replaced with the PLC rack of the I/O point. Where Y is replaced with the slot of the rack the I/O point is located. Where Z is replaced with the point number of the slot I/O point is located.

E. Ancillary Devices: The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for providing any additional or different type connections as required by the instruments and specific installation requirements. Such additions and such changes, including the proposed method of installation, shall be submitted to the ENGINEER for approval prior to commencing the work. Such changes shall not be a basis of claims for extra work or delay.


A. Operational Readiness Testing: 1. Operational Readiness Tests, ORT-1 & ORT-2, shall be performed as

described in Specification 01756. a. ORT forms are located as a supplement in Section 01756 – Testing and

Facility Start Up.

B. Performance Acceptance Tests (PAT): 1. These are the activities that Section 01756 – Testing and Facility Start Up

refers to as performance testing.

C. Specialty Equipment: 1. For certain components or systems provided under this Section but not

manufactured by PCIS Subcontractor, provide services of qualified manufacturer’s representative during installation, startup, demonstration testing, and OWNER training. Refer to Article Manufacturer’s Services in PCIS Subsystems for specific requirements.

3.03 TRAINING

A. On-Site Training: 1. Training shall be performed as described in Section 01640 – Manufacturers

Services and Training.

3.04 CLEANING

A. Clean area during construction and after completion of construction.

B. Vacuum panels, cabinets, and enclosures to remove dust and debris. Wipe surfaces clean.

END OF SECTION

Control Loop Descriptions 17101-1 11487A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/OR/Clean Water Services/11487A10/Specifications/17101 (Bidset) April 2021 - BID

SECTION 17101

CONTROL LOOP DESCRIPTIONS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: 1. Loop descriptions:

a. Specific control requirements and functional descriptions for individual control loops.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. As specified in Section 17050 – Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods.

1.03 DEFINITIONS


1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION (NOT USED)

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Develop detailed loop descriptions based on the information in the Contract Documents and submit as specified in Sections 01330 - Submittal Procedures and 17050 – Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. 1. For each control loop, provide a detailed functional description of the operation

of the equipment, signals, and controls shown on the P&IDs: a. Include all functions depicted or described in the Contract Documents. b. Include the following within each loop description:

1) All requirements specific to that loop. 2) Common control requirements applicable to that loop. 3) List of all ranges, setpoints, timers, values, counters, etc.

2. Where there are similar loops with identical control, such as multiple loops for individual secondary effluent pumps, only 1 loop description need be developed. The remaining loops may reference that loop description.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED)

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING (NOT USED)

1.08 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS (NOT USED)

1.09 SEQUENCING (NOT USED)

1.10 SCHEDULING (NOT USED)


1.11 WARRANTY (NOT USED)

1.12 SYSTEM START-UP (NOT USED)

1.13 OWNER'S INSTRUCTIONS (NOT USED)

1.14 COMMISSIONING (NOT USED)

1.15 MAINTENANCE (NOT USED)

PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION (NOT USED)

3.02 PREPARATION (NOT USED)

3.03 INSTALLATION (NOT USED)

3.04 ERECTION, INSTALLATION, APPLICATION, CONSTRUCTION

A. Secondary Effluent Pumps: Control Loop Description Secondary Effluent Pumps

Process Description:

The Secondary Effluent Pump Station receives secondary effluent from Secondary Clarifiers No. 1-3 and can pump flows to the Vertical Flow Wetlands (VFW) or plant outfall using valves located in the final effluent discharge header. The pump station is designed for a pumping capacity from 1.5 to 30 MGD with one large standby pump during peak wet weather flows. The pump configuration consists of three (3) small capacity pumps and four (4) large capacity pumps. The small capacity pumps are capable of pumping 1.5 to 3 MGD each and the large capacity pumps are capable of pumping 3 to 7 MGD each. Each pump will be equipped with variable frequency drives (VFD). The VFD varies in speed to control the pumping rate and to maintain a setpoint level in the wet well measured by two level transmitters. Recirculation back to HHPS will be incorporated into the discharge strategy. Reference Drawing(s): 640-M-001, 640-M-002, 640-I-101, 640-I-102

Last Update/Review: 8/2020 Approved By:

Equipment

Unit Equipment:

Tag No. Description Notes 640P3401 Secondary Effluent Pump No. 1 (Large

Capacity) 3-7 MGD

640P3402 Secondary Effluent Pump No. 2 (Large Capacity)

3-7 MGD


640P3403 Secondary Effluent Pump No. 3 (Small Capacity)

1-3 MGD


1-3 MGD


1-3 MGD


3-7 MGD


3-7 MGD

Instrumentation: Tag No. Description Notes

640LT3411 SEPS Submersible Level Transducer No. 1

0-18 feet

640LT3412 SEPS Submersible Level Transducer No. 2

0-18 feet

650AIT3413 Secondary Effluent Turbidity 0-400 NTU (Located in sampling shed)

Control Strategies Local Control Operation and Alarm Reset

VFD Control Panel

Each pump can be controlled at the VFD enclosure. Confirm that the pump Discharge Valve is manually OPEN. The LOCAL/OFF-RESET/REMOTE hand switch at the VFD is used

to control the pump. When LOCAL is selected and the START button is pushed, the

pump will run at the speed set (operator changeable) on the VFD via speed potentiometer.  In LOCAL, the pump can be stopped by pushing the STOP button.

When OFF-RESET is selected, the pump will not run. Any latched alarms are reset.

When REMOTE is selected, the pump will be controlled through the plant SCADA system.

Motor Control Center

None

MFR Control Center

None

Local Control Station

None

SCADA Control Operation and Alarm Reset

SCADA Manual All SEPS pumps may be operated manually from SCADA. Place the

pump secondary effluent pump station into MANUAL/AUTOMATIC selection at SCADA in MANUAL.

To manually operate a SEPS pump from SCADA:


o Place the LOCAL/OFF-RESET/REMOTE hand switch for the respective pump in the REMOTE position at the pump VFD.

o Place the pump MANUAL/AUTOMATIC selection at SCADA in MANUAL.

o If the pump was running in SCADA/AUTO prior to switching to MANUAL, the pump's initial speed setting will be the last speed setting at which the pump was running while in AUTO. If the pump was not running, select a pump speed then push the START command at SCADA. SCADA shall start the pump and ramp it up to the operator set speed.

o Adjust pump speed using a XX-100% Manual Speed Set point located at SCADA. The pump will not move water if the speed is set below XX%. Each pump can be controlled at the VFD.

SCADA Auto

The secondary effluent pump station may be controlled at SCADA by selecting AUTO.

The secondary effluent pumps may be automatically controlled by the PLC. This mode is referred to as SCADA/AUTO.  With the LOCAL/OFF-RESET/REMOTE switch at the pump VFD in the REMOTE position and AUTO selected at SCADA, the pumps are controlled as follows.

There are two submersible level transducers in the wet well that operate in an Auto Mode or can be individually selected to designate the active level used for control. In AUTO Mode the highest value of the level transmitters will be used as the control variable.

The pumps will operate between the PUMP START and PUMP STOP levels.

A pump will automatically START and the respective pump speed will be automatically controlled based on a wet well level from the Pump Station PLC when the following conditions have been set or met:

o When the LOCAL/OFF-RESET/REMOTE switch for each selected pump VFD is placed in REMOTE.

o The pump MANUAL/AUTOMATIC selection at SCADA is placed in AUTOMATIC mode.

o The pump is not in a FAILURE state. The following is the normal operating procedure:

o Set all of the LOCAL/OFF-RESET/REMOTE hand switches at the pump VFDs to the REMOTE position.

o Set the AUTO/MANUAL selector at SCADA to AUTO. The LEAD-LAG Sequence is assigned to individual pumps by using

manual selections at SCADA.  The operator must assign a pump to be the LEAD pump, a pump to be the LAG 1 pump, etc.  If no assignment is made the previous designation will be used.

The PLC shall: o Start the LEAD pump when the level reaches the LEAD

pump start set point. o If the wet well level reaches the LAG PUMP START SET

POINT for one minute, the PLC shall start the next LAG pump in the sequence. The pump will be started at minimum speed of XX% and ramp at XX% per minute until it reaches


the auto speed command where the speed of all pumps will run in parallel. 

The PLC shall: o If the wet well level reaches the LAG PUMP STOP SET

POINT for one minute, the PLC shall stop the last LAG pump in the sequence and adjust the speed of all pumps in parallel. 

o Stop the LEAD pump when the level reaches the stop all pumps set point.

The AUTO SPEED SET POINT is scaled linearly from the PUMP MINIMUM SPEED, initially set at XX%, and the PUMP MAXIMUM SPEED, initially set to 100% over the operating range between the PUMP START and PUMP STOP levels.

When the Secondary Effluent Pump Station system is changed from MANUAL to AUTO, the same number of pumps will continue to run as designated in the current LEAD/LAG sequence

SCADA Display Status and Process Display

The Secondary Effluent Pump Station shall have: o Level (Range: 0 feet 18 feet; El 143.0 = 0 ft, El 161.00 = 18

ft) o LAG pump start set point = 150.0 ft. o Maximum speed set point = 150.0 ft. o LEAD pump start set point = 149.0 ft. o LAG pump stop set point = 149.0 ft. o Minimum speed set point = 149.0 ft. o All pump stop set point = 148.0 ft.

Each pump shall have: o RUN/STOP indication o FIELD/SCADA indication o Speed indication (0% - 100%) o Pump Designation (LEAD, LAG 1, …)

Operator Entries For the Secondary Effluent Pump Station:

o LEAD / LAG Pump Selection o AUTO / Transmitter1 / Transmitter2 Level Sensor Selection o AUTO / MANUAL Wet well Pump Control Mode Selection

For Each Pump o Pump START/STOP o Manual Speed Set point 

SCADA Alarms and Resets

Pump FAIL to START - Reset by placing the VFD LOCAL/OFF-RESET/REMOTE switch to OFF-RESET

Pump FAIL to STOP - Reset by placing the VFD LOCAL/OFF-RESET/REMOTE switch to OFF-RESET

Pump DRIVE FAULT - Reset by depressing the VFD fault reset pushbutton on the VFD

Pump OVER TEMPERATURE - Reset by placing the VFD LOCAL/OFF-RESET/REMOTE switch to OFF-RESET

Pump COMMUNICATION FAILURE


Pump SEAL LEAK Pump FAIL (General) Level Transmitter DIFFERENTIAL HIGH Level Transmitter SIGNAL FAULT Level Transmitter FAIL Wet well HI LEVEL. PLC 9 Rack 1 I/O ETHERNET MODULE FAIL PLC 9 Rack 2 COMMUNICATION FAILURE PLC 9 Rack 2 FAIL PLC Failure – Fault contact from PLC 9 shall generate an alarm at

SCADA. Hard-Wired Interlocks

None.

Software Interlocks

The following interlocks are active in SCADA AUTO: Pump over temperature. UV System ready to receive flow.

The following interlocks are active in SCADA AUTO and SCADA Manual:

Pump over temperature. If the level falls below the Stop All Elevation of 148.0’, this shall cause all pumps to

stop. Historical Trending and Run-time Counters

Wet well level Pump Speed for each pump Sum of UV Flow Meters.

Equipment Failure Sequence

Pump START Command will be withdrawn if a VFD FAULT is detected. Pump START Command will be withdrawn for HITEMP, COMMFAIL or FAIL TO

START. Equipment Automatic Failover Sequence

If a Pump fails, the next available pump based on the designated LEAD/LAG sequence will be started.

Equipment (Auto/Manual) Restart After Power Interruption

Upon return of power, secondary effluent will remain stopped until all DUTY UV reactors have warmed up and provide a 'Ready' status to the PLC.

B. Plant Discharge: Control Loop Description Outfall and VFW


The Plant Discharge Outfall Valve and Plant Discharge (VFW) Valve are located on the final effluent discharge header. The purpose of the two valves is to control routing of final effluent. When plant discharge flow is between 0 to 12 MGD, the Plant Discharge VFW Valve will be in the open position and the Plant Discharge Outfall Valve will be in the closed position.


When plant discharge flow exceeds 12 MGD as measured from the plant discharge UV reactor magnetic flow meters, the Plant Discharge Outfall Valve will be called to open. When the Plant Discharge Outfall Valve is proven not closed, the Plant Discharge VFW Valve will be called to close. SCADA paces the Plant Discharge composite sampler by sending the plant discharge flow to the sampler.

Reference Drawing(s): 650-M-001, 650-M-002, 650-I-102


Equipment

Unit Equipment:

Tag No. Description Notes 650FV2812 Plant Discharge Outfall Valve Open/Close 650FV2813 Plant Discharge VFW Valve Open/Close


650SA2814 Plant Discharge Sampler Existing, FBO 650AIT2817 Plant Discharge Analyzer Nitrate, Nitrite,

Ammonia, Ortho-Phosphate

650AIT2818 Plant Discharge pH Existing, FBO


VFD Control Panel

None Motor Control Center

None

MFR Control Center

None


Valve actuator has integral controls: o Local/Remote selector switch o Open/Close pushbuttons


SCADA Manual With the actuator’s Local/Remote selector switch in the Remote

position and the MANUAL/AUTO mode selected at SCADA, each valve’s position is controlled manually through SCADA.

SCADA Auto When plant discharge flow is between 0 to operator adjustable outfall setpoint (initially 12 MGD) as measured from the plant discharge UV reactor magnetic flow meters, the Plant Discharge VFW Valve will be in the open position and the Plant Discharge Outfall Valve will be in the closed position.


When plant discharge flow exceeds the operator adjustable outfall setpoint as measured from the plant discharge UV reactor magnetic flow meters, the Plant Discharge Outfall Valve will be called to open. When the Plant Discharge Outfall Valve is fully opened, the Plant Discharge VFW Valve will be called to close. When plant discharge flow falls 12 mgd below the operator adjustable outfall setpoint as measured from the plant discharge UV reactor magnetic flow meters, the Plant Discharge VFW Valve will be called to open. When the Plant Discharge VFW Valve is fully opened, the Plant Discharge Outfall Valve will be called to close.


Tualatin River Flow (cfs) @ Golf Course station Remote Local Status of each valve Open-Close Status of each valve

Operator Entries Open-Close for each Valve Auto/Manual


•Valve FAIL to open/close

Hard-Wired Interlocks

None

Software Interlocks

None.

Historical Trending and Run-time Counters

•Tualatin River Flow (cfs) @ Golf Course Station


None

Equipment Automatic Failover Sequence

None


•Continue previous operation

C. UV Reactors: Control Loop Description UV Reactors


The UV disinfection system disinfects unfiltered secondary effluent for Plant Discharge. Reference Drawing(s):

650-M-001, 650-M-002, 650-I-101, 650-I-102, 650-I-104

Last Update/Review:

11/2020 Approved By:

Equipment

Unit Equipment:


Tag No. Description Notes 650UVR2800 UV Reactor No. 0 Future Reactor 650UVR2801 UV Reactor No. 1 Plant Discharge: T1

RED of 18 mJ/cm2 or a MS2 RED of 26 mJ/cm2 at peak flow Reuse: MS2 RED of 100 mJ/cm2

650UVR2802 UV Reactor No. 2 Plant Discharge: T1 RED of 18 mJ/cm2 or a MS2 RED of 26 mJ/cm2 at peak flow Reuse: MS2 RED of 100 mJ/cm2




650FV2800A UV Reactor No. 0 Inlet Valve OPEN-CLOSE (Future Reactor)

650FV2801A UV Reactor No. 1 Inlet Valve OPEN-CLOSE 650FV2802A UV Reactor No. 2 Inlet Valve OPEN-CLOSE 650FV2803A UV Reactor No. 3 Inlet Valve OPEN-CLOSE 650FV2804A UV Reactor No. 4 Inlet Valve OPEN-CLOSE 650FV2805A UV Reactor No. 5 Inlet Valve OPEN-CLOSE 650FV2800B UV Reactor No. 0 Outlet Valve OPEN-CLOSE

(Future Reactor) 650FV2801B UV Reactor No. 1 Outlet Valve OPEN-CLOSE 650FV2802B UV Reactor No. 2 Outlet Valve OPEN-CLOSE 650FV2803B UV Reactor No. 3 Outlet Valve OPEN-CLOSE 650FV2804B UV Reactor No. 4 Outlet Valve OPEN-CLOSE 650FV2805B UV Reactor No. 5 Outlet Valve OPEN-CLOSE



650FIT2800 UV Reactor No. 0 Flow Meter 1-10 MGD (Future Reactor)

650FIT2801 UV Reactor No. 1 Flow Meter 1-10 MGD 650FIT2802 UV Reactor No. 2 Flow Meter 1-10 MGD 650FIT2803 UV Reactor No. 3 Flow Meter 1-10 MGD 650FIT2804 UV Reactor No. 4 Flow Meter 1-10 MGD 650FIT2805 UV Reactor No. 5 Flow Meter 1-10 MGD 650AIT2810 Secondary Effluent UVT 10-100% UVT

(Furnished by UV System Supplier)


VFD Control Panel


None

MFR Control Center

The manufacturer will provide one Packaged Control Panel (PCP) for each reactor vessel:

Power to the PCP shall be 480V, 3-phase, 60-Hz, 4-wire plus ground connection.

PCP shall have integral disconnect Each PCP shall have a Local Operator Interface (LOI) to allow

operators to manually control each UV reactor connected to the enclosure. The LOI panel shall be mounted at eye level on the front panel and shall consist of a graphic display. All information, warnings, and alarms shall be presented on the display in plain English for ease of operation.


UV Equipment: None Automated valves

o Local/Off-Reset/Remote o Open-Close Pushbutton


SCADA Manual UV Reactor Influent/Discharge Valve

o Valve Open/Close UV Reactor

o On/Off o Lamp Output o Cleaning Cycle initiation

SCADA Auto SCADA determines the number of duty UV reactors required to be online based on flow and the delivered UV dose from the online UV reactors. SCADA provides supervisory control of each system and provides the following functionality:

1. Assignment of Plant Discharge.


2. Lead/Lag reactor rotation shall be manual and operator selectable. 3. UV Transmittance override. This allows the operator to set a default UVT value if

the UVT analyzer is being serviced or is reading incorrectly. Automatic mode of operation:

A. With the PCP local-off-remote selector switch (hardware or software switch) in “remote” position, the UV reactor is controlled by plant SCADA in a dose pacing mode. 1. Plant SCADA operates the reactors required and the associated PCPs

determine the optimized power setting in each operating reactor based on the influent flow entering each reactor. Magnetic flow meters installed upstream of the operating UV reactors shall measure the influent flow in the associated reactors. Plant SCADA shall open and close the influent and effluent valves as necessary in response to alarms. Plant SCADA shall operate the required number of reactors and the associated PCPs shall minimize the power setting to achieve the required dose.

2. Reactors not in service shall be stored in a wet mode. When a reactor is brought into service the following procedure shall be initiated: a. The required reactors shall be turned on to 100 percent power and

warmed up for an adjustable duration (default 5 minutes). b. The PCP shall initiate a cleaning cycle. c. After the reactors have warmed up and the timer has expired, the

influent and effluent valves for each reactor shall be opened, and disinfected water will flow to the discharge header.

d. The reactor dose pacing PID shall be placed into auto mode and power to the lamps will be varied to achieve the setpoint dose.

3. If a reactor not in service has been stored dry or has a low level alarm then the following procedure shall be initiated when a reactor is brought into service: a. The effluent valve shall be opened. b. After the low level alarm has cleared the reactor shall be turned on to

100 percent power and warmed up for an adjustable duration (default 5 minutes).

c. SCADA shall initiate a cleaning cycle. d. After the reactors have warmed up and the timer has expired, the

influent valve shall be opened, and disinfected water will flow to the discharge header.

e. The reactor dose pacing PID shall be placed into auto mode and power to the lamps will be varied to achieve the setpoint dose.

4. The operator shall select when a reactor is to be taken out of service. At this time the following procedure shall be initiated: a. SCADAshall initiate a cleaning cycle. b. After the cleaning cycle has been completed, the effluent valve shall

close and after confirmation of its closure the influent valve shall close.

c. The lamps shall turn off. d. The reactor shall remain in this state until it is called into service.

5. Upon High Priority Alarm, the PCP shall send a High Priority Alarm signal to the plant SCADA system. In addition, the following actions shall be initiated. a. If the High Priority Alarm is associated with only one reactor:


1) Plant SCADA shall automatically increase the power setting to 100 percent in the operating (non-faulted) reactors, in order to achieve the required dose.

2) The next available UV reactor will be placed in service. Once the reactor is warmed up and the inlet valve is fully open the reactor with the High Priority Alarm will be shut down.

3) SCADA shall then close the effluent valve of the reactor with the High Priority Alarm first then the influent valve and instruct the PCP to shut off the reactor.

4) Operators shall determine the cause of the High Priority Alarm and remedy the issue. Once the High Priority Alarm has been resolved, the previously faulted reactor shall be placed back in service according to standard startup procedures.

b. If the High Priority Alarm is associated with more than one reactor: 1) Based on this alarm, the plant SCADA system will stop the

pumps (sending water to the UV system). 2) Operators shall determine the cause of the High Priority Alarms,

and remedy the issues. Once the High Priority Alarms have been resolved, the faulted reactors shall be placed back in service according to standard startup procedures.

3) Once the reactors are properly warmed up and ready for disinfection, the PCP shall provide a signal to the plant SCADA system, and the pumps will be allowed to be restarted.

6. The PCP shall monitor the UV lamps to ensure that the operational dose is achieved and is at least equal to the dose setpoint for the given flow, UVT, and UV intensity reading.

7. The cleaning system shall be controlled by SCADA and is operated on a time basis set in SCADA without stopping production.

SCADA Display

Status and Process Display Reactor ON/OFF status (each reactor). Lamp ON/OFF status (each lamp). UV Intensity (each reactor). Reactor elapsed time. Lamp elapsed time (each lamp) with ability to reset counter on

individual lamp without resetting the rest of bank. Cumulative Number of reactor ON/OFF cycles (each reactor). Estimated UV disinfection system power consumption (in kW). Reactor Power Setpoint (each reactor). Water Level (level switch, each reactor). Flow Rate (each reactor) UV Transmittance (one for Plant Discharge and one for Recycled

Water). Operational Dose. Total Flow Rate.

Operator Entries Lamp warmup time (min) Plant Discharge Dose setpoint Influent Valve open/close Effluent valve open/close


UV Reactor on/off Initiate cleaning cycle Lamp power setting UV Transmittance


High Priority Alarms: o Multiple lamp FAIL (when more than 5 percent of lamps fail

per reactor, setpoint is adjustable). o LOW-LOW Intensity (intensity probe reading drops below an

operator adjustable setpoint accessible from SCADA). o LOW-LOW UVT (UVT drops below an operator adjustable

setpoint accessible from SCADA). o LOW Operational Dose (operational UV dose drops below an

operator adjustable setpoint accessible from SCADA). o LOW Water Level (water level in reactor drops below the

level switch setpoint). o HI-HI Reactor water temperature (reactor temperature above

temperature switch setpoint, or above an operator adjustable setpoint accessible from SCADA).

Low Priority Alarms: o Individual Lamp FAIL (include location of lamp by reactor and

position). o LOW UV Intensity (intensity probe reading drops below an

operator adjustable setpoint accessible from SCADA). o LOW UVT (UV Transmittance drops below an operator

adjustable setpoint accessible from SCADA). Screen Indicators and Alarms:

o Reactor On/Off Status. o Reactor Local-Remote Status. o System Manual-Automatic Status. o Reactor Indication:

Reactor LOW Intensity Alarm. Reactor LOW-LOW Intensity Alarm Reactor FAIL Alarm. Reactor Elapsed Time. Lamp FAIL Alarm. LOW Level Alarm in UV reactor (each reactor). Number of Reactors ON. UV Transmittance Alarm.

o Reactor UV Intensity Indication. o UV Dose Indication. o LOW UV Dose Alarm. o Not Enough Reactors Available Alarm. o Cleaning System FAIL Alarm. o Power FAIL Alarm.


The following interlocks generate a FAIL alarm and are reset at the LCS: None.

Software Interlocks

The following interlocks are active in SCADA AUTO and SCADA MANUAL mode:


Effluent valve position to close under UV Reactor High Priority Alarms


UV Intensity UV Transmittance UV Reactor flow rate UV Dose UV System Power Runtime Hours (per vessel) UV % Output


Close influent valve, then effluent valve then shut down reactor. Equipment Automatic Failover Sequence

Start the next lag UV Reactor.


Power failure recovery. Following a power failure, loss of power at all PCPs, SCADA shall initiate communications with all of the PSEs and restore the last state of operation prior to the power failure.

D. Plant Water Pump Station: Control Loop Description Plant Water Pump Station


The Plant Water Pump Station receives finished effluent from the UV Reactor Discharge Header and supplies water to the plant’s Plant Water system. A Plant Water strainer is installed downstream of the pumps to filter out any debris. The pump station is designed for a pumping capacity of up to 350 gpm with one pump. The pump configuration consists of two pumps, one duty and one standby. Each pump is powered with variable frequency drives (VFD). The VFD modulates to maintain a setpoint pressure in the plant water system. The plant water Strainer is controlled by its own dedicated Packaged Control Panel (PCP). Reference Drawing(s): 650-M-001, 650-M-002, 650-I-103


Equipment

Unit Equipment:

Tag No. Description Notes 650P3401 Plant Water Pump No. 1 650P3402 Plant Water Pump No. 2 650STR3403 Plant Water Strainer


650PIT3401A Plant Water System Suction Pressure Transmitter

FBV


650PIT3401B Plant Water System Suction Pressure Transmitter

FBV

650PDSH3403 Plant Water System Strainer Differential Pressure Switch

FBV

650FIT3403 Plant Water Pump Station Flow Meter


VFD Control Panel


None

MFR Control Center

Operator can select a plant water system pressure setpoint locally from vendor display and set duty and standby designations.


None


SCADA Manual None

SCADA Auto

Operator will select a plant water system pressure setpoint (initially set at 120 psi). SCADA Display

Status and Process Display Per pump:

o RUNNING o FAIL

SYSTEM IN HAND/OFF/AUTO DISCHARGE PRESSURE SUCTION PRESSURE BACKWASH STRAINER FAIL

Operator Entries PRESSURE SETPOINT


PUMP(S) FAIL BACKWASH STRAINER FAIL DISCHARGE PRESSURE ALARM SUCTION PRESSURE ALARM


The following interlocks generate a FAIL alarm and are reset at the LCS: None

Software Interlocks

The following interlocks are active in SCADA AUTO and SCADA MANUAL mode: None



Discharge Pressure Plant Water Flow


By Manufacturer, if drive faults – stop pumps. Equipment Automatic Failover Sequence

Standby pump will be called to run on a duty failure.


Resume previous operation.

E. Vertical Flow Wetlands: F30_200_CTL_020VerticalFlowWetlands

Control Loop Description Vertical Flow Wetlands

Process Description: The vertical flow wetlands (VFW) operate to nitrify the effluent from the Forest Grove and Hillsboro (when added) Wastewater Treatment Plants. There is a total of twelve (12) VFW cells. Each cell has a dosing valve and a drain valve. The dosing valve for each cell Opens to allow water into the cell. After the water level in the cell rises above a setpoint, the Dosing valve Closes and the drain valve Opens to release the water from the cell into drain pipes where it is transported to the VFW Effluent Pump Station (EPS).

Last Update: 4/27/2020 By: Dina Rathbun

Equipment Unit Equipment:

Dosing Valve and Actuator 686FV2511 through 686FV2522

Drain Valve and Actuator 686FV2531 through 686FV2542

VFW Influent Actuated Valve 686FCV2501

Bypass Actuated Valve 687FCV2573

Bypass Flowmeter 687FE2570

The dosing valves are all pneumatically actuated 14” butterfly style valves. The drain valves are all pneumatically actuated 18” butterfly style valves. The air for the pneumatic actuators is provided by the air compressor units located at the Forest Grove WWTPs Blower building. Each valve is doubly acted, requiring air to open and close the valve. The actuators are operated at 80 psi. The valves have a cycle time of 9 seconds with 16.2 standard cubic feet per minute (scfm) air requirement per stroke. Each valve provides 9500 in-lbs of torque at 80 psi.

The VFW Influent Valve is an electric motor actuated 24” valve. The electric motor actuated valve provides for modulating action to achieve the desired bypass flow rate.

The Bypass Valve is an electric motor actuated 8” valve. The electric motor actuated valve provides for modulating action to bypass a percentage (Operator set point) of Forest Grove Effluent Pump Station flows around the VFW to the future Anammox


Wetland during dry permit season, and to bypass to Upper Wetlands or Lower Treatment Wetlands during high flows during the winter permit season.

The Bypass Flowmeter is a 8” magnetic type that uses electromagnetic induction to measure flow. It has an output of 4-20 mA signal and is scaled from 0 to 6.75 MGD full scale flow. The Bypass Flowmeter provides a flow signal for targeting a flow percentage of Forest Grove Effluent Pump Station to bypass around the VFW, and to quantify the quantity of flow bypassing during the winter permit season. The flowmeter controls the Bypass Valve.

During interim effluent pumping operations, the Forest Grove WWTP effluent flow is based on the influent flow rate to the Forest Grove WWTP. During future installation of the Forest Grove effluent pump station, an effluent flowmeter is expected to be installed. Once installed, the bypass flow will be based on effluent pump station flowmeter.

Instrumentation:

Cell level sensors.

Solenoids for each dose and drain valve.

The cell level sensors are hydrostatic style installed in stilling wells. They provide a signal to measure the cell level in each of the 12 cells. They have a range of 0 to 10 ft in water depth.

The solenoids for the dosing valves and drain valves are 120VAC single phase, single pole double throw actuation. They open to let air into the pneumatic actuators to open or close the dosing valve and drain valve.


VFD Control Panel


None

MFR Control Center

None


Each dosing valve and drain valve will be operated from SCADA only; no local control station is provided. These valves provide open/closed position and do not serve to modulate flow. However, these valves will have manual overrides.

An OPEN/CLOSE/REMOTE selector switch is provided integral to the VFW Influent Valve (510FCV3401). When this switch is in the OPEN position, the valve will open. When the switch is turned to the CLOSE position, the valve will close. When the switch is turned to the REMOTE position, the valve position will be dictated by the remote analog input to the valve to provide modulating control.

An OPEN/CLOSE/REMOTE selector switch is provided integral to the Bypass Valve (510FCV3473). When this switch is in the OPEN position, the valve will open. When the switch is turned to the CLOSE position, the valve will close. When the switch is turned to the REMOTE position, the valve position will be dictated by the remote analog input to the valve to provide modulating control.


SCADA Control Operation and Alarm Reset SCADA Manual

The SCADA shall provide the operator the ability to manually select the valve position for all of the dosing valves and drain valves as OPEN or CLOSED.

In addition, the Bypass Valve and VFW Influent Valve shall have the ability to be manually set to any percent open position.

The VFW Cells are paired as follows: Cells 1/2, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8, 9/10, 11/12, 13/14. Each of these pairs of cells has their own SCADA page. To deselect a set of cells from operating, choose Manual Mode for that set of cells.

SCADA Auto

The SCADA shall provide the operator the ability to select the VFW Operating Mode. The two operating modes are – Tidal Mode & Continuous Mode

The VFW Cells are paired as follows: Cells 1/2, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8, 9/10, 11/12, 13/14. Each pair of cells has their own SCADA page. To deselect a set of cells from operating, place it in Manual Mode

OPEN/CLOSE control of the dosing valves is PLC controlled, based on a volume calculation to target a 5.0 cm dose. The 5.0 cm dose is obtained by calculating the following:

Valve Open Time (min) = 7000 gallons (equivalent to a 5.0 cm dose) / VFW Influent Flow (in gpm)

OPEN/CLOSE control of the drain valve is PLC controlled, based on VFW Operation seen below.

Tidal Mode: (Normal operating mode currently)

Tidal mode consists of pulsed doses across a vertical flow wetland cell while the drainage valve is in the closed position. The doses accumulate in the wetland cell, filling the cell and submerging all the treatment media. Upon wetland cell water level reaching the prescribed setpoint, the drain valve is opened and the wetland cell is drained.

For Tidal Mode, drain valve OPEN/CLOSE is PLC controlled, based on a cell water level for the odd (1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13) numbered VFW cells and VFW wet well level measurement for the even (2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14) numbered VFW cells. Once full, the even numbered cells will remain full until it’s paired odd cell drains.

For the odd numbered VFW cells, the cell water level will control the valve OPEN/CLOSE as follows: Action WSE in VFW Cell (High Cell Water Level)

Drain Valve Open 167.0 ft

For the even numbered VFW Cells, the drain valve will open/close based on the VFW Wet Well water level once its paired cell has its drain valve open as follows:

Action WSE in VFW Wet Well

Drain Valve Open (after paired cell drain valve has opened)

154.00 ft


Continuous Mode:

Continuous mode consists of pulsed doses across a vertical flow wetland cell while the drainage valve is in the open position. Water percolates through the treatment media and drains out of the cell. In this mode, there is no accumulation of water within the cell.

For Continuous Mode, all drain valves will remain in the OPEN position.

The Bypass Flowmeter shall dictate the position of the Bypass Valve during the dry permit season. The flowmeter will target a flow rate of an Operator decided percentage of Forest Grove Effluent Pump Station flow. If the Bypass Valve is 100% open and the desired flow percentage is not achieved, the VFW Influent Valve is opened until the desired flow percentage is achieved. Currently, the EPS does not have a flowmeter. Until the new EPS gets constructed with a new flowmeter, plant influent flow shall be used as the EPS Flow rate.

In all Auto modes of operation when the Influent Flow exceeds 8 MGD two cell pairs will be in operation and return to single pair operation when the flow is below 7.5 MGD. An operator dual pair selection is also available in SCADA to allow dual pair operation at any flow rate.


Bypass flow and totalized flow of Bypass Flowmeter

Cell water depth for each cell

Open/Closed state of each dosing valve and drain valve

Position of the Bypass Valve

VFW Influent Flow = Sum of EPS Flowmeters + Recycle Flowmeter – Bypass (% EPS Flowmeter; an Operator setpoint)

Operator Entries

Open/close for each dosing valve and drain valve

Position for each modulating valve

Tidal/Continuous VFW operation

Single/Dual Pair Operation


Alarm (each individual cell) Response Dosing valve Fail to Open / Close Reset valve on SCADA Draining valve Fail to Open / Close Reset valve on SCADA High water level in cell SCADA Confirmation. If SCADA doesn’t

correct, in Manual, Close Dosing valve or Open Drain valve.

Hard-Wired Interlocks None

Software Interlocks None


Historical Trending Each Cell level, 1-12

VFW flow

Bypass Flow

Equipment Run Time Counters (Hourly) None

Equipment Failure Sequence All dosing valves shall automatically fail in the CLOSED position.

All drain valve shall automatically fail in the OPEN position.

Fail alarm shall remove the wetland cell and its associated paired wetland cell from service.

Equipment Automatic Failover Sequence There are multiple fail scenarios in the VFW: Failure Action A dosing valve fails to open Alarm & program moves onto the next pair of

VFW Cells skipping failed cell pair until valve is repaired.

A dosing valve fails to close, Tidal Mode

Drain valve for associated VFW cell is called to open.

A dosing valve fails to close, Continuous Mode

No action

A drain valve fails to open Alarm with no further action 8 VFW cells reach high cell water level

Alarm & Effluent Pump Station sends effluent to Rock Creek

A drain valve fails to close Alarm with no further action

Equipment (Auto/Manual) Restart After Power Interruption Upon power resumption, valves shall return to their algorithmic sequence of OPEN/CLOSED, based on the position of the valves when the power failure occurred.

F. VFW Effluent Pump System F30_200_CTL_030VFW_EffluentPumpSystem(EPS)

Control Loop Description VFW Effluent Pump Station (EPS)

Last Update: 4/27/2020


Note: VFW Effluent Pump Station is existing and the following information is provided for reference only. Contractor to coordinate with Owner while commissioning systems included in Contractor’s scope of work as certain tasks may pertain to VEW Effluent Pump Station operation.


The VFW Effluent Pumps operate to maintain flow from the Vertical Flow Wetland (VFW) Wet Well into the Lower Treatment Wetland or the Upper Wetland so the downstream wetlands and waterfalls do not see a large fluctuation in water levels. VFW Effluent Duty pumps maintain the wet well level within a range using flow from the VFW, providing sufficient flow out to the wetlands while the recycle pump moves sufficient VFW effluent back to the VFW to achieve operational goals. Equipment

Unit Equipment:

Equipment Name Equipment ID Rating Equipment Capacity

VFW Pump 1 (Recycle Pump)

687P2551 60 HP 2225 gpm @ 69’TDH

VFW Pump 2 (Swing Pump) 687P2552 60 HP 3800 gpm @ 36’TDH VFW Pump 3 (Duty Pump) 687P2553 60 HP 3800 gpm @ 36’TDH VFW Pump 4 (Duty Pump) 687P2554 60 HP 3800 gpm @ 36’TDH VFW PS Flowmeter 687FE2250 Recycle Flowmeter 687FIC2560 VFW Wetwell Process Analyzer

687AIT3451

The VFW Pumps were installed as three groups: duty, recycle and swing. The Duty pumps are 60 HP pumps, sized to provide 3800 GPM at 31’ TDH (single pump in operation) for pumping to the Upper Wetlands and Lower Treatment Wetland and future buildout. The Swing pump is a 60 HP pump, and has the ability to pump to the Upper Wetlands and Lower Treatment Wetland (3800 GPM at 30’ TDH (single pump in operation) or as recycle back into the VFW (2,225 GPM at 69’ TDH (single pump in operation). The Recycle pump will only have the ability to recycle back into the VFW (2,225 GPM at 69’ TDH (single pump in operation).

When Phase 2 of the Western Wetlands is constructed and the total Western Wetland flow capacity is increased to 18 MGD, the Duty pumps will remain the same with a trimmed impeller. The Swing pump will become VFW Pump 1, and a third Duty pump will become VFW Pump 2. Each pump will be powered by 480VAC, 3 phase motors. There is a check valve and manual butterfly valve on each discharge.

The VFW Pumps discharge header will have two manual valves to allow the Swing pump to send flow to the wetlands or back to the VFW as desired by Operations. The valves primary setting will be to have 510FV3465 (to VFW) Closed and 510FV3466 (to Wetlands) Open. This allows redundancy of pumping to the downstream wetlands and provides a firm capacity of 11 MGD. Per Operators decision, if redundancy is needed to process recycle, valve 510FV3465 can be Opened and valve 510FV3466 Closed. With the valves arranged in this fashion, recycle has redundancy while pumping to the downstream wetlands will not have redundancy.

The VFW PS Flowmeter is a 16” magnetic type that uses electromagnetic induction to measure flow. It has an output of 4-20 mA signal and is scaled from 0 to 24 MGD full scale flow. The VFW PS Flowmeter provides a flow signal for verification of the VFW Pumps output.

The Recycle Flowmeter is an 8” magnetic type that uses electromagnetic induction to measure flow. It has an output of 4-20 mA signal and is scaled from 0 to 6.75 MGD full


scale flow. The Recycle Flowmeter provides a flow signal for verification of the VFW Pumps output and target a specific recycle flow rate.

Instrumentation: Instrument Instrument ID VFW Wet Well Level Sensor 687LIT2551 VFW Wet Well level switch low 687LSL2552 VFW Wet Well level switch high 687LSH2553 VFW Wet Well level switch high-high 687LSHH2554 VFW Wet Well Auto Sampler 687SA2551 VFW Wet Well Ammonia Sensor 687AIT2552 VFW Wet Well Nitrate Sensor 687AIT2551 VFW Wet Well Temperature/pH Sensor 687AIT2553

The wet well level sensor is a hydrostatic style sensor installed in a stilling well. It provides a signal to measure the water level in the VFW Wet Well. It has a range of 0 to 20.0 ft in water depth (149.50’ Is the Bottom of the wet well and 168.50’ is the top of the wet well concrete slab).

The wet well level switches are in the VFW Wet Well. They provide alarm signals when the water level in the VFW Wet Well has met the elevations listed below in the “SCADA Auto” section. The level switches also provide backup pump control to the level transmitter.

The sampler automatically samples the water in the wet well. The Composite Sample will be used to test a suite of water quality parameters as needed. Sampling will be flow-paced, based off the Effluent Pump Station Flowrate (preferred). It can be drawn on a Time-based Mode or in Manual operation.

The ammonia sensor monitors the concentration of ammonia in the VFW Wet Well. If the ammonia level is higher than a high level setpoint in the PLC, an alarm will be sent in SCADA. It will have a 4-20 mA output scaled from 0 to 20.0 mg-N/L. High alarm limit can be set by the operator to comply with bubble permit. Alarm limits and instrument TBD.

The nitrate sensor will monitor the concentration of nitrate in the VFW Wet Well and will be used for informational purposes. It will have a 4-20 mA output scaled from 0 to 100 mg-N/L.

The temperature/pH sensor will be used to measure both the water temperature and pH level of the wet well water. It shall provide 4-20 mA output and shall provide temperature reading from 0 to 50 degrees Celsius and 2 to 14 pH. This temperature can be used as starting point information for measuring cooling in the downstream wetlands.


VFD Control Panel

The VFW Pumps can be controlled through a control panel located on the VFD panel. The panel has a LOCAL/OFF-RESET/REMOTE switch.

When the switch is in LOCAL, the VFW Pumps will operate at a speed as directed by the MANUAL SPEED CONTROL potentiometer on the VFD panel.

When the switch is in REMOTE, the speed of the VFW Pump motors will be adjusted based on a control signal provided by the PLC over the Ethernet link to the VFD.


The VFD Control Panel also has RUN, OVERTEMP and SEAL FAIL lights. Confirmation of LORR switch in either LOCAL or REMOTE will be sent back to the PLC for each pump.

Motor Control Center

None

MFR Control Center

None Intermediate Control Panel

None


None


SCADA Manual

In Manual Mode, the operator can manually Start / Stop Pumps, set the speed of each pump regardless of the PLC controlled signal and change the Lead / Lag order of the pumps.

Both Recycle and Duty sides of the wet well have controllers.

SCADA Remote

While in REMOTE, the PLC will control the speed of the VFW Pumps based on a calculated required flow and VFW Wet Well water level.

The required recycle flow will be based off Operator set point of a minimum desired VFW Influent flow. The VFW Influent flow is based on the sum of the active UV vessel flow meters at the effluent pump station. If VFW Influent flow is less than Operator minimum set point, the recycle pump modifies speeds to achieve the set point. If VFW Influent flow is greater than Operator minimum set point, the recycle pump does not operate.

The initial required flow for the duty pumps can be calculated by comparing the VFW PS Flowmeter to the VFW Influent Flow and Bypass Flowmeter. A speed control signal shall be sent from the PLC via the Ethernet link to ensure that the VFW Pumps operate at the correct speed to match the required flow to maintain the wet well level between 158’ and 152’. The maximum flow allowed to be discharged to the wetlands will be capped at 6 MGD and the remainder allowed to raise the wet well to the overflow bypass to lake.

SCADA Display

Status and Process Display VFW effluent flow and totalized flow of VFW PS Flowmeter Recycle flow and totalized flow of Recycle Flowmeter Pump in Local Pump in Remote Pump Running Pump Stopped High Temperature Alarm Seal Fail Alarm


Fault Alarm Pump Speed Wet well high-high Wet well level high Wet well level Wet well level low Pump non-responsive/communication fail Ammonia level in wet well Nitrate level in wet well pH in wet well Temperature in wet well

Operator Entries Pumps "Lead / Lag” sequence (both Duty and Recycle) Pump speed control (in Manual) Call to run Setpoints for wet well level (High-High, High, Level 4, Level 3, Level 2, Level 1, Low) Ammonia high alarm limit


High Temperature SCADA CONFIRMATION Seal Leak SCADA CONFIRMATION High High wet well level SCADA CONFIRMATION High wet well level SCADA CONFIRMATION Low wet well level SCADA CONFIRMATION Pump non-responsive (fail to start/stop)

SCADA CONFIRMATION

Ammonia level high SCADA CONFIRMATION VFD Fault (non-responsive, fail to start, fail to stop)

SCADA CONFIRMATION

Hard-wired Interlocks

None.

Software Interlocks

Pumps will not run if wet well level measurement is lower than software selected low setpoint or under manual control.

Historical Trending

Flow through VFW Flowmeter Flow through Recycle Flowmeter VFW Wet Well level Runtime for each VFW pump Speed for each VFD Ammonia concentration Nitrate concentration pH Temperature

Equipment Run Time Counters (Hourly)

All are for pump runtimes 687P2551_RTC


687P2552_RTC 687P2553_RTC 687P2554_RTC Equipment Failure Sequence

If while being called to run, a pump is non-responsive, the next pump in the order of preference shall be called to operate. An alarm shall be set in SCADA to alert the operator to the failure of the pump.

If all three or more pumps fail, the Effluent Pump Station shall send flows to Rock Creek

If the level transmitter fails, the High High, High, and Low level switches will be used via the PLC to control pump operation as described in SCADA Auto Mode. Equipment Automatic Failover Sequence

Pumps will perform a bumpless transfer from SCADA AUTO to SCADA Manual when in REMOTE.

Equipment (Auto/Manual) Restart After Power Interruption If the pump’s LORR switch is in REMOTE, Pumps will automatically restart after a power fail.

3.05 REPAIR/RESTORATION (NOT USED)

3.06 RE-INSTALLATION (NOT USED)

3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL (NOT USED)

3.08 ADJUSTING (NOT USED)

3.09 CLEANING (NOT USED)


A. As specified in Section 17050 - Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods.

3.11 PROTECTION (NOT USED)

3.12 SCHEDULES (NOT USED)

END OF SECTION

Level Measurement: Submersible 17203-1 11487A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/OR/Clean Water Services/11487A10/Specifications/17203 (Bidset) April 2021 - BID

SECTION 17203

LEVEL MEASUREMENT: SUBMERSIBLE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirements for: 1. Submersible Pressure Sensing Level Transmitters.

B. Related Sections: 1. The Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and as such

all Divisions and Sections apply. It is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR and its Sub-Contractors to review all Sections to ensure a complete and coordinated project.

C. Provide all instruments identified in the Contract Documents.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. Refer to Section 17050 – Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods.

1.03 DEFINITIONS


1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section – 01330 Submittal Procedures and Section 17050 – Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods.



B. Examine the complete set of Contact Documents and verify that the instruments are compatible with the installed conditions including:

C. Process conditions: Fluids, pressures, temperatures, flows, materials, etc.

1.06 PHYSICAL CONDITIONS

A. Installation and mounting requirements.

B. Location within the process.


C. Accessories: Verify that all required accessories are provided and are compatible with the process conditions and physical installation.

D. Notify the ENGINEER if any installation condition does not meet the instrument manufacturer's recommendations or specifications.





1.09 WARRANTY


1.10 MAINTENANCE



2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. No Exceptions: 1. Wika LH-20 with FM approval, HART Protocol, and protective cap.


A. The level transmitter system shall consist of a submersible pressure sensor/ transmitter unit that is suitable for direct submersion into the liquid being measured. The sensor shall be a solid-state variable capacitance or diffused silicon semiconductor type that shall provide an output signal directly proportional to the sensed pressure over a factory-calibrated range. The sensor assembly shall have a stainless steel or titanium housing and shall be supported by a polyethylene or urethane jacketed cable with a minimum 200 lb test strength. The sensor cable shall be of sufficient length so that no splice or connector is required in the wet or inaccessible area, and the vent tube termination point is located in an area protected from dirt and moisture. The sensor shall be suitable for wastewater applications.

B. The transmitter shall have a two-wire type 4 to 20 mA DC current output that is proportional to level. The output shall have surge protection, and shall not be damaged by reverse polarity. The transmitter shall be suitable for an operating temperature range of 0° to +50°C. Accuracy of the level transmitter shall be


±0.25 percent "best straight line", with an overall combined accuracy of ±1 percent over the entire operating temperature/pressure range. The transmitter shall support HART Protocol.

2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Provide manufacturer’s instrument junction box for terminating sensor’s cables. The sensor cable shall terminate into a manufacturer-provided junction box with terminal blocks and moisture filter to prevent moisture from entering the tubing within the cable.



PART 3 PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION


B. Coordinate the installation with all trades to ensure that the mechanical system has all necessary appurtenances including weld- o-lets, valves, etc. for proper installation of instruments.



3.03 ADJUSTING

A. Verify factory calibration of all instruments in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

3.04 CLEANING




B. Demonstrate performance of all instruments to the ENGINEER before commissioning.


3.06 PROTECTION


3.07 SCHEDULES

A. The provided information does not necessarily include all required instruments. Provide all instruments identified in the Contract Documents: 1. Instruments may be shown on the Drawings, in the Specifications or both.

END OF SECTION

Flow Measurement: Magnetic Flowmeters 17302-1 11487A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/OR/Clean Water Services/11487A10/Specifications/17302 (Bidset) April 2021 - BID

SECTION 17302

FLOW MEASUREMENT: MAGNETIC FLOWMETERS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: 1. Full-body magnetic flowmeters.

B. Provide all instruments identified in the Contract Drawings.

1.02 REFERENCES


B. NSF International (NSF).

1.03 DEFINITIONS


1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish submittals as specified in Sections 01330 - Submittal Procedures and 17050 – Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods.



B. Examine the complete set of Contract Documents and verify that the instruments are compatible with the installed conditions including: 1. Process conditions: Fluids, pressures, temperatures, flows, materials, etc. 2. Physical conditions:

a. Installation and mounting requirements. b. Location within the process. c. Accessories: Verify that all required accessories are provided and are

compatible with the process conditions and physical installation.

C. Notify the Engineer if any installation condition does not meet the instrument manufacturer’s recommendations or specifications.






1.08 WARRANTY


1.09 MAINTENANCE


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. One of the following or equal: 1. Endress+Hauser: Promag W400:

a. Heartbeat Verification Monitoring b. WLAN connectivity.

2. Rosemount: 8700W with 8732 or 8712: a. Advanced Diagnostics Suite, Option 2 (DA2)

3. Yokogawa: ADMAG AXW.


A. Magnetic flowmeter: 1. General:

a. Magnetic flowmeters obtain the flow velocity by measuring the changes of induced voltage of the conductive fluid passing across a controlled magnetic field.

b. Complete zero stability shall be an inherent characteristic of the flowmeter system.

c. Include for each magnetic flow metering system: 1) A metering tube with electrodes (sensor). 2) Signal cable. 3) Transmitter integral or remote as indicated on the Drawings. 4) Flowmeter grounding rings.

2. Performance requirements: a. Accuracy:

1) 0.25 percent of flow rate from 10 to 100 percent of full scale for velocities ranging between 1.9 to 10 feet per second.


b. Repeatability: 1) 0.25 percent of rate.

3. Element: a. Metering tube:

1) Constructed of carbon steel or Type 304 stainless steel (unless specifically noted otherwise in the instrument data sheets) with flanged connections to match with piping material.

2) Liner material: a) Teflon, unless stated otherwise or in the Manufacturer’s

recommendations for the intended service. b) NSF certified for all drinking water applications.

3) Electrodes type and material in conformance with: a) Material: 316L Stainless Steel, unless stated otherwise or in the

Manufacturer’s recommendations for the intended service. b) Utilize a minimum of 2, self-cleaning electrodes.

4) Meter terminal housing NEMA Type 4X unless specifically noted otherwise in the instrument data sheets.

5) Meter coating consisting of epoxy painted finish. 6) Components:

a) 2 grounding rings: (1) Which are in conformance with the manufacturer’s bore and

material recommendation for the meter’s intended service. (2) Designed to protect and shield from abrasion of the liner’s

edge interface at the meter’s end. 4. Transmitter:

a. Power supply: 1) 120 VAC. 2) Power consumption: 60 VA maximum.

b. Outputs: 1) As noted in the instrument data sheets. 2) For all instruments with 4 to 20 mA HART or digital bus protocol,

provide a Device Type Manager (DTM) certification by FDT group. c. Microprocessor-based signal converter/transmitter. d. Advanced diagnostics:

1) Rosemount:Advanced Diagnostics Suite, Option 2 (DA2). 2) Endress & Hauser: Heartbeat Verification & Monitoring.

e. Connectivity: 1) Endress & Hauser: WLAN monitoring.

f. Utilize DC pulse technique to drive flux-producing coils. g. Contain a 6-digit display for flow rate, percent of span, and totalizer. h. Operator keypad interface. i. Integral zero return to provide consistent zero output signals in response

to an external dry contact closure. j. Integral low flow cut-off zero return. k. Programmable parameters including:

1) Meter size. 2) Full-scale flow rate. 3) Magnetic field frequency. 4) Time constant.

l. Data retention for a minimum of 5 years without auxiliary main or battery power.


m. Self-diagnostics and automatic data checking. n. Protected terminals and fuses in a separate compartment which isolates

field connection from electronics. o. Ambient operating temperature limits of -5 to 140 degrees Fahrenheit (-20

to 60 degrees Celsius).

2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Stainless steel tag labeled as specified in the Contract Documents.

B. Provide sunshades for all transmitters located outdoors.

C. Provide galvanic isolation gaskets, nylon/Teflon flange bolt insulation bushings and nylon washers on all meters installed on pipes with cathodic protection.



B. Factory calibrate each flow metering system at a facility that is traceable to the NIST.

C. A real-time computer generated printout of the actual calibration date indication actual velocities and as read values of the flow tube. 1. Flow calibration report of the manufacturers flow lab calibration procedure

shall be shipped with the meter system. 2. Minimum calibration shall be a 3 point calibration including 1, 3, and 10 feet

per second velocities for every meter and transmitter system. 3. Manufacturer shall archive all calibration reports for future reference.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION




B. Provide manufacturer’s services to perform installation inspection.

3.03 ADJUSTING

A. Verify factory calibration of all instruments in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions: 1. Return factory calibrated devices to the factory if they do not meet the field

verification requirements for calibration.


3.04 CLEANING




B. Demonstrate performance of all instruments to the Engineer before commissioning.

3.06 PROTECTION


3.07 SCHEDULES

A. Instrument Data Sheets included in this Section.

B. The provided information does not necessarily include all required instruments.

C. Provide all instruments identified in the Contract Documents: 1. Instruments may be indicated on the Drawings, specified in the Specifications,

or both.

END OF SECTION


A/E: MAGNETIC FLOWMETERS INSTRUMENT DATA SHEETS Spec. No. Rev. Contractor: No By Date Revision 17302

Project: UV Upgrade Contract Date

Customer: CWS

Plant: Forest Grove Req. P.O.

Location: Forest Grove, OR BOM No.: By Chk App File:

1 Instrument Tag No. 650FIT2801 650FIT2802 650FIT2803

2 Service UV Reactor No. 1 UV Reactor No. 2 UV Reactor No. 3

3 P&ID N/A N/A N/A

4 C Line Size / Schedule 5 O Line Material 6 N Connection Type/ Pressure Rating 7 N Connection Materials 8

M E T E R

Tube Size 16” 16” 16”

E 9 Tube Material

L 10 Liner Material E 11 Electrode Type M 12 Electrode Material E 13 Meter Casing N 14 Power Spply Phase T 15 Grounding Type & Matl. 16 Enclosure Class 17 Other 18 Fluid Secondary Effluent Secondary Effluent Secondary Effluent 19 F Max Flow 10 MGD 10 MGD 10 MGD 20 L Min Velocity 21 U Min Flow Norm Flow 1 MGD 5 MGD 1 MGD 5 MGD 1 GMD 5 MGD 22 I Min Temp Max Temp 23 D Min Press Max Press 24 Vacuum Possibility 25 Conductivity

T R A N S M I T T E R

26 Function Continuous Continuous Continuous 27 Mounting Integral Integral Integral 28 Enclosure Class 29 Length Signal Cable 30 Type Span Adjustment 31 Power Supply 120VAC 120VAC 120VAC 32 Transmitter Output 4-20mA w/ HART 4-20mA w/ HART 4-20mA w/ HART

Relay Outputs 33 Accuracy <0.25% <0.25% <0.25% 34 Calibrated Range 35 Empty Pipe Detection 36 Bi-Directional Flow 37 Display Scale Size Range 38 Alarm Contact No. Form

39 Manufacturer 40 Element (Meter) Model No. 41 Transmitter (Inst.) Model No.

Notes:


A/E: MAGNETIC FLOWMETERS INSTRUMENT DATA SHEETS Spec. No. Rev. Contractor: No By Date Revision 17302


Customer: CWS


Location: Forest Grove, OR BOM No.: By Chk App File:

1 Instrument Tag No. 650FIT2804 650FIT2805 650FIT3403

2 Service UV Reactor No. 4 UV Reactor No. 5 Plant Water

3 P&ID N/A 650-I-101 650-I-103

4 C Line Size / Schedule 5 O Line Material 6 N Connection Type/ Pressure Rating 7 N Connection Materials 8

M E T E R

Tube Size 16” 16” 3”

E 9 Tube Material

L 10 Liner Material E 11 Electrode Type M 12 Electrode Material E 13 Meter Casing N 14 Power Spply Phase T 15 Grounding Type & Matl. 16 Enclosure Class 17 Other 18 Fluid Secondary Effluent Secondary Effluent Plant Water 19 F Max Flow 10 MGD 10 MGD 500 GPM 20 L Min Velocity 21 U Min Flow Norm Flow 1 MGD 5 MGD 1 MGD 5 MGD 50 GPM 350 GPM 22 I Min Temp Max Temp 23 D Min Press Max Press 24 Vacuum Possibility 25 Conductivity

T R A N S M I T T E R

26 Function Continuous Continuous Continuous 27 Mounting Integral Integral Integral 28 Enclosure Class 29 Length Signal Cable 30 Type Span Adjustment 31 Power Supply 120VAC 120VAC 120VAC 32 Transmitter Output 4-20mA w/ HART 4-20mA w/ HART 4-20mA w/ HART

Relay Outputs 33 Accuracy <0.25% <0.25% <0.25% 34 Calibrated Range 35 Empty Pipe Detection 36 Bi-Directional Flow 37 Display Scale Size Range 38 Alarm Contact No. Form

39 Manufacturer 40 Element (Meter) Model No. 41 Transmitter (Inst.) Model No.

Notes:


Pressure /Vacuum Measurement: Diaphragm and Annular Seals 17401-1 11487A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/OR/Clean Water Services/11487A10/Specifications/17401 (Bidset) April 2021 - BID

SECTION 17401

PRESSURE/VACUUM MEASUREMENT: DIAPHRAGM AND ANNULAR SEALS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: 1. Diaphragm seals.

B. Provide all seals identified in the Contract Documents.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. As specified in Section 17050 – Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation.

1.03 DEFINITIONS


1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish submittals as specified in Section 01330 – Submittal Procedures and Section 17050 – Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation.

B. Additional requirements: 1. Product data:

a. Manufacturer’s installation instructions. b. Seal type. c. Body materials. d. Diaphragm material. e. Fill fluid type. f. Seal size. g. Options. h. Process connection.












1.08 WARRANTY


1.09 MAINTENANCE


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Diaphragm seals: 1. For chemical applications, liquids containing solids, and liquids with pulsating

flow having pressures greater than or equal to 15 pounds per square inch gauge: One of the following or equal: a. Rosemount 1199.


A. Diaphragm seals: 1. General:

a. Diaphragm seal and pressure instrument shall be assembled by pressure instrument manufacturer and shipped as an assembly.

2. Requirements: a. Seal type:

1) Metallic diaphragm: Welded to upper housing. b. Process connection: 1 inch NPT. c. Instrument connection: 1/2 inch NPT. d. Material Construction: Type 316 Stainless Steel. e. Provide 1/4-inch flushing connection in diaphragm lower housing or

provide flushing ring. f. Flush port plug: Same material of construction as diaphragm lower

housing. g. Provide fill/bleed connection. h. Mounting: As indicated in the Contract Documents. i. Provide Type 316 stainless steel armored capillary for all remote

installations. j. Nuts and bolts: Type 316 stainless steel.


k. Materials of construction: 1) Sewage, sludge, liquids containing solids, and liquids with pulsating

flow having pressures less than or equal to 15 pounds per square inch: a) Diaphragm: Type 316 stainless steel. b) Lower housing: Type 316 stainless steel. c) Upper housing: Manufacturer’s standard. d) Fill fluid: Silicon oil.

2) Sewage, sludge, liquids containing solids, and liquids with pulsating flow having pressures greater than 15 pounds per square inch:

a) Diaphragm: Type 316 stainless steel. b) Lower housing: Type 316 stainless steel. c) Upper housing: Manufacturer’s standard. d) Fill fluid: Silicon oil.

3) Engineer’s approval.

2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Provide field fill kits.



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION


B. Coordinate the installation with all trades to ensure that the mechanical system has all necessary appurtenances including weld- o-lets, valves, etc. for proper installation of instruments.

C. Do not use Teflon thread seal tape on pressure instruments with silicon oil fill fluid.



B. Provide manufacturer’s services to perform start-up and calibration or verification.

3.03 ADJUSTING




3.04 CLEANING




3.06 PROTECTION


3.07 SCHEDULES

A. The provided information does not necessarily include all required instruments. Provide all instruments identified in the Contract Documents: 1. Instruments may be indicated on the Drawings, in the Specifications or both.

END OF SECTION

Pressure/Vacuum Measurement: Instrument Valves 17402-1 11487A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/OR/Clean Water Services/11487A10/Specifications/17402 (Bidset) April 2021 - BID

SECTION 17402

PRESSURE/VACUUM MEASUREMENT: INSTRUMENT VALVES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirements for: 1. Valve manifolds and instrument valves.

B. Related Sections: 1. The Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and as such all

Divisions and Sections apply. It is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR and its Sub-Contractors to review all sections to ensure a complete and coordinated project.

C. Provide all valve manifolds and instrument valves identified in the Contract Documents.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. Refer to Section 17050 – Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation.

1.03 DEFINITIONS


1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01330 – Submittal Procedures and Section 17050 – Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation.

B. Additional Requirements: 1. Product Data:

a. Valve type. b. Body material. c. Size. d. Options.

2. Shop Drawings: a. Mounting details for all manifold valves.



B. Examine the complete set of Contact Documents and verify that the instruments are compatible with the installed conditions including: 1. Process conditions: Fluids, pressures, temperatures, flows, materials, etc. 2. Physical conditions:




C. Notify the ENGINEER if any installation condition does not meet the instrument manufacturer’s recommendations or specifications.



B. Protect valve manifolds and protective coatings from damage during handling and installation. Repair coating where damaged.



1.08 WARRANTY


1.09 MAINTENANCE



2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Valve Manifold Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1. Anderson Greenwood. 2. Hex Valve. 3. Noshok. 4. Rosemount.

B. Block and Bleed Valve Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1. Anderson Greenwood. 2. Hex Valve.

C. Gauge Valve Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1. Anderson Greenwood. 2. Hex Valve.


A. Valve Manifolds: 1. General:

a. Provide 2-Valve, 3-valve, blowdown type 5-valve, or metering type 5-valve manifolds as indicated on the Drawings.


b. Valve manifolds shall have one piece bonnet with a metal to metal seal to the valve body below the bonnet threads.

2. Requirements: a. Bonnet lock pin to prevent accidental loosening. b. Gas leak tested metal-to-metal hard seat design for hard seat valves. c. Gas leak tested soft seat design with replaceable seat for soft seat valves. d. Manifold valves shall have straight through portion for bi- directional flow

and easy roddable cleaning. e. Manifold valves shall allow for direct or remote instrument mounting. f. Shall be able to withstand pressures up to 6,000 psi for soft seat valves

and 10,000 psi for hard seat valves at maximum 200 degrees Fahrenheit. g. Materials of Construction:

1) Body Material: 316 Stainless Steel. 2) O-Ring: Teflon.

h. 2-Valve Manifolds: 1) 1 isolation valve and 1 drain/vent and calibration valve.

i. 3-Valve Manifolds: 1) 2 isolation valves and 1 equalizing valve for differential pressure

applications. 2) Plugged vent connections used for vent/drain or calibration.

j. Blowdown 5-Valve Manifold: 1) 2 isolation valves, 1 equalizing valve, 2 blowdown valves for

differential pressure applications. k. Metering 5-Valve Manifold:

1) 2 isolation valves, 2 equalizing valves, 1 vent/drain and calibration valve for differential pressure applications.

B. Block and Bleed Valves: 1. General:

a. Valve shall provide process isolation and venting/draining capabilities. b. Gas leak tested metal-to-metal hard seat design for hard seat valves. c. Gas leak tested soft seat design with replaceable seat for soft seat valves.

2. Requirements: a. Materials of Construction:


C. Gauge Valves: 1. General:

a. Valve shall provide process isolation from pressure instrument. b. Gas leak tested metal to metal hard seat design for hard seat valves. c. Gas leak tested soft seat design with replaceable seat for soft seat valves.

2. Requirements: a. Materials of Construction:



2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Provide tube fitting, female NPT, or pipe butt weld connections if necessary.

B. Provide stainless steel concentric or eccentric pipe nipples when necessary.



B. Factory calibrate each instrument at a facility that is traceable to the National Institute of Testing Standards (NIST).

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION


B. Coordinate the installation with all trades to ensure that the mechanical system has all necessary appurtenances including weld-o-lets, valves, etc. for proper installation of instruments.



B. Provide manufacturer’s services to perform start-up and calibration or verification.

3.03 ADJUSTING



3.04 CLEANING




B. Demonstrate performance of all instruments to the ENGINEER before commissioning.

3.06 PROTECTION



3.07 SCHEDULES

A. The provided information does not necessarily include all required instruments. Provide all instruments identified in the Contract Documents: 1. Instruments may be shown on the Drawings, in the Specifications or both.

END OF SECTION

Pressure/Vacuum Measurement: Gauges 17404-1 11487A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/OR/Clean Water Services/11487A10/Specifications/17404 (Bidset) April 2021 - BID

SECTION 17404

PRESSURE/VACUUM MEASUREMENT: GAUGES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMARY

A. Section includes: 1. Pressure/vacuum gauges.

B. Provide all instruments specified in the Contract Documents.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. As specified in Section 17050 - Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation.

B. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): 1. B40.100 - Pressure Gauges and Gauge Attachments.

1.03 DEFINITIONS


1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish submittals as specified in Sections 01330 - Submittal Procedures and 17050 - Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation.

B. Additional requirements: 1. Product data:

a. Accessories such as diaphragm seals, valve manifold, snubbers, and pulsation dampeners.












1.08 WARRANTY


1.09 MAINTENANCE


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal: 1. Ashcroft:

a. Maximum pressure less than 10 pounds per square inch: 1) Model 1188.

b. Maximum pressure greater than or equal to 10 pounds per square inch: 1) Model 1279.

2. Wika. 3. Ametek U.S. Gauge.


A. General: 1. Pressure gauge assembly shall include pressure sensing element, gauge

case, and dial mechanism.

B. Performance requirements: 1. Pressure range:

a. As specified in the Contract Documents. 2. Accuracy:

a. Grade 2A, as defined by ASME B40.100. b. Within 1.0 percent of span after friction errors are eliminated by tapping or

vibration. c. Maximum allowable friction inaccuracy: Within 1.0 percent of span.

3. Element: a. Where the maximum pressure is less than 10 pounds per square inch,

provide socket and bellows; for all other pressure ranges, employ a Bourdon tube.

b. Socket tips for bellows and Bourdon tube: 1) Materials: Type 316 stainless steel.

c. Overpressure: Minimum 130 percent of maximum range pressure without damage to gauge or sensing element.

d. Wetted materials: Type 316 stainless steel.


4. Dial gauge: a. Dial size: 4-1/2 inches. b. Dial case material:

1) Maximum pressure less than 10 pounds per square inch: a) Aluminum.

2) Maximum pressure greater than or equal to 10 pounds per square inch: a) Aluminum.

c. Provide safety gauge with safety blow out through the back or top of the unit.

d. Dial face: Gasketed shatterproof glass or polycarbonate. e. Provide gauge locks on all pressure gauges directly connected to

diaphragm seals. f. Provide gauge locks where possible. g. Hermetically sealed. h. Connection and mounting:

1) Direct mounted and suitable for outdoor installation. 2) 1/2 inch NPT. 3) Connection material: Stainless steel.

i. Pointer: Externally adjustable.

2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Pulsation dampeners and snubbers: 1. Provide pulsation dampener or snubber with each pressure gauge installed on

discharge of positive displacement type pump. 2. Provide piston-type snubber if pressure spikes will exceed 130 percent of

gauge maximum range. 3. Materials: Type 316 stainless steel. 4. Mount pulsation dampener or snubber integrally to the pressure gauge. 5. Connection: 1/2-inch NPT.

B. Provide diaphragm seals as specified in the Contract Documents and in Section 17401 - Pressure/Vacuum Measurement: Diaphragm and Annular Seals: 1. Diaphragm seal and pressure gauge shall be assembled by manufacturer and

shipped as an assembly.

C. Provide means for gauge isolation as specified in Section 17402 - Pressure/Vacuum Measurement: Instrument Valves: 1. Mount valve manifold integrally to the gauge. 2. Valve manifold and pressure gauge shall be assembled by manufacturer and

shipped as an assembly.



B. Factory calibrate each pressure gauge at a facility that is traceable to the NIST.

C. Provide complete documentation covering the traceability of all calibration instruments.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION (NOT USED)


3.03 INSTALLATION





3.05 ADJUSTING



3.06 CLEANING




B. Demonstrate performance of all instruments to the ENGINEER before commissioning:

C. Furnish 0.5 hours of OWNER training.

3.08 PROTECTION


3.09 SCHEDULES

A. The provided information does not necessarily include all required instruments. Provide all instruments identified in the Contract Documents: 1. Instruments may be indicated on the Drawings, specified in the Specifications

or both.

END OF SECTION


A/E: PRESSURE GAUGES

Spec. No. Rev. Contractor: No By Date Revision 17404


Customer: CWS


Location: Forest Grove, OR

BOM No.: By Chk App File: 1 Type Direct Rdg.: Receiver: Other: 2 Mounting Surface: Local: Flush: 3 Dial Diameter: 4.5” Color: 4 Case Cast Iron: Aluminum: Phenolic: Polished SS Other: 5 Ring Screwed: Hinged: Slip: Std: Other: 6 Blowout Protection None: Disc: Front: Other: Mfr. Std. 7 Lens Glass: Plastic: 8 Options Siphon: N/A Material: 9 Other Snubber: 10 Other Pressure Limit Valve: N/A 11 Other Movement Damping: N/A 12 Nominal Accuracy Required 13 Pressure Element Bourdon: Bellows: Other: 14 Element Material Bronze: Steel: Type SS: 316 Other: 15 Socket Material Bronze: Steel: SS: 316 Other: 16 Connection ¼ in.: ½ in.: Bottom: Other: 17 Movement Dampened: Standard: Other: 18 Diaphragm Seal Mfr.: Wetted Part Mat’l: Type: 19 Other Other Mat’l: Fill Fluid: Model: 20 Manufacturer 21 Model No. Rev Tag Number Range P&ID Service Notes

640PI3401 0-100 PSIG N/A Secondary Effluent Pump No. 1 640PI3402 0-100 PSIG N/A Secondary Effluent Pump No. 2 640PI3403 0-100 PSIG N/A Secondary Effluent Pump No. 3 640PI3404 0-100 PSIG N/A Secondary Effluent Pump No. 4 640PI3405 0-100 PSIG N/A Secondary Effluent Pump No. 5 640PI3406 0-100 PSIG N/A Secondary Effluent Pump No. 6 640PI3407 0-100 PSIG 640-I-101 Secondary Effluent Pump No. 7

Notes: Refer to Section 17402 for additional instrument valve requirements. Refer to Section 17401 for diaphragm seal requirements.

Analyzers: Turbidity 17509-1 11487A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/OR/Clean Water Services/11487A10/Specifications/17509 (Bidset) April 2021 - BID

SECTION 17509

ANALYZERS: TURBIDITY

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: 1. Turbidity analyzers (turbidimeters).

B. Provide all instruments identified in the Contract Documents.

1.02 REFERENCES


B. CSA International (CSA).

C. United States Environmental Protection Agency (USEPA): 1. 40 CFR Part 141 - National Primary Drinking Water Regulations. 2. Federal Register Vol 67 No. 209 - Analytical Method and an Associated

Minimum Reporting Level (MRL) to Support the Unregulated Contaminant Monitoring Regulation’s (UCMR) List 2 Aeromonas Monitoring.

3. Method 180.1 - Determination of Turbidity by 360 degree Nephelometry.

1.03 DEFINITIONS


1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish submittals as specified in Sections 01330 - Submittal Procedures and 17050 - Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation.

B. Provide complete documentation covering the traceability of all calibration instruments.



B. Examine the complete set of Contract Documents and verify that the instruments are compatible with the installed conditions including: 1. Process conditions: Fluids, pressures, temperatures, flows, materials etc. 2. Physical conditions:





D. Provide instruments manufactured at facilities certified to the quality standards of ISO 9001.




A. Project environmental conditions as specified in Section 17050 - Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation: 1. Provide instruments suitable for the installed site conditions including, but not

limited to, material compatibility, site altitude, site seismic conditions, humidity, and process and ambient temperatures.

1.08 WARRANTY


1.09 MAINTENANCE

A. Furnish all parts, materials, fluids, etc. necessary for operation, maintenance, and calibration purposes throughout the warranty period. Deliver all of these supplies before project substantial completion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS 1. The following, no exceptions:

a. HF Scientific MTOL+.


A. Turbidimeters: 1. General:

a. The turbidimeter shall be a microprocessor-based, continuous-reading, on-line nephelometric instrument with predictive diagnostics, meeting all design and performance criteria in accordance with USEPA method 180.1.

b. The turbidimeter assembly shall be constructed of corrosion-resistant materials and shall include an internal bubble trap or backflow valve to prevent entrained air from the disrupting sample stream measurement.

2. Performance requirements: a. Range: As indicated on the data sheets.

1) Calibrate and/or configure instrument based on process range. b. Accuracy:

1) Within 2 percent of reading within 0.01 NTU from 0 to 40 NTU based on Formazin primary standard at 25 degrees Celsius.


2) Within 5 percent of reading from 40 to 1,000 NTU based on Formazin primary standard at 25 degrees Celsius

c. Resolution: 0.001 NTU. d. Sample flow required: 100 to 1,000 mL/min. e. Sample pressure: Maximum of 100 pounds per square inch.

3. Element: a. The turbidimeter consists of tungsten white light source and 360 degrees

by 90 degrees detection system with predictive diagnostics designed to continuously monitor turbidity in a sample stream.

4. Transmitter: a. The graphical interface unit shall be a microprocessor-based device

capable of functioning with a single sensor, and as a digital interface link between turbidimeters and other communication devices through a digital bus communications.

b. The interface unit shall allow operators to control sensor and network functions with user-friendly, menu-driven software, and shall provide data logging of measurement data, and the capability to transfer data to a computer or printer via USB.

c. Power supply: 1) 120 VAC. 2) Power consumption: 80 VA maximum.

d. Outputs: 1) Isolated 4 to 20 milliamperes DC communication protocol. 2) Relay outputs:

a) 2 Form C contacts. b) Rated 2 amps at 120 VAC.

(1) Programmable.

2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Mounting brackets as required or as indicated on the Drawings.

B. Provide sunshades for outdoor installations.



B. Factory calibrate each instrument with a minimum 3-point calibration or according to manufacturer’s standard at a facility that is traceable to the NIST. 1. Submit calibration data sheets to the Engineer at least 30 days before

shipment of the instruments to the project site.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine the installation location for the instrument and verify that the instrument will work properly when installed. 1. Notify the Engineer promptly if any installation condition does not meet the

instrument manufacturer’s recommendations or specifications.



3.03 INSTALLATION





B. Provide manufacturer’s services to perform installation inspection, start-up and calibration/verification.

3.05 ADJUSTING


3.06 CLEANING




3.08 PROTECTION


3.09 SCHEDULES

A. The provided information does not necessarily include all required instruments. Provide all instruments identified in the Contract Documents: 1. Instruments may be indicated on the Drawings, specified in the Specifications,

or both.

END OF SECTION


A/E: Carollo Engineers TURBIDITY ANALYZER

Spec. No. Rev. Contractor: No By Date Revision 17509


Customer: CWS


Location: Forest Grove, OR BOM No.: By Chk App File: G 1 Tag 640AIT3413 E 2 Service Secondary Effluent N 3 P&ID 650-I-104 S 4 Type Continuous M 5 Enclosure P 6 Sampling Method Nephelometric L 7 Operating Temperature Range 35-120F 8 Sample Temperature Range 35-120F

U 9 Sample Flow Required 100-1000 mL/min N 10 Manufacturer HF Scientific I 11 Model No. T 12 Other C 13 Style A 14 Length B 15 Model No. L 16 Other E 17 Other 18 Type Control Unit and Display

T 19 Enclosure Integral R 20 Mounting Wall Mount A 21 Accuracy N 22 Range 0-400 NTU S 23 Power Requirements 120 VAC, 60 Hz M 24 Display I 25 Resolution T 26 Output 4-20 mA T 27 Calibration E 28 Manufacturer R 29 Model No. 30 Other

31 Other

32 Other 33

O 34 P 35 T 36 S 37 38

Notes:

Control Systems: Panels, Enclosures, and Panel Components 17710-1 11487A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/OR/Clean Water Services/11487A10/Specifications/17710 (Bidset) April 2021 - BID

SECTION 17710

CONTROL SYSTEMS: PANELS, ENCLOSURES, AND PANEL COMPONENTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: 1. Design, fabrication and assembly of all instrumentation enclosures, control

panels and components provided under this contract, including but not limited to: a. Custom built instrumentation and control panels, including all enclosures

for hand stations controllers, low voltage power distribution, terminal junction boxes, and marshalling panels.

b. Control panels furnished as part of equipment systems specified in other Divisions, such as packaged control panels (PCP) and chemical feed panels.

c. Control components. d. Control panel installation.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. As specified in Section 17050 – Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Material and Methods.

B. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): 1. C62.41.1 – Guide on the Surge Environment in Low-Voltage (1000 V and less)

AC Power Circuits.

C. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL): 1. 508C - Standard for Industrial Control Equipment. 2. 913 - Standard for Intrinsically Safe Apparatus and Associated Apparatus for

Use in Class I, II, III, Division 1, Hazardous (Classified) Locations. 3. 1283 - Standard for Electromagnetic Interference Filters. 4. 1449 - Standard for Surge Protective Devices.

1.03 DEFINITIONS


B. Specific definitions: 1. The term “panel” in this Section is interchangeable with the term “enclosure.”


A. Panel dimensions:


1. Minimum dimensions are scalable from or as indicated on the Drawings and are based upon manufacturer’s non-certified information. It is the responsibility of the Contractor or manufacturer to design and size all panels: a. Size panels to provide space for all equipment, wiring, terminations, and

other items in the panel, including space for future build out. b. Panel sizes that substantially deviate (within 3 inches in any dimension)

from the sizes indicated on the Drawings must be approved by the Engineer.

c. Maximum panel depth: 30 inches, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Structural design:

1. Completed and installed panel work shall safely withstand seismic requirements at the project site as specified in Section 16050 – Common Work Results for Electrical. Enclosures and internal equipment shall be braced to prevent damage from specified forces.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Provide submittals as specified in Section 01330 – Submittal Procedures and Section 17050 – Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Material and Methods.

B. Provide a control panel hardware submittal, for each control panel and enclosure being provided on this project, including but not limited to: 1. Product data:

a. Enclosure construction details and NEMA type. b. Manufacturer's literature and specification data sheets for each type of

equipment to be installed within or on the panel or enclosure. 2. Shop drawings:

a. Scaled, detailed exterior panel (front and side views) and interior panel layout showing equipment arrangement and dimensional information: 1) Provide draft for review and approval by Engineer. The Engineer has

the authority to substantially alter initial panel layouts. b. Complete nameplate engraving schedule. c. Structural details of fabricated panels.

3. Calculations: a. Provide installation details based on calculated shear and tension forces:

1) Calculations shall be signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer licensed in the state where the cabinets and panels will be installed.

b. For assembled enclosures and other equipment with a weight of 200 pounds or more, provide calculations for: 1) Weight including panel internal components. 2) Seismic forces and overturning moments. 3) Shear and tension forces in connections.

c. Cooling calculations, to include but not limited to: 1) Highest expected ambient temperature for the enclosure's location 2) Internal heat load. 3) Exposure to direct sunlight. 4) Dimensions of the enclosure in inches. 5) Maximum allowable temperature inside the enclosure, based on the

lowest operating temperature limit of the installed components.


4. Bill of material, including quantity, description, manufacturer, part number, serial number, vendor name with phone, and spare part list with unit price. Bills of material shall include all items within enclosure. a. Provide the Bill of material on CD-ROM in Microsoft Excel format.

C. Seismic design: 1. Seismic panel construction:

a. Seismic anchorage: Provide seismic design calculations and installation details for anchorage of all panels, enclosures, consoles, etc. to meet seismic requirements in Section 01612 – Seismic Design Criteria: 1) Stamped by a Professional Engineer registered in the state where

the project is being constructed. b. For floor mounted free standing panels weighing 200 pounds or more

(assembled, including contents), submit calculations, data sheets, and other information to substantiate that panel, base, and framing meet minimum design strength requirements and seismic requirements as specified in Section 01612 – Seismic Design Criteria. Calculations shall be signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer licensed in the state where the cabinets and panels will be installed.



B. Assemble panels, enclosures, and rack systems along with all internal and external devices, wiring, equipment, and materials in a facility that is recognized by UL to assemble and certify UL-labeled control panels: 1. Provide all panel components with UL 508 listing. 2. All control panels shall be constructed by a UL 508A certified panel shop.

C. Factory Acceptance Test. (Not Used).

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Project environmental conditions as specified in Section 17050 – Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods. 1. Provide instruments suitable for the installed site conditions including, but not

limited to, material compatibility, site altitude, site seismic conditions, humidity, and process and ambient temperatures.



1.09 WARRANTY



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. As listed below in the individual component paragraphs.

B. Provide instruments and other components performing similar functions of the same type, model, or class, and from 1 manufacturer.

2.02 EXISTING PRODUCTS

A. Provide labor and materials for complete modifications to existing panels as required.

B. Field cut and refinish existing panel faces to original condition to accommodate installation of new instruments, removal of existing instruments and fitting of blanks to suit new layouts. New instrument supports shall be provided as required for complete installation.

2.03 MATERIALS

A. Construct and finish enclosures using materials capable of withstanding the mechanical, electrical, and thermal stresses, as well as the effects of humidity and corrosion that are likely to be encountered in normal service: 1. Enclosures shall have the following properties:

a. NEMA Type 4: Steel with gasketed door, rain tight. b. NEMA Type 4X: Type 316 stainless steel.

B. Bolting material: 1. Commercial quality 1/2-inch diameter, stainless steel hex-head grade 5 bolts,

nuts and washers, with unified coarse (UNC) threads. 2. Carriage bolts for attaching end plates. 3. All other bolted joints shall have S.A.E. standard lock washers.


A. Panels/enclosures: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:

a. Rittal b. Pentair Hoffman

2. Panel assembly: a. General guidelines for panel fabrication include:

1) Continuous welds ground smooth. 2) Exposed surfaces free of burrs and sharp edges. 3) Base formed of heavy channel iron, either galvanized or powder

coated, minimum 1/2 inch holes at 12 inch spacing to accommodate anchoring of freestanding enclosures to floor.

b. Construct enclosure and mounting panel using stretcher level quality sheet metal having minimum thickness not less than the following sizes (U.S. Standard Gauge):


Enclosure Height

(inches)

Minimum Enclosure Steel Thickness

(gauge)

Minimum Back Mounting Panel

Thickness (gauge)

Up to 57 12 12

57 - 69 12 10

69 - 82 12, except 10 on back 10

82 or more 10 10

1) Use heavier sheet metal to meet seismic requirements at the project site or when required due to equipment requirements.

c. Construct supporting frame structure with angled, channeled, or folded rigid section of sheet metal, rigidly attached to and having essentially the same outer dimensions as the enclosure surface and having sufficient torsional rigidity to resist the bending moments applied via the enclosure surface when it is deflected.

d. Provide stiffeners for back mounting panels in enclosures larger than 4 feet. In addition, secure the panels in place by collar studs welded to the enclosure.

e. Door construction: 1) Turned-back edges suitably braced and supported to maintain

alignment and rigidity without sagging. 2) Sufficient width to permit door opening without interference with rear

projection of flush mounted instruments. 3) Heavy gauge piano type continuous stainless steel hinges. 4) For NEMA Type 12, Type 4 and Type 4X, provide oil resistant

neoprene sealing gasket and adhesive to seal cover to enclosure. 5) Gasket installed to seal against roll lip on the enclosure opening.

f. Latches: 1) For panels each door provided with a 3-point latching mechanism

and locking handle with rollers on the ends of the latch rods. Latch rods connected to a common door handle, hold doors securely, forming a compressed seal between door and gasket, at the top, side, and bottom. a) Provide padlock for each enclosure with padlock provisions.

2) Include an oil-tight key-locking, 3-point latching mechanism on each door: a) Provide 2 keys per panel. b) All locks keyed alike.

3) For large type NEMA Type 4 and NEMA Type 4X cabinets, not available with 3-point latching hardware, provide multiple clips and padlock hasps.

4) Provide quick release latches for all NEMA Type 4 and Type 4X enclosures.

g. Panel cut-outs: 1) Cut, punch, or drill cutouts for instruments, devices, and windows.

Smoothly finish with rounded edges. 2) Allow a minimum of 3-inch envelope around all displays, controllers,

and monitors.


3) Reinforce around cut-outs with steel angles or flat bars for the following: a) Large panel cutouts; for example, openings for local operator

interfaces. b) Pilot device groupings, where the removed metal exceeds 50

percent of the available metal. 3. In addition to the requirements specified above the following requirements for

NEMA Type 4X powder coated stainless steel enclosures apply: a. Minimum 14 gauge, Type 316 stainless steel. b. Captive stainless steel cover screws threaded into sealed wells. c. Inside finish: White polyester powder coating. d. Specifically designed for use with flange-mounted disconnect handles

where required or as indicated on the Drawings. e. NEMA Type 4X powder coated stainless steel enclosures are not an

acceptable substitute for stainless steel. 4. Outdoor panels. Supplementary requirements for panels located outdoors are

as follows: a. All enclosures located outdoors shall be explicitly designed and rated for

outdoor service by the manufacturer. b. Door hardware: stainless steel. c. Provide rain canopy and sun shield. d. Bases: Heavy channel, gasketed stainless steel bases, flanges up, for

anchoring to pad.

B. Arrangement of components: 1. Arrange panel internal components for external conduit and piping to enter into

panel either from above or below. 2. Arrange panel instruments and control devices in a logical configuration

associating pushbutton and selector switches with related readout devices, or as indicated on the Drawings.

3. Mount internal control components on an internal back-panel. Devices may be mounted on the side-panel only by special permission from the Engineer.

4. All control panel mounted operator interface devices shall be mounted between 3 feet and 5 feet above finished floor.

C. Overcurrent protection: 1. Main overcurrent device:

a. Where the electrical power supply voltage to the control panel is more than 120 VAC, provide the panel with a flange mounted disconnect handle operating a molded case circuit breaker, and provide a control power transformer for 120 VAC circuits: 1) Door-mounted disconnect handles are not acceptable. 2) Mechanically interlocked the disconnect switch with the control

enclosure doors so that no door can be opened unless the power is disconnected, and the disconnect switch cannot be closed until all doors are closed.

3) Provide means to defeat the interlock. 4) Lockable in the off position.

b. Control panels supplied with 120 VAC: 1) Provide an internal breaker with the line side terminals covered by a

barrier.


2) Provide a nameplate prominently positioned on the control panel identifying the location of the power source and a warning statement requiring the source to be disconnected before opening the door to the enclosure.

2. Provide circuit breakers as specified in Section 16412 – Low Voltage Molded Case Circuit Breakers.

3. Selection and ratings of protective devices: a. Interrupting ratings: Not less than the system maximum available fault

current at the point of application. b. Voltage rating: Not less than the voltage of the application. c. Select current rating and trip characteristics to be suitable for:

1) Maximum normal operating current. 2) Inrush characteristics. 3) Coordination of the protective devices to each other and to the

source breaker feeding the panel. 4. Provide a separate protective device for each powered electrical device:

a. An individual circuit breaker for each 120 VAC instrument installed within its respective control panel and clearly identified for function.

b. An individual fuse for each PLC discrete output. Provide with individual blown fuse indication external of the I/O card: 1) Size external fuse to open before any I/O card mounted fuses.

c. An individual 1-ampere fuse for each discrete input loop. d. An individual 1/2-ampere fuse for each 4 to 20 milliamperes analog loop

powered from the control panel. e. Install protective devices on the back mounting panel and identify by a

service nameplate in accordance with the wiring diagrams. 5. Fuses for 4 to 20 milliamperes signals:

a. Provide durable, readily visible label for each fuse, clearly indicating the correct type, size, and ratings of replacement fuse: 1) Label shall not cover or interfere with equipment manufacturer's

instructions. b. Provide fuses rated for the voltage and available short circuit current at

which they are applied. c. Manufacturer: One of the following or equal:

1) Ferraz Shawmut. 2) Littelfuse. 3) Bussmann.

6. Fuse holders: a. Modular type:

1) DIN rail mounting on 35 millimeters rail. 2) Touch safe design: All connection terminals to be protected against

accidental touch. 3) Incorporates blown fuse indicator.

b. Provide nameplate identifying each fuse: 1) As specified in Section 16075 – Electrical Identification.

c. Manufacturer: One of the following or equal: 1) Phoenix Contact. 2) Allen-Bradley 1492-FB Series B.

7. Control circuit breakers: a. DIN rail mounting on 35 millimeters rail. b. Manual OPEN-CLOSE toggle switch.


c. Rated 250 VAC. d. Interrupting rating: 10 kiloampere (kA) or available fault current at the line

terminal, whichever is higher. e. Current ratings: As indicated on the Drawings or as required for the

application. f. Provide nameplate identifying each circuit breaker:

1) As specified in Section 16075 – Electrical Identification. g. Manufacturer: One of the following or equal:

1) Phoenix Contact. 2) ABB. 3) Allen-Bradley Series. 4) Square D.

D. Conductors and Cables: 1. Power and Control Wiring:

a. Materials: Stranded, soft annealed copper. b. Insulation: 600V type MTW. c. Minimum Sizes:

1) Primary power distribution: 12 AWG. 2) Secondary power distribution: 14 AWG. 3) Control: 16 AWG.

d. Color: 1) BLACK, RED – 120/240VAC Single Phase (line and load)

conductors. 2) RED – 120 VAC conductors within control panel (Discrete Input &

Output) 3) ORANGE – 120V control conductors internal to the control panel. 4) YELLOW - 120V conductors external to the control panel. 5) GREEN - Ground wire. 6) WHITE - 120V Neutral conductors. 7) A-Brown, B-Orange, C-Yellow – 277/480V three phase conductors. 8) GRAY - 277 Neutral conductors. 9) BLUE - DC positive conductors. 10) WHITE with BLUE stripe - DC negative (grounded) conductors.

2. Signal Cables, Twisted Shielded: a. Materials: Stranded, soft annealed copper. b. Insulation: 600V, PVC outer jacket. c. Minimum Size: 18 AWG paired/triad. d. Overall aluminum shield (tape). e. 20 AWG seven-strand tinned copper drain wire. f. Color:

1) 2 Conductor: a) Positive (+): WHITE. b) Negative (-): BLACK.

2) 3 Conductor: a) Positive (+): WHITE. b) Negative (-): BLACK. c) Signal: RED.

g. Insulate the foil shielding and exposed drain wire for each signal cable with heat shrink tubing.


E. Conductor identification: 1. Identify each conductors and cables with unique wire numbers as specified in

Section 16075 – Electrical Identification. 2. Readily identified without twisting the conductor.

F. General wiring requirements: 1. Wiring methods: Wiring methods and materials for panels shall be in

accordance with the NEC requirements for General Purpose (no open wiring) unless otherwise specified.

2. Install all components in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions included in the listing and labeling.

3. Provide a nameplate on the cover of the control panel identifying all sources of power supply and foreign voltages within the control panel.

4. Provide transformers, protective devices, and power supplies required to convert the supply voltage to the needed utilization voltage.

5. Provide power surge protection for all control panels. 6. Provide signal surge protection within control panels for each analog I/O,

discrete I/O and data line (Copper Ethernet, Coax, Fieldbus signals) that originates from outdoor devices.

7. Provide nonmetallic ducts for routing and organization of conductors and cables: a. Size ducts for ultimate build-out of the panel, or for 20 percent spare,

whichever is greater. b. Provide separate ducts for signal and low voltage wiring from power and

120 VAC control wiring: 1) 120 VAC: Grey colored ducts. 2) 24 VDC: White colored ducts.

8. Cables shall be fastened with cable mounting clamps or with cable ties supported by any of the following methods: a. Screw-on cable tie mounts. b. Hammer-on cable tie mounting clips. c. Fingers of the nonmetallic duct.

9. The free ends of cable ties shall be cut flush after final adjustment and fastening.

10. Provide supports at the ends of cables to prevent mechanical stresses at the termination of conductors.

11. Support panel conductors where necessary to keep them in place. 12. Conductors and cables shall be run from terminal to terminal without splice or

joints. Exceptions: a. Factory applied connectors molded onto cables shall be permitted. Such

connectors shall not be considered as splices or joints. 13. The control panel shall be the source of power for all 120 VAC devices

interconnected with the control panel including, but not limited to: a. Solenoid valves. b. Instruments both mounted in the control panel and remotely connected to

the control panel.

2.05 COMPONENTS

A. Thermal management:


1. Provide heating, cooling, and dehumidifying devices in order to maintain all instrumentation and control devices to within a range as specified in Section 17050 – Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods.

2. Heating: a. Provide all panels located in areas that are not climate controlled with

thermostatically controlled strip heaters; except, where all of the following conditions apply: 1) The panel is not supplied with 120 VAC power. 2) There are no electronics or moisture-sensitive devices in the

enclosure. 3) The panel is smaller than 38 inches high.

3. Heat exchanger: a. Closed-loop design ensuring separation of ambient air and clean air inside

the cabinet. b. Filterless design to facilitate easy cleaning of the core. c. Mounting: Indicated on the Drawings.

4. Enclosure temperature sensor as indicated on the Drawings: 5. Enclosure temperature switch:

a. Provide wall mount bimetallic switch transmitter (to measure internal cabinet temperature in all enclosures) containing electrical components such as PLCs, RTUs, RIO, and VFDs.

b. Sensor and electronic enclosure. c. Accuracy: Within 2.0 degrees Fahrenheit. d. Manufacturer: The following or equal:

1) Hoffman ATEMNC. 6. Fan ventilation:

a. Temperature control switch and alarm: 1) Power: 120 VAC. 2) Bimetallic temperature senor. 3) Adjustable setpoint range 30 degrees Fahrenheit to 140 degrees

Fahrenheit. 4) Hoffman ATEM series or equal.

B. Panel meters. (NOT USED)

C. Pilot devices: 1. General:

a. Provide operator pushbuttons, switches, and pilot lights, from a single manufacturer.

b. Size: 1) 30.5 millimeters.

c. Heavy duty. d. Pushbuttons:

1) Contacts rated: a) NEMA Type A600.

2) Furnish 1 spare normally open and normally closed contact with each switch.

e. Selector switches: 1) Contacts rated:

a) NEMA Type A600.


b) Knob type: 2) Furnish 1 spare normally open contact and normally closed contact

with each switch. 3) Provisions for locking in the OFF position where lockout provisions

are indicated on the Drawings. f. Pilot lights:

1) Type: a) LED.

2) Push to test. 3) Lamp color:

a) On/Running/Start: Red. b) Off/Stop: Green. c) Power: White. d) Alarm: Amber. e) Status or normal condition: White. f) Opened: Red. g) Closed: Green. h) Failure: Amber.

2. Indoor and outdoor areas: a. NEMA Type 4/13. b. Manufacturer: One of the following or equal:

1) Allen-Bradley Type 800T. 2) Square D Class 9001 Type K. 3) General Electric Type CR104P. 4) IDEC TWTD.

3. Corrosive areas: a. NEMA Type 4X. b. Corrosion resistant. c. Exterior parts of high impact strength fiberglass reinforced polyester or

multiple-layer epoxy coated zinc. d. Manufacturer: One of the following or equal:

1) Cutler Hammer Type E34. 2) Square D Class 9001 Type SK. 3) Allen-Bradley Type 800H. 4) IDEC TWTD.

4. Hazardous (Classified) Areas/Class I Division 2: a. NEMA Type 4X. b. Corrosion resistant. c. Exterior parts of high impact strength fiberglass reinforced polyester or

multiple-layer epoxy coated zinc: 1) All contacts contained within a hermetically sealed chamber:

a) Pushbuttons. b) Selector switches. c) Push-to-test contacts on pilot lights.

2) UL listed and labeled for Class I Division 2 areas. d. Manufacturer: One of the following or equal:

1) Cutler Hammer Type E34. 2) Allen-Bradley Type 800H.

D. Potentiometer and slidewire transmitters: 1. Provide a DC output in proportion to a potentiometer input.


2. Potentiometer input: a. 100 ohms to 100 K ohms. b. Impedance Greater or equal to 1 M ohms. c. Zero turn-up: 80 percent of full scale input. d. Span turn-down: 80 percent of full scale input.

3. Field configurable output: a. Voltage and current: All conventional current loops and voltage control

signals. 4. Accuracy including linearity and hysteresis within 0.1 percent max at

25 degrees Celsius. 5. Operating temperature: 0 degrees Celsius to 55 degrees Celsius. 6. Supply power: 9 to 30 VDC. 7. Manufacturer: The following or equal:

a. Phoenix Contact.

E. Signal isolators and converters: 1. Furnish signal isolators that provide complete isolation of input, output, and

power input: a. Minimum isolation level: 1.5 kilovolts AC/50 hertz for at least 1 minute. b. Adjustable span and zero. c. Accuracy: Within 1.0 percent of span. d. Ambient temperature range: -20 degrees Celsius to +65 degrees Celsius.

2. Manufacturer: One of the following or equal: a. Phoenix Contact MCR Series. b. Acromag 1500, 600T, 800T, Flat Pack or ACR Series. c. Action Instruments Q500 Series or Ultra SlimPakII. d. AGM electronics Model TA-4000.

F. Relays: 1. General:

a. For all types of 120 VAC relays, provide surge protection across the coil of each relay.

b. For all types of 24 VDC relays, provide a free-wheeling diode across the coil of each relay.

2. General purpose: a. Magnetic control relays. b. NEMA Type A300 rated:

1) 300 volts. 2) 8 Amps continuous (minimum). 3) 7,200 volt-amperes make. 4) 720 volt-amperes break.

c. Plug-in type. d. LED indication for energization status. e. Coil voltages: As required for the application. f. Minimum poles: DPDT. g. Touch safe design: All connection terminals to be protected against

accidental touch. h. Enclose each relay in a clear plastic heat and shock-resistant dust cover. i. Quantity and type of contact shall be as indicated on the Drawings or as

needed for system compatibility. j. Relays with screw-type socket terminals.


k. Provide additional (slave/interposing) relays when the following occurs: 1) The number or type of contacts shown exceeds the contact capacity

of the specified relays. 2) Higher contact rating is required in order to interface with starter

circuits or other equipment. l. DIN rail mounting on 35 millimeters rail. m. Ice cube type relays with retainer clips to secure relay in socket. n. Integrated label holder for device labeling. o. Manufacturer: One of the following or equal:

1) Potter and Brumfield Type KUMP. 2) Eaton D5PF 3) IDEC RR series. 4) Allen-Bradley Type 700 H Series. 5) Square D Type K.

3. Latching: a. Magnetic latching control relays. b. NEMA Type B300 rated:

1) 300 volts. 2) 10 Amps continuous. 3) 3,600 volt-amperes make. 4) 320 volt-amperes break.

c. Plug-in type. d. DIN rail mounting on 35 millimeters rail. e. Coil voltage: As required for the application. f. Minimum poles: 2PDT; as required for the application plus 1 spare pole. g. Touch safe design: All connection terminals to be protected against

accidental touch. h. Clear cover for visual inspection. i. Provide retainer clip to secure relay in socket. j. Manufacturer: One of the following or equal:

1) Square D type 8501 Type K. 2) IDEC TWTD.

k. Provide relays with push to test and manual override lever. 4. Time delay:

a. Provide time delay relays to control contact transition time. b. Contact rating:

1) 240 volts. 2) 10 Amps continuous. 3) 3,600 volt-amperes make. 4) 360 volt-amperes break.

c. Coil voltage: as required for the application. d. Provide pneumatic or electronic type with on-delay, off-delay, and on/off

delay: 1) For off delay use true power off time delay relays. Where the

required timing range exceeds capability of the off delay relay use signal off delay where power loss will not cause undesirable operation or pneumatic time delay relays.

e. Minimum poles: 2PDT. f. Units include adjustable dial with graduated scale covering the time range

in each case.


g. Minimum timing range: 0.1 seconds to 10 minutes, or as required for the application.

h. Manufacturer: One of the following or equal: 1) IDEC RTE series. 2) Agastat type Series 7000 series (pneumatic). 3) Allen-Bradley type 700HR Series.

G. Terminal blocks: 1. Din rail mounting on 35 mm rail. 2. Suitable for specified AWG wire. 3. Rated for 15 amperes at 600 volts. 4. Screw terminal type. 5. Provide mechanism to prevent wire connection from loosening in

environments where vibration is present. This mechanism shall not cause permanent deformation to the metal body.

6. Finger safe protection for all terminals for conductors. 7. Construction: Polyamide insulation material capable of withstanding

temperature extremes from - 40 degree Celsius to 105 degrees Celsius. 8. Terminals: Plainly identified to correspond with markings on the diagrams:

a. Permanent machine printed terminal identification. 9. Disconnect type field signal conductor terminals with socket/screw for testing. 10. Identify terminals suitable for use with more than 1 conductor. 11. Position:

a. So that the internal and external wiring does not cross. b. To provide unobstructed access to the terminals and their conductors.

12. Provide minimum 25 percent spare terminals. 13. Manufacturer: One of the following or equal:

a. Phoenix Contact UK5 Series. b. Allen-Bradley Series 1492.

14. Wire duct: a. Provide flame retardant plastic wiring duct, slotted with dust cover. b. Type:

1) Wide slot. 2) Narrow slot. 3) Round hole.

c. Manufacturer: The following or equal: 1) Panduit.

H. Surge protection devices: 1. Control panel power:

a. 120-volt control power source: Non-UPS powered: 1) Provide surge protection device (SPD) for panel power entrances:

a) Nominal 120 VAC with a nominal clamping voltage of 200 volts. b) Non-faulting and non-interrupting design. c) A response time of not more than 5 nanoseconds.

2) Control panel power system level protection, non-UPS powered: a) Design to withstand a maximum 10 kA test current of a 8/20 µs

waveform according to IEEE C62.41.1Category C Area. b) For panels receiving power at 120 VAC, provide surge

protection at secondary of main circuit breaker.


c) Provide both normal mode noise protection (line to neutral) and common mode (neutral to ground) surge protection.

d) DIN rail mounting. e) Attach wiring to the SPD by means of a screw type cable-

clamping terminal block: (1) Gas-tight connections. (2) The terminal block: Fabricated of non-ferrous, non-

corrosive materials. f) Visual status indication of MOV status on the input and output

circuits. g) Dry contact rated for at least 250 VAC, 1 Amp for remote status

indication. h) Meeting the following requirements:

(1) Response time: Less than or equal to 100 ns. (2) Attenuation: Greater than or equal to -40 dB at 100 kilovolt-

hertz as determined by a standard 50 ohms insertion test. (3) Safety approvals:

(a) UL 1283 (EMI/RFI Filter). (b) UL 1449 2nd Edition.

i) Manufacturer: One of the following or equal: (1) Phoenix Contact type SFP TVSS/Filter. (2) Liebert Accuvar series. (3) Islatrol.

b. 120-volt control power source: UPS powered. 1) Provide surge protection on the control power source at each panel

containing power supplies, or electronic components including PLCs, I/O, HMI, and digital meters.

2) Location: a) For panels with a UPS, install surge protection ahead of UPS

and maintenance bypass switch. (1) Surge protection is not required for 120 VAC circuits that

are only used for panel lights and receptacles. b) For panels receiving power at 480 VAC, provide surge

protection on the 120 VAC control power transformer secondary. 3) MCOV: 150 VAC. 4) Surge capability (8/20 microsecond wave): 10 kA. 5) Peak let-through: 620V L-N, 850V L-G. 6) Manufacturer: One of the following or equal:

a) Phoenix Contact Plugtrab PT series. b) MTL Surge Technologies MA15 series.

2. Instrument, data and signal line protectors (traditional I/O) – panel mounted: a. Surge protection minimum requirements: Withstand a 10 kA test current of

a 8/20 µs waveform in accordance with IEEE C62.41.1 Category C Area. b. DIN rail mounting on 35 millimeters rail (except field mounted SPDs). c. SPDs consisting of 2 parts:

1) A base terminal block. 2) A plug protection module:

a) Replacing a plug shall not require the removal of any wires nor interrupt the signal.

b) Base and plug coded to accept only the correct voltage plug. d. SPD Manufacturer: One of the following or equal:


1) Phoenix Contact Plugtrab Series. 2) Bournes Series 1800.

3. Instrument, data and signal line protectors (traditional I/O)– field mounted: a. Surge protection minimum requirements: Withstand a minimum 10 kA test

current of a 8/20 µs waveform in accordance with IEEE C62.41.1 Category C Area.

b. Manufacturer: One of the following or equal: 1) Plugtrab PT Series 2) MTL TP48 Series.

I. Power supplies: 1. Design power supply systems so that either the primary or backup supply can

be removed, repaired, and returned to service without disrupting the system operation.

2. Convert 120 VAC to 24 volt DC or other DC voltages required or as required for the application.

3. Provide backup 24 VDC power supply units to automatically supply the load upon failure of the primary supply.

4. Provide power supply arrangement that is configured with several modules to supply adequate power in the event of a single module failure: a. Provide Automatic switchover upon module failure. b. Alarm contacts monitored by the PLC.

5. Sized to provide 40 percent excess rated capacity. 6. UL 508C listed to allow full rated output without de-rating. 7. Provide fuse or short-circuit protection. 8. Provide a minimum of 1 set of dry contacts configured to change state on

failure for monitoring and signaling purposes. 9. Output regulation: Within 0.05 percent for a 10 percent line change or a 50

percent load change: a. With remote voltage sensing.

10. Operating temperature range: 0 degrees Celsius to 50 degrees Celsius. 11. Touch safe design: All connection terminals to be protected against accidental

touch. 12. DIN rail mounting on 35 millimeters rail. 13. Provide self-protecting power supplies with a means of limiting DC current in

case of short circuit. 14. Manufacturer: One of the following or equal:

a. Phoenix Contact Quint series. b. IDEC PS5R series. c. Sola. d. Acopian. e. PULS.

J. Intrinsic safety barriers: 1. Transformer isolated barrier:

a. Containing a transformer to provide complete: 1) Isolation between the safe and hazardous areas for loop powered

devices. 2) 3-way isolation between the safe area, hazardous area and power

supply powered devices. b. Resistor for current limitation.


c. Fuses for short circuit protection. d. Provide barriers with pluggable connectors that are coded for easy

replacement. e. Transmission error shall be less than or equal to 0.1 percent of full scale. f. DIN rail mounted on 35 millimeters DIN rail. g. Approvals:

1) FM. 2) 2) UL 913.

2. Types: a. Switch isolators:

1) Designed and approved for use with discrete inputs. 2) Supply power: 20 to 30 VDC. 3) Output to track input. 4) LED in the cover to indicate the status of the input. 5) Selector switch to change the logic of the input. 6) Input: Dry contact. 7) Output: SPDT relay.

b. Transmitter and converters for use with 4 to 20 milliamperes signals without Hart® communications capability: 1) Designed and approved for use with 4 to 20 milliamperes analog

signals. 2) Designed for powering 2 and/or 3 wire transmitters in hazardous

locations and repeating and/or generating the current to the safe area.

3) Supply voltage: 20 to 30 VDC. c. Transmitter and converters for use with 4 to 20 milliamperes signals with

Hart® communications capability: 1) Designed and approved for use with 4 to 20 milliamperes analog

signals. 2) Designed for powering 2 and/or 3 wire transmitters in hazardous

locations and repeating and/or generating the current to the safe area.

3) Transfer digital signals from the hazardous area to the safe area. 4) Complete bi-directional communication between a smart transmitter

located in the field and the suitable equipment located in the safe area.

5) Supply voltage: 20 to 30 VDC. 3. Manufacturer: One of the following or equal:

a. Phoenix Contact ME Series. b. Pepperl + Fuchs.

K. Starters: 1. Magnetic motor starters:

a. As specified in Section 16422 – Motor Starters.

L. Variable frequency drives: 1. As specified in Section 16263 – Variable Frequency Drives 0.5-100

Horsepower.

M. Limit switches: 1. NEMA Type 4X.


2. AC contact rating 120 volts, 10 A. 3. DC contact rating 125 volts, 0.4 A. 4. Provide robust actuation mechanism not prone to degradation. 5. Provide complete actuator mechanism with all required hardware. 6. Allows for contact opening even during contact weld condition. 7. UL approved. 8. Operating temperature range: -18 degrees to +110 degrees Celsius (0

degrees to 230 degrees Fahrenheit). 9. Manufacturer: One of the following or equal:

a. Allen-Bradley 802. b. Honeywell HDLS. c. Omron D4. d. Eaton E47, E49, E50. e. ABB equal.

N. Current Switches: a. Operate from 120 VAC supply voltage. b. 1 normally open and normally closed contacts. c. Adjustable current setting. d. Manufacturer:

1) Zelio RM35.

O. Isolation Transformer: 1. An isolation transformer shall be provided for all control panels as indicated on

the Drawings. a. Minimum size: 3kVA. b. Shielded. c. Low noise. d. Mounted outside of the control enclosure when indicated on the Drawings.

2. The panel lights, convenience receptacle and environmental controls shall not be powered from the isolation transformer.

3. Manufacturer: One of the following: a. Acme T-3-53043-S. b. General Electric equivalent. c. Jefferson equivalent.

P. Ethernet switches: 1. Unmanaged Ethernet Switches:

a. Manufacturers - One of the following: 1) Phoenix Contact 2891673. 2) Cisco equivalent. 3) N-Tron equivalent. 4) Approved equal.

b. Properties: 1) Power supply:

a) Provide redundant power supplies. b) 24 VDC power supply. c) Alarm output indicating loss of power supply.

2) Performance: a) 10/100/1000, Full/half-Duplex. b) MDI/MDI-X Auto-sensing.


3) Environment: a) Operating Temperature Range: -13 to 167 Degrees Fahrenheit. b) Humidity: 15 to 95 percent, non-condensing.

4) Connector type: a) Copper: RJ-45.

5) Mounting: a) Din Rail.

2.06 ACCESSORIES


B. Provide panels with an inside protective pocket to hold the panel Drawings. Ship panels with 1 copy of accepted Shop Drawings including, but not limited to, schematic diagram, connection diagram, and layout drawing of control wiring and components in a sealed plastic bag stored in the panel drawing pocket.

C. Provide 15-inch floor stands or legs where needed or as indicated on the Drawings.

D. Provide a folding shelf for enclosures that contain programmable controllers. The shelf shall be mounted on the inside surface of the door, capable of supporting a laptop computer.

E. Provide nameplate to each panel as indicated on the Drawings: 1. Provide as specified in Section 16075 – Electrical Identification on all internal

and external instruments and devices. 2. Provide a nameplate with the following markings that is plainly visible after

installation: a. Manufacturer’s name, trademark, or other descriptive marking by which

the organization responsible for the panel can be identified. b. Supply voltage, phase, frequency, and full-load current. c. Power Source or Circuit ID. d. Short-circuit current rating of the panel based on one of the following:

1) Short-circuit current rating of a listed and labeled assembly. 2) Short-circuit current rating established utilizing an approved method.

3. Provide enclosures with a flange mounted disconnect that is interlocked with the doors.

F. Provide a window kit where indicated on the Drawings. The window shall meet the following requirements: 1. Safety plate glass. 2. Secured by rubber locking seal. 3. Allow full viewing of devices issuing visual process data or diagnostics.

G. Lighting: 1. Provide 1 luminaire for each section, on the interior of the panel, spaced

evenly along the top-front of the enclosure door opening(s): a. Covered or guarded. b. Provide On-Off door-activated switches where indicated on the Drawings.


c. Provide LED lamp for indoor enclosures: 1) Provide additional fixtures for every 36 inches of width.

H. Receptacles: 1. Provide 1 duplex receptacle located every 4 feet of enclosure width, spaced

evenly along the back mounting panels. 2. GFCI, 125-volt, single-phase, 15-amp style plug. 3. Provide circuit breaker or fuse to limit receptacle draw to 5 amperes.

I. Grounding: 1. Provide the following:

a. Grounding strap between enclosure doors and the enclosure. b. Equipment grounding conductor terminals. c. Provide equipment ground bus with lugs for connection of all equipment

grounding wires. d. Bond multi-section panels together with an equipment grounding

conductor or an equivalent grounding bus. 2. Identify equipment grounding conductor terminals with the word “GROUND,”

the letters “GND” or the letter “G,” or the color green. 3. Signal (24 VDC) Grounding: Terminate each drain wire of a signal (shielded)

cable to a unique grounding terminal block, or common ground bus at the end of the cable as shown on the Loop Drawings.

4. Ensure the continuity of the equipment grounding system by effective connections through conductors or structural members.

5. Design so that removing a device does not interrupt the continuity of the equipment grounding circuit.

6. Provide an equipment-grounding terminal for each incoming power circuit, near the phase conductor terminal.

7. Size ground wires in accordance with NEC and UL Standards, unless noted otherwise.

8. Connect all exposed, noncurrent-carrying conductive parts, devices, and equipment to the equipment grounding circuit.

9. Connect the door stud on the enclosures to an equipment- grounding terminal within the enclosure using an equipment- bonding jumper.

10. Bond together all control panels both remote and local, processor racks, and conductive enclosures of power supplies and connect to the equipment grounding circuit to provide a common ground reference.

J. Provide sunshades for outdoor installations.

2.07 FINISHES

A. Finishes: 1. Metallic (non-stainless):

a. Metal surfaces of panels shall be prepared by chemical cleaning and mechanical abrasion in accordance with the finish manufacturer’s recommendations to achieve a smooth, well-finished surface.

b. Scratches or blemishes shall be filled before finishing. One coat of zinc phosphate shall be applied per the manufacturer’s recommended dry film thickness, and allowed to dry before applying the finish coat.


c. Finish coat shall be a baked polyester urethane powder, aliphatic air-dry polyurethane, or epoxy enamel to meet NEMA rating specified application.

d. Exterior of enclosures located outdoors shall be UV resistant polyester powder coating. Total dry film thickness shall be 3 mils, minimum.

2. Stainless steel: a. Stainless enclosures shall be provided with a number 4 brushed finish -

not painted.

B. Colors: 1. Exterior color of panels mounted indoors shall be manufacturer’s standard light

gray. 2. Exterior of panels mounted outdoors shall be manufacturer’s standard white. 3. Panel interiors shall be manufacturer’s standard white.


A. As specified in 17050, Basic Measurement and Control Instrumentation Materials and Methods.

B. Factory calibrate each instrument with a minimum 3-point calibration or according to manufacturer’s standard at a facility that is traceable to the NIST. 1. Submit calibration data sheets to the Engineer at least 30 days before

shipment of the instruments to the project site.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine the installation location for the instrument and verify that the instrument will work properly when installed. 1. Notify the Engineer promptly if any installation condition does not meet the

instrument manufacturer’s recommendations or specifications.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install enclosures so that their surfaces are plumb and level within within 1/8 inch over the entire surface of the panel; anchor securely to wall and structural supports at each corner, minimum. Direct attachment to dry wall is not permitted.

B. Install the enclosure per guidelines and submitted installation instructions to meet the seismic requirements at the project site.

C. Provide floor stand kits for wall-mount enclosures larger than 48 inches high.

D. Provide 3-1/2 inch high concrete housekeeping pads for free-standing enclosures.

E. Install gasket and sealing material under panels with floor slab cutouts for conduit:

F. Undercoat floor mounted panels.


G. Provide a full size equipment-grounding conductor in accordance with NEC included with the power feeder. Terminate to the incoming power circuit-grounding terminal.

H. All holes for field conduits, etc. shall be cut in the field, there shall be no additional holes, factory cut holes, or hole closers allowed. Incorrect holes, additional holes, or miss-cut holes shall require that the entire enclosure be replaced.

I. Control panels that are adjacent to motor control centers shall be fully wired to the motor control centers using wireways integral to the motor control center or additional conduits as needed. These interconnections are not shown or reflected on the conduit schedule, but shall be shown on the Loop Drawings prepared by the Contractor.

J. Provide individually fused analog input module points with blown fuse indicator lights, mounted external of the module on the output terminal strip.



3.04 CLEANING


3.05 PROTECTION


END OF SECTION

Schedules: I/O List 17903-1 11487A10 pw://Carollo/Documents/Client/OR/Clean Water Services/11487A10/Specifications/17903 (Bidset) April 2021 - BID

SECTION 17903

SCHEDULES: I/O LIST

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. The I/O list is not a take-off list. Additional information is as indicated on the Drawings and specified in the Contract Documents. Where any discrepancies between this list and the P&ID drawings arise, the P&ID shall govern.

B. Abbreviations used in the I/O list are defined on the Drawings.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not used.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 I/O LIST

A. I/O list attached.

B. Use the descriptions on the I/O list for development of shop drawings.

END OF SECTION

PLC DRAWING TAG TYPE DESCRIPTION

PLC-9 640-I-101 640LI3411 AI SECONDARY EFFLUENT PUMP STATION - LEVEL INDICATION NO.1

PLC-9 640-I-101 640LI3412 AI SECONDARY EFFLUENT PUMP STATION - LEVEL INDICATION NO.2

PLC-9 N/A 650FI2801 AI UV REACTOR NO.1 - FLOW INDICATION




PLC-9 650-I-101 650FI2805 AI UV REACTOR NO.5 - FLOW INDICATION

PLC-9 N/A 650OPW2801A DO UV REACTOR NO.1 INLET VALVE - CLOSE COMMAND

PLC-9 N/A 650CLW2801A DO UV REACTOR NO.1 INLET VALVE - OPEN COMMAND

PLC-9 N/A 650RE2801A DI UV REACTOR NO.1 INLET VALVE - REMOTE

PLC-9 N/A 650OP2801A DI UV REACTOR NO.1 INLET VALVE - CLOSED

PLC-9 N/A 650CL2801A DI UV REACTOR NO.1 INLET VALVE - OPENED

PLC-9 N/A 650OPW2801B DO UV REACTOR NO.1 OUTLET VALVE - CLOSE COMMAND

PLC-9 N/A 650CLW2801B DO UV REACTOR NO.1 OUTLET VALVE - OPEN COMMAND

PLC-9 N/A 650RE2801B DI UV REACTOR NO.1 OUTLET VALVE - REMOTE

PLC-9 N/A 650OP2801B DI UV REACTOR NO.1 OUTLET VALVE - CLOSED

PLC-9 N/A 650CL2801B DI UV REACTOR NO.1 OUTLET VALVE - OPENED




























Clean Water Services - Forest Grove UV Project

Specification 17903 - I/O List


Page 1 of 2

Clean Water Services - Forest Grove UV Project





PLC-9 650-I-101 650OPW2805A DO UV REACTOR NO.5 INLET VALVE - CLOSE COMMAND

PLC-9 650-I-101 650CLW2805A DO UV REACTOR NO.5 INLET VALVE - OPEN COMMAND

PLC-9 650-I-101 650RE2805A DI UV REACTOR NO.5 INLET VALVE - REMOTE

PLC-9 650-I-101 650OP2805A DI UV REACTOR NO.5 INLET VALVE - CLOSED

PLC-9 650-I-101 650CL2805A DI UV REACTOR NO.5 INLET VALVE - OPENED

PLC-9 650-I-101 650OPW2805B DO UV REACTOR NO.5 OUTLET VALVE - CLOSE COMMAND

PLC-9 650-I-101 650CLW2805B DO UV REACTOR NO.5 OUTLET VALVE - OPEN COMMAND

PLC-9 650-I-101 650RE2805B DI UV REACTOR NO.5 OUTLET VALVE - REMOTE

PLC-9 650-I-101 650OP2805B DI UV REACTOR NO.5 OUTLET VALVE - CLOSED

PLC-9 650-I-101 650CL2805B DI UV REACTOR NO.5 OUTLET VALVE - OPENED

PLC-9 650-I-102 650OPW2812 DO PLANT DISCHARGE OUTFALL VALVE - CLOSE COMMAND

PLC-9 650-I-102 650CLW2812 DO PLANT DISCHARGE OUTFALL VALVE - OPEN COMMAND

PLC-9 650-I-102 650RE2812 DI PLANT DISCHARGE OUTFALL VALVE - REMOTE

PLC-9 650-I-102 650OP2812 DI PLANT DISCHARGE OUTFALL VALVE - CLOSED

PLC-9 650-I-102 650CL2812 DI PLANT DISCHARGE OUTFALL VALVE - OPENED

PLC-9 650-I-102 650OPW2813 DO PLANT DISCHARGE VFW VALVE - CLOSE COMMAND

PLC-9 650-I-102 650CLW2813 DO PLANT DISCHARGE VFW VALVE - OPEN COMMAND

PLC-9 650-I-102 650RE2813 DI PLANT DISCHARGE VFW VALVE - REMOTE

PLC-9 650-I-102 650OP2813 DI PLANT DISCHARGE VFW VALVE - CLOSED

PLC-9 650-I-102 650CL2813 DI PLANT DISCHARGE VFW VALVE - OPENED

PLC-9 650-I-103 650FI3403 AI PLANT WATER PUMP STATION - FLOW INDICATION

PLC-9 650-I-103 650FAIL3403 DI PLANT WATER STRAINER - FAIL

PLC-9 650-I-104 640AI3413 AI SECONDARY EFFLUENT PUMP STATION - TURBIDITY INDICATION

PLC-9 650-I-104 650AI2810 AI PLANT DISCHARGE - UVT INDICATION

PLC-9 650-I-104 650FC2814 AO PLANT DISCHARGE SAMPLER - FLOW PACE

PLC-9 650-I-104 650AI2818 AI PLANT DISCHARGE - pH INDICATION

END OF SECTION


Page 2 of 2